/




3 U. S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

IN THE WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

FOR WOOD AND MANUFACTURES THEREOF

INCLUDING PAPER AND PAPER PRODUCTS

MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATION No. 79

OCTOBER 5, 1927

NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS

George K. Burgess, Director

PRICE, $1.50 Sold only by the Superintendent of Documents, IT. S. Government Printing Office Washington, D. C. UNITED STATES

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE

WASHINGTON

1927
THIS VOLUME represents the first attempt on the

part of the Department of Commerce to collect and

publish the substance of the standards and specifications in the wood-using industries formulated by the national technical societies, the trade associations having national recognition, or other organizations which speak for industry or with the authority of the Federal Government as a whole.

Criticisms and suggestions are desired from all inter- ested persons, so that the presentation of the information

concerning the nationally recognized specifications may be

made most nearly universally satisfactory and that the col- lection of existing specifications and classification thereof

may be kept as complete, accurate, and up to date as

possible. All recommendations for improvement received

will be given careful consideration when future editions are issued.

II
LETTER OF SUBMITTAL

Department of Commerce,

National Bureau of Standards,

Washington, June 17, 1927.

Sir: I have the honor to submit herewith for publication the manuscript for a compilation relating to "Standards and Specifications in the Wood-Using Industries."

In conformity to the plans outlined by you in 1923 a review has been made of the

standards, specifications, simplifications, and testing methods in use in this country.

The advisory board, composed of official representatives of 14 national organizations

interested in the preparation, unification, and utilization of specifications, recommended

that the material published as a result of this review be broken into two distinct parts, one

part to consist of an index of existing specifications with such explanatory matter as might

be necessary to elucidate the scope of each specification, and the other part to contain

copies of actual specifications (or abstracts) instead of merely titles. In 1925 the National Directory of Commodity Specifications was issued as the first part just referred to. The present compilation represents the beginning of the other part.

It is the first of a series of publications dealing with the standards and specifications in

various industries, to be issued as rapidly as conditions will permit.

By giving the substance of such standards and specifications as can be considered

nationally recognized, the progress thus far made in standardization and simplification is pictured. By indicating the important commodities for which no nationally recognized

specifications are as yet available, the lines along which standardization and simplification

work might well be undertaken by the interested branches of the wood-using industries are shown.

Respectfully,

George K. Burgess,

Director, Bureau of Standards.

Hon. Herbert Hoover,

Secretary of Commerce.

in
I
CONTENTS

Introduction. 400-409 TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD

Class No.

400. 400. 400. 1 400. 11

400. 12

400. 13

400. 14

400. 2

400. 20

400. 21

400. 22

400. 23

400. 24

400. 25

400. 26

400. 27

400. 28

400. 3

400. 30

400. 31

400. 32

400. 33

400. 34

400. 35

400. 36

400. 37

400. 38

400. 39

400. 4

400. 40

400. 41

400. 42

400. 43

400. 5

401.

401. 1 401. 10

401. 11

401. 12

401. 13

401. 14

401. 15

401. 16

401. 17

401. 18

401. 19

Subject General items relating to lumber

Lumber standardization Physical analysis of lumber

Descriptions of lumber

Properties and uses of lumber. _ Tests of lumber

Inspection of lumber

Softwood grading rules General items

Cedar grading rules Cypress grading rules Fir grading rules Hemlock grading rules Larch and tamarack grading

rules Pine grading rules Redwood grading rules Spruce grading rules Hardwood grading rules General items

Basswood grading rules Birch grading rules Gum grading rules Hickory grading rules Mahogany grading rules Maple grading rules . Oak grading rules Walnut and butternut grading

rules Grading rules for other hard- woods

Preservative treatment of wood__

Definitions and standards

Preservative solutions Pressure processes (oil treat- ment; oil-salt treatment; salt treatment)

Brush and open-tank treatment

processes

Fire-retarding treatment of wood_

Raw and hewn timbers

Railroad ties General items

Cedar ties Chestnut ties Cypress ties Fir ties Oak ties Pine ties Redwood ties Walnut ties Miscellaneous specifications for

ties ,

Page Class No.

1

ii

4.01 9

71 401 91

*7

I 401 99

7 ^tUl. 4.01 93Z6

1 Q 401 till. 94A'i.

1 Q 401 9^1 99 401 9fi 99 401 3

9fi AC\-\ OA

OQZo AC\\ Q1 4U1. ol OQ 4U1. 6A

on AC\~\ QQ 4U1. oo

401. 34

30 401. 35 OU 401 3fi -±U1. OU

38 401. 37

38 401. 4 40 401. 40 40 401. 41 45 401. 42

45 401. 43

46 401. 44

47 Am1U±. ak40

48 401. 46

50 401. 47

51 401 4Q

52 1U1. 4U1. 52 402. 57 402. 57

402. 1 60

402. 2

64 402. 3

402. 4 72 402. 41 76 402. 42

77 402. 43

77 402. 5 77 402. 51 80 402. 52

81 402. 6 81

81 402. 7 82 402. 8 82 402. 9 82 403. 82 403. 1 403. 2 82

Subject Raw and hewn timbers—Continued.

Posts Cedar posts

Chestnut posts

Cypress posts Locust posts

Oak posts

Pine posts

Poles, hewn and sawn

General items

Cedar poles

Chestnut poles

Cypress poles Fir poles

Oak poles

Pine poles

Redwood poles

Piling, hewn and sawn

General items

Cedar piling

Chestnut piling

Cypress piling Fir piling

Oak piling

Pine piling

Redwood piling

Miscellaneous specifications for piling

Ships' knees Cordwood

Rough lumber

General items

Sawn stakes and cross arms

Fencing, guardrails, scaffolds, and

false work

Blocks for pavements and floors. _ Yard lumber

Strips

Boards, including box lumber.

Dimension lumber

Laths and shingles

Laths

Shingles Structural timbers and shop

lumber

Softwood lumber specifications __ Hardwood lumber specifications. _ Miscellaneous sawn lumber

Surfaced and worked lumber

Dressed lumber

Matched, ship-lapped, and pat- terned lumber

Page IX

Page 82

82

8383

83

83

83

8383

83

86

8787

8787

87

87

87

88

89

89

899090

92

9294

110

124

124

128

131

131 131 131

131

131 131 V
CONTENTS

410-419 LUMBER FOR BUILDI

Class No. Subject Page 410. General items 132

411. Yard lumber for general building purposes 132

411. General items 132

411. 1 Siding 142

411. 2 Flooring 158

411. 20 General items 158

411. 21 Cedar flooring 158

411. 22 Cypress flooring 158

411. 23 Fir and Douglas fir flooring. _ _ 159

411. 24 Hemlock flooring 160

411. 25 Maple flooring 161

411. 26 Oak flooring 162

411. 27 Pine flooring 162

411. 28 Spruce flooring 167

411. 29 Miscellaneous flooring 167

411. 3 Ceiling lumber 171

411. 4 Partitions, moldings, finish, and

baseboards 179

411. 41 Partitions 179 411.42 Moldings 182

411. 43 Finish 194

411. 44 Baseboards 201

411. 5 Ship-lap 201

411. 6 Dressed and matched 205

411. 7 Roofing 206

411. 8 Shelving 209

411. 9 Miscellaneous building lumber 209

412. Structural timbers and bridges 210

412. General items 210

412. 1 Timbers 233

412. 2 Bridges 237

G AND FACTORY USE

Class No. Subject Page 413. Shop or factory lumber _ 237

413. General items 237

413. 1 Tank stock 240

413. 2 Car stock 241

413. 20 General items 241

413. 21 Fir car stock 242

413. 22 Mahogany car stock 247

413. 23 Oak car stock 248

413. 24 Pine car stock 250

413. 25 Spruce car stock 255

413. 26 Hemlock car stock 255

413. 29 Miscellaneous car stock 255

413. 3 Airplane stock 256

413. 31 Softwood airplane stock 256

413. 32 Hardwood airplane stock 257

413. 4 Ship stock 257

413. 5 Stock for handles, furniture, and

vehicles 258

413. 51 Handle stock 258

413. 52 Veneer and plywood 258

413. 53 Other furniture stock 264

413. 54 Wagon and vehicle stock 265

413. 6 Pattern stock 271

413. 7 Cooperage stock 271

413. 8 Door, window, and millwork lumber 271

413. 9 Miscellaneous shop and factory

lumber 274

414. Raw cork, rattan, and reed 275

414. 1 Cork 275

414. 2 Rattan 275

414.3 Reed 275

420-429 MANUFACTURES OF WOOD (EXCEPT FURNITURE)

421. Cooperage, barrels, boxes, and

shooks 276

421. General items 276

421. 1 Tight staves 278

421. 2 Slack staves 279

421. 3 Headings and hoops 280

421. 4 Shooks 284

421. 5 Boxes, barrels, casks, and hogsheads 286

422. Baskets 287

423. Millwork 288

423. General items 288

423. 1 Doors 289

423. 2 Sash 289

423. 3 Slat blinds 289

423. 4 Slats 289

423. 5 Pickets and palings 289

423. 9 Miscellaneous millwork 290

424. Tanks 290

425. Manufactures of cork 290

425. 1 Stoppers (cork) 290

425. 2 Cork board or compressed cork. 290

Manufactures of cork—Continued.

425. 3 Life preservers, belts, and buoy 290

rings (cork) 291

426. Vehicles 291

427. Electrical equipment 291

428. Handles, oars, and paddles 295

428. 1 Handles for agricultural imple- ments 295

428. 2 Handles for tools 295

428. 3 Oars and paddles 297

429. Other manufactures of wood 297

429. 1 Woodenware (dishes and kitchen

utensils) 297

429. 2 Tools 297

429. 3 Pole brackets and steps 297

429. 4 Ladders 297

429. 5 Rollers 297

429. 6 Stakes 297

429. 7 Wooden insulators and insulator pins 297

429. 8 Wheels 297

429. 9 Wood products not elsewhere

classified 297

VI
CONTENTS

430-439 FURNITUR]

Clsas No. Subject Page 431. Household furniture (except chairs) _ 300

431. 1 Bedroom furniture 300

431. 11 Beds 300

431.12 Bureaus and chiffoniers 300

431. 13 Cots_ 300

431. 14 Wardrobes 302

431. 2 Nursery furniture 302

431. 3 Bathroom furniture 302

431. 4 Dining-room furniture 302

431. 5 Kitchen furniture 302

431. 51 Kitchen tables 302

431. 52 Refrigerators 302

431. 6 Library furniture 304

431. 61 Bookcases 304

432. Lawn and porch furniture 304

433. Camp furniture 304

434. Hospital furniture 304

435. Office furniture 304

435. 1 Bookcases 304 470-479 PAPER (except

470. General items 311

470. 1 Definitions and classification of paper 311 470.2 Sizes of paper 311

470. 3 Tests of paper 311

471. Absorbent paper 324

471. 1 Blotting paper 324

471. 2 Filter paper 325

471. 3 Towelings 325

472. Boards 325

472. General items 325

472. 1 Combination 328

472. 11 Chip 328

472. 12 Manila board 328

472. 13 News board 328

472. 14 Pulp board 328

472. 15 Strawboard 328

472. 2 Pasted 328

472. 21 Pasted chip 328

472. 22 Sheet-lined chip 328

472. 23 Sheet-lined straw 328

472. 24 Wall board 328

472. 3 Solid 328

472. 31 Chip 328

472. 32 Cloth board 328

472. 33 Friction board 328

472. 34 Jute board 328

472. 35 ' Leatherboard 328

472. 36 Pressboard 328

472. 37 Pulpboard 328

472. 38 Strawboard 328

472. 9 Miscellaneous boards 329

472. 91 Fish paper 329

472. 92 Fuller board 329

472. 93 Fiber board 329

472. 94 Millboard 329

473. Building paper 329

473. 1 Asbestos 329

473. 2 Felts 329

3 OF WOOD

Class No. Subject Page

Office furniture—Continued.

435. 2 Chairs and stools 304

435. 3 Desks and tables 305

435. 4 Document boxes 307

435. 5 Filing cases and cabinets 307

435. 6 Waste-paper baskets 310

435. 9 Other office furniture 310

436. Store furniture and fixtures 310

437. Church, school, and theater furni- ture 310

438. Chairs 310

438. 1 Dining chairs 310

438. 2 Office chairs 310

438. 3 Folding chairs and camp stools___ 310

438. 4 Wheel chairs 310

439. Other furniture 310

439. 1 Bamboo, rattan, and reed furni- ture (except chairs) 310

439. 2 Screens 310

printed matter)

Building paper—Continued.

473. 3 Thermal insulating paper and

fiber 329

473. 4 Sheathing 329

474. Cardboard 329

474. 1 Blanks 329

474. 11 Nonpasted blanks 329

474. 12 Pasted blanks 329

474. 2 Index bristols 330

474. 3 Mill bristols 330

474. 4 Wedding bristols 330

474. 5 Tag boards 330

475. Cover paper, news paper, and printing paper 331

475. 1 Coated cover paper 331

475. 2 Pasted cover paper 331

475. 3 Uncoated cover paper 331

475. 4 Hanging paper (news) 331

475. 5 Newsprint 331

475. 6 Coated printing paper 331

475. 7 Uncoated printing paper 332

475. 71 Bible paper 332

475. 72 Book paper 332

475. 73 Coating paper 333

475. 74 Mimeograph paper 333

475. 75 Music paper 333

475. 76 Offset paper 334

476. Tissue paper 334

476. 1 Copying tissue 334

476. 2 Industrial tissues 334

476. 21 Carbon paper 334

476. 22 Cigarette paper 335

476. 23 Electrical insulating tissue paper 335

476. 24 Pattern paper 335 476.25 Stereotyping paper ,. 335

476. 3 Sanitary tissues 335

476. 31 Napkins 335

476. 32 Toilet paper 335

VII
CONTENTS

Class No.

476. 4

476. 9

477.

477.

477.

477. 477.

477. 477. 6

477. 7

477. 8

478.

478. 1 478. 11

478. 12

478. 13

478. 14

478. 15

478. 16

Subject Page Tissue paper—Continued.

Tissue wrapping paper 335

Miscellaneous tissue paper 336

Wrapping paper 336 Bogus wrapping paper 336

Manila wrapping paper 336 No. 1 kraft paper 337 No. 2 kraft paper 337

Sanitary wrapping paper 337

Screenings 337

Sulphite wrapping paper 337 Waterproof wrapping paper 337

Writing paper 337

Commercial writing paper 337

Bond writing paper 337

Flat writing paper 339

Ledger paper 339

341

341 Parchment deed paper 341

Linen paper

Papeterie paper.

Class No. Subject Page Writing paper—Continued.

478. 17 Railroad writing paper 341

478. 18 Wedding writing paper 341

478. 19 Miscellaneous commercial

writing paper 341

478. 2 Duplicating paper 341

478. 21 French folio paper 341

478. 22 Manifold paper (includes stencil paper) 341

478. 23 Onionskin paper 342

478. 3 Industrial paper 342

478. 31 Chart and map paper 342

478. 32 Drawing paper 343

478. 33 Safety writing paper 343

478. 34 Sensitizing paper 344

478. 35 Tracing paper 345

479. Miscellaneous specifications for paper 345

479. 1 Transfer paper 345

479. 2 Gummed paper 345

480-489 BOOKS AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER

481. Books and pamphlets 346 I 483. 482. Maps, charts, and music 346 | 484. Lithographic prints. Booklets 346

346

490-499 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD AND PAPER PRODUCTS

491. Containers 347 I 493. Pulleys___

492. Electrical insulating paper 347 | SOCIETIES AND ASSOCIATIONS

347

Technical societies, trade associations, and other organizations issuing standards and specifica- tions in the wood-using industries 348

VIII
INTRODUCTION

In carrying forward a program involving the formulation of nationally acceptable

standards and specifications in the wood-using undustries there are encountered all of the

major problems common to other industries and certain other highly important problems

peculiar to these industries.

The material from which lumber is manufactured is not man-made, and to a large extent both the properties and the dimensions have limits beyond the control of man. The limits are such that the lumber industry has formulated " grading rules" for judging

the suitability of lumber for various purposes rather than quality specifications to be met

by lumber manufacturers.

No little confusion has been created by the lack of uniformity in the grading rules

formulated by the various regional and species associations of the lumber industry and by

the difference in interpretation of these rules by the lumber manufacturers, wholesalers,

and retailers. Not only in quality but also in quantity does lumber standardization present unusual

problems. A piece of lumber in the green state possesses a size, or thickness, markedly

different from that of the same piece some weeks or months after being cut. Moreover,

the manufacturing methods to which lumber must usually be subjected before becoming

suitable for use add to the change in thickness, the final result being that lumber sawed

initially in a green state to 1 inch in thickness, for example, becomes, say, ff inch in

thickness when commercially dried and surfaced. That some such variation in size is unavoidable has been fully recognized in' the "American Lumber Standards" which are rapidly being introduced in all branches of the lumber industry.

The main features of the grading rules and standards actually adopted by the nu- merous lumber manufacturers' associations, technical societies, and consumer organizations

are in good agreement with the finding and recommendation of the Forest Products Laboratory of the United States Department of Agriculture, which has been studying, investigating, and urging lumber standardization for many years. They have been developed

and formulated by a Central Committee on Lumber Standards, representing the whole

industry, organized as the result of general lumber conferences called by Secretary Hoover,

of the United States Department of Commerce.

When revising their grading rules, the lumber manufacturers' associations nave given

full recognition to the American Lumber Standards formulated by the central committee

of the industry. Individual associations have applied the rules to the species of lumber

handled by them, making such minor modifications and additions thereto as seemed

desirable to meet the requirements of the market for their products. Considering the in- numerable possibilities for differences in interpretation, the current rules of the lumber

associations are found to be in remarkably good agreement. Although without judicial

authority the Central Committee on Lumber Standards has been markedly successful in

encouraging the putting into practice of the recommendations which have been indorsed

by the general conferences representing all branches of the trade and the public.

Not in giving a historical summary of the lumber standardization movement, but

rather in showing the present status of that movement and emphasizing the degree of success already attained by the industry in unifying its grading rules and conforming to the

dimensional standards set up within the industry itself, resides the value of the compilation

presented in this volume.

An attempt has been made to include, directly or by adequate reference, the substance

of all standards and specifications in the wood-using industries formulated by the lumber

manufacturers' associations and other trade associations having national recognition; the

IX
INTEODUCTION

national technical societies, including those dealing with lumber and manufactures thereof,

paper, and paper products; and other organizations which speak for industry or with the

authority of the Federal Government as a whole.

Use has been made of the decimal system of classification of wood and paper which was employed in the National Directory of Commodity Specifications. In utilizing this

system advantage has been taken of the opportunity to insert under the proper clas- sification numerals certain important commodities or groups of commodities for which

there might well be, but are not as yet, specifications that can be referred to as nationally

recognized or sponsored by nationally recognized organizations.

x
STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN THE WOODUSING INDUSTRIES

400-409 TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR

PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD

400. GENERAL ITEMS RELATING TO

LUMBER

400.0 LUMBER STANDARDIZATION

American lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. SOFTWOOD LUMBER

In accordance with the unanimous action on December 12 and 13, 1923, April 22, 1924, May 1, 1925, and April 27, 1926, of the general conferences

of representatives of manufacturers, distributers,

wholesalers, retailers, and users of lumber, and

representatives of architects, engineers, and general contractors named herein, the United States Department of Commerce, through the Bureau of Standards, recommends that recognized classifi- cations, nomenclature, basic grades, sizes, description, measurement, tally, shipping provisions, grade

marking, and inspection of lumber be established

as follows: To the extent to which differences in quality of timber, in conditions of manufacture, and in the

uses to which the product is put, will, in practical

application, permit, the basic provisions for the grading of lumber shall be uniform.

LUMBER CLASSIFICATIONS

For the purposes of simplification of sizes and

grades and of equalizing, among species used for similar general purposes, the grades of a similar name, lumber shall be classified by principal uses

into (a) yard lumber, (b) structural timbers, (c) factory

or shop lumber. USE CLASSIFICATION Lumber is the product of the saw and planing

mill not further manufactured than by sawing,

resawing, and passing lengthwise through a standard

planing machine, crosscut to length and matched.

Lumber is classified as (a) yard lumber, (b) struc- tural timbers, and (c) factory or shop lumber. Different grading rules may apply to each class of lumber.

(a) Yard lumber.—Lumber that is less than 6

inches in thickness and is intended for general

ljuilding purposes. The grading of yard lumber is based upon the use of the entire piece.

(b) Structural timbers.—Lumber that is 6 inches

or over in thickness and width. The grading of structural timbers is based upon the strength of the

piece and the use of the entire piece. (See 412.0.)

(c) Factory or shop lumber.—Lumber intended to be cut up for use in further manufacture. It is graded on the basis of the percentage of the area which will produce a limited number of cuttings of a specified, or a given minimum size and quality.

(See 413.0.) SIZE CIASSIFICATIOI

Yard lumber

(a) Strips.—Yard lumber less than 2 inches thick and under 8 inches wide.

(6) Boards.—Yard lumber less than 2 inches

thick, 8 inches or over in width.

(c) Dimension.—All yard lumber except boards,

strips, and timbers; that is, yard lumber 2 inches and under 7 inches thick, and of any width.

Planks : Yard lumber 2 inches and under 4 inches

thick and 8 inches and over wide.

Scantlings: Yard lumber 2 inches and under 6

inches thick and under 8 inches wide. Heavy joists: Yard lumber 4 inches and under 6 inches thick and 8 inches or over wide.

Structural Timbers

(d) Timbers.—Lumber 6 inches or larger in least dimension.

MANUFACTURING CLASSIFICATION Manufactured lumber is classified as (a) rough,

(6) surfaced, and (c) worked.

(a) Rough lumber.—Undressed as it comes from

the saw

(b) Surfaced lumber.—Lumber that is dressed by

running through a planer. It may be surfaced on

one side (SIS), two sides (S2S), one edge (S1E), two edges (S2E), or a combination of sides and

edges, (S1S1E), (S2S1E), (S1S2E), or (S4S).

(c) Worked lumber.—Lumber which has been run

through a matching machine, sticker, or molder. Worked lumber may be (1) matched, (2) shiplapped,

or (3) patterned.

Matched lumber: Lumber that is edge dressed and shaped to make a close tongued and grooved

joint at the edges or ends when laid edge to edge

or end to end. Shiplapped lumber: Lumber that is edge dressed

to make a close rabbetted or lapped joint.

Patterned lumber: Worked lumber that is shaped

to a patterned or molded form. LUMBER INSPECTION PROVISIONS AND SERVICE

^~ Lumber must be accepted on grade in the form in which it is shipped. Any subsequent change in manufacture, millwork, or dry kilning will prohibit

1
400.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

an inspection for the adjustment of claims, except

with the consent of all parties interested.

Official association inspection service for the

inspecting of lumber sold as of standard size and

standard grade shall be available to nonmembers of associations upon request and at a reasonable

charge. In case of complaint on account of the grade or

tally of any shipment of standard size or standard

grade, official association reinspection shall be

available.

Official association inspection service shall not be

required to be furnished for the inspection of "special" grades of lumber (that is, not recognized

in published grading rules), and inspection service

for "special" grades shall be furnished only when

the exact specifications of such grades in writing

are furnished to the inspector.

Where buyers demand, and will pay the cost

thereof, a certificate made by a certified association inspector shall be furnished with each shipment so arranged for. Upon receipt of complaint from the purchaser the

seller shall immediately request the association under whose rules shipment has been made to pro- vide official reinspection or remeasurement, as the

case may be, according to its inspection rules in

effect at the time of execution of contract; and the purchaser shall lend all reasonable assistance to

facilitate the reinspection or remeasurement. The expense of such reinspection or remeasure- ment may be divided between the buyer and seller, or may be borne by either, according to agreement

between them, but the person calling for the rein- spection shall be responsible to the association for the costs thereof. In cases of complaint regarding grade but not

involving measurement (tally), the buyer is re- quired to accept that portion of a shipment of lumber of standard grade or standard size which is up to grade or of standard size as the case may be, holding intact that portion thereof the grade or

size of which is in dispute for official association

inspection; the action on the part of the buyer in accepting and using such portion of the shipment

shall not be construed as his acceptance of the

entire shipment; further, the buyer shall pay in accordance with the terms of sale for that portion

which he accepts, but acceptance by the buyer of a

part of a shipment does not prejudice his just claims on account of any unused material that is alleged

by him to be below standard grade or not of standard

size. The complainant buyer shall hold disputed

material intact, properly protected, for not exceed- ing 60 days, and shall file complaint with seller within 10 days from receipt of shipment.

A shipment shall be considered as of the grade

invoiced if, upon official association reinspection

under the grading and inspection rules under which

the lumber has been graded and sold, 95 per cent

thereof or more is found to be of said grade, the

material below said grade to be accepted by the buyer as of its actual grade. Where the de-grades

are in excess of 5 per cent of the shipment, or where

the de-grades are found upon official reinspection

to be more than one grade lower than the grade

invoiced, the de-grades shall be the property of the

seller. These provisions shall not apply in the

case of specially worked lumber. There shall be created by the lumber manufacturers a central bureau to promote uniformity and

the maintenance of high standards of grading and

inspection of lumber. Each manufacturers' association publishing lumber grading rules and conducting inspection service

shall furnish to such central bureau complete infor- mation descriptive of the plan of operation and

continuous regular reports of its inspection depart- ment.

In order to simplify, coordinate, and, so far as

practicable, unify the methods of inspection, each

such association shall be furnished by such central bureau the plan of operation and the record of performance of the inspection service of each other

association. In pursuance of national responsibility of the lumber industry for the maintenance of agreed

American lumber standards, if, after original association inspection, reinspection, and if necessary

after reinspection, a report thereon of the chief inspector, any complaint involving agreed and published standards of lumber size, or grade, or inspection shall not have been settled, the National

Lumber Manufacturers Association, by agreement

or upon request, will represent the manufacturing

shipper in arrangement for arbitration. The National Lumber Manufacturers Association

will represent, by agreement, the subscribing

regional associations of lumber manufacturers, and

other associations of, or representing, lumber

manufacturers, upon request, in matters involving

the administration of inspection and the mainte- nance of the agreed standards of lumber size and

lumber grade designated as American lumber

standards. The formulation of regulations for the conduct

of inspection to secure the application of the grading

rules published by lumber associations, and the

administration, supervision, and conduct of inspection service, be exclusively by the lumber industry,

and (or) lumber consumers (that is, by the agencies

of the lumber trade, and (or) lumber consumers, and

not by or under the authority, auspices, or direction

of any Government agency or agencies.)

Nationally administered association lumber

inspection, in the sense of a national service to

replace the existing services of regional and other

associations, is not now practicable.

Each association shall undertake to reinspect

lumber for its members, and for nonmembers upon

request.

All grading shall be done by properly supervised

and qualified graders or inspectors. So far as it is within their power, the associations within the lumber industry shall undertake, through

association grades and inspection service, arbitra2
TIMBEK AND OTHEE UNMANUFACTUEED OE PAETLY MANUFACTUEED WOOD

tion, and, if practicable, through grade marking and

otherwise, to maintain for the benefit of the lumberusing public the standards of size and basic grade names and classifications as agreed upon and as published in the association grading and inspection

rules. The associations which make grading rules and

conduct lumber inspection service shall maintain

such size, grade, and inspection standards as may

have been agreed to. Each such association shall assume responsibility

for the maintenance in the manner herein outlined,

by its individual members or subscribers, of said

size standards, basic grade classifications, and

inspection standards. The principle of responsibility of the entire organized lumber industry for the maintenance of agreed

and published size, grade, and inspection standards

is recognized; and for the suitable discharge of such

responsibility the Central Committee on Lumber

Standards or similar suitable agency shall be continued. Lumber manufactured, graded, measured, and

described, as herein provided, shall be considered

American standard lumber. The purchase, sale, or shipment of lumber as American standard is con- strued as involving agreement to submit to official association inspection any complaint involving either standard sizes or standard grades.

Sales contracts should incorporate in substance

the following clause:

Shipment under this contract shall be in accordance with the American Lumber Standards. In the case of shipments made or received under

such contracts exemption from any provision of the American Lumber Standards shall be by special

agreement and the burden of proof thereof shall be

upon person claiming exemption.

NOMENCLATURE OF COMMERCIAL SOFTWOODS

The following standard commercial names for lumber cut from the principal species of softwoods

shall be used in the construction of contracts and in the formulation of lumber-grading rules and the terms of purchase and sale of American standard

lumber. Preferred commercial names are shown in

italic. Standard commercial name Botanical name

Cedars

Alaska cedar _ Chamaecyparis nootkatensis. Eastern red cedar Juniperus virginiana. Incense cedar Libocedrus decurrens. Northern white cedar. __ Thuja occidentalis. Port Orford cedar Chamaecyparis lawsoniana.

Southern white cedar... Chamaecyparis thyoides. Western red cedar. Thuja plicata. Cypress Red cypress v coast type) Taxodium distichum.

Yellow cypress (inland type) Taxodium distichum. White cypress (inland type) Taxodium distichum

400.0

Standard commercial name Botanical name

Douglas fir Douglas fir (coast type) Pseudotsuga taxifolia. Red fir (intermountain

type) Pseudotsuga taxifolia. Red fir (Rocky Mountain type) Pseudotsuga taxifolia. The true firs Alpine fir Abies lasiocarpa. Balsam fir Abies balsamea and Abies fraseri (southern balsam fir)

Golden fir Abies magnifica. Noble fir Abies nobilis.

Silver fir.. Abies amabilis. . White fir Abies concolor and Abies grandis (lowland white fir)

Hemlocks

Eastern hemlock Tsuga canadensis. Mountain hemlock Tsuga mertensiana. West Coast hemlock Tsuga heterophylla. Larch (see also tamarack)

Western larch Larix occidentalis Pines Arkansas soft pine Pinus echinata and taeda.

California white pine... Pinus ponderosa and Pinus jeffreyi (Jeffrey pine). Idaho white pine Pinus monticola. Jack pine Pinus divaricata. Loblolly pine Pinus taeda. Lodgepole pine Pinus contorta. Longleaf pine Pinus palustris. North Carolina pine Pinus taeda and echinata, and Pinus vir- giniana (Virginia pine)

Northern white pine Pinus strobus. Norway pine Pinus resinosa Pond pine Pinus serotina. Pondosa pine Pinus ponderosa.

Shortleaf pine Pinus echinata. Slash pine Pinus caribaea. Southern pine Pinus taeda, palustris, serotina, echinata, and caribaea, and Pinus rigida (pitch

pine), and Pinus glabra (spruce pine). Sugar pine Pinus lambertiana. Redwood

Redwood. Sequoia sempervirens. Spruces

Eastern spruce Picea mariana (black spruce), Picea rubra

(red spruce), and Picea glauca (white

spruce). Engelmann spruce Picea engeimanni and Picea parryana (blue

spruce)

Sitka spruce Picea si tchensis. Tamarack

Tamarack... Larix laricina. STANDARD LUMBER ABBREVIATIONS The following standard lumber abbreviations when used in contracts and other documents arising in the transactions of purchase and sale of American

standard lumber shall be construed as hereinafter provided:

AD Air dried.

a.l All lengths. av Average. av.w Average width.

av.l Average length. a.w All widths. BIS __ Beaded one side.

3
400.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

B2S Beaded two sides. BBS Box bark strips. bd Board.

bd.ft Board foot; that is, an area of 1 square foot by 1 inch thick. bdl___ Bundle.

bdl.bk.s Bundled bark strips. Bev Beveled. B/L Bill of lading.

b.m Board (foot) measure. Btr Better.

c. &f _ {Named port.) Cost and freight to a named port. Term used when the

seller is ready to go farther than the

delivery of his goods upon a vessel and is willing to pay transportation to another port.

c.i.f (Named port.) Cost, insurance, and

freight to a named port. Term

used when the seller desires to quote a price covering the cost of the goods, the marine insurance on

the goods, and all transportation

charges to the point of delivery.

c.i.f.e (Named port.) Cost, insurance,

freight, and exchange to a named

port. This is the same as c. i. f. with the additional provision that the seller guarantees the buyer

against loss due to a decline in the

rate of exchange.

Clg Ceiling.

Clr_ Clear. CM Center matched; that is, the tongue

and groove joints are worked along

the center of the edges of the piece.

Com Common.

Coop Cooperage (stock). Csg Casing.

Ctg Crating.

cu.ft Cubic foot. Cust Custom (sawed).

D&CM Dressed (one or two sides) and center matched.

D&H Dressed and headed; that is, dressed one or two sides and worked to tongue and groove joints on both

the edge and the ends. D&M Dressed and matched; that is, dressed one or two sides and tongued and

grooved on the edges. The match

may be center or standard. D&SM Dressed (one or two sides) and stand- ard matched.

D2S&CM.._ Dressed two sides and center matched.

D2S&M Dressed two sides and (center or standard) matched.

D2S&SM Dressed two sides and standard

matched.

Dim Dimension.

D.S Drop siding.

E Edge.

E&CB1S Edge and center bead one side; sur- faced one or two sides and with a

longitudinal edge and center bead

on a surfaced face. E&CB2S Edge and center bead two sides; all four sides surfaced and with a longi- tudinal edge and center bead on the two faces. ECM Ends center matched.

E&CV1S Edge and center V one side; surfaced one or two sides and with a longi- tudinal edge and center V-shaped

groove on a surfaced face. E&CV2S Edge and center V two sides; all four

sides surfaced and with a longi- tudinal edge and center V-shaped

groove on each of the two faces. EM End matched—either center or standard. ESM _ Ends standard matched.

exp Expert (lumber or timber).

FAS Firsts and seconds—a combined grade

of the two upper grades of hard- woods.

f. a. s. vessel. _ (Named port.) Free alongside vessel

at a named port. Term used when

the seller desires to quote a price

covering delivery of the goods alongside a vessel and within reach of its loading tackle. f.bk Flat back.

fcty Factory (lumber).

F.G Flat grain.

Fig Flooring.

f.o.b (Named shipment point.) Free on

board at a named shipping point.

Term used when the price quoted

applies only to an inland shipping

point and the seller merely undertakes to load the goods on or in cars or lighters furnished by the railroad company serving the industry, or most conveniently located to the

industry, without other designation

as to routing.

f.o.b (Named point.) Freight prepaid to (named point.) Free on board at a named point and freight prepaid to a named point. Term used when the

seller quotes a price including tran- sportation charges to a given point

without assuming responsibility for the goods after obtaining a clean

bill of lading at point of origin. f.o.b (Named point.) Freight allowed to (named point.) Free on board at a named point and freight allowed to a named point. Term used where

the seller wishes to quote a price

from which the buyer may deduct

the cost of transportation to the

point of destination, without the

seller assuming responsibility for the goods after obtaining a clean

bill of lading at the point of origin.

4
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.0

f.o.b. cars... {Named destination point.) Free on

board cars at a named destination

point. Term used when the seller desires to quote a price covering the

transportation of the goods to a

given point, assuming responsibility for loss and/or damage up to that point.

f.o.b. cars___ (Named point.) Free on board cars

at a named point less carload lots. Term used when the goods on which

a price is quoted to a given point

constitutes less than a carload lot. f.o.b (Named port.) Lighterage free. Free on board at a named port with lighter- age free. Term used when seller desires to quote a price which will include the expense of transportation of the goods by rail to the sea- board, including lighterage.

f.o.b. vessel- (Named port.) Free on board vessel at a named port. Term used when

the seller desires to quote a price

covering all expenses up to and

including delivery of the goods upon

a vessel at a named port.

f.o.k Free of knots.

f.o.w First open water. Frm Framing.

ft Foot or feet. Also one accent (')• See Symbols.

ft.b.m Feet board measure.

ft.s.m Feet surface measure. Furn__ Furniture (stock). G.R Grooved roofing.

H.bk _ Hollow back. Hdl Handle (stock). hdwd__ Hardwood.

Hrt Heart. Hrtwd Heartwood.

ls&2s . Ones and twos—a combined grade of the hardwood grades of first and

seconds. Impl Implement (stock). in Inch or inches. Also two accent marks (")• See Symbols.

KD Kiln-dried. k.d . Knocked down.

lbr Lumber.

l.c.1 . Less carload lots. lgth . Length.

lgr Longer.

lin.ft _ Lineal foot; that is, 12 inches. Lng . Lining.

LR Log run. LR,MCO„_ _ Log run, mill culls out. Lth Lath. M . Thousand.

M.b.m _ Thousand (feet) board measure. MCO Mill culls out. Merch Merchantable.

m.l Mixed lengths.

Mldg _ Moulding.

MR Mill run. M.s.m Thousand (feet) surface measure. m.w Mixed widths. • No Number.

Ord Order. P Planed. Pat Pattern. Pky Pecky.

Pin Plain, as plain sawed. Pn I_ Partition. Prod Production.

Qtd Quartered—When referring to hard- woods.

rdm Random.

res Resawed.

Rfg Roofing. Rfrs Roofers.

rip Ripped.

r.l Random lengths.

rnd Round.

R.Sdg Rustic siding. r.w Random widths. S&E Surfaced one side and one edge.

S1E Surfaced one edge.

S2E Surfaced two edges.

SIS Surfaced one side. S2S Surfaced two sides. S1S1E Surfaced one side and one edge.

S2S1E Surfaced two sides and one edge.

S1S2E Surfaced one side and two edges.

S4S Surfaced four sides. S4SCS Surfaced four sides with a calking seam on each edge.

S&CM Surfaced (one or two sides) and center matched.

S&M Surfaced and matched; that is, sur- faced one or two sides and tongued

and grooved on the edges. The

match may be center or standard. S&SM Surfaced (one of two sides) and

standard matched.

S2S&CM Surfaced two sides and center matched.

S2S&M Surfaced two sides and (center or standard) matched.

S2S&SM Surfaced two sides and standard

matched.

Sap Sapwood.

SB Standard bead. Sd Seasoned. Sdg Siding.

Sel Select.

S. E. Sdg Square edge siding.

s.f Surface foot; that is, an area of one

square foot. Sftwd Softwood.

Sh.D Shipping dry.

Ship Shipment or shipments.

Ship Shiplap. s.m Surface measure. SM Standard matched.

smkd Smoked (dried). smk.stnd Smoke stained.

5
400.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

s.n.d Sap no defect. snd Sound.

sq Square.

Sq.E.&S Square edged and sound.

sqrs Squares.

Std Standard. stnd Stained.

stk Stock. Stp Stepping.

S.W Sound wormy.

Symbols: "—inch or inches, as 12".

'—foot or feet, as 12'. x—by, as a 6 x 8 timber.

4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 8/4, etc. =l inch, 134

inches, 1^ inches, 2 inches, etc., when referring to the size of lumber. T&G Tongued and grooved.

TB&S Top, bottom, and sides. Tbrs Timbers.

VIS V one side; that is, a longitudinal

V-shaped groove on one face of a

piece of lumber. V2S V two sides; that is, a longitudinal

V-shaped groove on two faces of a

piece of lumber. V.G Vertical grain.

wal Wider, all lengths.

Wth Width.

wdr Wider.

Wgn Wagon (stock). wt Weight.

American Hardwood Lumber Industry.—Central Committee on Lumber Standards, nomenclature of commercial domestic hardwoods, 1927. NOMENCLATURE OF COMMERCIAL DOMESTIC

HARDWOODS

The following standard commercial names for lumber cut from the principal species, or groups of

species, of domestic hardwoods shall be used in the

construction of contracts and in the formulation of lumber-grading rules and the terms of purchase

and sale of American standard lumber. Lumber

cut from those species, or groups of species, marked

with an asterisk (*) may be further designated as to region of production by the prefixes Appalachian,

Northern, Southern, or Western.

Standard commercial Botanical name name

Red alder Alnus rubra. A. rhombifolia. Aspen Populus tremuloides.

P. grandidentata.

* White ash_ Fraxinus americana. F. biltmoreana.

F. pennsylvanica lanceolata. F. pennsylvanica.

F. quadrangulata.

Black ash Fraxinus nigra. Oregon ash Fraxinus oregona. Basswood Tilia glabra. T. heterophylla. Beech Fagus grandifolia. Birch Betula lutea. B. lenta. B. nigra.

Standard commeicial Botanical name name

Paper birch Betula papyrifera. B. populifolia. Red birch. _. Heartwood of the above.

Birches. Alaska birch Betula kenaica. Buckeye. Aesculus octandra. A. glabra. Butternut Juglans cinera. Catalpa Catalpa speciosa. Cherry... Prunus serotina.

* Chestnut Castanea dentata. C. pumila.

Chinquapin... Castanopsis chrysophylla.

Coffeetree Gymnocladus dioicus.

* Cottonwood Populus deltoides virginiana. P. heterophylla. P. balsamifera. P. deltoides. P. sargentii.

* Black cottonwood Populus trichocarpa. P. trichocarpa hastata. P. macdougalii.

P. fremontii. Cucumber Magnolia acuminata. Dogwood. Cornus florida. Pacific dogwood Cornus nuttallii. Rock elm Ulmus racemosa.

Soft elm Ulmus americana. U. fulva. Black Cum Nyssa sylvatica. Red gum Liquidambar styraciflua, heartwood only. Sap gum Liquidambar styraciflua, sapwood only. Hackberry Celtis occidentalis. C. laevigata. Hickory Hicoria ovata. H. laciniosa. H. alba. H. glabra. H. ovalis. Holly Bex opaca. Ironwood Ostrya virginiana. Black locust Robinia pseudoacacia. Honey locust Gleditsia triancanthos. Lignumvitae Guajacum sanctum. Madrono... Arbutus menziesii. Magnolia Magnolia grandiflora. Mahogany. Swietenia mahagoni. Hard maple Acer saccharum. A. nigrum.

Oregon maple. Acer macrophyllum

Soft maple Acer saccharinum. A. rubrum.

White maple Acer saccharum. Unstained sapwood.

Mulberry Moras rubra. Oregon myrtle Umbellularia californica. *Red oak Quercus borealis maxima.

Q. borealis. Q. velutina. Q. shumardii.

Q. texana. Q. palustris. Q. phellos. Q. laurifolia. Q. rubra. Q. rubra pagodaefolia. Q. nigra. Q. ellipsoidalis. Q. coccinea. Q. marilandica. Q. kellogii. Q. catesbaei. Tanbark oak Lithocarpus densiflora.

* White oak Quercus alba. Q. stellata. Q. lyrata. Q. bicolor. Q. muehlenbergii.

6
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.12

Standard commercial Botanical name

name

• White oak—Contd. Q. garryana. Q. prinus. Q. montana.

Q. macrocarpa.

Q. lobata. Q. virginiana. Q. douglasii. Q. utahensis. Q. emoryi.

Q. arizonica. Q. oblongifolia. White (live) oak Quercus wislizenii. Q. agri folia. Q. chrysolepis. Osage orange Toxylon pomiferum.

Pecan ... Hicoria pecan. H. cordiformis. H. cordiformis elongata. Persimmon Diospyros virginiana. Sassafras Sassafras variifolium.

Siherbell Halesia Carolina. Sycamore < Platanus occidentals. Tupelo _ Nyssa aquatica. Black walnut Juglans nigra. Willow Salix nigra.

• Yellow poplar Liriodendron tulipifera. American Railway Engineering Association, revi- sions of Manual, Bulletin 293, January, 1027. WOODEN BRIDGES AND TRESTLES

The use, size, and manufacturing classification of timber and lumber for railway use are identical with the American Lumber Standards, 400.0. The commercial names for lumber and timber

cut from the principal species of softwood are identical with the American Lumber Standards, 400.0. The definition of maximum defect and blemishes

are American Lumber Standards, 400.0, with the

following additions and variations: CHECKS

Honeycombing: Checks occuring in the interior

of a piece, often not visible on the surface. On a

cross section they usually appear as slits or as open

pockets whose width may appear very large in proportion to the radial length.

CROSS GRAIN

Wood in which the cells or fibers do not run

parallel with the axis, or sides, of a piece. It may

be classified as spiral, diagonal, wavy, dip, curly,

and interlocked grain. The slope of the grain can

be determined by observing the direction of sur- face checks, resin ducts, pores of the wood, annual

layers of growth, etc. A drop of stained liquid,

such as ink, tends to elongate in the direction of the grain when placed on a smooth surface of the

piece.

SPIRAL GRAIN

Wood in which the fibers take a more or less winding or spiral course, such as occurs in a twisted tree. It may be detected on the flat grain (plain sawed

or tangential) surface. DIAGONAL GRAIN

Wood in which the fibers extend at an angle

(that is, diagonally) across a piece as result of sawing at an angle across the annual layers of growth. It may appear on either the radial or tangential surface. WAVY GRAIN

Wood in which the fibers take the form of waves

or undulations as indicated by the wavy surface of the split piece. It may appear on either the radial or tangential surfaces.DIP GRAIN

Wood which has one wave or undulation of the

fibers such as occurs around knots, pitch pockets,

CURLY GRAIN

Wood in which the fibers are distorted so that they take a curled direction as in "bird's-eye wood."

These patches may vary up to several inches in diameter. INTERLOCKED GRAIN

Wood which shows spiral grain in one direction

for a number of years and then the slope of the

grain in the succeeding annual layers of growth

turns in a reverse direction around the tree, then

later reverses back, etc. • The standard lumber abbreviations are the same

as American Lumber Standards, 400.0. American Hardwood Lumber Iudustry, Central Committee on Lumber Standards, hardwood lumber abbreviations—same as those for softwood.

See page 3. 400.1 PHYSICAL ANALYSIS OF LUMBER

400.11 Descriptions of Lumber

American Lumber Industry, classifications of lumber and nomenclature of softwoods. See 400.0. 400.12 Properties and Uses of Lumber

American Association of State Highway Officials, unit stresses for structural grades of timber, December, 1926. The following unit stresses for structural grades

of timber are for use with computed stresses which

contain no allowance for live-load impact.

52688°—27 2 7
400.12 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Species of wood

Axial tension and

bending in ex- treme fiber

Compression parallel to grain, short columns, Cs

Compression

per- pendicular to

grain, all grades

Horizontal shear

in beams Ultimate

modulus of

elasticity,

all grades

Select Common Select Common Cd Select Common

v^eoiar '. xNorLiierii winxe_ 650 550 500 400 1 AA 70 60 qaa nnn oUU, OUU

x on wriorci _ 1, 000 800 825 700 9aa zuu 100 80 1, 200, 000

800 650 700 600 i ^a 80 65 t AAA AAA

1, oou, 000 850 700 700 600 9AA zuu 90 75 1, 000, 000

I .vnrfiQa oAn"f" Viotti 1, 200 900 1, 000 800 9^0 ^ou 100 80 1 aaa oaa 1, tkUU, UUU

Jc it: Douglas (coast) _ 1, 400 1, 100 1, 000 800 225 90 75 1, 600, 000

Douglas (coast), dense

SclcCl/ 1, 600 1, 150 90 1 AAA AAA 1, OUU, UUU

xveu ^iiii/crmouiii/aiii,; 900 750 800 650 99^ 85 70 1 9AA AAA 1, ZUU, UUU 900 750 750 625 9AA ZUU 100 80 1, 200, 000

Hemlock, west coast 1, 100 900 900 750 ooc ZZO 75 60 1 A AA AAA

1, 400, U0U

Larch, western 1, 100 900 1, 000 800 99c; 100 80 1 QAA AAA 1, OUU, UUU

1, 200 1, 000 900 750 Oi 125 105 1 CiAA AAA 1, OUU, UUU

Pitip • ± HIV . white, Pondosa, and

on ITQ T* sugd«r _ _ _ 800 650 750 625 110UKC\ 85 70 1 AAA AAA 1, UUU, UUU Norway _ 1, 000 800 800 650 175 85 70 1, 200, 000

1, 400 1, 100 1, 000 800 99^ 110 90 1, 600, 000

n!kjuutiici ai t -f V) rirTiii "\7"oll jftiiuw, ATxr Honco ticiiot;

C! 1 £)i T

1, 600 1, 150 97^ 110 1 AAA AAA 1, OUU, UUU

1, 000 800 900 750 1DU 70 60 1 9AA AAA 1, ZUU, UUU

Spruce

Eastern and Sitka 900 750 750 625 150 85 70 1, 200, 000

Engelmann 650 550 550 450 140 70 60 800, 000

Tamarack 1, 100 900 900 750 225 100 80 1, 300, 000

Note.—Values for direct shear parallel to grain in details of joints may be taken 50 per cent greater than the values for horizontal shear

in beams. American Railway Engineering Association, stand- ard specifications for structural grades of lumber and

timber, adopted 1927. WORKING STRESSES

Notes on Tables of Working Stresses

1. Authority.—The working stresses in the table on page 10 are recommended by the Forest Products Laboratory, United States Forest Service, for structural grades complying with basic provisions for structural material of American Lumber

Standards, including, also, stresses for red and

white oak, as the same structural grades can be

applied to hardwoods as to soft. In beam and

stringer, and post and timber grades, stresses are given only for the species commonly cut to those

sizes. Stresses for any other species can be obtained

from the Forest Products Laboratory.

2. Minimum strength value.—Structural grades

are devloped to insure minimum strength values. The defects permitted in the common grades provide material having not less than 60 per cent of the strength of green clear wood, and in the select grades, of 75 per cent, although in Douglas fir and

southern pine the stresses recommended in compression and in extreme fiber in bending are 80 per

cent of green clear wood strength on account of the

limitation on rate of growth.

3. Exposure.—Working values are given for three conditions of exposure during use : (a) Continuously

dry, (b) occasionally wet but quickly dried, (c) more or less continuously damp or wet. Judgment

should be exercised as to the values to be used in a

particular case.

(a) Continuously dry.—Continuously dry con- templates use in interior or protected construction not subject to conditions of excessive dampness or high humidity.

(b) Occasionally wet.—Occasionally wet but

quickly dried assumes use in such exterior struc- tures as bridges, trestles, grandstands or bleachers,

and exposed frame work of open sheds.

(c) Usually wet.—More or less continuously

damp or wet would apply to material exposed to waves or tidewater, or in contact with earth, or used in a building in portions that would be more or

less continuously wet.

4. Impact.—The working values recommended

may be used without allowance for impact up to 100 per cent.

8
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.12

5. Maximum horizontal shear.—Working values given for horizontal shear are maximum values. The maximum unit horizontal shear at any point

in a beam as calculated is 3/2 of the average unit shear obtained by dividing the total shear at that point by the area of the cross section.

6. Analysis for shear stress.—Recognition of all loads in designing for moving loads, or loads concentrated near a support, gives a calculated shearing

stress higher than is actually developed. In calculating the shear at one end of a beam, the concentrated loads between that end and a point distant three times the depth of the beam from it may be

considered as acting at that point. In moving loads, as on highway bridges or railway stringers, in computing the shear at one end it is safe to ignore all wheel loads between that end and a point three times

the depth of the beam or stringer from it when the balance of the span is assumed loaded so as to give a maximum shear stress.

7. Shear stresses for joint details.—Shear stresses for details may be taken as 50 per cent greater than

the values for horizontal shear given in the table.

8. Permanent set.—Timber constantly yields under

long continued loading, acquiring a permanent set. This set with a fully loaded beam is about equal to the deflection using the modulus of elasticity as given in the tables. In order to minimize the results

of sag, it is advisable to use values one-half those given in the tables.

9. Compression in short columns.—The working

stresses for compression parallel to grain are for use on posts, struts, etc., with unsupported length not greater than ten times their least dimension.

They are also for use in end bearing on compression

members, as a short column or strut is more likely to fail at the end than at any other point in its length, and the variations in moisture content are

greater there.

10. Compression in medium-length columns.—For columns of intermediate length, the Forest Products

Laboratory finds from tests recently made that a fourth-power parabola, tangent to the Euler curve,

is a conservative representation of the law controlling the strength. That is, from the short block to the long column in which the strength is dependent

in stiffness, there is a falling off in ultimate strength

which follows a smooth curve, very flat at first but

curving sharply to become tangent to the Euler curve at two-thirds of the ultimate crushing strength.

P P 2S

1 1 . Formula.—For columns from =S to ^=

where P — total load in pounds,

A — area in square inches,

~| = unit compressive stress, S = safe stress in compression parallel to grain

or short columns.

I — unsupported length in inches,

d = least dimension in inches,

E = modulus of elasticity,

K = the ^

at the point of tangency of the par- p

abolic and Euler curves, at which ~r= ' A

2

^-S. The value of K for any species oand grade is

2 V 6S

12. Influence of defects.—The influence of defects on the compressive strength of columns of constant

cross section decreases as the length increases. When

J

equals the value of K for the species and

grade, defects such as are allowable in the grade

have little influence on the strength as a column.

Beyond this length the investigation of the strength

of columns indicated that the Euler formula is quite accurate for long wooden columns with pinend connections and that the maximum load is dependent upon stiffness. In such columns, a factor

of safety of 3 should be applied to values of modulus

of elasticity in order to obtain safe loading.

13. The laboratory does not, with the present

data and under ordinary conditions, find justifica- tion for increasing the stresses on square-end col- umns over those for carefully centered pin-end

columns. Tests to determine the influence of end

conditions are still being made and it is probable

that under special conditions higher stresses can be

used.

14. Long columns.—For long columns, with factor

of safety of a~

36 ©

2

15. Maximum length.—Columns should be limited

in slenderness to ^=50.

16. Direct tension.—For direct tension, the same

values as for extreme fiber stress in bending may be

used. Straight-grained wood has greater resistance

to tension than to any other kind of stress. It has been found practically impossible, however, to design joints that will develop anywhere near the full tensile strength.

17. Joists and beams in direct tension.—Grades of joists of beams may be used for members in direct

tension, as in bottom chords of trusses, increase in

size of defects toward ends being permissible because

of the gradual application of stresses through splice

plates or end connections.

18. Joist and plank, vertical or horizontal.—The

provisions of the joist and plank grades are such

that working stresses for these grades may be applied

to material used with wide faces vertical or hori- zontal. In material 5 inches and thicker with loads applied to the wide face, the knot requirements for

this face are those for the narrow face as given in the rules. 19. Working stresses in timbers nearly square.—

Where working stresses in bending are required for caps, bridge ties, etc., they should be graded on

9
400.12 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

beam and stringer grades, but as such material is often square or has horizontal faces wider than the

vertical faces, in contrast to beams and stringers in which the narrow faces are horizontal faces and the wide faces are vertical, care should be exercised that the knot limitations are applied to the proper faces. 20. Two-span stringers.—In railway stringers of two spans length, defects throughout the center two-thirds should be limited as in the center third

of single span stringer, for the maximum moment

will be over the center support and although the full positive moment would not be developed in either span

as long as there was resistance to negative moment

over the center support, there might be circumstances in which full positive moment of resistance at the centers of the two spans would be desirable.

Factors of Safety 21. Elastic limit and breaking strength.—In deter- mining working stresses, the Forest Products

Laboratory has considered both elastic limit and

breaking strength. Elastic limit, however, is more

variable and less definite than ultimate strength,

and the latter is taken as the more dependable

basis for the determination of safe working stresses. 22. Factor of safety.—The factor of safety at a

given working stress varies materially with the duration of the stress. At the recommended working stresses, given in the table for continuously dry

locations, the average timber in buildings has a

factor of safety of 6 on impact loading,1 a factor of 4 for five-minute loads, and 23^ for long-time loading, with a minimum factor of safety of 2 on 75

per "cent of the pieces under long-time loading.

About 1 piece in 100, or very light weight and with

maximum defects for the grade, would be expected

to break at one and one-half times the recommended

stress under loading of approximately 10 years

duration. For new timbers in bridge construction, the factors of safety are about 15 per cent greater.

Factors Affecting Working Stresses 23. Basis of working strength.—Working stresses are based on the strength of the clear wood of the

various species and, in some properties, on grade

as fixed by limitation on size and location of knots, extent of shake and checks, and extent of cross

grain, on conditions of exposure during use, and on

size of piece. In southern pine and Douglas fir working stresses in some properties are increased for limitation on rate of growth and for requirement of percentage of summerwood.

24. Variations, exposure, grade, size.—Working

stresses for extreme fiber in bending are varied with

grade, extent of exposure, and size of piece; in horizontal shear, they are varied with grade; in compression parallel to grain, with grade and

exposure; in compression perpendicular to grain,

with exposure. Working stresses in shear are not varied with size or extent of exposure; in compression parallel to

1 If impact stresses are neglected when less than 100 per cent of the live load producing them, the factor of safety for such loads would be reduced from 6 to a minimum of 3.

grain they are not varied with size; in compression

perpendicular to grain they are not varied with

grade or size; in modulus of elasticity they are taken as the same in all grades.

26. Rate of growth and density.—In southern pine

and Douglas fir, working stresses in extreme fiber in bending, compression parallel to grain and compression perpendicular to grain, in any grade, may

be increased ^ for material of close grain, or % for dense material, over material not so selected. Values in these species in shear may be increased

}/i for dense material, but not for limitation on

rate of growth. Modulus of elasticity is not varied

with these properties.

27. Variations in working stresses.—

Property Governing

defects Conditions

of

exposure

Grade Size

of

piece

Rateofgrowth

Density

Extreme fiber stress in.. Knots and angle.. V) (') Q

2 ) (') (0 bending of grain Horizontal shear - Shake and checks. (

3

) (») (

3) (*) (0 Compression parallel to. Knots and angle.. (0 (•) (

3

) (') 0)

grain of grain Compression perpendic- (0 (

3) (3

) 0) 0)

ular to grain. Modulus of elasticity (

3) (?) (3

) (

3 ) (

s)

1 Varies with. 1 Dry location only. J Does not vary with. Working stresses recommended by Forest Products

Laboratory, United States Forest Service, for grades

complying with basic provisions for structural grades of American Lumber Standards for joist and

plank and beams and stringers

CONTINUOUSLY DRY

Select Grade

Species

Ex- treme

fiber in bending

Compres- sion

per- pendicular to grain

Maxi- mum

hori- zontal shear

Modulus of elasticity

Lbs.j Lbs./ Lbs./ Cedar: in? in? in? Lbs./in. 2 Western red 900 200 80 1, 000, 000 Northern and southern white... 750 175 70 800, 000 Port Orford 1, 100 250 90 1, 200, 000 Alaska 1, 100 250 90 1, 200, 000

1, 300 350 100 1, 200,000 Douglas fir: Coast regionSelect 1, 600 345 90 1, 600, 000 Dense select 1,750 380 105 1, 600, 000 Rocky Mountain region 1, 100 275 85 1, 200, 000

Fir:Balsam 900 150 70 1, 000, 000 Golden, noble, silver, white 1, 100 300 70 1, 100, 000 Hemlock: West coast 1, 300 300 75 1, 400, 000 Eastern 1, 100 300 70 1, 100, 000

1,200 325 100 1, 300, 000 Pine: Southern

Select 1, 600 345 110 1, 600, 000 Dense select 1, 750 380 128 1, 600, 000

California, Idaho and northern

white, Pondosa, and sugar 900 250 85 1, 000, 000 Norway 1, 100 300 85 1, 200. 000 Redwood 1,200 250 70 1, 200, 000 Spruce: Red, white, Sitka 1, 100 250 85 1, 200, 000 Englemann. . 750 175 70 800, 000 Tamarack, eastern 1, 200 300 95 1, 300. 000

10
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.12

Working stresses recommended by Forest Products

Laboratory, United States Forest Service, etc.—Con. CONTINUOUSLY DRY—Continued Common Grade

Species

Cedar: Western red Northern and southern white... Port Orford Alaska

Cypress, southern.. Douglas fir: Coast region Rocky Mountain region

Fir:Balsam. .- Golden, noble, silver, white Hemlock: West coast Eastern

Larch, western

Pine: Southern

California, Idaho and northern

white, Pondosa, and sugar Norway

Redwood..

Spruce: Red, white, Sitka Englemann

Tamarack, eastern

Extreme

fiber

. in bending

Compres- sion

per- pendicular to grain

Maxi- mum

hori- zontal shear

Modulus of

elasticity

LbsJ Lbs./ Lbs./

in. * in* in* Lbs./ in.* 720 200 64 1 000, 000

600 175 56 ' 800, 000 880 250 72 1, 200, 000

880 250 72 1, 200, 000

1,040 350 80 1,200,000

1 200 325 72 1, 600, 000

' 880 275 68 1, 200, 000

720 150 56 1,000,000

880 300 56 1 100 000

1, 040 300 60 1, 400, 000 880 300 56 1, 100, 000 960 325 80 1, 300, 000 1,200 325 88 1,600,000

720 250 68 1, 000,000

880 300 68 1, 200,000 960 250 56 1,200,000

880 250 68 1, 200, 000

600 175 56 800,000

960 300 76 1, 300, 000 OCCASIONALLY WET BUT QUICKLY DRIED

Select Grade

Species

Cedar: Western red Northern and southern white

Port Orford Alaska

Cypress, southern Douglas fir: Coast regionSelect Dense select Rocky Mountain region

Fir:Balsam

Golden, noble, silver, white Hemlock: West coast Eastern

Larch, western

Pine: Southern

Select. Dense select California, Idaho and

northern white, Pondosa, and sugar Norway

Redwood

Spruce: Red, white, Sitka Englemann

Tamarack, Eastern

Extreme fiber in bending

4 inches

thin- ner

Lbs./ in*

710 580

890

890

1,240

1,370 800

670 800

1,240

1, 370

710

580

5 inches and

thicker Lbs./ in*

800

1,000

1, 385

1, 515 900

1, 100

i'ioo'

1, 385

1,515

1,000 900

Compres- sion

per- pendic- ular to grain

Lbs./ in*

150

140 200 200

250

240

2G5

225 125

225

225 225

225

240

265

150 175

150

150 140 225

Maxi- mum

hori- zontal shear

Lbs./

in. 280

709090

100

110

128

Modulus

of elasticity

Lbs./in*

1, 000, 000 800,000

1, 200, 000

1, 200,000

1, 200, 000

600,000

600,000

200, 000

1, 000, 000

1, 100, 000

1, 400, 000

1, 100, 000

1, 300, 000

1, 600, 000

1, 600, 000

1, 000, 000

1, 200, 000

1, 200, 000

1, 200, 000

800, 000

1, 300, 000

Working stresses recommended by Forest Products

Laboratory, United States Forest Service, etc.—Con. OCCASIONALLY WET BUT QUICKLY DRIED—Contd. Common Grade

Species

Cedar: Western red Northern and southern white

Port Orford Alaska

Cypress, southern. Douglas fir: Coast region Rocky Mountain region. Fir:Balsam

Golden, noble, silver, white Hemlock: West coast Eastern

Larch, western

Pine: Southern

California, Idaho and

northern white, Pondosa, and sugar Norway

Redwood...

Spruce: Red, white, Sitka Englemann

Tamarack, eastern

Extreme fiber in bending Compres- sion

per- pendic- ular to grain

Maxi- mum

hori- zontal shear

Modulus

of

elasticity 4 inches and

thin- ner

5 inches and

thicker

Lbs./ Lbs./ Lbs./ Lbs./ in* in.* in* in* Lbs./ in.* 600 640 150 64 1, 000, 000

490 140 56 oUU, UUU 760 800 200 72 1, /UU, UUU

760 200 72 1, 200, 000 830 250 80 1, 200, 000 980 1, 040 TO 1 AAA AAA

1, OUU, UUU 680 '720 225 68 1, 200, 000 570 COOO 1 AAA AAA

1, UUU, UUU

680 225 56 1, 100, 000 830 880 225 OU 1 Ann nnn l, 100, OOO

680 225 56 1, 100, 000 830 880 225 onoU 1 QAA AAA

1, OUU, UUU 980 1,040 225 88 1, 600, 000

600 150 68 1, 000, 000

760 175 68 1, 200, 000

760 800 150 56 1, 200, 000 680 720 150 68 1, 200, 000 490 140 56 800, 000 830 225 76 1, 300, 000 MORE OR LESS CONTINUOUSLY DAMP OR WET

Select Grade

Cedar: Western red.. Northern and southern white

Port Orford Alaska

Cypress, southern , Douglas fir: Coast region

Select Dense select Rocky Mountain

region

Fir:Balsam

Golden, noble, silver, white. Hemlock: West coast. Eastern..

Larch, western

Pine: Southern

Select Dense select. California, Idaho and

northern white, Pondosa, and sugar Norway. Redwood..

Spruce: Red, white, Sitka Englemann

Tamarack, eastern

670 750 125 80 1,000,000

530 100 70 800,000

800 900 150 90 1, 200, 000

800 150 90 1,200,000 800 225 100 1, 200, 000

950 1,065 215 90 1, 600, 000

1,050 1, 165 235 105 1,600,000

620 700 200 85 1, 200, 000

530 100 70 1, 000, 000

710 200 70 1, 100, 000

800 900 200 75 1,400,000

710 200 70 1,100, 000

800 900 200 100 1, 300,000

950 1,065 215 110 1, 600,000

1,050 1, 165 235 128 1, 600, 000

670 125 85 1,000,000

710 150 85 1, 200, 000

710 800 125 70 1, 200, 000

710 800 125 85 1, 200,000

440 100 70 800, 000

800 200 95 1,300,000

11
400.12 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Working stresses recommended by Forest Products

Laboratory, United States Forest Service, etc. —Con. MORE OR LESS CONTINUOUSLY DAMP OR WET—Con. Common Grade

Species

Cedar: Western red Northern and southern white

Port Orford Alaska

Cypress, southern Douglas fir: Coast region Rocky Mountain region

Fir:Balsam

Golden, noble, silver, white Hemlock: West coast, Eastern

Larch, western

Pine: Southern

California, Idaho and

northern white, Pondosa, and sugar Norway , Redwood

Spruce: Red, white, Sitka Englemann

Tamarack, eastern

Extreme fiber in bending

4 inches and

thin- ner

Lbs./ in*

570

450

680

750 530

450

600

750

570

600 600

370

5 inches and

thick

er

Lbs./ in*

600

720

800

560

720

"720" 800

640 640

Compres- sion

per- pendic- ular to grain

Lbs./

in.* 125

100

150 150 225 200

200

100 200 200

200

200 200

125

150

125

125 100 200

Maxi- mum

hori- zontal shear

Lbs./ in*

64

56

72

7280

7268

56

56

60

56

Modulus

of

elasticity

Lbs. Iin*

1,000,000

800, 000

1,200,000

1, 200, 000

1, 200, 000

1, 600, 000

1,200,000

1, 000, 000

1, 100, 000

1, 400, 000

1, 100, 000

1, 300, 000

1, 600, 000

1,000,000

1,200,000

1, 200, 000

1,200,000 800,000

1, 300, 000

Safe loads for Wooden Columns

1. The unit working stresses in compression

parallel to grain for columns whose ratio of unsupported length to least dimension does not exceed 10

shall be not greater than that given for the species

in the accompanying table of working stresses.

2. For columns the ratio of whose unsupported

length to least dimension is greater than 10 the

following formula shall be used until the reduction

in allowable stress equals one-third the stress for short columns:

where P=total load in pounds,

A=area in square inches, unit compressive stress, *S=safe stress in compression parallel to

grain for short columns,

1= unsupported length in inches. d=least dimension in inches, E<= modulus of elasticity, i£«=the ~2 a* the point of tangency of the

parabolic and

P 2 Euler curves, at which ^=3 S.

The value of K for any species and grade is

7T /][

2 yes

3. For columns of greater length the Euler for- mula below, which includes factor of safety of 3, shall be used: P_T* E

A 36/Z\2

(3)

4. Columns shall be limited in slenderness to

Values of "K" for columns of intermediate ' length

Specie3

Cedar: Western red Port Orford Douglas fir: Coast regionSelect. Dense select. Rocky Mountain region... Hemlock, west coast..., Larch, western Oak, red and white

Pine, southern:

Select Dense select Redwood

Spruce, red, white, Sitka

Continuously dryOccasionally wet

Select Com- mon Select Com- mon Select Com- mon

24.2 27.1 24.2 27.1 25.1 28.1

23.4 26.2 24.6 27.4 25.6 28.7

23.7 27.3 24.9 28.6 27.0 31.1

22.6 24.9 23.8 26.1 25.8 28.3 24.8 27.8 24.8 27.8 26.5 29.7

25.3 28.3 25.3 23.3 26.8 30.0

22.0 24.6 23.1 25.8 25.8 28.8 24.8 27.8 26.1 29.3 27.7 31.1

23.7 27.3 24.9 28.6 27.0 31.1 22.6 24.9 23.8 26. 1 25.8 28.3 22.2 24.8 23.4 26.1 25.6 28.6

24.8 27.8 25.6 28.7 27.5 30.8

Usually wet

Strength of columns of intermediate length in per

cent of strength of short columns

Values for the expression £ 1—^(jj^ J

in the formula: ^=S [l -^(^J ]

Percentage=[l-|(^)4 ]

K

22 97 96 95

23 98 97 95 24 98 97 96

25 98 98 97

26 99 98

99 98

97 27 98

28 99 98 98

29 99 99

99 99

98 30 98

31 99 99 99

Id

12 13 14

97 96 95 93 91 88 85 81 77 72 67

97 95 94 92 90 87 84 81 77 72 67 92 89 87 84 80 76 72 67 98 97 96 94 93 91 89 86 83 80 76 72 96 95 93 92 91 89 86 83 80 76 97 96 95 93 92 90 88 85 82 79 97 96 95 94 93 91 89 87 85 82 98 97 97

99 98 98 97

95 94 92 90 88 86 84 81 95 94 93 92 90 88 86 84

67

71 67

75 71 67

78 75 71 67

81 78 75 71 67

27 28 29 30 31

Ratio of length to least dimension in rectangular

timbers This table can also be used for columns not rec- tangular, the l/d being equivalent to 0.289 l/r, where

r is the least radius of gyration of the section.

12
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.12

Working stresses recommended by Forest Products Laboratory, United States Forest Service, for grades complying with basic provisions for structural grades of American Lumber Standards for posts and timbers

6 by 6 inches and larger CONTINUOUSLY DRY

Select Grade

Compression parallel to grain Ratio of length to least dimension (L/D)

20 25 30 35 40

Cedar, western red.. Douglas fir: Coast regionSelect — Dense select Rocky Mountain region Hemlock, west coast Larch, western

Pine, southern:

Select Dense select Redwood

Spruce, red, white, Sitka..

700

1, 175 1,285 800

900

1, 100

1, 175 1,285

1, 000

800

1, 149

1,251 786

885 1,068

1, 149

1, 251 972

786

1, 127 1,222 774 872

1,041

1, 127 1,222 947

774

1,093

1, 176 852

1,093

1, 176 910

753

629

1, 045

1,112 726

823

937

1, 045

1, 112 856

c92

975

022

688

783

851 975

022

781

726

438

702 702

528

614

570

702

702 526

526

304

487

487

365

487

487

365

365

224

358

358 268

313

291 358

358

268 268

171

274

274 206

240

223 274

274 206 206 Common Grade

Cedar, western red Douglas fir: Coast region Rocky Mountain region. Hemlock, west coast Larch, western

Pine, southern Redwood

Spruce, red, white, Sitka..

560 553 547 538 880 870 861 847

640 632 627 617

720 712 706 696

880 863 849 828

880 870 861 847

800 786 773 754

640 632 627 617

524 505 425 304

826 796 675 487

602 582 500 365

6S0 660 573 426

798 752 570 396

826 796 675 487

726 688 526 365

602 582 500 365

224 171 110 1, 000, 000

358 274 175 1, 600, 000

268 206 132 1, 200, 000

313 240 153 1, 400, 000

291 223 142 1, 300, 000

358 274 175 1, 600, 000

268 206 132 1, 200, 000

268 206 132 1, 200, 000 OCCASIONALLY WET BUT QUICKLY DRIED

Select Grade

Cedar, western red Douglas fir: Coast regionSelect Dense select Rocky Mountain region- Hemlock, west coast. Larch, western...

Pine, southern:

Select Dense select Redwood

Spruce, red, white, Sitka.

700 686 673 654 628 591 438 304 224 171 110

1, 065 1,045 1,028 1,003 968 915 702 487 358 274 175 1,165 1, 139 1,118 1,083 1,036 971 702 487 358 274 175 800 785 772 753 728 688 526 365 268 206 132 900 885 871 851 824 783 612 426 313 240 153 1,000 976 955 922 877 810 570 396 291 223 142 1,065 1,045 1,028 1,003 968 915 702 487 358 274 175 1,165 1,139 1,118 1,083 1,036 971 702 487 358 274 175 900 879 861 834 794 738 526 365 268 206 132 750 738 728 712 690 657 525 365 268 206 132 Common Grade

Cedar, western red.. Douglas fir: Coast region Rocky Mountain region Hemlock, west coast Larch, western

Pine, southern Redwood

Spruce, red, white, Sitka..

560 552 546 537 523 504 425 304 224 171 110 1, 000, 000

800 792 784 773 758 736 644 487 358 274 175 1, 600, 000

640 632 625 616 602 582 502 365 268 206 132 1, 200, 000

720 712 705 695 681 659 572 426 313 240 153 1, 400, 000

800 787 777 760 736 704 564 396 291 223 142 1,300, 000

800 792 784 773 758 736 644 487 358 274 175 1, 600, 000

720 709 700 685 666 637 518 365 268 206 132 1,200, 000

600 594 588 580 568 552 485 365 268 206 132 1, 200, 000 MORE OR LESS CONTINUOUSLY DAMP OR WET

Select Grade

Cedar, western red 650 638 629 614 594 565 437 304 224 171 110 1, 000, 000 Douglas fir: Coast region

Select 905 893 883 867 846 814 683 487 358 274 175 1, 600, 000 Dense select 990 974 961 940 910 871 698 487 358 274 175 1. 600, 000 Rocky Mountain region 700 690 681 669 651 623 514 365 268 206 132 1, 200, 000 Hemlock, west coast 800 789 780 766 745 717 600 426 313 240 153 1, 400, 000 Larch, western 800 787 776 760 736 704 565 396 291 223 142 1, 300, 000

Pine, southern:

Select 905 893 883 867 846 814 683 487 358 274 175 1, 600, 000 Dense select 990 974 961 940 910 871 698 487 358 274 175 1, 600, 000 Redwood. _ 750 737 727 712 690 657 525 365 268 206 132 1, 200, 000 Spruce, red, white, Sitka. 650 642 635 625 611 589 500 365 268 206 132 1, 200, 000

13
400.12 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Working stresses recommended by Forest Products Laboratory, United States Forest Service, for grades complying with basic provisions for structural grades of American Lumber Standards for posts and timbers 6 by 6 inches and larger—Continued

MO-RE OR LESS CONTINUOUSLY DAMP OR WET—Continued Common Grade

Species

Compression parallel to grain Ratio of length to least dimension (L/D) Modulus

of elastic- 10 12 14 16 18 20 25 30 35 40 50

ity

520 514 509 502 491 475 413 304 224 171 110 1, 000, 000 Douglas fir: 680 675 670 664 655 641 588 482 358 274 175 1, 600, 000

560 554 551 544 535 521 465 365 268 206 132 1, 200, 000

640 634 629 622 612 598 537 426 313 240 153 1, 400, 000

640 633 627 618 606 588 519 396 291 223 142 1, 300, 000

Pine, southern 680 675 670 664 655 641 588 482 358 ' 274 175 1, 600, 000 Redwood 600 594 588 580 568 552 483 365 268 206 132 1, 200, 000

520 515 512 507 500 489 446 365 268 206 132 1, 200, 000

CLASSIFICATION OF THE USES OF TIMBER AND LUMBER

UNDER AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING ASSOCIA- TION SPECIFICATIONS The grades recommended are those which would

ordinarily be used. For work of the highest character, a grade higher could be used, and for temporary

work, a grade lower. In yard material, standard grades of one producing region compare as closely with those of other

regions as the variations in the species will permit.

Structural grades apply equally to all species,

hence the structural grades of American Lumber

Standards can be applied to any species if grades

conforming to the structural grades of American

Lumber Standards are not included in the standard

grades of the region producing that species. Details of heartwood, sapwood, wane, and square- edge specification are not included in these grades,

but are left to the discretion of the person consulting

this reference and ordering material.

1. Bridge and Construction Timber A. Combination and Howe truss spans:

1. CompressionfSelect structural posts and

members I timbers. 2 Tension f Select structural joist and

I plank.

3. Diagonals subject] to reversal of Select structural P°sts and

stress J timbers4. Floor beams ____f

Select structural or dense

5. Stringers | select structural beams

I and stringers.

6. Ties Select structural timbers.

7. Guard timbers Common structural timbers.

8. Railing : 1 9. Stiffeners KT * _ ,. fNo. 1 common dimension.

10. Splices

11. Nailing strips J 12. Grillage Common structural timbers.

13. Deck plank No. 1 common dimension.

14. Bridging No. 2 common boards.

B. Pile and frame trestles:

1. Sills and mud| n

jjjg ^Select structural timbers.

2. Posts Select structural posts.

B. Pile and frame trestles—Continued.

3. Caps Select structural timbers.

4. Sash bracing

j 5. ross bracing. _ I Qommon structural plank.

6. Longitudinal

bracing J 7. Girts Common structural timbers.

8. End planks Common structural plank.

9. Stringers [Select structural or dense

I select structural stringers.

10. Ties Select structural timbers.

11. Guard timbers __ Common structural timbers.

12. Planking for bal-i lasted deck___/Select structural plank.

13. Railing No. 1 common dimension.

C. Falsework:

1. Sills and mudi

sqjs ^Common structural timbers.

2. Posts Common structural posts.

3. Caps Common structural timbers.

4. Stringers Select structural stringers.

5. Truss timbers Common structural timbers.

6. Centering 1 _ T , 7 Lagging |No. 1 common dimension.

8. Bracing Common structural plank.

9. Wedges No. 1 common dimension.

10. Scaffolding No. 2 common dimension.

D. Concrete forms:

1. Dimension lum-i

ker >No. 1 common dimension.

2. D & M planks„_ •! T rt 3. Bracing ) No' 2 common boards. E. Tanks and supports:

1. Sills Common structural timbers.

2. Posts Select structural posts.

3. Caps Select structural timbers.

4. Bracing Common structural plank.

5. Joists Select structural joists.

6. D & M flooring.. C flooring.

7. Staves C tank stock.

8. Rafters No. 1 common dimension. \ 9. Roof No. 1 common ship-lap.

10. Ladders, etc C ladder stock.

11. Frost-box mater- '

'

• aj j-No. 1 common ship-lap.

14

/
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.12

F. Docks and wharves:

1. Timber sheet| Common structural timpiling berg>

2. Timber in cribs. _ J 3. Caps Select structural timbers. 4 Strin ers

f Select structural or dense

1 select structural stringers.

5. Bracing Common structural plank.

6. Guard timbers. _ Common structural timbers.

7. Ties Select structural timbers.

8. Plank decking. __ Select structural plank.

9. Mooring posts... Select structural timbers.

10. Fenders andlCommon structural timwales / bers.

11. Warehouse. See Frame buildings. G. Coaling stations and ore stations:

1. Sills and niud| CommonstructuraltimberSt

sills J 2. Posts Select structural posts.

3. Caps Select structural timber.

4. Bracing Common structural plank.

5 Stringers | Select structural or dense" " I select structural stringers.

6. Joists Select structural joists.

7. Bin lining 1 ...

8. Rafters j

No- 1 common dimension.

9. Flooring

10. Chutes }>No. 1 common boards

11. Decking

12. Coal pockets and|

bins j No. 1 common dimension. No. 2 common ship-lap.

Select structural timbers.

13. Roofing H. Tunnels:

1. Posts

2. Sills

3. Caps

4. Segments

5. Lagging -> 6 Struts fNo. 1 common dimension.

J". Caisson Select structural timbers.

2. Frame Buildings A. Station buildings, passenger, freight, platform

shelters:

1. Caps ) 2 g^g

I Common structural tim3.

" Post's" ""^"""J bers- 4. Stringers Select structural stringers.

5. Joists Common structural joists.

6. Bridging No. 3 common boards.

7. Subflooring No. 2 common ship-lap.

fA or B flooring (for natural 8 Fi " h fl * I ^

n^sk) • g- - |q Qr .goormg (for pamt

I finishes)

9. Studding and}

plates jNo. 1 common dimension.

10. Sheathing No. 2 common ship-lap.

11. Furring No. 2 common strips.

12. Siding BorC siding.

A. Station buildings, passenger, freight, platform

shelters—Continued.

B ceiling (for natural fin- 13. Ceilineg 1 ishes) . C ceiling (for paint finishes)

14. Truss timbers

' 15. Purlins •No. 1 common dimension.

16. Rafters __

17. Roof boards No. 2 common ship-lap.

18. Shingles on roofs/A (for roofs). and side walls. IB (for side walls).

19. Door and window frames ' kj nnisn.

20. Outside finish lumber.

A or B finish (for natural

21. Inside finish lum- finishes)

ber C or D finish (for paint

finishes)

22. Millwork:

(a) Moldings _<

r A molding stock or .C molding stock.

(6) Stairs < 'A finish or -C finish. 23. Partitions < 'B partition or .C partition.

24. Shelving C finish. B. Engine house:

1. Caps _

] 2. Sills Common structural structural fambers timbprs

Posts

4. Stringers _ Select structural stringers.

5. Joists Select structural joists.

6. Bridging No. 3 common boards.

7. Flooring No. 1 common dimension.

8. Pit timbers Common structural timbers.

9. Studding. "NTo 1 pninmon rsitYiPnciirm 10. Furring. No. 2 common strips.

11. Siding C or D pi din p" 12. Ceiling _ _ __

13. Truss lumber

' 14. Purlins No. 1 common dimension.

15. Rafters.

16. Roof boards No. 2 common ship-lap.

17. Shingles. _ __ A.

18. Door and win-- C finish. dow frames j 19. Outside finish] lumber. j C or D finish. 20. Inside finish lum-1

ber. C finish. 21. Millwork.. __ _J 22. Sleepers. No. 2 common dimension.

Common

bers. structural timC. Machine shops:

1. Caps

2. Sills

3. Posts

4. Stringers Select structural stringers.

5. Joists Select structural joists.

6. Bridging No. 3 common boards.

7. Flooring..

8. Studding. >No. 1 common dimension.

15
400.12 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

C. Machine shops—Continued.

9. Sheathing No. 2 common ship-lap.

10. Furring No. 2 common strips. 11. Siding C or D siding.

12. Ceiling C or D ceiling. 13. Truss timbers Select structural timbers. Purlins Rafters Roofing boards..

Shingles

Door and window frames

Outside finish lumber

Inside finish lumber Millwork

No. 1 common dimension. No. 2 common ship-lap. A.

^C finish.

14.

15. 16.

17. 18.

19.

20.

21. 22. Sleepers No. 2 common dimension. D. Section houses:

1. Posts

2. Sills

3. Caps

4. Joists

5. Bridging

6. Subflooring.

7. Finish flooring. _

8. Studding

plates

9. Sheathing.

10. Furring

11. Siding

12. Ceiling.

13. 14.

15.

16.

and

17.

18.

19.

Rafters Roof Boards

Shingles

Door and window frames

Outside finish lumber

Inside finish lumber Millwork

No. 2 common dimension. No. 1 common dimension. No. 3 common boards. No. 2 common ship-lap.

B flooring (for natural

finishes)

C flooring (for paint fin- ishes) . No. 1 common dimension. No. 2 common ship-lap. No. 2 common strips. C or D siding.

C or D ceiling. No. 1 common dimension. No. 2 common ship-lap. A.

C finish.

E. Miscellaneous small buildings:

1. Posts

2. Sills

3. Caps

4. Joists

5. Bridging

6. Subflooring

7. Finish flooring. _ 8. Studding and

plates

9. Sheathing

10. Furring

11. Siding

12. Ceiling

13. Rafters

14. Roof boards

15. Shingles

No. 2 common dimension.

Common structural joists. No. 3 common boards. No. 2 common ship-lap.

C flooring. No. 1 common dimension. No. 2 common ship-lap. No. 3 common strips. C or D siding.

C or D ceiling. No. 1 common dimension. No. 2 common ship-lap. C.

E. Miscellaneous small buildings—Continued.

16. Door and win-' dow frames..

17. Outside finish lumber >C finish. 18. Inside finish lumber

19. Millwork

F. Warehouses:

"No. 1 common dimension.

Caps ) - gills Common structural timPostsV" J

bers- Stringers Select structural stringers. Joists Select structural joists. Bridging No. 2 common boards.

7. Subflooring No. 2 common ship-lap.

8. Finish flooring. _ C flooring.

9. Studding and]

plates J 10. Sheathing No. 2 common ship-lap.

11. Furring No. 2 common strips. 12. Siding C or D siding.

13. Ceiling C or D ceiling. 14. Truss timbers

] 15. Purlins >No. 1 common dimension.

16. Rafters J 17. Roof boards No. 2 common ship-lap.

18. Shingles A.

19. Door and win-" dow frames

20. Outside finish lumber fC finish. 21. Inside finish lumber

22. Millwork

23. Sleepers No. 2 common strips. G. Ice houses:

1. Sills 1 2. Caps Common

3. Posts J bers- 4. Stringers Select structural stringers.

5. Joists No. 1 common dimension.

6. Bridging No. 2 common boards.

7. Sleepers No. 2 common strips.

8. Subflooring No. 2 common ship-lap.

9. Finish flooring.. C flooring.

10. Studding No. 1 common dimension.

11. Sheathing No. 2 common ship-lap.

12. Furring No. 3 common strips. 13. Siding C or D siding.

14. Ceiling C or D ceiling.

3. Miscellaneous Roadway Material A. Crossing plank No. 1 common dimension.

B. Platforms:

1. Posts

j 2. Caps [No. 1 common dimension.

3. Sills j 4. Stringers Select structural stringers.

5. Joists Select structural joists.

6. Bridging No. 3 common boards.

structural tim16
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.12

B. Platforms—Continued.

7. Planking

| No ^ COmmon dimension.

8. Railing J 9. Steps No. 1 common boards.

10. Skids No. 1 common dimension.

C. Stock guards:

1. Posts No. 1 common dimension.

2. Ties Select structural timbers.

3. Wing fences and] aprons [No. 1 common boards.

4. Slats J 5. Fillers No. 2 common boards. D. Signs and posts:

1. Posts No. 1 common dimension.

2. Bracing No. 2 common dimension.

3. Sign boards C finish.

4. Molding C molding stock. E. Fencing, including snow fence:

1. Posts No. 1 common dimension.

2. Bracing No. 2 common boards.

3. Stringers No. 1 common dimension.

4. Fence boards No. 2 common boards.

5. Gate materials. _ No. 1 common boards.

6. Stakes No. 2 common boards.

F. Culverts and drains:

1. Sills Common structural.

2. Bracing No. 2 common boards.

3 Timbers [Common structural tim_

1 bers.

4. Planking No. 2 common dimension.

/Common structural tim5. Grillage

( bers G. Stock -pens:

1. Posts

I 2. Sills . 3 Fencing | common dimension.

4. Studding J

G. Stock pens—Continued.

5. Sheathing No. 2 common ship-lap.

6. Rafters No. 1 common dimension.

7. Roof boards No. 2 common ship-lap.

8. Shingles B.

9. Outside nnish|c finigh> lumber J H. Poles Select structural timbers.

7. Conduits No. 1 common dimension.

J. Bumping blocks Select structural timbers. American Society for Testing Materials, proposed

standard specifications for structural wood joist, planks, beams, stringers, and posts, serial D245,

1927. (Working stresses are those recommended by the

Forest Products Laboratory, United States Forest

Service, for grades complying with the basic provisions for structural material of American Lumber

Standards (412.0). These stresses are set forth on page 10 under the items relating to the American

Railway Engineering Association.)

United States Department of Agriculture, Bureau

of Public Roads, Timber Structures, revised April, 1923. Permissible stresses. When used with specifications shown in 412.0 the stresses in pounds per square inch, indicated on

page 18, are permissible for structural timbers. United States Department of Commerce, Report

of Building Code Committee, Recommended Building Code Requirements for Working Stresses in Building Material, June, 1926. Working stresses for structural grades of American

Lumber Standards conform to those adopted by

the American Railway Engineering Association as given in full on page 10.

17
400.12 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Common and botanical name

Axial

tension and

bending

stress

Hori- Compression parallel to the grain ComShear

parallel to grain zontal shear in bending

-till LI bearing

L

D

to 10 L

D

10 to 30

pression perpendicular

to grain

2, 200 220 1, 800 1, 600 1, 800-25^ 600 350

1, 600 150 1, 200 1, 000 1, 200-25^ 350 220

1, 600 150 1, 200 1, 000 1, 200-25^ 350 220

1, 600 150 1, 200 1, 000 1, 200-25^ 350 220

1, 600 150 1, 200 1, 000 1, 200-25^ 350 220

1, 600 120 1, 200 1, 000 1, 200-25^ 250 180

1, 600 120 1, 200 1, 000 1, 200-25^ 250 180

1, 600 100 1, 200 1, 000 1, 200-25^ 250 150

1, 600 100 1, 200 1, 000 1, 200-25-^ 250 150

1, 400 100 1, 100 900 1, 100-25^ 240 150

I, 400 100 1, 100 900 1, 100-25^ 240 150

i, 400 100 1, 100 900 1, 100-25^ 240 150

1, 400 100 1, 100 900 1, 100-25^ 240 150

1, 400 100 1, 100 900 1, 100-25^ 240 150

1, 400 100 1, 100 900 1, 100-25^ 240 150

1, 200 90 1, 000 800 1, 000-25^ 180 130

1, 200 90 1, 000 800 1, 000-25-^ 180 130

1, 200 90 1, 000 800 1, 000-25-^ 180 130

1, 200 90 1, 000 800 1, 000-25^ 180 130

1, 200 90 1, 000 800 1, 000-25^ 180 130

1, 200 90 1, 000 800 1, 000-25^ 180 130

1, 200 90 1, 000 800 1, 000-25^ 180 130

1, 000 80 800 700 900-25^ 160 120

1, 000 80 800 700

L

900-25-g loO 120

1, 000 80 800 700 900-25^ 160 120

1, 000 80 800 700

L

900-25- loO 120

1, 000 80 800 700

L

900-25^ 160 120 800 70 700 600 800-25 140 100

800 70 700 600 800-25^D

14U 100

800 70 700 600 800-25^ 140 100 800 70 700 600 800-25^ 140 100

Locust, black 1 (Robinia pseudacacia) Maple, sugar or hard 2 (Acer sae- charum)

Oak, Spanish (lowland) 2 (Quercus

pagodaefolia)

Oak, tanbark 3 (Quercus densiflora)

Oak, white 3 (Quercus alba) Pine, Cuban 3 (Pinus heterophylla)

Pine, longleaf 3 (Pinus palustris) _

Fir, Douglas (coast region) 3 (Pseudotsuga taxifolia) Pine, shortleaf 2 (Pinus echinaia) _

Larch, western 3 (Larix occidentalis) Oak, Pacific post 3 (Quercus garry- ana)

Oak, bur 3 (Quercus macrocarpa) _ _ Pine, loblolly 2 (Pinus taeda) Pine, table mountain 2 (Pinus

pungens)

Tamarack 2 (Larix Laricina)

Cypress, bald 1 (Taxodium dis- tichum)

Fir, Douglas (mountain region) 3 (Pseudotsuga taxifolia) Hemlock, western 2 (Tsuga hetero- phylla)

Hemlock, eastern 3 (Tsuga canPine, Norway 2 (Pinus resinesa).. Pine, pitch 2 (Pinus rigida)

Redwood 1 (Sequoia sempervirens)

Cedar, western red 1 (Thuja pli- cata) Chestnut 1 (Castanea dentata) Pine, western yellow 2 (Pinus ponderosa) Spruce, red 2 (Picea rubens)

Spruce, Sitka 2 (Picea sitchensis) _. Cedar, white 1 (Thuja occidentalis)

Pine, Lodgepole 2 (Pinus contorta). Spruce, Englemann 2 (Picea englemanni)

Spruce, white 2 (Picea canadensis).

Note—L equals length of column, and D equals least side or diameter, both unsupported length of wooden columns and compression members shall not exceed

i Very durable. 1 Perishable.

dimensions in the same unit either feet or inches. The

30 times the diameter of least side.

8 Durable. 18
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.14

400.13 Tests of Lumber

American Society for Testing Materials and Forest Service of the United States Department of Agriculture, joint sponsors for the preparation of specifications for methods of testing wood, under the

rules of procedure of the American Engineering

Standards Committee, A. E. S. C. No. 0-4.

(Specifications not yet completed.)

American Society for Testing Materials, standard

methods of testing small clear specimens of timber,

D143-27, 1927. (The methods represent the entire procedure from

the selection of the trees to the manipulation of the

test, thus controlling the factors, such as the size and proportion of test specimens and rate of loading,

which may influence the results. The methods con- form closely to those used by the United States Forest

Service, and the forestry branch of the Department

of the Interior, Canada, in performing many thou- sands of tests under a single comprehensive plan.)

American Society for Testing Materials, standard

methods of conducting static tests of timber in structural sizes, D198-27, 1927. (The methods presented are the outgrowth of years of experience and research, largely on the part

of the United States Forest Service. The tests of certain types of timbers, such as bridge stringers and

joists, are definitely covered, and testing procedure

for other structural timber forms is also suggested.)

400.14 Inspection of Lumber.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See Lumber inspection provisions and service, of American Lumber Standards, No. 400.0. American Railway Engineering Association, re- visions of Manual, Bulletin 293, January, 1927,

Wooden Bridges and Trestles. The lumber inspection provisions and service for yard lumber conform to the American Lumber

Standards, No. 400.0. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, inspection of lumber,

March 23, 1927. This association's inspection and shipping provisions conform to the lumber inspection provisions

and service of the American Lumber Standards, No. 400.0. California Redwood Association, standard specifi- cations for eastern grades of California redwood

lumber, inspection and shipping provisions, April, 1927. The inspection and shipping provisions of this association conform to the lumber inspection provisions and service of the American Lumber Standards, 400.0. California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers'

Association, inspection of lumber, May 1, 1926. The inspection service of this association conforms

to lumber inspection provisions and service of American Lumber Standards, 400.0.

Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, in- spection of lumber, August 25, 1926. CUSTOM GOVERNING REINSPECTION A shipment shall be considered as of the grade

invoiced if, upon official inspection by an official inspector of the Maple Flooring Manufacturers

Association, 95 per cent thereof or more, in feet, is found to be of grade invoiced, the flooring below

said grade to be accepted as of its actual grade.

Where the de-grades are in excess of 5 per cent, in

feet, of the shipment, the de-grades in excess of the

5 per cent shall be the property of the manufacturer

of the flooring. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the cost of rein- spection shall be borne by the complainant in the event that the amount below grade is found to be

5 per cent or less, in feet, of the total amount cf the item complained of; if more than 5 per cent, in feet, the expense shall be borne by the manufacturer of the flooring.

The quality of the flooring in the condition in which it leaves the manufacturer is held to govern

the grade, as subsequent lack of care and improper

treatment in laying, scraping, or finishing are not

chargeable to the manufacturer. Because of modern methods of laying hardwood

floors, and the improved nail now used, the boring

of dressed and matched flooring is no longer of practical value; consequently, the practice of boring has been discontinued by the manufacturers and as

it is not an essential feature in the manufacture and

grading of flooring the absence of it will not be

considered a basis for any reclamation. ADVANTAGES OF STANDARD LENGTHS

It will be found more advantageous to specify

and use the standard run of lengths in the different grades instead of special long lengths because

lengths selected 4 or 6 feet and longer are much

more expensive without compensating benefits. Modern perfected methods of manufacturing

hardwood flooring produce a larger proportion of shorter lengths than the old-time methods, because

the defects are cut out closer, thus improving the average quality of the flooring, and experience has

demonstrated that shorter lengths cost no more to lay and make as good or better floor at a material

saving in cost than all long lengths. The shorter lengths can also be used to advantage in closets and

other small spaces. The sentiment in favor of conservation of forest resources is strongly in favor of the utilization to the

greatest extent of these valuable woods, especially

when the result attained in the finished floor is in nowise depreciated. GUARANTEED FLOORINGS The letters MFMA on maple, beech, or birch

flooring signify that the flooring is standardized and

guaranteed by the Maple Flooring Manufacturers

Association. National Hardwood Lumber Association, inspection

of lumber, January, 1927. 19
400.14 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

ORIGINAL NATIONAL INSPECTION REGULATIONS

1. All applications for original national inspection

must be made by a member of the association to the secretary or a licensed inspector. Any member who applies for inspection on lumber which he

has neither bought nor sold is subject to suspension or expulsion from the association. Members

will avoid delay by mailing requests for original

inspection direct to the inspector nearest the point

where the inspection is to be made, sending carbon copy to the association, 2008 Straus Building,

Chicago, 111. 2. Inspectors are required to inspect the full amount of lumber contained in an original shipment, and they are expressly forbidden to apply

national inspection to a portion of a shipment after selections have been made therefrom, unless both

seller and buyer agree thereto.

3. In the absence of instructions to the contrary, a national inspector will inspect and measure lumber according to "standard inspection" and the "general instructions" as provided by the association's rules. In all cases in which any special inspec- tion is to apply, either in the matter of grade or

size, it is incumbent upon the shipper or party applying for inspection to furnish the national inspector

with a copy of the order (prices may be omitted)

and a clear and definite interpretation of same as agreed to by the buyer and seller.

4. When an inspection by an authorized inspector

of the National Hardwood Lumber Association is completed, the inspector shall deliver to the member requesting the inspection a certificate in duplicate, certifying to the amount and grade of lumber

so inspected. This certificate is final for settlement between buyer and seller in all cases where an agree- ment as to the application of national inspection

exists between the parties.

5. It should be thoroughly understood that nei- ther this association nor any of its members possesses authority to impose "official national inspection" in any of the markets except through the mutual agreement of the parties at interest; and

when such official inspection has been made, it is binding only upon those parties who agreed before- hand to recognize it in the individual transaction

in which it is involved. A buyer or seller may desire national rules of grading and measurement to apply

to a contract and thus specify "national rules to govern," without necessarily obligating either party to the application of those rules by a licensed inspector of this association. It is therefore absolutely necessary, in any transaction involving the

sale or purchase of lumber in which a member of this association relies upon the efficacy of the inspec- tion department of the association for the just protection of his interests, that it be clearly stated in the contract of sale or purchase that national inspec- tion is to prevail. The following form for such a

clause in contracts of that nature is recommended:

The lumber is to be inspected according to the rules and regulations of the National Hardwood Lumber Association by a national

inspector.

6. With the foregoing clause in a contract, the

shipper may apply national inspection at loading

point, or it may be inspected at destination. The

point of inspection may be governed by the con- venience in securing the services of a national

inspector.

7. If it is desired that the contract provide for national inspection at destination in the event of a

difference between the inspection of the seller and

buyer, it is necessary that the contract contain a

clause so specifying, or else it can only be made

binding by the mutual consent of both parties

after a dispute has arisen. The following form is recommended when desiring to cover the above

conditions in the contract: The lumber is to be inspected according to the rules and regulations of the National Hardwood Lumber Association, and in the event of disapproval of the inspection of the shipper, inspection by

a national inspector shall govern.

8. When national inspection is agreed to either

in a sales or purchase contract, or subsequently,

the arrangement should also provide for the disposition of the expense of the inspection as such

disposition is entirely subject to arrangement

between buyer and seller. It may be divided

between them or may be borne entirely by either, but a bill of expenses will be rendered by the

secretary against the member calling for the inspection, which bill is due and payable upon demand.

9. In all transactions in which the official bonded

inspection certificate of the association is the agreed

basis between buyer and seller and the inspection

is applied at point of shipment the shipper, in order

to obtain the full protection of the association, must

promptly forward one copy of the inspection report to the buyer. If copy of the certificate is not in the hands of the buyer at time of arrival at destination

of the shipment covered by the certificate, the seller can not insist upon settlement on basis of such

certificate.

10. In all transactions in which the official bonded certificate of the association is the agreed

basis between buyer and seller and the inspection

is applied at destination, the buyer in order to

obtain the full protection of the association must

forward copy of the certificate promptly to the

shipper and not later than three days after receipt

of certificate from the inspector.

11. Where a member makes a sale to a buyer

who is not a member, such sale being based on

official national inspection and the buyer desires and it is so agreed that such inspection be applied

at destination, it shall be the duty of the seller as a member of the National Hardwood Lumber

Association to call for official inspection on the

shipment within five days after receipt of notice of

its arrival at destination.

12. If any member of the association declines to recognize official inspection after agreeing to be

governed by it, the secretary is instructed on

receipt of sufficient evidence of the repudiation to drop such member from the rolls; if any buyer not a member violates agreement to settle for any ship20
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.14

ment on the basis of official national inspection, the name of such buyer will be published in the

official monthly bulletin of the association, together

with a statement of the facts in the case.

13. When original national inspection is made at loading point according to agreement it shall be

considered a repudiation of the inspection if the buyer fails to settle in full for the shipment as shown by the association certificate. 14. When original national inspection is made at destination according to agreement, it shall be

considered a repudiation of the inspection if the buyer fails to settle in full for that portion of the shipment which the association certificate shows to be in accordance with the specifications of the order, provided that the portion of the shipment which

is below the grades specified does not amount to more than 5 per cent of the total footage of the shipment. Off-grade stock may be held for the

disposition of the shipper or accepted in accordance

with any adjustment upon which buyer and seller may be able to agree. NATIONAL REINSPECTION REGULATIONS AND GUARANTY

1. Should either party to the transaction in- volving an original inspection be dissatisfied with

the result of the same, it is within his right, whether

a member of the association or not, to call for re- inspection, provided stock is intact. This class of inspection can only be obtained by

applying to the secretary.

2. All applications for reinspection shall be made

within 10 days from receipt of lumber at destination,

provided the original inspection was made at point

of shipment, or within 10 days from date of original

inspection, if same is made at destination.

3. Upon approval of application for the rein- spection of a block of lumber for which a certificate has been regularly issued by a national inspector, the chief inspector shall proceed as promptly as

possible to reinspect the lumber in person, or by a

deputy, other than the inspector making the

original inspection.

4. If the reinspection results in a difference, in favor of the party complaining, of more than 4 per

cent in money value from the original inspection, the party complaining may receive the amount of such difference directly from this association by

sending to the secretary an itemized statement showing in detail the items and amounts as shown

on the original certificate and the reinspection

certificate. No claim on reinspection will be paid

until prices placed on off-grade items are approved

by the executive committee. The association does

not under any circumstances take possession of the lumber or dispose of it. 5. In all cases where claims develop on the 4

per cent money value clause, the association will assume handling charges not to exceed the fee per thousand feet charged by the association for con- ducting the original inspection. No claim will be approved and passed for payment where handling

charges are in excess of these rates. In cases where

claims are approved, the association charges for the

reinspection will be canceled. The association assumes no liability on account of demurrage, or

for any expense other than herein provided.

6. If the difference does not exceed 4 per cent

the party demanding the reinspection shall pay all expenses connected therewith.

7. This guaranty does not apply on certificate issued on lumber loaded green; nor on lumber in- spected and piled down at point of shipment and

reinspected at destination; nor on lumber that has been kiln-dried, dressed, or worked after original

inspection has been applied. The association re- serves the right to decline official reinspection on lumber shipped in leaky cars or delayed beyond a

reasonable period in transit, or which does not

arrive at destination in its original container. SPECIAL INSPECTION No. 1 common and better. No. 1 common and better means the full run of the logs with all grades below No. 1 common ex- cluded. Log run. Log run means the full run of the logs, with all grades below No. 2 common excluded. Mill run. Mill run means the full run of the logs, No. 3 common and better. No. 1 common face. No. 1 common face is the same as the standard grade of No. 1 common, except that inspection shall be made from the good face. The reverse side of the cuttings must be sound. No. 2 common face. No. 2 common face is the same as the standard

grade of No. 2 common, except that inspection shall be made fiom the good face. The reverse side of the cuttings must be sound. No. 2 common clear cutting.

Where the No. 2 common grade specifies sound

cuttings, a special grade of No. 2 common may be

made, specifying clear face instead of sound cuttings. No. 2 common sound cutting.

Where the No. 2 common grade specifies clear cuttings, a special grade of No. 2 common may be

made, specifying sound instead of clear face cuttings. No. 3-A and No. 3-B common.

No. 3-A common must work 33}4 per cent clear face in cuttings not less than 3 inches wide by 2 feet long, graded from the poor side of the piece. This

grade will also admit pieces which grade not below

No. 2 common on the good face, the reverse side of the cuttings to be sound. No. 3-B common consists of all No. 3 common below the grade of No. 3-A

common.

North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), general

inspection rules, January 1, 1927.

21
400.14 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

(This association's general classification and inspec- tion rules conform to the lumber inspection provisions and service of the American Lumber Standards,

400.0. The following special instructions are added

INSPECTION

Standard.

All lumber shall be sound, sap no objection.

Wane may be allowed one-eighth of the width of the

piece measured across face of wane, extending one- fourth of the length on one corner or its equivalent on two or more corners, provided that not over

10 per cent of the pieces of any one size shall show

such wane.

Merchantable.

All sizes under 9 inches shall show some heart

entire length on one side; sizes 9 inches and over

shall show some heart the entire length on two

opposite sides. Wane may be allowed one-eighth of the width of the piece measured across face of wane, and extending one-fourth of the length of the piece on one corner or its equivalent on two or more

corners; provided, that not over 10 per cent of the

pieces of any one size shall show such wane.

Prime.

Flooring shall show one heart face, regardless of sap on opposite side, free from through or round

shakes or knots exceeding 1 inch in diameter, or more than four in a board on the face side. Boards 7 inches and under wide shall show one

heart face and two-thirds heart on opposite side; over 7 inches wide shall show two-thirds heart on

both sides all free from round or through shakes,

large or unsound knots. Plank 7 inches and under wide shall show one

heart face, over 7 inches wide shall show two-thirds heart on both sides, all free from round or through

shakes, large or unsound knots. Scantling shall show three corners heart, free from

through or round shakes or unsound knots. Dimension sizes: All square lumber shall show

two-thirds heart on two sides, and not less than onehalf heart on two other sides. Other sizes shall show two-thirds heart on faces and show heart twothirds of length on edges, excepting when the width

exceeds the thickness by 3 inches or over, then it shall show heart on the edge for one-half the length.

Stepping shall show three corners heart, free from

shakes and all knots exceeding half inch in diameter,

and not more than six in a board. Rough edge, or flitch, shall be sawed from good

heart timber, and shall be measured in the middle, on the narrow face, free from injurious shakes or unsound knots. Wane on not over 5 per cent of the pieces in any

one size shall be allowed as on merchantable quality.

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, inspection of lumber, February 1, 1927. This association's inspection and shipping provisions conform to the lumber inspection provisions

and service of the American Lumber Standards,

400.0.

Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, inspection of lumber, April 5, 1925. This association's inspection and shipping provisions conform to the lumber inspection provisions

and service of the American Lumber Standards,

400.0. Southeastern Forest Products Association, inspection of lumber, September 1, 1925. This association's inspection and shipping provisions conform to the lumber inspection provisions and service of the American Lumber Standards,

400.0. Southeastern Forest Products Association, Interstate Rules of 1916, inspection of southern yellow

pine lumber, edition of June 1, 1926. This association's inspection rules for yellow pine

lumber in standard, merchantable, prime, and

dimension sizes are the same as the rules of the North Carolina Pine Association, 400.14. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

inspection of lumber, June 15, 1925. This association's shipping and inspection provisions conform to the lumber inspection provisions

and service of the American Lumber Standards,

400.0. Southern Pine Association, inspection of lumber

March 23, 1927. This association's inspection and shipping provisions conform to the lumber inspection provisions

and service of the American Lumber Standards,

400.0. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, inspection of Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, larch and

fir, white fir, cedar, and spruce lumber, July 1, 1925. This association's lumber inspection provisions

and service conform to that of the American

Lumber Standards, 400.0. 400.2 SOFTWOOD GRADING RULES

400.20 General Items

American lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. DEFINITIONS OF MAXIMUM DEFECTS AND BLEMISHES A defect is defined as any irregularity occurring

in or on wood that may lower some of its strength,

durability, or utility values. A blemish is defined as anything, not classified as a defect, marring the appearance of the wood.

The commonly recognized defects and blemishes

occurring in (names of species manufactured) yard

lumber are: Bark pockets.

Bird's-eye. Checks.

Cross breaks. Cross grain. Decay. Gum spots or streaks. Holes. Imperfect manufacture.

Eiiots. Pitch.

Pitch pockets. Pitch seams. Pitch streaks. Pith. Pith flecks. Shake.

Splits. Stain or discoloration. Wane.

Warp.

22
TIMBEE AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.20

BARE POCKETS A bark pocket is a patch of bark partially or wholly

inclosed in the wood. In size it is classified the same as pitch pockets.

BIRD'S-EYE "Bird's-eye" is a small central spot with the wood

fibers arranged around it in the form of an ellipse, so as to give the appearance of an eye. "Bird's- eye," unless unsound or hollow, shall not be considered a defect. CHECKS A check is a lengthwise separation of the wood,

which occurs usually across the rings of annual

growth.

A surface check is a check occurring on the surface

of the piece.

A small surface check is a perceptible opening not

over 4 inches long.

A medium surface check is one not over ^ inch wide and over 4 but not more than 10 inches long.

A large surface check is one over inch wide and

over 10 inches long.

An end check is one occurring on an end of a

piece.

A through check is one extending from one surface through the piece to the opposite surface or to an

adjoining surface. A heart check is one starting at the pith and

extending toward but not to the surface of a piece. CROSS BREAKS A cross break is a separation of the wood cells across the grain, such as may be due to tension

resulting from unequal shrinkage or mechanical

stresses. CROSS GRAIN

Cross-grained wood is that in which the cells or

fibers do not run parallel with the axis, or sides, of a piece.

Slight cross grain is a slope of the grain not over

1 inch in a length of 15 inches. Medium cross grain is a slope of the grain over 1 inch in a length of 15 inches but not more than

1 inch in a length of 10 inches. Steep cross grain is a slope of the grain over 1 inch in a length of 10 inches. DECAY Decay is a disintegration of the wood substance due to the action of wood-destroying fungi. The

words "dote" and "rot" mean the same as decay.

Incipient decay is the early stage of decay in which

the disintegration has not proceeded far enough to

soften or otherwise change the hardness of the wood

perceptibly. It is usually accompanied by a slight discoloration or bleaching of the wood.

Firm red heart is a stage of incipient decay characterized by a reddish color produced in the hard- wood, which does not unfit the wood for the majority

offyard purposes.

Water soak (or stain) is a term applied to a

generally water-soaked area in heartwood, which is usually interpreted as the incipient stage of certain wood rots. Advanced (or typical) decay is the older stage of decay in which the disintegration is readily recog- nized because the wood has become punky, soft and

spongy, stringy, ring shaked, pitted, or crumbly.

Decided discoloration or bleaching of the rotted wood is often apparent.

A pocket rot is typical decay which appears in the form of a hole, pocket, or area of soft rot, usually

surrounded by apparently sound wood.

GUM SPOTS AND STREAKS A gum spot or streak is an accumulation of gumlike substance occurring as a small patch or streak

in a piece. It may occur in conjunction with a

bird peck, or other injury to the growing wood. In

size they are classified the same as pitch pockets or pitch streaks. HOLES

Holes in wood may extend partially or entirely

through the piece and be from any cause. When

holes are permitted, the average of the maximum

and minimum diameters measured at right angles to the direction of the hole shall be used in measuring

the size, unless otherwise stated. A pin worm, hole is one not over inch in diameter,

A medium worm hole is one over r&, but not more

than }/i inch in diameter. A large worm hole is one over }/i inch in diameter. IMPERFECT MANUFACTURE

Imperfect manufacture includes all defects or blemishes which are produced in manufacturing,

such as chipped grain, loosened grain, raised grain, torn grain, skips in dressing, hit and miss, variation

in sawing, miscut lumber, machine burn, machine

gouge, mismatching, and insufficient tongue or groove. Chipped grain means that a part of the surface is chipped or broken out in very short particles below

the line of cut. It should not be classed as torn

grain and, as usually found, shall not be considered a defect, unless it is present in excess of 25 per cent

of the area. Loosened grain means that a small portion of the wood has become loosened but not displaced.

Raised grain is a roughened condition of the sur- face of dressed lumber in which the hard summer

wood is raised above the softer spring wood, but not

torn loose from it. Torn grain means that a part of the wood is torn out in dressing, and in depth is of four distinct characters; slight, medium, heavy, and deep.

Slight torn grain is not over inch in depth.

Medium torn grain is over but not more than

ys inch in depth.

Heavy torn grain is over ^, but not more than 3^ inch in depth.

Deep torn grain is over y$ inch in depth.

A skip is an area on a piece that failed to surface. 52688°—27 3 23
400.20 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

A slight skip is one that failed to surface smoothly,

whose area does not exceed the product of the width

of the piece in inches multiplied by 6. A heavy skip is one that the planer knife did not

touch. Hit and miss is a series of skipped spots with

surfaced areas between, or with skips the entire length when not over y§ inch in depth.

Variation in sawing is a deviation from the line of cut. Slight variation is not more than x§- inch in 1-inch material, H inch in 2-inch, inch in 3 to 7 inch, and 34 inch in 8 inches and up. Miscut lumber is that which has a greater variation

in thickness or width at different places on the piece

than specified for variation in sawing.

A machine burn is a darkening or charring of the wood due to overheating by the machine knives. A machine gouge is a groove across a piece due to the machine cutting below the desired line of cut. Mismatched material is worked material that does not fit tightly at all points of contact between

adjoining pieces, or in which the surfaces of adjoining pieces are not in the same plane.

Slight mismatch is a surface variation not over

£i inch. Medium mismatch is a surface variation over but not more than inch. Heavy mismatch is a surface variation over ^

inch. KNOTS A knot is a branch or limb embedded in the tree which has been cut through in the process of lumber

manufacture. Knots are classified according to

size, form, quality, and occurrence. The average

of the maximum and minimum diameters shall be used in measuring the size of knots, unless otherwise

stated. SIZE A pin knot is one not over % inch in diameter. A small knot is one over 3^2 inch, but not more

than % inch in diameter. A medium knot is one over % inch, but not more

than 1}4 inches in diameter. A large knot is one over 13^ inches in diameter. FORM

A round knot is one oval or circular in form. A spike knot is a branch or limb sawed in a length- wise direction. QUALITY

A sound knot is solid across its face, as hard as the surrounding wood, and shows no indications of decay. It may vary in color from red to black. An unsound knot is solid across its face, but contains incipient decay.

A decayed knot is softer than the surrounding

wood and contains advanced decay.

A tight knot is one so fixed by growth or position that it will firmly retain its place in the piece.

An intergrown knot is one whose rings of annual

growth are completely intergrown with those of the surrounding wood.

A water-tight knot is one whose rings of annual

growth are completely intergrown with those of the surrounding wood on one surface of the piece, and

which is sound on that surface. Note.—Definitions for sound, tight, intergrown, or water-tight knots may be combined in one or more definitions. An encased knot is one whose rings of annual

growth are not intergrown and homogeneous with

those of the surrounding wood. The encasement may be partial or complete; or pitch or bark. A "not firm" knot is one which under ordinary

conditions will hold its place in a dry board and

yet under pressure can be started but not easily

pushed out of the piece.

A loose knot is one not held firmly in place by

growth or position and can not be relied upon to remain in place in the board. A pith knot is a sound knot with a pith hole not more than 34 inch in diameter. A hollow knot is an apparently sound knot with a

relatively large hole in it. OCCURRENCE

A single knot is one occurring by itself with the

fibers of the wood in which it occurs deflected around it. A knot cluster is two or more knots grouped to- gether as a unit with the fibers of the wood deflected around the entire unit. A group of single knots is not a knot cluster. Branch knots are two or more knots branching

from a common center. PITCH

Pitch is a poorly defined accumulation of resin in the wood cells in a more or less irregular patch.

Light pitch is the lightly evident presence of

pitch.

Medium pitch is a slightly more evident trace of pitch than is the light. Heavy pitch is the very evident presence of pitch

showing by its color and consistency.

Massed pitch is a clearly defined accumulation of

solid pitch in a body by itself in a piece of lumber.

PITCH POCKETS A pitch pocket is a well-defined opening between

rings of annual growth, usually containing, or which has contained, more or less pitch, either

solid or liquid. Bark also may be present in the

pocket.

A very small pitch pocket is one not over ]/$ inch

in width and not over 2 inches in length.

A small pitch pocket is one not over }/$ inch in width and not over 4 inches in length, or not over

34 inch in width and not over 2 inches in length.

A medium pitch pocket is one not over Y% inch in width and not over 8 inches in length, or not over % inch in width and not over 4 inches in length.

A large pitch pocket is one whose width or length exceeds the maximum stated as permissible for a medium pitch pocket.

A closed pitch pocket is one that does not show an

opening on both sides of the piece.

24
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.20

PITCH SEAMS A pitch seam is a shake or check which is filled with pitch. PITCH STREAKS A pitch streak is a well-defined accumulation of pitch in a more or less regular streak. A small pitch streak is one not over one-twelfth the width by one-sixth the length of the surface on

which it occurs. A medium pitch streak is one over one-twelfth but

not more than one-sixth the width by over one-sixth but not more than one-third the length of the

surface on which it occurs. A large pitch streak is over one-sixth the width by

one-third the length of the surface on which it occurs. PITH

Pith is the small soft core occurring in the struc- tural center of a log. The wood immediately

surrounding the pith often contains small checks,

shakes, or numerous pin knots, and is discolored; any such combination of defects and blemishes is known as heart center.PITH FLECKS A pith fieck is a narrow streak resembling pith

usually brownish, up to several inches in length on the surface of a piece resulting from burrowing

of larvae in the growing tissue of the tree. SHAKE A shake is a lengthwise separation of the wood,

which occurs usually between and parallel to the

rings of annual growth.

A fine shake is one with a barely perceptible j opening.

A slight shake is one with more than a perceptible

opening but not over ^ inch in width. A medium shake is one with an opening over ^

but not more than Y% inch wide. An open shake is one with an opening over 3^8 inch wide. A through shake is one extending from one surface through the piece to the opposite surface or to an

adjoining surface.

SPLITS A split is a lengthwise separation of the wood, due

to the tearing apart of the wood cells. A short split is one whose length does not exceed

either the width of a piece or one-sixth its length.

A medium split is one whose length exceeds the width of a piece, but does not exceed one-sixth

its length.

A long split is one whose length exceeds one-sixth the length of a piece. STAIN (OR DISCOLORATION)

Stain is a discoloration, occurring on or in lumber,

of any color other than the natural color of the

piece on which it appears. It is classified as light, medium, and heavy.

Light stain is a slight difference in color which

will not materially impair the appearance of the

piece if given a natural finish.

Medium stain is a pronounced difference in color which, although it does not obscure the grain of the wood, would customarily be objectionable in a

natural but not in a painted finish. Heavy stain is a difference in color so pronounced

as practically to obscure the grain of the wood.

WANE

Wane is bark, or the lack of wood or bark, from

any cause, on the edge or corner of a piece.

Slight wane is not over }/i inch wide on the surface on which it appears, for one-sixth the length and

one-fourth the thickness of the piece.

Medium wane is over 34 inch but not more than

}4 inch wide on the surface on which it appears, for one-sixth the length and one-fourth the thickness of the piece.

Large wane is over % inch wide on the surface on

which it appears, and/or over one-sixth the length

and one-fourth the thickness of the piece.

WARP

Warp is any variation from a true or plane surface.

It includes bow, crook, cup, or any combination

thereof. Bow is a deviation flatwise from a straight line drawn from end to end of a piece and is measured

at the point of greatest distance from the straight hue.Crook is a deviation edgewise from a straight line drawn from end to end of a piece and is measured at the point of greatest distance from the straight line. It is known as slight, small, medium, and large.

Based on a piece 4 inches wide and 16 feet long,

! the distances for the different degrees of crook shall be: For slight crook, a maximum of 1 inch; small

crook, inches; medium crook, 3 inches; and

large crook, over 3 inches. For wider pieces it shall be }/& inch less for each additional 2 inches of width. Shorter or longer pieces may have the same curvature. Cup is a curve in a piece across the grain or width

of a piece. It is measured at the point of greatest deviation from a straight line drawn from edge to edge of a piece. It is known as slight, medium, and

deep.

Based on a piece 12 inches wide, the distances for the different degrees of cup shall be: For slight cup, a maximum of 34 inch; medium cup, % inch; and

deep cup, }/% inch. Narrower or wider pieces may

have the same curvature. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau. Definitions of defects and blemishes for soft pine, March 23, 1927. Similar to American Lumber Standards.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association. Definitions of defects and blemishes

for California white pine, sugar pine, white fir, Douglas fir, May 1, 1927. Similar to American

Lumber Standards. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.). Definitions of defects and blemishes for North Carolina

pine, January 1, 1927. Similar to American Lumber Standards. 25
400.20 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association. Definitions of defects and blemishes

for hemlock and tamarack, February 1, 1927. Similar to American Lumber Standards. Northern Pine Manufacturers Association. Definitions of defects and blemishes for northern white

pine, spruce, and tamarack, April 15, 1927. Similar to American Lumber Standards. Red Cedar lumber Manufacturers Association. Definitions of defects and blemishes for western red

cedar, August 1, 1925. Similar to American Lumber Standards. Southeastern Forest Products Association. Defi- nitions of defects and blemishes for southern pine,

September 1, 1925. Similar to American Lumber

Standards. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association.

Definitions of defects and blemishes for cypress, June 15, 1925. Similar to American Lumber Standards. Southern Pine Association. Definitions of defects and blemishes for southern pine, August 1, 1926. Similar to American Lumber Standards. Southern Pine Association, the Gulf Coast Classification. Definitions of defects and blemishes for pitch pine resawn lumber and sawn timber, March

15, 1923. Similar to American Lumber Standards. West Coast lumbermen's Association. Defini- tions of defects and blemishes for Douglas fir, Sitka

spruce, west coast hemlock, and western red cedar,

July 1, 1926. Similar to American Lumber Standards. Western Pine Manufactures Association. Defi- nitions of defects and blemishes for Pondosa pine,

Idaho white pine, larch, fir, white fir, cedar, and

spruce, July 1, 1925. Similar to American Lumber Standards. 400.21 Cedar grading rules. American Lumber Industry. Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber

Standards, revised July 1, 1926. For the standard sizes and basic grading rules for American softwood lumber see American Lumber Standards 400.0 to 413.0, inclusive. National Hardwood lumber Association, cedar grading rules, January, 1927. AROMATIC RED CEDAR

All lumber to be well and evenly manufactured,

edged as near parallel sides as possible, and to run good average widths and lengths. Taper sawed

lumber to be measured one-third distance from the narrow end. Sound knots, sound heart, and white

streaks are not to be considered defects. All odd

lengths must be measured. Free wane or its equivalent in other defects along edges and ends shall be

admitted.

Firsts and seconds. Three inches and wider, 4 feet and longer, the

4-foot lengths to be not less than 4 inches wide.

Lumber to grade sound with one face practically free from sap. If sap shows on face side, reverse side to grade not less than 50 per cent red. Pieces 4 inches and over wide, 6 feet and over long,

shall admit one unsound standard defect. No. 1 common.

Three inches and wider, 3 feet and longer. The

3-foot lengths to grade No. 1 quality; the 4-foot lengths to cut not less than 75 per cent in two sound

red faced cuttings. Five-foot and longer lengths to cut not less than two-third sound red face cutting, no cutting considered less than 3 inches wide and 24

inches long. No. 1 common and better. To consist of a combined grade of firsts and seconds and No. 1 common, comprising the full product of the log of the grades specified, but not to exceed 40

per cent of the No. 1 common grade. Not to exceed

10 per cent under 6-foot lengths. Not to exceed

10 per cent 3-inch widths. No. 2 common. Two inches and wider, 2 feet and longer; not to exceed 20 per cent of 2-foot lengths. Must work

333^ per cent sound cuttings, no cutting to be considered which does not contain 48 square inches. Sap no defect.

Pacific lumber Inspection Bureau, cedar grading

rules, Schedule M, 1925. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Bark seams or pockets are well-defined markings

between the grains of the wood containing more or

less bark. A small bark seam or pocket is one not to exceed

3^8 inch in width and not over 4 inches in length.

A medium bark seam or pocket is one }/% inch,

but not to exceed inch in width, over 4 inches but

not over 6 inches in length.

A large bark seam or pocket is over inch in width and over 6 inches long.

An oil streak is a well-defined accumulation of cedar oil and shall not be considered a defect. PORT ORFORD CEDAR Rough green clears. Defects based on 8-inch widths 12 feet long. Defects in all cases to be considered in connection with

the size of the piece. Short clears: Widths in short clears will be 3

inches and wider in multiples of 1 inch. Lengths

3 feet to 7 feet 6 inches long in multiples of 6 inches. Long clears : Widths in long clears will be 3 inches and wider in multiples of 1 inch. Lengths 8 feet and longer in multiples of 6 inches. No. 2 clear and better edge grain.

Under 3 inches thick: Must be sound lumber,

well manufactured. Angle of grain to be within

the angle of 45° from vertical. Will allow occasional

variations in sawing and light-colored sap one-fourth

the width; in addition, will allow on face side, which

is the best side, small bark seams, if not extending

through the thickness of the piece; bird's-eye burls 26
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.20

showing on both sides and on the reverse side; knots,

characteristic of the species, if not in clusters, up to and including % inch in diameter and/or bark burls or bark pockets if not extending through the thick- ness of the piece or equivalent defects. Three

defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and/or corresponding half of edges.

Dimensions, 8 inches and up, but not including 5

inches thick. Dimension 3 inches and up, but not including

5 inches thick, must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Angle of grain to be within the angle of 45° from vertical. Will allow occasional variations

in sawing and light-colored sap one-third the w

Tidth, in addition, will allow on face side, which is the best

side and/or corresponding half of edges, small bark seams if not extending through the thickness of the

piece, bird's-eye burls showing on both sides. On

the reverse face and/or corresponding half of edges,

knots, characteristic of the species, if not in clusters, up to and including 13^ inches in diameter, varying

according to the size of the piece, and/or medium

bark seams or pockets if not extending through the

thickness of the piece or equivalent defects. Three

defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face or corresponding half of edges. Edge grain must

show at least two-thirds of face width. Slight

seasoning checks no defect. One split or check not

longer than the width of the piece allowed. Dimensions, 5 inches and thicker. Dimension, 5 inches and thicker, must be sound

lumber, well manufactured. Angle of grain to be

within the angle of 45° from vertical. Will allow

occasional variations in sawing and light-colored sap

one-third the width; in addition, will allow on the

face side, which is the best side, and/or corresponding half of edges medium bark seams if not extending through the thickness of the piece; or bird's-eye

burls showing on both sides; and on the reverse side and/or corresponding half of edges, knots, characteristic of the species, if not in clusters, 2 inches and less in diameter, varying according to the size of the piece, or equivalent defects. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face or cor- responding half of edges. Edge grain must show

for at least two-thirds of face widths. Slight sea- soning checks no defect. One split or check not

longer than the width of the piece allowed. An

occasional piece 18 feet or longer may contain one

larger defect showing on one or two surfaces if so placed that by cutting it out the shortest cutting

will be 8 feet or longer, provided balance of piece is practically free from other defects. No. 2 clear and better flat grain. No. 2 clear and better flat grain, under 3 inches in thickness must be sound lumber, well manufactured.

Will allow occasional variations in sawing and light- colored sap one-quarter the width and three- quarters the thickness, or its equivalent; in addition,

will allow on the face side, which is the best side, small bark seams, if not extending through the

thickness of the piece, or bird's-eye burls showing on

both sides; and on the reverse side and/or cor- responding half of edges, knots, characteristic of the species, if not in clusters, not over 3^ inch in diameter in 1-inch stock and varying according to the thickness of the piece up to 1 inch and/or small bark seams if not extending through the thickness

of the piece or equivalent defects. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face or cor- responding half of edges. Edge grain may be in- cluded at shipper's option.

Dimensions, 8 inches and up but not including 5 inches

thick. Dimensions 3 inches and up, but not including

5 inches thick, must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing

and light-colored sap one-third the width and three- quarters the thickness or its equivalent; in addition,

will allow on face side, which is the best side and

corresponding half of edges small bark seams if not

extending through the thickness of the piece; bird's- eye burls showing on both sides and on the reverse

side and corresponding half of edges, knots, characteristic of the species, if not in clusters, up to and

including 13^ inches in diameter, varying according

to the size of the piece and/or medium bark seams or pockets, if not extending through the thickness of the piece, or equivalent defects. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face or corresponding half of edges. Edge grain may be

included at shipper's option. Slight seasoning checks no defect. One split or check not longer

than the width of the piece allowed. Dimensions, 5 inches and thicker. Dimensions 5 inches and thicker must be sound

lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional

variations in sawing and light-colored sap one-third the width and three-quarters the thickness or its equivalent; in addition, will allow, on the face side, which is the best side, medium barks seams, if not

extending through the thickness of the piece, or

bird's-eye burls showing on both sides. On reverse

side or corresponding half of edges, knots, characteristic of the species, if not in clusters, 2 inches and less in diameter, varying according to the size of the piece, or equivalent defects. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and/or

corresponding half of edges. Slight seasoning checks no defect. One split or check not longer than the width of the piece allowed. An occasional piece 18

feet or longer may contain one larger defect, showing on one or two surfaces if so placed that by cutting

it out the shortest cutting will be 8 feet or longer,

provided balance of piece is practically free from

other defects. In sizes 8 by 8 and larger, boxed hearts are admissible provided material of this description is not coarse grained.

Edge grain may be included at shipper's option. No. 8 clear, edge andjor flat grain at shipper's option;

defects based on 10-inch widths, 12 feet long. Under 3 inches in thickness must be sound lumber,

well manufactured. Will allow occasional varia- 27
400.20 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

tions in sawing and bright or slightly discolored sap one-third the width or its equivalent; in addition, will allow on the face side sound and tight 1-inch knots or small bark seams, well scattered

bird's-eye burls showing on one or two sides, slight

seasoning checks, or equivalent defects; on the

reverse side, knots, characteristic of the species,

bark seams, or pockets. Four defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and/or corresponding half of edges.

Dimensions, S inches thick up to but not including 5 inches thick. Dimensions, 3 inches thick up to but not includ- ing 5 inches thick, to be graded from the best face, the defects on reverse face to be slightly in excess

of those on the best face, must be sound lumber,

well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing and bright or slightly discolored sap

one-third the width, or its equivalent; in addition,

will allow sound and tight knots up to 1}<£ inches

in diameter, medium bark seams, well scattered

bird's-eye burls, slight seasoning checks, or equivalent defects. Knots characteristic of the species

permitted on the poorest face and/or corresponding

half of edges. Four defects allowed for each 12

linear feet on each face and/or corresponding half

of edges.

Dimensions, 5 inches and thicker. To be graded from the best face, defects on the

reverse face to be only slightly in excess of those on the best face, must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing and bright or slightly discolored sap one-third the width, or the equivalent; in addition, will allow sound and tight knots up to 13^ inches in diameter

or medium bark pockets, or a split or check not

longer than the width of the piece, well scattered

bird's-eye burls, or equivalent defects. Slight sea- soning checks no defect. Knots, characteristic of the species, permitted on the poorest face and/or

corresponding half of edges. Four defects allowed

for each 12 linear feet on each face and/or corre- sponding half of edges. In sizes 8 by 8 and larger

boxed hearts are admissible provided material of this description is not coarse grained. An occasional piece 18 feet or longer may contain one

larger defect, showing on one or two surfaces if so placed that by cutting it out the shortest cutting

will be 8 feet or longer, provided the balance of piece is practically No. 2 clear. Special factory stock. Special factory stock, 2 inches and thicker, 8 inches and wider, odd and/or even widths, 7 feet or longer multiples of 1 foot. Each piece to contain 70 per cent or more clear cuttings 3 feet or

longer. Port Orford cedar sap clear. This grade will admit any amount of bright sap; otherwise than this the grade will follow the grade

as outlined for No. 2 clear and better or No. 3 clear.

Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers' Association, cedar grading rules, August 1, 1925. Common grades. Discoloration through exposure to the elements

shall not be considered a defect in the common

grades.

All common grades, including timbers, either rough or dressed are subject to shrinkage.

All common lumber shipped rough must be well manufactured to sizes ordered. Occasional slight variation in sawing will be

allowed. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, cedar

grading rules, July 1, 1926. WESTERN BED CEDAR

Color of wood is not a defect. This applies to

all grades. (Investigation in the Forest Products

Laboratory, College of Forestry, University of Washington, Seattle, Wash. (1916-17) proved that

the "brown streaks" or discoloration of western

red cedar does not detract from its durability or make it in any way unserviceable.)

Bevel, bungalow, or colonial siding is produced

by resawing lumber surfaced four sides, on a bevel

so as to produce two pieces thicker on one edge

than the other. It shall be graded from the face

side, and the thick edge considered part of the face. In 4-inch siding it is considered that 24-inch will be covered; in 6-inch siding 1 inch; and in siding

wider than 6 inch, 1}4 inch. Slash and/or vertical grain. Color is not a defect. Occasional slight variation in thickness, not to exceed a total of ye inch in any two pieces. Defects on thin edge which will cover when laid should not

be given the same consideration as defects elsewhere. Western Pine Manufacturers' Association, cedar grading rules, July 1, 1925. Rules for grading white fir, cedar, and spruce lumber are the same as the rules of this association

for grading white fir, cedar, and spruce lumber,

400.23. 400.22 Cypress Grading Rules.

Southern Cypress Manufacturers' Association, cypress grading rules, June 15, 1925. The grade standards and yard and industrial

size standards of this association conform to the American Lumber Standards, 411.0. 400.23 Fir Grading Rules. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, standard

grading and dressing rules for Douglas fir, Sitka

spruce, west coast hemlock, and western red cedar lumber, July 1, 1926. GSNERAI INSTRUCTIONS The inspection of lumber is the analysis of the

quality of the product. Inflexible rules for the

inspection of lumber are impossible; therefore, variations determined by practical experience must

be allowed. The analysis being visual, mathematical precision is impossible and, therefore, a reason28
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.23

able difference of opinion between inspectors must

be recognized. A shipment shall be considered as on grade if, upon official reinspection, 95 per cent

or more is found to be of the grade invoiced. In mixed car shipments, each grade and kind shall be

considered separately.

The grade of all lumber is determined by the number, size, character, and position of defects visible in a piece. The number or size permitted in a grade

varies as the area of the piece increases or decreases

in relation to the basic size piece specified. With

this in view, each piece is considered and its grade

determined by its general character and the sum

of all its defects. When defects are encountered which are not

described in these grading rules they shall be considered as equivalent to described defects in ratio to their effect. Equivalent means equal in effect, and in construing and applying these rules the defects allowed,

whether specified or not, are understood to be

equivalent in effect to those mentioned applying to stock under consideration. Defects in rough stock which can be removed in working to standard size, shall not be considered

when determining the grade of the piece.

Splits and checks shall be considered as to length

and direction as herein specified.

Bright sap is not limited in any grade, except as

specifically provided.

A grade must be representative and not made up

of either high and/or low line pieces. The number,

size, and kind of defects allowed in a grade do not

represent the average of the grade, but indicate the low line piece. The average of a grade represents the gradation from the low line of the grade to the low line piece of the next higher grade. The re- verse side should be approximately within one

grade of the face grade.

Where a base grade and better is ordered, for instance No. 2 and better common, it shall mean

principally No. 2 common with a small percentage

of the higher grade of common. This does not contemplate furnishing a log-run grade, but merely

a grade of common. The grade of C and better

shall mean principally C. Such grades are not standard and should be covered by special contract.

If "mill run" or "log run" is ordered, it shall mean the entire product of the log, with all culls eliminated. Culls shall be defined as all lumber

falling below No. 3 common. A shipment of random or mixed widths shall contain some of each width. A shipment of random or mixed lengths shall contain some of each length.

Material not conforming to standard sizes and

grades shall be governed by special contract. Lumber, rough or surfaced two sides (except

dimension) shall be graded from the face or best

side, and lumber which is dressed on one side only

shall be graded from the dressed side, except when

otherwise specified. Dimension and timbers are graded for strength; defects must be considered in relation to their effect on the strength of the piece.

Flooring, ceiling, rustic, and drop siding, at shipper's option, may be shipped SIS or S2S, reverse

side partially surfaced, hollow, or scratched back.

Flat grain flooring, ceiling, partition, drop siding,

and rustic, in B and C grades, may include, at shipper's option, 15 per cent West Coast hemlock.

Flooring, ceiling, partition, drop siding, and rustic, in D grade, may be Douglas fir and/or West Coast

hemlock.

(a) Pieces of flooring, drop siding, partition, and

rustic, with a tongue ys °f an inch scant, and pieces

of ceiling with }4 of an inch or more of tongue, will be admitted in any grade.

(6) In car siding, lining, or roofing, pieces with ^ of an inch or more of tongue will be admitted in any grade, provided such scant tongue does not run more than one-third the length of the piece.

(c) Pieces of shiplap having in No. 1 common a

lap of of an inch, in No. 2 a lap of 34 inch, and in No. 3 a lap of % inch, will be admitted in these

grades.

Bevel, bungalow, and colonial siding thicknesses

are, by reason of methods of resawing, subject to variation as specified in each grade.

Bevel, bungalow, and colonial siding are furnished

in separately bundled lengths or "new bundling" at

shipper's option. New bundling means tying short

pieces in bundles with long, but the percentage of short lengths shall not exceed 30 per cent of 3-foot to 7-foot, and shall be securley tied with not less than four ties. All lengths shall be multiples of 1 foot. In factory lumber 5/4 and thicker, used for the manufacture of doors, sash, etc., which must show

on both sides, the grade is determined by the quantity of suitable cuttings obtained in each piece. All lumber must be full to the length specified. It need not be square butted unless so specified,

but must be of sufficient length to allow trimming

square to the specified length.

Standard lengths for lumber are multiples of

1 foot or 2 feet. Lumber of standard size shall be tallied board

measure. On lumber of standard thickness less than 1 inch (board measure), the board-foot measurement shall be based on the surface dimensions. The board measurement of dressed lumber of standard size shall be based upon the corresponding

standard dimensions of rough green lumber. Lumber finished to special size shall be counted

(tallied) as of the standard rough size necessarily

used in its manufacture.

Lumber must be accepted on grade in the form

in which it was shipped. Any subsequent change

in manufacture or condition will prohibit a rein- spection for the adjustment of claims except with

the consent of all parties interested. Standard dressed sizes apply at commercially

shipping-dry condition. "Commercially shippingdry" lumber is defined as lumber in condition which

will permit of close piling during the ordinary

shipping period without deterioration from stain 29
400.23 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

or decay. "Shipping period" is denned as the time reasonably necessary for delivery to destination. Common grades up to and including 2 by 12 may

be surfaced green or dry. If surfaced green, shall be accepted by the purchaser if upon receipt of shipment the sizes are within 4 per cent of dressed

size. Two by fourteen and wider, timbers and all lumber thicker than 2 inches, if ordered surfaced, are surfaced green. All lumber shipped green is subject to natural shrinkage of 4 per cent. In shipments measured with a board rule, a

piece tally in feet shall be made and this tally shall be the number of feet, board measure, of 1-inch lumber. The tally of lumber thicker than 1 inch

shall be multiplied by the thickness as expressed in inches and fractions of an inch. In material measured with a board rule on actual widths, pieces measuring to the even half foot shall be alternately counted as of the next higher and

lower foot count; fractions below the one-half foot

shall be dropped and fractions above counted as of the next higher foot. REINSPECTION AND SHIPPING PROVISIONS This association's reinspection and shipping provisions conform to lumber inspection provisions and

service of American Lumber Standards, 400.0. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, larch and

fir, white fir, cedar, and spruce, July 1, 1925. STANDARD SIZE OF ROUGH LUMBER The rough-dry sizes conform to the rough-dry

sizes of yard lumber, American Lumber Standards,

411.0. RULES FOR GRADING WHITE FIR, CEDAR, AND SPRUCE LUMBER White fir, cedar, and spruce boards, strips, and

thicker stocks are graded under the rules that are used for the inspection of Idaho white pine. In liixed woods, the stocks of selects and common

carry the same appearance, grade for grade in the

general measurement of defects, as do stocks of Idaho white pine.

The individuality of each wood is maintained in the preparation of stocks for shipments, except under

special agreement between buyer and seller for a mixed wood stock. 400.24 Hemlock Grading Rules.

American lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 400.0 to 413.0, American Lumber Standards

for the basic grading rules for softwood lumber. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for hemlock lumber,

February 1, 1927. This association's grade standards, yard and in- dustrial size standard, description, measurement

and tally for yard lumber conform to the American

Lumber Standards, 411.0

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, hemlock grading rules, Schedule M, 1925.

Pacific hemlock is graded under the same rules as apply to Douglas fir, except black knots typical of the species and sap shall not be considered defects. See 400.14, 402.43, and grading rules for other products of Douglas fir. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, hemlock

grading rules, July 1, 1926. West Coast hemlock products (except bungalow

siding, bevel siding, and box lumber) are graded

by the same rules as govern Douglas fir for like products with the following variations: Bark pockets are interchangeable with pitch

pockets.

Bark seams are interchangeable with pitch seams. Black burls are interchangeable with knots. General instructions and definitions of defects

for Douglas fir, 400.23 apply to West Coast hemlock

as well as other West Coast species.

Dark streaks peculiar to West Coast hemlock

shall not be considered a defect in any grade.

Black burls shall not be considered defects in common grades.

Sizes are the same as for Douglas fir of like stock except when otherwise specified. West Coast Lumber Trade Extension Bureau,

grading rules and sizes for west coast hemlock,

1927. Grading rules and sizes. The grading rules are the same as those of the West Coast Lumbermen's Association, above. The

sizes conform to the American Lumber Standards,

411.0. 400.25 Larch and Tamarack Grading Rules.

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for tamarack lumber,

February 1, 1927. This association's grade standards, yard and

industrial size standard, description, measurement,

and tally for yard lumber conform to the American

Lumber Standards, 411.0. Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for tamarack, April 15, 1925. This association has adopted the American

Lumber Standard grades of yard lumber, in accord- ance with 411.0. Additional grades and sizes are the same as for

pine, 400.26. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for larch, July 1, 1925. This association's grading rules conform to the American Lumber Standards, 411.0. (See 400.26,

grading rules for pine lumber.)

400.26 Pine Grading Rules.

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for soft pine lumber, March 23, 1927. This association's grade standards and yard and

industrial size standards conform to standards and

industrial size standards of the American Lumber

Standards, 411.0. 30
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.26

The thickness and width of heavy joists are the same as the thickness and width of joist and plank,

structural material, American Lumber Standards,

412.0. California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for California pine, May

1, 1926. GRADES AND NOMENCLATURE

The accompanying rules are adopted by the

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association for the grading of California white and

sugar pine, white fir, Douglas fir, and incense cedar. They express as clearly as it is possible to define them the grades of lumber now being made under

the supervision of the association's corps of inspectors.

The interpretation of rule and decision on grade

is vested in a " bureau of grades" maintained for

this purpose by the California White and Sugar

Pine Manufacturers Association.

Yard Lumber Following are the standard grades adopted and

the names by which they are to be known.

Finishing: No. 1 and 2 clear, or B select and better C select, D select. Common boards

(SIS, S2S, or S4S, D. & M. ship-lapped, grooved

roofing.) No. 1 common.

No. 2 common.

No. 3 common.

No. 4 common.

No. 5 common.

Bevel siding. Colonial siding.

Bungalow siding:

B and better. C.D.

E.

Flooring, drop siding.

Ceiling, partition:

C select and better. D select. No. 1 common.

No. 2 common.

No. 3 common.

Molding.

Tank stock. Dimension

No. 1 dimension. No. 2 dimension. No. 3 dimension.

Factory Lumber Factory plank: No. 3 clear factory. No. 3 clear. No. 1 shop. No. 2 shop. No. 3 shop.

Inch factory

Inch No. 3 clear factory.

Inch shop.

Stained shop:

BoxNo. 1 box. No. 2 box.

Pencil stock.

Lath No. 1 lath. No. 2 lath. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

Grading.

The purpose of grades is to maintain a standard

for measure of value between mills manufacturing

the same or similar woods and to harmonize the

natural differences existing between different stocks

of lumber regardless of the character of the logs

from which they are produced, so that a given

grade will represent the same value regardless of the

mill from which it comes. Uniform grades also provide both buyers and sellers of lumber with a measure by which each can determine whether he is buying or selling full value. No arbitrary rules for the inspection of lumber

can be maintained with satisfaction; the variations from any given rule are numerous and suggested by

practical common sense, so nothing more definite than the general features of different grades should be attempted by rules of inspection.

All lumber is graded with special reference to

its suitability for the use intended. With this in view, each piece is considered and its grade deter- mined by its general character, including the loca- tion and sum of all its defects and blemishes. Imperfections in rough stock which can be

removed in dressing to standard size shall not be

considered in determining the grade under these

rules. Planing-mill work should be taken into consideration in all grades of dressed lumber, and its effect on a piece must be left largely to the judgment of the grader.

Wane in lumber is a defect which can not be

covered by rule with satisfaction, and, therefore, must be left to the judgment of the grader.

The lowering of grade on account of wane or other serious defects on the reverse side should be governed by grade, width, and defects in the

piece.

Due consideration in rough stock should be

given for the amount of wane that would be sur- faced off in milling.

When special sizes or patterns of lumber are ordered, unless a special agreement is made, it shall be permissible to ship all of the lower grades

that develop in their manufacture at the usual

differential in prices for these grades, provided

that this does not exceed 15 per cent of the quantity

shipped.

Sizes. The following thicknesses, widths, and lengths

shall be considered standard nominal sizes. All other sizes shall be considered as special.

31
400.26 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Thicknesses: A, ft, 1, 1M, % 2, 2^,

and 3 inches and up in multiples of 1 inch. Widths: One inch and up in multiples of 1 inch on stock width shipments.

Lengths: Eight feet and up in multiples of 1 foot

in yard lumber and 6 feet and up in factory lumber. Not over 5 per cent of 8 and 9 foot lengths shall be

included in random-length shipments of yard lumber. The foregoing does not apply to classes of stock covered contrarily by specific rule. Dressed lumber shall be finished according to the

sizes prescribed in these specifications.

All lumber is turned out from the sawmill on a

practiced economy of thickness and width that

safely provides for the dressed sizes, and stock sold

in the rough must of necessity be taken from lumber

so manufactured. Because of shrinkage and other

factors beyond the control of the manufacturer,

rough, dry lumber may be less than the nominal

size, but shipments of rough stock should provide

approximately 3^-inch more than the standard fin- ished thickness and width for dressing. Measurement and tally. Lumber of standard size shall be tallied board

measure. On lumber of standard thickness less than 1 inch board-foot measurement shall be based on surface dimensions. The board measurement of dressed lumber of standard size shall be based upon the corresponding

standard dimensions of rough green lumber. Lumber finished to special size shall be counted as

of the standard rough size necessarily used in its manufacture.

Material shipped on stock sizes shall be tallied by the number of pieces of each size and length. In shipments measured with a board rule, a piece

tally, in feet, shall be made and this tally shall be

the number of feet, board measure, of 1-inch lumber. The tally of lumber thicker than 1 inch shall be

multiplied b}^ the thickness as expressed in inches and fractions of an inch. In material measured with a board rule on actual widths, pieces measuring to the even half foot shall be alternately counted as of the next higher and

lower foot count; fractions below the one-half foot

shall be dropped and fractions above counted as of the next higher foot. Because of the variable human element in the

application and use of a board rule, a difference of not to exceed 13^ per cent shall be considered a reasonable variation between tallies. In computing the footage of cut stock }/% inch

shall be added to the width. Fractional inches in length shall be computed as of the next higher exact

inch. In shipments of rough lumber, pieces 3^ inch or more above the count thickness, such as may be

produced by uneven sawing, may, at the option of the buyer, be rejected or accepted and paid for at the market price for the next lower grade.

Shipments of mixed widths and/or mixed lengths

shall contain a fair assortment of each width or each length.

The average length of a shipment of lumber shall be computed by dividing the total length in feet by

the total number of pieces in shipment.

The average width of a shipment of lumber 1 inch or less in thickness shall be computed by

dividing the total board feet by the total length in feet and multiplying the result by 12. The total board-foot tally of lumber thicker than 1 inch shall be divided first by the thickness as expressed in inches and fractions of an inch. Unedged lumber shall be measured across the average width of the board on the narrow face in 1-inch, 134-inch, and 13^-inch lumber. The width

of 2-inch and thicker material shall be one-half of the sum of the average widths of the narrow and

wide faces. RULES FOR YARD LUMBER

Special provisions.

The term "yard lumber" as here used means lumber that is manufactured and classified into those

sizes, shapes, and qualities required for ordinary

building and industrial uses. Heavy timbers for structural purposes, softwood factory lumber, and

other special-use materials are not considered yard

stock. In this association, finishing lumber, especially in stock widths; common boards, rough, SIS,

S2S, S4S, D. & M. or worked shiplap, siding, flooring, ceiling and partition, dimension, moldings, and

tank stock will be considered yard lumber.

All thicknesses and width of yard lumber shall be

graded according to the following rules: The grades of yard lumber, rough or surfaced two sides, shall be determined from the best side of the piece, except in dimension lumber. Lumber

which is surfaced one side only shall be graded from

the surfaced side except when covered contrarily

by specific rule. The reverse side of the piece should not be of such a nature as to interfere with

the use of the piece in its intended grade. In Nos. 1 and 2 clear or B select and better more consideration shall be given to the back than in C select. A shipment of any grade must consist of a fair average of that grade and can not be made up of an unfair proportion of the better or poorer pieces that would pass in that grade. In a general way, all stock run to a pattern shall receive the same general inspection as stock run S2S or S4S. The rules prescribe the number and extent of defects and blemishes permitted in the poorest

pieces admissible in each grade, and a series of defects is described for some grades, the very nature

of which would prevent all of them from appearing

in any one piece.

The number and extent of defects and blemishes

permitted varies as the area of the piece to be graded

increases or diminishes. Defects should be well

distributed. When defects or blemishes not described in these grading rules are encountered, they will be considered as equivalent to known defects according to

their damaging effect upon the piece in the grade

under consideration. 32
TIMBEK AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.26

On the basis of quality, yard lumber is divided

into two main divisions (1) select lumber and (2) common lumber. These are again divided into two

classes—select lumber into (a) that suitable for natural finishes, and (b) that suitable for paint fin- ishes; common lumber into (a) that which can be

used without waste, and (6) that which permits some waste. Each of these four classes is further divided into quality classes or grades. The require- ments of each subclass must be kept in mind by the

grader as well as the limitations of the grade itself. COMMON LUMBER Lumber 2 inches or less in thickness, except

dimension, containing knots and other defects in varying degrees, which is to be used when appear- ance is of minor importance, shall be graded as common boards. Such stock may be: Rough:

SIS, S2S, or S4S; dressed and matched (D. & M.);

shiplap or grooved for roofing.

Checks in tight knots are not considered a defect

in common lumber unless the opening is so pro- nounced as to injure the piece for the purpose for which the grade was designed. VARIATIONS FROM AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS The California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers' Association has indorsed the American Lumber Standards movement from the first. Because

of manufacturing conditions peculiar to the region,

however, certain sizes in addition to those comprising American Lumber Standards have been

added as standard sizes of this association. These

sizes, for the most part, refer to thicknesses, and

are, with one exception, in excess of the American

Lumber Standards. These additional thicknesses are as follows: Finishing.

1-^2 extra standard for 134 inch nominal.

l|f extra standard for 13^-inch nominal,

lxf extra standard for 2-inch nominal.

2% extra standard for 23^-inch nominal.

2% extra standard for 3-inch nominal.

Z

z/i extra standard for 4-inch nominal.

Boards.

l}/g extra standard for 134-inch nominal.

\y% extra standard for 13^-inch nominal.

1% extra standard for 2-inch nominal.

Dressed and matched.

xf extra standard for 1-inch nominal.

1% extra standard for 134-inch nominal.

\

z/% extra standard for 13^-inch nominal,

extra standard for 2-inch nominal

Shiplap.

xf extra standard for 1-inch nominal.

1% extra standard for 2-inch nominal.

Flooring. xf extra standard for 1-inch nominal.

11

/'winch sizes. In addition, a nominal size of n/i6-inch for finishing,

boards, dressed and matched, shiplap, flooring, ceil- ing, drop siding, and partition has been added.

Manufacturing practice and the character of the timber cut in California make it possible to produce

this useful size very economically, and it is sold for many purposes which it serves to better advantage

than thicker lumber. The dressed size is the same

as the nominal size. National Hardwood Lumber Association, pine

grading rules, January, 1927. SOUTHERN YELLOW PINE The National Hardwood Lumber Association has

adopted the rules of the Southern Pine Association,

New Orleans, La. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), pine

grading rules, January 1, 1927. The general grading rules of this association conform to the general provisions of the grade

standards, 411.0, American Lumber Standards. LONG LEAF YELLOW PINE LUMBER

General rules. Must be sound, commercial long leaf yellow pine

(pine combining large coarse knots with coarse

grain is excluded under these rules), well manufactured, full to size and saw butted, except 25 per

cent may be jV mcn scant in thickness and/or

3^8 inch scant in width, and shall be free from the

following defects : Unsound, loose and hollow knots, worm holes and knot holes, through shakes or round shakes that show on the surface, and shall be

square edge unless otherwise specified. All lumber grading better than the grade sold

shall be accepted as the grade sold. A through shake is hereby defined to be through

or connected from side to side, or edge to edge,

or side to edge. In the measurement of dressed lumber the width

and thickness of the lumber before dressing must

be taken—less than 1 inch thick shall be measured

as 1 inch. The measurement of wane shall always apply to the lumber in the rough.

Where terms one-half and two-thirds heart are used they shall be construed as referring to the

area of the face on which measured.

In the dressing of lumber, when not otherwise

specified, % inch shall be construed as taken off by each planer cut. Flooring.

Flooring shall embrace 4, 5, and 6 quarter inches

in thickness by 3 to 6 inches in width, excluding

13^ by 6. For example, 1 by 3, 4, 5, and 6; 134 by 3, 4, 5, and 6; 1}4 by 3, 4, and 5. Boards. Boards shall embrace all thicknesses under 1^

inches by over 6 inches wide. For example, %, 1, 134, and \% inches thick by over 6 inches wide. Plank. Plank shall embrace all sizes from 13^ to under

6 inches in thickness by 6 inches and over in width. For example, 1^, 2, 2)4, 3, % 4, 43^, 5, 5M,

5% by 6 and over in width.

33
400.26 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Scantling.

Scantling shall embrace all sizes exceeding 1^

and under 6 inches in thickness, and from 2 to under 6 inches in width. For example, 2 by 2, 2 by 3, 2 by 4, 2 by 5, 3 by 3, 3 by 4, 3 by 5, 4 by

4, 4 by 5, and 5 by 5. Dimension.

Dimension sizes shall embrace all sizes 6 inches and up in thickness by 6 inches and up in width. For example, 6 by 6, 6 by 7, 7 by 7, 7 by 8, 8 by 9, and up. Stepping.

Stepping shall embrace 1 to 2^ inches in thick- ness by 7 inches and up in width. For example, 1, 1M, 2, and 2}4 by 7 and up in width. Rough edge, or flitch. Rough edge, or flitch, shall embrace all sizes 1 inch and up in thickness by 8 inches and up in width,

sawed on two sides only. For example, 1, 13^, 2, 3,

4, and up thick by 8 inches and up wide, sawed on two sides only.

Northern Pine Manufacturers' Association, grading

rules for northern white and Norway pine, spruce, and tamarack, April 15, 1925. This association has adopted the American Lumber Standard grades of yard lumber in accordance

with 411.0. The following additional grades are

furnished.

Siding: E. Dimensions and timbers: Tank; select common.

STANDARD SIZES FOR DRESSED LUMBER The sizes of softwood lumber adopted by the Northern Pine Manufacturers' Association are American Lumber Standard sizes, 411.0, except

the following which are thicker than the American

Lumber Standards unless otherwise noted:

Finish.

Nominal

thicknesses, board

measure

Dressed

thicknesses, SIS or S2S

Nominal widths, board

measure

Dressed

widths, SIE or S2E

Inches Inches Inches Inches

6 m i% 8 7Al

Bevel siding. 4 inch—(a) ^ inch by inch by 33^ inches. 6 inch—(a) ^ inch by ^ inch by 5>£ inches.

(a) The thick edge is rg- inch thinner than

American Lumber Standards. Common boards and strips. Nominal

thicknesses, board measure

Dressed

thicknesses, SIS or S2S

Nominal

widths, board measure

Dressed widths SIE or S2E

Inches m

Inches m

1H

Inches 6

8

Inches

5Vs 7V2

GROOVED ROOFING AND BEVELED CRIBBING

Thicknesses of 1-inch grooved roofing and beveled

cribbing shall be ff inch. Widths of grooved roofing and beveled cribbing

shall be the same as the nominal and standard

over-all widths for dressed and matched or shiplapped stock. Dimension.

The sizes for dimension conform to American

Lumber Standards 411.0, yard and industrial size standards. Timbers. S1S1E or S4S to inch less than nominal size. FACTORY LUMBER

Shop common.

1 inch SIS or S2S to f§ inch thick. 1H inch SIS or S2S to 1% inch thick. \y2 inch SIS or S2S to 1% inch thick. 2 inches SIS or S2S to 1% inch thick. Standard sizes of rough lumber. The standard sizes of rough lumber conform to the rough dry sizes of yard lumber, American

Lumber Standards, 411.0. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

Grading.

The aim of uniform grading inspection is to har- monize the natural differences which exist in the

characteristics of the different stocks cooperating in

this bureau, making lumber of the same grades, at the different manufacturing points, of practically

equal value, whether the logs from which the lumber

is cut are large or small, coarse knotted, fine knotted, black knotted, red knotted, sound, or shaky.

1. All yard lumber is graded with reference to

its suitability for general use as yard lumber. With

this in view, each piece is considered and its grade

determined by its general character, including the

location and sum of all its defects and blemishes. Material not conforming to standard sizes or grades

shown herein and that intended for special uses, such as car siding, roofing, etc., shall be covered

by special contract and inspection.

2. No arbitrary rules for the inspection of lumber

can be maintained with satisfaction. The variations from any given rule are numerous and suggested by practical common sense, so nothing more

definite than the general features of the different grades should be attempted by rules of inspection.

The following, therefore, are submitted as the

general characteristics of the different grades.

3. The grading of lumber can not be considered an exact science, because it is based on a visual inspection of each piece and on the judgment of the

grader. The provisions of these specifications, however, are sufficiently explicit to establish 5 per cent below grade as a reasonable 'variation between

graders.

4. In the grading of finishing lumber in common

practice there is a recognized difference in classifying inch lumber, and lumber thicker than inch. A

34
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.26

small percentage of the and 2 inch lumber

goes into work requiring each face to be shown, as

in doors, sash, etc. With inch lumber, except shop common and partition, the uses are quite different, the almost invariable practice being that one face

of the board is shown and that face the better one.

5. The face side of the lumber is the side showing

the best quality or appearance.

6. C and better Norway graded for ladder stock should be a two-faced piece.

7. Third C select, except for factory purposes, should be graded on its best side or face, not so much attention being given to the back; but in the grade of B select and better, the backs should as a

rule more nearly approach the face side in quality.

8. Yard lumber worked two sides shall be graded

from its better side or face; lumber worked one side

shall be graded from its surfaced face.

9. The grade of partition shall be determined

from its poorer side.

10. The rules for yard lumber prescribe the number and extent of defects and blemishes permitted

in the poorest pieces admissible in each grade,

though a series of defects may be described as admissible in some grades the very nature of which would

prevent all of them from appearing in one piece.

A shipment of any grade shall contain all the lumber

of that quality that is produced from the log. 11. Defects in lumber should be distributed in proportion to the size of the piece. Long or wide

pieces of the same grade may contain more and

greater defects than shorter or narrower pieces.

The same percentage should be observed in both

long and short, wide and narrow.

12. When defects or blemishes not described in these grading rules are encountered, they will be

considered as equivalent to known defects according

to their damaging effect upon the piece in the grade

under consideration.

13. Equivalent means equal, and in constructing

and applying these rules, the defects allowed,

whether specified or not, are understood to be equivalent in damaging effect to those mentioned applying

to the stock under consideration.

14. The lowering of grade on the face side on

account of wane should be governed by grade,

width, and defects in the piece.

15. Wane or other imperfections in rough stock which can be removed in dressing to standard size shall not be considered in determining the grade

under these rules.

16. Lumber when worked shall be graded the same as the respective grades when in the rough.

17. Imperfect manufacture in dressed stock, such

as torn grain, loosened grain, broken knots, mismatching, insufficient tongue, groove, or lap, etc., shall be considered as defects, but their effect on the

use of the piece must be left largely to the judgment

of the inspector. The amount by which they will lower the grade shall be governed by the grade,

width, and other defects in the piece and according

to whether they are slight or serious in the effect on

the use of the piece.

18. Heavy skip on the reverse side of a piece surfaced two sides is admissible up to and including 25 per cent of the area of the reverse side. If in excess of that amount, it will lower the piece one

grade from its face.

19. In a general way, D & M stock, except No. 3, should have a good bearing on back, and lumber

SIS or S2S shows nearly a full face. 20. When special grades or patterns of lumber

are ordered, unless a special agreement is made, it shall be permissible to ship all of the lower grades

that develop in their manufacture at the usual

differential in prices for these grades, provided that

this does not exceed 20 per cent of the quantity

shipped.

21. "Log-run" shall be construed to mean the

entire merchantable lumber product of the log. 22. Bright sap shall not be considered a defect in any of the grades provided for and described in these rules. 23. Light stain is admissible in the grade of "B"

select and better and medium to heavy stain in all grades below "B" select. Sizes.

24. The following nominal thicknesses, widths,

and lengths of yard lumber shall be considered

standard. All other sizes shall be considered

special. Thicknesses: 1, 1}4, V/2 , 2, 23^, 3, and 4 inches,

board measure. Widths: Four inches and up, board measure, in multiples of 2 inches. Lengths: Six feet and up in multiples of 2 feet, except for bevel siding 4 feet and longer in which

multiples of 1 foot may apply.

25. Yard lumber of standard size shall be de- scribed by these standard dimensions, and the

dressed sizes shall conform to those prescribed elsewhere in these specifications. Measurement and tally. Measurement and tally for this association con- forms to measurement and tally of American Lumber

Standards, 411.0 yard lumber.

Grades for yard lumber. The basic grades for yard lumber are the same as the basic grades of yard lumber of American Lumber

Standards, 411.0. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading rules for southern pine yard lumber, September 1, 1925. This association's grade standards and yard and

industrial size standards conform to the grade

standards and industrial size standards of the American Lumber Standards, 411.0. The thickness and width of heavy joists are the same as the thickness and width of joist and plank,

structural material, American Lumber Standards, No. 412.0. Southeastern Forest Products Association, Interstate Rules of 1916 for southern yellow pine, June 1, 1926. 35
400.26 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

The size classification of this association for southern yellow pine plank, scantling, dimension,

stepping, and rough edge or flitch is the same as the

size classification for these products of the North

Carolina Pine Association for long leaf yellow pine

lumber, 400.26. Southern Pine Association, grading rules for southern pine yard lumber, March 23, 1927. This association's grade standards and yard and

industrial size standards conform to the grade

standards and industrial size standards of the American Lumber Standards, 411.0. The thick- ness and width of heavy joists are the same as the

thickness and width of joist and plank, structural

material, American Lumber Standards, 412.0. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading rules for Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, larch, and fir, white fir, cedar, and spruce, July 1, 1925. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS The purpose of grades is to maintain a standard

or measure of value, between mills manufacturing

the same or similar woods, by harmonizing the

natural differences existing between different stocks

of lumber regardless of the character of the logs

from which they are produced, so that a given grade

will represent the same value and can be used for the same purpose regardless of the mill from which

it comes. Uniform grades also provide both buyers

and sellers of lumber with a measure by which each can determine whether he is buying or selling full value.

1. No arbitrary rules for the inspection of lumber

can be maintained with satisfaction; the variations from any given rule are numerous and suggested by

practical common sense, so nothing more definite than the general features of different grades should be attempted by rules of inspection. The following, therefore, are submitted as the general characteristics of the different grades.

2. In grading finish and common lumber the

practice is to use the better face of the board for inspection to determine grade. The face side of the board is the side showing the best quality or appearance.

3. The appearance and quality of the back of a

piece of finish lumber is a factor in determining

grades, with more consideration given to the back

of B and better select pieces than to C select.

4. The grade of partition should be determined

from its poorer side, and is a special grade.

5. A large amount of lumber is manufactured in five-quarter and six-quarter, and eight-quarter, and

thicker for factory demand and this stock is graded

under the special rules that are provided for the grading of shop lumber.

6. Unless otherwise provided for, lumber worked

two sides shall be graded from its better side or

face; lumber worked one side shall be graded from

its surfaced face.

7. In a general way, all stock run to a pattern

shall receive the same general inspection as stock run S2S or S4S.

8. The lowering of grade on the face side on

account of wane, or other serious defects on the

back, should be governed by grade, width, and

defects in the piece.

9. Due consideration in rough stock should be

given for the amount of wane or other imperfections

that would be surfaced off in milling.

10. The thickness and width of dressed lumber is governed by standardization of sizes and lumber

SIS, S2S, or S4S should be of a uniform thickness and width.

11. Planing-mill work or imperfect manufacture

should be taken into consideration in all grades of dressed lumber, and its effect on a piece must be

left largely to the judgment of the grader.

12. Defects in lumber should be distributed in proportion to the size of the piece. Long or wide

pieces of the same grade may contain more and

greater defects than shorter or narrower pieces.

The same percentage should be observed in both

long and short, wide and narrow.

13. Lumber when worked should be graded the same as the respective grades when in the rough.

14. Wane, cup, and crook in lumber are defects which can not be covered by rule with satisfaction,

and, therefore, must be left to the judgment of the grader.

15. The interpretation of any grade is intended

to cover all lumber between the next higher grade

above and the next grade below.

16. No grade under these rules is made with the

idea of its fitness for any one specific use, although

certain grades are strongly recommended for certain specific uses.

17. Each piece is considered and its grade deter- mined by its general character, including the

location and sum of all its defects and blemishes.

18. When defects or blemishes not described in these grading rules are encountered, they shall be

considered as equivalent to known defects according

to their damaging effect upon the piece in the grade

under consideration.

19. Bright sap shall not be considered a defect

in any of the grades provided for and described in these rules. 20. The interpretation of these rules and decision on grade is vested in the bureau of grades maintained for this purpose by the Western Pine

Manufacturers Association. White Pine Association of the Tonawandas, pine

grading rules, 1922. GRADES OF NORTHERN WHITE PINE LUMBER AS MADE IN THE TONAWANDAS

Uppers.

Highest grade of white pine made in this market,

consisting of first and second clear, 8 inches and

wider, 10 to 16 feet long, first clear being strictly clear both sides, second clear admitting of slight sap on edges or ends of piece or one or two pencil knots. Suitable for pattern purposes, organ and piano ' building, or any place where practically clear lumber

is required.

36
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.26

Selects. The second grade of white pine, put up 8 inches and wider, 10 to 16 feet long and what is known as third clear, admitting of a slight amount of sap and

an occasional pin knot, varying in number and size according to the width and thickness of the piece. Suitable for the same purposes as uppers where

slightly greater defects are admitted.

Fine common. The third grade of white pine is put up 8 inches and wider, 10 to 16 feet long, admitting of bright

sap, covering half of the face of the board, some

stain on back and occasionally a little running over on one or two edges. Admits of a few small pencil

knots, varying in size and number according to the width and thickness of the piece. Practically free from shake, but admitting of slight shake showing

only on one side or one end of piece. The grade is usually free from stain. Suitable for high-grade finishing lumber, for exterior and interior work requiring practically clear face

stock. No. 1 cuts. Put up 6 inches and wider, 10 to 16 feet long.

This grade is put up with a view of cutting good

sized sections of clear lumber and must cut 66^ per

cent or more clear except bright sap in reasonable

length sections. This grade is not intended for use

in the full length of the board, but cuts up exceptionally well for pattern lumber, shop use, or any

purpose where clear lumber is wanted.

Suitable for making patterns, door and trim factories, and general cutting up purposes. No. 2 cuts. Graded the same as No. 1 cuts, except that the percentage of cutting required is from 50 to 66%j

per cent in somewhat shorter sections. This grade is suitable for sash, door and trim factories, and pattern lumber where short sections are

required, and for general cutting up purposes. No. 3 cuts. The next lower grade of cutting up lumber, containing 35 to 50 per cent clear cutting in short sections. A slight amount of stain admitted.

Suitable for the manufacture of sash and blinds or any purpose where short sections of clear lumber

are used. No. 1 Moldings.

4 to 7 inches wide, 10 to 16 feet long, practically

free from defects on one face except bright sap, admitting of a slight amount of stain or other defect on back which does not interfere with the use of the board for one face purposes. This is particularly suitable for making good moldings or clear face trim or for any purpose where

clear face lumber is wanted. No. 2 moldings.

This grade is the reject from No. 1 moldings and

admits of slightly more defect and stain on face. Same widths and lengths.

Suitable for a cheaper grade of molding and trim. Very desirable for finishing lumber where narrow

widths are wanted, admitting of slight defects to be

used without waste in cutting. Stained saps. Four inches and wider, 10 to 16 feet long, No. 1 cuts and better, largely fine common and better for knot, admitting of any amount of stained sap, but

practically free from shake and other defect. Very suitable for any outside or inside finish or low price grade of moldings and trim where the work is to be painted.

Star clear. Four inches and wider, 10 to 16 feet long, the rejects of fine common and better on account of slight shake. No. 1 cuts and better, largely fine common

and better for knot, admitting of shake, but practically free from other defect. Very suitable for inside trim and any purpose where clear lumber is desired and slight shake defect

is not objectionable. No. 1 shelving and dressing.

This is a high grade of finishing lumber and admits

of small, sound knots, is practically free of other

defects. Knots not usually larger than a 25-cent

piece, and varying slightly in size and number

according to the width and thickness of the piece.

Very desirable for inside and outside finishing

lumber where small sound knots are not objectionable. Also suitable for pattern lumber for large

work and a small, sound knotted grade can be used. No. 2 dressing.

This grade is put up No. 1 barn and better for knot, admitting slight shake or stain defect. The

majority of the knots are the same as contained in No. 1 shelving and dressing.

It is particularly suitable for mill purposes and for inside and outside work where a slightly lower grade of lumber is wanted than No. 1 shelving and

dressing. No. 1 shelving.

This grade is put up 1 by 10 inches and wider

stock widths, the same grade as No. 1 shelving and

dressing with the exception that the same must show two good edges.

This grade is intended for high-class shelving,

exterior finish, and for other purposes requiring

high-class stock pine board. No. 2 shelving. No. 1 barn and better for knot, showing one good

edge, but practically free from other defects. Used for the same purposes as No. 1 shelving

where only one good edge shows, or a slightly lower grade is wanted.

No. 1 barn. May contain any reasonable number of small, sound knots, usually red, largely round, but admitting of an occasional branch knot of small size, free from shake or stain, the size of the knot varying in accordance with the width of the board. The 5/4 and thicker admitting of slightly larger sound knots than inch boards. 37
400.26 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Very suitable for outside finish, stepping, flooring,

cornice, novelty siding, and any exterior purpose

requiring a lasting, sound, and desirable wood.

No. 2 barn. Admits of larger sized knots than No. 1 barn,

practically all red knotted, free from shake or stain and free from any knots that will impair the strength

of the board.

Suitable where slightly larger knots can be used. Very desirable for barn siding, novelty siding, floor- ing, shelving, fencing, etc. No. 8 barn. Admits of coarse, sound knots, free from knots

that will knock out in dressing, practically free from

shake, admitting of stain where the board is other- wise No. 2 barn and better for knot.

Suitable for barn siding, cheap novelty siding,

fencing, cellar partitions, or any outside work where

a coarse, sound board of long-lasting qualities is desired. No. 1 box. This grade admits coarse knots, regardless of size, also a reasonable amount of shake or stain. The

Tonawanda grade of No. 1 box is a good practical

board for coarse work, including the manufacture

of high-grade boxes, shelving, flask purposes, and

cheap flooring, also very desirable for sheathing,

and subfloors for high-grade houses where lasting

qualities are desired. 400.27 Redwood Grading Rules.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

lumber, April, 1927. This association's definition of standard defects, rough dry sizes of yard lumber, grading provisions,

and description, measurement, and tally conform to the American Lumber Standards for Yard Lumber,

411.0. 400.28 Spruce Grading Rules.

Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for Spruce, April 15, 1925. This association has adopted the American Lumber Standard grades of yard lumber, in accordance

with 411.0. Additional grades and sizes are the same as for

pine, 400.26.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, spruce grading

rules, Schedule M, 1925. Sitka spruce rough green clears. Defects based on 8-inch widths 12 feet long. Defects in all cases to be considered in connection

with the size of the piece and its general quality. No. 2 clear and better, edge and/or flat grain. No. 2 clear and better, edge and/or flat grain,

under 3 inches thick, must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional variation in sawing, light-colored sap, one-quarter width and

three-quarters the thickness or its equivalent; in addition, will allow on face side, which is the best

side, narrow pitch pockets and/on pitch blisters,

each not over 4 inches in length, if not extending

through the thickness of the piece and on the

reverse face tight knots, if not in clusters, not over

one-half inch in diameter in 1-inch stock and varying according to the thickness of the piece, up to

1 inch, and/or pitch pockets and/or pitch blisters, each not over 4 inches in length, if not extending

through the thickness of the piece or equivalent

defects on both faces. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and corresponding

half of edges. Edge grain may be included with

flat grain at shipper's option. Slight seasoning checks no defect. Dimensions, 3 inches and up to but not including 5 inches thick. Dimensions 3 inches and up to but not including

5 inches thick, must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing, light-colored sap one-third the width and

three-quarters the thickness or its equivalent; in addition, will allow on the face side, which is the

best side, and corresponding half of edges narrow

pitch pockets and/or pitch blisters each not over 6 inches in length, if not extending through the

thickness of the piece and on the reverse face and

corresponding half of edges tight knots up to and

including 1J^ inches in diameter, if not in clusters, varying according to the size of the piece and /or narrow pitch pockets and/or pitch blisters, each

not over 6 inches in length, if not extending through

the thickness of the piece or equivalent defects on

both faces. Three defects allowed for each 12

linear feet on each face and corresponding half of edges. Slight seasoning checks no defect. One

split or check not over the width of the piece allowed. Edge grain may be included with flat grain at

shipper's option.

Dimensions, 5 inches and thicker. Dimensions 5 inches and thicker must be sound

lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional

variation in sawing, light-colored sap one-third the width of piece and three-quarters the thickness, or

its equivalent; in addition, will allow on the face

side, which is the best side, and corresponding half

of edges narrow pitch pockets and/or pitch blisters each not over 6 inches in length, if not extending

through the thickness of the piece, and on the

reverse face and corresponding half of edges tight

knots, if not in clusters, 2 inches and less in diameter,

varying according to the size of the piece or equivalent defects on both faces. Three defects allowed

for each 12 linear feet on each face and corresponding

half of edges. Slight seasoning checks no defect. One split or check not over the width of piece allowed. An occasional piece, 18 feet or longer,

may contain one larger defect, showing on one or two surfaces, if so placed that, by cutting it out, the shortest cutting will be 8 feet or longer, provided

balance of piece is practically free from other defects. In sizes 8 by 8 inches and larger boxed hearts are

admissible, provided material of this description is not coarse grained. Edge grain may be included

with flat grain at shipper's option.

38
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.28

No. 3 clear edge grain and/or flat grain. No. 3 clear edge grain and/or flat grain at shipper's option, under 3 inches thick. Defects based on 10-inch widths, 12 feet long. To be graded

from best face. The defects on the reverse face to be only slightly in excess of those allowed on the

best face. Must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing. Slightty stained or discolored sap or heart

one-third width or its equivalent. Bright sap no

defect; in addition, will allow sound and tight knots up to 1 inch or narrow pitch pockets and/or pitch

blisters, each not over 4 inches long (an occasional 6-inch pitch pockets and/or pitch blister may be

included), or one split or check not over the width

of piece or its equivalent in both ends. Slight sea- soning checks no defect. Four defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and corresponding

half of edges.

Dimensions, 3 inches thick up to but not including 5 inches thick. Dimensions 3 inches thick up to, but not including

5 inches thick. To be graded from best face, the

defects on the reverse face to be only slightly in excess of those allowed on the best face. Must be

sound lumber well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing, slightly stained or

discolored sap or heart one-third the width or its equivalent. Bright sap no defect; in addition, will allow sound and tight knots up to V/i inches or narrow pitch pockets and/or pitch blisters, each not

over 6 inches long (an occasional 8-inch pitch pocket

may be included) or one split or check not over the width of piece or its equivalent in both ends. Slight

seasoning checks no defect. Four defects allowed

for each 12 linear feet on each face and corresponding half of edges.

Dimensions, 5 inches and thicker. Dimensions 5 inches and thicker. To be graded

from the best face. The defects on the reverse face

to be only slightly in excess of those allowed on the

best face. Must be sound lumber well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing.

Slightly stained or discolored sap or heart one-third the width or its equivalent. Bright sap no defect;

in addition, will allow sound and tight knots up to

l}/2, inches or narrow pitch pockets and/or pitch

blisters each not over 6 inches long (an occasional

8-inch pitch pocket and/or pitch blisters may be

included), or one split or check not over the width

of piece or its equivalent in both ends. Slight sea- soning checks no defect. An occasional piece 18

feet or longer may contain one larger defect showing on one or two surfaces if so placed that, by cutting

it out the shortest cutting will be 8 feet or longer

provided that balance of piece is practically free from other defects. Four defects allowed for each

12 linear feet on each face and corresponding half

of edges. In sizes 8 by 8 and larger boxed hearts

are admissible provided material of this description

is not coarse grained.

Sitka spruce merchantable. This grade shall consist of sound, strong lumber,

well manufactured and suitable for good substantial constructional purposes, free from loose or rot- ten knots, knot holes, shakes, rot, or other defects which materially impair the strength of the piece. Will allow occasional variations in sawing, sound

knots, pitch pockets, and pitch blisters, the dimensions of which are to be considered in connection

with the size of the piece, and sap one-half the width or its equivalent. In sizes 6 by 12 inches and larger, intended for remanufacturing purposes and so indicated at time

order is placed, a grade of lumber may be shipped

which will admit of pieces in which strength values

as a whole might be impaired by some localized major defect. Provided that material so described would in other respects grade higher than merchantable, except for the major defect which other- wise would also exclude it from the grade of merchantable. This grade will be shipped only when

special agreement is made, and should be marked

for identifications. In timber 10 by 10 inches and larger, a split or check in one end not over the width of the piece

will be allowed. Sap shall not be considered a

defect, and wane not exceeding 2 inches in 10 by 10

inches and varying up to 4 inches on 24 by 24 inches measured across one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners, for one-quarter the length

will be allowed. General: Defects in all cases to be considered in connection with the size of the piece and its general

quality. Discoloration through exposure to the elements: Discolored sap other than black sap and seasoning checks shall not be deemed defects excluding lumber from this grade, if otherwise conforming to merchantable grade. Sitka spruce, common.

This grade shall consist of a quality suitable for ordinary constructional purposes. Defects to be

considered in connection with the size of the piece. Will allow occasional variations in sawing, bright, stained or discolored sap, a limited amount of heart

stain, large bright and/or black knots, large pitch

pockets and pitch blisters, and a reasonable amount

of wane. Discoloration through exposure to the elements and seasoning checks shall not be deemed

defects, excluding lumber from this grade, if other- wise conforming to the grade of common.

In 10 by 10 inches wane not exceeding 3 inches and varying up to 6 inches in 24 by 24 inches measured across one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners allowed, also a split or check not over

twice the width of the piece when appearing in one end or its equivalent in both ends. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, spruce grading rules, July 1, 1926. The grading rules of this association for Sitka spruce are the same as their grading rules for Douglas fir, 400.23.

52688°—27 4 39
400.28 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Western Pine Manufacturers Association, spruce grading rules, July 1, 1925. The rules of this association for grading spruce

are the same as their rules for grading fir, No. 400.23. 400.3 HARDWOOD GRADING RULES.

400.30 General Items.

American Hardwood Lumber Industry, Central Committee on Lumber Standards, standards for hardwood lumber, 1917. (The standards for hardwood lumber, established by the Central Committee and given below, were

formulated after years of study by the National

Hardwood Inspection Rules Committee largely, and

by the Hardwood Manufacturers Institute, the National Lumber Manufacturers Association, and

the Central Committee on Lumber Standards, with

the assistance of the Forest Products Laboratory of the United States Forest Service, and of the Department of Commerce. These basic grading provisions were approved by the Hardwood Consulting Committee on June 2, 1926, subject to further development, which has subsequently been done by the above-mentioned groups in the industry and incor- porated in these standards, and thus were approved June 16, 1927, by unanimous vote of the Central Committee on Lumber Standards, which is made up

of representatives of lumber producers, distributers,

and consumers.)

To the extent to which differences in quality of timber, in conditions of manufacture, and in the

uses to which the product is put, will, in practical

application, permit, the basic provisions for the grading of different species of hardwood lumber

shall be uniform; and when in conformity with the

following such provisions shall be considered

American standard hardwood lumber.

I. SIZES Lumber of standard sizes, as hereinafter described, shall be tallied board measure. On lumber

of standard thickness less than 1 inch (board

measure) the board-foot measurement shall be

based on surface dimensions.

Lumber finished to special size shall be counted

(tallied) as of the standard rough size necessarily

used in its manufacture.

THICKNESSES The following nominal thicknesses of hardwood

lumber shall be considered standard: 3^, %,

1, 1M, 1H, 2, 2V2 , 3, 33^, 4, 4^, 5, 5^, and 6

inches. All other thicknesses shall be considered

special. WIDTHS Standard widths shall be 3 inches and wider in random widths, and in stock widths where specified. LENGTHS Standard lengths shall be 4 to 16 feet in multiples

of 1 foot.

H. GRADE STANDARDS

GENERAL PROVISIONS The grade of hardwood lumber shall be determined

by the percentage of the area of each piece available

in cuttings of given minimum sizes and qualities.

The basic provisions for hardwood lumber define the poorest pieces admissible in a given grade, and

each such grade shall contain all pieces of a quality

up to that of the next higher grade. DEFINITIONS AND QUALITY OF CUTTINGS The word "cutting" as used in these provisions means a portion of a board or plank obtained by

crosscutting, by ripping, or by both. A cutting

must be flat enough to surface two sides to standard

surfaced thickness after it has been removed from

the board. The term "clear face cutting" as used in these

provisions means a cutting having one face clear and the reverse face sound. The term "sound cutting" as used in these provisions means a cutting free from rot, heart center, and shake, and free from other defects which

materially impair the strength of the cutting. DEFINITIONS OF ADMISSIBLE DEFECTS Season checks which are so serious in character

as to damage the lumber shall not be admitted.

Ordinary season checks shall be admitted.

There shall be no restriction upon bright sapwood

in any given grade unless otherwise required and

specified.

Except in grades of woods where it is specifically

admitted, stain shall not be admitted unless it will dress out in surfacing to the standard thickness for surfaced lumber. Where order or contract specifies freedom from

stain, stain shall not be admitted unless it will dress out in surfacing to standard thickness for surfaced lumber.

Burls that do not contain knots or unsound

centers shall be admitted.

STANDARD GRADES The standard grades of hardwood lumber shall consist of firsts, seconds, selects, No. 1 common,

No. 2 common, sound wormy, No. 3A common,

and No. 3B common.

Firsts and seconds may be combined as one

grade, and when so combined the percentage of

firsts shall not be less than 20 per cent in any wood.

Selects and No. 1 common may be combined as one grade, and when so combined and specified

shall be understood to include all selects that the

logs produce. No. 3A common and No. 3B common may be

combined as one grade, No. 3 common, and when

so combined and specified shall be understood to include all the No. 3A common that the logs

produce.

BASIC GRADING PROVISIONS FOR HARDWOOD LUMBER

Firsts and Seconds Widths, 6 inches and wider. Lengths, 8 to 16 feet. 40
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.30

Heart center admitted, equal in length in inches to the surface measure of the piece in feet. Splits admitted, equal in length in inches to twice the surface measure of the, piece in feet. Wane (bark or the lack of wood) admitted that does not exceed in the aggregate one-half the length

and one-fourth the width, or one-fourth the length

and one-half the width. Minimum size of cuttings: 4 inches wide by 3

feet long or 3 inches wide by 4 feet long.

Firsts Firsts shall admit pieces that will cut 91^ per

cent (H) clear face in cuttings equal in number to the surface area of the piece in feet divided by five and dropping fractions, except in pieces of 4 feet surface measure, where one cutting will be allowed.

Seconds Seconds will admit pieces that will cut 83% per cent (f§) clear face in cuttings equal in number to the surface area of the piece in feet divided by four and dropping fractions, and in addition pieces that

will cut 91% per cent (H) clear face with one

additional cutting.

Selects Widths, 4 inches and wider. Lengths, 6 to 16 feet. Selects shall admit pieces of 2 and 3 feet surface measure that will cut 91% per cent (H) clear face

in one cutting on the good face with the reverse

side of the cutting sound, and pieces 4 feet and over

surface measure that will cut on one face as required

in the grade of firsts and seconds with either the

reverse face of the piece not below the grade of No.

1 common, or the reverse side of the cuttings sound.

No. 1 Common

Widths, 3 inches and wider. Lengths, 4 to 16 feet. Heart center admitted, equal in length in the aggregate to one-half the length of the piece.

Minimum size of cuttings: 4 inches wide by 2 feet long, or 3 inches wide by 3 feet long. No. 1 common shall admit pieces that will cut

clear face as follows: One foot surface measure, clear. Two feet surface measure, 75 per cent in one

cutting.

Three and four feet surface measure, 66% per cent

in one cutting or 75 per cent in two cuttings.

Five feet surface measure, 66% per cent in two

cuttings, with one additional cutting allowed for each additional 3 feet surface measure.

No. 2 Common

Widths, 3 inches and wider. Lengths, 4 to 16 feet. Heart center admitted, equal in length in the

aggregate to three-fourths the length of the piece.

Minimum size of cuttings: 3 inches wide by 2 2 feet long. *

No. 2 common shall admit pieces that will cut

clear face as follows: One foot surface measure, 66% per cent in one

cutting.

Two and three feet surface measure, 50 per cent

in one cutting, or 66% per cent in two cuttings. Four feet and over surface measure, 50 per cent in cuttings equal in number to the surface measure

of the piece in feet divided by two and dropping

fractions. Sound Wormy

Sound wormy shall admit pieces not below the grade of No. 1 common, except that worm holes, bird pecks, sound stain, small sound knots not

exceeding three-fourths inch in diameter, and other sound defects which do not exceed in extent or damage the defects described, shall be admitted in the cuttings.

No. SA Common

Widths, 3 inches and wider. Lengths, 4 to 16 feet. No. 3 A common shall admit pieces that will cut 33% per cent clear face in cuttings not less than

3 inches wide by 2 feet long, and in addition all pieces which grade not below No. 2 common on the good face with the reverse side of the cuttings

sound

No. 3B Common

Widths, 3 inches and wider. Lengths, 4 to 16 feet. No. 3B common shall admit pieces that will cut

25 per cent sound, no cutting to be narrower than

1^2 inches or to contain less than 36 square inches.

Below Grade Lumber poorer in quality than the lowest grade

described under these provisions shall be tallied and

reported as "below grade."

Hardwood Manufacturers Institute, sales code,

January 20, 1927. No official inspection shall be made until the buyer and seller fail to reach an agreement on any

claim made; then the disputed material shall be

subject to inspection by the National Hardwood

Lumber Association according to the rules of that

association, and the regulations of its inspection

department. * * *. The inspection by the National Hardwood Lumber Association shall form

the basis of settlement between the buyer and seller, and shall be final and binding on both parties.

National Hardwood lumber Association, hard- wood grading rules, January, 1927. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1. Inspectors are instructed to study these rules carefully and use their best judgment in applying

them.

2. All lumber shall be inspected according to these rules as defined under general instructions and

standard inspection unless otherwise specified. The

rules defined under special inspection shall be applied

only when specified in the contract between buyer

and seller. The rules under standard inspection

41
400.30 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

and special inspection shall not be applied under

an;/ contract which specifies grade names different from those listed herein, except by special agree- ment between buyer and seller.

3. Exceptions to the general instructions are stated under the caption of the respective woods

and grades.

4. Lumber must be inspected and measured as the inspector finds it, of full length and width. He

shall make no allowance for the purpose of raising the grade.

5. Inspection must be made from the poor side of the piece.

6. These rules define the poorest piece in any

given grade, but the respective grades must contain

all pieces up to the next higher grade.

7. All widths, lengths, and thicknesses mentioned

in these rules shall be inclusive. Manufacture.

8. Lumber should be properly manufactured of good average widths and lengths. It should be

edged and trimmed carefully to produce the best

possible appearance while conserving the usable product of the log. It must be of standard thick- ness when shipping dry, with the exception that in the cutting grades, the percentage not included in the required cuttings may be scant in thickness,

provided the cuttings are of standard thickness,

and there is no greater variation in the thickness of the board than is allowed in the rule describing

miscut lumber. Dressed lumber sold or shipped as rough lumber shall be accepted and inspected under

the rules governing rough lumber. Miscut lumber.

9. Lumber having greater variation in thickness between any two points than shown in the follow- ing table must be measured for thickness at the

thinnest part and classed as miscut, and must be

graded and reported as such:

ys men in thicknesses of 3^ inch or less.

}/% inch in thicknesses of h/% inch and % inch.

}4, inch in thicknesses of 1 inch to 2 inches. Y% inch in thicknesses of 2^ inches to 33^ inches. 3^ inch in thicknesses of 4 inches to 6 inches. Minimum widths.

10. Ninety per cent of the minimum widths

mentioned in all grades of lumber must be full width; the remaining 10 per cent may be M inch

scant in width. Standard lengths.

11. Standard lengths are 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,

12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 feet, but not over 25 per cent

of odd lengths will be admitted.

Standard thicknesses.

12. Standard thicknesses are }4, H, 1> IK, % 2, 2%, 3,3J^, 4, 4K, 5, 5^, and 6 inches. One inch and thicker may also be expressed in quarter inches as follows: 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 8/4, 10/4,

12/4, 14/4, 16/4, 18/4, 20/4, 22/4, and 24/4. Note—For lumber thinner than % inch see veneer, thin lumber, and plywood, No. 413.52.

13. Standard thicknesses for surfaced lumber are

as follows: Rough Surfaced % inch S2S to & inch. % inch S2S to & inch. YH inch S2S to & inch. % inch S2S to ^ inch.

1 inch S2S to H inch. 114 inches S2S to 1^ inches.

13^2 inches S2S to 1^ inches. 2 inches S2S to 1% inches. 23^ inches S2S to 2}4 inches. 3 inches S2S to 2% inches. 33^ inches S2S to 3M inches. m 4 inches S2S to 3% inches.

14. Lumber surfaced on one side only must be

inch full of the above surfaced thicknesses. Measurement and tally. 15. In the measurement of lumber of random

widths fractions of over one-half foot, as shown on

the board rule, must be counted up to the next

higher figure; fractions of exactly one-half foot and

less, as shown on the board rule, must be counted

back to the next lower figure. Fractional lengths

in standard grades must be measured as of the next lower standard length. Note.—Unless otherwise specified, when reference is made to percentages, calculation shall be on the basis of board feet, except

that on lumber less than 1 inch thick it shall be on the basis of surface

feet and not on the number of pieces. 16. Tapering lumber in standard lengths must be

measured one-third the length of the piece from

the narrow end.

17. A piece tally in feet must be made of all lumber. All random width lumber of standard

grades and thicknesses must be talhed face or sur- face measure and this tally must be the number of

feet, board measure, of 1-inch lumber. If the lumber is thicker than 1 inch, then the tally so obtained must be multiplied by the thicknesses as expressed in inches and fractions of an inch. All lumber less than 1 inch must be counted face measure.

18. When strips or stock widths are measured, a

tally showing widths and lengths must be made.

19. All dimension stock of specified sizes shall be

counted on the basis of exact contents board

measure. Season checks.

20. Season checks which are so serious in character

as to damage the lumber shall be considered defects, but ordinary season checks shall not be considered

defects. Sapwood.

21. There is no restriction to bright sapwood

except as otherwise specified. Stain.

22. Stain shall be considered a defect unless it will dress out in surfacing to the standard thickness

for surfaced lumber, except in grades of woods where

it specifically states stain is no defect. 42
TIMBBB AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.30

22-B. Where order or contract specifies free from

stain, stain shall be considered a defect unless it will dress out in surfacing to standard thickness for surfaced lumber.

Burls.

23. Burls that do not contain knots or unsound

centers shall not be considered defects. DEFINITIONS

24. The word cutting as used in these rules means

a portion of a board or plank obtained by cross- cutting, by ripping, or by both. A cutting must

be flat enough to surface two sides to standard

surfaced thickness after it has been removed from

the board.

25. The term clear face cutting as used in these

rules means a cutting having one face clear and the

reverse face sound. The clear face of the cutting

must be on the poor side of the board except when

otherwise specified. 26. The term sound cutting, as used in these rules, means a cutting free from rot, heart center and

shake, and free from other defects which materially

impair the strength of the piece.

27. The term good edge, as used in these rules, means an edge free from unsound defects except a

slight amount of wane not exceeding one-third the length and one-third the thickness of the piece, or

its equivalent in other defects. QUARTERED WOODS

28. In woods where figure is not required, first and seconds shall be considered quartered when the

radial grain is at an angle of 45° or less with 80 per

cent of one face of the piece in the aggregate.

Selects shall be considered quartered when the radial grain is at an angle of 45° or less with 80 per cent

of the face side of the piece in the aggregate. No. 1 common and No. 2 common shall be considered

quartered when one face of each required cutting

shows the radial grain at an angle of 45° or less with

80 per cent in the aggregate.

28-A. In all quartered woods 10 per cent may be

j3^ inch scant on one edge provided the other edge

is full standard thickness when shipping dry, in thicknesses up to and including 6/4; in thicknesses of 8/4 and thicker 10 per cent may be Vs inch scant on one edge provided the other edge is full standard

thickness when shipping dry.

STANDARD DEFECTS The following paragraphs describe standard

defects

29. One knot 13^ inch in diameter. 30-A. Two ^-inch diameter knots, or their equivalent. Not more than two standard defects

of this character can be accepted by the inspector;

each additional equivalent defect shall be considered

as one additional standard defect. 30-B. Defects larger than one standard defect, excepting wane and split, shall be considered on the

following average diameter measurement:

2^-inch knots or their equivalent shall be two

standard defects. 3^-inch knots or their equivalent shall be three standard defects. 5-inch knots or their equivalent shall be four standard defects.

31. One split equal in length in inches to the sur- face measure of the piece in feet and diverging not more than 1 inch to the foot in length.

32. Wane or its equivalent in other defects, 1 inch

wide, one-sixth the length of the piece along the

edge, or its equivalent at one or both ends. In the wane defect, wane may extend through the full thickness of the piece, showing on both faces. 33. Worm, grub, knot, and rafting pinholes, not

exceeding in extent one standard knot defect described above.EQUIVALENT DEFECTS

34. Heart center and other defects not defined

as standard defects, that do not damage the piece more than the standard defects allowed, are equivalent defects and must be so considered by the inspector. STANDARD GRADES

[Subject to general instructions! 35. The standard grades of hardwood lumber are

first, seconds, selects, No. 1 common, No. 2 com- mon, sound, wormy, No. 3 common and other grades mentioned under the caption of the respective woods. Firsts and seconds are combined as one grade, and the percentage of firsts in the combined grade shall not be less than the following:

Poplar, 40 per cent; Philippine mahogany, 40 per

cent; African and Mexican mahogany, 35 per cent; tupelo, sycamore, white ash, plain oak, chestnut, red gum, sap gum, black gum, cottonwood, magnolia, locust, hackberry, willow, and aspen, 333<3 per cent; cherry, beech, soft elm, buckeye, quartered

oak, and quartered gum, 25 per cent; hard maple,

soft maple, birch, black ash, and basswood, 20 per

cent. Selects and No. 1 common may be combined as one grade, except in mahogany, walnut, and cherry,

and when so combined and specified shall be understood to include all the selects that the logs produce.

Firsts and seconds.

36. Lengths are 8 to 16 feet, admitting 25 per

cent of 8 to 11 feet, of which 25 per cent one-half may be 8 and 9 feet. 37. The number of defects admitted in any piece

must be determined from the poor face. 38. Heart center, where the extent or damage

does not exceed the equivalent of standard defects allowed, will be admitted.

39. Six inches of straight split in one end, or

its equivalent in both ends, will not be considered a defect.

40. Splits in excess of the equivalent of two

standard defects will not be admitted.

41. In any series of special widths sold 10 inches

or wider, splits in excess of the equivalent of one standard defect will not be admitted.

43
400.30 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

42. Wane along the edge not exceeding one-sixth the length of the piece, or its equivalent at one end

or both ends, not exceeding in thickness one-half the thickness of the piece, and not exceeding in width as shown in the following table shall not be

considered a defect: 3^ inch in width in J^-inch to M-inch lumber. M inch in width in 1-inch to 2-inch lumber.

1 inch in width in 23^-inch and thicker lumber. 42-A. Unless otherwise specified, 3^-inch free side bend shall be admitted in pieces 8 and 9 feet long; ^-inch free side bend shall be admitted in pieces 10 to 12 feet long; inch free side bend

shall be admitted in pieces 13 to 16 feet long. Each

additional 3^2 inch of side bend in all lengths shall be considered one standard defect, except that not more than two such defects shall be allowed in any piece.

43. Firsts must be 6 inches and over wide, 8 feet and over long. Pieces 4 to 9 feet surface measure must

be clear, except that free wane and free split (see 402.42) shall be admitted. Pieces 10 to 15 feet surface measure may have one standard defect or its equivalent. Pieces 16 feet and over surface measure may have two standard defects or their equivalent.

44. Seconds must be 6 inches and over wide, 8 feet and over long, except that clear pieces 5 inches wide, 10 feet and over long, will be admitted not to exceed 5 per cent of the footage. (Or 5 per cent of the firsts and seconds in the combined grade.)

Standard defects will be admitted according to surface measure as follows: 5 feet, one standard defect or its equivalent. 8 feet, two standard defects or their equivalent. 12 feet, three standard defects or their equivalent. 16 feet, four standard defects or their equivalent. 20 feet, five standard defects or their equivalent.

Selects. 45. Widths, 4 inches and over.

46. Lengths are 6 to 16 feet admitting 30 per

cent 6 to 11 feet, of which 30 per cent one-sixth may

be 6 and 7 feet. 47. Pieces 6 and 7 feet long must be 5 inches and

over wide, and must be clear one face; the reverse

side must have two good edges, otherwise sound and

not below No. 1 common.

48. Pieces 4 inches wide, 8 feet and over long,

must have one clear face and two good edges; the

reverse side not below No. 1 common.

49. Pieces 5 inches wide, 8 feet and over long,

must have one clear face and two good edges, except

that pieces 12 feet and over long will admit one

standard defect except wane; the reverse side not below No. 1 common.

50. Pieces 6 inches and over wide, 8 feet and over

long, must grade not below seconds on the best face and not below No. 1 common on the reverse side.

51. This grade will also admit pieces 6 inches and

over wide, 10 feet and over long, containing defects which do not cause a waste of more than 12 inches long in one crosscutting or its equivalent at both

ends; the clear face cuttings must be 3 feet and over

long by the full width of the piece and the reverse

side of the cuttings sound. The poor side of the

piece must not be below No. 1 common.

52. This grade will also admit pieces 7 inches and

over wide, 10 feet and over long, containing defects along the edges which do not cause a waste of more

than 1 inch in width by the full length of the piece.

The clear face cutting must be sound on the reverse

side. The poor side of the piece must not be below

No. 1 common.

53. In lumber 6/4 inch and thicker, this grade will admit pieces 6 inches and over wide, 8 feet and over

long, with one clear face except will admit free wane

and free split defined in standard grade of firsts and

seconds; the reverse side must have two good edges, otherwise sound and not below No. 2 common.

54. In lumber 5/4 inch and less in thickness, this grade will admit pieces that grade not below seconds on the best face and not below No. 2 common on the

reverse side, provided the reverse side will work

80 per cent sound; but not more than 20 per cent in quantity of such pieces will be admitted.

54-A. Unless otherwise specified, J^-inch free

side bend shall be admitted in pieces 6 to 9 feet long;

%-inch free side bend shall be admitted in pieces 10 to 12 feet long; 13^-inch free side bend shall be

admitted in pieces 13 to 16 feet long. Each additional }/2 inch of side bend in all lengths shall be

considered one standard defect, except that not more

than two such defects shall be allowed in any piece. No. 1 common.

55. Widths, 3 inches and over, admitting 5 per

cent of 3-inch widths.

56. Lengths, 4 to 16 feet, admitting 10 per cent

of 4 to 7 foot lengths, of which 10 per cent one-half may be 4 and 5 feet. 57. Pieces 4 and 5 feet long must be clear. 58. Pieces 3 and 4 inches wide, 6 and 7 feet long,

must be clear. 59. Pieces 3 inches wide, 8 to 13 feet long, must

work 6% per cent clear face in not over two cuttings. Pieces 3 inches wide, 14 to 16 feet long, must work

66% per cent clear face in not over three cuttings.

No cutting to be considered which is less than 3 feet long by the full width of the piece.

60. Pieces 4 inches wide, 8 to 13 feet long, must

work 66% per cent clear face in not over two

cuttings. Pieces 4 inches wide, 14 to 16 feet long,

must work 66% per cent clear face in not over

three cuttings. No cutting to be considered which

is less than 2 feet long by the full width of the

piece.

61. Pieces 6 feet long, 5 to 8 inches wide, may

have one standard defect; 9 inches and over wide, two standard defects.

62. Pieces 5 to 7 inches wide, 7 to 11 feet long,

must work 66% per cent clear face in not over two cuttings; 12 feet and over long, in not over

three cuttings.

63. Pieces 8 inches and over wide, 7 to 9 feet

long, must work 66% per cent clear face in not

over two cuttings; 10 to 13 feet long, in not over

three cuttings; 14 feet and over long, in not over

four cuttings.

44
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.32

64. No cutting shall be considered in pieces 5 inches and over wide which is less than 4 inches wide by 2 feet long or 3 inches wide by 3 feet long.

65. No piece shall be admitted which contains heart center exceeding one-half its length in the aggregate. No. 2 common.

66. Widths, 3 inches and over.

67. Lengths, 4 to 16 feet, admitting 30 per cent

of 4 to 7 feet lengths, of which 30 per cent one-third may be 4 and 5 feet. 68. Pieces 3 to 7 inches wide, 4 to 10 feet long,

must work 50 per cent clear face in not over three

cuttings; 11 feet and over long, in not over four

cuttings.

69. Pieces 8 inches and over wide, 4 to 9 feet long, must work 50 per cent clear face in not over

three cuttings; 10 to 13 feet long, in not over four

cuttings; 14 feet and over long, in not over five cuttings.

70. No cutting shall be considered which is less than 3 inches wide by 2 feet long.

71. No piece shall be admitted which contains heart center exceeding three-fourths its length in the aggregate.

Sound wormy.

72. This grade is not below No. 1 common,

except that worm holes, bird pecks, sound stain, small sound knots not exceeding % inch in dia- meter, and other sound defects which do not

exceed in extent or damage the defects described,

will be admitted in the cuttings. Note.—When lumber is purchased under specifications combining the term "sound wormy" with the names of standard grades, such as "firsts and seconds sound wormy," "No. 1 common and

better sound wormy," it shall be understood that the required

yield shall be the same as specified under the standard grades, except

that the defects and blemishes admitted in the cuttings as defined

in the standard grade of "sound wormy" shall be admitted. When lumber is purchased under specifications combining the term "worm holes no defect" with the names of standard grades, such as "firsts and seconds, worm holes no defect," "No. 1 common

and better, worm holes no defect," it shall be understood that the required yield shall be the same as specified under the standard

grades, except that worm holes shall be admitted without limit. No. 3 common.

73. Widths, 3 inches and over.

74. Lengths, 4 to 16 feet, admitting 50 per cent

of 4 to 7 feet lengths, of which 50 per cent one-half may be 4 and 5 feet. 75. All pieces must work 25 per cent sound; minimum width of cuttings 13^ inches, and no

cutting considered which contains less than 36

square inches. Below grade.

76. Lumber poorer in quality than the lowest grade described under these rules shall be tallied and reported as "below grade." Surfaced lumber D2S.

Surfaced lumber D2S shall be inspected according to the standard grades under the caption of the respective woods, with the following exceptions:

Firsts, and seconds. Inspection shall be made from the good face. The

reverse side will admit one additional standard

defect or its equivalent. Torn or chipped grain and

slight stain shall not be considered defects on the

reverse side, and slight chipped or torn grain 6 inches long by the width of the piece or its equivalent on

the good face shall not be considered a defect. Poplar saps. Poplar saps shall be subject to the exceptions

stated under firsts and seconds.

Selects. Slight chipped grain 12 inches long by the width

of the piece or its equivalent on the good face will not be considered a defect. The "clear" cutting grades. In the clear cutting grades, such as shop cypress and selects Cuban mahogany, chipped grain on one

side of the cuttings shall not be considered a defect. The " clear face" cutting grades.

Inspection shall be made from the good face; the

reverse side of the cuttings must be sound.

Slight chipped grain 18 inches long by the width

of the piece or its equivalent on the good face shall not be considered a defect. The "sound" cutting grades.

The sound cutting grades, including cypress com- mon and boxing, shall be inspected according to the

rules for rough lumber. Chipped grain and slight

skips in surfacing shall not be considered a defect. Surfaced lumber D1S.

Lumber surfaced on one side shall be inspected

according to the rules governing lumber dressed two

sides, except that inspection shall be made from the

dressed face. Surfaced lumber "hit or miss."

Lumber ordered dressed hit or miss shall be

inspected as rough lumber unless otherwise specified.

400.31 Basswood Grading Rules.

National Hardwood lumber Association, basswood

grading rules, January, 1927.

Firsts: Standard.

Seconds: Standard.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exception: Where

the term "clear face" appears in the standard grade, substitute the word "sound."

No. 3 common: Standard. Note.—Black spots or streaks, if excessive, will reduce a piece one

grade only. In the grade of No. 1 common, streaks extending over more than? one-sixth of the face of the required cuttings in the aggregate, shall be considered excessive. In firsts and seconds, streaks extending over more than one-sixth of the poor face of the piece in the aggregate, shall be considered excessive. 400.32 Birch Grading Rules.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, red birch grading rules, January, 1927. 45
400.32 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

RED BIRCH

[When specified] In the grade of firsts and seconds pieces 5 inches wide must be all red one face; 6 inches and over wide must be not less than 75 per cent red one face.

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds. Standard, with the following exceptions: Widths

5 inches and over; pieces 5 inches wide must be

clear.

Selects. Standard, with the following exceptions:

All pieces 6 inches and over wide, 8 feet and over

long, must be not less than 75 per cent red on the

best face. Where the word "clear" appears in the standard

grade, substitute the term " clear red" except in

selects, 400.30. No. 1 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Each cutting must have one clear red face. Pieces 4 to 6 feet long, and pieces 3 and 4 inches

wide, 7 feet long, must have one red face. Will admit 30 per cent 4 to 9-foot lengths, of which 30 per cent one-third may be 4 and 5-foot

lengths.

STANDARD INSPECTION

Birch Long ash. Specified lengths of 18 feet and over in ash will admit 5-inch pieces in firsts and seconds.

Firsts. Standard, with the following exception; 30 per

cent, 8 to 11 feet admitted.

Seconds. Standard, with the following exception; 30 per

cent, 8 to 11 feet admitted.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common: Standard. Sound wormy: Standard. No. 3 common: Standard. 400.83 Gum Grading Rules,

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for gum lumber, January, 1927. SAP GUM AND BLACK GUM

Note.—A National Hardwood Lumber Association inspector will not make any distinction in species between black gum and tupelo. Sound stain is no defect in any grade. (See

400.30, general instructions for stain.) Sap gum is lumber produced from the red gum

tree, containing sapwood in excess of the quantit}^

admitted into the grades of red gum lumber.

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds: Standard.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exception:

Where the term "clear face" appears in the standard grade, substitute the word "sound."

No. 3 common: Standard. QUARTERED SAP GUM AND QUARTERED BLACK GUM

No figure is required.

Ten per cent may be y& inch scant on one edge,

provided the other edge is full standard thickness,

when shipping dry, in thicknesses up to and includ- ing 6/4; in thicknesses of 8/4 and thicker 10 per

cent may be 3^8 inch scant on one edge provided

the other edge is full standard thickness when

shipping dry.

Sound stain shall not be considered a defect in any grade.

Firsts: Standard.

Seconds. Standard with the following exceptions: Widths,

5 inches and over; pieces 5 inches wide must be

clear. Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common.

Standard.

Pieces below the grade of No. 2 common shall be

graded as sap gum or black gum.

"Ribbon stripe."

When ribbon stripe figure is specified, each piece

shall be selected for the stripe effect caused by

the wavy grain, brought out in quarter sawing

process. In the grades of firsts and seconds and

selects 90 per cent of one face of each piece, and in the cutting grades the face side of each cutting,

must show such ribbon stripe effect. PLAIN RED GUM

Red gum is lumber produced from the red gum

tree, containing sufficient heart wood to be admitted

into the grades defined under the caption of red gum.

Firsts and seconds will admit 1 inch of sapwood

in the aggregate on one face and one-fifth of the

piece in the aggregate on the reverse face. Sound stain shall not be considered a defect in the sapwood admitted in any grade.

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds: Standard.

Selects. Standard with the following exceptions

Where the word "clear" appears in the standard

grade, substitute the words "clear red," except in 400.30—standard grades for selects. All pieces 6 inches and over wide, 8 feet and over

long, will admit 1 inch of sapwood in the aggregate on the good side. Sapwood is no defect on the

reverse side. No. 1 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Each cutting must have one clear red face. The

grade must be made from the red side of the board

46
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.34

with the reverse side of the cuttings sound. The

sap side of the board must not be below the standard

grade of No. 1 common.

Pieces 4 to 6 feet long, and pieces 3 and 4 inches

wide, 7 feet long, must have one red face. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Each cutting must have one clear red face. The

grade must be made from the red side of the board

with the reverse side of the cuttings sound. The

sap side of the board must not be below the standard

grade of No. 2 common.

Pieces below the grade of No. 2 common shall be graded as sap gum.

PLAIN SAWN RED GUM, FIGURED WOOD

[When Specified] Each piece shall be especially selected for markings

and color tones producing a variegated effect. In the grades of firsts and seconds and selects, 90 per cent of one face of each piece, and in the

cutting grades the face side of each cutting must

show such markings. Otherwise the rules for plain red gum shall be applied.

QUARTERED RED GUM

No figure is required.

Ten per cent may be 1/16 inch scant on one

edge provided the other edge is full standard thick- ness when shipping dry, in thicknesses up to and

including 6/4; in thicknesses of 8/4 and thicker 10 per cent may be x/% inch scant on one edge

provided the other edge is full standard thickness when shipping dry. In the grade of firsts and seconds, pieces 5 inches wide must be free from sapwood on one face; pieces 6 inches and 7 inches wide may have % inch

of sapwood on one face in the aggregate; pieces 8 inches and over wide may have 1 inch of sapwood

on one face in the aggregate. The reverse face of any piece will admit sapwood in the aggregate

one-fifth of its surface. Sound stain will not be considered a defect in the sapwood admitted in any grade.

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds. Standard, with the following exception: Widths,

5 inches and over; pieces 5 inches wide must be

clear.

Selects. Standard, with the following exceptions

Where the word "clear" appears in the standard

grade, substitute the words "clear red" except in standard grades for selects, 400.30. The clear face mentioned in 400.30, standard

grades for selects, will admit the same amount of sapwood as firsts and seconds quartered red gum.

Sapwood is no defect on the reverse side. No. 1 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Each cutting must have one clear red face. Pieces 4 to 6 feet long and pieces 3 and 4 inches

wide, 7 feet long, must have one red face.

No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Each cutting must have one clear red face. Pieces below the grade of No. 2 common shall be

graded as sap gum.

"Ribbon stripe."

When ribbon stripe figure is specified each piece

shall be selected for the stripe effect caused by the wavy grain brought out in quarter-sawing process. In the grades of firsts and seconds and selects 90 per

cent of one face of each piece, and in the cutting

grades the face side of each cutting, must show such

ribbon stripe effect. QUARTERED RED GUM, FIGURED WOOD

[When Specified] Each piece shall be especially selected for markings and color tones producing a variegated effect. In the grades of firsts and seconds and selects, 90 per cent of one face of each piece, and in the

cutting grades the face side of each cutting, must

show such markings.

Otherwise the rules for quartered red gum shall be

applied.

400.34 Hickory Grading Rules.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for hickory, rock (or cork) elm, and pecan, January, 1927. HICKORY, ROCK (OR CORK) ELM, AKD PECAN

Note.—A National Hardwood Lumber Association inspector

will not make any distinction in species between pecan and hickory. Bird pecks not exceeding }4 inch in length, 34 inch in width, will not be considered a defect, if sound, in firsts and seconds and No. 1 common cuttings; but if excessive, will reduce a piece one grade

only. In the grade of No. 1 common, bird pecks

extending over more than one-sixth of the face of the required cuttings in the aggregate, shall be considered excessive. Firsts and seconds, bird pecks

extending over more than one-sixth of the poor face

of the piece in the aggregate, shall be considered

excessive.

Firsts and seconds will admit 30 per cent of 8 to

11 foot lengths, of which 30 per cent one-half may

be 8 and 9 feet. No specified percentage of firsts is required in the combined grade of firsts and seconds. There is no grade of selects in rock elm, hickory,

and pecan.

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds. Standard, with the following exceptions:

Widths, 4 inches and over. Pieces 4 inches wide

must be clear. Pieces 5 inches wide, having 5 feet or over surface measure may have one standard

defect. No. 1 common.

Standard with the following exceptions:

There is no specified maximum percentage of short lengths.

47
400.34 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Pieces 3 to 7 inches wide, 6 to 11 feet long, must

work 66% per cent clear face in not over two

cuttings; 12 feet and over long, in not over three

cuttings. Pieces 8 inches and over wide, 6 feet long, must

work 66% per cent clear face in not over two cuttings. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

There is no restriction as to heart center. Bird pecks are no defect. Where the term' 'clear face" appears in the stand- ard grade, substitute the word " sound." No. 3 common: Standard. 400.35 Mahogany Grading Rules.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, mahogany grading rules, January, 1927. MEXICAN AND AFRICAN MAHOGANY

Honduras, Nicaraguan, Guatemalan, and other Central and South American mahoganies.

Lengths, 2 feet and over. Odd lengths shall be

admitted without limit. Fractions of over one-half foot in length must be

counted up, and fractions of one-half foot or less in length must be dropped, except in the grade of shorts. One inch of bright sapwood in the aggregate is one standard defect in the grade of firsts and seconds. Bright sapwood is no defect in selects and below. Cross breaks shall be considered as equivalent

standard defects. Counters {when specified) . Widths 18 to 24 inches. Lengths 12 to 40 feet. Counters must be free from all defects on one

face; the reverse side must not grade below firsts and seconds. Splits must be measured out.

Firsts. Standard (see 400.30), with the following exceptions : Firsts must be 7 inches and over wide, 10 feet and

over long, and free from all defects, except that

free wane and free split (see 402.42-firsts and

seconds) shall be admitted; pieces 10 feet and over

surface measure may have one standard defect or

its equivalent. Seconds. Standard, with the following exceptions:

Standard defects will be admitted according to surface measure as follows

6 feet, 1 standard defect or its equivalent. 9 feet, 2 standard defects or their equivalent. 13 feet, 3 standard defects or their equivalent. 18 feet and over, 4 standard defects or their equivalent. For each additional 5 feet surface measure, 1 additional standard defect will be admitted.

Selects. Eliminate the standard grade and substitute the

following:

Selects must grade firsts and seconds, according

to the above rule, on one face and not below No. 1 common on the reverse side. No. 1 common.

Standard with the following exceptions:

Widths, 4 inches and over. Lengths, 6 feet and over. Pieces 4 inches wide, 6 to 11 feet long, must work

66^$ per cent clear face in not over two cuttings; 12 to 16 feet long, in not over three cuttings. Pieces 5 inches and over wade, 6 to 11 feet long, must work 66% per cent clear face in not over two

cuttings; 12 to 16 feet long in not over three cuttings.

Each additional 4 feet in length in pieces over 16

feet long will admit one additional cutting. No. 2 common.

Standard with the following exceptions:

There is no restriction as to heart center. Lengths, 6 feet and over. There is no limit to the number of cuttings. No. 3 common.

Standard with the following exception: Lengths,

2 feet and over. Clear strips. Standard with the following exception: Lengths,

6 feet and up, admitting 10 per cent of 6 and 7 foot

lengths. No. 1 common strips. Standard with the following exceptions: Lengths

of 6 and 7 feet may have one standard defect. Each cutting must have clear edges.

Wormy strips. Widths, 1^ to %% inches. Lengths, 6 feet and over. Inspection must be made from the best face. Must work 50 per cent sound, no cutting to be

considered which is less than 1J^ inches wide by 2

feet long and without limit to the number of cuttings.

One edge of each piece must be square; the other edge will admit wane not exceeding in thickness or width the thickness of the piece and not exceeding

one-third the length of the piece or the equivalent

of such aggregate, wane at dne or both ends. Pinworm holes, clean or stained pinworm grooves,

burls, sound sap, sound stain, hair checks, small sound knots not exceeding % inch in diameter, or sound defects which do not exceed in extent or damage the defects described will be admitted with- out limit. Selected firsts and seconds pin wormy (N. O. grade) . Width 6 inches and over. Lengths, 6 feet and over, not over 20 per cent of 6 and 7 foot lengths.

One face of each board must work 75 per cent

clear of pinworm holes and other defects, in cuttings

of not less than 144 square inches each, and without

limit to the number of cuttings.

The reverse side must grade firsts and seconds

pin wormy (A wormy) or better.

.48
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.35

First and seconds pin wormy (A wormy).

'Widths, 6 inches and over. Lengths, 6 feet and over, not over 20 per cent

of 6 and 7 foot lengths.

Must grade firsts and seconds except as to lengths

and except that pinworm holes or grooves, sound

sap and sound stain will not be considered defects. Stained pinworm grooves that damage the

piece more than the standard defects allowed are equivalent defects and must be so considered by

the inspector. No. 1 common pin wormy (iV wormy).

Widths 4 inches and over. Lengths 6 feet and over. Must grade No. 1 cbmmon except that pin

wormholes or grooves, burls, sound sap, sound stain, or sound defects which do not exceed in extent or damage the defects described will be admitted in the cuttings. Fifty per cent of the required cuttings in the aggregate must be free from stained pinworm grooves. No. 2 common pin wormy (B wormy).

Widths, 3 inches and over. Lengths, 6 feet and over. Must grade No. 2 common except that pin- worm holes, clean or stained pinworm grooves,

burls, sound sap, sound stain, hair checks, small sound knots not exceeding z/± inch in diameter and

other sound defects which do not exceed in extent

or damage the defects described will be admitted

in the cuttings.

Firsts and seconds shorts. Widths, 4 inches and over. Standard lengths, 2, 2^, 3, 3^, 4, 43^, 5, and

$y2 feet. Fractional lengths other than standard must be measured as of the next lower standard length. Shorts must be measured and tallied as if four times the actual standard length and the resulting

tally divided by four. Pieces 4 and 5 inches wide must be clear. Pieces 6 inches and over wide will admit standard

defects according to the above basis of surface measure (four times the actual surface measure)

as follows: 8 feet, 1 standard defect or its equivalent. 16 feet, 2 standard defects or their equivalent. 22 feet, 3 standard defects or their equivalent. 28 feet, 4 standard defects or their equivalent.

Common shorts. Widths, 3 inches and over. Standard lengths, 2, 23^, 3, 3^, 4, 43^, 5, and

53^ feet, Fractional lengths other than standard must be

measured as of the next lower standard length. Shorts must be measured and tallied as if four times the actual standard length and the resulting

tally divided by four. Must cut 50 per cent qlear face in not over two

cuttings.

No cutting should be considered which has less than 36 square inches.

Pin wormy shorts. Widths, 3 inches and over. Standard lengths, 2, 23^, 3, 33^, 4, 43^, 5, and

bY2 feet. Must be measured in the same manner as firsts and seconds shorts. Must grade firsts and seconds shorts except as to widths and with exceptions that pinworm holes or grooves, burls, sound sap, sound stain, or other sound defects which do not exceed in extent or damage the defects described will be admitted

without limit. CUBAN AND SAN DOMINGO MAHOGANY

Odd lengths shall be admitted without limit. First and seconds. Forty-five per cent of 8 and 9 foot lengths shall be admitted.

Firsts and seconds are one grade, which is standard with the exception that defects will be admitted

according to widths as follows: Pieces 8 and 9 feet long, 6 and 7 inches wide, one standard defect and z/i inch of sapwood in the aggregate.

Pieces 8 and 9 feet long, 8 and 9 inches wide, one standard defect and 1 inch of sapwood in the

aggregate, or two standard defects if there is no sapwood or 2 inches of sapwood if there is no

defect. Pieces 8 and 9 feet long, 10 inches and over wide, two standard defects and 2 inches of sapwood in the

aggregate, or 3 inches of sapwood if there is no

defeat. Pieces 10 feet and over long, 6 and 7 inches wide, one standard defect and 1 inch of sapwood in the

aggregate.

Pieces 10 feet and over long, 8 and 9 inches wide, two standard defects and 2 inches of sapwood in the

aggregate.

Pieces 10 feet and over long, 10 and 11 inches wide, three standard defects and 2 inches of sap- wood, or two standard defects and 3 inches of sap- wood.

Pieces 10 feet and over long, 12 inches and over

wide, three standard defects and 3 inches of sap- wood, or 4 inches of sapwood if there is no defect.

Selects. Standard (see 400.30), with the following exceptions: Pieces described in 400.30 will admit the same amount of sapwood on the best face as firsts and

seconds. Admit 50 per cent of 6 to 9 foot lengths, of which

50 per cent one-fifth may be 6 and 7 feet. No. 1 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Length, 5 feet and over. The restrictions as to percentage of widths and

lengths do not apply.

All widths and lengths must work 66% per cent

in clear face cuttings.

There is no limit to the number of cuttings.

49
400.35 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Each cutting must contain not less than 144 square inches, and must not be less than 3 inches wide and not less than 2 feet long. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Lengths, 5 feet and over. The restrictions as to percentage of lengths do

not apply.

There is no restrictions as to heart center. There is no limit as to the number of cuttings.

Each cutting must contain not less than 72 square

inches and must not be less than 2 inches wide. Each cutting must be clear heartwood on the best

side of the board and may be all sapwood on the sap

side of the board. No. 3 common: Standard. Log run. Log run shall be 5 feet and over long and shall include the full run of the log with all grades below

No. 2 common excluded.

Firsts and seconds shorts. Widths, 4 inches and over. Standard lengths, 2, 2%, 3, 3^, 4, 43^, and 5

feet.Fractional lengths other than standard must be

measured as of the next lower standard length. Shorts must be measured and tallied as if four times the actual standard length and the resulting

tally divided by four. Pieces 4 and 5 inches wide must be clear. Pieces 6 inches and over wide will admit standard

defects according to the above basis of surface measure (four times the actual surface measure) as

follows: 8 feet, 1 standard defect or its equivalent. 16 feet, 2 standard defects or their equivalent. 22 feet, 3 standard defects or their equivalent. 26 feet, 4 standard defects or their equivalent.

Wormy.

Widths, 3 inches and over. Lengths, 6 feet and over. Wormy shall not grade below No. 1 common,

except that sound sap and sound stain and wormholes shall not be considered defects. Pin wormy shorts. Widths, 3 inches and over. Lengths, 2 to 53^ feet. Must grade the same as Mexican and African

mahogany No. 1 common shorts, except that sound

sap and sound stain and pin wormholes admitted

in this grade without limit. PHILIPPINE MAHOGANY

Rules for the inspection of Mexican and African mahogany (see above) shall apply in the grades of counters, firsts, seconds, selects No. 1 common,

No. 2 common, and No. 3 common, except that in view of the very fine character of the pin and

needle wormholes in Philippine mahogany, only

those shall be considered defects which are visible in the rough to the natural eye, and they shall be

estimated on the basis of standard defects or their equivalent.

The following grades shall be the same as stand- ard mahogany grades, except that fine needle wormholes shall be admitted without limit. Firsts and seconds fine needle wormy.

Selects fine needle wormy.

No. 1 common fine needle wormy.

No. 2 common fine needle wormy.

No. 3 common fine needle wormy.

400.36 Maple Grading Rules.

National Hardwood lumber Association, maple

grading rules, January, 1927. SOFT MAPLE

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds: Standard.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exception: Where

the term "clear face" appears in the standard

grade, substitute the word "sound."

No. 3 common: Standard. Note.—Black spots or streaks, if excessive will reduce a piece one

grade only. In the grade of No. 1 common, streaks extending ovtr more than one-sixth of the face of the required cuttings in the aggre- gate shall be considered excessive. In firsts and seconds, streaks extending over more than one-sixth of the poor face of the piece in the

aggregate shall be considered excessive. WHITE MAPIE

Grades: Firsts, seconds, and No. 1 common.

White maple, when specified, will be divided into No. 1 white maple and No. 2 white maple. No.

1 white maple, firsts and seconds, must have both

sides and both edges white. No. 1 white maple, No. 1 common grade, cuttings must have both

sides and both edges white. No. 2 white maple,

firsts and seconds, must have one face and both

edges white and the reverse side not less than 50 per

cent white. No. 2 white maple, No. 1 common

grade, cuttings must have one face and both edges

white, and the reverse side of the cuttings not less than 50 per cent white. No specified percentage of firsts is required in the combined grade of firsts and seconds. The term "white" as used in these rules means

"bright sapwood."

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds. Standard, with the following exceptions:

Widths, 4 inches and over. Lengths: 30 per cent under 12 feet will be

admitted.

Pieces 4 and 5 inches wide must be clear. No. 1 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions

Lengths, 6 to 16 feet. Pieces 3 and 4 inches, 12 to 16 feet long, may

have three cuttings. Pieces 5 inches and over wide, 8 to 11 feet long,

must work 66^ per cent clear face in not over two

cuttings; 12 to 16 feet long, in not over three cuttings.

50
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.37

HARD (OR SUGAR) MAPLE

Firsts. Standard (see 400.30), with the following exception: 30 per cent, 8 to 11 feet, admitted.

Seconds. Standard, with the following exception: 30 per

cent, 8 to 11 feet admitted.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common: Standard. Sound wormy: Standard. No. 3 common: Standard. 400.37 Oak Grading Rules.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for oak, January, 1927. PLAIN RED AND WHITE OAK AND LOCUST

In the grade of firsts and seconds bright sapwood

on one face is no defect. On the reverse face 1 inch of bright sapwood in the aggregate is no defect. Each additional 1 inch

of bright sapwood in the aggregate must be considered as one standard defect. Bright sapwood is no defect in selects and the common grades.

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds: Standard.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common: Standard. Sound wormy: Standard. No. 3 common: Standard.

Note.—Streaks, if excessive, will reduce a piece one grade only. In the grades requiring clear-face cuttings, streaks extending over more than one-sixth of the face of the required cuttings in the aggre- gate shall be considered excessive. In firsts and seconds, streaks extending over more than one-sixth of the poor face of the piece in

<ihe aggregate shall be considered excessive. QUARTERED RED AND WHITE OAK

In the grades of firsts and seconds, 1 inch of bright

sapwood in the aggregate is no defect; each additional 1 inch of bright sapwood in the aggregate

must be considered as one standard defect. Bright sapwood is no defect in selects and the common grades.

Ten per cent may be ye mch scant on one edge

provided the other edge is full standard thickness when shipping dry in thicknesses up to and includ- ing 6/4; in thickness of 8/4 and thicker 10 per cent may be 3^ inch scant on one edge provided the other edge is full standard thickness when shipping dry.

Firsts and seconds and selects must show figure on

one face not less than 90 per cent in the aggregate.

The cuttings in No. 1 common and No. 2 common

must show figure on one face.

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds: Standard.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard.

No. 2 common: Standard. Sound wormy: Standard. No. 3 common: Standard. Note.—Streaks, if excessive, will reduce a piece one grade only. In the grades requiring clear-face cuttings, streaks extending over more than one-sixth of the face of the required cuttings in the aggre- gate shall be considered excessive. In firsts and seconds, streaks extending over more than one-sixth of the poor face of the piece in the aggregate shall be considered excessive. BENDING OAK

Bending oak, unless otherwise specified, will in- clude both red and white oak and must be cut from

live timber. The grain must not diverge more than

2 inches to the foot. Sound stain, spot and pin wormholes scattered

or in clusters not less than 6 inches apart with not more than three wormholes to the cluster shall not be considered defects. Green lumber 5/4 inches and thicker must be sawn

Vg inch thicker than specified thickness except that

10 per cent ye inch thicker will be admitted.

No specified percentage of firsts is required in

firsts and seconds

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30) Seconds. Standard, with the following exceptions:

Widths, 5 inches and over. Lengths, 6 to 16 feet. No. 1 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Lengths, 5 to 16 feet. All widths and lengths must work 66% per cent

clear, in cuttings not less than 3 inches wide by 5

feet long.

There is no limit to the number of cuttings. RULES FOR GRADING HARDWOODS FOR CONSTRUCTION WORK

Grades: Select car stock, select dimension,

freight car stock, common dimension, bridge and

dock timbers, bridge plank, crossing plank, and

sheet piling.

When stock sold under these rules subject to inspection at destination is found not up to the quantity invoiced, unless it is held intact for veri- fication or acceptance of tally by shippers, the

receiver should make at least two independent

tallies of the material, confirming his measurement,

and be prepared to furnish an affidavit to substantiate it if desired. When a difference in grade only

is claimed at destination not exceeding 10 per cent

of each shipment, the receiver may at his option use

the stock that is acceptable and hold for inspection

and adjustment the stock in question, provided it is usable at a reasonable reduction to be mutually

agreed upon. Should claim of off-grade stock exceed

10 per cent of shipment, the entire shipment should be held intact for inspection unless by agreement of buyer and seller to the contrary.

The term " white oak" shall be understood to mean the white oak group/ including: White

oak, burr oak, post oak, chestnut oak, cow oak,

51
400.37 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

overcup oak, swamp white oak, live oak, chinquapin

oak, and other less-known varieties of this character. The term "mixed oak" shall be understood to include any or all woods of the red or black oak

group, not necessarily containing any of the white

oak group unless specified. This red oak group

includes: Red oak, black oak, yellow oak, scarlet oak, Spanish oak, turkey oak, willow oak, pin oak, black jack, water oak, and other less known varieties of this character.

All stock under these rules being for construction work where strength is essential, should be cut green,

full to sizes and lengths specified. Ten per cent in any shipment may be }/i inch scant in size and shall be accepted at full measure unless otherwise specified. Ordinary season checks shall not be

considered defects. 400.38 Walnut and Butternut Grading Rules.

National Hardwood lumber Association, walnut

and butternut grading rules, January, 1927 Odd lengths shall be admitted without limit. Firsts and seconds.

Fifty-five per cent of 8 and 9 foot lengths shall be admitted.

Firsts and seconds are one grade, which is standard

with the exception that defects will be admitted

according to widths as follows: Pieces 8 and 9 feet long, 6 and 7 inches wide, one

standard defect and M inch of sapwood in the

aggregate.

Pieces 8 and 9 feet long, 8 and 9 inches wide, one

standard defect and 1 inch of sapwood in the

aggregate, or two standard defects if there is no sapwood or 2 inches of sapwood if there is no defect. Pieces 8 and 9 feet long, 10 inches and over wide two standard defects and 2 inches of sapwood in the

aggregate, or 3 inches of sapwood if there is no

defect Pieces 10 feet and over long, 6 and 7 inches wide, one standard defect and 1 inch of sapwood in the

aggregate.

Pieces 10 feet and over long, 8 and 9 inches wide,

two standard defects and 2 inches of sapwood in the aggregate.

Pieces 10 feet and over long, 10 and 11 inches wide,

three standard defects and 2 inches of sapwood, or two standard defects and 3 inches of sapwood.

Pieces 10 feet and over long, 12 inches and over

wide, three standard defects and 3 inches of sapwood,

or 4 inches of sapwood if there is no defect. Pieces 14 feet and over long, 6 and 7 inches

wide, two standard defects, and 1 inch of sapwood

in the aggregate.

Selects. Standard (see 400.30), with the following exceptions: Wherever grades are mentioned it shall be understood that reference is to walnut grades, not standard

grades

Where the word "clear" appears in the standard

grade, substitute the words "clear black/' except

in paragraphs 51, 52, and 53, on page 44.

Pieces described in paragraphs 51, 52, and 53, on page 44, will admit the same amount of sapwood

on the best face as firsts and seconds walnut. Admit 50 per cent of 6 to 9 feet lengths, of which

50 per cent, one-fifth may be 6 and 7 feet. Pieces 6 feet long must be 4 inches and over

wide. No. 1 common.

Standard (see 400.30), with the following

exceptions

The restrictions as to percentages of widths and

lengths do not apply.

All widths and lengths must work 66^ per cent

in clear face cuttings.

There is no limit to the number of cuttings.

Each cutting must contain not less than 144

square inches, and must be not less than 3 inches wide and not less than 2 feet long.

Each cutting must be clear black on the black

side of the board, and may be one-half sapwood

in the aggregate on the sap side of the board. No. 2 common.

Standard with the following exceptions:

The restrictions as to percentage of lengths does

not apply.

There is no restriction as to heart center. There is no limit to the number of cuttings.

The minimum width of a cutting is 2 inches, and

any cutting that is 2 inches wide or wider, and

contains 72 square inches, is the minimum size cutting.

Each cutting must be clear black on the black

side of the board and may be all sapwood on the

sap side of the board. No. 3 common: Standard. Steamed walnut. When walnut has been standard and is sold and

specified as "steamed walnut," it shall be graded

according to the above rules, except sapwood shall not be considered. 400.39 Grading Rules for Other Hardwoods.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for other hardwoods, January, 1927. COTTONWOOD, TUPELO, MAGNOLIA, WILLOW, AND ASPEN

Note.—A National Hardwood Lumber Association inspector

will not make any distinction in species between black gum and

tupelo. Sound stain is no defect in any grade. (See

400.30, par. 22-B, general instructions for stain.) Firsts: Standard. (See No. 400.30.) Seconds: Standard.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exception: Where

the term "clear face" appears in the standard

grade, substitute the word "sound."

No. 3 common: Standard. 52
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.39

SOFT ELM AND BUCKEYE

Firsts: Standard. (See No. 400.30.) Seconds: Standard.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exception: Where

the term "clear face" appears in the standard grade, substitute the word "sound."

No. 3 common.

Black spots or streaks, if excessive, will reduce a

piece one grade only. In the grade of No. 1 common, streaks extending over more than one-sixth of the face of the required cuttings in the aggregate

shall be considered excessive. In firsts and seconds, streaks extending over more than one-sixth of the poor face of the piece in the aggregate shall be

considered excessive. Note.—In soft elm bird pecks not exceeding H inch in length,

\i inch in width, will not be considered a defect, if sound, in firsts and seconds and No. 1 common cuttings; but if excessive, will reduce

a piece one grade only. In the grade of No. 1 common, bird pecks

extending over more than one-sixth of the face of the required cut- tings in the aggregate shall be considered excessive. In firsts and

seconds, bird pecks extending over more than one-sixth of the poor

face of the piece in the aggregate shall be considered excessive. QUARTERED POPLAR No figure is required.

No specific percentage of firsts is required in the combined grade of firsts and seconds. Bright sapwood is no defect.

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds. Standard, with the following exceptions: Widths,

5 inches and over. Standard defects will be admitted according to surface measure as follows: 6 feet, one standard defect or its equivalent. 9 feet, two standard defects or their equivalent. 13 feet, three standard defects or their equivalent. 18 feet and over, four standard defects or their equivalent. No. 1 common.

Standard, with the following exception : Lengths,

8 to 16 feet. Slight stain will not be considered a defect. Note.—Pieces below the grade of No. 1 common shall be graded

according to the rules for poplar and specified as No. 2-A common,

No. 2-B common, and No. 3 common quartered poplar. ASH, BEECH, HACKBERRY, AND SYCAMORE Long ash: Specified lengths of 18 feet and over

in ash will admit 5-inch pieces in firsts and seconds.

Firsts. Standard (see 400.30), with the following exception: 30 per cent, 8 to 11 feet admitted.

Seconds. Standard, with the following exception: 30 per

cent, 8 to 11 feet admitted.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. No. 2 common: Standard. Sound wormy: Standard. No. 8 common: Standard. CHESTNUT

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds: Standard.

Selects: Standard. No. 1 common: Standard. Sound wormy.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

There is no limitation as to size of defects, pro- vided the required cuttings are sound. Heart center extending three-fourths the length

of the piece in the aggregate is admitted. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Where the term "clear face" appears in the stand- ard grade, substitute the word "sound."

Wormholes shall be admitted in this grade without

limit. No. 3 common: Standard. CHERRY One inch of bright sapwood in the aggregate is a

standard defect in the grades of firsts, seconds, and

selects. Gum spots, if excessive, will reduce a piece in grade.

Firsts: Standard. (See 400.30.) Seconds: Standard.

Selects. Standard, with the following exception: Where

the word "clear" appears in the standard grade, substitute the words "clear red." No. 1 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Each cutting must be clear red on the red side of the board and may be one-half sapwood in the aggre- gate on the sap side of the board.

Pieces 4 and 5 feet long, and pieces 3 and 4 inches

wide, 6 and 7 feet long, must have one red face and

may have one-half bright sapwood in the aggregate on the reverse side. Pieces 6 feet long, 5 inches and over wide, must

have one red face and may be all bright sapwood on

the reverse side. No. 2 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Each cutting must be clear red on the red side of the board and may be all sapwood on the sap side

of the board. Gum spots are no defect. There is up restriction as to heart center. No. 3 common: Standard. QUARTERED SYCAMORE

Quartered sycamore shall be graded according to the rules for quartered oak, except that bright sap- wood shall not be considered a defect in any grade.

53
400.39 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

POPLAR

In firsts and seconds 10 inches and wider, bright

sapwood one-third the width of the piece in the aggregate on one face is no defect; each additional

1 inch of bright sapwood in the aggregate is one

standard defect. On the reverse side, 1 inch of bright sapwood in the aggregate is no defect; each

additional 1 inch of bright sapwood in the aggregate

is one standard defect. Bright sapwood is no defect

in pieces 18 inches and over wide. In the grades of firsts, seconds, and selects, mineral stain not exceeding one-sixth the surface of the piece in the aggregate will not be considered a

defect. In saps and the common grades, mineral

stain shall not be considered a defect.

Firsts. Standard (see 400.30), with the following exceptions : Widths, 8 inches and over. Lengths, 10 to 16 feet. Pieces 8 and 9 inches wide must be free from sap- wood on one face; the reverse side may have 2

inches of bright sapwood in the aggregate; other- wise they must be clear, except that free wane and

free split (see 400.30—standard grades for firsts and

seconds) shall be admitted.

Pieces 13 to 16 feet surface measure will admit

one standard defect or its equivalent.

Pieces 17 feet or over surface measure will admit two standard defects or their equivalent.

Seconds. Standard, with the following exceptions:

Pieces 6 inches wide must be free from defects including sapwood.

Pieces 7 inches wide will admit 1 inch of bright

sapwood in the aggregate, but no other defect. Pieces 8 and 9 inches wide, 5 to 7 feet surface measure, will admit 1 inch of bright sapwood in the

aggregate, but no other defect; 8 and 9 inches wide, 8 feet and over surface measure, will admit 1 inch

of bright sapwood in the aggregate and one stand- ard defect, or 2 inches of bright sapwood in the aggregate if there is no other defect. Pieces 10 inches and over wide will admit standard

defects according to surface measure, as follows: Six feet, one standard defect or its equivalent.

Ten feet, two standard defects or their equivalent. Fifteen feet, three standard defects or their equivalent.

Twenty-one feet and over, four standard defects or their equivalent.

Saps.

Widths, 5 inches and over. Lengths, 8 to 16 feet. Pieces 5 inches and over wide may have one straight

split not exceeding in length the width of the piece, or its equivalent. Pieces 6 inches and over wide may have wane

along the edge not exceeding one-sixth the length

of the piece, not exceeding one-half the thickness of

the piece, and not exceeding 1 inch in width, or its equivalent at one or both ends. Otherwise pieces 5 inches wide must be clear; pieces 6 to 8 inches wide will admit one standard

defect or its equivalent, except standard wane or

split defects; pieces 8 inches and over wide may

have one standard defect or its equivalent. Note.—See general instructions regarding stain 400.30. Selects. Eliminate the standard grade and substitute the

following: Selects must grade firsts and seconds

poplar on one face, and not below No. 1 common on

the reverse side. Stained saps. This grade is the same as saps, except that sound

stain shall not be considered a defect. No. 1 common.

Standard, with the following exceptions:

Slight stain shall not be considered a defect. Fifteen per cent of 3 and 4 inch widths, of which

15 per cent one-third may be 3 inches wide. Lenghts 6 to 16 feet, admitting 20 per cent 6 to 9

feet, of which 20 per cent one-half may be 6 and 7

feet.Pieces 6 and 7 feet long, 3 to 5 inches wide,

must be clear; 6 inches and over wide may have

one standard defect. Pieces 3 and 4 inches wide, 8 to 16 feet long, may

have one standard defect or its equivalent. Pieces 5 inches wide, 8 to 16 feet long, must

work 66% per cent clear face in not over two cuttings. Pieces 6 to 9 inches wide, 8 to 11 feet long, must

work 66%- per cent clear face in not over two cuttings; 12 feet and over long, in not over three cuttings. Pieces 10 inches and over wide, 8 and 9 feet long, must work 66% per cent clear face in not over two

cuttings; 10 to 13 feet long, in not over three cuttings; 14 to 16 feet long, in not over four cuttings. No. 2 common.

No. 2 common may be divided into No. 2-A common and No. 2-B common, but unless other- wise specified will be considered as a combined

grade. No. 2-A common.

Standard grade of No. 2 common, with the

following exception: Sound stain is no defect. No. 2-B common.

Standard grade of No. 2 common, with the

following exception: Where the term " clear face" appears in the standard grade, substitute the word

"sound."

No. 3 common: Standard. LOCUST

See No. 400.37. ROCK (OR CORK) ELM AND PECAN

See 400.34. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for other hardwoods, June 15, 1925. 54
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.39

TUPELO (BAY POPLAR) LUMBER J General Instructions for the Manufacture, Inspection, and Measure- ment of Tupelo (Bay Poplar) Lumber Lumber must be inspected and measured as the

inspector finds it, of full length and width. He

shall make no allowance for the purpose of raising the grade.

Exceptions to the general rules are stated under

the caption of the respective grades.

Inspection must be made from the poor side of the piece, except as otherwise specified.

These rules define the poorest piece in any given

grade, but the respective grades must contain all pieces up to the next higher grade. In the following rules all widths and lengths

mentioned are inclusive. Manufacture. Lumber should be properly manufactured,

trimmed and edged, of good average widths and

lengths. It must be of standard thickness when

shipping dry, with the exception that in the grades

of common, the percentage not included in the cut- ting may be scant in thickness, provided the cuttings

are of standard thickness and that there is no greater

variation in the thickness of the board than is allowed in the rule describing missawn lumber. Lumber showing greater variation in thickness than ^ inch at any point in stock cut 3^2 inch thick or less, or 3^ inch in inch and % inch stock, or 34 inch in 1 inch to 2 inch stock, or % inch in inch and thicker stock, must be measured

at the thinnest part and classed as missawn, and

graded and reported as such. Minimum widths. Ninety per cent of the minimum widths mentioned in all grades of lumber must be full width;

the remaining 10 per cent may be 34 inch scant in width. Measurement.

In the measurement of lumber of random widths,

fractions of over 3^ foot, as shown on the board

rule, must be counted up to the next higher figure; fractions of exactly 3^ foot and less, as shown on

the board rule, must be counted back to the next lower figure.

A board rule on which the 3^ foot is clearly

marked should be used. Tapering lumber in standard lengths must be

measured one-third the length of the piece from

the narrow end.

Tally.

A piece tally in feet must be made of all lumber.

All lumber of standard grades and thicknesses must

be tallied face or surface measure, and this tally must be the number of feet, board measure, of 1-inch lumber. If the lumber is thicker than 1 inch then the tally so obtained must be multiplied by

the thickness as expressed in inches and fractions

of an inch. All lumber less than 1 inch must be

counted face measure. When strips or stock widths

are measured, a tally showing widths and lengths

must be made.

J Hean.

Heart, where the extent or damage does not ex- ceed the equivalent of standard defects allowed,

will be admitted in the grade of firsts and seconds. In the grade of No. 1 common, no piece shall contain heart to "exceed one-half its length in the aggregate. Season checks. Ordinary season checks are not to be considered

defects, but if of so serious a character as to damage

the lumber they are to be considered by the inspector.

Splits. Six inches of straight split in one end, or its equi- valent in both ends, will not be considered a defect

in the grade of firsts and seconds. Sap.

Bright sap is no defect unless so stated under

caption of the respective grades.

Stain. Stain that will surface off in dressing to the stand- ard thickness must not be considered a defect. Burls. Burls that do not contain knots or unsound centers

shall not be considered defects. Wane.

In the grade of firsts and seconds, wane along the edge not exceeding one-sixth the length of the piece, or its equivalent at one end or both ends, not exceeding in thickness one-half the thickness of the piece,

and not exceeding in width as shown in following

table, is not a defect:

3/£ inch in width in 3^, %, and % inch lumber.

z/i inch in width in 1, 134, 1M? and 2 inch lumber.

1 inch in width in 23^ inch and thicker lumber. Standard defects. One knot 134 inches in diameter. Two knots not exceeding in extent or damage one

134-inch knot.

Splits—in lumber of random widths, one split not

diverging more than 1 inch to a foot, and not exceeding in length in inches the surface measure of the

piece in feet; but not more than two defects of this character are admitted in a piece of the grade of

firsts and seconds. Firsts and seconds sold in any

series of special widths 10 inches or wider will not

allow more than one standard defect of this character in any piece.

Wane in excess of free wane allowed in firsts and

seconds grade must be considered as standard defects

in the proportion of 1 inch in widths, one-sixth the

length of the board, extending parallel with the edge,

or its equivalent at one or both ends, as one standard

defect. Worm, grub, knot and rafting pinholes, not ex- ceeding in extent or damage one 134-inch knot. Heart and other defects not enumerated as stand- ard defects that do not damage the piece more than

the standard defects allowed are equivalent defects and must be so considered by the inspector.

52688°—27 5 55
400.39 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Cuttings.

The word "cutting" as used in these rules means

a portion of a board or plank obtained by cross- cutting, by ripping, or by both. The term "clear face cutting," as used in these

rules, means a cutting having one face clear and the

reverse face sound. The term "sound cutting," as used in these rules, means a cutting free from rot and shake and other

defects which materially impair the strength of the

piece.

Good edge. The term "good edge," as used in these rules,

will admit no unsound defects, excepting a slight

amount of wane, not to exceed one-third the length

and one-third the thickness of the piece, or its equi- valent in other defects. Standard grades.

The standard grades of tupelo lumber are as

follows: Firsts, seconds, No. 1 common, No. 2 com- mon, No. 3 common, wagon box boards, B and

better, and C.

Firsts and seconds are combined and the per- centage of firsts in the combined grade shall not be

less than 33% per cent. Standard lengths. Standard lengths are 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,

14, 15, and 16 feet'but not over 15 per cent of odd

lengths are admitted. In the grade of firsts and seconds the lengths are 8 to 16 feet, but there must not be more than 20 per

cent under 12 feet and not to exceed 10 per cent of 8 and 9 foot lengths, except as otherwise specified.

Standard thicknesses. The standard thicknesses of tupelo lumber are: M, %, 5A, %, i, 1H, 1Mb % 2, 23^, 3, zy2, 4, 43^, 5, 53^, and 6 inches. The standard thicknesses for surfaced lumber are

as follows

Surfaced Rough (inch) ^8-inch surfaced two sides to 3^ 3^-inch surfaced two sides to i^- ^-inch surfaced two sides to ^

^t-inch surfaced two sides to ^

1-inch surfaced two sides to |f 134-inch surfaced two sides to 1^

13^-inch surfaced two sides to lf-|

1 24-inch surfaced two sides to 13^

2-inch surfaced two sides to 23^-inch surfaced two sides to 234

3-inch surfaced two sides to 2%

33^-inch surfaced two sides to 334

4-inch surfaced two sides to 3M

Lumber surfaced on one side only must be ^ inch

full of the above thickness. Weights.

All weights are the same as cypress.

Firsts. Firsts must be 6 inches and over wide, 8 feet and

over long. Pieces 4 to 9 feet surface measure must

be clear. Pieces 10 to 15 feet surface measure may

have one standard defect or its equivalent. Pieces

16 feet and over surface measure may have two

standard defects or their equivalent. Seconds. Seconds must be 6 inches and over wide. Standard defects are admitted according to sur- face measure as follows: 5 feet, one standard defect or its equivalent. 8 feet, two standard defects or their equivalent. 12 feet, three standard defects or their equivalent. 16 feet, four standard defects or their equivalent.

20 feet, five standard defects or their equivalent. No. 1 common. Sound discolored sap permitted. No. 1 common must be 4 inches and over wide. Lengths: four feet and over long, not over 30 per

cent shorter than 10 feet, and not to exceed 10 per

cent of 4 and 5 foot lengths. Pieces 4 and 5 feet long must be clear. Pieces 4 inches wide, 6 and 7 feet long, must be

clear. Pieces 4 inches wide, 8 to 11 feet long, must

work 66% per cent clear face in not over two

cuttings; pieces 4 inches wide, 12 to 16 feet long, must work 66% per cent clear face in not over

three cuttings. No cutting to be less than 2 feet long by the full width of the piece. Pieces 6 feet long, 5 to 8 inches wide, may have

one standard defect; pieces 6 feet long, 9 inches and

over wide, may have two standard defects. Pieces 5 to 7 inches wide, 7 to 11 feet long, must

work 66% per cent clear face in not over two cuttings; pieces 5 to 7 inches wide, 12 feet and over

long, must work 66% per cent clear face in not

over three cuttings. Pieces 8 inches and over wide, 7 to 9 feet long,

must work 66% per cent clear face in not over two

cuttings; pieces 8 inches and over wide, 10 to 13

feet long, must work 66% per cent clear face in not

over three cuttings; pieces 8 inches and over wide, 14 feet and over long, must work 66% per cent

clear face in not over four cuttings.

No cutting to be considered which is less than

4 inches wide by 2 feet long or 3 inches wide by

3 feet long. No. 2 common.

No. 2 common must be 3 inches and over wide, 4 feet and over long, not to exceed 10 per cent of 4 and 5 foot lengths. Pieces 3 to 7 inches wide, 4 to 10 feet long, must

work 50 per cent sound in not over three cuttings;

pieces 3 to 7 inches wide, 11 feet and over long,

must work 50 per cent sound in not over four

cuttings. Pieces 8 inches and over wide, 4 to 9 feet long,

must work 50 per cent sound in not over three

cuttings; pieces 8 inches and over wide, 10 to 13

feet long, must work 50 per cent sound in not over

four cuttings; pieces 8 inches and over wide, 14 feet and over long, must work 50 per cent sound in not

over five cuttings.

56
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.40

No cutting to be considered which is less than

3 inches wide by 2 feet long. No. 3 common.

No. 3 common must be 3 inches and over wide,

4 feet and over long, and must contain at least 25 per cent of sound cuttings. Minimum width of cuttings 13^ inches, and no cutting considered which

contains less than 36 square inches. 400.4 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT OF

WOOD.

400.40 Definitions and Standards.

American Railway Association, Signal Section,

specifications for creosoting timber used in the

telegraph and telephone plant, 1926. This specification provides for treatment with

creosote oil of poles, conduit, plank, cross arms, and

other timber for use in telegraph and telephone construction. Timber treated under this specification

shall conform to the requirements of the specifica- tions and drawings furnished by the purchaser.

The preservative used under this specification shall conform to A. R. A. specification for creosote oil, grade 1. Peeling. All round timbers shall be thoroughly peeled

before treatment. No piece shall be considered

thoroughly peeled unless all of the rough bark and

at least 80 per cent of the inner bark shall have

been removed. In no case shall any piece of inner bark be over % of an inch wide or over 8 inches

long, and there shall be 1 inch of clean wood sur- face between any two such strips. Any cross section measured in circumference having more than 20 per cent of its surface covered with inner bark shall be repeeled, although the

entire surface of the pole may contain less than the

allowable 20 per cent. Seasoning.

The moisture content of the wood before treat- ment should be reduced, preferably by air seasoning,

to not more than 20 per cent of its oven-dry weight,

or to a constant weight basis. When there is not sufficient time for proper air seasoning or in cases of poles and large-dimension

timbers which will not air season successfully

throughout without deterioration, artificial seasoning by steaming before treatment may be resorted

to if approved by the purchaser's inspectors.

When, in the judgment of the purchaser's in- spector, steam seasoning is necessary for adequate

treatment, poles and other heavy timbers may be

steamed in the cylinder at not more than 20 pounds

pressure per square inch for not more than 12 hours

at not more than 270° F.; smaller timbers, such as conduit and plank, may be steamed in the cylinder at not more than 15 pounds pressure per square

inch for not more than 5 hours at not more than

250° F., which pressure and temperature maxima

shall not be reached in less than 2 hours in the case

of poles and other heavy timber and 1 hour and

30 minutes in the case of smaller timber, such as conduit and plank. The cylinder shall be provided

with vents to relieve it of air and insure proper

circulation of steam. After steaming is completed

a minimum vacuum of 22 inches shall be maintained

for not less than 15 minutes. The cylinder shall be

relieved continuously or frequently enough to pre- vent condensate from accumulating in sufficient quantity to reach the wood. Before the preservative is introduced the cylinder shall be drained of condensate. Framing.

All timber shall be framed, shaped, and bored

before treatment.

Treatment. Timber may be treated under this specification

by the full-cell process, by the empty-cell process with final vacuum or by the empty-cell process with

initial air and final vacuum as directed by the

purchaser. Limitation of timber in a charge.

Any charge of timber shall be confined to one

kind or designated group or kinds of wood, of pieces approximately equal in size and moisture and

sapwood content, into which approximately equal

quantities of preservative can be injected and so separated as to insure contact of preservative, and

steam if used, with all surfaces. Manner of treatment. The ranges of pressure, temperatures, and time

duration shall be controlled so as to result in maximum penetration of the quantity of preservative

injected. The vacuum requirements stipulated are those at sea level, and necessary corrections shall be made for altitude. Plant equipment.

Treating plants shall be equipped with the ther- mometers and gauges necessary to indicate and

record accurately the conditions at all stages of treatment, and all equipment shall be maintained

in condition satisfactory to the purchaser. The

apparatus and chemicals necessary for making the

analyses and test required by the purchaser shall also be provided by plant operators, and kept in condition for use at all times. Treatment operations.

(The treatment operations are similar to those of the American Wood-Preservers' Association.)

American Railway Engineering Association, wood

preservation, 1921. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Creosote oil and zinc chloride are effective wood preservatives when properly applied and when

used under proper conditions.

2. Accurate records should be kept in order to form proper conclusions as to the merit of different methods and processes.

3. Preserved wood may be destroyed by mechanical action long before it is decayed, and therefore should be protected by economical devices when the mechanical life limits the life of the tie. 57
400.40 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

4. There should be a standard temperature at which creosote oil is measured. The temperature

of 100° F. is recommended.

5. It is essential that timber should be properly

grouped in order that a successful treatment may be

obtained. The species, in proportion of heartwood

and sapwood, condition of the timber with respect to its moisture content and the wood structure will, in general, determine this grouping.

6. It is desirable to air season timber in order to prepare it for treatment. Most woods can be best treated after being air seasoned.

7. Chemicals used should be tested for purity

from time to time. Either the chemists for the company will do this themselves or indicate some

simple tests which may be applied by operatives at the works.

8. In operating with zinc chloride, the strength

of the solution should be varied from time to time

to conform to the kind and condition of the ties, so as to inject the required quantities; but in no case should the strength of the solution exceed 5 per cent.

9. It is better to inject quantities of the chemicals

in excess of the requirements than to skimp the treatment in any way.

10. Daily reports should be kept at the works, and

duplicates sent to the general office, if desired, in order to check the operation.

11. Ties treated with zinc chloride should dry for some little time (to harden the outer surface) before they are put in the tracks. This is preferably done

in piles, arranged to induce drying without checking

as evaporation takes place.

12. For best results it is recommended that cer- tain sections of track be selected on each railroad

for the purpose of making accurate tests covering the life of treated and untreated ties of various kinds of timber and under various treatments, and

that an accurate record be kept of the life of all ties in these test sections of track in order to be able

hereafter to improve on the treatment. All ties in- serted in such test sections shall be marked with

dating nails, and, if necessary, with their identifi- cation marks.

13. In order to judge of the penetration of the oil, borings should be made with an augur, % to 1 inch

in diameter, in not less than six ties in each cylinder

load. The holes should be plugged with creosoted turned plugs of diameter ^ inch larger than the

holes.

14. Bridge material intended for treatment should be framed, as far as possible, before timbers are placed in the treating cylinder. This includes the boring of the necessary holes. GROUPING OF TIMBERS FOR ANTISEPTIC TREATMENT

1. Ties of approximately the same period of seasoning should be grouped together for treatment;

green ties should never be mixed with seasoned ones.

2. Pine ties should be separated on the basis of heartwood and sapwood; it would also be advisable in some cases to group hardwoods on the same

basis, but it is not generally practical to do so.

3. Grouping on the basis of species and families,

as, for example, red oaks, pine, beech, etc., if a

further division into heartwood classes is made with

pine, is usually a satisfactory practice. From this

it follows that red oak, beech, long-leaf pine, loblolly pine, and gum should be treated separately.

Birch and hard maples and certain other combinations, depending on the locality, can be grouped

together to advantage.

4. The separation in the yard, on the basis the

ties are to be grouped for treatment, is an essential and economical practice.

Specifications for preservatives. (See 400.41.) American Wood-Preservers' Association, standard

definitions of creosote and tar, 1921. CREOSOTE

Creosote, in the scientific sense, may be properly

defined as any and all distillate oils boiling between

200 and 400° C, which are obtained by distil] a- tion from tars consisting principally of compounds

belonging to the aromatic series, and containing

well-defined amounts of phenoloids. TAR

Tar, in the scientific sense, may oe properly

defined as a nonaqueous liquid product obtained

in the destructive distillation of complex organic

matter. Tars vary greatly in character, both

chemically and physically. They may be roughly

divided into three classes: Class A. Tars consisting principally of compounds

belonging to the aromatic series, and containing

well-defined amounts of phenoloids.

Class B. Tars consisting principally of compounds

belonging to the aromatic series, but lacking

phenoloids.

Class C. Tars consisting principally of compounds

belonging to the aliphatic series. American Wood-Preservers' Association, standards

for the purchase and preservation of treatable timber, 1926. Quality of wood. Preservative treatment should be limited to kinds of wood which are not in themselves resistant to decay, thus making available timber which other- wise would be useless, and which is obtainable at low cost as compared with durable species.

The wood accepted for treatment should be of such a character as to be treated at least throughout

the sapwood, except in the case of Douglas fir, and if the heartwood is not capable of treatment, it should be in itself resistant to decay.

Only sound timber, free from defects which

would reduce its value for the purposes to be used, should be treated. Treatment will not cure decay

nor defects of am^ kind. Where strength is required, not only the defects which might reduce the strength but also the

quality as determined by density shquld be specified; but where strength is not an essential only

the soundness of the timber and the sapwood

requirements as determining penetrability need be

considered. 58
TIMBEE AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.40

Ties or timbers which have been allowed to stand on their ends should not be accepted.

1. Piles for use in salt water where ravages of marine borers are extreme^ severe: Specify not

less than 2Y2 inches of sapwood nor more than

5 inches.

2. Piles for use in salt water where ravages of marine borers are less severe than in Group 1: Specify not less than 1 inch of sapwood, nor more

than 3 inches.

3. Piles for use in fresh water or foundation work

on land : No sapwood restrictions are necessary.

Delivery. So far as practical arrange delivery of material

so that the seasoning period may be during the

seasons of minimum rainfall and humidity.

Peeling.

All round timbers shall be thoroughly peeled

before treatment. No piece shall be considered

thoroughly peeled unless all of the rough bark and

at least 80 per cent of the inner bark shall have

been removed. In no case shall any piece of inner bark be over z/i inch wide or over 8 inches long, and

there shall be 1 inch of clean wood surface between

any two such strips. Should the strips of inner bark remaining on

the pole be less than % inch wide, the clear space

required between any two such strips may be

proportionately less than 1 inch. No circumference may have more than 20 per

cent of its surface covered with inner bark, although

the entire surface of the pole may contain less than

the allowable 20 per cent. Seasoning before treatment. The moisture content of the wood before treat- ment should be reduced, preferably by air seasoning, to not more than 20 per cent of its oven dry

weight, or to a constant weight basis. Whenever conditions will permit, thoroughly air season all structural timber, track ties, piles, and

other materials before treatment. When there is not sufficient time for proper air seasoning, or, in cases of piling and large-dimension

timbers which will not air season successfully

throughout without deterioration, artificial seasoning by steaming or boiling before treatment must

be resorted to. All efficient plants should be equipped to steam

material which occasion requires. In steaming, the pressure should at no time

exceed 30 pounds per square inch. The temperature in the treating cylinder should never be raised above 274° F. in steaming.

The seasoning yard should be in the open where

the prevailing winds will strike it freely; should not be in a low and humid situation of any kind if it can be avoided; should have good drainage; and

should be kept free from weeds and grass and

decaying wood material. Oak ties should be given a minimum of 8 months'

seasoning, and should preferably be seasoned 12 months; yellow pine, if seasoned in the south, 4 to

6 months; hemlock, tamarack, and jack pine, 12 months; gum, beech, birch, and hard maple, 4 to 6 months. (The references are to the seasoning

months of the year.) • Stacking.

Support all stacks of material for seasoning on

treated sills, and in all cases at least 6 inches of air space should be allowed underneath. To allow proper air circulation, the alleys between the piles

should extend in continuous lines across the season- ing yard and should be not less than 3 feet wide

in the working spaces and 1 foot wide in other

directions. In a moist climate and under humid conditions, season all material in open piles, which will provide

free circulation of air and exposure to the sun. By open piles is meant the common 1 by 7, 1 by 8, or 7 by 2 piling system, or other arrangement which

gives a minimum contact and the maximum of open

spaces between the ties. Insist that the stringers be

placed as near the end of the ties as possible, and

then in case of decay from contact the defect will not occur at the rail bearing. In arid climates with

low humidity, season in close piles to prevent checking and warping.

Both gum and beech should be seasoned only in wide open piles and watched very carefully for rot. Antisplitting devices. Ties and timbers which have a tendency to check

should be protected with S irons, or other devices. Framing.

Wherever possible, all timbers should be framed

or bored before treatment, and in lieu of this, unimpregnated wood exposed by framing or boring after treatment should be thoroughly painted with hot

creosote. Adzing and boring.

To insure uniform bearing surface and maximum

penetration under the rail seat, all ties should be

bored and adzed before treatment. Although sawn

ties may have a uniform surface, the boring increases the penetration at the point it is most needed.

Treating.

Adjust the treatment, including preservative and

process, as far as possible to the mechanical life and service requirements of the material. Base efficiency of treatment primarily on the

extent of distribution of a stated amount of preservative, rather than on final retention per cubic foot. At railroad plants and for railroad material, the recommendations of the American Railway Engineering Association (p. 631, Bulletin 163) may be

followed:

It is therefore recommended that at railroad plants the absorption be based on the treatment which will give the most complete penetration for each kind or class of timber, specifying complete penetration of the sapwood and as much of the heart as is possible for the

particular species or charge; payment to be based on the amount of perservative used plus operating and other charges. In specifying the amount of creosote to be in- jected, use gallon as the unit for track ties, posts, crossties, and other material of uniform size, and pounds

59
400.40 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

per cubic foot for piles, poles, and similar material

of variable size (p. 631, Bulletin 163 of the American

Railway Engineering Association). In treating with creosote, it is recommended that a maximum injection of creosote sufficient to insure the penetration of all treatable wood be required.

All of the sapwood and as much of the heartwood as

is possible for the particular species shall be thor- oughly impregnated. This applies equally to fullcell and empty-cell treatments. A penetration of }/2 inch on the heart faces may

be recommended as a safe minimum on structures above ground.

The use of the full-cell process is recommended

for piles and other marine timbers where subject to the attack of marine borers, and that in such situa- tions an injection of at least 12 pounds per cubic

foot for Douglas fir and 20 pounds per cubic foot

for other species, or treatment to practical refusal, should be given; while in marine and land situations where decay is the principal source of failure, treatments may range down to 10 pounds per cubic

foot by the full-cell process and to 6 pounds by the

empty-cell processes, the injection in all cases to be

sufficient to penetrate all the sapwood, except in the

case of Douglas fir. The full-cell treatment is recommended for permanent structures not subject to mechanical wear when conditions are favorable to wood-destroying

organisms, and particularly where the cost of renewals or replacement would be high. In all outside situations it is recommended that a maximum injection of creosote, or sufficient to insure the penetration of all treatable wood, be

required and that not less than an average of 5 pounds of creosote per cubic foot be left in the

treatable portions of the wood by any empty-cell

process; while it is urged as a definitely specified

requirement, that at least all of the sapwood and as much of the heartwood as is possible for the particular species shall be thoroughly impregnated, except

in the case of Douglas fir, and the depth or extent

of the penetration be equal to that of the full-cell treatment. The temperature in the treating cylinder should never be raised above 200° F. during oil immersion,

with possible exceptions in the case of some Pacific coast timbers which may require higher temperatures, (when) in the boiling process the oil temperature may be increased to 220° F. In treating with zinc chloride it is essential that

all timber be treated to refusal. It is recommended that where zinc chloride alone

is used treatment be by the standard A. W. P. A.

process for the treatment of material with zinc

chloride, and that a full impregnation which will insure the retention of a minimum of pound of dry salt per cubic foot of timber be given.

The zinc-chloride treatment is suggested in arid and semiarid regions, particularly for crossties and

other material with mechanical life limited to the expectation of life from decay and checking. It should not be used where mechanical wear is eliminated, nor in situations where the treated timber is in permanent or intermittent contact with either stagnant or flowing water. Consideration should

also be given to its use on overhead trestles and

similar structures. Under usual conditions three months' seasoning

after zinc treatment is advisable. Creosote zinc in mixture is fundamentally effective because composed of the two most widely accepted

preservatives. In .situations where the mixture is preferable to a single preservative, it should be used

according to the judgment of the consumer as to its greater economy and efficiency under local conditions. Handling after treatment. To secure the best results it is necessary to protect

treated material from mechanical abrasion both in handling and under service conditions. Federal Specifications Board, United States Government master specification No. 395, for wood pre- servatives and processes of treatment, April 1, 1926. This specification follows the recomendation of the technical committee of the board: "That the

specifications of the American Wood-Preservers'

Association in effect on the date of promulgation of

this specification, and subsequent revisions thereof

as far as they may be practicable, be used by the

Federal Government." The committee added the

following remark: "These specifications are based

upon the results of exhaustive research work and

experimentation in the field of wood preservation

by both Government and private agencies and have

had wide practical application b}r Federal and State

agencies, steamship lines, electric light and power

companies, and in other fields." 400.41 Preservative Solutions.

American Association of State Highway Officials, standard specifications for highway bridges and

incidental structures—timber preservatives—1926.

(Specifications for coal-tar paving oil and for coal-tar distillate oil for creosoted wood blocks, same as those of the American Wood-Preservers'

Association.)

(Specifications for creosote oil, grades 1, 2, and

3, coal-tar solution, anthracine oil and heavy creo- sote oil, same as those of the American WoodPreservers' Association.) The following specifica- tion is given for zinc chloride: Zinc chloride shall be acid free and shall not contain more than 0.1 per cent iron. Fuzed or solid zinc chloride shall contain at least 94 per cent chloride of zinc. Concentrated zinc chloride shall contain at least 50 per cent chloride of zinc. American Electric Railway Engineering Association, specifications for No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 grade

creosote oil and for creosote-coal-tar mixture, watergas-tar distillate, and water-gas-tar mixture, serial Nos. WP108, WP109, WP110, WP111, WP112, and

WP113, 1926. These specifications are similar to the standard

specifications of the American Wood-Preservers' Association given on following pages. 60
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.41

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, specification for carbolineum and similar wood

preserving oils, serial No. WP114, 1926.

General. The material desired under these specifications is a high boiling wood preserving oil derived from the products of distillation of gas tar; the gas tar being

produced by the destructive distillation of bituminous coal either in the manufacture of coal gas or in the manufacture of coke by the by-product process.

It shall be without adulteration. The right is reserved to take representative samples

of the oil and test the same wherever desired. Requirements.—All oil furnished under these

specifications shall conform to the following

requirements

(a) The specific gravity at 38° C. shall be not less than 1 nor more than 1.13.

(6) The flashing point shall be not less than 120° C.

(c) The burning point shall be not less than

165° C.

((i) When 100 grams of the oil are distilled in accordance with the specifications for the analysis

of carbolineum and similar oils hereinafter referred

to:

(1) The distillate coming over below 235° C.

shall not exceed 2.5 per cent.

(2) The distillate coming over between 235° and

300° C. shall not exceed 20 per cent.

(3) The residue above 360° C. shall not exceed 35 per cent. This residue shall be soft and plastic at 20° C.

(4) The tar acids in the distillate coming over below 300° C. shall not exceed 2 per cent by volume

of the entire sample.

(5) The sulphonation residue from the fractions

distilling between 300 and 330° C. shall not exceed

0.25 cubic centimeters.

(e) The constituents of the oil insoluble in benzol

shall not exceed 0.25 of 1 per cent by weight.

if) The oil shall be liquid at a temperature of 38° C; that is, there shall be no separation of solid substances at that temperature.

(g) The ash left on ignition shall not exceed 1 per

cent. Subsidiary Specifications.—The recommended

specifications of the American Electric Railway

Engineering Association for the analysis of carbo- lineum and similar oils are considered as forming a

part of the above specifications.

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, specifications for heavy creosote oil suitable

for brush and open tank treatment, serial No. WP115, 1924. This specification is similar to the standard

specification for creosote oils for nonpressure treatments (brush or spray treatment) of the American Wood-Preservers' Association. American Railway Engineering Association, specifications for creosote oils, creosote-coal-tar solution,

and zinc chloride, 1921.

CREOSOTE OILS (Specifications for creosote oils, grades Nos. 1, 2, and 3, same as those of the American-Wood

Preservers' Association.) CREOSOTE-COAL-TAR SOLUTION

(Specifications same as those of the American

Wood-Preservers' Association, with the added state- ment that the specific gravity of the fraction between

235° C. and 315° C. shall not be less than 1.03 at 38° C. compared with water at 15.5° C.) ZINC CHLORIDE

(Specifications same as those of the American

Wood-Preservers' Association with the statement

that in any solution specified the percentage of zinc chloride specified shall be the amount of soluble

zinc chloride required.)

American Society for Testing Materials, standards and tentative standards for testing wood

preservatives.

(This society has formulated detailed methods for testing wood preservatives, as follows: D 38-24, 1924, standard method of sampling and

analysis of creosote oil; D 168-23T, 1923, tentative methods of test for coke residue of creosote oil; D 199-24T, 1924, tentative method of chemical

analysis of zinc chloride; D 246-26T, 1926, tentative method of test for distillation of creosote oil.) American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specification for creosote coal-tar solution for

ties and structural timbers, 1923.

1. The oil shall be a coal-tar product of which

at least 80 per cent shall be a distillate of coal-gas

tar or coke-oven tar, and the remainder shall be

refined or filtered coal-gas tar or coke-oven tar. It shall comply with the following requirements:

2. It shall not contain more than 3 per cent of water.

3. It shall not contain more than 2 per cent of matter insoluble in benzol.

4. The specific gravity of the oil at 38° C. compared with water at 15.5° C. shall be not less than

1.05 or more than 1.12.

5. The distillate, based on water-free oil, shall be within the following limits: Up to 210° C, not more than 5 per cent. Up to 235° C, not more than 25 per cent.

6. The residue above 355° C, if it exceeds 26 per

cent, shall have a float test of not more than 50

seconds at 70° C.

7. The oil shall yield not more than 6 per cent coke residue.

8. The foregoing tests shall be made in accord- ance with the standard methods of the American

Wood-Preservers' Association. American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specifications for creosote oils for nonpressure

treatments, 1923. Open-tank treatment can be accomplished in two general ways, namely, by dipping and by hot

and cold bath. See 400.43. 61
400.41 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Specifications for creosote oil, grades Nos. 1, 2, and 3. (Same as for creosote oil for ties and

structural timbers.) BRUSH OR SPRAY TREATMENT

This treatment consists in applying the hot pre- servatives to the dry timber by means of a brush

or spray. Two coats, 24 hours apart, are customarily applied. The following are the specifications

for cresoote oil for this process:

' 1. The oil shall be a pure distillate of coal-gas tar or coke-oven tar. It shall comply with the

following requirements:

2. It shall be fluid at 15° C. and crystal free at 38° C.

3. It shall not contain more than 1 per cent of water.

4. It shall not contain more than 0.5 per cent of matter insoluble in benzol.

5. The specific gravity of the oil at 38° C. compared with water at 15.5° C. shall not be less than

1.06.

6. The distillate, based on water-free oil, shall be within the following limits: Up to 210° C, not more than 1 per cent. Up to 235° C, not more than 10 per cent. Up to 355° C, not less than 65 per cent.

7. The residue above 355° C, if it exceeds 10 per

cent, shall have a float test of not more than 50

seconds at 70° C.

8. The oil shall yield not more than 2 per cent coke residue.

9. The foregoing tests shall be made in accord- ance with the standard methods of the American

Wood-Preservers' Association. American Wood-Preservers' Association, standard

specifications for creosote oil for ties and structural timber, grade Nos. 1, 2, and 3, 1924.

1. The oil shall be distillate of coal-gas or coke- oven tar. It shall comply with the following

requirements

2. It shall contain not more than 3 per cent of water.

3. It shall contain not more than 0.5 per cent of matter insoluble in benzol.

4. The specific gravity of the oil at 38° C. compared with water at 15.5° C. shall be not less than

1.03.

5. The distillate, based on water-free oil, shall be

within the following limits:

Grade 1, not less than

Grade. 2 not less than

Grade 3, not less than

Per cent Per cent Per cent Up to 210° C_„ 5 8 10 Up to 235° C-___ 25 35 40

6. The residue above 355° C, if it exceeds 5 per

cent, shall have a float test of not more than 50

seconds at 70° C.

7. The oil shall yield not more than 2 per cent coke residue.

8. The foregoing tests shall be made in accord- ance with the standard methods of the American

Wood-Preservers' Association. American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specification for high boiling or anthracene oil for brush or spray treatment, 1924.

1. The oil •shall be a pure distillate of coal-gas

tar or coke-oven tar. It shall comply with the

following requirements:

2. It shall be fluid at 15° C. and crvstal free at

38° C.

3. It shall not contain more than 1 per cent of water.

4. It shall not contain more than 0.5 per cent of matter insoluble in benzol.

5. The specific gravity of the oil at 38° C, compared with water at 15.5° C, shall not be less than

1.09 nor more than 1.13.

6. The distillate, based on water-free oil, shall be within the following limits: Up to 235° C, not more than 2^ per cent. Between 235 and 300° C, not more than 20

per cent. Up to 355° C, not less than 50 per cent.

7. The residue above 355° C, if it exceeds 35 per

cent, shall have a float test of not more than 50

seconds at 70° C.

8. The oil shall yield not more than 2 per cent coke residue.

9. The foregoing tests shall be made in accord- ance with the standard tests of the American WoodPreservers' Association except the distillation test which shall be made by the method hereto described. In addition to the above requirements, the

following are sometimes deemed advantageous:

(a) The flash point by the Cleveland open-cup

tester shall not be less than 120° C.

(b) The fire point by the Cleveland open-cup

tester shall not be less than 165° C.

(c) The tar acids as determined by the contraction method of the association shall not exceed 3 per

cent by volume of the total oil. American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specifications for preservatives for flooring and

paving blocks, 1923. COAI-TAR PAVING OIL

1. The oil shall be a coal-tar product, of which

at least 65 per cent shall be a distillate of coal-gas tar

or coke-oven tar, and the remainder shall be refined or filtered coal-gas tar or coke-oven tar. It shall comply with the following requirements:

2. It shall not contain more than 3 per cent of water.

3. It shall not contain more than 3 per cent of matter insoluble in benzol

4. The specific gravity of the oil at 38° C. compared with water at 15.5° C. shall not be less than

1.07 nor more than 1.14

5. The distillate, based on water-free oil, shall be

within the following limits: Up to 210° C, not more than 5 per cent. Up to 235° C, not more than 25 per cent. 62
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.41

6. The residue above 355° C, if it exceeds 35 per

cent, shall have a float test of not more than 80 sec- onds at 70° C.

7. The oil shall yield not more than 10 per cent coke residue.

8. The foregoing tests shall be made in accordance

with the standard methods of the American WoodPreservers' Association. COAL-TAR DISTILLATE OIL

1. The oil shall be a distillate of coal-gas tar or coke-oven tar. It shall comply with the following

requirements

2. It shall not contain more than 3 per cent of water.

3. It shall not contain more than 0.5 per cent of matter insoluble in benzol.

4. The specific gravity of the oil at 38 °C. compared with water at 15.5° C. shall not be less than

1.06.

5. The distillate, based on water-free oil, shall be

within the following limits: Up to 210° C, not more than 5 per cent. Up to 235° C, not more than 15.vper cent.

6. The residue above 355° C, if it exceeds 10 per

cent, shall have a float test of not more than 50 sec- onds at 70° C.

7. The oil shall yield not more than 2 per cent of coke residue.

8. The foregoing tests shall be made in accord- ance with the standard methods of the American

Wood-Preservers' Association. REFINED WATER-GAS TAR

1. The preservative shall be refined water-gas tar. It shall comply with the following requirements:

2. It shall contain not more than 3 per cent of water.

3. It shall contain not more than 2 per cent of matter insoluble in benzol and chloroform.

4. The specific gravity of the preservative at 38°

C. compared with water at 15.5° C, shall not be less than 1.110 nor more than 1.140.

5. The distillates, based on water-free oil, shall be within the following limits

Up to 210° C, not more than 5 per cent. Up to 235° C, not more than 15 per cent. Up to 315° C, not more than 40 per cent. Up to 355° C, not less than 25 per cent.

6. The specific gravity of the total distillate below

355° C. shall not be less than 0.99 nor more than

1.02 at 38° C. compared with water at 15.5° C.

7. The foregoing tests shall be made in accordance

with the standard methods of the American WoodPreservers' Association. American Wood-Preservers' Association, standard

specification for water-gas-tar distillate for use with

zinc chloride.

1. The oil shall be a distillate of water-gas tar which shall comply with the following requirements:

2. It shall not contain more than 3 per cent of water.

3. It shall not contain more than 0.5 per cent of matter insoluble in benzol.

4. The specific gravity of the oil at 38° C, compared with water at 15.5° C, shall not be less than

1.02.

5. The distillate, based on water-free oil, shall be

within the following limits: Up to 210° C, not more than 5 per cent. Up to 235° C, not more than 25 per cent. Up to 355° C, not less than 70 per cent.

6. The residue above 355° C, if it exceeds 5 per

cent, shall have a float test of not more than 50

seconds at 70° C.

7. The oil shall not yield more than 2 per cent of coke residue.

8. The foregoing tests shall be made in accordance

with the standard methods of the American WoodPreservers' Association. American Wood-Preservers' Association, standard

specification for water-gas-tar solution for use with

zinc chloride.

1. The oil shall be product of water-gas tar of which at least 60 per cent shall be a distillate of water-gas tar and the remainder refined or filtered water-gas tar.

2. It shall not contain more than 3 per cent of water.

3. It shall not contain more than 2 per cent of matter insoluble in benzol.

4. The specific gravity of the oil at 38° C, compared with water at 15.5° C, shall not be less than

1.03 nor more than 1.07.

5. The distillate, based on water-free oil, shall be

within the following limits: Up to 210° C.j not more than 8 per cent. Up to 235° C, not more than 20 per cent. Up to 355° C, not less than 60 per cent.

6. The residue above 355° C, if it exceeds 25 per

cent, shall have a float test of not more than 50

seconds at 70° C.

7. The oil shall not yield more than 10 per cent

of coke residue.

8. The foregoing tests shall be made in accord- ance with the standard methods of the American

Wood-Preservers' Association. American Wood-Preservers' Association, standard

specification for zinc chloride. The zinc chloride shall be acid-free and shall not

contain more than 0.1 per cent iron. Fused or solid zinc chloride shall contain at least 94 per cent chlo- ride of zinc. Concentrated zinc chloride shall contain at least 50 per cent chloride of zinc. Western Red Cedar Association, specifications for butt-treating cedar poles in open tanks, March 10, 1922. CREOSOTE

(Specifications for creosote are similar to those

for creosote oil, No. 1 of the American WoodPreservers' Association, above.) CARBOLINEUM

Derivation of carholineum. The carbolineum shall consist of the higher boiling factions of pure coal tar and must not contain any

admixture of any other tar oil or residue obtained

from petroleum or any other source. 63
400.41 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Specific gravity.

The specific gravity of the oil compared with water at 15.5° C. shall not be more than 1.135 nor

less than 1.09 at 38° C. Flashing point.

The flashing point shall not, in general, be below

140° C. Burning point.

The burning point shall not, in general, be below

170° C.

Fractional distillation. The amount of distillate coming over 300° C.

shall not exceed 15 per cent, of which not to exceed

2 per cent shall distill below 235° C. Tar acid content. The tar acid in the distillate coming over below

300° C. shall not exceed 2 per cent by volume of entire sample.

Sulphonaiion test for impurities.

A sulphonation test of the fraction between 300

and 360° C. should yield in residue not more than

one-tenth of 1 per cent by volume of entire sample.

Insoluble residue. The percentage of residue insoluble in benzol

shall not exceed 0.25 of 1 per cent by weight.

400.42 Pressure Processes.

American Association of State Highway Officials, standard specifications for highway bridges and inci- dental structures—preservative treatment for timber, pressure processes—1926.

(Specifications for pressure treatments for southern yellow pine by the full-cell process and the

empty-cell process with and without initial air, and

for Douglas fir by the full-cell process and the emptycell process with initial air, similar to those of the American Wood-Preservers' Association, with the

following statement as to the amount of preservative to be used.)AMOUNT OF PRESERVATIVE Unless otherwise specified the amount of preservative retained shall be as follows:

(a) Creosote or creosote coal tar.

1. For piles and timber in general bridge construction:

Full-cell process, not less than 12 pounds of oil per cubic foot of timber, or empty-cell process, not

less than 8 pounds of oil per cubic foot of timber.

2. For piles or timber in salt water subject to attack by marine borers:

Full-cell process—southern yellow pine, not less than 20 pounds of oil per cubic foot of timber;

Douglas fir, not less than 15 pounds of oil per cubic

foot of timber.

(b) Zinc chloride.

1. For timber or lumber to be painted or not

subject to water leaching: Not less than 3^ pound

of dry salt per cubic foot of timber.

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, specifications for preservative treatment of wood by pressure process, serial No. WP104,

1926. This specification is similar to the specification for preservative treatments of wood adopted by

the American Railway Engineering Association below. American Electric Railway Engineering Association, specification for pressure treatment of pine

poles, serial No. WP105, 1926. This specification is similar to the standard

specification for the preservative treatment of poles

by pressure process of the American Wood-Preservers' Association. American Wood-Preservers' Association, standard

specifications for the preservative treatment of Douglas fir piles by pressure processes, 1926. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. The following general requirements (2 to 8) apply to each of the treatment processes:

2. Conditioning.—Piles shall be conditioned for treatment in accordance with American WoodPreservers' Association "standards for the purchase

and preservation of treatable timber."

3. Seasoning.—(a) Piles shall be seasoned, by air or by boiling under vacuum as agreed upon, until

in the judgment of the purchaser's representative

any moisture in the wood will not prevent the

injection and proper distribution and penetration of the specified amount of preservative. (6) When,

in the judgment of the purchaser's representative,

seasoning by boiling under vacuum is necessary for adequate treatment, piles shall be held in creosote under a vacuum at temperatures which do not

exceed 220° F. The seasoning period shall be maintained until condensation passing off from the piles

is approximately 1 to 10 pounds per cubic foot of

piles per hour. A minimum vacuum of 20 inches

shall be maintained during seasoning.

4. Preparation for treatment.—Any charge of piles shall be confined to Douglas fir, of pieces approximately equal in moisture and sapwood content, into which approximately equal quantities of preservative can be injected, on which all necessary framing,

boring, incising, or chamfering shall have been done

where possible.

5. Manner of treatment.—The ranges of pressure, temperature, and time duration shall be controlled

so as to result in maximum penetration by the quantity of preservative injected, which shall per- meate the wood to the depth required in section 7. The vacuum requirements stipulated are those at

sea level, and necessary corrections shall be made for

altitude.

6. Retention of preservative.—No charge shall contain less than 90 per cent nor more than 110 per

cent of the quantity of preservative that may be

specified, but the average retention of preservative

by the material treated under any contract or order

shall be at least 100 per cent of the quantity specified. The amount of preservative retained shall 64
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.42

be calculated on the basis of preservative at 100° F., from readings of working tank gauges, or scales, or from weights before and after treatment of loaded trams on suitable track scales, taking into consideration the quantity of preservative absorbed during

the boiling, and checked as may be desired by the

purchaser's representative.

7. Determination of penetration.—Penetration shall be determined by sampling piles in each charge, as may be desired by the purchaser's representative.

Any holes which may be bored shall be filled with

tight-fitting treated plugs.

Any borings of a pile shall be made midway of

its length and shall show a radial penetration by oil not less than as follows:

Full-cell process. After retention of 12 pounds per cubic foot, z/i

inch of creosoted wood.

After retention of 14 pounds per cubic foot, Y% inch of creosoted wood.

After retention of 16 pounds per cubic foot, 1 inch of creosoted wood.

Empty-cell process. After retention of 8 pounds per cubic foot, z/i inch

of creosoted wood.

8. Plant equipment.—Treating plants shall be

equipped with the thermometers and gauges neces- sary to indicate and record accurately the conditions at all stages of treatment, and all equipment

shall be maintained in condition satisfactory to the purchaser. The apparatus and chemicals

necessary for making the analyses and tests required

by the purchaser shall also be provided by plant

operators and kept in condition for juse at all times. PRESERVATIVES

9. The preservative used shall be whichever of the following standards of the American-Wood

Preservers' Association is stipulated: For use in salt water: Grade 1 creosote oil for ties and structural timber. For use in fresh water or other locations where

marine borers are not present:

Grade 1 creosote oil for ties and structural timber. Grade 2 creosote oil for ties and structural timber. Grade 3 creosote oil for ties and structural timber.

Creosote-coal-tar solution for ties and structural timber. AMOUNT OF PRESERVATIVE TO BE USED

10. For use in salt water:

Full-cell process, not less than 12 pounds per

cubic foot of piles. For use in fresh water or other locations where

marine borers are not present:

Full-cell process, not less than 10 pounds per

cubic foot of piles. Empty-cell process with initial air, not less than

8 pounds per cubic foot of piles. Empty-cell process without initial air, not less than 8 pounds per cubic foot of piles.

TREATING OPERATIONS

11. Heating.—Whenever it is desirable to warm

dry piles they shall be heated in preservative that

is introduced at a temperature of 160 to 180° F., and the temperature gradually raised to 200° F. and

held at that temperature for not more than six hours.

12. Full-cell process.—Following the heating period, in the case of dry piles, or the seasoning-byboiling-under-vacuum period, in the case of green

piles, the cylinder shall be filled with preservatives

between 160 and 200° F. The pressure shaU then

be raised to a minimum of 75 pounds per square

inch and maintained within a maximum of 175 pounds per square inch until the quantity of pre- servative required to insure the final retention

stipulated is injected into the wood, or, failing this, until the purchaser's representative is satisfied that the largest volumetric injection that is practicable has been obtained. The temperature of the preservative during the pressure period shall be not less than 160° F., nor more than 200° F., and

shall average at least 180° F. After pressure is completed the cylinder shall be

emptied speedily of preservative and a vacuum of at least 20 inches promptly created and maintained

until the piles can be removed from the cylinder

free of dripping preservative.

13. Empty-cell process with initial air.—(a) Following the heating period, in the case of dry

piles, or the seasoning-by-boiling-under-vacuum

period, in the case of green wood, piles shall be

subjected to air pressure of sufficient intensity and

duration to provide under a vacuum the ejection

of surplus preservative and to insure a retention and proper distribution of the stipulated number of pounds of preservative per cubic foot of wood. (6) The preservative shall be introduced between

160 and 200° F., the cylinder pressure being

maintained constant until the cylinder is filled with

preservative. The pressure shall then be rasied to a minimum of 125 pounds per square inch and

maintained within a maximum of 200 pounds per square inch until there is obtained the largest

practicable volumetric injection that can be reduced

to the required retention by a quick high vacuum,

or, failing this, until the purchaser's representative

is satisfied that the largest volumetric injection that is practicable has been obtained. The temperature of the preservative during the pressure period shall be not less than 160° F., nor more than

200° F., and shall average at least 180° F. After pressure is completed the cylinder shall be

emptied speedily of preservative and a vacuum of at least 20 inches promptly created and maintained

until the piles can be removed from the cylinder

free of dripping preservative. Or, after pressure

is completed and before removal of preservative

from the cylinder, the preservative surrounding the

piles may be reheated to a maximum of 220° F., the steam to be turned off immediately the maximum temperature is reached. The preservative

shall then be removed from the cylinder and a vacuum applied as specified above. 65
400.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

14. Empty-cell process without initial air.—Fol- lowing the heating period, in the case of dry piles, or the seasoning-by-boiling-under-vacuum period,

in the case of green piles, the preservative between

160 and 200° F. shall be introduced to the piles until the cylinder is filled. Pressure shall then be

raised to a minimum of 100 pounds per square

inch and maintained within a maximum of 200 pounds per square inch until there is obtained the

largest practicable volumetric injection that can

be reduced to the required retention by a quick

high vacuum, or failing this, until the purchaser's

representative is satisfied that the largest volumetric

injection that is practicable has been obtained. The temperature of the preservative during the

pressure period shall be not less than 160° F., nor more than 200° F., and shall average at least 180° F. After pressure is completed the cylinder shall be

emptied speedily of preservative and a vacuum of at least 20 inches promptly created and maintained

for not less than 30 minutes until the quantity of preservative injected is reduced to the required

retention and the piles can be removed from the

cylinder free of dripping preservative. Or, after pressure is completed and before removal of preservative from the cylinder, the preservative surrounding the piles may be reheated to a maximum of 220° F., the steam to be turned off immediately the maximum temperature is reached. The preservative shall then be removed from the cylinder

and a vacuum applied as specified above. American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specifications for the preservative treatment of Douglas fir ties by pressure processes, 1926. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(Similar to those for Douglas fir piles with added

statements relating to seasoning, and certain additions to the preservatives used, and the amounts

employed, as indicated below.)

Seasoning.

When, in the judgment of the purchaser's representative, steam seasoning is necessary for adequate

treatment, crossties may be steamed in the cylin- der at not more than 20 pounds pressure per square

inch for not more than six hours at not more than

260° F., which pressure and temperature maxima

shall not be reached in less than two hours. The

cylinder shall be provided with vents to relieve it of air and insure proper circulation of steam. After steaming is completed a minimum vacuum of 22

inches shall be maintained for not less than 30

minutes. The cylinder shall be relieved continu- ously or frequently enough to prevent condensate

from accumulating in sufficient quantity to reach

the wood. Before the preservative is introduced

the cylinder shall be drained of condensate.

Preservatives. The preservative or preservatives used shall be

whichever of the following standards of the American

Wood-Preservers' Association is stipulated:

Grade 1 creosote oil for ties and structural timber. Grade 2 creosote oil for ties and structural timber. Grade 3 creosote oil for ties and structural timber.

Creosote-coal-tar solution for ties and structural timber. Zinc chloride. Water-gas-tar distillate for use with zinc chloride. Water-gas-tar solution for use with zinc chloride. AMOUNT OF PRESERVATIVES TO BE USED

(a) Creosote.

Full-cell process, not less than 10 pounds per

cubic foot of ties. Empty-cell process with initial air, not less than

6 pounds per cubic foot of ties. Empty-cell process without initial air, not less than 6 pounds per cubic foot of ties.

(6) Zinc chloride. Not less than Y2 pound of dry salt per cubic foot

of ties.

(c) Creosote-zinc chloride. Not less than 2 pounds of oil and ^2 pound of dry salt per cubic foot of ties. TREATING OPERATIONS (The requirements for oil treatment by the full- cell process and the empty-cell process with and

without initial air are the same as those for Douglas

fir piles. The requirements for salt treatment and

oil-salt treatment are given below.)

Salt treatment.

(a) The treating solution, which shall not have a

strength exceeding 5 per cent determined by the American Wood-Preservers' Association " standard

method of analysis for zinc chloride," and which

shall be no stronger than necessary to obtain the

required retention of preservative with the largest

volumetric absorption practicable, shall be thor- oughly mixed before use.

(5) Air-seasoned ties shall not be given a prelimi- nary steaming in the cylinder, except it is needed to obtain the required temperature of solution in the cyl- inder, when the ties may be steamed for not less than

one hour nor more than two hours, at a temperature

of not more than 250° F. After steaming is completed a vacuum of not less than 22 inches shall be

maintained for not less than 30 minutes or until the wood is as dry and free of air as practicable. When

no preliminary steaming is employed the ties shall be subjected to a vacuum of not less than 22 inches

for 30 minutes before the preservative is admitted

to the cylinder. If the vacuum is broken while the condensate is being drained from the cylinder a

second vacuum as high as the first shall be created. The preservative shall be introduced between 160 and 200° F., without breaking the vacuum until the

cylinder is filled. The pressure shall then be raised

to a minimum of 125 pounds per square inch and

maintained within a maximum of 175 pounds per square inch until the quantity of preservative

required to insure the final retention stipulated is injected into the ties or until less than 2 per cent of the total quantity required has been injected during

66
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.42

the latter half of one hour throughout which the

rate of injection has persistently decreased while the pressure has been held continuously at the maxi- , mum. The temperature of the preservative during the pressure period shall be not less than 150° F., nor more than 200° F., and shall average at least 180° F. After the pressure is completed the cylin- der shall be emptied speedily of preservative and a vacuum promptly created and maintained until the wood can be removed from the cylinder free ^f dripping preservative.

Oil-salt treatment.

(a) The preservative mixture shall be composed

of the volumetric proportions of creosote oil and

zinc-chloride solution of the necessary strength

required to obtain the stipulated retention with the

largest volumetric injection that is practicable, and

shall be agitated in the working tank and cylinder

so as to insure thorough mixing before and while the

cylinder is being filled with preservative and while the preservative is being injected into the ties. The

strength of the zinc-chloride solution shall not exceed

5 per cent and shall be determined by the American

Wood-Preservers' Association "standard method of analysis for zinc chloride."

(6) Air-seasoned ties shail not be given a prelimi- nary steaming in the cylinder, except it is needed to obtain the required temperature of solution in the

cylinder, when the ties may be steamed for not less than 1 hour nor more than 2 hours, at a temperature

of not more than 250° F. After steaming is completed a vacuum of not less than 22 inches shall be maintained for not less than 30 minutes or until the wood is as dry and free of air as practicable.

When no preliminary steaming is employed the ties shall be subjected to a vacuum of not less than 22

inches for 30 minutes before the preservative is admitted to the cylinder. If the vacuum is broken

while the condensate is being drained from the

cylinder a second vacuum as high as the first shall be created. The mixture of preservatives shall be

introduced between 160 and 200° F., without

breaking the vacuum until the cylinder is filled. The pressure shall then be raised to a minimum of 125 pounds per square inch and maintained within a maximum of 175 pounds per square inch until the quantity of preservative required to insure the

final retention stipulated is injected into the ties or

until less than 2 per cent of the total quantity

required has been injected during the latter half of 1 hour throughout which the rate of injection has

persistently decreased while the pressure has been

held continuously at the maximum. The temperature of the preservative during the pressure period

shaU be not less than 150° F. nor more than 200° F., and shall average at least 180° F. After the pressure

is completed the cylinder shall be emptied speedily

of preservative and a vacuum promptly created and

maintained until the wood can be removed from the

cylinder free of dripping preservative.

American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specifications for the preservative treatment of yellow-pine piles by pressure processes, 1926.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(Similar to those for timber. However, the steam-seasoning treatment may be applied to the

piles for not more than 24 hours at not more than

274° F., and the preservatives are limited to creo- sote oils, grades 1, 2, and 3, and to creosote coal-tar

solution.) The amount of preservative to be used is: For use in salt water.

Full-cell process, not less than 22 pounds per

cubic foot of piles. For use in fresh water.

Full-cell process, not less than 15 pounds per cubic

foot of piles. For use in dry soil. Full-cell process, not less than 12 pounds per cubic

foot of piles. Empty-cell process with initial air, not less than

8 pounds per cubic foot of piles. Empty-cell process without initial air, not less than 8 pounds per cubic foot of piles. TREATING OPERATIONS (Same as those for timber, but limited to the

full-cell and the empty-cell processes.)

American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specifications for the preservative treatment of posts by pressure processes, 1926. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(Similar to those for timber for general construction except in water. However, the steamseasoning treatment may be applied to the posts

for not more than 10 hours at not more than 259°

F.) TREATING OPERATIONS (Same as those for timber, but limited to the full- cell and empty-cell processes.)

American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specifications for the preservative treatment of timber, by pressure processes, excluding Douglas

fir, larch, or tamarack, 1926. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. The following general requirements (2 to 8) apply to each of the treatment processes:

2. Conditioning.—Timber shall be conditioned

for treatment in accordance with American WoodPreservers' Association " standards for the purchase

and preservation of treatable timber.

3. Seasoning.—(a) Timber shall be seasoned by

air or steam as agreed upon until, in the judgment of the purchaser's representative, any moisture in the wood will not prevent the injection and proper dis- tribution of the specified amount of preservative.

(6) When, in the judgment of the purchaser's representative, steam seasoning is necessary for ade- quate treatment, timbers may be steamed in the

cylinder at not more than 30 pounds pressure per square inch for not more than 20 hours at not more

than 274° F., which pressure and temperature

maxima shall not be reached in less than two hours.

67
400.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN* WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

The cylinder shall be provided with vents to relieve

it of air and insure proper circulation of steam. After steaming is completed a minimum vacuum of 22

inches shall be maintained for not less than 15 minutes. The cylinder shall be relieved continuously

or frequently enough to prevent condensate from

accumulating in sufficient quantity to reach the wood. Before the preservative is introduced the

cylinder shall be drained of condensate.

4. Preparation for treatment—Any charge of tim- ber shall be confined to one kind or designated group or kinds of wood, of pieces approximately

equal in size and moisture and sapwood content,

into which approximately equal quantities of pre- servative can be injected, on which all necessary framing, boring, or chamfering shall have been done,

where possible, and so separated as to insure contact of preservative, and steam if used, with all surfaces.

5. Manner of treatment.—The ranges of pressure, temperature, and time duration shall be controlled so as to result in maximum penetration by the quantity of preservative injected, which shall permeate

all of the sapwood, and as much of the heartwood

as practicable. The vacuum requirements stipu- lated are those at sea level, and necessary correc- tions shall be made for altitude.

6. Retention of preservative.—No charge shall contain less than 90 per cent, nor more than 110

per cent, of the quantity of preservative that may

be specified; but the average retention of preser- vative by the material treated under any contract

or order shall be at least 100 per cent of the quantity specified. The amount of preservative retained

shall be calculated on the basis of preservative at 100° F., from readings of working tank gauges,

or scales, or from weights before and after treatment

of loaded trams on suitable track scales, checked

as may be desired by the purchaser's representative.

7. Determination of penetration.—Penetration shall be determined by sampling timbers in each charge,

as may be desired by the purchaser's representative.

Any holes which may be bored shall be filled with

tight-fitting treated plugs.

8. Plant equipment.—Treating plants shall be

equipped with the thermometers and gauges neces- sary to indicate and record accurately the conditions

at all stages of treatment, and all equipment shall be maintained in condition satisfactory to the purchaser. The apparatus and chemicals necessary for making the analyses and tests required by the purchaser shall also be provided by plant operators,

and kept in condition for use at all times. PRESERVATIVES

9. The preservative or preservatives used shall be

whichever of the following standards of the American Wood-Preservers' Association is stipulated:

Grade 1 creosote oil for ties and structural timber. Grade 2 creosote oil for ties and structural timber. Grade 3 creosote oil for ties and structural timber.

Creosote-coal-tar solution for ties and structural timber.

Zinc chloride. Water-gas-tar distillate for use with zinc chloride. Water-gas-tar solution for use with zinc chloride. AMOUNT OF PRESERVATIVES TO BE USED

10. (a) Creosote: For use in coastal water:

Full-cell process, not less than 16 pounds per cubic

foot of timber. For general construction, except in coastal water.

Full-cell process, not less than 10 pounds per

cubic foot of timber. Empty-cell process with initial air, not less than

5 pounds per cubic foot of timber. Empty-cell process without initial air, not less than 5 pounds per cubic foot of timber.

(6) Zinc chloride: For general construction, except in water, not less than }/2 pound of dry salt per cubic foot of timber.

(c) Creosote-zinc chloride: For general construction, except in water, not less than 2 pounds of oil and % pound of dry salt per

cubic foot of timber. TREATING OPERATIONS

Oil treatment.

11. Full-cell process.—(a) Timber shall be subjected to a vacuum of sufficient intensity and duration to insure that the wood is as dry and free from

air as practicable, and to permit a retention of the

specified number of pounds of preservative per cubic

foot of wood.

(6) The preservative shall be introduced between

165 and 200° F., and the cylinder filled without

breaking the vacuum. The pressure shall then be

raised to and maintained at a minimum of 100

pounds per square inch or until the quantity of preservative required to insure the final retention

stipulated is injected into the wood, or until the

purchaser's representative is satisfied that the largest

volumetric injection that is practicable has been

obtained. The temperature of the preservative

during the pressure period shall be not less than

150° F., nor more than 200° F., and shall average

at least 180° F. After the pressure is completed

the cylinder shall be emptied speedily of preservative, and a vacuum of not less than 22 inches promptly created and maintained until the wood can be removed from the cylinder free of dripping

preservative.

12. Empty-cell process with initial air.—(a) Timber shall be subjected to air pressure of sufficient intensity and duration to provide under a vacuum

the ejection of surplus preservative, and to insure a retention and proper distribution of the stipulated

number of pounds of preservative per cubic foot of wood.

(5) The preservative shall be introduced between

165 and 200° F., the cylinder pressure being maintained constant until the cylinder is filled with

preservative. The pressure shall then be raised to and maintained at a minimum of 150 pounds per

square inch or until there is obtained the largest

68
TIMBER AND OTHEE UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.42

practicable volumetric injection that can be reduced

to the stipulated retention by a quick high vacuum,

or until the purchaser's representative is satisfied that the largest volumetric injection that is practicable has been obtained. The temperature of the

preservative during the pressure period shall be not

less than 150° F., nor more than 200° F., and shall average at least 180° F. After pressure is completed

the cylinder shall be emptied speedily of preservative, and a vacuum promptly created and maintained until the wood can be removed from the

cylinder free of dripping preservative.

13. Empty-cell process without initial air.—The

preservative between 165 and 200° F. shall be intro- duced to the timber until the cylinder is filled.

• Pressure shall then be raised to and maintained at a minimum of 100 pounds per square inch or until there is obtained the largest practicable volumetric

injection that can be reduced to the stipulated reten- tion by a quick high vacuum, or until the purchaser's

representative is satisfied that the largest volumetric

injection that is practicable has been obtained. The temperature of the preservative during the pres- sure period shall be not less than 150° F., nor more

than 200° F., and shall average at least 180° F. After pressure is completed the cylinder shall be

emptied speedily of preservative and a vacuum of not less than 22 inches promptly created and maintained for not less than 30 minutes until the quantity

of preservative injected is reduced to the required

retention and the wood can be removed from the

cylinder free of dripping preservative.

Salt treatment.

14. (a) The treating solution which shall not have

a strength exceeding 5 per cent, determined by the American Wood-Preservers' Association " standard

method of analysis for zinc chloride," and which

shall be no stronger than necessary to obtain the

required retention of preservative with the largest

volumetric absorption practicable, shall be thor- oughly mixed before use

(6) Air-seasoned timber may be steamed in the

cylinder for not less than one hour, nor more than

two hours, at a pressure of not more than 20 pounds

per square inch. After steaming is completed a vacuum of at least 22 inches shall be maintained

for not less than 15 minutes, or until the wood is as dry and free of air as practicable. If the vacuum

is broken while the condensate is being drained from

the cylinder a second vacuum as high as the first shall be created. The preservative shall be intro- duced without breaking the vacuum until the cylin- der is filled. The pressure shall then be raised to and maintained at a minimum of 100 pounds per square inch until the quantity of preservative to insure the final retention stipulated is injected into the timber, or until less than 5 per cent of the total quantity required has been injected during the latter half of one hour throughout which the rate of injec- tion has persistently decreased while the pressure has been held continuously at 125 or more pounds

per square inch. The temperature of the preservative during the pressure period shall be not less

than 140° F., nor more than 200° F., and shall average at least 150° F. After the pressure is completed the cylinder shall be emptied speedily of preservative and a vacuum promptly created and

maintained until the wood can be removed from

the cylinder free of dripping preservative.

Oil-salt treatment.

15. (a) The preservative mixture shall be composed of the volumetric proportions of creosote oil and zinc-chloride solution of the necessary strength

required to obtain the stipulated retention with the

largest volumetric injection that is practicable, and

shall be agitated in the working tank and cylinder

so as to insure thorough mixing before and while the

cylinder is being filled with preservative, and while the preservative is being injected into the timber. The strength of the zinc-chloride solution shall not

exceed 5 per cent and shall be determined by the American Wood- Preservers' Association " standard

method of analysis for zinc chloride."

(6) Air-seasoned timber may be steamed in the

cylinder for not less than one hour, nor more than

two hours, at a pressure of not more than 20 pounds

per square inch. After seasoning is completed a vacuum of at least 22 inches shall be maintained

for not less than 15 minutes or until the wood is as dry and free of air as practicable. If the vacuum

is broken while the condensate is being drained from

the cylinder, a second vacuum as high as the first shall be created. The mixture of preservatives

shall then be introduced without breaking the vacuum until the cylinder is filled. The pressure

shall then be raised to and maintained at a minimum

of 100 pounds per square inch until the quantity of preservative required to insure the final retention

stipulated is injected into the timber, or until less than 5 per cent of the total quantity required has been injected during the latter half of one hour

throughout which the rate of injection .has persistently decreased while the pressure has been held continuously at 125 or more pounds per square inch. The temperature of the preservative during the

pressure period shall be not less than 150° F., nor more than 200° F., and shall average at least 180° F. After the pressure is completed the cylinder shall be

emptied speedily of preservative and a vacuum

promptly created and maintained until the wood

can be removed from the cylinder free of dripping

preservative.

American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specifications for the preservative treatment of poles by pressure processes, excluding Douglas fir, larch, or tamarack, 1926. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(Similar to those for timber, for general construction work except in water, with the preservatives

limited to creosote oils, grades 1, 2, and 3, and to

creosote-coal-tar solution. However, in applying

the empty-cell processes with or without initial air, the amount of preservative shall be not less than 6 pounds per cubic foot of poles.) 69
400.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN "WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

TREATING OPERATIONS (Same as those for timber, but limited to the

full-cell and empty-cell processes.)

American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard specifications for the preservative treatment of

ties by pressure processes, excluding Douglas fir, larch, or tamarack, 1926. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(Similar to those for the treatment of timber for general construction except in water. However,

the steam-seasoning treatment may be applied to the ties for not more than 10 hours at not more than

274° F.) TREATING OPERATIONS (Same as those for timber.)

American Wood-Preservers' Association, stand- ard definitions of pressure processes, 1921.

1. Allardyce.

Not patented. Used chiefly for ties. Consists essentially of the following steps:

(a) A solution of zinc chloride is forced into the wood at a maximum pressure of 75 to 100 pounds

per square inch until the desired absorption is obtained (commonly yi to 3^ pound dry salt per

cubic foot).

(b) The zinc chloride is then drained from the

retort, and creosote admitted and injected into the wood at a pressure of about 100 to 150 pounds per square inch until the desired absorption (usually 3 to 4 pounds per cubic foot) is obtained". The pressures used under (a) and (6) depend upon

the character and condition of the wood under

treatment. The pressure under (b) however must

be higher than that under (a)

2. Bethell {full-cell process). Patented by John Bethell in England in 1838.

(See British patent No. 7731, July, 1838.) Commonly used for the creosoting of piles, poles, cross arms, paving blocks, structural timber, lumber, and

ties. As now practiced consists essentially of the

following steps:

(a) Preliminary vacuum one-half to one or more

hours.

(b) Oil injected under pressure, maximum usually

between 100 and 180 pounds per square inch, but

sometimes as low as 25 pounds.

(c) Final vacuum (sometimes omitted). Green timber is usually subjected to a live steam

bath at about 20 pounds pressure for several hours

before the preliminary vacuum. Seasoned timber

is not usually steamed, except in the case of paving

blocks. The amount of oil injected depends upon

the specifications of the purchaser, but the absorption per cubic foot is usually within the following ranges

Lumber, poles, structural timbers, cross arms, ties, fresh water and land piles, 6 to 12 pounds.

Paving blocks, 12 to 20 pounds.

Salt water piles, 16 to 24 pounds.

3. Boiling.

Patented by William G. Curtis and John D.

Isaacs in 1895 and reissued the same year. (U. S. patent 545222 and reissues No. 11515.)

Used chiefly for creosoting Douglas fir piles, timber, lumber, ties, and paving blocks. Consists essentially of the following steps:

(a) Wood (either green or seasoned) in the

treating cylinder is covered with oil at about 160

to 190° F.

(6) Oil heated above 212° F. at atmospheric

pressure and vapors passed through a condenser. (The practice with regard to temperature limits varies with different plants. In some cases a range

of 215 to 225° F. is used, in others 225 to 250° F.)

(c) Heating continued until rate of condensation *

falls to one-sixth to one-tenth of a pound of water

per cubic foot of wood per hour. This sometimes

requires 40 to 60 hours or more for green timber,

but may be as low as 10 hours for dry timber.

(d) Treating cylinder partially emptied and refilled with cooler oil to lower oil temperature before

starting pressure.

(e) Pressure applied, maximum 120 to 180

pounds per square inch, until desired absorption

obtained; usually 10 to 16 pounds per cubic foot.

4. Boulton (boiling under vacuum).

Patented by S. B. Boulton in England and the United States (see U. S. patent 247602, issued September 27, 1881). The first mention of boiling

under vacuum, however, appears in Bethell's British patent No. 7731, July, 1838. Patent

modification applied for in 1915, by O. P. M. Goss. Used chiefly for the treatment of Douglas fir piles, timber, ties, lumber, and paving blocks. As now

practiced it consists essentially of the following

steps:

(a) Timber is immersed in hot creosote and subjected to a vacuum, and the escaping vapors drawn

through a condenser.

(6) Temperature (usually 190 to 215° F.) and vacuum maintained until the rate of condensation

of water falls to a specified amount per cubic foot

of wood per hour—usually one-sixth to one-tenth

of a pound.

(c) Vacuum discontinued and pressure applied

until desired absorption obtained. This is com- monly 12 to 16 pounds per cubic foot for paving

blocks, 12 to 14 pounds for piles, 8 to 12 pounds for lumber and timber, and 5 to 8 pounds for ties. The object of the vacuum is to evaporate the water from the wood at a lower temperature than

in the ordinary steaming or straight boiling processes. The Goss modification provides for a heating

period of several hours at atmospheric pressure in

oil at a temperature of 190 to 215° F. before the vacuum is applied and a heating bath in oil at atmospheric pressure after the oil pressure period.

5. Burnett. Patented in 1838 in England by William Burnett.

(See British patent No. 7747, July, 1838.) 70
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.42

In general use for treating ties, lumber, and

timber with zinc chloride. As now practiced consists essentially as follows for seasoned wood:

(a) Preliminary vacuum.

(6) Zinc chloride solution applied under pressure

of 100 to 175 pounds per square inch to approximate

refusal. For green timber, a steaming period of 1 to 5 or more hours at about 20 pounds is usually applied

before the vacuum. The strength of the zinc

chloride solution is generally so regulated that at

refusal the timber will have absorbed from % to 3^ pound, usually the latter, of dry zinc chloride per cubic foot. The original Burnett patent covers only the use

of zinc chloride by soaking the wood in 2.4 per cent

solution of it for 10 to 21 days. The use of pressure with zinc chloride is a later development.

6. Card. Patented by J. B. Card in 1906. (U. S. patent No. 815404.) Used chiefly for ties, lumber, and

timber. The essential parts of the process are:

(a) The use of a mixture containing about 80

per cent of zinc-chloride solution and 20 per cent

of oil. (6) The method of keeping the zinc chloride and

oil mixed during treatment by means of a rotary

pump, which draws the mixture from the top of the treating cylinder and returns it at the bottom

through a perforated pipe.

The use of steaming, vacuum, and pressure are the same as in the Bethell process.

It is customary to inject about 3^ pound of dry

zinc chloride and 2 to 3 pounds of oil per cubic

foot

7. Lowry (empty-cell process). Patented by C. B. Lowry in 1906 (U. S. patent No. 831450.) Used chiefly for creosoting air-seasoned

cross ties, but also for poles, posts, paving blocks,

and silo staves. Consists essentially of the following steps:

(a) Without first drawing a vacuum, creosote at not to exceed 200° F. is injected into the wood to

refusal, or to a specified amount.

(b) A quick vacuum is drawn to remove the excess

oil from the timber. The air imprisoned by injecting the oil without a preliminary vacuum expands

during the final vacuum, forcing out a certain amount of oil with it. For this reason the process

is classed as "empty cell." It is customary to leave in ties a net of about 23^ gallons of creosote per tie (6 to 8 pounds per cubic foot) and 6 to 10 pounds per cubic foot in other timber.

8. Rueping (empty-cell process). Patented in the United States in 1902 and 1911 by Max Rueping. (U. S. patents 709799 and

1008864. The first patent was reissued No.

12707, October, 1907.) Used chiefly for ties and lumber. As commonly used, the process consists of the

following:

(a) Treating cylinder, containing the wood, is filled with compressed air and so held for an hour or more.

(b) Treating cylinder filled with oil allowing air to escape, but without reducing pressure.

(c) When treating cylinder is full of oil, pressure

is increased to a maximum of 150 to 200 pounds per square inch, and held to refusal, or until specified

absorption obtained.

(d) Oil drained, and vacuum drawn to remove

excess of oil from the wood. The air imprisoned

during (a) expands during (d) forcing out a certain amount of oil with it, and the process is, therefore,

called an " empty-cell" process. If desired, (a) may

be omitted, and the air pressure applied after (c)

If green timber is treated, it is first artificially seasoned by steaming, boiling or boiling under vacuum, before the pressure is applied.

Net absorption, usually 4 to 6 pounds per cubic

foot.

9. Steaming (Colman process):

Not patented.

Used almost exclusively for the treatment of Douglas fir piles. Consists essentially of the following steps:

(a) Timber steamed at a pressure of 50 to 100 pounds per square inch for 3 to 8 hours; time and

pressure varying according to dimension and pre- vious degree of seasoning.

(b) Steam released and vacuum drawn until tim- ber is considered seasoned. This usually requires

from 7 to 14 hours. The temperature within the

treating cylinder during the vacuum period is usually

maintained between 180 and 212° F.

(c) Oil injected at a pressure of 80 to 140 pounds

per square inch until desired absorption is obtained.

10. Wellhouse. Patented in 1879 by William Wellhouse and

Erwin Hagen. (See U. S. patent 216589.)

Used chiefly for ties. Consists essentially of the following steps:

(a) A solution consisting of 1J^ to 3 per cent of zinc chloride and 3^ per cent of glue is injected into the wood at a pressure of about 125 pounds per square inch for 3 to 6 hours.

(b) The pressure is released, cylinder drained and

a 3^ per cent solution of tannin is injected at a pres- sure of about 125 pounds per square inch for about

2 hours. The object of the glue, followed by the tannin, is to form a leathery precipitate to plug the pores in the wood and retard the leaching of the zinc chloride. United States Department of Agriculture, Bureau

of Public Roads, specification for piling, revised May 14, 1924. Treatment of piles. When noted on the plans piles shall be treated with the creosote oil or creosote coal-tar solution described in the specifications for timber structures, revised May 14, 1924, above. The ranges of pressure, temperature, and time

duration of treatment shall be controlled so as to

result in maximum penetration of the quantity of 52688°—27 6 71
400.42 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

preservative injected, which shall permeate all of the sapwood, and as much of the heartwood as

practicable. For general construction, not in sea water, piles shall be treated to retain not less than 12 pounds of the preservative per cubic foot of wood by any full- cell process or not less than 8 pounds by any stand- ard empty-cell process.

Piles for use in water liable to be infested by

marine borers along the North Atlantic coast shall be treated to retain not less than 20 pounds of grade 1 creosote oil by any standard full-cell process, and along the Pacific coast not less than 16 pounds of grade 1 creosote oil by any standard

full-cell process for all kinds of timber except

Douglas fir. Douglas fir shall be treated to retain not less than 12 pounds of grade 1 creosote oil by

any standard full-cell process. Timber for other

uses in these waters shall be treated by a full-cell process so as to have full penetration of all sapwood

and as much of the heartwood as practicable and to

retain not less than 12 pounds of grade 1 creosote

oil, except Douglas fir, which shall be treated to

retain not less than 10 pounds by any standard

full-cell process.

Piles for use in water liable to be infested by marine borers along the South Atlantic and Gulf coasts

shall be treated to retain not less than 24 pounds of grade 1 creosote oil by any standard full-cell process. Timber for other uses in these waters shall be treated by any standard full-cell process so as to have full penetration of all sapwood and as much of the heart- wood as practicable and to retain not less than 16 pounds of grade 1 creosote oil. Treated piles and timbers shall be carefully handled without sudden dropping, breaking of outer

fibres, bruising or penetrating the surface with tools. They shall be handled with rope slings. Cant dogs,

hooks, or pile poles shall not be used.

All places where the surface of treated piles or timbers is broken by cutting, boring or otherwise

shall be thoroughly coated with hot creosote oil and

then with a coating of hot tar pitch. Hot creosote

oil shall be poured into the bolt holes before the

insertion of the bolts in such manner that the entire surface of the holes shall receive a coating of the oil. After the necessary cutting has been done to

receive the cap, the heads of treated piles shall be

given three coats of hot creosote oil. They shall then be covered with a coat of hot tar pitch over which shall be placed a sheet of three-ply roofing

felt or galvanized iron, or a covering may be built up of alternate layers of hot tar pitch and loose woven fabric similar to membrane waterproofing

using four layers of pitch and three of the fabric. The cover shall measure at least 6 inches more in each dimension than the diameter of the pile and

shall be bent down over the pile and the edges fas- tened with large-headed nails or secured by binding

with galvanized wire.

TJ. S. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Public Roads, specification for timber structures, revised May, 1924.

The preservative treatment for timbers used in timber structures is similar to the empty-cell and

full-cell methods of treatment of the American

Wood-Preservers' Association, above. 400.43 Brush and Open-Tank Treatment

Processes.

American Association of State Highway Officials, standard specifications for highway bridges and inci- dental structures—preservative treatment for timbers, surface treatments—1926. OPEN-TANK TREATMENTS Open tank treatment shall consist of a hot-bath treatment or a hot and cold bath treatment as may

be specified.

Equipment.

All tanks used in the open-tank process shall be

of sufficient size to allow free circulation of the

liquid around the largest amount of timber being

treated in any operation.

Sufficient liquid shall be maintained in the tanks

to completely immerse the timber. When a number

of pieces are being treated at each operation, each

stick shall be separated from the others on all sides by square or round spacers not less than }4 mch m

least dimension. Suitable slings and handling devices shall be provided to make the material transfers necessary during the complete process without

disturbing the stacked position of the pieces in the

bundle. For hot-bath treatments at least one tank shall be supplied having suitable steam coils or other heating device to keep the liquid at a uniform temperature throughout the tank of not less than 240° F. during the complete process. For hot and cold bath treatments at least one

hot tank shall be supplied as for the hot-bath treat- ment and one cold tank having the same capacity as the hot tank. The cold tank shall be equipped with

suitable cold water coils or water jackets so that the temperature of the liquid at the time of immersion

of each batch of timber shall be no higher than the surrounding atmospheric temperature.

Preparation of material.

All timber to be treated shall be free from dirt, grease, or other foreign matter which will in any

way hinder the free penetration of the preservative.

Framing shall be done before treatment. Round

timber or timber with wane shall have the rough

bark and inner bark removed as specified for wood

piling by this association in 412.0. Time of immersion.

The time of immersion as specified herein is for southern yellow pine, northern white cedar, chest- nut, black gum, West Coast hemlock, red oak, lodge

pole pine, Norway pine, and Pondosa pine. The

specified time of immersion shall be increased 66%j

per cent for southern cypress, Douglas fir and red

fir, Idaho white pine and northern white pine, and

100 per cent for white oak and eastern, Engelmann,

and Sitka spruce. 72
UMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.43

Single or hot-bath treatment. The timber shall be completely immersed in pre- servative in the hot tank, which shall be maintained

at a temperature of 190° F. for seasoned timber and

230° F. for timber not seasoned. A tolerance of 10°

in either direction is permissible. For seasoned timber the immersion shall be for a period of not less than 15 minutes for 2-inch timber with an increase

of 5 minutes in the immersion period for each additional inch in thickness. For timber other than

seasoned the immersion period shall be doubled. Ordinary hot and cold treatment. The timber shall be completely immersed in pre- servative in the hot tank, which shall be maintained

at a temperature of 190° F. for seasoned timber and

230° F. for timber not seasoned. A tolerance of 10°

in either direction is permissible. For seasoned timber the immersion shall be for a period of not

less than 15 minutes for 2-inch timber with an in- crease of 5 minutes in the immersion period for each additional inch in thickness. For timber

other than seasoned the immersion period shall be

doubled. At the end of this period the timber shall be removed from the hot tank and immediately immersed in the cold tank. At the time of transfer the preservative in the cold tank shall have a temperature as low as possible, but in no case higher

than the surrounding air temperature. The timber

shall be completely immersed in the cold tank for a

period one-half as long as the hot bath. Successive charges from the hot tank may be

placed first in one cold tank and the next in a second

cold tank in order to keep the cold-tank temperature as low as possible at the time of immersion.

Should the contractor supply a cold tank capable of handling all material and with a cooling system

which will keep the temperature at the time of all cold treatments as specified, only one cold tank may

be required. Single cold-tank equipment shall be

subject to the approval of the engineer.

Heavy hot and cold treatment. The requirements for this treatment are the same

as those specified above for the ordinary hot and

cold treatment, except that the time of immersion

in the cold bath shall be the same as the time of immersion in the hot bath. BRUSH TREATMENT

All timber to be given brush treatment shall be

free from atmospheric moisture and in no case shall brush treatment be applied when the surface of the timber is wet. The surfaces to be treated shall be

free from dirt, grease, or other foreign matter which

will in any way hinder the maximum penetration of the preservative.

The preservative shall be heated in proper receptacles immediately adjacent to the point of application and shall be applied within the temperature

range of 170 to 190° F. for seasoned wood and 220

to 240° F. for unseasoned wood.

A minimum of two coats shall be applied to all surfaces to be treated except cut ends, joints, and

mortises which shall be given three coats. Each

coat shall be allowed to penetrate before applying

the next coat. All checks, bolt holes, and cracks

shall be run full of the preservative oil and an extra heavy treatment shall be given to knotty spots. SPRAY TREATMENT The condition of the timber prior to spray treat- ment shall conform to the requirements specified for brush treatment. The temperature of the preservative shall be

maintained at 240° F. The shortest length of hose

practicable shall be used to prevent undue chilling

between the spray tank and nozzle. Preservative

shall be renewed frequently in the spray tank to prevent chilling. The spray shall be applied with a good pressure and only fine enough to prevent waste

until the preservative begins to run. Equipment

employing air pressure which has a cooling effect on the hot preservative shall not be used. Two liberal applications shall be made, allowing

sufficient time for the absorption of the first appli- cation before the second is made.

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, specification for nonpressure (open tank,

brush, and spray) treatments in general, serial No. WP106, adopted 1926. This specification is similar to the standard specifications for highway bridges and incidental struc- tures—preservative treatment for timbers, surface treatments of the American Association of State Highway Officials given in full above. American Electric Railway Engineering Association, specification for brush treatment of wood,

poles, serial No. WP107, approved 1926.

1. Treatment of new poles prior to installation. The pole must have all outer and inner bark

removed, and for the best results the hard surface

of sapwood should be shaved off in the area near the ground line where decay generally occurs in any particular locality. This should be at least 1 foot above

the ground line and 2 feet below the ground line, but

in some localities it will be found that decay occurs deeper and the area to be treated should be deter- mined by a consideration of local conditions. This

prepared area, knots, broken surfaces, gains, and

roofs should be treated with two coats of hot car- bolineum or heavy grade creosote oil applied at a temperature of from 175 to 200° F. If poles have

been exposed for a long period in the pole yard after treatment an additional coat of preservative should be applied just prior to installation. Before the

preservative is applied it is essential that all traces

of decayed wood be removed and sound wood exposed. This decayed wood should be burned in order

to prevent the spread of decay to good timber. The

oil should be applied hot with a wire-bound bristle brush with a long handle and worked well into the

checks, leaving a liberal excess on the entire sur- face being treated. If the preservative coating is damaged in any way during handling or otherwise,

another coat should be applied to such points of damage.

73
400.48 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

2. Treatment of wood 'poles in place where decay has

started at ground line but has not progressed to the point where removal would be justified. The earth should be removed for about 2 feet below the surface of the ground or to such depth

as decay has progressed and all trace of rot cut away and destroyed. A long-handled chisel or other convenient tool should be used so that the

cutting can be worked from the top and bottom

toward the center. It must be remembered that any trace of decay will allow the spread of the wood-destroying fungi in the sound wood. After the sound wood has become thoroughly dried it should be given at least two coats of hot carbo- lineum or heavy grade creosote oil applied at the same temperature as under No. 1 above. Rotted wood at knots or elsewhere should be

entirely cut away and the exposed sound wood

treated.

3. Treatment of poles which have been removed and

decayed to a small extent but where decay has not progressed sufficiently to warrant scrapping the pole or cutting back to shorter length before reusing.

These poles should be treated in the same manner

as under No. 2 above, except that the work can be

done more conveniently and effectively when the

pole is out of the ground or in the pole yard.

4. Treatment of poles at the new ground line when cut- ting back to shorter length after removing, or on

account of decay.

The new ground line will be in an area of weathered wood which will take treatment very readily

and which would decay very rapidly without

treatment. The area to be treated should be given not less than two and preferably three coats of hot carbolineum in the same manner as under No. 1, above.

5. Treatment of poles which have become weakened by

decay and are to be strengthened or reinforced in place with a jacket of plain concrete or rein- forced concrete. All decayed wood should be cut away and

destroyed by burning and the wood pole treated

as under No. 2 above before the reinforcement has been applied. Otherwise the growth of wooddestroying fungi will continue although at a reduced

rate. The application of the carbolineum or heavy

grade creosote oil will prevent further decay and

will have no effect on the concrete.

6. Treatment of a stub pole lashed to a pole that has

failed due to decay at the ground line or otherwise. This stub pole should be treated in the same

manner as a new pole or as an old pole that has

been cut back. American Railway Association, Telephone and

Telegraph Section, specification for butt treatment

of cedar poles in open tanks, 1925. This specification covers the butt treating of cedar poles with creosote or dead oil of coal tar. Poles treated under this specification shall conform

to A. R. A. specification for cedar poles.

Dead oil of coal tar. The dead oil of coal tar used for impregnating

poles under this specification shall conform to the requirements of A. R. A. specification for creosote grade 1. Preparation for treatment. When poles are subjected to a perforating treat- ment the perforations must be made by machine

and the method used must be such as to avoid

tearing the fiber of the pole at the point of perforation. The perforations shall not exceed inch

in depth or 3^ inch in width. The distance between

the edges of the adjacent perforations measured

along the surface shall not be less than ^ inch in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the pole and

not less than ^ inch in any other plane.

Draw shaving.—All outer bark and all foreign substances shall be thoroughly removed from the

required minimum length of treated surface specified below. All inner fibrous bark shall be removed

from at least the upper 3 feet of the required

minimum length of surface to be treated. Seasoning.—All poles which are held for seasoning

shall be stacked on land from which the under- brush has been removed. The bottom layer of any pile of poles held for seasoning shall be sup- ported upon skids so that no part of the poles will be less than 1 foot above the surface of the ground,

or any vegetation growing thereon. Poles to be treated shall be separated with

respect to their period of seasoning into groups for separate treatments. Poles shall be considered

as seasoned, partially seasoned, and green when

the holding period is in accordance with length of time specified in the following table:

Seasoning group

Duration of holding period

For poles held in a lo- cation north of the

thirty-eighth degree

of latitude

For poles held in a lo- cation south of the

thirty-eighth degree

of latitude "S" (seasoned)

"PS" (partially seasoned).

"G" (green)

Poles which have been

held either from

Apr. 1 to Oct. 1, or otherwise for not less than 9 months.

Poles which have been

held for at least 3 months between

Apr. 1 and Oct. 1, or otherwise for not

less than 6 months.

Poles not included in

either of the above

groups.

Poles which have been

held either from May

1 to Sept. L or other- wise for not less than

6 months.

Poles which have been

held for at least 2 months between Oct.

1, or otherwise for not less than 4 months.

Poles not included in

either of the above

groups.

Classification for treatment. Only poles of the same seasoning group shall be

treated in the same charge. Poles '.of different lengths or different classes shall not be treated in the same charge, unless the level of the oil in the tank will insure the required minimum length of

treated section for the longest pole, and provided

there will be no additional cost to the purchaser

for the extra treatment of the shorter poles.

74
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 400.43

Length of section to be treated.—The butts of all poles furnished under this specification shall be

treated with creosote to at least the height set forth

in the accompanying table: Length of section to be treated ]

Length of pole in feet

Minimum length of treated section for each class of pole, measured from butt to pole

Class AA; Class A

Feet

ey2 77Am,

Feet

Feet 8

9A

10

Class B

Feet

< : 7

Classes C

and D

Feet5A$A

&A

6&A

7 Feet 7ASA

9

99H

Temperature of creosote.—The temperature of the

creosote used must not exceed 230° F. at any time

during the treating period.

Ground line.—The distance of the ground line from the butt for the various classes and lengths of poles is given in the following table: Location of standard ground line

Length of pole in feet

Distance of ground line from butt of pole

Class AA

poles Class A

poles

Feet Feet

Feet

88A

Class B

poles

Feet

Class C

and D

poles

Feet

44

4*A

555A

Feet

6SA

VA

77A

7A

8 Western Red Cedar Association, specifications for butt treating cedar poles in open tanks, March 10, 1922.2

2 In 1926 the Western Red Cedar Association cooperated with

the American Wood-Preservers' Association in the preparation of specifications for the preservative treatment of poles of the durable

species by nonpressure processes. These specifications have been

tentatively accepted, subject to final action.

Condition and preparation of poles for butt treatment.

Poles shall be seasoned at least four seasoning

months before treatment. SEASONING CALENDAR

Calendar months: Seasoning month January equals y%

February equals 3^8 March equals 34

April equals }A\ May equals ^

June equals 1 July equals 1 August equals 1 September equals 1 October equals %

November equals %

December equals }/$ All fibrous inner bark and foreign substance must be thoroughly removed from that portion of the pole between the points of 1 foot above and 2

feet below the ground line. Ground line and minimum length of treated section

Length cf pole in feet Distance

of ground

line above

butt

Minimum

length of treated

section, measured

from butt

of pole

20 or less . . . . Feet 4

Feet 5A

25 5 6 30 5A

6 &A35 7 40 6 7 45 GA

7 7A50 8

55 SA

60 8

2 9

65 SA m 70 9 10 There are three classes of treatment: "AA," and "A."

TREATMENT "B"

B,"

Alternate hot and cold treatment for a minimum

duration of six hours creosote, as preservative.

Method and duration of treatment. The poles shall be placed in upright tanks with

the butts fully and continuously submerged in the

preservative, to the height as shown in the above

table. The duration of treatment shall be divided between a hot and cold bath. The poles shall re- main in the hot bath for a minimum of four con- tinuous hours, after which they shall be subjected

to the cold bath in which the}7 shall remain for a minimum of two hours.

Preservative. Creosote. (See 400.41.)

75
400.43 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Temperature of the preservative.

The preservative constituting the hot bath shall be heated to a temperature of 212° F., at least once

in every four hours and shall not be allowed to fall below 180° F. or reach above 230° F. The temperature of the preservative constituting the cold bath shall not exceed 112° F. at the conclusion of the treatment. TREATMENT "AA"

Creosote as preservative.

Method and duration of treatment. The poles shall be placed in an upright tank with

the butts fully and continuously submerged in the

preservative, to the height as shown in the above

table, for not less than 15 minutes when the atmospheric temperature is 70° F. or higher, and a proportionately longer time when the temperature is below that point; that is, during the colder weather

the time of immersion must be sufficiently longer

to result in the wood becoming as thoroughly

heated as it would be under a 15-minute treatment when the atmospheric temperature is 70° F. or

higher.

Preservative. Creosote. (See 400.41.) Temperature of the preservative.

The preservative shall be heated to a temperature of 215° F., and shall not be allowed to fall below 180° F. or reach above 230° F. TREATMENT "A" Carbolineum as preservative.

Specifications for this treatment are the same as those for treatment "AA," except that the pre- servative used will be carbolineum. (See 400.41.) American Wood-Preservers' Association, standard

definitions of nonpressure processes, 1921. BRUSH TREATMENT Used frequently on poles and construction

timber.

Consists in applying the hot preservatives to the dry timber by means of a brush. Two coats, 24

hours apart, are customarily used. OPEN-TANK TREATMENT Can be accomplished in two general ways:

(a) Dipping.

Consists in submerging the wood in hot preservative for 5 to 15 minutes.

(6) Hot and cold bath. More effective than (a). Consists essentially of the following steps:

(a) The wood is heated in oil at 200 to 225° F. for one or more hours.

(b) It is then either quickly transferred to a tank

of cool creosote and allowed to stand several hours,

or the heating is discontinued after (a) and the wood

and oil allowed to cool together. These methods

are frequently used for posts, poles, and other timbers in cases where it is not desirable to use a more effective treatment.

KYAN (KYANIZING)

Patented in England by John H. Kyan in 1832.

(British patents No. 6253, September, 1832, and

No. 7001, March, 1836.) Used for ties and construction timber. Consists in soaking seasoned wood in a solution of mercuric chloride (usually 1 per cent) in an open

vat of wood or concrete. It is customary to allow

the wood to soak one day, or more than one day, for each inch in thickness. The original Kyan patent specified a solution of

1 pound of corrosive sublimate to 5 gallons of water

(about 2.4 per cent), and the wood was soaked from

14 to 21 days.

Other preservatives, such as zinc chloride or sodium fluoride in water solutions, may be used in the same manner, except that the solution should be

stronger. The term Kyan process, or Kyanizing, however,

is limited to the use of mercuric chloride. When

other preservatives are used the process is called "steeping" or "soaking."

400.5 FIRE RETARDING TREATMENT FOR

WOOD.

There are no nationally recognized specifications

for fire-retarding treatments for lumber. The

National Bureau of Standards, the Forest Product

Laboratory, and the National Lumber Manufacturers Association, are preparing to conduct

tests and investigations in the effort to determine

the basis for specifications for processes for treat- ment and standard fire tests of combustible material. American Society for Testing Materials, tentative

specification for fire tests of building construction and material, C19-26T, 1926. This specification was proposed by the Sectional Committee on Fire Test Specifications, under the

joint sponsorship of the National Bureau of Standards, the A. E. S. C. Fire Protection Group, and the

American Society for Testing Materials; functioning under the procedure of the American Engineering Standards Committee.

This specification is a review of the existing

standard (A. S. T. M. C19-18) approved March

1, 1919, as a tentative American standard by the American Engineering Standards Committee.

The test methods are applicable to assemblies of masonry units and to composite assemblies of structural materials for buildings, including bear- ing and other walls and partitions, columns, gir- ders, beams and slabs, and composite slab and

beam assemblies for floors and roofs. They are

also applicable to other assemblies and structural units which constitute permanent integral parts

of a finished building.

It is the intent that classifications shall register

performance during the period of exposure and shall not be construed as having determined suitability for use after fire exposure. The complete specification includes:

I. Control of fire tests.

II. Classification as determined by test. 76
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 401.10

III. Test structures. IV. Test samples.

V. Conduct of fire tests. VI. Tests of bearing walls and partitions. VII. Tests of nonbearing walls and partitions. VIII. Tests of columns. IX. Tests of floors and roofs. X. Tests of finish for walls, partitions, and ceil- ings.

401. RAW AND HEWN TIMBERS.

(See also 412.)

401.1 RAILROAD TIES.

401.10 General Items.

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, standard specifications for crossties, serial No. W26-26, 1926. These specifications are identical with the specifications for ties formulated by the American Rail- way Engineering Association and the United States Forest Service as sponsors, and approved by the American Engineering Standards Committee, and

published by the American Railway Association,

engineering division. The latter specifications are given below. American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E. S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) SPECIFICATION FOR CROSSTIES

Material Kinds of wood. 3 1. Before manufacturing ties, producers shall ascertain which of the following kinds of wood

suitable for crossties will be accepted:

Ashes Hickories. Beech. Larches.

Birches. Locusts

Catalpas. Maples.

Cedars. Mulberries.

Cherries. Oaks.

Chestnut. Pines. Cypresses. Poplars.

Douglas fir. Redwoods.

Elms. Sassafras.

Firs (true). Spruces.

Gums. Sycamores.

Hackberries. Walnuts.

Hemlocks.

Others will not be accepted unless specially ordered. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS

General quality.

2. Except as hereinafter provided, all ties shall be free from any defects that may impair their strength or durability as crossties, such as decay,

large splits, large shakes, large or numerous holes or knots, grain with slant greater than 1 in 15.

8 Each railway will specify only the kind or kinds of wood it desires to use.

Resistance to wear.

3. When so ordered, ties from needle-leaved trees

shall be of compact wood throughout the top fourth

of the tie, where any inch of any radius from the

pith shall have six or more rings of annual growth.

Resistance to decay.

4. Ties for use without preservative treatment

shall not have sapwood wider than one-fourth the width of the top between 20 inches and 40 inches from the middle of the tie, and will be designated as "heart" ties. Those with more sapwood will be

designated as "sap" ties.

Dimensions.4 Design

5. Before manufacturing ties, producers shall asertain which of the following lengths, shapes, or

sizes will be accepted, and whether ties are to be

hewed or sawed, and in either case whether on the

sides as well as the top and the bottom.

6. Except as hereinafter provided, standard-gauge

railway ties shall be 8 feet, 8 feet 6 inches, or 9 feet

long.

7. Except as hereinafter provided, ties shall measure as follows throughout both sections between

20 inches and 40 inches from the middle of the tie:

8.

Size Sawed or hewed top, bottom, and sides

5 inches thick by 5 inches wide

on top.1 6 inches thick by 6 inches wide

on top.1 6 inches thick by 7 inches wide on top.

6 inches thick by 8 inches wide on top.

7 inches thick by 8 inches wide

on top.

7 inches thick by 9 inches wide

on top.

7 inches thick by 10 inches wide on top.

Sawed or hewed top and bot- tom

5 inches thick by 5 wide on top.

6 inches thick wide on top. 6 inches thick wide on top.

6 inches thick by 8 wide on top.

7 inches thick wide on top. 2 7 inches thick wide on top. 7 inches thick wide on top.

7 inches thick by 10 wide on top.

by 6 by 7

by 7 by "8 by 9

inches inches

inches inches

inches inches

inches

inches

1 None accepted in standard-gauge railway ties.

2 Railways which specify both 6 by 8 inch and 7 by 7 inch ties manufactured on top and bottom only and which desire to separate the 6-inch from the 7-inch ties will designate the 7 by 7 inch as size 3A. Manufacture

9. Except as hereinafter provided, all ties shall be straight, well hewed or sawed, cut square at the

ends, have bottom and top parallel, and have

bark entirely removed.

Inspection Place.

10. Ties will be inspected at suitable and con- venient places satisfactory to the railway, at points

of shipment, or at destination. Ties will be inspected

4 Each railway will specify only the length or lengths, shape or shapes, and size or sizes it desires to use; but each railway will use the standard designation for whatever size of tie it specifies. For

example, a railway desiring 6 by 8 inch ties only will designate them

as size 3; a railway desiring 7 by 9 inch ties only will designate them

as size 5. A railway shall not, for instance, designate 6 by 8 inch

ties as size 1 and 6 by 6 inch as size 2 or 7 by 9 inch as size 1 and 7 by

8 inch as size 2. 77
401.10 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

at points other than the railway's property whenever

in the judgment of the railway there is sufficient number to warrant it; but the shipper shall provide

accommodations for the inspector, at the expense

of the railway, while away from rail or steamer

lines, and transport him from and to a railway

station or steamer landing. Manner.

11. Inspectors will make a reasonably close examination of the top, bottom, sides, and ends of each tie. Each tie will be judged independently,

without regard for the decisions on others in the same lot. Rafted or boomed ties too muddied for ready examination will be rejected. Ties handled

by hoists will be turned over as inspected, at the expense of the producer.

Decay.

12. The following decay will be allowed: In

cedar and in cypress, "pipe or stump rot" and

"peck," respectively, up to the limitations as to

holes; in chestnut, "bark disease" up to }/i inch

deep. "Blue stain" is not decay and is permissible

in any wood.

Holes.

13. A large hole, other than one caused by "pipe

or stump rot" in cedar, is one more than 3^ inch

in diameter and 3 inches deep within, or more than

one-fourth the width of the surface on which it appears and 3 inches deep outside, the sections of the tie between 20 inches and 40 inches from its middle. A cedar tie with a pipe or stump rot hole more than 13^ inches in diameter and 15 inches deep will be rejected. Numerous holes are any

number equaling a large hole in damaging effect. Such holes may be caused in manufacture or otherwise. Knots.

14. A large knot is one whose average diameter

exceeds one-fourth the width of the surface on which it appears; but such a knot may be allowed

if it occurs outside the sections of the tie between

20 and 40 inches from its middle. Numerous knots are any number equaling a large

knot in damaging effect. Shake.

15. One which is not more than one-third the width of the tie will be allowed.

Split. 16. One which is not over 10 inches long will be

allowed, provided a satisfactory antisplitting device has been properly applied. Manufacture.

7. A tie will be considered straight (1) when a

straight line along the top from the middle of one end to the middle of the other end is entirely within

the tie, and (2) when a straight line along a side from

the middle of one end to the middle of the other end is everywhere more than 2 inches from the top

and the bottom of the tie.

18. A tie is not well hewed or sawed when its surfaces are cut into with score marks more than

y% inch deep or when its surfaces are not even.

19. The top and bottom of a tie will be considered

parallel if any difference in the thicknesses at the

sides or ends does not exceed 3^ inch. Dimensions

20. The lengths, thicknesses, and widths specified

will be considered met by ties 1 inch shorter and 34

inch thinner and narrower than the standard sizes. Ties over 1 inch, but not over 2 inches, more in thickness than the maximum ordered will be ac- cepted as one size below the largest tie ordered. Those over 2 inches mofe in thickness, those over 3

inches more in width, or those over 2 inches more in length than the maximum ordered will be rejected. Ties will be sized up by their smaller ends and

sized down by their larger ends. The dimensions of the tie will not be averaged.

21. AH thicknesses and widths apply to the

sections of the tie between 20 and 40 inches from the middle of the tie. All determinations of width will be made on the top of the tie, which is the narrower

of the horizontal surfaces, or the one with narrower

or no heartwood if both horizontal surfaces are of the same width.

Delivery 22. Ties delivered on the premises of a railway for inspection shall be stacked not less than 10 feet from

the nearest rail of any tract at suitable and convenient places, but not at public crossings, nor where

they will interfere with the view of trainmen or of people approaching the railway. Standard-gauge

ties shall be stacked in alternate layers of 2 and 7, the bottom layer to consist of 2 ties kept at least 6 inches above the ground. The next layer shall consist of 7 ties laid crosswise of the first layer.

When the ties are rectangular, the 2 outside ties of the layers of 7 and the layers of 2 shall be laid on their sides. The ties in la}T ers of 2 shall be laid at the extreme ends of the ties in the layers of 7. No

stack may be more than 12 layers high, and there

shall be 5 feet between stacks to facilitate inspection. Ties which have stood on their ends on the ground

will be rejected.

23. Each stack shall have fastened to it a tag on which is written the owner's name and address, the date when stacked, and the number of ties of each

kind of wood in the stack.

24. All ties are at the owner's risk until accepted.

All rejected ties shall be removed within one month

after inspection.

25. Ties shall be stacked as grouped below. Only

the kinds of wood named in a group may be stacked

together.

26. Class U —Ties which may be used untreated:

Group Ua Group Ub

"Heart" black locust. "Heart" Douglas fir. "Heart" white oaks. "Heart" pines.

"Heart" black walnut. "Heart" larches.

78
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 401.10

Group Uc "Heart" cedars. "Heart" cypresses. "Heart" redwood.

27. Class T—Ties

Group Ta

Ashes.

Hickories. "Sap" black locust. Honey locust. Red oaks. "Sap" white oaks. "Sap" black walnut.

Group Tb

"Sap" cedars. "Sap" cypresses. "Sap" Douglas fir. Firs (true). Hemlocks.

"Sap" larches. "Sap" pines.

"Sap" redwood.

Spruces.

Group Ud

"Heart" catalpas.

"Heart" chestnut. "Heart" sassafras. "Heart" red mulberry.

which should be treated:

Group Tc Beech.

Birches.

Cherries. Gums.

Hard maples.

Group Td

"Sap" catalpas.

"Sap" chestnut. Elms.

Hackberries.

Soft maples.

"Sap" mulberries.

Poplars.

"Sap" sassafras. Sycamores.

White walnut.

Shipment

28. Ties forwarded in cars or vessels shall be

separated therein according to the above groups, and

also according to the above sizes if inspected before

loading, or as may be stipulated in the contract or order for them.

SPECIFICATION FOR SWITCH TIES

Material Kinds of wood. 5 1. Before manufacturing ties, producers shall as- certain which of the following kinds of wood suitable

for switch ties will be accepted:

Ashes. Beech.

Birches. Cedars.

Cherries. Chestnut.

Cypresses.

Douglas fir. Elms.

Firs (true).

Gums.

Hemlocks.

Larches.

Locusts. Maples.

Oaks.

Pines. Redwood.

Spruces.

Walnuts.

Others will not be accepted unless specially ordered.

Physical Requirements General quality.

(Same as for crossties. See above.)

Resistance to wear. (Same as for crossties.) «Each railway will specify only the kind or kinds of wood it desires to use.

Resistance to decay.

4. Ties for use without preservative treatment

shall not have sapwood wider than one-fourth the width of the top between 12 inches from each end

of the tie and will be designated as "heart" ties. Those with more sapwood will be designated as "sap" ties. Design

Dimensions.6 5. Before manufacturing ties, producers shall as- certain what sizes will be accepted and whether ties are to be hewed or sawed, and in either case whether on the sides as well as on the top and the bottom.

6. Except as hereinafter provided, all ties shall be

either 6 or 7 inches thick as ordered.

7. Except as hereinafter provided, ties sawed or hewed on top, bottom, and sides shall be not less than either 7, 8, or 9 inches wide on top throughout

the section between 12 inches from each end of the

tie, as ordered; ties sawed or hewed on top and

bottom only shall be not less than either 6 or 7

inches wide on top throughout the section between

12 inches from each end of the tie, as ordered.

8. Each tie shall be of a length specified below:

(Insert complete bill of material here.)

Manufacture (Same as for crossties.)

Inspection Place. (Same as for crossties, except for holes, knots, and

dimensions which are as given below.)

Holes.

13. A large hole, other than one caused by "pipe

or stump rot" in cedar, is one more than 3^ inch in diameter and 3 inches deep within, or more than

one-fourth the width of the surface on which it appears and 3 inches deep outside, the section of the

tie between 12 inches from each end of the tie. A

cedar tie with a pipe or stump rot hole more than

13^ inches in diameter and 15 inches deep will be

rejected. Numerous holes are any number equaling a large hole in damaging effect. Such holes may be

caused in manufacture or otherwise. Knots.

14. A large knot is one whose average diameter

exceeds one-fourth the width of the surface on which

it appears; but such a knot may be allowed if it occurs outside the section between 12 inches from

each end of the tie. Numerous knots are any

number equaling a large knot in damaging effect. Dimensions.

20. The lengths, thicknesses, and widths specified

will be considered met by ties 1 inch shorter and

inch thinner and narrower than the standard sizes. Ties over 1 inch more in thickness, over 3 inches more in width, or over 2 inches more in length than

the maximum ordered will be rejected. The

dimensions of the tie will not be averaged.

e Each railway will specify only the shape or shapes and size or

sizes it desires to use. 79
401.10 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

21. All thicknesses and widths apply to the section

of the tie between 12 inches from each end of the tie. All determinations of width will be made on the top

of the tie, which is the narrower of the horizontal

surfaces, or the one with narrower or no heartwood

if both horizontal surfaces are of the same width.

Delivery 22. Ties delivered on the premises of a railway

for inspection shall be stacked not less than 10 feet from the nearest rail of any track at suitable and

convenient places; but not at public crossings, nor where they will interfere with the view of trainmen

or of people approaching the railway. Ties shall be stacked at least 6 inches above the ground. No

tie shall be unsupported for more than 10 feet of its length. Each layer of ties and the ties in each

layer shall be not less than 1 inch apart. Any

stacking strips used shall not be over 4 inches wide.

If rectangular ties are used to separate the layers,

such strip ties shall be laid on their sides and the two outside ties as near as possible to the extreme

ends of the ties. No ties shall be permitted to overhang more than 2 feet. No stack of ties shall be wider than 10 feet. 23. Each stack shall have fastened to it a tag on which is written the owner's name and address, the date when stacked, and the number of ties of each

kind of wood in the stack.

24. All ties are at the owner's risk until accepted.

All rejected ties shall be removed within one month

after inspection.

25. Ties shall be stacked as grouped below. Only

the kinds of wood named in a group may be stacked

together.

26. Class U.—Ties which may be used untreated

Group Ua "Heart" black locust. " Heart" white oaks. "Heart" black walnut.

Group Uc Heart" cedars. Heart" cypresses. Heart" redwood.

Group Ub

"Heart" Douglas fir. "Heart" pines.

"Heart" larches. Group Ud

"Heart" chestnut.

27. Class T.—Ties which should be treated

Group Ta

Ashes. "Sap" black locust. Honey locust. Red oaks. "Sap" white oaks. "Sap" black walnut.

Group Tc Beech.

Birches.

Cherries. Gums.

Hard maples.

Group Tb

"Sap" cedars. "Sap" cypresses. "Sap" Douglas fir. Firs (true). Hemlocks.

"Sap" larches. "Sap" pines.

"Sap" redwood.

Spruces.

Group Td

"Sap" chestnut. Elms.

Soft maples.

White walnut.

Shipment

28. Ties forwarded in cars or vessels shall be

separated therein according to the above groups, and also according to the above sets or lengths if inspected before loading, or as may be stipulated

in the contract or order for them.

National Association of Railroad Tie Producers,

specifications for railroad ties, July, 1926. This association cooperated in the preparation

of the specifications for ties formulated under the

auspices of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, and approved as American Standard,

with the American Railway Engineering Association and the United States Forest Service as sponsors. The specifications were published in the Cross Tie Bulletin of the association, July, 1926. National Hardwood lumber Association, grading

rules for ties, January, 1927. The National Hardwood Lumber Association has

adopted the specifications for ties formulated by

the American Railway Engineering Association and

the United States Forest Service as sponsors, and

approved by the American Engineering Standards

Committee, and published by the American Railway

Association, engineering division. These specifica- tions are given above. 401.11 Cedar Ties.

American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E.

S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) These specifications, given under 401.10 include cedar ties. Northern White Cedar Association, grading rules

for white cedar ties, January 31, 1923. SPECIFICATIONS FOR STANDARD TIES Standard ties shall be either sawed or hewn on two parallel faces from timber measuring not less than 8 inches and not more than 12 inches in di- ameter inside the bark at the small end. They

shall be not less than 6 inches and not more than

8 inches in thickness. They shall be not less than

7 feet 103^ inches and not more than 8 feet 13^

inches in length and shall have ends sawed square.

If sawed on three sides they shall have at least 7 inches of face, and if sawed on four sides they shall have at least 8 inches of face. On sawed ties wane is permissible as long as the serviceability of the tie is not impaired.

Standard ties shall include the run of the tie timber measuring 8 inches and larger in diameter

inside the bark at the small end. Standard ties may be divided into classes as follows: Class A shall include the run of the tie timber

measuring not less than 9 inches and up to and

including 12 inches in diameter inside the bark at the small end and not less than 6% inches in thickness. Ties sawed on three sides and with face of 7 80
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 401.14

inches or over shall be class A ties. Ties sawed on

four sides with face of 8 inches or over shall be

class A ties. Class B shall include the run of the tie timber

measuring 8 inches and up to, but not including, 9 inches in diameter inside the bark at the small

end. Ties sawed on three sides and having less than 7 inches of face shall be class B ties. It is understood that the measurement of the

face shall be made at the rail bearing. Ties made of hemlock, tamarack, pine, oak,

birch, or other hardwood must be sound. Ties made of cedar must be serviceably sound.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Port Orford cedar ties, Schedule M, 1925. PORT ORFORD CEDAR RAILROAD TIES No. 1 ties shall be sound, cut square, and free from large knots or knot holes where the rails lie, or defects materially impairing the strength or

durability. Will allow knots, which approximately shall not be more than one-third the width

in diameter of any one side in which they appear;

or well scattered, decomposed knots or knot holes not exceeding 1^ inches in diameter.' In addition

to the above the following will be permitted:

Occasional variations in sawing; bark seams;

bright sap; sap stain; wane not to exceed 1 inch on

one corner measured across the face of tie; season

checks, or a few well scattered, small, shallow,

decomposed spots appearing on one face or end of

tie.No. 2 ties will allow a variation of 2 inches over

or under in length, y% inch in thickness, and 1 inch over or under in width. Defects not ordinarily allowed in No. 1 ties permitted, provided, however,

that each piece must be suitable for tie purposes on

sidings. Wane on one corner that does not reduce

the face width more than 2 inches or the equivalent on two or more corners, permitted. PORT ORFORD CEDAR DEGRADE TIES Will be of ordinary tie grades as described above

with this exception, that ties having too much wane

or other defects which prevent them being used in the size of which they were originally intended will be shipped and accepted at measurements for thickness and/or width taken inside of defects, provided such measurements, eliminating defects, leave a usable tie size. 401.12 Chestnut Ties.

American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E.

S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) These specifications, given under 401.10, include chestnut ties. 401.13 Cypress Ties.

American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E.

S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) These specifications, given under 401.10, include cypress ties. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for cypress railroad ties, June 15, 1925. RAILROAD MATERIAL No. 1 Switch ties. Shall be cut to size and length specified.

Ends of ties shall be sawed square. A variation

of }/2 inch longer or shorter than the length ordered

will be allowed. Shall be graded same as No. 1 timbers. Standard No. 1 peck crossties. Shall be cut to size and length specified.

A variation of 1 inch longer or shorter than the

length ordered will be allowed. Shall be practically all heart, free from damaging knots, shake,

and splits. Peck will be admitted, but there must

be enough of sound wood in the ties to permit of proper spiking.

401.14 Fir Ties.

American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E.

S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) These specifications, given under 401.10, include

fir ties. Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules for Douglas fir railroad ties, Schedule M, 1925. DOUGLAS FIR RAILROAD TIES AND CROSSINGS

Ties and crossings must be cut square, free from

large knots where the rails lie, and also free from

stain, rot, and large shakes. Will allow wane on

one corner not to exceed one-eighth of the face width. Occasional variations in sawing allowed. Sap allowed. West Coast lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for Douglas fir railroad ties, July 1, 1926.

TIES

Select ties. Shall be sound timber, well manufactured, and

shall average not less than six annual rings per inch

in the top one-fourth of the tie. In the sections of the tie between 20 and 40 inches from the middle must be free from large knots, shake, splits, decay, heart stain, and wane. Shall not have sap more

than 2 inches wide on the top of the tie in the sec- tions between 20 and 40 inches from the middle. No. 1 ties. Shall be sound timber, well manufactured. In

the sections of the tie between 20 and 40 inches from the middle must be free from large knots,

unsound knots, shake, splits, large pitch seams,

decay, and wane on corners reducing face width more than 1 inch. . 81
401.14 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 2 ties. Must be free from rot, and suitable for sidetrack purposes. Will admit large knots, shake, pitch

pockets, sap stain, heart stain, and wane on one

corner that does not reduce the face width more

than 2 inches, or the equivalent on two or more

corners; variation in sawing }/% inch over or under

in thickness and/or width, or 2 inches over or under

in length.

401.15 Oak Ties.

American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E.

S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) These specifications, given under 401.10 include oak ties. 401.16 Pine Ties.

American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E.

S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) These specifications, given under 401.10 include pine ties. 401.17 Redwood Ties.

American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E.

S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) These specifications, given under 401.10 include redwood ties. 401.18 Walnut Ties.

American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E.

S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) These specifications, given under 401.10 include walnut ties. 401.19 Miscellaneous Specifications for Ties.

American Railway Engineering Association and

United States Forest Service, joint sponsors under

procedure of the American Engineering Standards

Committee, standard specifications for ties, A. E.

S. C. No. 03-1926. (Published by the American

Railway Association, engineering division.) These specifications, given under 401.10 include

species of wood other than those classified above. 401.2 POSTS.

401.21 Cedar Posts.

Northern White Cedar Association, standard specifications governing the manufacture and grading

of northern white cedar posts, February 15, 1927.

Live timber. All posts shall have been cut and manufactured

from live, green growing northern white cedar

timber. Note.—The test of live timber is to whittle a shaving from the sapwood. If the sap is white, the timber was live when cut, no

matter how discolored the piece may be on the outside. Limit of maximum dejects. No post shall contain both the maximum crook and the maximum butt rot. Percentage of maximum defects. Not more than 10 per cent of the number of pieces

of any lot or shipment shall contain the maximum

crook or butt rot. Sizes and method of measuring.

Minimum size of tops shall be as follows: Diameter measurement

Designated size (inches) Qreen or water- soaked When

seasoned

2 Inches

2

• Inchesm

2%

334 m

3.. 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7 8... 8

9 9

Size of a post not perfectly round shall be deter- mined by its average top diameter. Exception:

Sawed posts to have minimum measurement as

follows: quarters—11% inches around the post, 4 inches from top. & quarters—143^ inches around the post, 4 inches from top.

5-inch halves—4% inches across face of post, 4

inches from top.

6-inch halves—5% inches across face of post, 4

inches from top.

7-inch halves—6% inches across face of post, 4

inches from top.

8-inch halves—7% inches across face of post, 4

inches from top. Special requirements for sawed posts. Sawed posts must be sufficiently straight grained

so that the grain entering the post at one corner

shall not leave the post on the opposite side. Lengths.

A variation of 2 inches longer or shorter allowed on all lengths. Manufacture.

All posts shall be peeled their entire length, knots

closely trimmed, and both ends sawed square. Knots. Sound knots are permitted if smoothly trimmed.

Entirely hollow knots extending in close to center

of post not permitted.

Short kinks. Short kinks not permitted.

82
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 401.31

Twists. Winding twist permitted unless very unsightly

and exaggerated. Cat faces. Not permitted.

Rot.Butt rot not to exceed 5 per cent of the area of the butt shall be permitted.

(a) No post shall be sap rotted, have woodpecker

holes, plugged holes, or evidence of having been

eaten by ants.

(6) Tops must be sound, except that one pipe

rot is permitted in posts 5 inches and larger.

(c) Length of rot on the face of sawed halves

shall not exceed one-half of the length of the post;

width of rot shall not average more than 20 per

cent of the width of the post for one-half of the

length of the post.

(d) Rot on corners of sawed quarters shall not

exceed an average of half an inch in depth if for entire length of post; 1 inch for half of the length;

and l}/2 inches for one-fourth of the length.

Discoloration. Discoloration not considered a defect under these

specifications.

Crook or sweep. Posts 7 and 8 feet—one-way sweep not to exceed

3 inches between top and butt permitted. Posts 10

to 14 feet, inclusive—one-way sweep not exceeding

4 inches between top and butt is permissible. Note.—If the distance between the tape and post does not exceed

3 inches in posts 7 and 8 feet, or 4 inches in post 10 to 14 feet, inclusive in length, the post conforms in grade as outlined by specifications. 401.22 Chestnut Posts. (No nationally recognized specifications available.) 401.23 Cypress Posts. (No nationally recognized specifications available.) 401.24 Locust Posts. (No nationally recognized specifications available.) 401.25 Oak Posts. (No nationally recognized specifications available.) 401.26 Pine Posts. (No nationally recognized specifications available.) 401.3 POLES, HEWN AND SAWN.

401.30 General Items.

American Engineering Standards Committee,

Telephone Group, proposed specifications for wood

poles, 1927..

The telephone group of the American Engineering

Standards Committee has in preparation wood

pole specifications for approval as American

Standards. These specifications will include the standardization of dimensional classification; defect descriptions and limitations, manufacturing practices and

inspection rules for eastern cedar, western cedar,

chestnut, and southern pine poles; also standardization of fiber strength for these species in pole

sizes. 401.31 Cedar Poles.

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, standard specification for eastern white cedar

poles, revised 1926, serial No. D8-26.

To determine the character of poles to be used

in trolley-line construction, they may be divided

into three classes—A, B, and C.

Class A. For span construction on streets or rights of way where a 35-foot span is required, or for heavy

feeder lines carrying from 1 to 6 cross arms.

Class B. For span or bracket construction where spans are not more than 35 feet, or bracket-line construction carrying 2 transmission circuits, 1 feeder arm, and 2 telephone and signal arms.

Class C. For constructing telephone, signal, and other

light auxiliary lines where no side strain is required. EASTERN WHITE CEDAR POLES

General. The material desired under this specification consists of poles of the best quality of either sea- soned or live green cedar of the dimensions hereinafter specified. Seasoned poles shall have preference over green poles, provided they have not been held

for seasoning long enough to have developed any

of the timber defects hereinafter referred to. All poles shall be reasonably straight, well proportioned from butt to top, shall have both ends

squared, the bark peeled, and all knots and limbs

closely trimmed.

Dimensions.

The dimensions of the poles shall be in accordance

with the following table, the top measurement

being the circumference at the top of the pole, and

the butt measurement the circumference 6 feet from the butt. The dimension requirement at the 6-foot mark

shall be rigidly followed in all cases. Class A, B, and C poles may have top circumference not more

than }/2 inch less than these shown in the following

table. No pole shall be over 6 inches longer or 3 inches shorter than the length for which it is accepted; if any pole is more than 6 inches longer

than is required, it shall be cut back.

83
401.31 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Minimum dimensions of eastern white cedar poles

(circumference)

Length of poles

(feet)

Class A Class B Class C

Top

Six

feet from

butt Top

Six

feet from

butt iop

Six

feet from

butt

Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches 30 24 40 22 36 mi 33 35 24 43 22 38 mi 36

40 24 47 22 43 mi 40

45 24 50 22 47 im 43 50 24 53 22 50 im 46

55.. 24 56 22 53 mi 49

60 24 59 22 56

Quality of timber.

(a) Dead poles.—The wood of a dead pole is grayish in color. No dead poles, and no poles having

dead streaks covering more than one-quarter of their surface, shall be accepted. Poles having dead

streaks covering less than one-quarter of their sur- face shall have a circumference greater than other- wise required. The increase in the circumference

shall be sufficient to afford a cross-sectional area of sound wood equivalent to that of sound poles of the same class.

(6) Fire-killed or river poles.—No dark red or copper-colored poles, which when scraped, do not show good live timber shall be accepted.

(c) Twisted, checked, or cracked poles.—No pole

shall have more than one complete twist for every 20 feet in length or shall have a large season check.

(d) "Cat faces."—Poles shall have no "cat

faces" unless they are small and perfectly sound

and the poles have an increased diameter at the "cat faces" nor have "cat faces" near the 6-foot mark or within 10 feet of their tops.

(e) Shaved poles.—Poles shall not be shaved.

(/) Miscellaneous defects.—No pole shall contain sap rot, evidence of internal rot as disclosed by a

careful examination of all black knots, hollow knots,

woodpeckers' holes, or plugged holes, and no poles

shall show evidence of having been eaten by ants, worms, or grubs, except that poles containing worm or grub marks below the 6-foot mark will be

accepted.

(g) Crooked poles.—No pole shall have a short crook or bend, a crook or bend in two planes, or a

reverse curve. The amount of sweep, measured

between the 6-foot mark and the top of the pole, that may be present in poles, is shown in the fol- lowing table:

Length (feet) Sweep

not over—

35

Inches 104

12

10

10

1112

40.._ 45

50

5560

(h) Defective tops.—All poles shall have sound

tops, with no pencil holes. Poles with double tops

or double hearts shall be free from rot where the two parts or hearts join. 00 Defective butts.—No pole shall contain ring

rot (rot in the form of a complete or partial ring). Poles may have hollow hearts under the conditions shown in the following table: Add to butt requirements of —

Average diameter of hollow

heart (inches)

30-foot poles 35, 40, and

45 foot poles

50,55, 60,and

65 foot poles

2.... Inches Nothing.

1

Inches Nothing. Nothing.

Nothing.

1

Inches Nothing.

Nothing.

Nothing. Nothing.

3

4. 2

6.... 3

6.... 4 2 1

7 Reject.

Reject. Reject.

4 2

8„_. 6 3

9.... Reject. 4

10 Reject. Reject.

Reject.

Reject.

Reject.

Reject. Reject.

Reject.

5

11 7

12 9

13 Reject.

Scattered rot, unless it is near the outside of the

pole, may be estimated as being the same as heart

rot of equal area.

(j) Wind shakes.—Poles with cup shakes (checks

in the form of rings) which also have heart or star checks may be considered as equal to poles having

hollow hearts of the average diameter of the cup

shakes.

Rejection. All poles which fail to meet the requirements

hereinabove specified may be rejected.

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, standard specification for western red cedar

poles, revised 1926, serial No. D8-26.

To determine the character of poles to be used in

trolley-line construction, they may be divided into three classes—A, B, and C. (Same as for eastern white cedar, above.) WESTERN RED CEDAR POLES

General. The material desired under this specification consists of poles and guy stubs of the best quality of either seasoned or live green cedar of the dimensions

hereinafter specified. The poles covered by this specification are of western red cedar, otherwise

known as red cedar, western cedar, or Idaho cedar. Seasoned poles shall have preference over green

poles provided they have not been held for sea- soning long enough to have developed any of the timber defects hereinafter referred to. All poles

shall be reasonably straight, well proportioned

from butt to top, shall have both ends squared,

sound tops, the bark peeled, and all knots and

limbs closely trimmed.

Dimensions.

The dimensions of the poles shall be in accordance

I with the following table, the top measurement being

84
UMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 401.31

the circumference at the top of the pole, and the butt measurement the circumference 6 feet from the

butt. The dimensions given are the minimum

allowable circumferences at the point specified for measurement and are not intended to preclude the acceptance of poles of larger dimensions. No pole

shall be over 6 inches longer or 3 inches shorter than

the length for which it is accepted. If any pole is 6 inches longer than is required it shall be cut back. Minimum dimensions of poles (circumference)

Length of poles (feet)

t

Class A Class B Class C

Top 28 inches Top 25 inches Top 22 inches

Butt Butt Butt

30.... —

Inches

3740

43

45

4749

52

54

Inches

3436

3840

42

4446

48

Inches30

32

3436

3840

41

43

35... 40

46

50.. 55

60..

Quality of timber.

(a) Dead poles.—No dead poles and no poles

having dead streaks covering more than one- quarter of their surface shall be accepted. Poles having dead streaks covering less than one-quarter

of their surface shall have a circumference greater

than otherwise required. The increase in the circumference shall be sufficient to afford a cross- sectional area of sound wood equivalent to that

of sound poles of the same class.

(b) Twisted, checked, or cracked poles.—No poles

shall have more than one complete twist for every

20 feet in length or shall have a large season check

or crack.

(c) Crooked poles.—No pole shall have a short crook or bend, a crook or bend in two planes, or a

reverse crook or bend. The amount of sweep measured between the 6-foot mark and the top of the pole shall not exceed 1 inch to every 6 feet in length.

(d) "Cat faces."—Poles shall have no "cat

faces" unless they are small and perfectly sound,

and the poles have an increased diameter at the "cat face," nor have "cat faces" near the 6-foot mark, or within 10 feet of their tops.

(e) Shaved poles.—Poles shall not be shaved.

(/) Wind shakes.-—No poles having cup shakes

(checks in the form of rings) shall contain heart or

star shakes which inclose more than 10 per cent of the area of the butt.

(g) Butt rot.—No poles shall have butt rot covering in excess of 10 per cent of the total area

of the butt. The butt rot, if present, must be

located close to the center.

(h) Knots.—Large knots, if sound and trimmed

close, shall not be considered a defect. No poles

shall contain hollow or rotten knots.

(i) Miscellaneous defects.—No pole shall contain sap rot, woodpecker's holes, or plugged holes, nor show evidence of having been eaten by ants, worms,

or grubs.

Rejection. All poles which fail to meet the requirements

hereinbefore specified may be rejected.

American Railway Association, Signal Section,

specification No. 3012 for eastern white cedar poles, 1912.

General.

(a) Poles shall be of the best quality of either seasoned or live green cedar of the dimensions

hereinafter specified. Seasoned poles shall have

preference over green poles, provided they have

not been held for seasoning long enough to have

developed any of the timber defects hereinafter

referred to. All poles shall be reasonably straight, well proportioned from butt to top, squared at both ends, and with all knots and limbs closely

trimmed.

Classes of poles.

(a) Poles shall be classed and used according to the line wire conductors they carry, or ultimately

will carry:

1. Class A, over 40 wires.

2. Class B, from 21 to 40 wires.

3. Class C, from 13 to 20 wires.

4. Class D, from 7 to 12 wires.

5. Class E, from 3 to 6 wires.

6. Class F, 2 wires carried on brackets. Dimensions of poles.

(a) The minimum dimensions in inches of poles

shall be in accordance with the following table, the top measurement being the circumference at the top of the pole, and the butt being the circumference 6 feet up from the butt end:

Length of poles in

feet

Class A Class B Class C

Class DClass EClass F

Top Butt Top Butt Top Butt Top Top Top

20 m/4 18H

iSH

18M

18% Mi

18M

18^

18M

27283^ 30

3336

40

43

46

49

17M

17M

18M

18*4 18M 18M

2222

22

15M

15H

17^ mimi

mi

22

22

22

15^

15M

15V2 \hY% 17M

17K

22. 22

2222

22

2222

22

22

22

30

3236

38

43

47

5053

56

25 2424

24

24

24

2424

24

36

40

43

47

50

5356

59

30

35

40.... 45

50. 55

60.

(b) When the dimension at the butt is not given, the poles shall be reasonably well proportioned

throughout their entire length.

(c) No poles shall be over 6 inches longer, or 3

inches shorter, than the length for which it is ac- cepted. If any pole is more than 6 inches longer

than is required, it shall be cut back.

Quality of timber. (Requirements similar to those of the American

Railway Engineering Association.)

85
401.31 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Northern White Cedar Association, rules governing

the manufacture and grading of white cedar poles, effective March 1, 1925.

1. Live timber.

All poles shall have been cut and manufactured

from live green cedar timber. Note.—The test of live timber is to cut into sapwood. If sap- wood is whito the timber was alive when cut. 2. Manufacture.

All poles shall be peeled their entire length, knots

trimmed close, and butt and top sawed square.

S. Lengths.

Any pole may be short of its specified length 3^

inch for each 5 feet of its specified length, or it may

be 6 inches longer than its specified length.

4- Top measurements.

Designated

top size

Circumference

Green and

water-soaked Seasoned

Inches Inches Inches

4 V2>A 12 5 16 15 6 19^

7 23 22

8 25 24

5. Dejects.

(a) Rot.—Butt and ring rot combined shall not

exceed 5 per cent of the area of the butt in all poles

5-inch top 25 feet long and smaller, and shall not

exceed 8 per cent of the area of the butt in all poles

6-inch top 25 feet long and larger.

(6) Top.—Tops are to be sound.

(c) Crook.—No pole shall have a short crook or bend, a crook or bend in two planes, or a reverse

curve. The maximum amount of sweep, measured

between the ground line and the top, shall not be in excess of 1 inch for each 5 feet of the length of the

pole. The ground line is understood to be 4 feet from the butt on poles 16, IS, and 20 feet in length, 6 feet from butt on poles 25 feet and longer. The

sweep below the ground line shall not exceed onehalf the diameter of the butt.

(d) Miscellaneous defects.—No pole containing sap

rot, hollow knots, woodpecker holes, or plugged

holes, and no poles showing evidence of having been

eaten by ants, worms, or grubs shall be accepted,

except that poles containing surface worm or grub

marks below the ground line may be accepted.

(e) Cat faces.—Small cat faces permitted if sound

and not within 1 foot below or 3 feet above the ground line and if their distance from the top of the

pole is not less than 20 per cent of the full length of the pole.

(/) Twist.—Winding twist permitted unless unsightly and exaggerated, except that there shall not be more than one complete twist or .grain for any

20 feet of length.

(g) Maximum defects.—No poles shall contain both the maximum crook and the maximum butt

rot.

Western Red Cedar Association, specifications for western red cedar poles, April 30, 1918. (The specifications for western red cedar poles are

similar to those of the Northern White Cedar

Association given above.)

401.32 Chestnut Poles.

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, standard specification for chestnut poles, revised 1926, serial No. D8-26.

To determine the character of poles to be used

in trolley line construction, they may be divided

into three classes—A, B, and C. (Same as for east- ern white cedar, 401.31.) CHESTNUT POLES

General. The poles covered by this specification shall be

of the best quality of live white chestnut of the dimensions hereinafter specified. All poles shall be

reasonably straight, well proportioned from butt to

top, shall have both ends squared, and all knots and limbs closely trimmed.

Dimensions.

The dimensions of the poles shall be in accordance

with the following table, the "top" measurement

being the circumference at the top of the pole and

the "butt" measurement the circumference 6 feet from the butt. No poles shall be over 6 inches longer or 3 inches shorter than the length for which

it is accepted. If any pole is more than 6 inches longer than required, it shall be cut back. Minimum dimensions of chestnut poles {circumference)

Length of poles (feet)

Class A Class B Class C

Top

Six

feet from

butt Top

Six

feet from

butt Top

Six

feet from j butt

Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches

25 24 36 21 31 20 30

30..-. 24 40 22 36 20 33

35 24 43 22 40 20 46

40 24 45 22 43 20 40 45... 24 48 22 47 20 43

50 -„ 24 51 22 50 20 63

22 54 22 53 20 49

60 22 57 22 56 65 2222

22

60

63

66

22

22

22

59

62

65 70... -.- 75.- .- 1-

1 Quality of timber.

(a) Seasoned poles.—No pole shall have been cut over two years.

(b) Dead or dry poles.—No pole shall have been

cut when dead.

(c) Shaved poles.—Poles shall not be shaved.

(d) Checked and cracked poles.—No pole shall have

a crack or large season checks.

(e) Crooked poles.—No pole shall have a short crook

or a crook or sweep in two places, or a short reverse

curve. Poles over 30 feet in length should have

less sweep than the shorter poles, as follows: 86
TIMBEE AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 401.40

Sweep

Length (feot) not over

Inches

35 10 40 11 45 10

50... 11 55... 12

60.. 13 05 14 70 15 The sweep shall be measured between the 6-foot mark and the top of the pole.

(/) Bad tops.—All poles shall have sound tops. Poles with double tops should be examined carefully for split tops or rot where the two parts join.

(g) Bad butts.—All poles shall have reasonably

sound butts. Hollow butts shall be carefully

examined, and poles having them rejected, if the

hole runs over 4 feet. Poles with hollow butts

shall be rejected if there is evidence of decay at the

further end of the hole inside the pole.

(7t) Sap rot.—No pole shall have sap rot.

(i) "Cat faces."—Poles shall have no "cat

faces," unless they are sound and small and the

pole has an increased diameter at the "cat face." No poles shall have "cat faces" near the 6-foot mark or within 10 feet of the top.

(J) Knots.—All poles shall be examined carefully

for black knots, hollow knots, or projections caused

by overgrown knots. Overgrown knots shall be

trimmed off. Such knots shall be examined for internal rot. No poles shall show evidence of rot at knot holes nor have large hollow knots.

(/c) Woodpecker's holes.—No pole shall have a woodpecker's hole.

(I) Ants.—No pole shall show evidence of ants. (m) Worm or grub eaten poles.—No pole shall be worm or grub eaten.

(n) Plugged holes.—No pole shall have a top, butt, or black knot which has been plugged.

Rejection. All poles which fail to meet the requirements

hereinabove specified may be rejected.

401.33 Cypress Poles.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) [ 401.34 Fir Poles.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 401.35 Oak Poles.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 401.36 Pine Poles.

American Society for Testing Materials, standard

specifications for southern yellow-pine piles and

poles to be creosoted, D25-20, 1920. See 401.46. 401.37 Redwood Poles.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

'

401.4 PILING, HEWN AND SAWN.

401.40 General Items.

American Association of State Highway Officials, specifications for timber piles, December, 1926.

Specifications for quality and sizes of wood piling are included with this association's grading rules for structural timber, lumber, and piling, 412.0.

U. S. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Public Roads, specification for piling, revised May 14, 1924. TIMBER PILES Description.

Timber piling shall consist of round or square timber of the kind and dimensions specified, placed

in the location and to the elevations shown on the

plans or as directed and in conformity with these

specifications.

Foundation piles. These piles may be of any species which will satisfactorily stand driving. They shall be cut from

live, sound trees, shall be solid, and free from

defects, such as injurious ring shakes, large, unsound

or loose knots, decay, or other defects which might

impair their strength or durability. They shall be

cut above the ground swell and have a uniform

taper, and shall be free from short bends. A

straight line drawn from the center of the butt to the center of the tip shall lie wholly within the body

of the pile. Piles shall be peeled soon after cutting.

All knots shall be trimmed close to the body of the pile. For round piles, the minimum diameter

at the tip shall be 8 inches, and at the butt shall be

12 inches. The maximum diameter at the butt

shall be 20 inches. Square piles shall be uniform

in cross section, not less than 10 by 10 inches for lengths up to 30 feet nor less than 12 by 12 inches

for lengths over 30 feet.

If possible, piles shall be full length. Where the

length required is greater than is practical to obtain they may, upon written approval of the engineer, be spliced. All splices shall be made in accordance with detail plans prepared to meet the special conditions encountered and which shall be approved

before the piles are driven. The tops of foundation piles shall be embedded

in the concrete footing at least 1 foot, and where

seals of concrete deposited in water are used with

piles the piles shall project at least 1 foot above the top of the seal concrete. They shall be cut off level at such an elevation that the tops of the piles will be always wet. The load per pile shall generally not exceed 15 tons with a maximum limit of 20 tons.

Trestle piles and foundation piles for trestle bents. These piles shall meet the requirements for tim- ber foundation piles, except that they shall be of durable timber, and peeled. The species will be

given on the plans or in the specifications.

Foundation piles for framed bents shall be cut

off level approximately 3 feet above the surface of the ground and the cap rigidly secured to each pile by drift bolts extending at least 9 inches into the

pile. 52688°—27 7 87
401.40 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Trestle piles shall be cut off level at the elevation shown on the plans and the caps secured as described above. If the cut off is 10 feet or more above the ground line, timber piles shall be braced by diagonal

cross bracing composed of 3 by 10 inch timbers

secured to the piles by %-inch diameter through

bolts. In bents of untreated piles the heads of the piles shall be thoroughly coated with a thick coat of red

lead paint, hot tar, hot asphaltum, or hot coal-tar creosote before the caps are placed.

The load per pile shall generally not exceed 10 tons with a maximum limit of 12 tons. Note.—The complete specification includes general data, pre- servative treatment, driving, and specifications for concrete piles. Preservative treatment is included under No. 400.42. 401.41 Cedar Piling. Western Red Cedar Association, specifications for standard cedar piling, January 13, 1914. STANDARD CEDAR PILING

All piling must be cut from live, growing cedar

timber, peeled, knots trimmed close, butts and tops

sawed square. Tops must be sound. Butts may

contain rot, the average diameter of which is not

over 10 per cent of the diameter of the butt. (This

rot not to exceed 1 per cent of the area of the butt.) Length.

All piling shall be furnished in the following

lengths: 16 feet, 20 feet, and multiples of 5 feet over 20 feet. Owing to the inaccuracies of cutting cedar

in the woods by hand, a variation of 6 inches in length is allowable. Tops.

Piling 30 feet and shorter must measure at small end not less than 30 inches in circumference.

Piling 35, 40, and 45 feet must measure at small end not less than 28 inches in circumference.

Piling 50 feet to 70 feet, inclusive, must measure

not less than 25 inches in circumference at small end.

Butts. Must measure not less than 14 inches or more than

20 inches in diameter the widest way.

Crook.

Piling may contain crook one way providing a

line drawn from the center of the top to the center

of the butt does not fall outside the body of the

piling at any point. Cat faces and dry streaks. A sound cat face not to exceed 10 per cent of the length of a piling is permissible. A sound, dead, or dry streak shall not be considered a defect when it does not materially impair the strength of the

piling.

401.42 Chestnut Piling.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 401.43 Cypress Piling.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

401.44 Fir Piling.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

401.45 Oak Piling.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

401.46 Pine Piling.

American Society fcr Testing Materials, standard

specifications for southern yellow-pine piles and

poles to be creosoted. D25-20, 1920. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. The specifications as to strength shall agree with the requirements of the standard definitions

of terms relating to structural timber (serial designation D9) of the American Society for Testing

Materials. See 412.0.SAPWOOD

2. All piles or telegraph poles shall show 40 per

cent sapwood in cross section, or there shall be a

ring of sapwood not less than 1 inch in thickness all around the heartwood.

QUALITY

3. (a) Piles and poles shall be cut from sound,

live trees of straight grain and regular taper, with- out crooks exceeding one-fourth the diameter of the stick at middle of crook when peeled. They

shall be free from rot, red heart, holes or rotten

knots, shakes, and felling checks.

(b) All piles and poles shall have the bark and

inner skin carefully removed when the tree is felled; all limbs and knots trimmed flush and butts

cut square. MINIMUM DIAMETER The minimum diameter of piles after peeling

shall be as follows:

Length Butts Tops

36 feet and under

Inches

14

14

15

Inches

109

9

38 feet and under 50 feet 50 feet and over No pile with butt diameter over 18 inches, nor

top diameter over 133^ inches, will be accepted.

The length of each pile shall be legibly marked on

the butt with white or black paint.

Southern Pine Association, specifications for grades of southern pine sheet piling, August 1, 1926. The sizes of sheet piling conform to the table of

sizes for factory flooring, heavy roofing, decking,

and sheet piling of the American Lumber Standards,

411.0. / 401,47 Redwood Piling.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

401.49 Miscellaneous Specifications for

Piling.

American Association of State Highway Officials, standard specifications for highway bridges and

incidental structures—sheet piling—1926. 88
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.1

TIMBER SHEET PILING The timber, unless otherwise definitely noted

upon the plans or specified, ma3T consist of any

species which will satisfactorily stand driving. It shall be sawn or hewn with square corners and shall be free from wormholes, loose knots, wind shakes,

decayed or unsound portions, or other defects which might impair its strength or tightness.

The piles shall be of the thickness specified or

directed and shall be provided with tongues and

grooves of ample proportions, either cut from the

solid material or made by building up the piles of three plank securely fastened together. The piles shall be drift sharpened at their lower ends so as to wedge the adjacent piles tightly together.

The tops of the piles shall be cut off to a straight

line at the elevation indicated and shall be braced

with a waling strip, properly lapped and joined at

all splices and corners. The wales shall preferably

be in one length between corners and shall be bolted near the tops of the piles. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for sheet piling, January, 1927. Sheet piling shall be graded the same as crossing

plank except that heart may show through on both

faces if tight enough to admit of driving.

401.5 SHIPS' KNEES.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

401.6 CORDWOOD.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

402. ROUGH LUMBER.

402.0 GENERAL ITEMS.

(See 400.13.) 402.1 SAWN STAKES AND CROSS ARMS.

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, recommended specification for overhead line material, serial No. D102-21, 1921. WOOD CROSS ARMS

Material requirements. Cross arms may be of cypress, Douglas fir, Norway

pine, or yellow pine, but shall be thoroughly sea- soned, sound, and free from wane or defects which

would reduce strength; the grain shall be close and

not out of parallel with any edge of arm more than

1 inch in 3 feet of length. Pitch pockets. Pitch pockets not exceeding 2 inches in depth,

up to 12 inches in length or J€ inch in width, not

entering pin or bolt holes on top or sides of arm,

will be permitted provided the area does not exceed

Y2 square inch if within 1 foot of center bolt hole, nor exceed 1 square inch if outside the 1-foot limit. Pitch seams or streaks which do not open the grain

are not considered "pockets.

Shakes and checks. Ring shakes, end checks, or other checks entering

pin or bolt holes will not be permitted; a few fine checks not entering pin or bolt holes, nor exceeding 6 inches in length nor }4 inch in depth, will be

allowed.

Knots. No knots will be allowed within 24 inches of center of any arm, nor entering any pin or bolt hole. Sound knots not exceeding % inch diameter, but

not entering any pin or bolt hole will be allowed between limits 24 inches and 36 inches from center

of any arm; outside limit 36 inches from center of any arm, sound knots not entering a pin or bolt hole may increase in size to not exceed 1 inch dia- meter at end of arm. Sapwood.

Cypress arms shall be free from sapwood or pitch

heart; Douglas fir, Norway pine, and yellow-pine arms may contain, on top or one side only, clear sapwood of maximum cross section not exceeding

15 per cent of total cross section of arm. Warp.

Cross arms shall be out of wind, shall not be bent

edgeways in any direction nor sideways in more

than one direction, and a straight edge applied to concave side shall not show offset exceeding Y% inch per foot of length of arm.

Finish. Arms shall be delivered unpainted with every

face planed, square to adjacent faces, and bored as

specified. Holes shall be accurately located, square with face, clean cut, not badly splintered where

bit passed out, and within inch of correct dia- meter.

Boring.

(a) All cross arms shall have holes inches diameter on center line of top, one on either side of and with center 15 inches from arm center, others 12 inches apart center to center on fight service arms, and 10 inches on heavy service arms.

(b) All cross arms shall have one center hole y£

inch diameter in center of side.

(c) All cross arms to be strap braced shall have two holes each ^ inch diameter on center line of

side, one on either side of center hole; 12 inches

distant for two pin arms and 19 inches distant for

all others.

(d) All cross arms to be angle braced shall have

two holes, each y& inch diameter on center line of bottom, and spaced one either side of middle, 21

inches distant for 4 pin and 6 pin arms and 30

inches distant for 8 pin arms.

Classes and section. Cross arms are of two classes : Light service arms, 334 inches wide by 4^ inches deep; and heavy service arms, 3^ inches wide by ±% inches deep.

Lengths. Cross arms lengths shall be as follows:

Size of arm

Light

service Heavy

service

Ft. in. 3

57

9

Ft. in. "4 10

6 6 8

89
402.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

American Railway Association, Signal Section,

specification No. 2512 for wood cross arms, 1912. Maierial.

(a) Cross arms shall be made of red cypress or Douglas fir. Workmanship.

(a) Workmanship shall be first class in all particulars. The boring for the pin and bolt holes

shall be smooth and straight, and surface of the arm

shall not be splintered by auger or machine bit. Quality.

(a) Cypress cross arms shall be free from pith heart and sapwood.

(6) Douglas fir cross arms may contain sapwood,

provided it is clear and does not form over 15 per

cent of the cross section of the cross arm. Cross arms shall be cut so that the sapwood shall be on

the top or sides.

(c) Cross arms shall be reasonably straight

grained. The grain shall not depart from parallelism to any edge of cross arm by an amount greater than

1 inch to 3 feet length of cross arm.

(d) Cross arms shall be out of wind.

(e) Cross arms shall be free from pitch pockets

exceeding 5 inches in length and 34 inch in width,

and from all pitch pockets which enter the pin or bolt holes on top or sides of the cross arms.

(J) Cross arms shall be free from loose or unsound

knots.

(g) Ten pin cross arms shall be free from knots at the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh pinholes and at bolt holes; 8 pin cross arms shall be free from knots

at the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth pinholes and at

bolt holes; 6 and 4 pin cross arms shall be free from

knots at the two middle pinholes and at bolt holes.

(h) Ten pin cross arms may have sound knots not over % inch in diameter between the fourth and

seventh pinholes; 8 pin cross arms may have sound

knots not over z/i inch in diameter between the

third and sixth pinholes; and 6 and 4 pin cross arms may have sound knots not over % inch in diameter

between the middle pinholes.

(i) Sound knots larger than z/i inch will not be

considered a defect under the following conditions: They shall be outside the fourth and seventh pin- holds in 10 pin cross arms, the third and sixth pin- holes in 8 pin arms and the middle pins in 6 and

4 pin arms; they shall not exceed z/i inch in diameter

near the above-mentioned pinholes, but may gradually increase in size to one-half the cross section of the arm at the ends.

(j) Cross arms shall be free from wane.

(k) Cross arms shall be free from through shakes

and from other shakes or checks exceeding 3 inches

in length.

(I) Cross arms will be rejected that are bent in more than one direction or edgewise. A straight

edge laid lengthwise the full length of cross arm on

the concave side, shall not show an offset greater

than 1 inch on 10 or 8 pin arms, or greater than

inch on a 6 pin arm, or greater than 3^ inch on

a 4 pin arm.

(m) Cross arms shall be free from loose hearts, red hearts, rot dote, or wormholes. West Coast lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for Douglas fir sawn stakes and cross arms,

July, 1926. Cross arms must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will admit sound and tight pin knots,

well scattered; small pitch pockets, none through

thickness, well scattered; bright sap, 20 per cent of cross section. 402.2 FENCING, GUARDRAILS, SCAFFOLDS, AND FALSE WORK.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

402.3 BLOCKS FOR PAVEMENTS AND

FLOORS.

American Association of State Highway Officials, standard specifications for highway bridges and

incidental structures—creosoted wood blocks, 1926. The wood from which the blocks are manufactured shall be southern yellow pine, Douglas fir, tamarack, or Norway pine. Only one kind of wood

shall be used in any one bridge floor. (Specifications for pine and tamarack blocks are

similar to those of the American Society for Municipal Improvements. The following specifications

relate to the treatment of Douglas fir blocks.) Treatment of Douglas fir blocks. The timber may be either air seasoned or green. Green timber and seasoned timber shall not, however, be treated together in the same charge. The

blocks shall be treated in an air-tight cylinder with

coal-tar paving oil or coal-tar distillate oil. (See

400.41.) They shall be treated by the boiling process substantially as follows: The charge shall be boiled in creosote at not to exceed 190° F. under vacuum of at least 20 inches

for not less than 2 hours and not more than 6

hours, depending upon the degree of dryness of the

timber. The minimum temperature shall be suffi- cient to vaporize the moisture under the existing vacuum. Pressure shall then be applied not to exceed a maximum of 125 pounds until the pre- servative has been absorbed in an amount about

3 pounds per cubic foot in excess of the specified

quantity. The temperature of the surrounding

creosote shall then be raised to, and held at, 225°

F. for 1 hour. The creosote is then exhausted

from the retort, the steam is shut off from the coils and a quick vacuum of 20 to 25 inches applied for a period of 30 minutes to 1 hour. In any charge, blocks of Douglas fir shall contain at least 12 pounds

of water-free oil per cubic foot of wood at the

completion of the treatment. American Society for Municipal Improvements,

specifications for wood block paving, 1921. TIMBER

Kind.

The wood from which the blocks are to be manufactured shall be southern yellow pine, Douglas

fir, tamarack, Norway pine, hemlock, or black gum. Only one kind of wood shall be used in any

one contract. 90
TLMBER AND OTHEK UNMANUFACTURED OE PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.3

Quality.

The blocks must be sound and must be well manufactured, square butted, square edged, free from unsound, loose or hollow knots, knotholes, and

other defects, such as shakes, checks, etc., that would be detrimental to the blocks. The number of annual rings in the 1 inch which

begins 2 inches from the pith of the block shall not be less than 6, measured radially; provided,

however, that blocks containing between 5 and 6

rings in this inch shall be accepted if they contain

333^ per cent or more summer wood. In case the block does not contain the pith, the 1 inch to be

used shall begin 1 inch away from the ring which

is nearest to the heart of the block. The blocks in each charge shall contain an average of at least 70 per cent of heartwood. No one block shall be

accepted that contains less than 50 per cent of heartwood.

Size of blocks. The blocks shall be from 5 to 10 inches long, but

should preferably average two times the depth;

they shall preferably be 4 inches in depth for very heavy traffic, and 3 inches in depth for light traffic. They may be from 3 to 4 inches in width, but in any one city block all of them shall be of uniform

width. A variation of ye mch shall be allowed in the depth, and }/% inch in the width of the blocks from that specified. In all cases the width shall be

greater or less than the depth by at least }/i inch. PRESERVATIVE Kind.

The preservative to be used may be either a

coal-tar paving oil or a coal-tar distillate oil, as herein specified; or where refined water-gas tar is desired, the specification as below suggested may

be used.

(Specifications for coal-tar, paving oil, coal-tar

distillate oil, and water-gas tar are similar to those

of the American Wood-Preservers Association. See 400.41.) TREATMENT The timber may be either air seasoned or green, but should preferably be treated within three months

from the time it is sawed. Green timber and sea- soned timber shall not, however, be treated together

in the same charge. The blocks shall be treated

in an air-tight cylinder with the preservative

heretofore specified. In all cases, whether thor- oughly air seasoned or green, they shall first be

subjected to live steam at a temperature between

220 and 240° F., for not less than 2 hours nor more

than 4 hours, after which they shall be subjected

to a vacuum of not less than 22 inches, held for at

least 1 hour. While the vacuum is still on, the

preservative oil, heated to a temperature of between

180 and 220° F., shall be run in until the cylinder is completely filled, care being taken that no air is j admitted. Pressure shall then be gradually applied not to exceed 50 pounds at the end of the first hour,

and then maintained at not less than 100 pounds

nor more than 150 pounds until the wood has absorbed the required amount of oil.

After this, a supplemental vacuum shall be

applied, in which the maximum intensity reached

shall be at least 20 inches, and shall continue for a

period of not less than 30 minutes. If desired,

this vacuum may be either preceded or followed by

a short steaming period. In any charge the blocks shall contain at least 16 pounds of water-free oil per cubic foot of wood

at the completion of the treatment. The blocks

after treatment shall show satisfactory penetration

of the preservative, and in all cases the preservative

must be diffused throughout the sapwood. To

determine this, at least 25 blocks shall be selected from various parts of each charge, and sawn in half at right angles to the fibers, through the center, and if more than one of these blocks show untreated sapwood, the charge shall be re-treated. After

re-treating, the charge shall again be subjected to a similar inspection.

The surface of the blocks after treatment shall be

free from deposit of objectionable substances, and

all blocks that have been materially warped, checked,

or otherwise injured in the process of treatment

shall be rejected.

Handling blocks after treatment. Blocks shall preferably be laid in the street as soon as possible after being treated. If they can

not be laid within two days, provision shall be made

to prevent them from drying out by stacking in close piles and covering them, and if possible,

sprinkling them thoroughly at intervals. The

blocks shall be well sprinkled, under direction of the purchaser, about two days before being laid. Inspection.

All material herein specified and processes used

in the manufacture of the blocks therefor, shall be

subject to inspection, acceptance, or rejection at the

plant of the manufacturer, which shall be equipped

with all the necessary gauges, appliances, and facilities to enable the inspector to satisfy himself that the requirements of the specifications are fulfilled. The purchaser shall have the further right to inspect the blocks after delivery upon the street, for the purpose of rejecting any blocks that do not meet these specifications, except that the plant

inspection shall be final with respect to the oil and

treatment. American Society for Testing Materials, standard

specifications for wooden paving blocks for exposed

pavements, D52-20, 1920. These specifications cover wooden paving" blocks

for pavements exposed to alternate wet and dry

conditions, as distinguished from pavements which

are used under cover and protected from atmospheric influences. TIMBER AND TREATMENT

(Specifications for timber and treatment same as those of the American Society for Municipal Improvements above.)

91
402.3 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

PRESERVATIVE The preservative used shall be coal-tar paving oil or distillate oil, as specified by the purchaser. (See

400.41.)

American Wood-Preservers' Association, standard

specifications for interior creosoted wood-block

flooring, 1923. TIMBER The wood from which the blocks are to be manufactured shall be air-dried southern yellow pine,

Douglas fir, tamarack, or Norway pine. Only one

kind of wood shall be used in any one contract. (Quality of blocks same as for creosoted woodblock paving.)

SIZE OF BLOCKS

(Size of blocks same as for paving except that

length is limited to 8 inches and not to exceed three times the depth.) PRESERVATIVE

(Preservatives same as for creosoted wood-block

paving.) TREATMENT The blocks shall be treated in air-tight cylinders

in accordance with any standard empty-cell process adopted by the American Wood-Preservers' Association, leaving in the blocks at the end of the treat- ment not less than 6 pounds of water-free creosote

oil per cubic foot of wood. The gross absorption

of oil injected during the process of treatment shall be sufficient to insure thorough impregnation by the

preservative.

The blocks, after treatment, shall show satisfac- tory penetration of the preservative, and in all cases the oil must be diffused throughout the sapwood.

To determine this at least 25 blocks shall be selected from various parts of each charge and sawn in half at right angles to the fibers through the center, and

if more than one of these blocks show untreated sapwood the charge shall be re-treated. After re- treating, the charge shall be again subjected to a

similar inspection.

The surface of the blocks after treatment shall be

free from deposits of objectionable substances, and

all blocks that have been materially warped, checked,

or otherwise injured in the process of treatment

shall be rejected.

American Wood-Preservers' Association, standard

specification for creosoted wood-block street paving,

1923. The wood from which the blocks are to be manufactured shall be southern yellow pine, Douglas fir, tamarack, or Norway pine. Only one kind of wood

shall be used in any one contract.

(Specifications for timber and the treatment for southern yellow pine, tamarack, and Norway pine

are similar to those of the American Society for Municipal Improvements, above.) TREATMENT FOR DOUGLAS FIR The timber may be either air seasoned or green. Green timber and seasoned timber shall not, however, be treated together in the same charge. The

blocks shall be treated in an air-tight cylinder with

the preservative agreed upon. They shall be treated by the boiling process substantially as follows: The charge shall be boiled in creosote at not to exceed 190° F. under vacuum of at least 20 inches

for 2 hours and not to exceed 6 hours, depeuding

upon the degree of dryness of the timber. The mini- mum temperature shall be sufficient to vaporize the moisture under the existing vacuum. Pressure shall then be applied not to exceed a maximum of 125 pounds until the preservative has been absorbed in an amount about 3 pounds per cubic foot in excess

of the specified quantity. The temperature of the surrounding creosote shall then be raised to and held

at 225° F. for 1 hour. The creosote is then exhausted

from the retort, the steam is shut off from the coils and a quick vacuum of 20 to 25 inches applied for a

period of 30 minutes to 1 hour. In any charge, the blocks shall contain at least 12 pounds of water-free oil per cubic foot of wood at the completion of treatment. The blocks after treat- ment shall show the preservative well diffused throughout the wood and the sapwood shall be entirely and well treated. To determine this at least 25 blocks shall be selected from various parts of each charge, and if more than one of these blocks show untreated sapwood, the charge shall be re- treated. After re-treating, the charge shall again be

subjected to a similar inspection.

The surface of the blocks after treatment shall be

free from heavy pitch of tarlike deposits, and all blocks that have been materially warped, checked,

or otherwise injured in the process of treating shall be rejected. PRESERVATIVE The preservative to be used may be either a coal- tar paving oil or a coal-tar distillate oil. See specifications for coal-tar oil and distillate oil for flooring

and paving blocks 400.41. 402.4 YARD LUMBER. (See also 411.)

402.41 Strips.

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for

strips, March 23, 1927. The grading rules for strips are the same as the grading rules for common boards of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and the Southern

Pine Association, 402.42. American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation, No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 400.0, classification of American Lumber

Standards and 411.0, yard lumber, American Lumber Standards for grades and sizes of strips. The Nation?.! Hardwood Lumber Association,

grading rules for strips, January, 1927.

STRIPS Standard grades: Clear, No. 1 common and No.

2 common. Exceptions to these standard grades are stated below under caption of the woods.

Standard widths, 2, 2}4, 3, 3}i, 4, 4>£, 5, and b)4

inches.

92
TIMBEE AND OTHEE UNMANUFACTURED OE PARTLY MANUFACTUEED WOOD 402.41

Strips may be Y% inch scant of standard widths

when shipping dry. In the grade of clear strips, tapering pieces must be measured at the narrow end. In the grades of common strips, tapering pieces must

be measured one-third the length of the piece from

the narrow end. Inspection must be made from the good face. Bright sapwood is no defect. Clear. Lengths, 8 to 16 feet. Clear strips must have one clear face and two good

edges. The reverse side must be sound. No. 1 common.

Lengths, 8 to 16 feet. Pieces 6 and 7 feet long must have one clear face and two good edges; the reverse side must be

sound.

Pieces 2 to 3 inches wide, 8 to 11 feet long, must

work 66% per cent clear face in not over two

cuttings; 12 feet and over long, in not over three

cuttings. No cutting shall be considered which

is less th^an 2 feet long by the full width of the

piece. Pieces 33^ to 53^ inches wide, 8 to 11 feet long, must work 65% per cent clear face in not over two

cuttings; 12 feet and over long, in not over three

cuttings. No cutting shall be considered which is less than 3 inches wide by 2 feet long.

Cuttings must have good edges and the reverse

side sound. No. 2 common.

Lengths, 6 to 16 feet. No. 2 common strips must work 50 per cent clear

face. No cutting to be considered which is less than 2 inches wide by 2 feet long. The reverse

side of the cuttings must be sound.

Cherry Strips Clear must be free from sap wood on the face

side.No. 1 common cuttings must be free from sapwood

on the face side. Mahogany Strips See this association's grading rules for mahogany,

400.35, for the sizes and grades of mahogany strips.

Plain and Quartered Oak Strips Grades: Clear, clear sap, No. 1 common, and No.

2 common.

Quartered oak strips must have the radial grain

running 45 degrees or less with one face of the

piece.

Clear. Clear will admit sapwood on the face side as follows

2 to 3 inch widths, 3^ inch of bright sapwood in the aggregate. 33^ to 43^ inch widths, % inch of bright sapwood

in the aggregate.

5 to 53^ inch widths, 1 inch of bright sapwood

in the aggregate.

Clear say. This grade is the same as the standard grade of

clear.

Poplar Strips Grades: Clear, sap, No. 1 common, and No. 2 common.

Widths, 2Y2 , 3, 33^, 4, 4^, 5, 53^, and 6 inches.

Clear. Clear must be clear on both faces and must be

free from sapwood except 1 inch in the aggregate on one face. Sap.

This grade is the same as clear poplar strips

except that bright sapwood will be admitted with- out limit. Pieces free from sapwood will admit

one sound standard defect or its equivalent. No. 1 common.

Pieces 6 and 7 feet long must be clear on both

faces. Both faces of the cuttings must be clear. All cuttings must be the full width of the piece.

Sound stain shall not be considered a defect. No. 2 common.

Standard except that sound stain shall not be

considered a defect. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), grading

rules for strips, January 1, 1927. The grading rules for strips are identical with the grading rules of this association for common boards,

402.42, with the following exception: B AND BETTER BARK STRIPS This grade shall consist of lumber containing bark

and may be inspected from either side; and within

the limitations hereinafter described, bark shall not be considered a defect in this grade, viz, 90 per

cent of any amount inspected shall show not less than }/2 inch of wood from end to end of piece on

edges. Ten per cent of any amount inspected may

show less than 3^ inch of wood on edges, but only on condition that the side containing bark shall show

75 per cent of wood. With the exceptions above

stated this grade is to be equal to B and better lumber. BOX BARK STRIPS This grade shall contain all bark strips falling

below the description of Nos. 1 and 2. When re- sawed the mill inspection and tally to be final. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers'

Association, grading rules for strips, February 1, 1927,

The grading rules for strips are the same as the grading rules of this association for common boards,

402.42. Northern Pine Manufacturers' Association, grading rules for strips, April 15, 1925. The grading rules for strips are the same as the

rules of this association for common boards, 402.42. •Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading rules for strips, September 1, 1925. 93
402.41 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

The grading rules for strips are the same as this association's grading rules for common boards,

402.42. Southern Pine Association, grading rules for

strips, March 23, 1927. The grading rules for strips are the same as this association's grading rules for common boards,

402.42. Southern Pine Association, the Gulf coast classifi- cation of pitch pine, March 15, 1923, grading rules

for strips. RIVER PLATE STANDARD

Kiln Dried Strips Sizes: 1 by 3, 1 by 4, and 1 by 6. Lengths: 10 feet and up; 5 per cent, 8 and 9 feet allowed. Must be kiln-dried, bright, and free from unsound

knots, loose knots, pith knots, knot holes, pin- worm holes, grubworm holes, through shakes, and

rot. Firm red heart permissible if not in excess of one-quarter of the area of the face. Wane 3^ inch

wide, measured across the face of the wane, ex- tending one-fifth the length of the piece on one

corner or the equivalent on two or more corners on

20 per cent of the pieces, shall be permitted on all widths on the poorest side. Eighty per cent free of knots. Knots inch or under in size not to be

considered a defect. Splits in ends are permissible

if not over 6 inches in length. WEST INDIAN

First Class Strips Sizes: 1 by 3 to 1 by 12; by 3 to V/± by 12; 114 by 3 to 1}4 by 12; and 2 by 8 to 2 by 12. Lengths: 10 feet and up; 5 per cent 8 and 9 feet allowed. Must be free from 'knot holes, grubworm holes,

rot, through splits and through shakes exceeding 12 inches in length. One-third of the pieces will permit wane inches wide, measured across the face of the wane and extending one-third the length of the

piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more

corners. Pieces combining coarse grain and coarse knots or coarse grain and numerous permissible

defects, shall be excluded.

Second Class Strips Sizes: 1 by 3 to 1 by 12; \\i by 3 to 1}4 by 12; \y2 by 3 to 1M by 12; 2 by 8 to 2 by 12. Lengths: 10 feet and up; 5 per cent 8 and 9 feet allowed.

Will permit lumber that does not grade first class, except that through splits and through shakes over

2 feet in length, and rot extending through the piece

shall be excluded. Will admit coarse-grained

material, sap stain, red heart, pith knots, loose knots,

unsound knots, wormholes, and wane if not over

2 inches wide measured on any face of the piece,

when not over one-third the length of the piece on

one coiner, or the equivalent on two or more

corners.

85 PER CENT HEART

Sizes:

Strips, boards, planks Scantling Deals

1 by 3 to 1 by 12. 1% by 3 to VA by 12. IV2 by 3 to iy2 by 12. 2 by 8 to 2 by 12.

2 by 3, 2 by 4, 2 by 5, 2 by 6, 3 by 3 to 3 by 8. 4 by 4 to 4 by 8.

3 by 9 and wider.

4 by 9 and wider.

Lengths: Strips, boards, and planks, 10 feet and

up; 5 per cent 8 and 9 feet allowed. Scantling

and deals, 12 feet and up; 5 per cent 10 and 11

feet allowed. Must conform to the classifications of first class for boards and planks, also scantling and deals, as

herein, and, in addition, eacjh piece shall be 85 per

cent or better heart.

Sizes: ALL HEART

Strips, boards, planks Scantling Deals

1 by 3 to 1 by 12. 1H by 3 to IH by 12. 1V2 by 3 to 1Y2 by 12. 2 by 8 to 2 by 12.

2by 3,2by4,2by 5, 2 by 6, 3 by 3 to 3 by 8. 4 by 4 to 4 by 8.

3 by?

4 by <

i and wider.

) and wider.

Lengths: Strips, boards, and planks, 10 feet and

up; 5 per cent 8 and 9 feet allowed. Scantling and

deals, 12 feet and up; 5 per cent 10 and 11 feet allowed. Must Conform to the classifications of first class for boards and planks, also scantling and deals, as

herein, and, in addition, each piecte must be all heart. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for strips, revised July 1, 1925. PONDOSA PINE The grading rules for Pondosa pine strips are the same as the grading rules of this association for Pondosa pine boards, 402.42. IDAHO WHITE PINE The grading rules for Idaho white pine strips are the same as the grading rules of this association

for Idaho white pine boards, 402.42. 402.42 Boards (Including Box Lumber).

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber

Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 411.0 for yard lumber. American Railway Association, Freight Container

Bureau, specifications for lumber for crating stoves and ranges; circulars 15, 17, and 20.

Material for Crates Lumber must be well seasoned. For the purposes of this specification seasoned lumber has an

average moisture content of not more than 20 per

cent, based on the weight of the wood after oven

drying to a constant weight.

Lumber must be reasonably sound. The edge

members, struts, and diagonal braces must not be

94
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.42

excessively weakened by decay or dote, and must

be free from excessive cross grain, knots that would

interfere with nailing, and knots or knot holes occupying more than one-half the width of the face

of the piece in which the knot occurs. Grouping of woods. The principal woods used in the construction of crates are classed for the purpose of this specifica- tion into four groups, as follows:

Alpine fir. Aspen.

Balsam fir. Basswood.

Buckeye.

Butternut. Cedar.

Chestnut. Cottonwood.

Cucumber.

Cypress.

Jack pine.

Douglas fir. Hemlock.

Larch.

Group 1 Lcdgepole pine.

Magnolia.

Noble fir. Norway pine.

Redwood.

Spruce.

Sugar pine. Western yellow pine.

White fir. White pine.

Willow.

Yellow poplar.

Group 2

Black ash. Black gum.

Maple (soft or silver). Pumpkin ash. Red gum.

Southern yellow pine.

North Carolina pine.

Group 3

Sap gum.

Sycamore.

Tupelo.

White elm. Group 4

Beech. Maple, hard.

Birch. Oak.

Hackberry. Rock elm. Hickory. White ash. Dimension of parts. Lumber (framework).—Lumber of the following

minimum dimensions must be used in the construction of the edge members, struts, and diagonal braces of the crate:

Weights of crate and

contents (pounds)

Up to 25 Over 25 to 50.

Over 50 to 100. _ Over 100 to 250.

For edge members and

struts

Authorized

thickness

Inches A to H

A and over—

_

A. tO A

A to A

1 and over A to §f

ft and over... H

% to M

A and overCorre- sponding

minimum

width

Inchesm12Ji lA

12Mm

2A2M

For diagonal braces

Authorized

thickness

Inches V2 to Vs.-— and over. &

Hto A„„7 A to A-—.

1 and over. A

A to n_;„. H and over. A to h:~,: - % to M

A and over.

Corre- sponding

minimum

width

Inchesm12%

2Mmi2%

2Hm

2%

2K

If box-type corner is used, connecting edge members may be reduced 25 per cent in thickness pro- vided the cross-sectional area of each of the members

forming the edges is increased 25 per cent over the

required minimum.

Crates for Cast-iron Household Cook Stoves and Ranges (Bulletin No.. 20) Lumber.

Lumber must be well seasoned and reasonably

sound and free from bad cross grain and knots

which would interfere with nailing or knots or knot

holes which are greater than one-third the width of the face of the piece in which they occur. Dimensions of parts. Lumber used as sheathing and double diagonal

bracing must be as wide as the frame members and

at least }/i inch thick for spans of 2 feet or less. For every additional foot of span or fraction thereof the lumber must have a corresponding increase of }4 inch in thickness. No unsupported span shall exceed 6 feet in length.

Lumber used in the construction of the frame and

single diagonal braces must be of the following

minimum dimensions. A commercial variation of

'Tic inch will be allowed.

Weight of crate and contents (pounds)

Minimum

dimensions

of lumber

used for struts, frame members, and single diagonal

braces

Up to 100

Inches Hbj 2H

A by 2A

A by ZA AbyiA

l by ZA

1 by m 1A by 3K

101 to 250

251 to 400

401 to 600

601 to 800

The above dimensions may be reduced Y% inch in thickness or M inch in width if woods from groups

3 or 4 are used.

Crates for Gas and Electric Domestic Cook Stoves (Bulletin No. 15) Dimensions of parts. Lumber {sheathing).—The following table shows

the minimum thickness of lumber required on all faces of crates:

Length of span

(feet) Required

minimum

thickness

Inches

to 2 X

2 to 3 %

3 to 4 Y2 4 to 5

5A

5 to 6 %

No sheathing shall be placed with a span of more

than 6 feet. 95
402.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTEIES

Lumber {framework and braces).—Lumber of the

following minimum must be used in the construction

of the framework and braces of the crate: Minimum size of members

Weight of crate and

contents (pounds) For framework For braces

Thickness Width Thickness Width

Up to 25 Inches%

%

Vz

Vs

Vs

Inchesm

IVs IVs 2Vs mSVs 4Vs V/s

ZVs

Inches V2 toti%

u % to M

Vs

VsVs

1

Inches

IVs 26 to 50 mIVs 2Vs

IVs 2V8 ZVs Ws

51 to 100

101 to 250

251 to 400

401 to 600 1 601 to 800

v%

i Vs

1 4Vs 1A 1A y/s When necessitated by commercial variation of manufacture a reduction of }/% of an inch below the

specified size of lumber may be accepted for framework and braces. American Railway Association, Freight Container

Bureau, six-basket crates for fresh fruits and

vegetables, Circular No. 19, 1925. Lumber for basket crates. Lumber must be well seasoned. For the purposes

of this specification, well-seasoned lumber shall be

considered to have an average moisture content of not more than 18 per cent based on the weight of the wood after oven drying to a constant weight.

Lumber must be reasonably sound; it must be

free from defects, such as bad cross grain, excessive decay, and knots that seriously effect the strength

of the piece or interfere with nailing or stapling.

Headsticks and divider sticks must be entirely

free from cross grain which runs across the piece

in either direction within one-half of the length;

divider sticks must be entirely free from knots. Any suitable species of wood may be used. Headsticks and divider sticks must be sawed; all other

parts may be rotary cut or sawed. Basket material must be rotary cut and free from knots, pitch pockets, and other defects that

either effect its strength or expose contents to damage.

American Society for Testing Materials, tentative general specifications 7 for wooden boxes, nailed and

lock-corner construction D 68-22T, D 44-2QT, 1920,

and 1922. The requirements for box boards as to seasoning

of wood, defects and the classification of the principal woods used for boxes, are the same as the American Railway Association, Freight Container

Bureau, given above. American Society for Testing Materials, tentative

general specification 8 for 4-one boxes and similar type boxes, D118-21T, 1921.

7 The complete specification includes dimensions of parts, methods

of manufacture, and other data pertaining to wooden boxes.

8 The complete specification includes dimension of parts, methods

of assembling, and other data pertaining to boxes with wedge-lock ends and boxes with detached tops.

Grouping of woods. Box lumber suitable for the purpose of these

specifications is classed into four groups, the same

as given above for the American Railway Association, Freight Container Bureau.

Material. Each cleat shall be sound, free from knots and

from cross grain which runs across it within a

distance equal to one-half its length. Cleats shall be not less than % inch thick (parallel to the length of the box) and not less than J4 inch

in width.

The thin boards shall be sound (free from decay

and dote), well seasoned and cut so that adjacent

faces of boxes will be at right angles to each other.

All defects that would materially lessen the strength, expose the contents of the box to damage, or interfere with the proper assembly of the box shall be

eliminated. When the thickness of thin boards as specified is less than ^ inch, thin boards made of woods of Groups 3 and 4 may be ^ inch less than the specified

thickness, except that the minimum thickness of thin boards of any kind of wood shall be }/$ inch. The variation in thickness of thin boards below

the thickness specified shall be not more than 3^8 of the thickness of the thin board and this variation below the specified thickness shall not extend over more than 10 per cent of the face of that particular board. Thin boards less than 2*^ inches in width at

either end shall not be used. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for boards, March 23, 1927. Similar to the grading rules of the Southeastern

Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine

Association given below.

California Redwood Association, standard specifi- cations for eastern grades of California redwood common boards, April, 1927. The sizes of boards are as shown in this association's table of sizes for yard lumber, 411.0. The grades of common boards are as follows: Grades.—No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and No.

3 common.

Lengths.—Standard lengths shall be 10 to 20 feet, inclusive, in multiples of 2 feet, admitting 10 per cent

of 6 and 8 foot lengths.

Special provisions.

Medium crook shall be permissible in No. 1 and

No. 2 common grades.

Medium cup shall be permissible in No. 1 common

grade and deep cup in No. 2 and No. 3 common

grades.

Workings.—Pieces of D&M with ^ inch or more

of tongue and ship-lap with inch or more of lap,

will be admitted in No. 1 common pieces of D&M

having not less than j^-inch tongue, and ship-lap

having not less than 3^-inch lap will be admitted in No. 2 common. Pieces with j^-inch lap will be ad- mitted in No. 3 common ship-lap.

96
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFA CTURED WOOD 402.42

Standard workings.—Dressed and matched (CM),

ship-lap, barn siding, and grooved roofing shall be worked to the patterns published by the California Redwood Association. No. 1 common must be high-class general utility- lumber suitable for use without waste, and will admit

the following defects or their equivalent; sound

tight knots, the average diameter of any one knot

not to exceed approximately 1}4 inches in 4 and 6 inch widths; 2 inches in 8 and 10 inch widths and

2}^ inches in 12-inch widths; an occasional small unsound knot permitted up to a maximum diameter of 134 inches provided the knot be fixed in position; surface checks; hollow bird's-eye; defects in manufacture which will not cause waste; slight

shake that does not go through, equal in length to width of piece; short split; medium stain; bright

sound sap not exceeding 20 per cent of the width

of the piece. No. 2 common must be suitable for ordinary

construction and will admit the following defects

or their equivalent; tight knots and knots not

necessarily sound, the average diameter of any one

knot not to exceed approximately 2 inches in 4-inch

widths, 2}/2 inches in 6-inch widths, 3 inches in 8 and 10 inch widths and 33^ inches in 12-inch widths; season checks, not to exceed one-half the

length of the piece; wormholes or hollow bird's-eye; defects in manufacture which will not cause waste; through shakes not to exceed one-fourth the length

of the piece; splits not to exceed one-sixth the

length of the piece; heavy stain and any amount of sapwood; heart checks; streaks of advanced decay

not going through the board equal in area to a

streak 3^ inch wide by one-sixth the length of the

piece. Pieces containing one knot hole or equivalent

defect, not more than 3 inches in diameter, or two

knot holes not exceeding 13^ inches in diameter,

may be permitted, provided the rest of the piece is No. 1 common quality.

Miscut or mismanufactured 1-inch common,

which does not fall below % inch in thickness,

shall be admitted in No. 2 common, provided the grade of such stock is otherwise as good as No. 1 common.

No. 3 common will admit coarse knots; decayed,

loose, or unsound knots; knot holes; through checks,

shakes, and splits; wormholes and hollow bird's-eye; serious defects in manufacture; advanced decay, sapwood, and heavy stain; and wane; provided each

piece as a whole is of such a nature as to permit its being handled without a waste to exceed 15 per cent. California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for white and sugar pine

boards, May 1, 1926. STANDARD SIZES Boards.

(SIS, S2S, S1S1E, or S4S) .

1

Thickness

Nominal

Dressed

Standard Extra

standard a H

1 H H m 1A IVs m 1& IVs

2 l

5/8 m

Width

Nominal Dressed

3

4 m 68

10 m 12 UV2 STANDARD GRADES For the grades of boards, see the grades of this association for ship-lap, No. 411.5. California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for white fir, Douglas

fir, and incense cedar boards, May 1, 1926. COMMON BOARDS

Standard sizes. White fir, Douglas fir, and incense cedar boards

when rough SlS, S2S, S4S, D&M, or ship-lap shall conform to the standard sizes of dressed pine

boards. STANDARD GRADES No. 1 common.

No. 1 common shall present a generally smooth

appearance and be high class general utility lumber.

It permits any of the following defects not in serious combination:

Sound and intergrown knots: 13^ inches in di- ameter in 4-inch and 6-inch widths, 2 inches in 8-inch and 10-inch, 23^ inches in 12-inch and not

over 3 inches in wider widths and smaller black knots if firmly set; slight shake that does not go

through equal in length to width of piece; surface

checks, small cup, medium pitch pockets which do

not show an opening through the piece, light pitch,

medium stain, pin wormholes well scattered, patch

of torn grain, slight skip. No. 2 common.

No. 2 common permits any of the following

defects, but no combination of them so serious as

to prevent the use of each piece as a whole

Sound and tight knots.—2 inches in diameter in 4 and 23^ in 6-inch widths, 3 inches in 8 and 10

inch, 3}4 inches in 12-inch, and not over 4 inches in wider widths. Smaller unsound and pith knots,

provided they be fixed in position. Spike or branch

97
402.42 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

knots which do not weaken the piece at any point more than the knots heretofore specified, medium

crook, medium cup, medium pitch pockets, medium

pitch, small grub wormholes, pin wormholes, heavy

stain, fir red heart, pith, deep torn grain, and

slight skips. No. 3 common.

No. 3 common permits more numerous and

coarser defects than No. 2 common, such as large

spike knots, loose or decayed knots or an occasional knot hole, shake, checks, or splits, wane, or skips

in dressing, heavy stain, heavy pitch, or grub

wormholes.

It should be suitable for use as a whole for sheathing and similar uses. No. 3 and better common.

Grades of 1, 2, and 3 common may be combined

under the grade name of No. 3 and better common.

No. 4 common. The defects common to this grade are similar to those found in No. 3 common, but exist to a

greater degree.

The most serious defects are knot holes, advanced

decay or its equivalent in heavy massed pitch, and

serious check. Other types are extremely coarse knotted, waney, shaky, badly split, or checked. No. 5 common.

No. 5 common is the lowest recognized grade and

admits all defects known in lumber, provided each

piece is strong enough to hold together when

carefully handled. No. 1 box. No. 1 box shall be graded as No. 3 common

boards. No. 2 box. No. 2 box shall be graded as No. 4 boards. Federal Specifications Board, proposed master

specification 9 for wooden boxes, nailed and lock- corner construction, May, 1927. The requirements for box boards as to seasoning

of wood, defects, and the classification of the principal woods used for boxes are the same as the American Railway Association, Freight Container

Bureau, given above.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for cypress boards, January, 1927. CYPEESS

Grades.—Tank (when specified), first and seconds,

selects, No. 1 shop, No. 2 shop, No. 1 common,

No. 2 common, No. 1 boxing, No. 2 boxing and

peck.

All grades will be shipped in random widths

unless otherwise specified. All rough cypress must be of sufficient thickness when dry to surface to the standard thicknesses for surfaced lumber. Rough lumber when shipped in

specified widths may be M hich scant in width.

» The complete specification includes dimension of parts, methods

of manufacture, and other data pertaining to wooden boxes.

Lengths.—4 to 20 feet, admitting 25 per cent of odd lengths.

Bright sapwood is not a defect in grades below

firsts and seconds. There is no restriction as to heart center in grades

below selects. Timbers and plankings, when such grades are

specified, may contain all the defects admitted in No. 2 common, but each piece must be suitable for planking, foundation material, and similar purposes.

First and seconds. Widths.—4 inches and over, admitting 5 per cent

of 4 and 5 inch widths.

Lengths.—8 feet and over, admitting 20 per cent

of 8 to 11 feet, of which 20 per cent one-half may

be 8 and 9 feet. Pieces 6 inches and over wide, will admit free wane defined in first and seconds under standard

grades.

One split not exceeding in length the width of the

piece, or its equivalent, shall not be considered a

defect in pieces 6 inches and over wide. Eight and nine foot lengths must be clear except

that bright sapwood will be admitted in pieces 8

inches and over wide according to the corresponding widths in 10 feet and over long. In pieces 10 feet and over long, bright sapwood

and sound standard defects will be admitted as fol- lows, except that in pieces 10 inches and over wide, one of the standard defects admitted may be an unsound standard defect other than standard wane

or split defects. Four and five inches wide, 1 inch of bright sap- wood in the aggregate showing on one face, but

otherwise clear. Six inches wide, 1 inch of bright sapwood in the

aggregate, or one sound standard defect or its equivalent.

Eight inches wide, 2 inches of bright sapwood in the aggregate, or one sound standard defect or its equivalent.

Ten inches wide, 2 inches of bright sapwood in the aggregate and one sound standard defect or its equivalent; or 1 inch of bright sapwood in the aggregate and two sound standard defects or their equivalent; or 3 inches of bright sapwood in the

aggregate.

Twelve inches wide, 4 inches of bright sapwood

in the aggregate and one sound standard defect

or its equivalent; or 2 inches of bright sapwood in the aggregate and two sound standard defects or

their equivalent; or three sound standard defects

or their equivalent.

Thirteen inches wide, any amount of bright sap- wood and three sound standard defects or their equivalent. Sixteen inches and over wide, any amount of bright sapwood and four sound standard defects or

their equivalent.

Selects. Widths.—4 inches and over, admitting 10 per

cent under 6 inches wide. 98
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.42

Lengths.—8 feet and over, admitting 30 per cent under 12 feet. Inspection must be made from the good face. The reverse side must not be below No. 1 common

or No. 1 shop.

One split not exceeding in length the width of the piece, or its equivalent, shall not be considered

a defect in pieces 6 inches and over wide. Free wane defined in first and seconds under

standard grades of general instruction shall be

admitted on the good face of pieces 6 inches and

over wide.

Pieces 4 and 5 inches wide must have one clear face and two good edges.

Sound standard defects will be admitted according to widths as follows, except that in pieces 10

inches and over wide, 10 feet and over long, one of the standard defects admitted may be an unsound

standard defect other than standard wane or split defects: Six inches, one sound standard defect or its equivalent. Seven inches, two sound standard defects or their equivalent.

Ten inches, three sound standard defects or their equivalent.

Thirteen inches and over, four sound standard

defects or their equivalent. Pieces 10 inches and over wide, free from other

defects, will admit pin wormholes one-tenth the width of the piece on one edge. In the absence of other defects a slight amount

of sound stain will be admitted. No. 1 common.

Widths.—3 inches and over. Lengths.—6 feet and over admitting 10 per cent

of 6 and 7 feet. Inspection must be made from the good face. The reverse side must not be below No. 2 common.

This grade will admit sound stain, pin wormholes,

season checks, slight peck, slight shake not extending through, sound knots, an occasional unsound

knot not exceeding 1 inch in diameter and not

extending more than half through the piece, slight wane on one or both edges not exceeding one-third the length or one-half the thickness of the piece,

and one split not exceeding in length the width of the piece or its equivalent in one or both ends, or

defects equivalent to the above that do not prevent

the use of each piece in its full width and length. No. 2 common.

Widths.—3 inches and over. Lengths.—6 feet and over. In addition to the defects admitted in No. 1 common, larger and coarser defects of the same

character, through shake, grub wormholes and slight

peck showing through, unsound knots that do not show through, and one split one-third the length

of the piece or its equivalent, will be admitted.

Pieces comparatively free from coarse defects will admit scattered knot holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter. However, the above-mentioned defects

shall not be sufficient to seriously impair the

strength or to prevent the use of each piece in its full width and length for fencing, sheathing and

other common purposes. No. 1 boxing. Widths.—3 inches and over. Lengths.—6 feet and over. No. 1 boxing must work 66% per cent in cuttings not less than 3 inches wide by 2 feet long, or 4

inches wide by 18 inches long.

Each cutting may contain sound stain, pin wormholes, unsound knots and peck that do not show

through, season checks and other defects that do

not prevent its use for boxing purposes. No. 2 boxing. Widths.—3 inches and over. Lengths.—4 feet and over. No. 2 boxing must work 50 per cent in cuttings as described in No. 1 boxing.

Peck. Widths.—3 inches and over. Lengths.—6 feet and over. This grade will admit any amount of peck, or

its equivalent in other defects, but each piece

shall have sufficient nailing strength to permit its use for very common purposes. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), grading

rules for boards, January 1, 1927. COMMON BOARDS AND STRIPS Rough, dressed, D&M, ship-lap, barn siding, and

grooved roofing. Grades.—No. 1 common, No. 2 common, No. 3 common.

Lengths.—Standard lengths are 4 to 16 feet, inclusive, with not over 15 per cent of 8 feet and

under.

All 1-inch common lumber which is ordered

dressed one or two sides, may be dressed on one

edge to bring the width Y% inch scant of the nominal

width. In stock widths of No. 1 and No. 2 common

boards and strips, rough, or dressed on one or two

sides, no piece shall be counted as standard width

that is more than M inch scant in width in 7-inch and under, % inch scant in 8-inch to 12-inch, and

3^ inch scant in wider widths. Pieces narrower than the above should be measured as the next lower standard width and not reduced in grade. Pieces of D&M with & inch or more of tongue,

and ship-lap with inch or more of lap, will be

admitted in No. 1 common. Pieces of D&M having

not less than inch tongue, and ship-lap having

not less than y% inch lap, will be admitted in No. 2 common. Pieces with y& inch lap will be admitted

in No. 3 common ship-lap. No. 1 common boards and strips. No. 1 common boards and strips, rough, or dressed one or two sides are graded same as No. 2 common grade or No. 1 box. 99
402.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 1 common dressed and matched.

' No. 1 common dressed and matched (CM), shiplap, and barn siding shall be graded according to the

rules for No. 1 common boards and strips, except

that wane shall not be so deep as to extend into the tongue or for one-half the thickness of the top lip on the groove in D&M, or for over one-half the

thickness of the lap in ship-lap, on the face side. No. 1 common grooved roofers. No. 1 common grooved roofers shall be graded

according to the rules for No. 1 cpmmon boards and

strips, except pith knots, wormholes, and checks and splits that show an opening through, shall not be permitted. No. 2 common boards and strips. No. 2 common boards and strips, rough, or dressed one or two sides, dressed and matched

(CM), ship-lap, barn siding, and grooved roofers,

will admit the following defects or their equivalent: Knots not necessarily sound, the average diameter

of any one knot not to exceed approximately 13^

inches in 3-inch widths, 23^ inches in 4-inch widths,

3 inches in 6-inch widths, 33^ inches in 8-inch widths, 4 inches in 10-inch widths, 43^ inches in 12-inch, and 5 inches in wider widths; wormholes;

deep torn grain or other machine defects which will not cause waste; pitch pockets; pith; through

shakes not to exceed one-half the length of the

piece; splits not to exceed one-fourth the length of the piece; streak of advanced decay not to exceed

Y<l inch wide by one-fourth the length of the piece; or its equivalent in unsound red heart; stain; wane

2 inches wide, one-half the length of the piece. A

knot hole or the equivalent, not to exceed 2 inches

in diameter, will be admitted in No. 2 common.

Miscut or mismanufactured 1-inch common,

which does not fall below % inch in thickness, shall be admitted in No. 2 common, provided the grade

of such stock is otherwise as good as No. 1 common.

No. 3 common boards and strips. No. 3 common boards and strips, rough, or dressed one or two sides, dressed and matched

(CM), ship-lap, and barn siding will admit coarse knots; loose or decayed knots and knot holes; through checks, shakes, and splits; serious defects

in dressing; pitch pockets and heavy pitch; ad- vanced decay; stain; wane; or other defect which

will not prevent its use as a whole for cheap sheathing or which will cut 75 per cent of lumber as good

as No. 2 common. Note—Crooks in common boards and strips. The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot lengths, shall be permissible in No. 1 and No. 2 common grades:

3, 4, 5, and 6 inch widths _ 3-inch crook. 7 and 8 inch widths 2^-inch crook. 9 and 10 inch widths 2-inch crook.

11 and 12 inch widths 1%-ineh crook- Pieces longer or shorter than 16 feet may have

proportionate amounts of crook. A greater amount

of crook shall be permissible in No. 3 and 4 common

grades.

1913 RULES FOR THE CLASSIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF

AIR-DRIED NORTH CAROLINA PINE BOARDS

Air-dried North Carolina pine boards in thick- nesses of 2 inches and under, and in lengths of 8

feet and over, in multiples of 2 feet, shall be graded

and inspected as follows: B and better. Same as B and better finish under grades of rough and dressed lumber, but admitting stain not

exceeding 25 per cent. Nos. 1 and 2 shop lumber. Same as rules for shop lumber and No. 2 shop

lumber under grades of rough and dressed lumber,

but admitting stain not exceeding 25 per cent. No. 1 common. Same as rule for No. 1 common boards and

strips under grades of rough and dressed lumber,

but admitting 50 per cent stain. No. 2 common. Same as rule for No. 2 common grade or No. 1 box, under grade of rough and dressed lumber, but

admitting 75 per cent stain. No. 3 common. Same as rule for No. 3 common or No. 2 box,

under grade of rough and dressed lumber, but

admitting 100 per cent stain. Note.—By "stain" in above rules is meant the usual blue sap

stain. Weather stain which is superficial, and will be removed by

the usual dressing, is not to be considered a defect. No. 1 common boards and strips, rough, or dressed one or two sides. Must be suitable for use without waste, and will admit the following defects or their equivalent:

Any number of sound knots, the average diameter

of any one knot not to exceed approximately 1J^

inches in 3 and 4 inch widths, 2 inches in 6 and 8

inch widths, 23^ inches in 10-inch widths, 3 inches

in 12-inch widths, and not over 33^ inches in wider

widths; two pith knots; checks; a limited number

of pin wormholes, well scattered; loosened or heavy

torn grain, or other machine defects which will not

cause waste; pitch pockets; pitch; pith, one-sixth the length of the piece; shake that does not go through the piece; the equivalent of one split, not

to exceed in length the width of the piece; firm red heart; stain; wane equivalent to 1 inch in width, 3^ inch in depth, and one-third the length

of the piece. No. 2 common grade or No. 1 box. Shall consist of lumber below the grade of No.

1 common containing pinholes, pin, standard,

large, reasonably sound knots, stain not exceeding 25 per cent and pith knots, encased knots, and spike

knots which do not seriously affect strength of

pieces; stained pieces otherwise B and better, which

show over 50 per cent stain, stained pieces other- wise grading No. 1 common and showing not more

than 333^ per cent stain; and pitchy pieces which

are not allowed in C and better lumber which would

otherwise grade C and better containing 50 per cent

firm red heart, will be admitted to this grade.

100
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OK PAETLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.42

No. 3 common or No. 2 box. This grade shall consist of boards below the grade

of No. 2 common (excepting bark strips) and which

can be used with a waste not exceeding 25 per cent. This will admit red heart. Eight, ten, and twelve

inch shall crosscut sound in the widths for which

they are shipped within the above limit of waste. Merchantable red heart. This grade shall consist of red heart boards which

may be used with a waste of not exceeding 25 per

cent; except that 8, 10, and 12 inch shall crosscut sound in the widths for which they are shipped

within the above limit of waste. Dunnage.

This grade shall consist of all lumber below the grade of merchantable red heart. Northern Eemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for hemlock and tamarack

boards, February 1, 1927. COMMON BOARDS AND STRIPS Lumber containing numerous defects which

preclude it from use for finishing purposes, but which

is suitable for general utility and construction

purposes, shall be graded as common lumber. It

is 1, and 1^ inches in thickness and may

consist of common boards, either rough; SIS, S1S1E,

S2S, or SIS; D&M (dressed and matched); or ship-lapped.

Common boards, SIS, SlSlE, S2S, or S4S.

Thicknesses and widths of 1, 134, and 13^ inch common boards shall conform to those specified for finishing lumber. Rough common boards. Lengths.—Standard lengths of common boards,

either rough, SIS, S1S1E, S2S, or S4S dressed and

matched, or worked ship-lap, shall be 4 to 20 feet, in multiples of 2 feet, and the following percentages

of short lengths may be included in all miscellaneous

or mixed shipments: No. 1 common 15 per cent, 8-foot. No. 2 common 5 per cent, 6-foot. 15 per cent, 8-foot. No. 3 common 10 per cent, 6-foot. 15 per cent, 8-foot. No. 4 common 5 per cent, 4-foot. 25 per cent, 6 and 8 foot. No. 5 common 50 per cent, 4, 6, and 8 foot. Thicknesses and widths of rough common boards

shall be standard and will conform to those specified in rough dry sizes, American Lumber Standards,

400.0, lumber classification and in the following

rules of this association: The widths of common boards, finish and dimension, rough and commercially dry, 7 inches and

narrower, shall be not more than yi inch less than

the nominal widths; widths 8 to 12 inches (board

measure) shall be not more than ^ inch less than the nominal widths; and widths of 13 inches and wider

board measure shall be not more than 3^ inch less

than the nominal widths. These widths shall also apply to stock width shipments of lumber, dressed on one or two sides. Pieces narrower than above

should be counted as next lower standard width and

not reduced in grades. Grades.—No. 1 common, No. 2 common, No 3 common, No. 4 common, and No. 5 common.

Special provision.—The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot lengths, shall be permissible

in No. 1 and No. 2 common grades: In boards,

strips, D&M, ship-lap, flooring, ceiling, partition,

drop siding, and bevel siding:

3, 4, 5, and 6 inch widths 3-inch crook.

7 and 8 inch widths 23^-inch crook.

9 and 10 inch widths 2-inch crook.

11 and 12 inch widths 1^-inch crook. Pieces longer or shorter than 16 feet may have

proportionate amounts of crook. A greater amount

of crook shall be permissible in Nos. 3 and 4 common

grades. No. 1 common boards. Lengths.—8 feet to 20 feet, 15 per cent of 8-foot and approximately 15 per cent of 16-foot. General —Suitable for use without waste and

admitting any of the following defects, or equivalent

combination of defects: Knots: Any number of sound tight knots, black

or red, not larger than

13^2-inch in 4-inch widths.

2-inch in 6-inch widths. 23^-inch in 8 and 10 inch widths.

3-inch in 12-inch widths. Checks: Small number slight checks. Torn grain: If not affecting appearance. Machine gouge: Not affecting strength or appearance. Shake: Tight shake not extending through and

not over one-third the width by one-fourth the

length of the piece.

Water stain: Not more than 5 per cent of the

area.

Split: One straight split in the end far enough

from the edge to permit nailing; and not longer

than one and one-half times the width of the piece.

Wane: Not exceeding 1 inch wide, one-half the thickness by one-fourth the length. If shorter, may be deeper, but must not show through on

the opposite face. Rough spots: In dressed lumber not to exceed

in length the width of the piece. Mill worked: Same rules except in D and M,

DS and ceiling, wane on back shall not extend through the tongue or into the top lip on the groove,

or in ship-lap, not over one-half the thickness of the lap on either side. No 2 common boards. Lengths.—6 feet to 20 feet, 5 per cent of 6-foot, 15 per cent of 8-foot; or 20 per cent of 8-foot. General.—Suitable for use without waste and

admitting any of the following defects, or equivalent

combination of defects:

101
402.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Knots: Any number, black or red, average diameter not exceeding

2-inch in 4-inch widths. 23^-inch in 6-inch widths.

3-inch in 8 and 10 inch widths.

4-inch in 12-inch widths. Machine gouge: Not affecting strength or appearance. Shake: Tight two-thirds the length of the piece, or fine through shake one-half the length. Season checks: Not more serious in effect than

the shake allowed. Water stain: If firm and hard not over 50 per

cent of area. Soft rot: Occasional spot or streak not going

through the piece.

Split: One straight split in the end far enough

from the edge to permit nailing, and not longer

than twice the width of the piece.

Wane: Not exceeding one-fourth the width, onehalf the thickness by one-half the length of the

piece, or if shorter may go deeper, but not to show

on the opposite face. Knot holes: None in 4-inch and 6-inch stock

8 feet or shorter. In stock 10 feet and longer one knot hole, equal in diameter to the knots per- mitted in each width of the No. 1 common grade, or two knot holes one-half that size. Torn grain or rough spots: In dressed lumber

equal in area to the width of the piece by twice

the width in length. No. 8 common boards. Lengths.—6 feet to 20 feet, 10 per cent 6-foot, 15 per cent 8-foot; or 25 per cent 8-foot. General.—All defects described not permitted in one piece. Lumber must be suitable for use without

waste. Knots: Any number round or spiked. Season checks: Any number.

Shake: Through shake that does not seriously

weaken the piece for sheathing.

Water stain: Any amount of firm rot or water

stain. Soft rot: An occasional spot not impairing the

usefulness of the piece.

Wane: Not to exceed one-fourth the width,

three-fourths the thickness by three-fourths the length of the piece, or if shorter may go deeper, but

not showing on the opposite face or on the corners

of ends to prevent nailing.

Rough spots: Permitted in dressed lumber if the combined area is not more than one-half the area

of the piece. Torn grain: Any amount if not too deep.

Split: Not to exceed in length two and one-half times the width of the piece and not prevent firm

nailing.

Knot holes: Stock shorter than 8 feet. One knot

hole in 5 board feet and less surface measure. Two

knot holes in all stock containing over 5 feet surface measure. Stock 8 feet and longer permits knot

holes not larger than the maximum size knots

specified for No. 2 common, but limited as follows:

One knot hole in 4-inch width. One knot hole in 6-inch width. Two knot holes in 8 and 10 inch widths. Three knot holes in 12-inch width. Or equivalent in smaller holes. No. 4- common boards. Lengths.—4 feet to 20 feet, 5 per cent 4-foot, 25 per cent 6 and 8 foot; or 30 per cent 6 and 8 foot. Knots: Any number, any size. Knot holes: Any number.

Loose shake: Permitted. Excessive torn grain: Permitted.

Soft rot: Permitted.

Wane: Not exceeding one-third the width, three- fourths the thickness by the full length of the piece on one edge or the equivalent in Wo or more places.

Splits: Three if the combined length does not

exceed one-half the length of the piece. General.—Must work 50 per cent firm stock suit- able for crating, or be useful for sheathing with not

over 25 per cent waste. No. 5 common boards. Lengths.—Fifty per cent 4, 6, and 8 feet. All lumber below the grade of No. 4. Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for northern white and Norway pine, spruce and tamarack boards, April 15, 1925. COMMON LUMBER The characteristic of common lumber, as distin- guished from finish, consists of a general coarseness

of appearance, caused by various defects and combinations of defects, in a greater or less degree

according to the grade.

Common lumber inches and thicker shall be

graded the same as inch lumber. No. 1 common boards and strips. No. 1 common boards and strips may consist of white or Norway pine, or a mixture of both, unless otherwise specified. This grade includes all sound,

tight, knotted stock, whether red or black knots,

free from very large, coarse knots, or any imperfections that will weaken the piece.

This grade should be of a character fitting it for ordinary use, except finished purposes. Knots, medium stain, or a small amount of shake

are admissible if they do not affect the general

utility of the piece. No. 2 common boards and strips. - No. 2 common boards and strips may consist of white or Norway pine, or a mixture of both, unless otherwise specified, and are subject to the same

general inspection as No. 1, except that coarser and

larger knots, not necessarily sound, more stain and

shake are allowed, v and coarse limb knots, heart shake or slight trace of rot, when firm, or occasional wormholes are defects admissible in this grade. No. 3 common boards and strips. No. 3 common boards and strips may consist of northern pine or a mixture of these species.

102
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.42

The general appearance of this grade of lumber is coarse, admitting:

Large loose or unsound knots. An occasional knot hole. A great deal of shake. Some red rot. Large wormholes.

Keavy stain. Not a serious combination of these defects in any

one piece is admissible. No. 4 common boards and strips. The predominating defect characterizing this grade is red rot. Other types are pieces showing numerous large

wormholes, or several knot holes, or pieces that are extremely coarse knotted, waney, shaky, or badly

split. Pieces when extremely cross checked, are admissible in this grade. No. 5 common boards and strips. This is the lowest recognized grade and admits

of all defects known in lumber, provided the piece

is strong enough to hold together when carefully handled.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Pacific hemlock and Sitka spruce boards, Schedule M, 1925. The value and grade of this lumber is determined

from its adaptability for the manufacture of ordi- nary packing boxes. Wide boards, or those of special widths, will admit of more defects than narrow or random widths. It is not intended that boxes shall be of clear material and defects which

do not impair the strength or the usefulness of ordi- nary boxes are not considered as making such

material unsuited for box purposes. Must be sound

lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional

variations in sawing, knots, bark pockets, and sap

or other defects, if not rendering the piece unfit for box-cutting purposes, providing stock will produce

75 to 90 per cent of box cuttings, ranging in size from 4 to 12 inches wide and not to exceed 18 inches

in length. Such cuttings do not necessarily have to be clear for box-making purposes, so they may contain small sound knots and/or small bark pockets. In hemlock box, larch, a kindred wood, may be

shipped.

Sitka spruce, merchantable box. The value and grade of this lumber is determined

from its adaptability for the manufacture of ordi- nary packing boxes. Wide boards or those of special

widths will admit of more defects than narrow or or random widths. It is not intended that boxes

shall be of clear material, and defects which do not

impair the strength or the usefulness of ordinary

boxes are not considered as making such material unsuited for box purposes. Must be sound lumber,

well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations

in sawing, knots, bark pockets, and sap or other

defects if not rendering the piece unfit for boxcutting purposes, providing stock will produce 75 to 90 per cent of box cuttings, ranging in size from 4

to 12 inches wide and not to exceed 18 inches in length. Such cuttings do not necessarily have to be

clear for box-making purposes, so they may contain

small sound knots and/or small bark pockets, pitch

pockets, and pitch blisters. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for boards, August 1, 1925. BOARDS

Standard Nominal thicknesses finished Finished widths SlE and

(inches) thicknesses S2E

SIS or S2S

1IX

iy2

Inches

if m

Inches

3 to 7, % inch off. S to 12, Vi inch off. 13 and wider, 1 inch off. Widths of surfaced stock 13 inches and wider

with edges rough, inch less than nominal.

Lengths.—Multiples of 2 feet. American Lumber Standard thicknesses can be

furnished on contract.

Select common.

Shall be square edged, well manufactured, and

will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and intergrown knots, approximately

1 inch in 4-inch to 6-inch widths, and 13^ inches

in 8-inch to 12-inch widths; medium stained sap on 25 per cent of face; heavy torn grain; seasoning checks (none through) and slight end checks. No. 1 common.

Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and tight knots, approximately 2

inches in 4-inch to 6-inch widths; 23^ inches in 8-inch widths, 3 inches in 10-inch widths, 4 inches

in 12-inch widths, and one-third width of piece in widths over 12 inches. Will also admit encased medium knots; spike knots; torn grain; wane IJHj inches wide, }/% inch deep, not over 3 feet long; wormholes, limited and well scattered; sap stain, any

amount; seasoning checks; streak of rot 13^ inches wide, 3^2 inch deep for one-third the length; and

edge defects due to machining. No. 2 common. Must be suitable for low-grade sheathing. Will admit of stock below No 1 common. May contain any number of sound knots, five standard knot holes

in any one piece or equivalent number of smaller knot holes. In addition, will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Wane; splits; shakestained sap; decayed streaks; decayed sap; rotten

spots, well scattered; wormholes, any number;

variation in thickness and mismatched.

Cull grade.

This grade will admit anything that is below the No. 2 grade of common and is suitable for crating or other similar uses. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading

rules for boards, September 1, 1925. 52688°—27 8 103
402.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

COMMON BOARDS AND STRIPS Grades.—No. 1 common, No. 2 common, No. 3 common, and No. 4 common.

Lengths.—Standard lengths are 4 to 20 feet, in- clusive, in multiples of 2 feet, and the following

percentages of short lengths may be included in all miscellaneous or mixed length shipments: No. 1 common 5 per cent, 8-foot. No. 2 common 5 per cent, 4-foot. Nos. 3 and 4 common, 8 inches and wider 5 per cent, 4-foot. 5 per cent, 6-foot. 5 per cent, 8-foot. 3 and 6 inch widths 25 per cent may

be under 10-foot. The above percentage of short lengths is customary, and in the interest of conservation, will be

included, so far as practicable, in all shipments of mixed lengths, except as may be hereinafter specified.Special provision.—The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot lengths, shall be permissible

in No. 1 and No. 2 common grades:

3, 4, 5, and 6 inch widths 3-inch crook. 7 and 8 inch widths 2^-inch crook. 9 and 10 inch widths 2-inch crook.

11 and 12 inch widths 1%-inch crook. Pieces longer or shorter than 16 feet may have

proportionate amounts of crook. A greater amount

of crook shall be permissible in Nos. 3 and 4 common

grades.

Based on a piece 12 inches wide, ^-inch cup shall be permissible in No. 1 common grades and 3^-inch

in No. 2 common and poorer grades. Narrower or wider pieces may have proportionate amounts of cup.

All 1-inch common lumber which is ordered

dressed one or two sides may be dressed on one

edge to bring the width Y, inch scant of the nominal

width. In stock widths of No. 1 and No. 2 common

boards and strips, rough, or dressed on one or two

sides, no piece shall be counted as standard width

that is more than 34 inch scant in width in 7-inch and under, ^ inch scant in 8 to 12 inch, and }4

inch scant in wider widths. Pieces narrower than

the above should be measured as the next lower standard width and not reduced in grade. Pieces of D&M with ^ inch or more of tongue,

and ship-lap with ^ inch or more of lap, will be

admitted in No. 1 common. Pieces of D&M having not less than ^ inch tongue and ship-lap having not less than 3^8 inch lap will be admitted in No. 2 common. Pieces with Ye inch lap will be

admitted in No. 3 common ship-lap.

Standard workings.—Dressed and matched (CM),

ship-lap, and barn siding shall be worked to the

patterns shown in Figures 9 to 13; 136 and 137. The size of the groove in grooved roofing shall be

Y inch wide, 34 inch deep, and located 1^ inches from the outer edge of the groove to the edge of board, as shown in Figure 143.

No. 1 common boards and strips. No. 1 common boards and strips, rough, or

dressed one or two sides, must be suitable for use without waste, and will admit the following defects

or their equivalent; any number of sound knots, the average diameter of any one knot not to exceed approximately 13^ inches in 3 and 4 inch widths,

2 inches in 6 and 8 inch widths, 2^ inches in 10- inch widths, 3 inches in 12-inch widths, and not

over S}4 inches in wider widths; two pith knots;

checks; a limited number of pin wormholes, well scattered; loosened or heavy torn grain, or other machine defects which will not cause waste; pitch

pockets; pitch; pith, one-sixth the length of the

piece; shake that does not go through the piece; the equivalent of one split, not to exceed in length the width of the piece; firm red heart; stain; wane

equivalent to 1 inch in width, 3^ inch in depth, and

one-third the length of the piece. No. 1 common dressed and matched (CM), ship-lap, and barn siding. No. 1 common dressed and matched (CM), shiplap, and barn siding shall be graded according to the rules for No. 1 common boards and strips, ex- cept that wane shall not be so deep as to extend

into the tongue or for one-half the thickness of the top lip on the groove in D&M, or for over one-half the thickness of the lap in ship-lap, on the face side. No. 1 common grooved roofing shall be graded

according to the rules for No. 1 common boards

and strips, except pith knots, wormholes, and checks and splits that show an opening through shall not be permitted. No. 2 common boards and strips, dressed and matched

{CM), ship-lap, barn siding, and grooved roofing. No. 2 common boards and strips, rough, or dressed one or two sides, dressed and matched (CM), shiplap, barn siding, and grooved roofing will admit the

following defects or their equivalent: Knots not

necessarily sound, the average diameter of an}- one

knot not to exceed approximately 13^ inches in 3- inch widths, 23^ inches in 4-inch widths, 3 inches

in 6-inch widths, 33^ inches in 8-inch widths, 4

inches in 10-inch widths, 43^ inches in 12-inch, and

5 inches in wider widths; wormholes; deep torn

grain or other machine defects which will not cause

waste; pitch pockets; pitch; pith; through shakes not to exceed one-half the length of the piece; splits not to exceed one-fourth the length of the piece; streak of advanced decay not to exceed Y inch

wide by one-fourth the length of the piece, or its equivalent in unsound red heart; stain; wane 2

inches wide and one-half the length of the piece.

A knot hole or the equivalent, not to exceed 2

inches in diameter, will be admitted in No. 2 common.

Miscut or mismanufactured 1-inch common, which

does not fall below % inch in thickness, shall be

admitted in No. 2 common, provided the grade of such stock is otherwise as good as No. 1 common,

104
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.42

No. S common boards and strips, rough, or dressed one or two sides, dressed and matched (CM), shiplap, and barn siding. Will admit coarse knots; loose or decayed knots and knot holes; through checks, shakes, and splits; serious defects in dressing; pitch pockets and heavy

pitch; advanced decay; stain; wane; or other defects which will not prevent its use as a whole for cheap

sheathing or which will cut 75 per cent of lumber

as good as No. 2 common.

No. 4 common boards and strips. Shall include all pieces that fall below the grade

of No. 3 common, excluding such pieces, however,

as will not be held in place by nailing after wasting

one-fourth the length of the piece by cutting into two or three pieces; mill inspection to be final. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for boards, June 15, 1925. No. 1 common.

Thickness.—1 inch and thicker. Width—Shall be specified widths, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches wide.

Length.—8 to 20 feet. Will admit stained sap, shake, season checks, pin

wormholes, sound tight knots, straight-end splits not exceeding in length the width of the piece, a

slight amount of peck on one or both sides of pieces

comparatively free from other defects, slight wane

on one or both edges, not to exceed one-third the length of the piece, and other defects which will not prevent its use for usual common purposes in its full length and width. This grade is not intended

for tank purposes. No. 2 common.

Thickness.—1 inch and thicker. Width—Shall be specified widths, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches wide.

Length.—6 to 20 feet. Will admit all defects allowed in No. 1 common,

and will also admit unsound knots and slight peck on both sides. The defects shall not, however, be

sufficient to prevent the use of each piece in its full length and width for common sheathing and fencing purposes. No. 3 common.

Thickness.—1 inch and thicker. Width.—Specified or random, 3 inches and wider. Length.—6 to 20 feet. Admits coarser and more numerous defects than No. 2 common, including an occasional knot hole, but no piece will admit a sufficiently serious combination of defects to prevent its use for sheathing

or similar purposes. No. 4 common.

Thickness.—1 inch and thicker. Width.—Specified or random, 3 inches and wider.

Length.—6 feet and longer. Defects common to this grade are similar to those found in No. 3 common, but exist to a greater

degree. The most common serious defects are knot

holes, extremely coarse knots, wane, shakes and

splits, and peck.

Peck.

Thickness.—1 inch and thicker. Width.—Shall be random or specified, 3 inches and

wider. Length—6 to 20 feet. Shall admit the product of that part of the log

known as pecky. Each piece shall have sufficient strength to permit its use as a low-grade sheathing,

fencing, or foundation material. Southern Pine Association, grading rules for boards, March 23, 1927. Similar to the grading rules of the Southeastern

Forest Products Association for boards. (See

above.)

Southern Pine Association, the Gulf coast classi- fication of pitch pine, grading rules for boards,

March 15, 1923.BOARDS AND PLANKS

Sizes of boards.

1 by 8 and wider. \\i by 8 and wider. V/2 by 8 and wider. 1M by 8 and wider.

Sizes of planks.

2 by 7 and wider. 2M by 7 and wider. 23^ by 7 and wider. 2% by 7 and wider.

Lengths.—10 feet and up; 5 per cent 8 and 9

feet allowed.

Grades. Crown, prime, Genoa prime, merchantable,

square edge. Crown. Boards must be bright, one heart face, except

will permit sap 1 inch wide on the heart side measured

across the face of the piece on one corner, or the

equivalent on two corners; must be free from

unsound knots, loose knots, pith knots, knot holes, pin wormholes, grub wormholes, rot, pith, wane,

pitch pockets exceeding 3^ inch in width, through

splits, through shakes and centers. Firm red heart

permissible, if not in excess of 15 per ce'nt of the area of the face. Not to have more than one knot

134 inch on the 8 to 10 inch, or one knot l}/2 inch on the 11 inch and up, to each 6 feet or fraction thereof; provided that 90 per cent of the pieces

shall be free of knots. Planks must be bright, one heart face, except

will permit sap 1 inch wide on the heart side measured across the face of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two corners; must be free from

unsound knots, loose knots, pith knots, knot holes, pin wormholes, grub wormholes, rot, wane, pitch

pockets exceeding }4= inch in width, through splits and through shakes; except that in 15 per cent of the pieces, splits, not to exceed in length one-half the width of the piece, may be allowed on one or both ends of the piece. Firm red heart permissible,

if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Not to have more than one knot 13^j inch on the 105
402.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

7 to 10 inch, or one knot \

Z/L inch the 11 inchon

and up, to each 6 feet or fraction thereof; provided

that 90 per cent shall be free of knots, and 90 per

cent free of centers. Prime.

Boards must be one heart face and two-thirds

heart surface on the opposite side, the heart to show

the entire length; must be free from unsound knots,

loose knots, pith knots, knot holes, pin wormholes,

grub wormholes, rot, wane, pitch pockets exceeding

% inch in width, and through splits and through

shakes, except that in 15 per cent of the pieces,

splits, not to exceed in length one-half the width of the piece, may be allowed on one or both ends of the

piece. Firm red heart permissible, if not in excess

of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Not to have more than one knot 134 inch on the 8 to 10 inch, or one knot 1H> inch on the 11 inch and up, to each 6

feet or fraction thereof; provided that 75 per cent

shall be free of knots and 85 per cent free of centers. Planks must be one heart face and two-thirds heart surface on the opposite side; must be free from unsound knots, loose knots, pith knots, knot

holes, pin wormholes, grub wormholes, rot, wane,

pitch pockets exceeding % inch in width, and

through splits and through shakes, except that in 15 per cent of the pieces, splits, not to exceed in length one-half the width of the piece, may be

allowed on one or both ends of the piece. Firm red

heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Not to have more than one knot inch on the 7 to 10 inch or one knot 2 inch on the 11 inch and up, to each 6 feet or fraction

thereof; provided that 75 per cent shall be free of knots and 85 per cent free of centers. Genoa prime.

Boards and planks must be one heart face, twothirds heart surface on the opposite side, except

that the 9-inch and under on the heart side may have

1 inch sap on one corner or the equivalent on two

corners, and the 10-inch and up may have l}4 inches

of sap on one corner or the equivalent on two corners, measured across the face of the piece. Must be free from pith knots, unsound knots, loose knots, pin

wormholes, grub wormholes, knot holes, rot, wane, and through splits and through shakes the length of which exceeds the width of the piece. Firm red

heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Merchantable. Boards and planks must show two-thirds heart

surface on two opposite sides, or the equivalent;

must be free from unsound knots, loose knots, pin

wormholes, grub wormholes, knot holes, rot, and

through splits and through shakes, the length of which exceeds the width of the piece. Firm red

heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Fifteen per cent of the pieces

will permit wane 13^ inches wide measured across the face of the wane, one-quarter of the length of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two

or more corners,

Square edge. t Boards and planks must be free from unsound

knots, loose knots, knot holes, grub wormholes, rot, through splits and through shakes the length of which exceeds the width of the piece. Twenty-five

per cent of the pieces will permit wane 1}^ inches

wide, measured across the face of the wane, onethird of the length of the piece on one corner, or the

equivalent on two or more corners. RIVER PLATE STANDARD

Boards and planks.

Sizes—I to 2 inches by 8 to 12 inches. Lengths.—10 feet and up; 5 per cent 8 and 9 feet allowed. Must be free from unsound knots, loose knots,

grub wormholes, knot holes, rot, and through splits

and through shakes, the length of which exceeds the width of the piece. One-third of the pieces will per- mit wane 1^2 inches wide, provided not over onehalf the thickness of the piece and extending onethird the length of the piece on one corner, or the

equivalent on two or more corners.

West Indian First-class boards and planks.

Sizes.—

1 by 3 to 1 by 12. 1*4 by 3 to 1M by 12. \Yt by 3 to iy2 by 12. 2 by 8 to 2 by 12. Lengths.—10 feet and up; 5 per cent 8 and 9 feet allowed. Must be free from knot holes, grub wormholes,

rot, through splits and through shakes, exceeding 12 inches in length. One-third of the pieces will permit wane 13^2 inches wide, measured across the

face of the wane and extending one-third the length

of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners. Pieces combining coarse grain and

coarse knots or coarse grain and numerous permissible defects, shall be excluded.

Second-class boards and planks.

Sizes.—

1 by 3 to 1 by 12. 134 by 3 to 1M by 12. V/2 by 3 to 134 by 12. 2 by 8 to 2 by 12. Lengths.—Ten feet and up; 5 per cent 8 and 9 feet allowed. Will permit lumber that does not grade first class, except that through splits and through shakes over 2

feet in length, and rot extending through the piece,

shall be excluded. Will admit coarse-grained material, sap stain, red heart, pith knots, loose knots,

unsound knots, wormholes, and wane if not over 2 inches wide measured on any face of the piece,

when not over one-third the length of the piece on

one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners.

85 PER CEUT HEART The grading rules for boards are the same as the grading rules of this association for strips, No. 402.41. 106
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.42

All HEART The grading rules for boards are the same as the grading rules of this association for strips, No.

402.41. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for Douglas fir, West coast hemlock, Sitka spruce boards, July 1, 1926. DOUGLAS FIR Common grades. Discoloration through exposure is not a defect in the grades of common.

All common grades, including timbers either rough or dressed, are subject to shrinkage.

Boards

Nominal thicknesses

(inches)

Standard

yard

thicknesses SIS or S2S

Finished widths SlE and S2E

1 Inches2 to 7 inches, 3A off. m 8 to 12 inches, Yi off.

Standard industrial.—1 inch SIS or S2S to xf

inch. Lengths.—Multiples of 2 feet. Selected common boards. Shall be square edged, well manufactured, and

will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of

defects; sound and intergrown knots, approximately 1 inch in 4 inches to 6-inch widths,

inches in 8 inches to 12-inch widths; pitch pockets, not over 6 inches in length, none through; heavy

torn grain; medium sap stain, 25 per cent of face; seasoning checks, none through; slight end checks. No. 1 common boards. Must be firm, sound, and suitable for use without

waste. May be Douglas fir and/or west coast hemlock. Will admit any number of the following

defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and tight knots, approximately 13^ inch in 4 to 6 inch widths, 2 inches in 8 to 10 inch widths, 2}4 inches in 12-inch widths,

3 inches in widths over 12 inches; small spike knots which do not materially weaken the piece;

medium pitch pockets, none open through; pitch

streaks; wane Y2 inch deep on edge, 1 inch wide on face, one-sixth lengths; splits, not longer than

width of piece or equivalent of end checks; pin

wormholes, limited; medium sap stain, 25 per cent

of face; firm heart stain; seasoning cheeks; deep

torn grain; slight edge defects due to machining. No. 2 common boards. May be Douglas fir and/or west coast hemlock.

Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of

defects: Sound and unsound tight knots, approximately 2 inches in 4 to 6 inch widths, 23^ inches in 8-inch widths, 3 inches in 10-inch widths, 4 inches

in 12-inch widths, one-third width of piece in widths

over 12 inches; incased medium knots; spike knots;

pitch pockets; pitch streaks; fine shake or checks;

splits, not longer than twice the width of the piece; wane 2 inches wide if not extending into the other

face; wormholes, limited, well scattered; sap stain, any amount; heart stain, any amount; torn grain;

edge defects due to machining; two medium or equivalent smaller knot holes in a 12-foot board,

if other defects limited. . No. 3 common boards. Must be suitable for low-grade sheathing, and

will admit any or all west coast species. Will admit

stock below No. 2 common, variation in thickness and any number of the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Large knots; loose knots; unsound knots; knot

holes; wane; splits, one-fourth length of piece;

pitch; pitch pockets; shake; heart or sap stain; decayed streaks; decayed sap; rotten spots, well

scattered; wormholes, any number.

WEST COAST HEMLOCK

Box lumber

Standard

finished thickness S2S (inch)

Standard

industrial finished thickness S2S

Inch

The value and grade of this lumber is determined

from its adaptability for the manufacture of ordinary

packing boxes, ordinary sizes being defined as boxes not over 20 inches in length nor more than 15 inches

in width. Wide boards, or those of special widths,

will admit of more defects than narrow or random

widths. It is not intended that boxes shall be of

clear material, and defects that do not impair the

strength or the usefulness of ordinary boxes are not

considered as making such material unsuited for box purposes.

Specified widths. Whenever west coast hemlock box lumber is ordered of specified width, then the cuttings used

in computing percentages shall be of the same width

as the lumber ordered. In such case the percentage

of each grade shall be 15 per cent less; that is, No. 1 box shall contain 60 per cent or more of cuttings, No. 2 box shall contain 45 to 60 per cent, and No. 3 box shall contain 25 to 45 per cent. Grades There shall be three recognized grades of box

lumber, viz, No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 No. 1.—Shall be generally sound and contain 75

per cent and over of cuttings suitable for boxes of ordinary size and quality, as referred to above. In computing percentages, cuttings of assorted sizes shall be used. Assorted sizes are defined as pieces

running in widths from 6 to 12 inches and in lengths

from 12 to 20 inches, No. 2.—Generally similar in character to No. 1, containing from 60 to 75 per cent of box cuttings.

107
402.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 3.—Shall consist of all lumber below the grade

of No. 2 and shall contain 40 to 60 per cent of box

cuttings. SITKA SPRUCE

Box Lumber Standard thickness S2S, ff inch. Standard in- dustrial S2S, if inch. The value and grade of this lumber is determined

from its adaptibility for the manufacture of ordinary

packing boxes, ordinary sizes being defined as boxes not over 20 inches in length nor more than 15 inches in width. Wide boards, or those of special

widths, will admit of more defects than narrow or random widths. It is not intended that boxes shall be clear material, and defects that do not impair

the strength or the usefulness of ordinary boxes

are not considered as making such material unsuited

for box purposes.

Specified widths. Whenever spruce box lumber is ordered of specified width, then the cuttings used in computing

percentages shall be the same width as the lumber

ordered. In such case the percentage of each grade

shall be 15 per cent less; that is, No. 1 box shall contain 60 per cent or more of cuttings, No. 2 box

shall contain 45 to 60 per cent, and No 3. shall contain 25 to 45 per cent. Grades. There shall be three recognized grades of box

lumber, viz, No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3. No. 1.—Shall be generally sound and contain 75

per cent and over of cuttings suitable for boxes of ordinary size and quality, as referred to above. In computing percentages, cuttings of assorted sizes shall be used. Assorted sizes are defined as pieces

running in widths from 6 to 12 inches and in lengths

from 12 to 20 inches. No. 2.—Generally similar in character to No. 1 containing from 60 to 75 per cent of box cuttings. No. 3.—Shall consist of all lumber below the grade

of No. 2 and shall contain 40 to 60 per cent of box

cuttings. West Coast lumbermen's, Association, grading

rules for western red cedar boards, July 1, 1926. WESTERN RED CEDAR Common grades. Discoloration through exposure is not a defect

in the grades of common.

All common grades, including timbers either rough or dressed, are subject to shrinkage.

Board.3

Nominal thicknesses

(inches)

Standard

yard

thick- nesses SIS

or S2S

Finished width SlE

and S2E

1 Inches

ff 2 to 7 inches, % off. IK - - 8 to 12 inches, y2 off. Standard industrial 1-inch SIS or S2S to inch. Lengths.—Multiples of 2 feet.

Selected common.

Shall be square edged, well manufactured, and

will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of

defects: Sound and intergrown knots, approximately 1 inch in 4 to 6 inch widths, 13^ inches in 8 to 12 inch widths; medium stained sap, 25 per

cent of face; heavy torn grain; seasoning checks, none through; slight end checks. No. 1 common.

Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of

defects: Sound and tight knots, approximately 2

inches in 4 to 6 inch widths, 2}4 inches in 8-inch

widths, 3 inches in 10-inch widths, 4 inches in 12- inch widths, H width of piece in widths over 12

inches; encased medium knots; spike knots; torn

grain; wane 13^ inches wide, 3^ inch deep, not over

3 feet long; wormholes, limited, well scattered; sap stain, any amount; seasoning checks; streaks

of rot iy$ inches wide, 3^ inch deep, one-half length;

edge defects due to machining. No. 2 common. Must be suitable for low-grade sheathing. Will admit of stock below No. 1 common, and any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Large knots;

loose knots; unsound knots; knot holes; wane;

splits; shake; stained sap; decayed streaks; decayed

sap; rotten spots, well scattered; wormholes, any

number; variation in thickness. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for larch and fir boards, July 1, 1925. LARCE AND FIR Standard sizes. Boards SIS or S2S to ff inch—boards S4S.

4-inch to ff by 3^.

6-inch to ff by 5^.

8-inch to ff by 73^. 10-inch to ff by 9>£.

' 12-inch to ff by 113^. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, white fir, cedar, and spruce boards, July 1, 1925. Standard sizes of boards and strips. S2S to ff

S4S to ff by % inch scant of full width on all widths. PONDOSA PINE The characteristics of common lumber as dis- tinguished from finishing are a general coarseness

of appearance, caused by various defects and

combination of defects in a greater or lesser degree

according to the grade.

Checks in tight red knots in common lumber are not considered a defect unless the opening is so pronounced as to injure the piece for the purpose

for which the grade was designed.

Common lumber 134 inches and thicker shall be

graded the same as inch lumber. 108
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PAETLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.42

No. 1 common boards and strips. No. 1 common boards and strips includes all sound tight knotted stock with the size of the knot the determining factor of the grade.

This grade is of a character that fits it for shelving, cornice, fine barn board, and all uses where

best quality and appearance of common lumber is required.

Knots, light pitch, light stain, season checks, and

small pitch pockets are admissible if they do not

affect the general utility of the piece. No. 2 common boards and strips. No. 2 boards and strips are subject to the same

general inspection as No. 1 common, except that

coarser and larger knots, not necessarily sound, or

their equivalent, form the basis of inspection.

Some of the most common types of knots admissible in this grade are large knots, branch knots,

checked knots, and those not firmly set in the piece.

Other defects common to this grade are season

checks, heart shake, heart pith, pitch, pitch pockets,

slight traces of firm rot, and occasional wormholes.

No serious combination of the above defects is admissible in any one piece. Stain covering the entire face is admissible when

not in serious combination with other limit defects. No. 3 common boards and strips. The grade of No. 3 takes in much of the lower product of the log and while the appearance of a

part of the grade is coarse the stock has the in- herent qualities of the soft and lasting pines.

The defects common to this grade are:

(a) Large, loose, or unsound knots, or an occasional knot hole.

(b) Considerable heart shake, season checks,

pitch or pitch pockets.

(c) Any amount of stain and large branch knots.

(d) Some red rot and large wormholes.

(e) Roughness caused by skips in dressing, and

roller splits. A serious combination of the above defects is not

admissible in any one piece. No. 4 common boards and strips. The defects common to this grade are much the same as those found in No. 3, but exist to a greater

degree.

The most common serious defects are knot holes, either red rot or its equivalent, in heavy massed

pitch or serious checks. Other types are extremely

coarse knotted, waney, excessive heart shake, badly

split or badly checked pieces. No. 5 boards. A No. 5 board is the lowest recognized grade and

admits all defects known in lumber, provided the

piece is strong enough to hold together when carefully handled. IDAHO WHITE PINE No. 1 common boards and strips. No. 1 common boards and strips include all sound tight knotted stock whether red or black

knots, free from very large, coarse knots, or any

imperfections that will weaken the piece.

This grade should be of a character fitting it for ordinary use, except finishing purposes. Knots, small pitch pockets, light season checks,

or light pitch are admissible if they do not affect the general utility of the piece.

Light stain covering the entire face is admissible

if not in combination with other marked defects. No. 2 common boards and strips. Xo. 2 boards and strips are subject to the same

general inspection as No. 1 except that coarser and

larger knots, not necessarily sound, more pitch

pockets and season checks are allowed. Coarse branch knots, heart shake or slight traces of rot when firm, or occasional wormholes, are defects admissible in this grade. Stain covering the entire face of the piece is admissible when not in combination with other marked defects. No. 3 common boards and strips. The general appearance of a part of this grade of lumber is coarse, admitting:

1. Large, loose, or unsound knots.

2. An occasional knGt hole.

3. A great deal of pitch and pitch pockets.

4. Some red rot and pieces that are badly season

checked, or have considerable heart shake.

5. Large wormholes and any amount of stain.

6. Roughness caused by skips in dressing and

roller splits. A serious combination of these defects in any

one piece is not admissible. No. 4 common boards and strips. The predominating defects characterizing this grade are red rot and knot holes. Other types are pieces showing numerous large

wormholes. pieces that are extremely coarse knotted, waney, or showing excessive heart shake, extremely

pitchy, or badly checked or split. No. 5 boards. A No. 5 board is the lowest recognized grade and

admits all defects known in lumber, provided the

piece is strong enough to hold together when carefully handled. Inch box lumber. This grade shall consist of random widths, 3 inches and wider, 6 to 20 feet long. Each piece shall contain not less than 66^ per cent of sound cuttings, 3 inches wide or wider and 18 inches long or longer.

Sound cuttings will admit all of the defects allowed

in the grade of No. 2 common. Waste material may be thin or practically worthless. Lumber 134 inches and thicker may be graded

under this rule if so specified. Short box. Short box shall include lumber 12 to 47 inches

long, inclusive, 3 inches and wider, and No. 4 and

better. White Pine Association of the Tonawandas,

grades of northern white pine lumber for boxes, 1922. (This association's grade of white pine lumber

suitable for boards for boxes is shown in 400.26 under No. 1 box lumber.)

109
402.43 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

402.43 Dimension Lumber.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1928. See 400.0 for lumber classification. See 411.0 for yard lumber.

See 412.0 for structural material. See 413.0 for softwood factory and shop lumber. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for dimension lumber, March 23, 1927. The grading rules of this association for the fol- lowing are the same as those of the Southeastern

Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine

Association. (See below.)

Dimension and heavy joists. Grades. Lengths.

Special provisions.

The grading rules of this association for the fol- lowing are the same as those of the North Carolina

Pine Association (Inc.) . (See below.) No. 1 common dimension and heavy joists. No. 2 common dimension and heavy joists. No. 3 common dimension.

California Redwood Association, standard specifi- cations for eastern grades of California redwood

squares, April, 1927. SQUARES

Squares shall be manufactured in sizes as ordered, 4 by 4 inches and larger, rough or S4S 3^ inch off each way.

Grades.—Clear heart (Redwood Association grade)

and A (American Standard Redwood grade). Clear heart squares shall be straight and well manufactured and in the rough may contain any

defects that will work out in dressing. Sapwood

on one corner one-quarter the width of the piece

and in size 8 by 8 inches and larger not to exceed

five small sound knots whose combined diameters

do not exceed V/i inches, will be allowed. "A" squares will admit any amount of bright sap and slightly crooked stock, and, in addition, not to exceed five small knots, or their equivalent,

whose combined diameters do not exceed 2 inches. California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

dimension, heavy joists, and small timbers, April, 1927. The sizes of dimension stock are given in the

table of sizes for yard lumber, 411.0. The grades of dimension, heavy joists, and small timbers are as follows: In the grading of dimension, heavy joists and

small timbers strength, stiffness, and uniformity

of size are important, with appearance as a secondary

consideration in the higher grades. Defects, therefore, will be admitted in the various grades primarily in accordance with their effect upon the

strength of the piece.

Grades.—No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and

No. 3 common.

Lengths.—Standard lengths shall be 6 to 20 feet, inclusive, in multiples of 2 feet, admitting 10 per

cent of 6 to 8 foot lengths.

Special provisions.—Material 2 by 14 inches and

wider and 23^ inches and thicker by 6 inches and

wider may be dressed to standard sizes either green or commercially dry.

Material rough, green, or dry shall be not more

than }4 inch scant in thickness or width. The amount of crook and cup permissible shall be the same as allowed in No. 1 and No. 2 common

boards. Miscut material which is not more than % inch

scant of the standard dressed size may be per- mitted provided the piece shall be free from other

defects at the point of miscut. No. 1 common dimension, heavy joists, and

small timbers must be suitable for high-class construction purposes without waste and will admit

any of the defects or their equivalent allowed in No. 1 common boards, and, in addition, will allow knots toward the center of the piece one and onehalf times the maximum size knot of similar character permitted in No. 1 common boards and wane

equivalent to one-third the thickness, one-fourth the width, and one-third the length of the piece. No. 2 common dimension, heavy joists, and small timbers must be suitable for use for ordinary construction, without waste, and will admit any of the

defects or their equivalent allowed in No. 2 common

boards, and, in addition, will allow knots toward

the center of the piece one and one-half times the maximum size knot of similar character permitted

in No. 2 common boards and wane equivalent to

one-half the thickness and one-third the width of the piece. No. 3 common dimension, heavy joists, and small timbers will admit all pieces falling below the grade

of No. 2 common but which are suitable for use as cheap building material or for crating purposes without a waste to exceed 25 per cent of each piece. California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for dimension lumber,

May 1, 1926. DIMENSION Lumber manufactured in standard stock sizes for use in construction where strength, stiffness, and

uniformity of size are essential shall be considered

as dimension and graded under the following rules:

Standard Sizes Thickness and width conform to American Lumber Standards, 411.0, lumber classification, except

23^-inch thickness board measure is not included. Standard lengths shall be 8 feet and up in multiples of 2 feet. Standard Grades No. 1 dimension. This grade must consist of sound stock, well manufactured, and suitable for all ordinary con- 110
TIMBER AND OTHEE UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.43

struction purposes without waste. It will admit

sound knots, which may be approximately 13^ inches

in diameter in a 2 by 4; 2 inches in a 2 by 6; 23^

inches in a 2 by 8; and 3 inches in 2 by 10 and wider. Smaller defective knots and branch or spike knots

which do not weaken the piece more than the above

knots may also be admitted. Wane one-third the

thickness, one-third the width, and one-third the

length, or a proportionate amount on both edges

for a shorter distance will be allowed. In any case, one side and two edges should allow a good nailing

surface. Stain, heavy pitch, pitch pockets, season checks, one straight split in the end not exceeding the width of the piece, a few scattered wormholes, torn

grain, or occasional skips in dressing due to a slight variation in sawing will be allowed. A piece may

have a crook of 1 inch (providing it does not all occur near the end) in 2 by 4 by 16 and 3^8 inch less in each additional 2 inches. Pieces longer or shorter than 16 feet may have crook in proportion.

A serious combination of above defects will not be

permitted in any one piece. No. 2 dimension. This grade shall be suitable for use in a cheaper

class of construction than No. 1 dimension. It will allow large coarse knots which should not be larger

than 23^ inches in diameter in a 2 by 4; 3 inches in a 2 by 6, and one-half the width in 2 by 8 and wider. Loose, unsound, and spike knots and an occasional knot hole if they are smaller and do not weaken the

piece more than the above-described knots may be

admitted. Considerable wane or decayed sap

leaving a fair nailing surface the full length, shake,

wormholes, dozy streaks, large pitch pockets, a

small amount of hard rot, straight close split not

exceeding one-fourth the length of piece, or other

defects that will not weaken or impair the piece to such an extent as to render it unfit for use will be

allowed. A crook of not more than 2 inches in a

2 by 4 by 16, and ^ inch less in each additional 2 inches in width will also be allowed. Lengths

longer or shorter than 16 feet may contain crook in proportion to the above. A variation of not more than 3^ of an inch in width and thickness will be allowed, providing the

piece is sound and strong at the point where vari- ation occurs. A serious combination of the above defects will not be allowed in any one piece. No. 8 dimension. This grade will admit all defects allowed in No. 2 dimension but in a much more pronounced form.

It will admit large, coarse, loose, and unsound

knots and knot holes, a great deal of shake, any

number of wormholes, soft or firm rot, a large

amount of wane, decayed sap, splits, and crooks. A piece may have a combination of the above

defects providing it is not rendered unsuitable as a whole for cheap and temporary construction; or it may have 25 per cent of waste, providing the balance

of piece is of No. 2 dimension quality in not over two

pieces.

This is the lowest recognized grade of dimension

and is recommended for temporary construction

or crating purposes only.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for dimension lumber, January, 1927. CYPRESS TURNING SQUARES

Sizes.—4 by 4 inches, 5 by 5 inches, 6 by 6 inches 7 by 7 inches, and 8 by 8 inches. Lengths.—8 feet and over. Turning squares will admit bright sapwood one- fourth the width on two faces and may contain five 24-inch sound knots or their equivalent and other

defects which will be removed in turning the square

to a size ^ inch less than the rough size. Squares.

Grades.—First and seconds, No. 1 common, sound, No. 2 common, and No. 3 common.

Sizes.—3 by 3, 4 by 4, 5 by 5, 6 by 6, 7 by 7, 8 by 8, 9 by 9, 10 by 10, and 12 by 12. In the grades of firsts and seconds and sounds, onethird of the pieces may have wane on one corner that will be removed in turning the square to its working size. Splits not exceeding 6 inches in length in one end

in the grades of first and seconds and sound shall not be considered defects; splits longer than 6 inches

shall not be admitted in these grades.

Walnut, cherry, and red gum squares will not admit more sapwood than will be removed in turning the square to its working size. Squares, in other woods,

will admit any amount of bright sapwood. Sound

stain shall not be considered a defect in sap gum and

cottonwood, nor in No. 1 common tupelo, black gum, and magnolia. Heart center shall not be admitted in the grades

of first and seconds and sound and in the cuttings

of the common grades.

First and Seconds Lengths.—8 to 16 feet. Sound standard defects will be admitted according

to the size of the square, as follows: 3 by 3, 4 by 4, and 5 by 5_ 1 sound standard defect. 6 by 6 and 7 by 7 2 sound standard defects. 8 by 8 and 9 by 9 3 sound standard defects. 10 by 10 and over 4 sound standard defects. No. 1 common.

Slight stain is no defect in this grade.

Lengths.—6 to 16 feet. No. 1 common must work 66% per cent in cuttings 2 feet or over long, by the full size of the square; three sides of each cutting must be clear; the fourth

side may have one sound standard defect or its equivalent.

Sound.

Lengths.—8 to 16 feet. Sound stain shall not be considered a defect. Sound squares must work sound full length. No. 2 common.

Lengths.—6 to 16 feet. No. 2 common squares must work 50 per cent sound in cuttings 2 feet or over long, by the full size of the square. Ill
402.43 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 3 common.

Lengths.—4 to 16 feet. No. 3 common squares must work 25 per cent sound in cuttings 2 feet or over long, by the full size of the square.STANDARD TURNING SQUARES

Standard sizes are 3^ inch to 23^ inches in multiples of 3^ inch; and 23^ inches to 5 inches in multiples of 34 inch. Standard lengths are 18 to 24 inches in multiples

of 1 inch and 24 inches and over in multiples of 2

inches, but there must not be more than 20 per cent

of 24 inches and shorter. Standard grades are No. 1 and No. 2, which are combined as one grade unless otherwise specified.

The combined grade must not contain more than

30 per cent of No. 2. Standard turning squares must be sawn full size and length when shipping dry. Oversize variation

of not more than 3^ inch shall be allowed. Squares

having an oversize variation of more than }/g inch

shall be classed as miscut. Wane or other defects that will be removed in turning the square to its working size shall not be

considered as defects. End checks not exceeding

3^ inch in length will not be considered as defects. Sapwood is no defect unless otherwise specified.

No heart center will be admitted.

Otherwise No. 1 standard turning squares must

be clear. No. 2 standard turning squares will ad- mit one sound ^-inch knot or its equivalent for each 18 inches of the length of the piece.

Select dimension. This grade is the same as select car stock and will include any hardwood specified. For select car stock see 413.23. Comm.on dimension. This grade will include any hardwood specified,

and is the same as freight-car stock, except that

4 by 4 inches and larger will admit firm tight heart boxed or showing on one face in 25 per cent of the

pieces; hearts should be boxed in 6 by 6 inches and

larger. Sizes of 2 and 3 inches must be practically

free from heart. For freight-car stock see 413.23. Bridge plank. Widths.—6 inches and over. Lengths.—8 feet and over. Grades.—No. 1 and No. 2. Two inches and thicker may be 34 inch scant in thickness unless otherwise specified. No. 1. One face and two edges must be sound, except

that slight wane as defined in the term of "good

edge" (see 400.30) will be admitted and firm heart center, pin, shot, and spot wormhoies and

an occasional grub or knot hole will be admitted.

The reverse side will admit defects that do not

seriously impair the strength or prevent the use of the piece for purposes of strength in its full width

and length.

No. 2. No. 2 must work 75 per cent in cuttings 2 feet or over long by the full width of the piece. Each

cutting will admit the same defects as No. 1. No.

2 will admit pieces 4 to 6 feet long that otherwise

grade No. 1. Crossing -plank. Widths.—6 inches and over. Lengths.—8 feet and over. Two inches and thicker may be 34 inch scant

in thickness except when otherwise specified. One

face and two edges must be sound, except that

slight wane as defined in ''good edge" (see 400.30), firm tight heart, pin, shot, and spot wormhoies, and

an occasional grub or knot hole, will be admitted.

The reverse side may contain defects that do not

seriously impair the strength or prevent the use of the piece for purposes of strength in its full width

and length.

North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), grading

rules for dimension lumber, January 1, 1927. DIMENSION AND HEAVY JOISTS Grades. No. 1 common.

Sound and square edge. No. 2 common.

No. 3 common.

Lengths.

Standard lengths are 4 to 16 feet, inclusive, in multiples of 2 feet except that 9 and 11 foot shall be

standard in 2 by 4, 6, and 8 inches, 13-foot in 2 by 8 and 10 inches, and 15-foot in 2 by 10 inches. Lengths shorter than 10 feet shall not be included

in miscellaneous or mixed length shipments of No.

1 and No. 2 common, except by agreement; 20 per

cent of 6 and 8-foot lengths may be permitted in No. 3 common.

Special provisions.

Heavy joists 2 by 14<inches and wider and 23^

inches and thicker by 6 inches and wider may be

worked S1S1E, S1S2E, S2S1E, or S4E to standard

sizes, either green or commercially drj\

Heavy joists. Heavy joists, rough, green, or dry, must not be more than 34 inch scant in thickness or width. The grading of dimension and heavy joists is a

question of strength and uniformity of size, with appearance a secondary consideration; and defects, therefore, will be admitted in the various grades,

primarily, in accordance with their effect upon the

strength of the piece. No. 1 common dimension and heavy joists. No. 1 common dimension and heavy joists must

be suitable for use without waste as substantial

structural material, and will admit the following

defects or their equivalent; any number of sound,

encased, and pith knots, the average diameter of any one knot not to exceed 2 inches in 2 by 4's, and in wider stock, not to exceed approximately

one-third of the cross section of the piece, in the 112
TIMBER AND OTHEE UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.43

rough, at any point throughout its length if located

at the edge, nor more than one-half the cross sec- tion if located away from the edge; unsound, loose, or hollow knots, one-half the diameter of maximum

size sound knots permitted; surface or through

checks; a limited number of medium wormholes,

well scattered; loosened or torn grain, or other machine defects which will not cause waste; pitch

pockets; pitch; pith; splits in end that do not

exceed in length the width of the piece; firm red

heart; stain; wane, one-half the thickness, one- quarter the width, and one-third the length of the

piece.

Sound and square edge. Dimension shall embrace all sizes from 13^-inch

to under 6-inch in thickness by 4-inch and over in width, for example: 13^-inch, 2-inch, 2}£-inch, 2^-inch, 3-inch, 334-inch, 33^-inch, 4-inch, 434-inch, 43^-inch, 5-inch, 534-inch, 53^-inch, 5M-inch by

4-inch and over in width. Small timbers shall embrace all sizes 6-inch and

up in thickness, by 6-inch and up in width, for example: 6 by 6 inches, 6 by 7 inches, 7 by 7

inches, 7 by 8 inches, 8 by 9 inches, and up. Must be well manufactured, full to sizes, and saw butted, except 25 per cent may be j% inch

scant in thickness and/or H inch scant in width,

and shall be free from the following defects: Wane,

rot unsound, loose and hollow knots, wormholes

and knot holes, through shakes or round shakes

that show on the surface, except as hereinafter provided for. A through shake is hereby defined to be through

or connected from side to side, or edge to edge, or side to edge.

Wane may be allowed one-eighth of the width of the piece measured across face of wane, and extending one-fourth of the length of the piece on one

corner or its equivalent on two or more corners, provided that not more than 10 per cent of the

pieces in one size shall show such wane. Knots otherwise sound but containing twig holes not more than z/% inch in diameter not to be considered defects. Knots having decayed surface not

over 1 inch in diameter and % inch deep not to be

considered defects. Large or branch knots no defect if sound, unless bunched or so frequent as to materially impair the

strength of the piece.

A limited amount of pin wormholes well scat- tered in sound sap not to be considered a defect. Blue or stained sap if sound, no defect. In the measurement of dressed lumber, the width

and thickness of the lumber before dressing must

be taken. No. 2 common dimension and heavy joists. No. 2 common dimension and heavy joists must

be suitable for use without waste, and will admit

the following defects or their equivalent; knots not

necessarily sound, the average diameter of any one knot not to exceed approximately one-half the

cross section of the piece, in the rough, at any

point throughout its length if located at the edge, nor more than two-thirds of the cross section if located away from the edge; loose, hollow, or decayed knots, and knot holes, one-half the diameter

of maximum size knots permitted; through checks;

large wormholes; deep torn grain, or other machine

defects; through pitch pockets; pitch; pith; through

shakes; splits or streaks of advanced decay, not to exceed one-quarter the length of the piece; unsound

red heart; stain; wane. Miscut or mismanufactured common stock 2

inches and thicker, which is not more than 3^8 inch scant of standard, dressed thickness or width, shall be admitted in No. 2 common, provided such pieces

are, in all other respects, as good as No. 1 common

at point of miscut. No. 3 common dimension. No. 3 common dimension will include all pieces

falling below the grade of No. 2 common which

are suitable for use as cheap building material with- out wasting more than 25 per cent of each piece of one-third of the number of pieces in any item of a

shipment, but it must not be more than 3^ inch scant of standard finished width nor more than

% inch scant of standard finished thickness. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for hemlock and tamarack

dimension lumber, February 1, 1927. RUIES FOR GRADING HEAVY JOISTS Heavy joists shall include material larger than

dimension, as described below, and smaller or wider

than timbers as described under the rules for grading

timbers (412.1). It will be manufactured in sizes as specified, and be graded, as follows: No. 1 common 4 by 8 inches and wider plank, and 6 by 10 inches and wider -plank. The grade of No. 1 common will admit of the

following defects: Shake, both shell and loose, that does not impair the strength of the piece; also knots, bla^k or red, round or horn shape. If sound and

well scattered in size up to 3 inches, also wane on

one or two corners for one-third length extending over back of piece 13^ inches on one end or its equivalent for full length of piece. Open-heart

checks on one side for one-half length of piece. No. 2 common 4 by 8 inches and wider plank, and 6 by 10 inches and wider plank.

This grade will admit of all defects known in the No. 1 common grade except they are more pro- nounced and not necessarily sound. Defects, such

as shake, large, unsound knots, loose knots, cross checks, wane, but not a serious combination of these

defects are admissible in any one piece. Openheart checks full length of piece, unsound streaks scattered over face of piece for two-thirds length. DIMENSION OR PIECE STUFF Lumber manufactured at the sawmill in standard

sizes for use where strength, stiffness, and uniformity of size are essential, shall be graded as dimension

or piece stuff. It is usually 2 inches in thickness,

occasionally thicker, and 2 inches and up in width.

113
402.43 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Thicknesses and widths. Two-inch dimension either SIS and IE, SIS and

2E, S2S and IE, or S4S shall be dressed to the "extra standard" thickness of 1M inches and to the

following standard widths:

Nominal width

board measure

(inches) Dressed width

3 __. (Inches) 2%

4

68 m 10 __ 12.

Standard thickness for 3-inch dimension 2i$ inch

less than nominal thickness. Rough 2-inch dimension shall conform to the

extra standard rough thickness specified in American

Lumber Standards 411.0, yard lumber for rough-dry

sizes. The rough standard widths shall be as the widths

of common boards, finish and dimension, rough and

commercially dry, 7 inches and narrower, shall be

not more than }4 mch less than the nominal widths;

widths 8 to 12 inches (board measure) shall be not more than % inch less than the nominal widths; and widths of 13 inches and wider (board measure)

shall be not more than 3^2 mch less than the nominal

widths. These widths shall also apply to stock widths shipments of lumber, dressed on one or two

sides. Pieces narrower than above should be

counted as next lower standard width and not reduced in grades.

Lengths,

The standard lengths of dimension shall be 4 to 24 feet. Grades. No. 1 common, No. 2 common, No. 3 common,

No. 4 common, and No. 5 common.

In the grading of dimension, strength, stiffness, and uniformity of size are important, with appear- ance as a secondary consideration in the higher

grades. Defects, therefore, will be admitted in the

various grades primarily in accordance with their

effect upon the strength of the piece. No. 1 common dimension. The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot lengths shall be permissible in No. 1 common

dimension and heavy joists. 4-inch widths 13^-inch crook.

6-inch widths l^-inch crook. 8-inch widths l^-inch crook. 10-inch widths l^-inch crook. 12-inch widths 1-inch crook. In No. 2 common, crook ^ inch more than the above is permissible. In either grade pieces longer

or shorter than 16 feet may have proportionate

amount of crook.

Lengths.—8 to 24 feet.

Knots.—Sound, red spiked knots that do not weaken the piece. Any number of tight round

knots, black or red not larger than 2 inches in 2 by

4 and 2 by 6, 3 by 4 and 3 by 6; 23^ inches in 2 by

8 and 2 by 10, 3 by 8 and 3 by 10; 3 inches in 2 by

12 and 3 by 12, or wider. Surface checks.—That do not weaken the piece. Shake.—Tight shake not extending through. Torn grain.—That does not weaken the piece.

Machine gouge.—Not affecting strength or utility. Water stain.—Not to exceed 5 per cent of the

area. Wane.—Not to exceed 1 inch wide on the face in 4 inches and 6-inch stock and inches wide on

the face in wider stock for one-third the thickness and one-third the length of the piece, or if shorter may go deeper, but not so deep at the ends of the

piece as to prevent toe nailing for joist or studding.

Split.—One straight split in the end not to exceed one and one-half times the width of the piece. General.—Suitable for use without waste as substantial structural material. A serious combination

of these defects must not be permitted in any one

piece. No. 2 common dimension.

Lengths.—8 to 24 feet. Knots.—Not necessarily sound, and not to exceed approximately one-third the cross section of the

piece in the rough. Spike knots that do not weaken the piece. Knot holes.—Loose, hollow, or decayed knots, and

one knot hole limited as follows: 1^-inch in 2 by 4. 2-inch in 2 by 6. 23^-inch in 2 by 8 and 2 by 10. 3-inch in 2 by 12. Or two knot holes one-half that size. Torn grain.—Not over three-fourths the length

of the piece. Shake.—Fine shake not over two-thirds the length

of the piece, or tight through shake, not over onehalf the length of the piece. Season checks.—Medium season checks if running

parallel with the edge of the piece. Water stain.—Not to exceed one-half the width

by one half the length.

Split.—One split in the end, not to exceed in length

twice the width of the piece. Wane.—Not to exceed one-fourth the width, onehalf the thickness by one-half the length, or if shorter

in length may go deeper but not so deep as to show

on the opposite face or on the corners so as to prevent

toe nailing for joist or studding.

Rot.—A small patch or streak of soft that does not go through or seriously weaken the piece. No. 3 common dimension.

Lengths.—8 to 24 feet. Knots.—Large round or spiked knots not necessarily sound, the average diameter of any one knot

not to exceed approximately one third the cross section of the piece in the rough.

114
TIMBEE AND OTHEE UNMANUFACTURED OE PAETLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402,43

Loose hollow or decayed knots and any number of knot holes not to exceed in diameter the size of knots

specified for No. 1 common if located away from the edge of the piece, or smaller holes on the edge. Shakes.—Tight or through two thirds the length

of the piece. Torn grain.—Excessive torn grain that does not

impair the usefulness of the piece. Rot.—Firm or soft that does not impair the usefulness of the piece or prevent toe nailing, or nail- ing lath or sheathing. Water stain.—That does not impair the usefulness

of the piece. Wane.—Not to exceed one-third the width, onehalf the thickness by two-thirds the length of the

piece, or if shorter may go deeper but not so deep on the edges or corners as to prevent toe nailing

for joists or studding.

General.—The stock must be suitable for use for ordinary construction where strength is not the

principal factor. No. 4 common dimension.

Lengths. —4 feet and longer; 30 per cent, 8 feet and shorter; can contain all the stock below No. 3 dimension that will resaw into No. 4 boards. No. 5 common dimension.

All stock below No. 4 that will stand one handling.

Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for dimension lumber, April 15, 1925. The grading rules for No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 dimension are the same as the rules of this associa- tion for timbers (412.1). SELECT COMMON

Select common is a special grade of dimension

lumber and is the best or high line type selected out of No. 1 dimension.

It shall be of dimension sizes, and of a smooth common appearance on the face side. White sap shall not be considered a defect in this grade.

A slight amount of shake may show on the face when not in combination with other marked defects. A slight amount of stain is admissible on the face and any amount of sound, stained sap on the back. Any quantity of sound knots, red or black, that do not give too coarse an appearance to the piece are admissible. The face of the piece should be practically free from wane, while the back may show a moderate

amount, as well as other defects.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules for dimension lumber, Schedule M, 1925. Port Orford cedar merchantable. Under 2 inches in thickness. This grade shall consist of sound, strong lumber, well manufactured

and suitable for good substantial constructional

purposes, free from loose or rotten knots, knot holes, shakes, rot or other defects which materially impair

the strength of the piece,

Will allow occasional variations in sawing, sound

knots, bark seams and burls, the dimensions of which are to be considered in connection with the

size of the piece and bright sap one-half the width

or its equivalent.

Two inches and thicker, but not including 10 by

10 or larger to conform to merchantable grade for Douglas fir with the exception that knots and bark seams and/or bark burls characteristic of the species

and moderate wane permitted.

Ten by ten and larger to conform to merchantable

grade for Douglas fir with the exception that knots and bark seams and/or bark burls characteristic of the species permitted. Will allow a split or check

in one end not longer than the width of the piece

or the equivalent in two ends, bright sap, wane not

exceeding 2 inches in 10 by 10, varying up to 4

inches in 24 by 24 measured across the corner, or equivalent on two or more corners, for one-fourth the length. Discoloration through exposure to the elements and moderate seasoning checks shall not be deemed

defects excluding lumber from this grade, if other- wise conforming to merchantable grade. Defects

in all cases to be considered in connection with the

size of the piece and its general quality. Port Orford cedar common. Must be well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing any number of large

sound knots, well distributed, decayed knots or knot holes not to exceed one-fourth the width of the face in which they occur; well distributed small decayed spots, a limited number of wormholes,

moderate heart shake or wane, any amount of bright or discolored sap. A serious combination of above defects not permitted in any one piece. Defects in all cases to be considered in connection

with the size of the piece and its general quality.

Douglas fir merchantable. This grade shall consist of sound, strong lumber,

well manufactured and suitable for good substantial constructional purposes, free from loose or rotten

knots, knot holes, shakes, rot or other defects which

materially impair the strength of the piece. Will allow ocasional variations in sawing, sound

knots, pitch pockets and pitch blisters, the dimensions of which are to be considered in connection

with the size of the piece, and sap one-half the width

or its equivalent. In sizes 6 by 12 and larger, intended for remanufacturing purposes and so indicated at time order is placed, a grade of lumber may be shipped which

will admit of pieces in which strength values as a

whole night be impaired by some localized major

defect. Provided that material so described would

in other respects grade higher than merchantable

except for the major defect which otherwise would

also exclude it from the grade of merchantable. This grade will be shipped only when special agree- ment is made, and should be marked for identifi- cation,

115
402.43 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

In timbers 10 by 10 inches and larger a split or check in one end not over the width of the piece

will be allowed. Sap shall not be considered a defect, and wane not exceeding 2 inches in 10 by 10

inches and varying up to 4 inches on 24 by 24 inches measured across one corner, or the equivalent on

two or more corners, for one-quarter the length will be allowed.

General.—Defects in all cases to be considered in connection with the size of the piece and its general

quality. Discoloration through exposure to the elements. Discolored sap other than black sap and seasoning checks shall not be deemed defects excluding lumber

from this grade, if otherwise conforming to merchantable grade.

Douglas fir common.

This grade shall consist of a quality suitable for ordinary constructional purposes. Defects to be

considered in connection with the size of the piece. Will allow occasional variations in sawing, bright,

stained, or discolored sap, a limited amount of heart stain, large knots, large pitch pockets and

pitch blisters, and a reasonable amount of wane.

Discoloration through exposure to the elements and

seasoning checks shall not be deemed defects ex- cluding lumber from this grade if otherwise con- forming to the grade of common.

In 10 by 10 inch wane not exceeding 3 inches and

varying up to 6 inches in 24 by 24 inches measured

across one corner or the equivalent on two or more

corners allowed, also a split or check not over twice

the width of the piece when appearing in one end

' or its equivalent in both ends. Douglas fir rough green clears. Defects based on 8-inch widths 12 feet long. Defects in all cases to be considered in connection

with the size of the piece and its general quality. No. 2 clear and better edge grain. No. 2 clear and better edge grain, under 3 inches

thick, must be sound lumber, well manufactured.

Angle grain to be within the angle of 45° from

vertical. Will allow occasional variations in sawing,

light-colored sap one-quarter the width; in addition, will allow on face side, which is the best side, narrow pitch pockets each not over 4 inches in length, if not extending through the thickness of the piece and on the reverse face, tight knots up

to and including % inch in diameter, if not in

clusters, and/or narrow pitch pockets each not

over 4 inches in length if not extending through

the thickness of the piece or equivalent defects, allowed on both faces. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and corresponding

half of edges. Widths 10 inches and wider must

show edge grain for at least two-thirds of the face width. Slight seasoning checks no defect. Dimensions 3 inches and up. Dimensions 3 inches and up, but not including 5 inches thick, must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Angle of grain to be within the angle

of 45° from vertical. Will allow occasional variations in sawing light-colored sap, one-third the width; in addition, will allow on the face side which is the best side and corresponding half of edges narrow pitch pockets, each not over 6 inches

in length, if not extending through the thickness of the piece and on the reverse face and corresponding

half of edges, tight knots up to and including 13^

inches in diameter, if not in clusters, varying

according to the size of the piece and/or narrow

pitch pockets each not over 6 inches long if not

extending through the thickness of the piece, or equivalent defects on both faces. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and

corresponding half of edges. Edge grain must

show for at least two-thirds of the face width.

Slight seasoning checks no defect. One split or check not over the width of piece allowed. Dimensions 5 inches and thicker. Dimensions 5 inches and thicker must be sound

lumber, well manufactured. Angle of grain to be

within the angle of 45° from vertical. Will allow

occasional variations in sawing, light-colored sap

one-third the width, and, in addition, will allow on the face side, which is the best side and corre- sponding half of edges narrow pitch pockets not

over 6 inches in length, if not extending through

the thickness of the piece and on the reverse face and corresponding half of edges tight knots, if not

in clusters, 2 inches and less in diameter, varying

according to the size of the piece, or equivalent

defects on both faces. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and corresponding

half of edges. Edge grain must show for at least two-thirds of the face width. Slight seasoning checks no defect. One split or check not over the width of piece allowed. An occasional piece, 18

feet or longer, may contain one larger defect, showing on one or two surfaces, if so placed that, by

cutting it out, the shortest cutting will be 8 feet or longer, provided balance of piece is practically

free from other defects. No. 2 clear and better fiat grain, under 8 inches. No. 2 clear and better flat grain, under 3 inches

in thickness, must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing, light-colored sap, one-quarter the width and

three-quarters the thickness or its equivalent; in addition, will allow on face side, which is the best

side, narrow pitch pockets and or pitch blisters, each not over 4 inches in length, if not extending

through the thickness of the piece and on the reverse

face tight knots, if not in clusters, not over 3^ inch

in diameter in 1-inch stock and varying according

to the thickness of the piece, up to 1 inch, and/or

pitch pockets and/or pitch blisters, each not over

4 inches in length when not extending through the

thickness of the piece, or equivalent defects on both

faces. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear

feet on each face and corresponding half of edges.

Edge grain may be included at shipper's option.

116
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.43

Dimensions 8 inches and up to but not including 5

inches thick. Dimension 3 inches and up to but not including

5 inches thick must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing,

light-colored sap one-third the width and three- quarters the thickness or its equivalent; in addition,

will allow on the face side, which is the best side, and corresponding half of edges narrow pitch pockets

and/or pitch blisters, each not over 6 inches in length,

if not extending through the thickness of the piece

and on the reverse face and corresponding half of edges tight knots up to and including l

1^ inches in diameter, if not in clusters, varying according to the

size of the piece and/or narrow pitch pockets and/or

pitch busters, each not over 6 inches in length, if not extending through the thickness of the piece, or equivalent defects on both faces. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and cor- responding half of edges. Slight seasoning checks no defect. One split or check not over the width of the piece allowed. Edge grain may be included at

shipper's option.

Dimensions 5 inches and thicker. Dimensions 5 inches and thicker must be sound

lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional

variation in sawing, light-colored sap one-third the width of piece and three-quarters the thickness, or

its equivalent; in addition, will allow on the face

side, which is the best side, and corresponding half

of edges narrow pitch pockets, and/or pitch blisters each not over 6 inches in length if not extending

through the thickness of the piece, and on the reverse

face and corresponding half of edges tight knots, if not

in clusters, 2 inches and less in diameter, varying

according to the size of the piece, or equivalent

defects on both faces. Three defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and corresponding

half of edges. Slight seasoning checks no defect. One split or check not over the width of piece al- lowed. An occasional piece 18 feet or longer, may

contain one larger defect, showing on one or two

surfaces, if so placed that, by cutting it out the

shortest cutting will be 8 feet or longer provided

balance of piece is practically free from other defects. In sizes 8 by 8 inches and larger boxed hearts are admissible provided material of this description is not coarse grained. Edge grain may be included at

shipper's option. No. 3 clear edge grain and/or flat grain. No. 3 clear edge grain and/or flat grain at shipper's

option, under 3 inches thick. Defects based on 10- inch widths, 12 feet long. To be graded from best

face.. The defects on the reverse face to be only

slightly in excess of those allowed on the best face. Must be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations in sawing. Slightly stained or discolored sap or heart one-third the width or its equivalent. Bright sap no defect. In

addition, will allow sound and tight knots up to 1 inch or narrow pitch pockets, and/or pitch blisters, each not over 4 inches long (an occasional 6-inch

pitch pocket and/or pitch blister, may be included)

or one split or check not over width of piece or its equivalent in both ends. Four defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and corresponding

half of edges.

Dimensions 3 inches thick up to, but not including 5

inches thick. To be graded from best face, the defects on the

reverse face to be only slightly in excess of those allowed on the best face. Must be sound lumber

well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations

in sawing, slightly stained or discolored sap or heart

one-third the width or its equivalent. Bright sap no defect. In addition, will allow sound and tight knots up to 1}£ inches or narrow pitch pockets and/

or pitch blisters, each not over 6 inches long (an oc- casional 8-inch pitch pocket and/or pitch blister, may

be included) or one split or check not over width of piece or its equivalent in both ends. Slight seasoning checks no defect. Four defects allowed for each

12 linear feet on each face and corresponding half

of edges.

Dimensions 5 inches and thicker. To be graded from best face. The defects on the

reverse face to be only slightly in excess of those allowed on the best face. Must be sound lumber

well manufactured. Will allow occasional variations

in sawing. Slightly stained or discolored sap or

heart, one-third the width or its equivalent. Bright

sap no defect. In addition, will allow sound and

tight knots up to 13^ inches or narrow pitch pockets

and/or pitch blisters, each not over 6 inches long

(an occasional 8-inch pitch pocket and/or pitch

blister may be included) or one split or check not

over width of piece or its equivalent in both ends.

Slight seasoning checks no defect. An occasional

piece 18 feet or longer may contain one larger defect showing on one or two surfaces if so placed

that, by cutting it out, the shortest cutting will be

8 feet or longer provided that balance of piece is practically free from other defects. Four defects allowed for each 12 linear feet on each face and

corresponding half of edges. In sizes 8 by 8 and

larger boxed hearts are admissible, provided

material of this description is not coarse grained. Western red cedar merchantable. Must be of strong character. Shall be well manufactured and free from all injurious knots and

knot holes. Occasional variation in sawing allowed. Will admit a small amount of wane, a small amount

of heart shake or one or two small rotten spots not over inch deep will also be admitted, pro- vided they do not affect the strength of the piece.

It is understood, however, that a combination of these defects will not be admitted in any one piece,

which must be consistent with the species suitable

for good substantial constructional purposes. Common.

Occasional variation in sawing allowed. Will admit any number of sound knots, loose knots; knot holes, not more than one-third the width of the piece, when not less than 4 feet apart, a limited 117
402.43 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

number of wormholes, heart shake, or wane in moderation, small rotten spots or a streak of rot \}Ai inches wide, 3^ inch deep, and not over 3 feet long.

A combination of these defects will not be admitted

in any one piece which must be usable full length

without waste and suitable for ordinary constructional purposes. Merchantable green. Shall consist of lengths 6 to 24 feet and longer,

regardless of grain and conforming to the grade of merchantable before milling. Imperfect edges,

such as knots torn out in machining and occasional scant tongue not less than Y% inch, shall not exclude lumber from this grade. Slightly discolored sap no

defect. Common Pacific hemlock. This grade shall consist of a quality suitable for ordinary constructional purposes. Defects to be

considered in connection with the size of the piece. Will allow occasional variations in sawing, bright,

stained, or discolored sap, a limited amount of heart

stain, large bright and/or black knots, large bark

pockets, a small amount of heart shake that does not

affect the strength of the piece and a reasonable amount of wane. Discoloration through exposure

to the elements and seasoning checks shall not be

deemed defects excluding lumber from this grade if otherwise conforming to the grade of common.

In 10 by 10 inches wane not exceeding 3 inches and varying up to 6 inches in 24 by 24 inches measured across one corner or the equivalent on two or more corners allowed, also a split or check

not over twice the width of the piece when appearing

in one end or its equivalent in both ends. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers' Association,

grading rules for dimension lumber, August 1, 1925. PLANE

Standard Nominal thicknesses Thick- Finished widths S1E and

(inches) nesses S2E

SIS or S2S

Inches

2 m 2V2 2 to 7 inches, AS inch off. 3 2%

zy2 m 8 inches and wider, H inch off. 4

Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. Extra standard 2-inch SIS or S2S to 1% inches. Widths same as standard. No. 1 common.

Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and tight knots approximately:

1}4 inches in 4 and 6 inch widths.

2 inches in 8-inch widths. 23^ inches in 10-inch widths.

3 inches in 12-inch widths. Vyi inches in 14-inch widths. 33^ inches in wider widths.

Will also admit spike knots which do not weaken

the piece more than knots above specified; checks,

pin wormholes, limited; sap stain, 15 per cent of face. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading

rules for dimension lumber, September 1, 1925. DIMENSION AND HEAVY JOISTS Grades. No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and No. 3 common.

Lengths.

Standard lengths are 4 to 24 feet, inclusive, in multiples of 2 feet; except that 9 to 11 foot shall be standard in 2 by 4 inches, 6 inches and 8 inches, 13 foot in 2 by 8 inches and 10 inches, and 15 foot

in 2 by 10 inches. Lengths shorter than 10 feet

shall not be included in miscellaneous or mixedlength shipments of No. 1 and No. 2 common,

except by agreement; 20 per cent of 6 and 8 foot lengths may be permitted in No. 3 common.

Special 'provisions. Heavy joists 2 by 14 inches and wider and 2Y2

inches and thicker by 6 inches and wider may be

worked S1S1E, S1S2E, S2S1E, or S4S to standard

sizes, either green or commercially dry.

Heavy joists, rough, green, or dry, must not be more than }/i inch scant in thickness or width. The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot

lengths, shall be permissible in No. 1 common

dimension and heavy joists: 4-inch widths 13^-inch crook. 6-inch widths 1^-inch crook. 8-inch widths 1 34-inch crook. 10-inch widths 13^-inch crook. 12-inch widths 1-inch crook. In No. 2 common, crook Y2 inch more than the above is permissible. In either grade, pieces longer

or shorter than 16 feet may have proportionate amounts of crook. The grading of dimension and heavy joists is a

question of strength and uniformity of size, with appearance a secondary consideration; and defects, therefore, will be admitted in the various grades,

primarily, in accordance with their effect upon the

strength of the piece. No. 1 common dimension and heavy joists. The grading rules for No. 1 common dimension

and heavy joists are the same as the grading rules of the North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.) 402.43 for No. 1 common dimension and heavy

joists. No. 2 common dimension and heavy joists. The grading rules for No. 2 common dimension

and heavy joists are the same as the grading rules of the North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.) 402.43 for No. 2 common dimension and heavy

joists. No. 3 common dimension. The grading rules for No. 3 common dimension

are the same as the grading rules of the North

Carolina Pine Association (Inc.) 402.43 for No. 3 common dimension.

118
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.43

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for cypress dimension lumber, June

15, 1925. Turning squares.

Sizes.—4 by 4 inches to 8 by 8 inches. Length.—8 feet and longer. Will admit one-quarter their size in sap on one

corner, showing on two faces, and may contain one to five small sound knots. Southern Pine Association, grading rules for dimension lumber, March 23, 1927. The grading rules of this association for the

following are the same as those of the Southeastern

Forest Products Association. (See above.)

Dimension and heavy joists. Grades.

Lengths.

Special Provisions. The grading rules of this association for the

following are the same as those of the North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.). (See above.) No. 1 common dimension and heavy joists. No. 2 common dimension and heavy joists. No. 3 common dimension.

Southern Pine Association, the Gulf coast

classification of pitch pine, grading rules for dimension, lumber, March 15, 1923. Air-dried saps.

Sizes. —

1 by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. V/L by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. 13^ by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. 1% by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. 2 by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. 2}4 by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider.

3 by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider.

Lengths.—Ten feet and up; 5 per cent 8 and 9

feet allowed. Must be air seasoned and conform to the grade

of kiln-dried saps, except that sap stain shall be

permissible if the grade face of the piece is 50 per

cent free of stain. Southern Pine Association, Gulf coast classifi- cation of pitch pine, March 15, 1923. The Gulf coast classification of pitch pine resawn lumber and sawn lumber, issued by the Southern

Pine Association, March 15, 1923, for dimension

lumber, including planks, joists, and scantling.

The grading rules, sizes, and trade names for planks are included with the grading rules, sizes, and trade names of this association for boards,

402.42. DEALS

Sizes.—

3 by 9 and wider. 4 by 9 and wider. 5 by 9 and wider.

Lengths.—Twelve feet and up; 5 per cent 10 and

11 feet allowed.

Grades. Crown, prime, Genoa prime (Rio), merchantable, square edge. Crown.—Must be one heart face, free from un- sound knots, loose knots, pith knots, knot holes, pinworm holes, grubworm holes, wane, rot, and

through splits and through shakes, except that in 15 per cent of the pieces, splits, not to exceed in length one-half the width of the piece, may be

allowed on one or both ends of the piece. Firm red

heart permissible if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. May permit pitch pockets not

exceeding li inch wide on the 9 and 10 inch widths

and inch wide on the 11-inch and up. Not to have more than one knot 13^-inch on the 3 and 4

inch and one knot 1%-inch on the 5-inch to each

6 feet or fraction thereof ; provided that 80 per cent

shall be free of knots and 100 per cent free of centers. Prime.—Must be one heart face and two-thirds heart surface on the opposite side; must be free from unsound knots, loose knots, pith knots, pin- worm holes, grubworm holes, knot holes, wane, rot, and through splits and through shakes, except that

in 15 per cent of the pieces splits, not to exceed in length one-half the width of the piece, may be

allowed on one or both ends of the piece. Will permit knots not exceeding 2 inches on the 3 and 4

inch, or 2\i inches on the 5-inch, to each 6 feet or

fraction thereof; provided that 70 per cent shall be

free of knots and 70 per cent free of centers. Firm

red heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent

of the area of the face. Genoa prime (Rio).—Must be one heart face, twothirds heart surface on the opposite side, except that

the 9-inch may have 1 inch sap on one corner of the

face or the equivalent on two corners; the 10-inch and up may have 1}^ inches of sap on one corner or the equivalent on two corners of the face. Must be

free from pith knots, unsound knots, loose knots,

knot holes, pinworm holes, grubworm holes, wane,

rot, through splits and through shakes, the length

of which exceeds the width of the piece. Firm red

heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Merchantable.—Must show two-thirds heart sur- face on two opposite sides, or the equivalent; must

be free from unsound knots, loose knots, pinworm

holes, grubworm holes, knot holes, rot, and through

shakes and through splits the length of which

exceeds the width of the piece. Firm red heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Fifteen per cent of the pieces

will permit wane 13^ inches wide measured across the face of the wane, one-quarter of the length of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners. Square edge.—Must be free from unsound knots,

loose knots, knot holes, grubworm holes, rot, and

through splits and through shakes the length of which exceeds the width of the piece. Twenty-five

per cent of the pieces will permit wane 13^ inches wide measured across the face of the wane, onethird of the length of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners. 52688°—27 9 119
402.43 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

SCANTLING

Sizes.—

2 by 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. 3 by 3, 4, 5, 6/7, and 8. 4 by 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 5 by 5, 6, 7, and 8. Lengths.—Twelve feet and up; 5 per cent 10 and

11 feet allowed.

Grades. Crown, prime, Genoa prime, merchantable, square

edge. Crown.—Must be three corners heart; must be free from unsound knots, loose knots, pith knots, knot

holes, pin wormholes, grubworm holes, rot, wane, and through splits and through shakes, but may

permit pitch pockets not exceeding \i inch in width. Firm red heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per

cent of the area of the face. The 2 by 2, 2 by 3, 2 by 4, 3 by 3, and 3 by 4 to have no knots exceeding

134 inches, the 2 by 5, 2 by 6, 3 by 5, 3 by 6, 4 by 4, 4 by 5, and 4 by 6 exceeding 13^ inches and the

other sizes exceeding 2 inches; provided that 80 per

cent shall be free of knots and 90 per cent free of centers. Prime.—Must be three corners heart; must be

free from unsound knots, loose knots, pith knots,

knot holes, pin wormholes, grubworm holes, rot, wane, and through shakes and through splits exceeding 8 inches in length. Firm red heart permissible,

if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. The 2 by 2, 2 by 3, 2 by 4, 3 by 3, and 3 by 4, to have no knots exceeding 1*4 inches, the 2 by 5, 2 by 6, 3 by 5, 3 by 6, 4 by 4, 4 by 5, and 4 by 6, exceeding V/& inches and the other sizes exceeding

2 inches. Genoa prime.—Must be one heart face and one-half heart surface on the opposite side, except that the

5-inch and under may have 1-inch sap on the heart

face and the 6-inch and up may have 13^-inch sap on the heart face. Must be free from unsound

knots, loose knots, grubworm holes, knot holes, rot, wane, and through splits and through shakes exceeding 8 inches in length. Firm red heart permissible

if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Merchantable.—Must show some heart the entire length on one face and some heart on the opposite

side. Must be free from unsound knots, loose knots,

knot holes, grubworm holes, rot, through shakes and

through splits exceeding 12 inches in length. Firm

red heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent

of the area of the face. Fifteen per cent of the pieces

will permit wane one-fourth of the width of the

piece, measured across the face of the wane, and

extending one-fourth the length of the piece on one

corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners. Square edge.—Must be free from unsound knots, loose knots, knot holes, grubworm holes, rot, through

splits and through shakes -exceeding 12 inches in length. Twenty-five per cent of the pieces will permit wane not over one-fourth of the width of the piece, measured across the face of the wane, and

extending one-third of the length of the piece on one

corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners.

DIMENSION

Sizes.—

6 by 6 and wider. 7 by 7 and wider. 8 by 8 and wider. 9 by 9 and wider. 10 by 10 and wider.

11 by 11 and wider. 12 by 12 and wider. 13 by 13 and wider, etc. Lengths.—Fourteen feet and up; 5 per cent 12 and 13 feet allowed.

Grades. Crown, prime, merchantable, square edge. Crown.—Must be heart, except sap permissible on

each corner not to exceed one-sixth the width of the widest face, measured on faces; must be free from

loose knots, unsound knots, knot holes, pith knots,

pin wormholes, grubworm holes, rot, and through

splits and shakes extending to the surface. Firm

red heart permissible, if not in excees of 15 per cent

of the area of the face on which it appears. The

6 and 7 inch must be free from knots exceeding

2 inches. Wane will be allowed one-twelfth of the width of the piece, measured across the face of the wane on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners on pieces having a 10-inch or wider

face.Prime.—All square lumber shall show two-thirds

heart on two sides and not less than one-half heart on two other sides. Other sizes shall show twothirds heart on faces and show heart two-thirds of length on edges, excepting when the width exceeds

the thickness by 3 inches or over then it shall show

heart on the edges for one-half the length. Must

be free from unsound knots, loose knots, pith knots,

knot holes, pinworm holes, grubworm holes, rot, and shakes extending to the surface. Firm red

heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face on which it appears. Ten per

cent of the pieces will permit wane one-eighth of the width of the piece, measured across the face of the wane and extending one-fourth of the length of the

piece on one corner or the equivalent on two or two or more corneis. Merchantable.—All sizes under 9 inches in width

shall show some heart the entire length on one side;

sizes 9 inches and over in width shall show some

heart the entire length on two opposite sides. Must

be free from unsound knots, loose knots, knot holes, grubworm holes, rot, and shakes extending to the

surface. Fiim red heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face on which

it appears. Fifteen per cent of the pieces will per- mit wane one-sixth of the width of the piece, measured across the face of the wane and extending

one-fourth of the length of the piece on one corner

or the equivalent on two or more corners. Square edge.—Must be free from rot, unsound

knots, loose knots, knot holes, grubworm holes, and shakes extending to the surface. Twentyfive per cent of the pieces will permit wane onefourth of the width of the piece, measured across 120
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.43

the face of the wane and extending one-third of the length of the piece on one corner or the equivalent on two or more corners. KUN-DRIED SAPS

Sizes.—

1 by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. V/i by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. 13^ by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. 1M by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. 2 by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. 23^ by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and wider. 3 by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and widei.

Lengths.—Ten feet and up; 5 per cent 8 and 9

feet allowed. May be any species of southern yellow pine.

Must be kiln-dried, bright and free from unsound

knots, loose knots, pith knots, knot holes, pinworm

holes, grubworm holes, shakes, and rot. Pitch

permissible if not in excess of one-fourth of the

area of the face; firm red heart may be permitted

under the same limitation as pitch. The 1-inch to inches thick not to have more than one 1-inch knot on the 3 and 4 inch widths, one l^-inch knot on the 5 to 7 inch widths, or one 13^-inch knot on

the 8-inch and wider, to each 6 feet or fraction

thereof; the 2 to 3 inch thick not to have more

than one 1^-inch knot on the 3 to 7 inch widths, or one 1%-inch knot on the 8 inch and wider, to each 6 feet or fraction thereof; provided that 80

per cent of the pieces shall be free of knots. Pitch

pockets over \i inch wide shall be considered equal

to a 1-inch knot. Will permit splits in ends the

length of which do not exceed the width of the

piece. Twenty per cent of the pieces will permit wane not to exceed one-twelfth the width and onehalf the thickness and extending one-sixth the

length of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners. Southern Pine Association, Gulf coast classifica- tion of pitch pine, March 15, 1923. RIVER PLATE STANDARD

Grading rules for planks are the same as the grading rules of this association for boards, 403.42.

Scantling and Deals Sizes.—

Scantling

2 by 3, 2 by 4, 2 by 5, 2 by 6. 3 by 3, 3 by 4, 3 by 5, 3 by 6, 3 by 7, 3 by 8. 4 by 4, 4 by 5, 4 by 6, 4 by 7, 4 by 8. Deals

3 by 9 and wider. 4 by 9 and wider.

Lengths.—Twelve feet and up; 5 per cent 10 and

11 feet allowed. Must be free from unsound knots, loose knots,

grub wormholes, knot holes, rot, and through splits and through shakes over 8 inches in length. Onethird of the pieces will permit wane 13^ inches wide,

provided not over one-half the thickness of the

piece, extending one-third the length of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more

corners.

WEST INDIAN (FIRST CLASS)

Scantling and Deals Sizes.—

Scantling

2 by 3, 2 by 4, 2 by 5, 2 by 6. 3 by 3 to 3 by 8. 4 by 4 to 4 by 8. Deals

3 by 9 and wider. 4 by 9 and wider.

Lengths.—Twelve feet and up; 5 per cent 10 and 11 feet allowed. Must be free from unsound knots, loose knots,

knot holes, grub worm holes, rot, through splits, and

through shakes the length of which exceeds the width of the piece. One-third of the pieces will permit wane 2 inches wide, measured across the

face of the wane and extending one-third the length

of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two

or more corners. Pieces combining coarse grain and

coarse knots, or coarse grain and numerous permissible defects shall be excluded. WEST INDIAN (SECOND CLASS)

Scantling and Deals Sizes.—

Scantling

2 by 3, 2 by 4, 2 by 5, 2 by 6. 3 by 3 to 3 by 8. 4 by 4 to 4 by 8. Deals

3 by 9 and wider. 4 by 9 and wider.

Lengths.—Twelve feet and up; 5 per cent 10 and 11 feet allowed. Will permit lumber that does not grade first class, except that through splits and through shakes over

2 feet in length, and rot extending through the

piece, shall be excluded. Will admit coarse-grained

material, sap stain, red heart, pith knots, loose knots,

unsound knots, wormholes, and wane if not over

2 inches wide measured on any face of the piece,

when not over one-third the length of the piece on

one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners. EIGHTY-FIVE PER CENT HEART The grading rules for 85 per cent heart dimension

lumber are the same as the rules of this association

for strips, 402.41. ALL HEART The grading rules for all-heart dimension lumber

are the same as the rules of this association for

strips, 402.41. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for Douglas fir, Sitka spruce, and west coast hemlock dimension lumber, July 1, 1926. Rough clears—Air dried or kiln dried, flat grain and/or

vertical grain. Defects based on 8 inches by 12 feet. In vertical grain stock, angle of grain not more than 45° from

vertical. 121
402.43 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Nominal thick- nesses (inches) Seasoned

thick- nesses Nominal widths Seasoned widths

1 —

Inches

1 H

1 1A

Inches }

2 and wider

Inches

J

2 to 3, M off.

\ 4 to 7, H off. 8 to 12, ys off. IXm2

1 Two and one-fourth and thicker Y% inch over standard dressed

sizes. Twenty per cent of shipment may be -fr inch scant of these

thicknesses. Lengths.—Multiples of 2 feet. " B and better" F. G. andIor V. G —Shall be well manufactured. Will admit slight cup; wane or other defects that will dress out in working to stand- ard finished sizes; split on end not longer than

width of piece, in 5 per cent of pieces. With the

above, will admit the following defect, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects; 3 very small (2-inch) pitch pockets, none through.

11 C" F. G. and/or V. G.—Will admit light sap

stain, 25 per cent of face; slight cup; small season- ing checks; split on end not longer than width of

piece, in 5 per cent of pieces. With any one of the

above, will admit one of the following defects, an

equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects : 2 sound and tight small knots or equivalent

of sound and tight pin knots; 4 small (4-inch) pitch

pockets, 2 of which may be through, or equivalent

of slightly larger pockets; small pitch streak. Will

also admit wane or other defects that will dress out

in working to standard finished sizes, in addition to other permissible defects. Rough green clears—F. G. and/or V. G.—In V. G.

stock, angle of grain not more than 45° from vertical. One to two inch.—Defects based on 8 inches by

12 feet. Nominal thicknesses

(inches) Nominal widths Lengths

1 ] Inches 1M- « and wider Multiples of 2 feet. IX2 J "B and better" green clears.—Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing; bright sap; split on end not longer than width of piece in 5 per cent

of pieces. With the above, will admit one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three small (4-inch)

pitch pockets, none through. Reverse side shall be "C" or better. "C" green clears.—Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing; medium sap stain, 25 per cent

of face; split on end not longer than width of piece

in 5 per cent of pieces. With the above, will admit

one of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three

1-inch sound and tight knots, or equivalent of pin

knots; 4 small (4-inch) pitch pockets, 2 of which

may be through, or equivalent slightly larger

pockets; small pitch streak. Tivo and one-half to five inch.—Defects based on

8 inches by 12 feet.

Nominal thicknesses Nominal widths Lengths

2H to 5.... : Inches

3 and wider Multiples of 2 feet. " B and better" green clears.—Will admit oc- casional slight variation in sawing; bright sap. With the above, will admit on face and corre- sponding half of edges the following defect, an

equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length, none through thickness; and on reverse

side and corresponding half of edges, one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Four pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length, none through thickness;

3 sound and tight 1-inch knots.

U C" green clears.—Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing; medium sap stain, 25 per cent

of face. With the above, will admit one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an

equivalent combination of defects: Three 1-inch sound and tight knots, or equivalent of pin knots;

4 pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length; medium

pitch streak. Six-inch and thicker.—Defects based on 8 inches by 12 feet. Nominal thicknesses

(inches) Nominal widths Lengths

Inches

6 and thicker. 6 and wider Multiples of 2 feet. "B and better" green clears.—Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing; bright sap. With

the above will admit on face and corresponding

half of edges, the following defect, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length, none through thickness; and on the reverse side and corresponding half of edges, one of the follow- ing defects, an equivalent defects, or an equivalent

combination of defects: Four pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length, none through thickness; 3 sound and tight lj^-inch knots. "C" green clears.—Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing; medium sap stain, 25 per cent

of face. With the above, will admit one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three medium (l^r

inch) sound and tight knots; 4 pitch pockets not

over 6 inches in length; medium pitch streak.

11 B and better" turning squares.—If surfaced,

finished size shall be 3^ inch scant each way. Must be free from heart centers. Will admit

such defects as will be removed in dressing or turning, and any minor defects that will cover well with

paint after working. With the above, one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: A few small sound and

tight knots; small pitch pockets. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for dimension lumber, July 1, 1926. 122
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.43

DOUGLAS FLU AND WEST COAST HEMLOCK

Dimension and plank.

Nominal thicknesses

(inches)

Standard

yard

thick- nesses SIS or S2S

Finished widths S1E and S2E

Inchesm

2%

2Vs Ws

2 to 7 inches, % off. 2H- - 8 inches and wider, Yi off. 3... 4m—

Standard industrial 2 inches SIS or S2S to 1%

inches. Lengths.—Multiples of 2 feet. Selected common dimension.

Shall be well manufactured. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing, and any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Medium sap stain, 25 per cent of face; sound and tight knots, approximately 1 inch in 4 to 6 inch widths, \% inches in 8-inch widths, 1% inches in 10-inch widths, 2 inches

in 12-inch widths, 234 inches in 14-inch widths, not over 2]/2 inches in wider widths; pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length; seasoning checks; heavy

torn grain. No. 1 common dimension. Must be sound stock, well manufactured, suitable

for ordinary construction. In 2 by 2 to 2 by 6, inclusive, may be Douglas fir and/or west coast hemlock. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing and any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and tight knots, approximately

13^ inches in 4 to 6 inch widths, 2 inches in 8-inch widths, 23^ in 10-inch widths, 3 inches in 12-inch

widths, 334 inches in 14-inch widths, not over 33^

inches in wider widths; loose knots one-half the maximum diameter of allowable tight knots; short

splits equal in length to width of piece; spike knots which do not weaken the piece more than knots

heretofore specified; seasoning checks; wane, onefourth thickness, one-fourth width, one-third length

of piece; pitch pockets; pitch streaks; pin wormholes, limited; medium sap stain, 40 per cent of

face; firm heart stain, 10 per cent of face; torn

grain; occasional skips which are not more than

Y% inch scant of the standard dressed size. No. 2 common dimension. May be Douglas fir or west coast hemlock. Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound, unsound, and loose knots, approximately

2 inches in 4-inch widths, 2^ inches in 6-inch widths, 3 inches in 8-inch widths, 33^ inches in 10-inch widths, 4 inches in 12-inch widths, not over

one-third width of piece in wider widths ; spike knots

which do not weaken the piece more than knots heretofore specified; splits, not over twice the width of

piece; fine through checks or shakes; wane one-third thickness on edge, one-third width, one-third length

of piece; large through pitch pockets; large pitch

streak; large wormholes, two per surface foot; sap

stain; firm heart stain; streak of advanced decay, not through, equal in area to a streak one-half inch wide by one-sixth length of piece; torn grain. Skips

which are not more than one-eighth inch scant of the standard dressed size permitted. Miscut pieces

which are not more than one-eighth inch scant of standard dressed size in width and/or thickness,

shall be admitted in No. 2 common, provided such

pieces are in all other respects as good as No. 1 common at point of miscut. No. 3 common dimension.

Will admit any or all west coast species 4 feet and

up. Will include all stock below the grade of No. 2 dimension, and will admit the following defects: Large, coarse, loose, and unsound knots; knot holes; shake; large pitch pockets; wane, leaving approximately one-fourth inch edge; splits, one-fourth

length of piece; heart stain, any amount; sap stain, any amount; moldy stock; white speckled heart, scattered small decayed spots; wormholes; mismanufactured pieces. SITKA SPRUCE Dimension and -plank. The grading rules for Sitka spruce dimension and

plank are the same as the grading rules of this association for Douglas fir dimension and plank

(see above).

Selected common dimension.

Shall be well manufactured. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing and any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Medium sap stain; sound and tight knots, approximately 1 inch in 4 to 6 inch widths, \

z/% inches in 8-inch widths,

1% inches in 10-inch widths, 2 inches in 12-inch widths, 234 inches in 14-inch widths, not over 23^

inches in wider widths; seasoning checks; pitch

pockets not over 6 inches in length. No. 1 common dimension. Must be sound stock, well manufactured, suitable

for ordinary construction. Will admit occasional

slight variation in sawing and any number of the

following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent

combinations of defects: Sound and tight knots,

approximately 13^ inches in 4 to 6 inch widths,

2 inches in 8-inch widths, 23^ inches in 10-inch

widths, 3 inches in 12-inch widths, 334 inches in 14-inch widths, not over 33^ inches in wider widths;

loose knots one-half the maximum diameter of allowable sound knots; short split equal in length

to width of piece; spike knots which do not weaken

the piece more than knots heretofore specified;

seasoning checks; wane, one-fourth thickness, one- fourth width, one-third length of piece; pitch

pockets; pitch streak; pin wormholes, limited; medium sap stain, limited; firm heart stain, 10 per cent

of face; occasional skips, which are not more than

one-eighth inch scant of the standard dressed size. 123
402.43 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 2 common dimension.

Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound, unsound, and loose knots, approximately 2 inches in 4-inch widths, 2^ inches in 6-inch widths, 3 inches in 8-inch widths, 33^ inches

in 10-inch widths, 4 inches in 12-inch widths, not

over one-third width of the piece in wider widths;

spike knots which do not weaken the piece nore than

knots heretofore specified; splits, not over twice width of piece; fine through checks or shakes; wane

one-third thickness on edge, one-third width of

piece, one-third length of piece; large through pitch

pockets; large pitch streak; large wormholes, 2 per

surface foot; sap stain; firm heart stain; streak of advanced decay, not through, equal in area to a

streak one-half inch wide by one-sixth length of

piece. Skips which are not more than one-eighth

inch scant of the standard dressed size permitted.

Miscut pieces which are not more than one-eighth

inch scant of standard dressed size in width and/or

thickness, shall be admitted in No. 2 common, pro- vided such pieces are in all other respects as good as No. 1 common at point of miscut. No. 3 common dimension.

Will include all stock below the grade of No. 2 dimension and will admit the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of

defects: Large, coarse, loose, and unsound knots; knot holes; shake; large pitch pockets; wane, leaving

approximately one-fourth inch edge; splits one- fourth length of piece; heart stain, any amount;

sap stain, any amount; moldy stock; white speckled

heart; scattered small decayed spots; wormholes;

mismanufactured pieces. WESTERN RED CEDAR

Plank. The grading rules for western red cedar plank are the same as the rules of this association for Douglas

for dimension and plank. (See above.) No. 1 common.

Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and tight knots, approximately

13^ inches in 4 and 6 inch widths, 2 inches in 8-inch widths, 23^ inches in 10-inch widths, 3 inches in 12-inch widths, 334 inches in 14-inch widths, S}4

inches in wider widths; spike knots which do not weaken the piece more than knots heretofore

specified; checks; pin wormholes, limited; sap stain, 15 per cent of face. No. 2 common.

Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of

defects: Sound, unsound, and loose knots, approximately 2 inches in 4-inch widths, 2J^ inches in 6-inch widths, 3 inches in 8-inch widths, 33^2 inches

in 10-inch widths, 4 inches in 12-inch widths, not over one-third width of piece in wider widths;

spike knots which do not weaken the piece more

than knots heretofore specified; splits not over

twice the width of the piece; checks or shakes; wane one-third thickness, one-third width, one-third length of piece; large wormholes; sap stain; streak

of advanced decay equal in area to a streak 1 inch

wide, one-half length of piece; torn grain; skips

which are not more than one-eighth inch scant of standard dressed size. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for white fir, cedar, and spruce dimension

lumber, July 1, 1925. No. 1. No. 1 dimension must be of a good sound character,

but will admit of defects that do not impair the

strength of the piece.

On basis of 2 by 4; wane on edge is admissible

one-half inch deep, for half the length, or a pro- portionate amount for a shorter distance or on both

edges. In any case, one side and two edges should

allow a good nailing surface, it being understood,

however, that the wane shall in no case extend over more than one-half the side of the piece.

Small dimension must be moderately straight

and larger dimension must be more so. A few

wormholes are admissible. Stained sap is not

considered a defect. Dimension, heavy planking,

and timbers may be made up of fir, larch, and pine

in any proportion. No. 2. No. 2 will admit of large, coarse knots, not necessarily sound, considerable wane; also shake, wormholes, dozey streaks, crooked pieces or other defects which weaken or impair the piece to such an extent

as to render it unfit for No. 1 grade. A serious combination of these defects is not admissible in any one piece. No. 3. No. 3 will admit a great deal of rot and all the

imperfections allowed in No. 1 and No. 2, but in a much more pronounced form. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for larch and fir dimension lumber, July 1, 1925. Larch and fir standard sizes. Dimension S1S1E

2 by 4 to iy8 by 3^.

2 by 6 to iy8 by 5^.

2 by 8 to iy8 by 73^. 2 by 10 to IVs by 9^.

2 by 12 to 1% by 113^.

3 by 4 to 23^ by 3^.

3 by 6 to 23^ by 5^.

3 by 8 to 23^ by 7y2 . 3 by 10 to 23^ by 93^. 3 by 12 to 2Y2 by liy2 . 402.5 LATHS AND SHINGLES.

402.51 Lath.

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grades for soft pine

lath, March 23, 1927. No. 1 and No. 2 lath. Grades identical with those of the North Carolina

Pine Association (Inc.). (See page 126.) 124
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.51

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, specifications for grades of soft pine byrkit lath, March 23, 1927.

Identical with those of the North Carolina Pine

Association (Inc.) for pine byrkit lath. Patterns. Patterns for byrkit lath are illustrated in Figures

1 and 2. California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grade of California redwood

lath, April, 1927.

Size.—Redwood lath shall be % inch thick by

\]/2 inches wide by 32 and 48 inches long, with

allowable scantness, either green or dry, of ys mcn

in width and thickness, and 34 inch in length. Grade.—Redwood lath shall be of sound material and will admit pin wormholes or hollow bird's-eye,

pin knots which do not weaken the piece, stain, and wane not to exceed one-third the thickness, one-third the width, and one-fourth the length of the piece. California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grades for California white pine, sugar

pine, white fir, and Douglas fir lath, May 1, 1926. Lath grades.—Owing to the rapidity with which

lath are manufactured and necessarily handled in grading, the misplacement of an occasional piece is practically unavoidable. For this reason a varia- tion of 10 per cent or less off grade is provided for

in the rules. This provision is intended to cover

accidentally misplaced pieces only, and every reasonable effort should be made to have the grades con- form to the specifications without regard to this percentage provided for misplaced pieces. No. 1 lath.—No. 1 lath shall be butted to not

less than 31 M inches or 47% inches long, not more

than one-eighth of an inch scant of \]/2 inches wide;

and not more than one-sixteenth of an inch scant of three-eighths of an inch thick, and of sound material. Will admit wane one-third the thickness and onethird the width for one-third the length on one side

of the piece or its equivalent when not in combination with other serious defects. Any number of pin knots, three or four three- quarter inch knots well scattered, or more smaller

knots, all well set, firm, and sound, that do not weaken the piece, are admissible in a 4-foot and a

proportionately less amount in a 32-inch No. 1 lath. Firm, fine shake extending over one-half the sur- face of the piece that does not materially impair

its strength is admissible when not in serious combination with other defects. Moderate pitch ex- tending over one-half the surface of the piece that does not materially impair the usefulness is admissible when not in serious combination with other

defects. A few wormholes in an otherwise sound piece are

admissible. Stain shall not be considered a defect, although

mold that has caused the surface of the piece to decay or scale off is a defect not admissible in this grade.

Ten per cent or less of No. 2 lath shall be allowed

in this grade. No. 2 lath.—May be of No. 1 quality with average

of not more than one-fourth inch scant in width and

one-eighth inch scant in thickness; may contain

firm streaks of rot, sound knots or an occasional

loose knot, dead wood, wormholes, wane, and

season checks. Defects must not be in combinations

that will seriously impair the usefulness of the piece.

Both ends of a No. 2 lath should have at least an

inch in width of firm wood for nailing.

Ten per cent above or below grade is admissible. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grades

for cypress lath, January, 1927. Lath grades.—Nos. 1 and 2, standard thickness, Y% inch; standard width, 13^ inches; standard

lengths, 32 and 48 inches. No. 1 lath.—No. 1 lath must not vary more than

one-sixteenth inch from standard thickness nor more

than one-eighth inch from standard width and must

not be more than three-eighth inch scant of stand- ard lengths and will admit any number of sound

defects which do not occupy more than one-third the cross section of the piece at any point, slight

peck, slight shake, wane not exceeding one-third the

thickness, one-third the width, and one-third the

length of the piece or its equivalent, and sound

discolored sapwood.

No. 2 lath.—No. 2 lath must not vary more than

one-eighth inch from standard thickness and must

not vary more than one-fourth inch from standard

width and must not be more than one-half inch

scant of standard lengths and may contain unsound

defects which do not occupy more than one-third the cross section of the piece at any point, or sound

defects which do not occupy more than two-thirds

of the cross section at any point, sound stain and

splits, or through shake not exceeding half the length

of the piece. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grades

for hardwood lath, January, 1927. Lath grades.—Nos. 1 and 2, count shall be made

by the piece. No. 1 lath.—Thickness, green, should be not less than six-sixteenths inch and five lath should measure

2 inches. Thickness, dry, should be not less than 1% inches

to five lath. Width, green, should be not less than 1^ inches. Width, dry, should be not less than 1 ^ inches. Length, 4 feet. Pieces one-half inch short will be

admitted.

Sound stain shall not be considered a defect. Pin wormholes, one 3^~inch sound knot, wane

34 inch wide, 6 inches long, 3^ inch deep, or equivalent defects will be admitted. No. 2 lath.—Width, dry, not less than 134 inches. Thickness, dry, not less than 34 inch. Length, 4 feet. Pieces % inch short will be

admitted. No. 2 will admit wane, wormholes; knots, and other

defects that will not prevent the use of the piece full length.

125
402.51 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), grades

for North Carolina pine laths, January 1, 1927. No. 1 lath.—No. 1 lath, when green, should measure 2 inches in thickness to every five lath, with the minimum thickness of any one lath not

less than ^ inch, and should not be less than

1^ inches in width. When dry they should measure 1% inches in thickness to every five lath, and should not be less than 1^ inches in width.

Length 4 feet, with not more than 20 per cent of a shipment which may be as much as Yi inch short in length. Will admit wane Y% inch deep, 34 inch wide

on the face, and 6 inches long, pinworm holes, and

one pin knot. Stain shall not be considered a

defect. No. 2 lath.—No. 2 lath shall consist of pieces that

fall below the grade of No. 1 which are not less than

134 inches in width, 34 inch thick, when dry, and

not more than % inch short in length. They will admit wane, wormholes, knots, and other defects that will not prevent their use without waste. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), inspection

rules for pine byrkit lath, January 1, 1927.

Size, z/i by 33^ and 534 inches; lengths, 4 feet and

up.Standard byrkit lath shall consist of material

that will be held firmly in place and support plaster

by ordinary nailing by not wasting more than 10

per cent of any piece and that will present a full surface with no openings over 3^ inch in width and

3 inches in length. The ends of pieces of byrkit

lath are not expected to meet on studding, and only

such quantity shall be counted waste as is neces- sary to remove a defect. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, official grading rules for hemlock and

tamarack lath, February 1, 1927.

Size, 24 by 334 and z/i by 534 face from 4 and 6 inch strips. Shall consist of Nos. 2 and 3 grade

worked as per byrkit pattern. Should be even

lengths and retain strength enough to be suit- able for general plastering purposes with waste

of not more than 10 per cent. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, grades for hemlock lath, .February 1, 1927. hath grades.—Identical with those of the Cali- fornia White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers Association with the added statements that "the stand- ard lengths shall be 32 and 48 inches and no longer"

and that "no tamarack is admitted into any grade

of hemlock unless specified at the time of selling. This association has also the following additional

grade. No. 8 lath.—This grade will admit all pieces below

a No. 2 that are ^ inch and thicker up to inch and

1 inch and wider up to 1M inches not over 15 per cent below the standard width, admitting all defects char^

acteristic of hemlock lath, such as wane, knots,

knot holes, sound and unsound, that would leave

it strength enough. Pieces with bark full length

and width, with face of wood, soft rot in small

spots going through piece, and any other defects that bar it from the better grades. Special at- tention should be given to length and must be

the same length as upper grades; also should have

reasonably sound ends to admit nailing. Patterns. Patterns for byrkit lath are illustrated in Figures

1 and 2. Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, grades

for white pine and spruce lath, April 15, 1925. No. 1 and No. 2 white -pine lath.—Grades identical with those of California White and Sugar Pine

Manufacturers Association with the added state- ment that " No. 2 lath may consist of any proportion

of northern pine and spruce." No. 1 mixed lath.—No. 1 mixed lath shall be

graded by the same rules and specifications and

subject to the same percentage of No. 2 given for No. 1 white pine lath, and may consist of a mixture

in any proportion of northern pine and spruce.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grades for Douglas fir lath, Schedule M, 1925. Douglas fir lath—one grade. Shall measure 1 inch in thickness to every three

laths. Shall be practically clear and must be evenly

manufactured. Occasional variation in width not

to exceed Te of an inch when green, allowed. Will admit a small number of pin wormholes or small

pitch pockets or an occasional pin knot; slight bark- wane on one side. All laths to be butted not more

than }/i inch scant of nominal length. Season or sap stain no defect. Port Orford cedar lath—one grade.

This is identical with the rules for Douglas fir above, with the added statement that "seasoned

laths shall measure not less than jf inch in thick- ness to every three laths, nor less than 1^ inch in width. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers Association,

grades for western red cedar lath, August 1, 1925. No. 1 lath. Grades identical with those of the Pacific Lumber

Inspection Bureau for Douglas fir lath, with the added statements that "seasoned laths shall measure not less than ft inch in thickness to every three

laths, not less than Iff inches in width" and "due to the rapidity with which lath is manufactured,

making misplacement of occasional pieces practically unavoidable, a variation of 10 per cent or

less off-grade is necessary and allowable." No. 2 lath. No 2 lath shall consist of pieces that fall below

the grade of No. 1, which are not less than 134

inches in width, 34 inch thick when dry, and are not more than % inch short in length. Will admit knots, small knot holes, wane, wormholes, and other defects that will not prevent their use without waste. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grades

for southern pine lath, September 1, 1925. 126
TIMBEK AND OTHEE UNMANUFACTURED OE PAETLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.51

No. 1 and No. 2 lath. Grades identical with those of the North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.) with the added state- ment that lath 1 inch wide and 48 inches long or 32 inches wide may be furnished when ordered on

specification for No. 1 lath. Southeastern Forest Products Association, specifications for southern pine byrkit lath, September

1, 1925. Identical with those of the North Carolina Pine

Association for pine byrkit lath. Patterns. Patterns for byrkit lath are illustrated in Figures

1 and 2.

Identical with those of the North Carolina Pine

Association for pine lath. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grades for Douglas fir, hemlock, spruce, and western red

cedar lath, July 1, 1926: Grades Nos. 1 and 2. Grades identical with those of the Red Cedar

Lumber Manufacturers Association for western

red cedar lath

Patterns. Patterns for byrkit lath are illustrated in Figures

1 and 2. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grades

for Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, black pine,

spruce, fir, cedar, and larch lath, July 1, 1925.

Fig. 1.Standard pattern byrkit lath Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

Fig. 2.Standard pattern byrkit lath Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association West Coast Lumbermen's Association Southern Pine Association, grades for southern

pine lath, March 23, 1927. No. 1 and No. 2 lath. Grades identical with those of the North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.). (See above.)

Southern Pine Association, standard specifica- tions for grades of southern pine byrkit lath, March 23, 1927. Identical with those of the North Carolina Pine

Association for pine byrkit lath. Patterns. Patterns for byrkit lath are illustrated in Figures

1 and 2. West Coast lumbermen's Association, standard

grading rules for Douglas fir and west coast hemlock

byrkit lath, July 1, 1926.

Standard sizes. Standard, 4 feet. Lath, % by 1}4 inches. Grades. No. 1 and No. 2 lath.—Grades identical with

those of the California White and Sugar Pine

Manufacturers Association with the added state- ment that No. 2 lath may consist of any proportions

of any two or more of the following named woods:

Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, black pine, spruce,

fir, cedar, and larch. No: 1 mixed lath.—No. 1 mixed lath shall be

graded by the same rules and specifications, and

subject to the same percentage of No. 2 given for No. 1 pine lath, and may consist of any two or more of the following named woods: Pondosa

pine, Idaho white pine, black pine, spruce, fir, cedar, and larch.

127
402.52 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

402.52 Shingles.

GENERAL RULES RELATING TO SHINGLES American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926.

All A and B grades shingles must be parallel

(a 16 or 18 inch A or B shingle not over % inch off parallel or a 24-inch A shingle not over % inch off parallel shall be considered parallel), uniform in thickness, and well manufactured. This means

shims and feather tips are not permitted; smoothness of faces and butts must be first class. Badly

cross-grained shingles not permitted.

No full flat-grain shingle wider than 10 inches permitted in grade B, and no shingle wider than

14 inches permitted in A and B grades; 1 inch over and under in length is permitted in 10 per cent. Shingles cut from equalized blocks may be }4 inch

less than the standard length. C grade admits

slight irregularities in thickness. A shingle in C

grade, not over % inch off parallel, shall be considered parallel. Where reference is made to edge grain, percentage

of edge grain shall be determined by the proportion

of actual lineal measurement of edge grain to full lineal measurement of shingles. In 16 and 18 inch A and B grades not more than

10 per cent of any shipment may be less than 4

inches in width.

All shingles to be packed in straight courses in regulation frames 20 inches in width with band

sticks not less than 193^ inches long. Openings

shall not exceed an average of 1 inch to the course

in random width shingles.

Discrepancy in inspection in any grade shall not

exceed 4 per cent. Grades.—The basic grades of shingles shall be A,

B, C, and D.

Sizes.—16-inch 6/2 shingles and 18-inch 5/2

shingles be eliminated. Dimension shingles shall be

sold full net count, no dimension shingle to be less than 3^ inch scant of the specified width when dried. Shipping provisions.—The kiln-dried weight of shingles be not more than 10 per cent under the

present association shipping weights. The openings

shall not exceed an average of 1 inch to the course in random-width shingles.

American Railway Engineering Association, re- revision of manual, Bulletin 293, wooden bridges

and trestles, January, 1927. The basic grades, sizes, and shipping provisions

for shingles are identical with the American Lumber

Standards, above. The specifications for red cedar shingles differ from the recommended specifications of the American Lumber Standard as follows: Grade A.

Twenty-four-inch shingles 41® inch.—No shingle to be narrower than 4 inches. To be packed 14/14

courses to bunch; 9 bunches to "M"; 4 bunches to "square" V/% inches exposure, 3 bunches to

"square" 10 inches exposure. Bunches must

measure 7 inches across butts when green, Q%

inches when dry.

Grade B. To be strictly clear. Not less than 50 per cent edge grain, with not to exceed }4 inch sap on any

portion of the 5 inches measured from the butt, on

one edge only.

Grade C. Twenty-four-inch shingles 41% inch.—No shingle to be narrower than 3 inches. To be packed 14/14

courses to bunch; 9 bunches to "M"; 4 bunches to "square" 73^ inches exposure, 3 bunches to "square" 10 inches exposure. Bunches must

measure 6% inches across butts when green, 63^

inches when dry.

Grade D.

Six-inch clear butts for 16 and 18 inch shingles, 10-inch clear butts for 24-inch shingles. Sap

permitted.

Twenty-four-inch shingles 412 inch.—No shingle

to be narrower than 2 inches. Permits shims and

feather tips 20 inches long. To be packed 14/14

courses to bunch; 9 bunches to " M"; 4 bunches to "square" 7H inches exposure, 3 bunches to "square" 10 inches exposure. Bunches must

measure 6M inches across butts when green, 63^

inches when dry. General rules. The general rules for red cedar shingles are identical with those of the American Lumber Standards, above. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau has adopted rules for grading soft pine shingles identical with those of the Southern Pine Association given on page 130. California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

shingles, April, 1927.

Sizes.—16-inch, 5 to 1^ inches, and 5 to 2

inches. Grades.—Clear V.G. and star A star. Special provisions.—Redwood shingles are packed

as follows: Random width, 20 inches wide, 25 course, 4

bunches to M.

Dimension 6-inch, 150 pieces to bunch. Dimension 5-inch, 200 pieces to bunch.

Clear V.G. shingles shall be strictly clear, all vertical grain, well manufactured from sound live timber, and free from sapwood and all defects. Star A star shingles shall be 8 inches clear, and

will admit flat grain, dark sound wood, hard streaks, and burls. They shall be well manufactured,

except feather tips when 14 inches, and thick and

thin shingles will be allowed. CYPRESS SHINGLES National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for cypress shingles, January, 1927.

Bests —A dimension shingle, 4, 5, and 6 inches

wide, 16 inches long, each width packed separately,

128
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 402.52

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. RECOMMENDED SPECIFICATIONS FOR STANDARD GRADES OF RED CEDAR SHINGLES A B C D

To be strictly clear, edge grain, and free from

sap. Random widths. To be strictly clear, 10-inch clear butts and 6 to 10 inch clear butts,

mixed edge grain and fiat better for 16 and 18 inch Sap permitted,

grain, 3^2 inch sap, meas- shingles and 16-inch clear ured 5 inches from butt, butts and better for 24- on one edge only per- inch shingles not per- mitted, mitted in higher grades.

Sap permitted.

24-inch Shingles 4/2 inch No shingle to be nar- rower than 4 inches. If packed by "M" must

count 18/18 courses to bunch, 7 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 9 inches across butts when green, 8%

inches when dry. If packed by "square" must count 17/18 courses

to bunch, 3 bunches to square. Bunches must

measured 83^/9 inches

across butts when green, 8J4/8/4 inches when dry.

No shingle to be nar- rower than 3 inches. If packed by "M" must

count 20/20 courses to bunch, 5 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 9 inches across butts when green, 8%

inches when dry. If packed by the "square"

must count 18/18 courses

to bunch, 4 bunches to square. Bunches must

measure 83^ inches

across butts when green, 7y% inches when dry.

No shingle to be nar- rower than 3 inches. If packed by "M" must

count 25/25 courses to bunch, 4 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 10 inches across butts when green, 9%

inches when dry. If packed by the "square" must count 20/20 courses

to bunch, 4 bunches to

square, or 5 to "M."

Bunches must measure 8

inches across butts when

green, 7% inches when

dry.

None. No shingle to be nar- rower than 3 inches. If packed by "M" must

count 18/18 courses to bunch, 7 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 8 z/i inches

across butts when green,

S}/2 inches when dry. If packed by "square"

must count 17/18 courses

to bunch, 3 bunches to square. Bunches must

measure 834/8M inches

across butts when green, 8/83^ when dry.

18-inch Shingles 5/2J4 inch No shingle to be nar- rower than 3 inches. If packed by " M " must

count 20/20 courses to bunch, 5 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 9 inches across butts when green, 8%

inches when dry. If packed by the "square" must count 18/18 courses

to bunch, 4 bunches to

square. Bunches must

measure 83^ inches

across butts when green, 7Ys inches when dry.

No shingle to be nar- rower than 23^ inches.

If packed by "M" must

count 20/20 courses to bunch, 5 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 8

z/± inches

across butts when green, 83^ inches when dry. If packed by the "square"

must count 18/18 courses

to bunch, 4 bunches to

square. Bunches must

measure 7% inches

across butts when green, 7% inches when dry.

16-inch Shingles 5/2 inch No shingle to be narrower- than 3 inches. If packed by "M" must

count 25/25 courses to bunch, . 4 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 10 inches across butts when green, 9^

inches when dry. If packed by "square"

must count 20/20 courses

to bunch, 4 bunches to

square, or 5 to "M."

Bunches must measure

8 inches across butts when green, 7

z/i inches when dry.

No shingle to be nar- rower than 23^ inches.

If packed by "M" must

count 25/25 courses to bunch, 4 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 9% inches

across butts when green,

93^2 inches when dry. If packed by the "square"

must count 20/20 courses

to bunch, 4 bunches to square, or 5 to "M."

Bunches must measure

7z/i inches across butts when green, 73^ inches when dry.

No shingle to be nar- rower than 2 inches. Per- mits shims and feather

tips 20 inches long. If packed by "M" must

count 18/18 courses to bunch. 7 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 8% inches

across butts when green, 83^ inches when dry. If packed by "square"

must count 17/18 courses

to bunch, 3 bunches to square. Bunches must

measure 834/'8M inches

across butts when green,

8/83^2 inches when dry.

No shingle to be nar- rower than 2 inches. Per- mits shims and feather

tips 16 inches long. If packed by "M" must

count 20/20 courses to bunch, 5 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 8

z/± inches

across butts when green, 83^ inches when dry. If packed by the "square"

must count 18/18 courses

to bunch, 4 bunches to square. Bunches must

measure 7Y% inches

across butts when green, 7^8 inches when dry.

No shingle to be nar- rower than 2 inches. Per- mits shims and feather

tips 14 inches long. If packed by "M" must

count 25/25 courses to bunch, 4 bunches to "M." Bunches must

measure 93^ inches

across butts when green, 934 inches when dry. If packed by the "square"

must count 20/20 courses to bunch, 4 bunches to square, or 5 to "M."

Bunches must measure

73^ inches across butts when green, 7^ inches when dry.

129
402.52 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

five butts to measure 2 inches in thickness, and free from sapwood and all defects. Primes.—A dimension shingle, 4, 5, and 6 inches

wide, 16 inches long, each width packed separately,

five butts to measure 2 inches in thickness, admitting tight knots and sapwood, but free from shake

and other defects; no knots to be within 8 inches

of the butts. This grade may contain shingles clipped twothirds of the width and one-eighth of the length on the point. Star A star.—A random width shingle 3 inches and

wider, 14 to 16 inches long, otherwise the same as Primes. Economy.—Dimensions 4, o, and 6 inches each

width separately bunched, admitting sapwood and

sound knots, slight peck 5 inches from butts, imperfections on points and admitting 14-inch

shingles.

Clippers.—All shingles below the above grades

which are sound for 5 inches from the butts, wormholes and slight peck excepted, random widths 2^

inches and wider, admitting 12-inch shingles which

are otherwise at least one grade higher.

The count of shingles of all grades is based on

4,000 lineal inches in width, making 1,000 standard

shingles, consequently there would be only six hundred and sixty-seven 6-inch shingles packed and

counted as 1,000 standard shingles; 5-inch dimension being counted in like proportion. WHITE CEDAR SHINGLES Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association has adopted the shingle grading rules

of the Northern White Cedar Shingle Manufacturers Association. Northern White Cedar Association specifications

(grading rules) for shingles are identical with those

of the Northern White Cedar Shingle Manufacturers Association. Northern White Cedar Shingle Manufacturers

Association, specifications (grading rules) for white

cedar shingles. (Current.) Grade. "Extra star A star."—Strictly 8-inch and better

clear from butt, with all clears in. At least 95 per

cent should be 4 inches and wider, but no shingles

less than 3 inches wide, the latter to be strictly

clear. To be well manufactured. Five butts to measure 2 inches when sawn. The length should be 16 inches, with an allowance of 1 inch in not to exceed 10 per cent of the bunch. To have clear wrappers. "Standard star A star."—Strictly 5 to 8 inch

clear from butt. Not less than 2% inches in width. To be well manufactured. Five butts to measure 2 inches when sawn. The lengths should be 16 inches, with an allowance of 2 inches in not

to exceed 10 per cent of the bunch. To have

"extra" wrappers. "Sound butts."—Strictly sound knotted 4 inches from butt. Not less than 2 inches in width or 12 inches in length.

General.—Four per cent will be allowed in all grades for error in manufacturing. Openings

shall not average more than 134 inches to the

course. SOUTHERN PINE SHINGLES Southeastern Forest Products Association has adopted rules for grading southern pine shingles, identical with those of the Southern Pine Association given below. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association has

grading rules identical with those of the National

Hardwood Lumber Association given above. In

addition thereto it has adopted the following rules: Each bundle of cypress shingles should contain the manufacturer's name and be plainly marked with

the grade and the number of bundles to the thousand

shingles. It should also contain the association trade-mark. Southern Pine Association, grading rules for southern pine shingles, March 23, 1927.

Size.—All shingles shall be not less than ^ inch

thick at butt, when dry, tapered to ye inch a^ thin

end, 4 inches wide, and 18 inches long, except as to

variations hereinafter specified. Select grade shall be all heart, practically free from

defects, and well manufactured, allowing a variation

of 3^ inch in length and 34 inch in width. No. 1 grade shall be all heart, free from unsound

knots, but will admit sound tight knots, not exceeding 2 inches in diameter, if not located within 6

inches of butt end; slight pitch streaks; clipped

ends in not to exceed 10 per cent of the shingles;

and a variation of 3^ inch in length and 34 inch in width. Prime grade may be all sapwood, practically free from defects and well manufactured, allowing a vari- ation of inch in length and 34 inch in width. Stain

shall not be considered a defect in this grade. No. 2 grade may be all sapwood, and will admit

sound tight knots, not exceeding 2 inches in dia- meter, if not located within 6 inches of butt end;

firm red heart; stain; pitch; pitch pockets that do

not show through; wane, or absence of wood, not

exceeding 3^ inch in width, that does not extend

within 6 inches of butt end; a variation not exceeding 1 inch in length and 3^ inch in width; clipped ends in not to exceed 20 per cent of the shingles;

and slight defects in manufacture.

Note.—The count of shingles is based on 4,000 lineal inches in width to 1,000 shingles. Washington and Oregon Shingle Association, grading rules effective January 1, 1926, identical with

American Lumber Standards given above. This as- sociation has also the following rules for dimension

shingles and packing rules. Dimension shingles.

Dimension shingles shall be sold full net count, no dimension shingle to be less than 3^ inch scant

of the specified width when dried.' Twenty-four-inch shingles 4/8, 6 inches wide.—To

be strictly clear, edge grain, and free from sap. Eighteen-inch shingles 5/2}4, 4, 5, and 6 inches

wide.—To be strictly clear with not to exceed 3^

inch sap on any portion of the 53^> inches measured

from butt on one edge only. Flat grain permitted.

130
TIMBER AND OTHER UNMANUFACTURED OR PARTLY MANUFACTURED WOOD 403.2

Sixteen-inch shingles 5(2 inches, 4, 5, and 6 inches

wide.—To be strictly clear with not to exceed 3^ inch sap on any portion of the 5 inches measured

from butt on one edge only. Flat grain permitted.

Packing rules. Twenty-four by six inch, 4i%-—Packed 14/14

courses to the bunch, 9 bunches to M, 4 bunches

to ''square" 7^ inches exposure, 3 bunches to " square " 10 inches exposure. Net count, 84 pieces to bunch.

Eighteen by four-inch, 5l2y£ inches.—If packed

by M must count 18/18 courses to bunch, with 5 additional cross shingles, net count 185 pieces to bunch, 5 bunches to M. If packed by " square" must count 16/16 courses to bunch, with 5 additional cross shingles, net count 165 pieces to bunch,

4 bunches to square. Eighteen by five inch, 5/2}4 inches.—If packed by

M must count 18/18 courses to bunch, with 4 additional cross shingles, net count 148 pieces to bunch,

5 bunches to M. If packed by "square" must

count 16/16 courses to bunch, with 4 additional

cross shingles, net count 132 pieces to bunch, 4 bunches to square. Eighteen by six inch, 5l2}/i inches.—-If packed by

M must count 19/19 courses to bunch, with 8 additional cross shingles, net count 122 pieces to bunch,

5 bunches to M. If packed by "square" must

count 17/17 courses to bunch, with 8 additional

cross shingles, net count 110 pieces to bunch, 4 bunches to square.

Sixteen by four inch, 5/2 inches.—If packed by M

must count 22/23 courses to bunch, with 6 additional cross shingles, net count 231 pieces to bunch,

4 bunches to M. If packed by "square" must

count 17/18 courses to bunch with 10 additional

cross shingles, net count 185 pieces to bunch, 4 bunches to square, 5 to M.

Sixteen by five inch, 5/2 inches.—If packed by M

must count 2/23 courses to bunch, with 5 additional cross shingles, net count 185 pieces to bunch,

4 bunches to M. If packed by "square" must

count 18/18 courses to bunch, with 4 additional

cross shingles, net count 148 pieces to bunch, 4 bunches to square, 5 to M.

Sixteen by six inch, 5/2 inches.—If packed by M

must count 24/24 courses to bunch, with 9 additional cross shingles, net count 153 pieces to bunch,

4 bunches to M. If packed by "square" must

count 19/19 courses to bunch, with 8 additional

cross shingles, net count 122 pieces to bunch, 4 bunches to square, 5 to M.

402.6 STRUCTURAL TIMBERS AND SHOP

LUMBER.

(See 412. and 413.)

402.7 SOFTWOOD LUMBER SPECIFICATIONS.

(See 400.2.) 40.2.8 HARDWOOD LUMBER SPECIFICATIONS.

(See 400.3.)

402.9 MISCELLANEOUS SAWN LUMBER.

American lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See American Lumber Standards 400.0 to 413.0

for softwood lumber standards. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for miscellaneous specification for sawn lumber, January, 1927. Plain sawn flitch. Plain sawn flitch shall be graded according to the

general rules applying to the kind of lumber, except

that measurement must be made on the narrow or sap side in the center of the piece inside the wane or bark. There is no restriction to heart center in the

cutting grades.

This rule does not apply to veneer flitch. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers' Association,

grading rules for miscellaneous specification for sawn

lumber, August 1, 1925. Capping and grooved trunking.

Sizes.—Worked to sizes and patterns ordered.

Lengths.—4 to 20 feet, multiples of 1 foot; 25 per

cent or more, 16 feet; 15 per cent, 4 to 9 feet, inclusive.A variation of one-sixteenth inch in all sizes either way will be allowed. Dimensions of groove are minimum, an increase

of Y% inch in size will be allowed as a maximum;

practically all heart; suitable for use as a whole

without waste; square edged; must be water-tight

stock; sides of groove may be sawn but bottom must

be knife cut. Trunking.

Will admit the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Medium torn grain; sound and intergrown knots

well scattered, approximately 2-inch in 4-inch widths; 3-inch in 6-inch widths; splits on end not

longer than width of piece.

Capping.

Will admit the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Medium torn grain; sound and intergrown knots,

well scattered, approximately 1-inch in 4-inch widths; 2-inch in 6-inch widths. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for western red cedar miscellaneous specifica- tions of sawn lumber, July 1, 1926. The grading rules of West Coast Lumbermen's

Association for cedar capping and grooved trunking

are the same as the grading rules of Red Cedar

Lumber Manufacturers Association for cedar cap- ping and grooved trunking. (See above.)

403. SURFACED AND WORKED LUMBER.

403.1 DRESSED LUMBER.

(See 411.) 403.2 MATCHED, SHIP-LAPPED, AND PATTERNED LUMBER.

(See 411.) 131
410-419 LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE

410. GENERAL ITEMS.

(See 400.0.) 411. YARD LUMBER FOR GENERAL

BUILDING PURPOSES.

411.0 GENERAL ITEMS.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. YARD LUMBER The term "yard lumber" as here used means

lumber that is manufactured and classified into those sizes, shapes, and qualities required for ordinary construction and general-purpose uses. (Heavy timbers for structural purposes, softwood

factory lumber, hardwood factory lumber, and

other special-use materials are not considered yard

stock.)

Grade Standards On the basis of quality yard lumber is divided

into two main divisions: (a) Select lumber and

(6) common lumber. These are again divided into two classes—Select lumber into (1) that suitable

for natural finishes and (2) that suitable for paint

finishes; common lumber into (1) that which can be used without waste and (2) that which permits some waste. Each of these four classes is further divided into quality classes or grades.

Select lumber.—Lumber which is generally clear, containing defects limited both as to size and number, and which is smoothly finished and suitable

for use as a whole for finishing purposes or other

uses in which large, clear pieces are required, shall be considered select lumber. Two classes shall be recognized. The first shall be suitable for natural finishes. The second class permits similar defects, and, in addition, blemishes

of somewhat greater extent than those of the first class, but of a type which can be covered by paint

Grade names: A, B, C, and D. Common lumber.—Lumber containing numerous

defects and blemishes which preclude it from use

for finishing purposes, but which is suitable for general utility and construction purposes, shall be

considered common lumber. Two general classes shall be recognized. The

first shall be suitable for use as a whole for purposes

in which surface covering or strength is required. Defects and blemishes permitted in this class must

be sound. The second class permits very coarse

defects which may cause waste in the use of the

piece.

Grade names: No. 1 common, No. 2 common,

No. 3 common, No. 4 common, and No. 5 common.

Dimension grade names: No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and No. 3 common.

Basic grade classifications for yard lumber

Total products of a

typical log arranged

in series according to quality as deter- mined by appearance.

SELECT Lumber of good ap- pearance and fin- ishing qualities.

COMMON

Lumber containing

defects or blemishes which detract from a finish ap- pearance but which

is suitable for general utility and con- struction purposes.

Suitable for

finishes. natural

Suitable for paint fin- ishes.

Lumber suitable for use without waste.

Lumber

waste. permitting

Grade A.—Practically free from defects. Grade B.—Allows a few small defects or blemishes. Grade C.—Allows a limited number

of small defects or blemishes that can be covered with paint.

Grade D.—Allows any number of defects or blemishes which do not

detract from a finish appearance,

especially when painted. No. 1 common.—Sound and tight

knotted stock. Size of defects and blemishes limited. May be

considered water-tight lumber. No. 2 common.—Allows large and

coarse defects. May be consid- ered grain-tight lumber. No. 3 common.—Allows larger and

coarser defects than No. 2 and

occasional knot holes. No. 4 common.—Low quality lumber admitting the coarsest defects, such as decay and holes. No. 5 common.—Must hold together under ordinary handling.

Definitions of defects and blemishes.—The defects and blemishes, enumerated in the rules for grading

yard lumber of any species under the American

Lumber Standards, shall be defined within the

limits of the "Definitions of maximum defects and

blemishes." (See 400.20.) General provisions.—The grading of lumber can not be considered an exact science, because it is based on a visual inspection of each piece and on the

judgment of the grader. The provisions of these

specifications, however, are sufficiently explicit to

establish 5 per cent below grade as a reasonable

variation between graders.

Except in dimension, the grade of yard lumber,

rough or surfaced two sides, shall be determined

from the better or face side of the piece, and lumber

which is surfaced one side only shall be graded from

the surfaced side. 132
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.0

The rules for yard lumber prescribe the number

and extent of defects and blemishes permitted in the poorest pieces admissible in each grade.

The number of defects and blemishes permitted

varies as the area of the piece to be graded increases or diminishes in respect to the standard size specified, but the size of the defects must not exceed that allowed by the grading rules. When defects or blemishes, or combinations

thereof, not described in these grading rules are encountered, they will be considered as equivalent

to known defects according to their damaging effect upon the piece in the grade under consideration. Material shall be considered vertical grain when

the rings (so-called grain) form an angle of 45° or more with the surface of the piece. Yvrhen the

angle becomes less than 45° at any point, the

material shall be known as flat (slash) grain.

Mixed grades other than the two highest recog- nized grades for each species, not specifying the proportion of each grade, are not American standard

grades

Yard and Industrial Size Standards Dressed sizes. —The terms "standard yard board"

and "standard industrial board," and "standard

yard dimension" and "standard industrial dimension" shall be the designations for 1-inch boards

and 2-inch dimension, respectively.

ff inch, SIS or S2S (measured at standard commercially dry shipping weight and moisture content

for each species), shall be the thickness for the standard yard board; ff inch, SIS or S2S, for the standard industrial board. 1% inches, SIS or S2S (measured at standard commercially dry shipping weight and moisture

content for each species), shall be the thickness for standard yard dimension not more than 12 inches wide; 1^£ inches, SIS or S2S, for standard industrial dimension.

The finished widths of finish S1E or S2E (meas- ured at standard commercially dry shipping weight

and moisture content for each species) shall be

z/% inch off on lumber of standard width of 3 inches; the finished widths of finish SlE or S2E (based on

kiln-dried lumber) shall be y2 inch off on lumber of standards widths of 4 to 7 inches, inclusive, and

% inch off on lumber of standard widths of 8 to 12

inches, inclusive; and the finished widths of boards and dimension SlE or S2E (measured at standard

commercially dry shipping weight and moisture

content for each species) shall be y% inch off on lumber of standard widths less than 8 inches and

y inch off on lumber of standard widths of 8 to

12 inches. The thicknesses and widths of finished lumber,

1SS or S2S and/or SlE or S2E, shall be as follows: Finish, common boards and strips, and dimension

[The thicknesses apply to all widths and the widths to all thicknesses]

Product

Size, board measure

Dressed dimensions at standard

commercially dry shipping

weight and moisture content

Thickness Width

Standard

thickness,

yard

Standard

thickness,

industrial Standard

width

Finish

Inches Inches

34

56

78

9

10

1112

Inches H25. iS

1A

l&

m

2y8 2y8 25

32 1A

Inches Inches2%

X W2

x m

i 7H 1 834

1 934

1 iom

*11M

Common boards and strips

11Hm

22y2 3

1IM

1^

2632

l

6/s

3

4

56

78

910

1112

24

6

810

12

2632 2%

iy

sy2 ioy2 ny2

iy2 $y2 ny2

Dimension 22^

34 Over 4

2y

s Off %

l

6/s

Based on kiln-dried lumber. 133
411.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Siding, flooring, ceiling, -partition, shiplap, and dressed and matclied

[The thicknesses apply to all widths and the widths to all thicknesses]

Product

Bevel siding

Rustic and drop siding.

Flooring

Ceiling.

Partition.

Ship-lap.

Dressed and matclied.

Size, board measure

Thickness

Inches

1IK

IK

l

Width

Dressed dimensions at standard commercially dry shipping

weight and moisture

content

Inches

3

4

56

34

5

6

4

6810

12

4

68

10

12

Standard

thickness

Inches

l & by tV ifby A

ft 1A

32 1A

Minimum, Ship-lapped; face widths for D&M are H inch wider than for ship-lapped. In patterned material 1,1}4, and 1H inches thick, board measure, the tongue shall be 14 inch wide in tongued-and-grooved lumber, and the lap ZA inch wide in ship-lapped lumber, with the over-all widths K inch and % inch wider, respectively, than the face widths shown above.

134
LUMBER FOE BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.0

Factory flooring, heavy roofing, decking, and sheet pilin g

[The thicknesses apply to all widths and the widths to all thicknesses

Size, board measure

Dressed dimensions at standard

commercially dry shipping

weight and moisture content

Thickness Width

Standard

thick- ness

Standard face width

D&M Shiplapped

Grooved

for splines

Inches2

34

Inches4

6

8

10

12

Inchesm

2Vs sy8

Inches sy8 ny8Inches3

5

7

9

11

Inches7V2 93^ ny2

In patterned material 2 inches and thicker, the tongue shall be Y% inch wide in tongued-and-grooved lumber, and the lap y2 inch wide

in shiplapped lumber, with the over-all widths % inch and y2 inch wider, respectively, than the face widths shown above. Rough dry sizes.—The standard rough dry thick- ness of the standard yard board shall be not less than f-f inch, with an allowance of 20 per cent of the shipment, which may be not less than f§ inch, and

the standard rough dry thickness of the standard

industrial board shall be not less than ff inch, with an allowance of 10 per cent of the shipment, which

may be not less than f§ inch. The standard rough dry thickness of finish, com- mon boards, and dimension of standard sizes 1}4

inches and thicker, board measure, shall be not less than y8 inch thicker than the corresponding stand- ard finished dry thickness, with an allowance of 20 per cent of the shipment, which may be not less than ^ inch thicker than the corresponding stand- ard finished dry thickness. The widths of finish, rough, and commercially

dry of 3-inch width, board measure, shall be not more than 34 hich less than the nominal width; the widths of finish, rough and kiln dried, of widths

4 to 7 inches, inclusive, board measure, shall be not more than % inch less than the nominal widths,

and widths 8 to 12 inches, inclusive, board measure,

shall be not more than Y8 inch less than the nominal

widths; and the widths of common boards and

dimension, rough and commercially dry, 7 inches and narrower, shall be not more than 34 inch less than the nominal widths, and the widths 8 to 12

inches, board measure, shall be not more than %

inch less than the nominal widths.

Lengths.—With the exception of the following

enumerated odd lengths, which shall be standard,

odd lengths in yard lumber and in structural material be not considered in American Lumber Standards : 2 by 4 inches, 6 and 8 inches—9 and 11 feet. 2 by 8 inches and 10 inches—13 feet. 2 by 10 inches—15 feet. 8 by 8 inches, 10 by 10 inches, 10 by 12 inches, 12 by 12 inches, 14 by 14 inches, 16 by 16 inches, 18 by 18 inches—11 and 13 feet.

6 by 16 inches, 6 by 18 inches, 8 by 16 inches> 8 by 18 inches—15 and 17 feet. The marketing practice covering lengths of yard

lumber shall permit the buyer to secure specified

lengths and/or specified assortments of lengths.

Shipping weights.—The weights to be used in determining thickness and width shall be the commercially dry shipping weights of the regional groups of manufacturers issued after approval by

the Central Committee on Lumber Standards and

in effect when shipment is made.

Workings.—The standard working of flooring, 4

inches or under in width, be S2S, SM, scratch back. Unless otherwise stated in the contract of purchase, yard lumber shall be double end-trimmed

with a tolerance of not to exceed 3 inches in excess

of the nominal length.

Moldings.—The "standard designs and universal

sizes" of wood moldings, as shown in 411.42, shall be considered standard. All other designs and sizes shall be considered special.

Description, Measurement, and Tally The thicknesses and widths of lumber as specified

in the tables shown above shall be considered

standard. All other sizes shall be considered special.

Lumber of standard size shall be described by

those standard dimensions.

Lumber of standard size shall be tallied board

measure. On lumber of standard thickness less than 1 inch (board measure), the board-foot meas- urement shall be based on the surface dimensions.

The board measurement of dressed lumber of standard size shall be based upon the corresponding

nominal dimensions of rough green lumber. Lumber finished to special size shall be counted

(tallied) as of the standard rough size necessarily

used in its manufacture.

The measurement and description of the dimensions of lumber shall be as follows:

Thickness of lumber measured and described as—

Minimum

thickness, SIS or S2S;

at standard commercially dry

shipping weight and

moisture

content

1 inch, board measure, to be not less than

V/i inches, board measure, to be not less than iy2 inches, board measure, to be not less than

Inches

If 1*%m

2V8 2Vs m

1% inches, board measure, to be not less than

2 inches, board measure, to be not less than 2H inches, board measure, to be not less than

3 inches, board measure, to be not less than.. 3% inches, board measure, to be not less than . 4 inches, board measure, to be not less than Widths of finish, measured and described as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,

11, and 12 inches, board measure, to be, respectively, not less than 2%, S1E or S2E, at standard commercially dry shipping weight and

moisture content, and zy2, 4J4 5*4 6J4 7J£, 8J£, 9M, 10&, and 11J£ inches, S1E or S2E, based on kiln-dried lumber; widths of boards and dimension, measured and described as 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,

11, and 12 inches, board measure, to be, respectively, not less than m, 2y8 , 4*4 5Vs, &A, 1V2, 8y2 , 9H, 10H, and liy2 inches, S1E

or S2E, at standard commercially dry shipping weight and moisture

content. The description of thickness of dressed stock less than 1 inch thick, board measure, SIS or S2S, to be its actual thickness at standard commercially dry shipping weight and moisture content. Note.—It is to be understood that the standard dimensions of rough lumber, commercially dry, are in excess of the dimensions of finished lumber of the corresponding size, board measure, by the amount necessary to permit of surfacing either one side or two sides and/or one edge or two edges. 52688°—27 10 135
411.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Material shipped on stock sizes shall be tallied by the number of pieces of each size and length in the shipment. In shipments measured on board measure a piece

tally in board feet shall be made.

In material measured with a board rule on actual widths, pieces measuring to the even half foot shall be alternately counted as of the next higher and

lower foot count; fractions below the one-half foot

shall be dropped and fractions above the one-half

foot shall be counted as of the next higher foot.

Shipping Provisions The actual thickness and width of lumber shipped

when not of standard size shall be indicated on

invoice. In order to encourage the maintenance of standard

sizes as agreed to, lumber manufactured and sold as standard, if grade marked, shall be marked by an

appropriate brand or insignia to indicate that it is of standard size. In shipments of rough finish, and boards, pieces one-half inch or more above the count thickness, such

as may be produced by uneven sawing, may, at the

option of the buyer, be rejected, or accepted as of the next lower grade.

The average length of a shipment of lumber shall be computed by dividing the total length in feet by

the total number of pieces in a shipment.

Each length of bundle stock shall be bundled

separately.

Grade Marking

The principle of grade marking of lumber is approved.

On lumber when grade marked:

(a) The grade be marked on lumber of grades

equivalent to No. 4 common and better grades, and

on lower grades the grade mark be optional.

(b) If marked at all, all pieces of a given grade be

grade marked (except that unavoidable mechanical

skips are, of course, allowed).

(c) An easily branded mark or insignia, copyrighted and nationally uniform, be used in connection with the grade mark and be available to identify

shipments from all mills of lumber manufactured in accordance with American Lumber Standards.

(d) An appropriate mark symbolizing American

Lumber Standards be copyrighted and its use be

available to those mills which shall have agreed to maintain the agreed standards of size and grade and

to submit their lumber product upon complaint to

official association inspection.

Tally Cards Cards be placed in cars of lumber at mill of origin,

showing piece tally by grades and sizes: Provided,

That wholesale dealer, or other buyer or shipper,

may, by arrangement with mill of origin, provide

for use, for this purpose, of wholesaler's or buyer's

or shipper's car card: Provided, That in such case

said wholesaler, buyer, or shipper whose name

appears on card is financially responsible for the

correctness of the tally as shown on such car card: And provided, That this shall not be construed as

relieving the manufacturer from his responsibility

If any, to such wholesaler, buyer, or shipper.

The grades thus required to be entered on tally card be the official association grades as denned in published grading rules: Provided, That this requirmcnt is not construed as prohibiting the entry on

tally cards of special grades, but that such entry is not recognized under American Lumber Standards. The American Lumber Standards be understood

as not applying to "special" grades (that is, not

recognized in published grading rules) whether

entered on tally cards or not.

Shingles Grades.—The basic grades of shingles shall be

A, B, C, and D.

Sizes.—16-inch 6/2 shingles and 18-inch 5/2

shingles be eliminated. Dimension shingles shall be sold full net count, no

dimension shingle to be less than 3^8 inch scant of the

specified width when dried. Shipping provisions.—The kiln-dried weight of shingles be not more than 10 per cent under the

present association shipping weights.

The openings shall not exceed an average of 1 inch

to the course in random-width shingles.

Specifications J'or red cedar shingles.—The specifications of 24, 18, and 16 inch red cedar shingles

shall be as shown in 402.52. American Railway Engineering Association, revi- sion of manual, bulletin 293, wooden bridges and

trestles, January, 1927. The grade standard, general provisions, yard and

industrial size standards and rough dry sizes of yard

lumber are identical with the American Lumber

Standards, 411.0. Lengths.

The standard odd lengths of yard lumber and

structural material are the same as the American

Lumber Standards, but include the following additional odd lengths which are necessary in railroad work: 7 by 16 inches, 9 by 16 inches, 9 by 18

inches—15 and 17 feet. Moldings.

The American Lumber Standard designs and

universal sizes of wood moldings, the 7,000 series, illustrated in 411.42 are not included in the American

Railway specifications for yard lumber. The description, measurement, and tally and

and shipping provisions for yard lumber are identical with the American Lumber Standards, 411.0, yard lumber.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

lumber, grade standards and yard and industrial

size standards, April, 1927. The grade standards of this association for yard

lumber conform to the grade standards of the American Lumber Standards, 411.0. The thickness and width of finished California redwood yard lumber SIS or S2S and/or S1E or S2E D and M or ship-lapped, except as indicated thus (*) conform to the American Lumber Standards, 411.0, and are as follows: 136
LUMBEfJ FOR BUILDING AND FACTOEY USE 411.0

Finish, common boards and strips, and dimension

[The thicknesses apply to all widths and the widths to all thieknessj

Product

Common boards and strips.

Dimension.

Size, board measure

Dressed sizes at commercially dry- shipping weight and moisture

content

Thickness

Inches

1\y2 2y2 3

1

22y2 34 Over 4

Width

Inches

10

12

34

56

78

910

1112

2

46

810

12

Standard

thickness yard

Standard

thickness

industrial btanaara

width

Inches

516

716

16

11

16

13 *

16

life 1&

Inches Inchesiy8 3^

43^

53^

673^

8*

1316 1A1 13. 1 32

716 IX*

2y8 2y8

2 5 32 1*

93^

10* ny2 ~M

1316 2V8 3^

sy2 $y2 ioy2 ny2 m

zy8 zy8 Off %

m m

sy8 $y8 7y2 ny2 3M

137
411.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Siding, flooring, ceiling, partition, ship-lap, and dressed and matched

[The thicknesses apply to all widths and the widths to all thicknesses]

Product

Bevel siding (3^-inch)

*Bungalow siding (5^-inch).

*Bungalow siding (%-inch).

Rustic and drop siding (ship-lapped)

Rustic and drop siding, D and M.

Flooring.

* Ceiling.

Partition.

Ship-lap.

Dressed and matched.

Size, board measure

Dressed sizes at commercially dry shipping

weight and moisture

content

Thickness

Inches

1n

13^2

11V2

Width

Inches

108

10

124

6

34

5

64

6

81012

4

6

810

12

Standard

thickness

Inches H by

rs by £

by M

T2 1*

32 Ife 1A

Standard

face width

Factory flooring, heavy roofing, decking, and sheet piling.

The sizes of factory flooring, heavy roofing, decking, and sheet piling are the same as given in the

table for yard and industrial size standards, American Lumber Standards, 411.0. Federal Specifications Board, proposed revi- sion to supersede softwood part of F. S. B. No. 24 master specification for lumber, softwood, yard,

and factory, 1927. The following requirements shall govern the pur- chase of lumber for the use of the departments and

independent establishments of the Government.

Softwood lumber, including yard lumber and

factory or shop lumber, purchased by the Federal

Government shall be bought, whenever it is practicable, under the current grading rules of the various lumber associations where such grading rules are approved by the central committee on lumber

standards as in conformance with American Lumber Standards. 1 Where it is advisable for the Goverment to purchase softwood yard lumber or softwood factory

or shop lumber of species not graded under associa- tion or commercial rules conforming with American

Lumber Standards,1 as interpreted by the central committee on lumber standards, specifications for

i American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, Softwood Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. 138
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.0

such lumber shall be prepared by the Government

based on American Lumber Standards. In exceptional cases, where lumber is needed for special purposes, such lumber shall be purchased

under specifications prepared by the Government

organization which needs it with such assistance as they may deem necessary. Airplane lumber is an example. It is believed that special lumber

will be a very small proportion of the total amount

of lumber purchased by the Government, and that

in many cases special lumber can be obtained more

cheaply and promptly by buying one of the stand- ard grades and selecting or cutting the special lumber from it. The foregoing requirements have to do with softwood lumber, exclusive of structural material. Hardwood lumber and softwood struc- tural material will be considered by the Federal

Specifications Board at a later date. Softwood lumber is divided into three classes

(a) yard lumber, used with little or no further cut- ting for general building purposes; (b) structural

material, used where strength is the primary consideration and working stresses are required; and

(c) factory or shop lumber, used for cutting into comparatively small pieces required in the manufacture of sash and doors and general millwork.

It is believed that the grading of softwood lumber should be founded on basic principles and uni- form provisions and is in hearty accord with such

principles and provisions as embodied in American

Lumber Standards for softwood lumber, adopted

by the various general conferences of manufacturers, distributers, and consumers of lumber at Washington, D. C.,2 and hopes it will be possible to proceed steadily with the development of American Standards for lumber, particularly with

respect to standards of dryness at which the sizes apply and definite definitions of basic grade quality.

The board also heartily indorses grade marking

and recommends the purchase of grade-marked

lumber wherever feasible. (To accompany the proposed specification there has been prepared an enumeration, reported and

approved by the central committee on lumber

standards, of the extent, as of January 1, 1927, to which the grading and inspection rules of the important associations of softwood lumber manufacfacturers, who have adopted the American Lumber

Standards and published rules based thereon, provide for sizes, grade names, grade qualities, and

inspection and shipping practices that are in con- formity with the American Lumber Standards; with exceptions or additions thereto, if any; and

the species of softwoods covered in each instance.)

North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), official inspection rules for yard and industrial lumber,

January 1, 1927. The yard and industrial lumber sizes are the same

as the American Lumber Standard sizes given above.

1 See Department of Commerce publication, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926.

In addition, this association furnishes the following

sizes which are designated as "North Carolina pine

superstandard.

North Carolina pine super standard sizes of finished lumber SIS or S2S and/or SlE or S2E

[The thicknesses apply to all widths and the widths to all thicknesses]

Product

Size—board measure

Dressed dimensions

at standard com- mercially dry

shipping weight

North Carolina pine super standard

Thickness Width Thickness Width

Inches Inches

3

4

5

6

78

9

10

1112

Inches

*AA5A

1

1A

x¥1t% 2%

Inches

2Vs VA&A

&A&A

1A. sy2 wy2 Common boards and

strips

1Wi

1%

22y2 3

1 34

56

78

9

10

11122

4

68

10124

5

64

5

68

2

3

4

5

6

l ff

ItV i&

1 m

2Ys &A&A

sy2 m&Am7M9M HM

3^&A

j Ship-lap

t m

&A7Am

2y2 mVA

&A

22H

3

4 Over 4

1%2K2%&A

Bevel siding MbyA ^by&

Rustic and drop siding xf

Flooring VsH5A13

16 \i

Ceiling

1

34

5

6 Partition

2 &35A

%

1316

3>2 ±A

oA

2A•m

VA

VA

VAm

m

7Am

Ship-lap.. i 4

6

810

124

6

810

12

if

Dressed and matched ii%VA

**

- i£

m

1 Same thickness and widths as American Standard industrial lumber.

2 Finished thickness inch, or inch thinner than American

Standard.

3 Finished thickness inch, as American Standard. 139
411.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Factory flooring, heavy roofing, decking, and sheet

'piling

Size—board measure Thickness

Widths

North Carolina pine super standard

Thickness Width

North

Carolina

pine super D and M S/L Grooved 1

22M

34

4

6

8

1012

1U

2%

3M

3M

iy2 3H

7Vs m

1 Grooved for splines. Thickness of yard lumber measured and described

as follows:

Super

standard

1 inch, board measure, to be not less than..

Inches

ft !*i&

1H2H2%

V-A

IM inches, board measure, to be not less than iy2 inches, board measure, to be not less than.. 1% inches, board measure, to be not less than

2 inches, board measure, to be not less than.

2Al inches, board measure, to be not less than.

3 inches, board measure, to be not less than.. 3M inches, board measure, to be not less than

4 inches, board measure, to be not less than Uorth Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), official inspection rules for yard and industrial lumber,

January 1, 1927. Count and sizes. All dressed stock shall be measured and sold

strip count, viz, full size of rough material, when in condition for commercial use, necessarily used in

its manufacture.

Finish to be xf inch thick in North Carolina

Pine Association super standard and 3^g, 4^g, 5^,

6^, 73^, 83^, 93^, 1(% and 11^ inches wide and

f§ inch in standard thickness and 2%, 33^, 43^,

5% 6% 7H, $H> 10M, and 11M inches wide. Roofers (American standard) to be worked fl- inch thick by 5}4, 7}i, 9M> inches wide, when

dressed two sides and center matched.

Roofers (North Carolina super standard) to be

worked H inch thick by 53^, 73^, % inches

wide, when dressed two sides and center matched.

Ship-lap roofers (American standard) to be

worked ff inch thick by 5^, 7V%, 93^, and

113^8 inches wide, with ^3-inch rabbet. Ship-lap roofers (North Carolina super standard) to be worked ff inch thick by 53^, 7}4i,

93^, ll^s inches wide, with 3^-inch rabbet. One-quarter inch width shall be allowed on North

Carolina super standard factory flooring when

grooved for splines and 3^ inch when tongued and

grooved. One-half inch in width shall be allowed for working molding base and casing, except on all patterns

finished on the quarter inch or three-quarter inch,

for which shall be allowed one-quarter inch.

Drop siding (American standard) shall be fin- ished ^ inch and % inch thick and 5^ inches wide,

with %-inch rabbet. North Carolina super stand- ard thickness xf inch and 53^ inches wide, with

3^-inch rabbet. Bevel siding to be Y2 inch thick on

one edge, & inch on the other edge.

American standard and North Carolina super standard % inch in width shall be allowed for dress- ing 7 inches and under four sides, but 3^ inch shall be allowed for dressing boards wider than 7 inches. Two by four North Carolina super standard

when S4S shall be 1% by 3^ inches. American

standard when S4S shall be 1^8 by 3% inches. Matching.

All flooring, ceiling, and partition, % inch thick and over, shall be dressed two sides and center matched. All ceiling under ^ inch thick shall be

dressed one side and matched.

Dressing.

North Carolina super standard y% inch shall be

allowed to dress 4/4 and 5/4 stock and edge boards one side, and r

3g inch shall be allowed to dress 4/4,

5/4, and 6/4 stock and edge boards two sides. American standard ^2 inch shall be allowed to

dress 4/4 stock and edge boards two sides and ^ inch in 5/4 and 6/4. One-fourth inch shall be allowed to dress 8/4 and

thicker one or two sides. One-fourth inch shall be allowed in dressing various

thicknesses of factory flooring.

Log run.—This grade shall consist of the product

of the log with the exception of cull red heart. Lengths of rough lumber.—8 to 16 feet, not exceeding 5 per cent of 8-foot lengths.

Thickness of 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 8/4, 10/4, and 12/4

rough lumber (N. C. pine super standard) is 1, 134, IM, 1%, 2, 23^, and 3 inch, respectively, but 25

per cent may be 3^-inch scant. Widths of stock boards are 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 12

inches (N. C. pine super standard), but 10 per cent may be 3^8 scant of such widths in B and better. For common lumber, see No. 402.42 lengths under common boards and strips. Thin boards are those cut thinner than required

in standard thickness of 4/4 lumber, but will dress two sides to 5/8, and may be graded the same as standard thickness. Miscut lumber brought to standard thickness of

1 inch or over by dressing on one or two sides to equalize same will be considered as rough lumber,

and to be graded from the best side. Special provisions crooked lumber. The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot

lengths, shall be permissible in all grades of finish: Crook

1 and 134 inches by 3 inches 3-inch.

1 and IM inches by 4 inches 23^-inch.

1 and 134 inches by 5 and 6 inches 2-inch.

1 and 134 inches by 7 and 8 inches 1^-inch.

1 and 134 inches by 9 and 10 inches 134-inch.

1 and 134 inches by 11 and 12 inches 1-inch. 140
LUMBER FOE, BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.0

For 1}4 and 2 inch thicknesses, crook 3^ inch less than above is permissible. Pieces longer or shorter than 16 feet may have proportionate amounts of crook. The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot

lengths, shall be permissible in No. 1 and No. 2 common grades:

Crook

3, 4, 5, and 6 inch widths 3-inch. 7 and S inch widths 23^-inch. 9 and 10 inch widths 2-inch. 11 and 12 inch widths 1^-inch.

Pieces longer or shorter than 16 feet may have

proportionate amounts of crook. A greater amount

of crook shall be permissible in Nos. 3 and 4 common

grades.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for yard lumber, Schedule M, 1925. GENERAL NOTES Merchantable lumber, as described in these grading rules will be graded taking into consideration

its suitability for good substantial constructional purposes in the shape and sizes in which it is ordered and shipped.

It is not intended to supply a grade suitable for remanufacturing into smaller sizes. All fractions of a foot in length when ordered shall be measured as of contents of the next longer even

length.

All lumber sawn less than 1 inch in thickness shall be measured as of 1 inch; that is, surface measure

for sale purposes.

All rough lumber, 1 inch and over in thickness,

shall be measured at board measure contents.

All worked or surfaced lumber shall be measured

at the board measure contents before working.

Sizes 4 inches and under in thickness and 6 inches and under in width will be worked y& inch less for each side or edge surfaced.

Sizes over 4 inches in thickness and 6 inches and

over in width will be worked }/i inch less for each

side or edge surfaced. In sizes 4 inches and under in thickness and over

6 inches in width each side will be surfaced 3^8 inch

less and each edge ]/i inch less. In the absence of a special agreement between

buyer and seller, for each order, all dressed lumber

will be finished to the sizes specified in these rules. Flooring, rustic siding, ceiling, and ship-lap will be worked in accordance with the official patterns

for such items included in this list. At shipper's option, flooring, ceiling, and rustic siding may be shipped SIS, S2S, or with bottom

side partially surfaced. Should SIS stock be re- quired it must be specifically so stated by buyer

at time order is placed. In kiln dried or air dried stock, bright sap is not

to be considered a defect. Edge grain clears in widths 10 inches and wider

will be so graded when showing grain on edge for at least two-thirds of the face width.

Variation in sawing as specified in these rules shall mean a deviation from a given straight line. Equivalent, in the application of these rules, means that the defects allowed, whether specified or

not, are understood to be equivalent in effect to those specially mentioned.

The face or best side, of a piece of lumber, shall be used to determine the grade. Unless otherwise

provided, lumber worked or surfaced two sides

shall be graded from the best side; lumber worked

or surfaced one side shall be graded from the sur- faced side. All dimensions are sold subject to any natural

shrinkage, whether green, partially or wholly sea- soned. As it is a well-known fact that all lumber

does not shrink alike, therefore, where seasoned lumber is shipped, especially so in the grades of clears it will, at the time of loading, be considered by the supervisor and inspector whether it will work

to the dry standards in its size in accordance with

the official patterns for worked sizes, included in

this fist. The enumerated defects herein described in any

grade are intended to be descriptive of the coarsest piece such grades may contain. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for yard lumber, July 1, 1925. RULES FOR GRADING LARCH AND FIR LUMBER

Because of its strength and durability, pleasing appearance, and easy working qualities, western

larch is steadily gaining in favor as an all-purpose

wood wherever its merits are known.

The following rules are drawn with the special purpose of dividing the product of the log into units

of value best adapted to the requirements of the

trade and to assure the customer of receiving uni- form grades of larch and fir at all times from any

mill affiliated with the Western Pine Manufacturers

Association. The rules apply to all widths and thicknesses whether rough, S2S, or S4S, or worked to any pattern.

Red fir is of similar character and quality and is permitted in all grades of larch. C and better larch. C and better shall consist of C and all the better product of the stock. The fact that it contains a

large proportion of practically perfect stock tends

to give the grade as a whole a clear appearance. On

the basis of 1 by 4 by 12, five or six pin knots or three or four small knots will be allowed if well

scattered, or one or two larger knots if well located. In the absence of knots, or with fewer knots, slightly torn or raised grain, small season checks, small

pitch pockets or other small defects common to larch and fir will be admitted.

A serious combination of the above defects will not be allowed in any one piece nor any defect that

will destroy the high quality and appearance of the

grade.

D larch. The grade of D includes all stock between C and

better and the common grades and will admit quite

serious defects if at the same time the piece retains

141
411.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

a good appearance. Fine seasoning checks over the

entire face or several larger seasoning checks will be admitted, also numerous small knots, pitch

pockets, raised grain, torn grain, or other defects common to larch and fir that do not give a coarse

or common appearance to the piece. One cut not

to exceed 4 inches of waste will be allowed in high

line pieces 12 feet long or longer.

Common larch. In the common grades, larch and fir, which are usually mixed, will carry the same appearance, grade

for grade, in the general measurement of defects as Pondosa pine.

411.1 SIDING.

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, sizes and grades for

soft pine drop, bevel, and barn siding, March 23, 1927. Similar to those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine Association. (See pages 145 and 147.) End matching.

All end-matched drop siding are manufactured

to American Lumber Standards sizes. The grades

are similar to those of the Southern Pine Association. (See page 147.) Patterns. Patterns for siding are illustrated in Figures 9, 10, 12, and 13. California Redwood Association, standard specifi- cations for eastern grades of California redwood

bevel and bungalow or colonial siding, April, 1927. The sizes of siding are as shov^n in this association's table of sizes of yard lumber, 411.0. Bevel and bungalow or colonial siding.

The grades of siding are based on a piece 12 feet long by the width being graded; on this basis longer

pieces will admit a proportionate number of defects. Grades.—Clear heart (Redwood Association

grade), and A and B (American Standard redwood

grades)

Lengths.—Standard lengths shall be 3 to 20 feet, inclusive, in multiples of 6 inches up to and includ- ing 5 feet 6 inches; in multiples of 1 foot up to and

including 9 feet; and in multiples of 2 feet in 10 to 20 feet, admitting not to exceed 10 per cent of 3 to 7 foot lengths.

Special provisions.—All grades of siding will admit slight imperfections on the thin edge which

will be covered by the lap when laid. Small crook shall be permissible in clear heart and A siding and medium crook in B siding.

Slight cup shall be permissible in all grades of siding. Clear heart siding shall be heartwood, well manufactured, and free from all defects except a small amount of sound bird's-eye and sap on thin edge

which will be covered by lap when laid, will be

allowed. A siding will admit sound tight bird's-eye, any

amount of bright sapwood, and in addition any one

of the following defects, equivalent defects, or combinations thereof: Three small surface checks; two

slight defects in manufacture; three sound and tight

pin knots; light stain 5 per cent of area. B siding will admit any of the following defects or

their equivalent: Three small surface checks; pin

wormholes or unsound bird's-eye, one per surface

foot; slight defects in manufacture or seasoning; two small sound and intergrown knots; any amount

of medium or heavy stain; or any combination of defects in pieces 10 feet and longer that can be

removed in two cuts with waste not to exceed 10 per cent of the length, provided not more than

20 per cent of the pieces in any one bundle shall be

of said cutting type.

Drop siding.

The basis of grade, lengths, special provisions,

and standard workings specified for flooring, ceiling,

and partition shall apply to drop siding, D&M or ship-lapped.

Grades.—Clear heart (Redwood Association

grade), A, B, and No. 1 common (American Standard redwood grades).

Drop siding, dressed and matched or ship-lapped,

shall be graded according to the rules for the respective grades of finish and common boards. B grade will admit the cut-out allowed in B

flooring, ceiling, and partition. California Redwood Association, standard specifi- cations for eastern grades of California redwood

barn siding, April, 1927. The grades of barn siding are the same as common

boards 402.42.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grades for California white

pine, sugar pine, white fir, Douglas fir, and incense cedar bevel siding, May 1, 1926.

Sizes. Bevel siding is produced by resawing lumber,

surfaced four sides, on a bevel so as to produce two

pieces, thicker on one edge than the other. Bevel

siding shall be inch thick on the thin edge by

inch thick on the thick edge. Yfidths shall be

Y2 inch less than nominal. Standard lengths of bevel siding shall be 2 feet and longer in 6-inch

intervals. Random length shipments may contain not to exceed 20 per cent under 10 feet in length.

Except when specified in the terms of the sale, not more than 5 per cent of the shipment shall consist of lengths shorter than 6 feet. Bevel siding should be graded from the face side, and the thick edge shall be considered part of the

face. Defects on the thin edge which will cover when laid should not be given the same consideration as defects elsewhere. The lap shall be z/i inch on 4-inch, 1 inch on 5 and 6 inch, and 13^ inches on

wider stock. Grades. B and better, C, D, and S. B and better siding.—This grade will admit of three or four small knots, if well located, or a pitch

pocket, y% by 2 inches, if it does not show through,

142
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.1

or two smaller pitch pockets if a considerable dis- tance apart and not showing through the piece, a

small amount of light stain, slight traces of pitch or other minor defects, but not a serious combination

of the above defects. C siding.—This grade will admit of two or three small sound knots not exceeding 1 inch in diameter,

or more knots when smaller; also small pitch pockets

that do not show through. Medium stain covering

one-third of the face or a greater area of lighter stain is admitted if not in combination with other marked defects. Defects requiring one cut not to exceed 4 inches of waste are allowed in high line pieces 12 feet long and longer, but not more than

20 per cent of such pieces shall be permitted in this grade.

D siding.—This grade will admit season checks,

pitch, defective mill work, and a number of small knots if well scattered over the face of piece, medium

stain covering the entire piece is allowed if not in combination with other marked defects. Pieces 12

feet long or longer may have two defects causing waste not exceeding 4 inches each, provided the balance is of B and better quality. In pieces 10 feet long or longer requiring one cut, one of the remaining

pieces must be of C select or better quality.

E siding. —This is the lowest recognized grade of beveled siding and will admit of stain, knots, pitch

pockets, pitch and season checks, not admissible

in D siding.

Many pieces showing seriously defective mill work

or imperfect manufacture are also admitted in this grade.

Varieties. Colonial and bungalow siding. Colonial siding.—This grade may be either plain or rabbeted thick edge. It shall be graded on the

surfaced side, on the basis of bevel siding grades,

similar defects, grade for grade, being permitted

proportional to the area of the piece.

Standard thicknesses.—f| inch on the thick edge

and ye m°h on the thin edge. Any other specified thicknesses are considered special.

Bungalow siding.—This grade is considered the same as colonial siding, except that bungalow siding

is made to lay resawn (rough) side out, and is therefore graded from the rough side. California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grades for California white

pine, sugar pine, white fir, Douglas fir, and incense cedar drop siding, May 1, 1926. Standard thicknesses.

Nominal (inches)

Finished

Standard Extra

standard A

Inches

If

Inch n

1 16 IX

Standard widths.

Nominal (inches) Face (D&M)

Face

(ship-lap) Over-all width

3 Inches2V8 5H7H

Inches Inches2%&Am

7Al

4 5V8 m

56

8

Standard lengths. Shall be 8 feet and up in multiples of 1 foot. Standard grades. Shall be graded according to the rules for finish- ing and common boards. Defective machine work

resulting in broken tongue or groove is serious and

must be given consideration by the grader.

Patterns. Patterns for siding are similar to those of the West Coast Lumbermen's Association. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for cypress siding, January, 1927.

Sizes. Siding shall be made from 4, 5, and 6 inch widths

S4S to f| inch by 33^, 43^, and inches, and

resawed on a bevel. Lengths. Four to twenty feet. Grades A and B shall be 8

to 20 feet long. Grades. A, B, C, and D. (Inspection shall be made from

the finished side.) A siding.—This grade will admit 1 inch of bright

sapwood on the thin edge and two small round defects that will be covered by the lap.

B siding.—Bright sapwood is not a defect. This

grade may have three p^-inch sound defects or one sound standard defect and slight wane not exceeding -5^2 inch in width on the thin edge, or its equivalent in other defects covered by the lap. Pieces

free from other defects will admit a small amount

of stained sapwood.

C siding.—This grade will admit sapwood (bright or stained) , scattered pinworm holes, and in addition may have one sound standard defect or four %-inch

sound defects. Twenty per cent of the quantity

may contain unsound defects in pieces 10 feet and

over long that will not cause a waste of more than

one-twelfth of the piece in two crosscuttings.

D siding.—This grade will admit any number of sound defects. Thirty per cent of the pieces may

have unsound defects that will not cause a waste of more than one-third of the pieces in three crosscuttings.

North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), sizes and

grades for bevel and drop siding, January 1, 1927.

Lengths.

Same as in ceiling, No. 411.3. Grades. Same as in finish, No. 411.4. 143
411.1 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Patterns. Patterns for siding are similar to those of the West Coast Lumbermen's Association. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), sizes and

grades for barn siding, January 1, 1927. Lengths and grades same as those for common

boards, No. 402.42. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grading rules for hemlock

drop siding and bevel siding, February 1, 1927. Thickness. Three-fourths inch. Width in inches

Nominal

board measure

Face widthOver-all width Drop siding (dressed and matched) Drop siding (ship-lap)

4

6

4

6 Ik

5A 5rV Bevel siding shall be worked to ^ by ^ inch and ^ by ^ inch in nominal widths of 4, 5, and

6 inches dressed to 33/£, 43^, and 53^ inches,

respectively.

Lengths.

Same as for flooring. (See 411.24.) Grades. D and better, No. 1 common, No. 2 common, No.

3 common. Same as for flooring except D and

better, which is as follows: D and better grade of drop siding and bevel siding.—

Will allow small, well seated, sound black or red

knots, well scattered, and should be free from shake

and wane, and useful without waste. Bevel siding should be sound and smooth stock worked to standard size. It admits defects on thin edge which will cover when laid to 23^, 33^, and 43^

inches to weather.

(Note to manufacttjeee.—Great care should be used in selecting stock when making bevel siding from hemlock strips. It should be taken from straight grained, small timber as free from sap as

possible.) Patterns. Patterns for siding are illustrated in figures 20 to

46.Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, rules for the grading of northern white and Norway pine, eastern spruce, and tamarack bevel siding, April 15, 1925.

Sizes (American Lumber Standards).

4-inch, by by 33^ inches.

6-inch, by ^ by 53^ inches. Grades. B and better, C, D, and E. Graded from the

face side only and based on a piece 6 inches wide and

16 feet long. (Defects on the thin edge which will cover when laid should not be given the same

consideration as defects elsewhere.)

B and better siding.—This grade shall consist of B siding and all the better product of the stock.

It will admit of two or three sound pin knots, or

their equivalent of minor defects well scattered over

the face of the piece.

C siding.—This grade will admit one or two medium knots, not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, or more smaller knots, or a small pitch defect, or slight

shake, or season checks, but no serious combination

of these defects in any one piece. A small amount

of medium stain is admissible on thick edge. Defects requiring one cut not to exceed 4 inches

of waste are allowed in high line piece 12 feet and

longer.

D siding.—This grade will admit of medium stain covering the entire face of the piece if no other

defects, or light stain when in combination with

other defects. Considerable fine shake or season

checks, which do not show through the piece, and a number of small knots well scattered over the face

are admissible, but not in serious combination so as

to cause waste to exceed 4 inches in two cuts in pieces 11 feet and longer.

E siding.—This is the lowest recognized grade of bevel siding and will admit of the stain, knot, and

shake defects not admissible in D sidiDg. Many

pieces showing seriously defective mill work are found in this grade.

Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, rules

for the grading of northern white and Norway pine, spruce, and tamarack drop siding, April 15, 1925. Drop siding shall be graded under the same rules as dressed and matched. (See No. 411.6.)

Pacific Lumher Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Douglas fir kiln-dried rustic siding, Schedule M,

1925.

Sizes. (See illustrations in Figures 3 to 8.) Grade. No. 2 clear and better. (Defects based on a

piece 1 by 4 inches by 12 feet, rules to be applied

proportionately on narrow and wider stock.) No. 2 clear and better, flat grain, kiln-dried, 4, 6, and 8 inch. Shall be well manufactured, admitting

slight roughness in dressing. Will allow one sound

and tight knot % inch or less in diameter or four

pitch pockets and/or pitch blisters each not over

4 inches in length, if not extending through the

thickness of the piece, or equivalent defects. A

piece 12 feet and longer may have one defect located 4 feet or more from either end which can be cut out by wasting not more than 23^ inches of the length,

providing balance of piece be practically free from

defects. Bright sap no defect. Edge grain may be

included at shipper's option.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Douglas fir green siding, Schedule M, 1925

Grades. Green No. 2 clear and No. 3 clear. No. 2 clear and better, edge and/or flat grain, green. Shall be well manufactured. Will admit

slight roughness in dressing, bright sap one-half of width. One of the following is also permitted with

144
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.1

one of the foregoing two defects; three pitch pockets,

or pitch blisters, each not over 2 inches in length

if not extending through the thickness of the piece, one sound tight knot M inch or less in diameter,

or equivalent defects. Edge grain may be included

with flat grain at shipper's option. No. 3 clear green shall consist of lengths 6 feet and

longer regardless of grain. Will admit of roughness

in dressing, slightly discolored sap, three sound tight knots each 1 inch or less in diameter, or four pitch

pockets not over 4 inches in length and/or pitch blisters, any two pockets of which may extend through

the thickness of the piece; or equivalent defects. A piece 12 feet or longer otherwise as good as No. 2

clear may have a defect which can be cut out and

the piece laid with a waste of not more than 23^

inches in its length, providing the defect is 4 feet or more from either end of the piece. Imperfect

edges, such as small knots torn out in machining

and occasional scant tongue, not less than Y% inch,

shall not exclude lumber from this grade.

Patterns. Patterns for siding are illustrated in Figures 3 to 8. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers Association,

standard grading rules for western red cedar bevel and bungalow siding, August 1, 1925. General grading rules. Slash and/or vertical grain. Color is not a defect. Occasional slight variation in thickness permitted,

but not to exceed a total of ^ inch in any two

pieces. Defects on thin edge which will cover when

laid should not be given the same consideration as

defects elsewhere. All bevel and bungalow siding

shall be surfaced one side and two edges.

Sizes for bevel siding.

Finished thicknesses.—3^ inch thick edge, ^ inch

thin edge.

Finished widths.—33^ inches, 43^ inches, 53^

inches. Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. Standard bundles are 8 feet and up, 10 layers to each bundle. In bundles 10 feet and longer 30 per

cent shorter lengths shall be included in each bundle. Grades for bevel siding (defects based on 12 feet). Clear, A, B, and C.

Clear.—Shall be well milled on face and edges and

practically free from all defects. Bright sap 3^ inch

wide on thin edge admitted. Minor defects on thin edge which will cover when laid. Usable full length without waste, containing no defect that will not cover with paint. A.—Bright sap no defect. Will admit the follow- ing defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Slight torn grain; slight raised grain; occasional small rough spots on thick edge; minor defects on thin edge which will cover when laid. Usable full length without waste, containing no

defect that will not cover with paint.

B.—Admits siding below A grade. Stained sap no defect. Will admit slight torn grain and slight raised grain. With one of the above, will admit one

of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an

equivalent combination of defects: Four sound and

tight small knots; occasional slight skips on face and

edges; a few pin wormholes, well scattered; heavy

skips, holes, or other defects that can be cut out by

wasting not more than 20 per cent of the length of the piece by not exceeding two cut-outs in pieces 10 feet and longer, provided the pieces resulting are

3 feet or longer.

C.—Will admit all pieces falling below B grade on

account of imperfect manufacture or other defects. Especially is this grade intended to cover stock too thin to dress to standard sizes and, consequently,

will be mostly rough. This grade will take all lengths and no specified percentages are guaranteed.

Sizes for bungalow or colonial siding. Defects based on 8 inches by 12 feet. Finished thicknesses.—

3^-inch stock, inch thin edge, 3^ inch thick

edge. 24-inch stock, ^ inch thin edge, z/i inch thick

edge. Finished widths.—7J^, 93^, 11 3^ inches. Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. (Standard bundles are 8 feet and up. One-half

inch stock is bundled 10 layers to bundle. In bundles 10 feet and longer 3 layers of shorter lengths

shall be included in each bundle. Three-fourths

inch stock is bundled 6 layers to bundle. In bundles 10 feet and longer 2 layers of shorter lengths

shall be included in each bundle.) Grades for bungalow or colonial siding. No. 1 and No. 2. No. 1 bungalow or colonial siding is produced

from stock carefully graded in the rough, and No. 1 grade includes all stock that will lay clear without

waste and containing no defects that will not cover with paint, making a smooth job. Vertical and/or

flat grain permitted. No. 2 admits siding below No. 1 grade. Vertical and/or flat grain permitted. Stained sap no defect. Will admit slight torn grain and slight raised grain.

With one of the above, will admit one of the follow- ing defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent

combination of defects: Four sound and tight small

knots; occasional slight skips on face and edges; a few pin wormholes, well scattered; heavy skips, holes or other defects that can be cut out by wasting

not more than 20 per cent of the length of the piece

by not exceeding two cut-outs in pieces 10 feet and

longer provided the pieces resulting are 3 feet and

longer.

Southeastern Forest Products Association, sizes and grades for southern pine drop siding and bevel

siding, September 1, 1925.

145
411.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Sizes.

Width

Dressed dimensions at commercially dry shipping weight

Thickness Face width

Over- aU width

Bevel siding ___ __ Inches

4

56

4

56

8

45

68

Inches

re by &

A

%

&3A

Inches

4M

5&

7Mm

7Vs

Inchesmm

mVA

VAmm

7A

Rustic and drop siding (D

and M)

Rustic and drop siding (ship- lapped).

Bevel siding lengths. Standard lengths and percentages of short lengths

shall be the same as in drop siding. Grades of bevel siding. A, B, No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and No. 3 common.

All grades same as for drop siding, and will admit,

in addition, slight imperfections on the thin edge,

which will be covered by the lap when laid 2^£,

33^, or 43^ inches to the weather. Drop siding lengths. Standard lengths are 4 to 20 feet, inclusive, and

the following percentages of short lengths may be

included in all miscellaneous or mixed length ship- ments : A and B 5 per cent 8 and/or 9-foot. No. 1 common 5 per cent 6 and/or 7-foot. 5 per cent 8 and/or 9-foot. No. 2 common 5 per cent 4 and/or 5-foot. 5 per cent 6 and/or 7-foot. 5 per cent 8 and/or 9-foot. No. 3 common Not to exceed 20 per cent

4 and 6 foot lengths. Note.—The above percentage of short lengths is customary, and

in the interest of conservation, will be included, so far as practicable, in all shipments of mixed lengths. Grades. A, B, No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and No. 3 common.

The grades of drop siding are based on a piece 6 inches by 12 feet long as compared with a piece 4 inches by 12 feet long. With the exception of the change in the unit of grading the grades are identical with the similarly named grades of flooring. See No. 411.27.

Patterns. Patterns for siding are illustrated in Figures 9

to 13. Southeastern Forest Products Association, sizesand grades for southern pine barn siding, September 1, 1925.

Lengths and grades are the same as those for common beards, 402.42.

Patterns. Patterns for barn siding are illustrated in Figures 9 to 13. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

standard grades and classifications for tupelo drop

siding and bevel siding, June 15, 1927.

Sizes of drop siding. Thickness.—|§ inch. Widths.—Standard, worked from 4 to 6 inch stock. Lengths.—8 to 20 feet admitting 15 per cent of 8,

9, and 10 foot lengths, and not to exceed 5 per cent

of lengths under 10 feet. Odd lengths are not stand- ard above 10 feet. May also be specified 4 to 7 feet. Grade of drop siding.

C and better. C and better grade may be worked to any stand- ard pattern desired, tongued and grooved or shiplapped if so desired. Sound sap, slightly discolored,

and two standard knots, or their equivalent in small

knots, or other defects, will be admitted.

Sizes of bevel siding. Thickness.—Y% inch. Widths.—Standard, worked from 4, 5, and 6 inch

stock. Lengths.—8 to 20 feet admitting not over 15 per

cent of 8, 9, and 10 feet, and not to exceed 5 per cent under 10 feet. Odd lengths are not standard above

10 feet. Shall be graded from the finished side, B

and better, and C, and 4 to 7 foot lengths C and

better. Grades of bevel siding.

B and better and C. B and better will admit sound sap slightly dis- colored, and other small defects which may be

covered by the lap.

C shall comprise stock not up to the grade of B, and may contain defects or imperfections in manufacture which may be removed in two cuts with waste not exceeding 10 per cent of the length of any one piece.

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

standard grades and classifications for cypress bevel

siding and bungalow siding, June 15, 1925. Sizes of bevel siding. Thickness.—Y2 by ys inch. Width.—4, 5, and 6 inches wide.

Length.—8 to 20 feet, admitting not over 15 per

cent of 8, 9, and 10 feet, and not to exceed 5 per

cent under 10 feet. Odd lengths are not standard

above 10 feet. Grades of bevel siding.

A, B, C, and D, and 4 to 7 foot lengths C and

better. (Graded from the finished side.) A siding.—May have 1 inch of bright sap on thin edge and may contain one small sound knot. B siding.—Bright sap is not a defect in this grade.

May have three small sound knots or in lieu of knots

a few pin wormholes, and may have slight wane cn 146
LUMBER FOE BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.1

the thin edge. In the absence of other defects, a

small amount of stained sap will be admitted.

C siding.—May have one medium knot or four small sound knots or a few pin wormholes well scattered over the piece. Sound sap, bright or

stained, will be admitted.

D siding.—Admits more and coarser defects than

C siding, but none that will preclude full-length use. Sizes of bungalow siding. Thickness.— by ^ inch, ^ by ^ inch, and

i| by -h inch. Width.—8, 10, and 12 inches. Length.—8 to 20 feet, admitting not more than

15 per cent of 8, 9, and 10 feet, and not to exceed

5 per cent under 10 feet. Grades of bungalow siding. Shall be worked and graded same as bevel siding

except that the A grade will admit 2 inches of bright

sap.Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

standard grades and classifications of cypress drop

siding, June 15, 1925. Thickness. % inch. Width.

Shall be specified widths, 3, 4, 5, and 6 inches

wide.

Length. 8 to 20 feet (except in D grade), admitting 15 per

cent of 8, 9, and 10 foot lengths, and not to exceed

5 per cent of lengths under 10 feet. Odd lengths

are not standard above 10 feet. May also be

specified 4 to 7 feet. Shall be graded from the finished side, or if both

sides are finished, it shall be graded from the better

side, A, B, C, and D.

A, B, C, and D grades are the same as for flooring. See No. 411.22. Southern Pine Association, sizes and grades for southern pine drop, bevel, and barn siding, March

23, 1927. Similar to the Southeastern Forest Products Association, with the following additional statement

relating to end matching:

End matching.

All end-matched drop siding manufactured to American Lumber Standard sizes, as provided in the Southern Pine Association rules, will be graded on

Southern Pine Association standard rules, except No. 2 common, which will lay a serviceable wall without cutting.

All end-matched drop siding will be bundled to the nearest foot, the shortest bundle to be 2 feet and trimmed in multiples of 1 foot or a fraction

thereof, and with the following regulation in respect

to length:

Feet A, minimum average 9 B and better, minimum average 8

B, minimum average 7

All commons, minimum average 5

Patterns. This association's patterns for siding are illus- trated in Figures 9, 10, 12, and 13. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, sizes and

grading rules for Douglas fir, west coast hemlock,

Sitka spruce, and western red cedar siding, July 1, 1926. Douglas fir drop siding, kiln dried, flat grain, andIor

vertical grain.

Thickness, finished.—% to ys inch; 1 to % inch. Widths, nominal: 4, 6, and 8 inches. Widths, finished: z/i, §t$, and 7 inches. Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. Douglas fir drop-siding grades, fiat grain, and/or

vertical grain.

B and better, C, and D. B and better.—Shall be well manufactured and will admit slight torn grain. With the above, will admit

one of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three sound

and tight pin knots; 4 small (4-inch) pitch pockets, none through. Will admit wane (on reverse side) in addition to other permissible defects, one-third width, one-sixth length, not into tongue.

C.—Will admit medium torn grain; medium sap

stain, 25 per cent of face. With the above, will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three 1-inch sound and tight knots; 5 small (4-inch)

pitch pockets, 3 of which may be through; 3 small

seasoning checks; small number of pin wormholes.

Will also admit cut-out of 2Y2 inches for a defect 4 feet or more from either end in pieces 12 feet or

longer, if piece is otherwise as good as B; wane

(on reverse side) in addition to other permissible

defects, one-third width, one-sixth length, not into tongue. D.—Will admit the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combination of defects: 1-inch sound and tight knots; numerous small pitch

pockets (several of which may be through), or equivalent medium to large pitch pockets; short

splits; large pitch streaks; heart stain; medium sap

stain; 4 heavy skips, each not over 12 inches long

based on 12-foot length; groove edge, hit and miss; scant tongue; torn grain; pinworm holes; seasoning

checks; 1 knot hole in pieces 8 to 14 feet long, and

2 knot holes in pieces 16 feet or longer; wane (on

reverse side) in addition to other permissible defects, one-third width, one-third length of piece.

Douglas fir rustic siding, kiln dried. Thicknesses, finished—

Widths, nominal: 4, 6, and 8 inches. Face, finished: 3%, 5^, and 6% inches. Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. Grades.—Same as for drop siding above. Douglas fir bungalow or colonial siding.

Thickness, finished.—xl by Y inch. Width, finished: 8 inches and wider, % inch off. Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. Bundling.—Standard bundles are 8 feet and up. One-half inch stock is bundled 10 layers to bundle. In bundles 10 feet longer 3 layers of 3 to 7 foot 147
411.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

lengths shall be included in each bundle. Threefourths-inch stock is bundled 6 layers to bundle. In bundles 10 feet and longer 2 layers of 3 to 7 foot lengths shall be included in each bundle. Grade {defects based on 10 inches by 12 feet): B and

better. B and better.—Will admit occasional slight vari- ation in thickness, not to exceed a total of inch

in any two pieces; slight torn grain. With the

above, will admit one of the following defects, an

equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three sound and tight pin knots; four very

small (2-inch) pitch pockets, none through. This

grade will permit of the inclusion of not over 15 per

cent of material with machine defects (such as torn

grain or slight skips) in greater amount than ordi- narily permitted in B and better. Defects on thin edge which will cover when laid not to be given same

consideration as defects elsewhere. Douglas fir bevel siding, kiln dried. Thickness, finished.—3^ by ^ inch. Widths, finished: 33^, 4^, and 5^ inches. Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. Bundling.—Standard bundles are 8 feet and up, 10 layers to each bundle. In bundles 10 feet and

longer, 30 per cent shorter lengths shall be included

in each bundle. Grades {defects based on 6 inches by 12 feet): A, B,

and C. Bright sap no defect.—Will admit occasional slight variation in thickness, not to exceed a total of t$

inch in any 2 pieces. Defects on thin edge which

will cover when laid not to be given same consideration as defects elsewhere. A, bevel siding.—Shall be well manufactured.

Will admit the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Slight torn

grain ; twoverysmall (2-inch) pitch pockets, none open

through. Shall be suitable for use full length without waste, containing no defects that will not cover with paint. B, bevel siding.—Will admit slight torn grain.

With the above, will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Four sound and tight pin

knots; four small (4-inch) pitch pockets, none open

through; occasional slight skips on face or edges;

light sap stain, 15 per cent of face. Shall be suitable

for use without waste.

C, bevel siding.—Stained sap no defect. Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects; stained sap; torn grain; raised grain; slight skips on face; sound and tight knots; pitch pockets, not

through. Pieces 8 feet and longer, will admit rough

edges; heavy skips; knot holes; through pitch

pockets, or equivalent defects that can be cut out with a waste not exceeding 33}^ per cent of the

length of the piece, provided the pieces resulting are 3 feet or longer. Not more than 2 cut-outs allowed,

however, in any one piece. Percentage of lengths not guaranteed. Large percentage of shorts per- mitted at shipper's option.

West coast hemlock drop siding, rustic siding, and

bungalow or colonial siding. Sizes and grades identical with those for Douglas

fir. (See above.) West coast hemlock bevel siding, kiln dried. Sizes identical with those for Douglas fir. (See

above.)

Bundling.—Standard bundles are 8 feet and up, 10

layers to each bundle. In bundles 10 feet and

longer, 30 per cent 3 to 7 foot lengths shall be included

in each bundle.

Grades. B and better, C, and D.

Bright sap no defecl.—Will admit occasional slight variation in thickness, not to exceed a total of inch in any two pieces. Defects on thin edge which

will cover when laid not to be given same consideration as defects in each bundle. B and better.—Shall be well manufactured. Will admit the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Slight torn grain; three very small (2-inch) bark pockets, none open

through. Suitable for use full length without waste, containing no defects that will not cover with paint.

C.—Will admit slight torn grain. With the above,

will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects; four sound and tight pin knots or equivalent black burls; four (4-inch) bark pockets, none open through; occasional slight skips on face or edges; light sap stain 15 per cent of face. Suitable for use full length with- out waste. D.—Stained sap no defect. Will admit any num

ber of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Stained sap, torn

grain, raised grain, slight skips on face, sound and

tight knots, and pitch pockets, not through. Pieces

8 feet and longer, will admit rough edges; heavy skips;

knot holes through pitch pockets, or equivalent defects that can be cut out with a waste not exceeding 333^ per cent of the length of the piece, provided the

pieces resulting are three feet or longer. Not more

than two cut-outs allowed, however, in any one piece.

Percentage of lengths not guaranteed. Large per- centage of shorts permitted at shipper's option. Sitka spruce bungalow or colonial siding, kiln dried. Sizes identical with those for Douglas fir. (See

above.)

Bundling.—Standard bundles are 8 feet and up. One-half inch stock is bundled 10 layers to bundle. In bundles 10 feet and longer 3 layers of 3 to 7 foot lengths shall be included in each bundle. Threefourths-inch stock is bundled 6 layers to bundle. In

bundles 10 feet and longer 2 layers of 3 to 7 feet lengths shall be included in each bundle.

Grade. B and better. Defects based on 8 to 10 inches by 12 feet. B and better.—Will admit slight torn grain. With

the above, will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination

of defects: Two sound and tight pin knots; two

148
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.1

3-inch pitch pockets, none through. One additional

pin knot or pitch pocket allowed for each additional

2 inches increase in width. This grade will permit

of the inclusion of not over 15 per cent of material with machine defects, such as torn grain or slight

skips, in greater amount than ordinarily permitted

in B and better. Defects on thin edge which will cover when laid not to be given same consideration as defects else- where.

Sitka spruce bevel siding, kiln dried. Sizes and grades identical with those for Douglas

fir. (See above.) Western red cedar bungalow or colonial siding.

Thicknesses, finished.—3^ by inch and % by

jjV inch. Widths, finished: 9}4, and 113^2 inches. Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. Bundling.—Standard bundles are 8 feet and up, 10 layers to each bundle. In bundles 10 feet and

longer, 30 per cent shorter lengths shall be included

in each bundle. Grade (defects based on 8 inches by 12 feet). There is only one recognized grade of bungalow

or colonial siding. It is produced from stock carefully graded in the rough. Will admit the follow- ing defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Slight torn grain; 1 inch bright sap; y% inch additional sap allowed for each additional 2 inches increase in width. Will also permit of the

inclusion of not over 15 per cent of material with machine defects in greater amount than ordinarily

permitted. Western red cedar bevel siding. Sizes identical with those for Douglas fir. (See

above.)

Bundling.—Identical with Douglas fir. (See

above.) Grades (defects based on 12-foot length.) Clear, A, B, and C.

Clear.—Shall be well milled on face and edges and

practically free from all defects. Bright sap 3^-inch wide on thin edge admitted. Minor defects on thin edge which will cover when laid. Usable full length

without waste, containing no defect that will not cover with paint. A.—Bright sap no defect. Will admit the follow- ing defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Slight torn grain; slight raised

grain; occasional small rough spots oa thick edge;

minor defects on thin edge which will cover when

laid; usable full length without waste, containing no defect that vail not cover with paint. B.—Admits siding below A grade. Stained sap no defect. Will admit medium torn grain; medium

raised grain. With one of the above, vail admit

one of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects : Four sound

and tight small knots; occasional slight skips on

face and edges; a few pin wormholes, well scattered. Heavy skips, holes, or other defects, that can be cut

out by wasting not more than 20 per cent of the

length of the piece by not exceeding two cut-outs

in pieces 10 feet and longer provided the pieces

resulting are 3 feet or longer.

C.—Will admit all pieces falling below B grade, on account of imperfect manufacture or other defects. Especially is this grade intended to cover

stock too thin to dress to standard sizes and conse- quently will be mostly rough. This grade will take all lengths and no specified percentages are guaranteed.

Patterns. Patterns for siding are illustrated in Figures 14

to 44. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, rules

for the grading of Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine,

white fir, cedar, and spruce drop siding and beveled

siding, July 1, 1925.

Sizes of drop siding. Thickness.—1 inch dressed to f§ inch. Width.—

3-inch dressed to 234-inch face. 4-inch dressed to 3 34-inch face. 6-inch dressed to 534-inch face. 8-inch dressed to 734-inch face. 10-inch dressed to 934-inch face. 12-inch dressed to 11 34-inch face. Pattern 106 is the standard for drop siding. All other patterns of drop siding are considered special.

(Similar to pattern 106 of the West Coast Lumbermen's Association illustrated in fig. 27.) Sizes of beveled siding. Thickness.—}4 inch dressed to ^ inch thin edge

and inch thick edge.

Width.—

4-inch dressed to 33^2 inches.

5-inch dressed to 43^ inches.

6-inch dressed to 53^ inches. Grades of beveled siding.

B and better, C, D, and E. Beveled siding shall be graded from the face side only. The thick edge is considered part of the face. Defects on the thin edge which will cover when laid

shall hot be given the same consideration as defects elsewhere. In 4-inch siding it is considered that 24

inch will be covered; in 6-inch siding, 1 inch; and

in siding wider than 6-inch, 13^ inches. B and better beveled siding.—Shall consist of B sid- ing and all the better product of the stock. B and

better siding will admit of two or three small sound

tight knots and other minor defects well scattered over face of piece, or with fewer knots, a small amount of stain, or slight traces of pitch if local. C siding.—Will admit of 2 or 3 small knots, not

exceeding 1 inch in diameter, or more knots when

smaller, or a small amount of pitch or light season

check. Medium stain covering one-half the face, or a

greater area of lighter stain, is admitted if not in combination with marked defects. 149
411.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

0*

Fig. 3.1 by 6 inch kiln-dried channel rustic; green, 5}/2 inches over all

5%

IT

•;+

Fig. 4.1 by 8 inch kiln-dried channel rustic; green, 7}/2 inches over all

5

3/8 - 4%'

'3a T

16/"

12/

'32.

Fig. 5. —i 5 mc/i kiln-dried V. rustic; green, 5}/% inches over all

9/32"

— L _

: x6"

12/3*

Fig. 6.

1 by 8 inch kiln-dried V. rustic; green, 7^2 inches over all

4/ _i_ ^ ^ % *- 16— 32

/3 r

3^

Fig. 7.—i fey £ mc/i kiln-dried double V. rustic; green, 5}/2 inches over all

All Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau 150
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.1

7^

X V2

Fig. 8.

1 by 8 inch kiln-dried double V. rustic; green, 73^ inches over all

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

* j

1-

l T 1v

l

1 i

r

i

i. V

L

r

Fig. 9.

Grooved for splines if surfaced on two

sides

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

, _ •* , I T

t

r t

i f r \ -MiFig 10.

Grooved for splines if surfaced on one

side

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

3Z.* BOND

Fig. 11.

Drop siding

Southeastern Forest Products Association

Fig. 12.

Standard bead for thick material

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

Fig. 13.

Standard bead for 1 inch barn siding

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

52688°—27 11 151
411.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

7

16

T7

Fig. 14.—^ fry £ inc/i 7. rustic

3

Fig. 15.1 by 6 inch V. rustic

31

-ft

HE

Fig. 16.

% by 6 inch V. and C. V. rustic

ff" t*

Fig. 17.1 by 6 inch V. and C. V. rustic 5i± ,5. J 16 Si

hi

Fig. 18.—^ &?/ 6 inc/i channel rustic

3^76

_JL_

*• a * ' fO^D Fig. 19.—./ 6y # inch channel rustic

All West Coast Lumbermen's Association

152
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.1

Fig. 20.

Drop siding

Fig 21. Drop siding

Fig. 22. Drop siding

Fig. 23.

Drop siding

Fig. 24.

% by 6 inch drop siding No. 105

All West Coast Lumbermen's Association

153
411.1 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTEIES

r4

fJL

f\

«c—

si

Fig. 27.—Drop siding

J 5'

|/<S

Fig. 29.—Drop siding

All West Coast Lumbermen's Association

154
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.1

Fig. 31.

Drop siding

Fig. 32.

Drop siding

Fig. 34.

Drop siding

All West Coast Lumbermen's Association 155
411.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Fig. 35.

Drop siding

8 fc *Ji -

If) — "(r 5 <Q

Fig. 36.Drop siding No. 115

Fig. 38.

Drop siding No. 117

Fig. 39.

Drop siding

All West Coast Lumbermen's Association

156
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.1

Fig. 44.Drop siding

West Coast Lumbermen's Association

13

Fig. 46.Drop siding

Western Pine Manufacturers Association

Lh

i'x&' V Qusi/c

j"xe>~ Double 1/ £ushc

EES

Fig. 47.—.7 by 6 inch V. and Double V. rustic si Western Pine Manufacturers Association 157
411.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Defects requiring one cut not to exceed 4 inches of waste, are allowed in high-line pieces 12 feet long

and longer, but not more than 20 per cent of such

pieces shall be permitted in this grade.

D siding.—Will admit of considerable pitch and

season checks; with or without either of these defects a piece may have a number of small knots well scat- tered. Medium stain covering the entire piece is allowed

if not in combination with other marked defects. Defects requiring 2 cuts with a combined waste

not to exceed 8 inches are allowed in high-line pieces 12 feet long and longer.

E siding. —This is the lowest recognized grade of beveled siding and will admit of the stain, knot,

pitch pocket, pitch, and season check defects not

admissible in D siding.

Man}7 pieces showing seriously defective mill work or imperfect manufacture are admitted in this grade.

Patterns. Patterns for siding are illustrated in Figures 45

to 47. White Pine Association of the Tonawandas, grades

of northern white pine lumber for siding, 1922. The following grades of white pine lumber, as shown in 400.26 for this association, are suitable for

siding: No. 1 barn, No. 2 barn, No. 3 barn. 411.2 FLOORING.

411.20 General Items.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July, 1926. For American Lumber Standard, yard and industrial sizes of lumber, including flooring. (See 411.0.) 411.21 Cedar Flooring. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, standard

sizes and grading rules for western red cedar flooring,

July 1, 1926. The sizes for standard thicknesses and standard

widths for western red cedar flooring are the same as those for Douglas fir. (See 411.23.) Grades B and better and C. B and better.—Will admit the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Slight torn grain; one sound and tight pin

knot.

C.—Will admit the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Medium torn grain; light sap stain, 15 per cent of face; two sound and tight small knots. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for cedar flooring, July 1, 1925.

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 76 and 77. 411.22 Cypress Flooring.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grades

for cypress flooring, January, 1927.

Widths—2}4, 3K, 4J4, and 5}4 inches face as

specified, measured % inch wider than the face. Lengths.—4 to 20 feet. Grades.—A, B, C, and D.

Inspection shall be made from the face side, or if surfaced two sides and center-matched, from the good side. The reverse side of A and B may contain sound

defects and slight wane one-sixth the length of the

piece which does not extend into the tongue or groove or its equivalent in other unsound defects; C and D may contain, in addition, short tongue if sufficient to hold the piece properly in place, and wane or other unsound defects, provided the piece has sufficient bearing of full thickness to support it in the floor or ceiling. A flooring must be 8 feet and over long and must

be free from sapwood and other defects. B flooring must be 6 feet and over long and will admit bright sapwood and one 24-inch sound knot

or its equivalent to every 4 feet in length. Pieces

free from other defects may have slight stain cnesixth the surface of the piece in the aggregate.

C flooring must be 6 feet and over long and will admit sound sapwood, slight imperfections in dresssing, and one 24-inch sound knot or its equivalent

to every 3 feet in length. Twenty per cent of the

pieces 10 feet and over long may contain unsound

defects that do not prevent the use of 90 per cent of each piece in two cuttings.

D flooring must be 4 feet and over long and will admit sound knots, stain, pin wormholes and a slight

amount of surface shake. Twenty per cent of the

pieces may contain unsound defects that do not pre- vent the use of three-fourths the length of the piece

in crosscutting 2 feet and over long.

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grades and classification for cypress flooring, June

15, 1925.

Thickness.—ye, y&, i£> 1> 1M> and 1}4 inches. Widths.—Shall be specified widths, 3, 4, 5, and 6 inches wide.

Length.—8 to 20 feet (except in D grade), admitting 15 per cent of 8 feet, 9, and 10 feet lengths, and

not to exceed 5 per cent of lengths under 10 feet. Odd lengths are not standard above 10 feet. May

also be specified 4 to 7 feet. Shall be graded from the finished side, or if both

sides are finished, it shall be graded from the better

side, A, B, C, and D. A flooring.

Must be all heart. The face side must be free from all defects. B flooring.

Bright sap is not a defect, and will admit two small sound knots. C flooring

May have all sound sap, bright or stained, or may

have one to five knots, the whole not aggregating over 3 inches; a few pin wormholes, or other defects that will not prevent the use of each piece in its full length.

158
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.23

Dflooring.

Lengths run 6 feet and longer, admitting 25 per

cent of 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 foot lengths, provided that not more than 5 per cent shall be shorter than 8 feet. Will admit coarser and more numerous defects than C flooring, but each piece must be capable of use in its full length.

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 70

to 72. 411.23 Fir and Douglas Fir Flooring.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grades for white fir and Douglas fir flooring, May 1, 1926. See table of sizes and grading rules of this associ- ation, 411.1.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules for Douglas fir flooring, dressed and matched,

Schedule M, 1925. Defects based on a piece 1 by 4 inches by 12 feet. Rules applied proportionately on narrower and

wider stock. In edge-grain stock the angle of grain

shall be within the angle of 45° from the vertical. Grades, kiln-dried. No. 1 clear edge grain, No. 2 clear edge grain, No. 3 clear edge grain, and No. 3 clear flat grain. No. 1 clear edge grain, kiln dried, 3, 4, and 6 inch.—

Shall be well manufactured, must have perfect edges

and be practically free from all defects. Bright sap no defect. No. 2 clear edge grain, kiln dried, 3, 4, and 6 inch.—

Shall be well manufactured. Will admit of slight

roughness in dressing and three narrow pitch pockets

each not over 2 inches in length if not extending

through the thickness of the piece, or equivalent

defects. Bright sap no defect. No. 3 clear edge grain, kiln-dried, 3, 4, and 6 inch.—

Will admit of roughness in dressing, three sound and

tight knots each 1 inch or less in diameter or four

pitch pockets each not over 4 inches in length, any

two of which may extend through the thickness of the piece. It is generally understood that this grade

will admit such defects or combination of defects as will not impair its utility for cheap floors and/or

sheathing. A piece 12 feet or longer otherwise as good as No. 2 clear may have a defect which can be cut out and the piece laid with a loss of not more

than 23^ inches in its length, providing the defect

is 4 feet or more from either end of the piece.

Slightly stained or discolored sap or heart no defect. Occasional scant tongue not less than 3^8 * nch

will be admitted in this grade. No. 3 clear flat grain, kiln-dried, 3, 4, and 6 inch. —

Will admit of roughness in dressing; three sound

and tight knots each 1 inch or less in diameter, or four pitch pockets and/or pitch blisters, each not

over 4 inches in length, any two of which may ex- tend through the thickness of the piece; or equivalent defects. A piece 12 feet or longer, otherwise

as good as No. 2 clear and better, may have a defect which can be cut out and the piece laid with a

waste of not more than 2^ inches in its length,

providing the defect is 4 feet or more from either end of the piece. It is generally understood that

this grade will admit such other defects or combinations of defects as will not impair its utility for cheap floors and/or sheathing. Edge grain may be

included at shipper's option. Slightly stained or

discolored sap or heart no defect. Occasional scant tongue not less than Y% inch will be admitted.

Grades, green. No. 1 clear edge grain, No. 2 clear edge grain, No. 2 clear and better edge and/or flat grain, and

No. 3 clear regardless of grain. No. 1 clear edge grain, green, 3, 4, and 6 inch.—

Shall be well manufactured and free from all defects except one-quarter the width of bright sap. No. 2 clear edge grain, green, shall be well manufactured.—Will admit slight roughness in dressing,

bright sap one-half of width and three pitch pockets, each not over 2 inches in length if not extending

through the thickness of the piece, or equivalent

defects. No. 2 clear and better, edge and/or flat grain

green.—Shall be well manufactured. Will admit

slight roughness in dressing, bright sap one-half of width. One of the following is also permitted with one of the foregoing two defects; three pitch pockets, or pitch blisters, each not over 2 inches in length if not extending through the thickness of the piece, one sound tight knot % inch or less in diameter, or equivalent defects. Edge grain may

be included with flat grain at shipper's option. No. 3 clear, green.—Shall consist of lengths 6 feet and longer regardless of grain. Will admit of roughness in dressing, slightly discolored sap, three sound tight knots each 1 inch or less in diameter,

or four pitch pockets not over 4 inches in length

and/or pitch blisters, any two pockets of which may

extend through the thickness of the piece; or equivalent defects. A piece 12 feet or longer other- wise as good as No. 2 clear may have a defect which

can be cut out and the piece laid with a waste of not more than 2% inches in its length, providing

the defect is 4 feet or more from either end of the

piece. Imperfect edges, such as small knots torn out in machining and occasional scant tongue not

less than 3^ inch, shall not exclude lumber from this grade.

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 61

to 69. West Coast lumbermen's Association, sizes and

grading rules for Douglas fir flooring, July 1, 1926. Standard thicknesses—

Nominal: 1, Vy£, and 1}4 inches. Finished: ff, 1tV> 1A inches. Standard vndths—

Nominal: 3, 4, and 6 inches. Finished face: 2%, 3}£> and 5^- inches. Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. Defects based on 1 by 4 inches by 12 feet, kiln

dried. 159
411.23 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN "WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Vertical grain and flat grain symbols.—V. G. and

F. G. angle of grain not more than 45° from vertical is classed as vertical grain; other flooring as

flat grain. Grades A, B, B and better, C, and D. A—V. G. flooring.—Shall be well manufactured on face and edges, and practically free from all defects. Bright sap one-third face admitted.

B—V. G. flooring.—Shall be well manufactured.

Will admit slight torn grain. With the above,

will admit the following defect, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three

very small (2-inch) pitch pockets, none through.

B and better—F. G. flooring.—Shall be well manufactured. Will admit slight torn grain. With the above, will admit one of the following defects, an

equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: One sound and tight pin knot; 3 very small

(2-inch) pitch pockets, none through.

C—F. G. or V. G. flooring. —Will admit medium

torn grain; light sap stain, 15 per cent of face. With the above, will admit one of the following

defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Two sound and tight small

knots; 4 small (4-inch) pitch pockets, 2 of which

may be through. Will admit cut-out of 23^ inches

for a defect 4 feet or more from either end in pieces 12 feet and longer if piece is otherwise as good as B. D—F. G. andlor V. G. flooring.—Will admit the

following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent

combinations of defects: One inch sound and tight knots; numerous small pitch pockets (several of which may be through) or equivalent medium to

large pitch pockets; large pitch streak; heart stain; medium sap stain; four heavy skips, each not over

12 inches long, based on 12-foot length; groove

edge, hit and miss; scant tongue; torn grain; pin

wormholes; seasoning checks; 1 knot hole in pieces 8 to 14 feet long, and two knot holes in pieces 16

feet or longer; wane (on reverse side) in addition

to other permissible defects, one-third width, onesixth length of piece. Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 74 and 75. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for fir and white fir flooring, July 1, 1925.

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 76

and 77. 411.24 Hemlock Flooring.

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grading rules for hemlock

flooring, February 1, 1927. Lumber of select or common quality manufactured

according to size and pattern for flooring shall be

manufactured in the following sizes and in con- formity with the American Lumber Standard patterns and shall be graded according to the rules

specified as follows:

Thickness and widths.

Thickness Width

Nominal

board measure

Finished Nominalboard measure

Face width

Over-all width

Inches

1m

Inches

If 141&

Inches

3

4

6

Inches 2%VA

5rV

Inches 3H

5A

Lengths.

Standard lengths of flooring shall be 4 to 20 feet; with not to exceed 20 per cent of 8 or 9 foot lengths

in mixed-length shipments of D and better flooring. In addition to these percentages, mixed-length ship- ments will admit 5 per cent of 6 and 7 foot in No. 1 common grades and an additional 5 per cent of 4 and 5 foot in Xo. 2 common grades. No. 3 grades

shall admit lengths 4 to 20 feet, inclusive, with not

to exceed 20 per cent of 4 and 6 foot lengths. Note.—The above percentages of short lengths are customary and in the interest of conservation will be included so far as practi- cable in all shipments of mixed lengths. Grades. D and better, No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and

No. 3 common.

Special provisions.—The face of the piece should be smoothly dressed and be free from wane on face

side in No. 1 common and better grades. The re- verse side of the piece must be of such a nature as not to cause waste in No. 1 common and better

grades.

The tongue in matched patterns may be broken

out over a length of 6 inches. In any grade the tongue or the covered edge may be }/& inch scant in width. Tongue or covered edge down to T\ inch wide may be admitted in No. 2 common, but scantness to this extent shall be considered a serious defect. Wane may extend not over half the thichness

of the tongue or covered edge for a distance of onethird the length of a piece in No. 1 common and

better grades.

The upper lip of the groove in matched patterns must be full width and without wane in No. 1 com- mon and better grades. Wane extending completely through the lower lip will be permitted for one-third the length of a piece in No. 1 common and

better grades.

D and better.—D and better flooring shall be

graded according to the rules for D and better

finishing, subject to the special provisions noted

above.

All material must be of select appearance and

quality.

The maximum size knots admissible. in this grade

shall not exceed % inch in 4-inch flooring, or 1 and

6 inch widths. The face of the piece shall be free from shake.

Pieces, 10 feet and longer, containing a knot hole

or equivalent defect which may be removed in one

cut without waste exceeding 4 inches in length may

160
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.25

be permitted, provided the balance of the piece is practically free from defects. No. 1 common.—No. 1 common flooring shall be graded according to the rules for No. 1 common

boards, subject to the special provisions noted above. No. 2 common.—No. 2 common flooring is suit- able for general building purposes and admits all defects permitted in No. 2 common boards, subject

to the special provisions noted above. No. 3 common.—No. 3 common flooring shall be

graded according to the rules for No. 3 common

boards, subject to the special provisions noted above.

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 59, 60, and 73. West Coast lumbermen's Association, standard

sizes and grading rules for west coast hemlock

flooring, July 1, 1927. Identical with those of this association for Douglas

fir No. 411.23. 411.25 Maple Flooring.

Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, grading rules and sizes for maple flooring, revised,

effective September 1, 1927. Grades.

First, second, and third. First grade.—ff inch and thicker, shall have the

face practically free of all defects, but the varying

natural color of the wood shall not be considered a

defect. Standard lengths in all widths in this grade

shall be trimmed 2 to 16 feet; the proportion of lengths, 2 to S}4 feet, inclusive, shall be what the

stock will produce up to 25 per cent. This grade combines appearance and durability

and has a face free of defects that will materially mar the appearance of the finished floor or impair

its durability. It will be noted that the standard

of appearance is that of a finished floor, not the top

of a piano. A practical application of this rule will admit of mild discolorations, an occasional small firm

pin knot not over 3^ inch in diameter, occasional dark green or black spots or streaks not over 34 inch

wide and 3 inches long (or its equivalent) which may

contain a slight check not over 3^ inch long, birds- eye's and small burls, a slightly torn grain or similar defect which can be readily removed by the ordinary

method of smoothing the floor when it is laid, a

slightly shallow place not over 12 inches long on

under side of flooring if it does not extend to either end of the piece, an otherwise perfect tongue which

is one-half short for 25 per cent of length of piece is admissible, but the face must be free of shake and

the wood must be live and sound. Second grade.—f§ inch and thicker will admit

of tight, sound knots and slight imperfections in

dressing, but must lay without waste. Standard

lengths in all widths in this grade shall be trimmed

13^ to 16 feet; the proportion of lengths 13^ to 33^

feet* inclusive, shall be what the stock will produce

up to 40 per cent.

This grade is made for service rather than appearance. It admits of tight, sound knots prominent

discolorations, numerous dark green or black spots

or streaks, slight checks not exceeding 3 inches in length and running parallel with and well inside of the edges of the strip, dark spots or streaks with

slight checks in center, small rough spots which can

not be wholly removed by the ordinary method of smoothing the floor when it is laid, slightly torn

edges, short tongue if sufficient to hold properly in the floor, shallow or waney back of piece has suffi- cient bearings of full thickness to support it in

floor, and slight variation in angle of end matching.

While these and similar features are admissible,

sufficient attention is given to appearance to make

this grade desirable and satisfactory for use in

stores, school houses, and similar places where a waxed or varnished floor is not required.

Third grade.—ff inch and thicker must be of such character as will lay and give a good service- able floor. Standard lengths in all widths in this grade shall be trimmed 1 to 16 feet; the proportion

of lengths 1 to 33^ feet, inclusive, shall be what

the stock will produce up to 60 per cent. The factory grade is suitable for factory, warehouse, and kindred uses where good wearing qualities are required, together with medium cost and

appearance. This grade may contain all defects common to maple, beech, and birch, but the wood

must be firm and serviceable. It will not admit of voids on edges or knot holes over ^ inch in diameter; partially unsound knots where the unsound

portion is over 1 inch in diameter; or shakes, heart

checks, badly split ends and imperfections in manufacture which materially impair the serviceability

of the flooring for the purpose intended.

Special grade.—White clear maple is special

stock, selected for uniformity of color. It is almost

ivory white and is the finest grade of maple flooring

it is possible to produce.

Standard thicknesses and faces. Clear, No. 1 and factory grades

JStandard thickness (inches) Faces or widths (inches)

If IK 2 2Ji

Special thicknesses

If si T¥ ... 2 2M

ys Vt. v$ 1V2 2 2H

Standard measurement.

Flooring Y% inch and thicker, all faces, is measured

% inch waste for matching.

Flooring 3^ inch and thinner, all faces, is measured

3^ inch waste for matching.

Jointed flooring, all thicknesses and faces, is measured 3^2 inch waste. Kiln drying.

Flooring shall not be considered of standard grade

unless the lumber from which the flooring is manufactured has been properly kiln dried. 161
411.25 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

End matching.

All flooring shall be end matched unless other- wise specified. Custom in bundling.

It is the custom in bundling flooring to give and

take by including pieces of flooring 3 inches over and 3 inches under the length marked on the bundle,

and to include some pieces of flooring 3 inches under

the minimum lengths specified in the grading rules. National Hardwood Lumber Association has

adopted the maple flooring grading rules of the Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, above. 411.26 Oak Flooring.

National Hardwood lumber Association has

adopted the oak flooring grading rules of the Oak

Flooring Manufacturers Association of the United

States, below. Oak Flooring Manufacturers' Association of the United States, grading rules for flooring, March 4, 1927. Of the following rules those for clear, sap clear, and select, apply to quarter sawed flooring and

those for clear, select, No. 1 common, and No. 2 common apply to plain sawed flooring. Clear. Shall have one face practically free of defects except % of an inch of bright sap; the question

of color shall not be considered. Sap clear. Shall have one face practically free of defects, but will admit unlimited bright sap. The question

of color shall not be considered.

Select. May contain sap, and will admit pin wormholes,

streaks, slight imperfections in working or a small,

tight knot, not to exceed one to every 3 feet in

length. No. 1 common.

Shall be of such nature as will make and lay a sound floor without cutting. No. 2 common. May contain defects of all characters, but will lay a serviceable floor with some cutting.

Bundles to be 13^ feet and up. Average length

2Y2 feet. Note.—Oak flooring is bundled by averaging the lengths. A

bundle may include pieces from 6 inches under to 6 inches over the nominal length of the bundle. No piece shorter than 9 inches admitted. The percentage under 4 feet referred to above

apply on total feetage in any one shipment of the

item. Three-fourths inch allowance shall be added to the tongue on the end matching when measuring

the lineal length of each piece of oak flooring.

Standard thicknesses and widths

£f inch thickness; widths 1^, 2, and 234 inch

face.% inch thickness; widths 13^ and 2 inch face. 3^ inch thickness; widths 1}4 and 2 inch face.

Above tongued and grooved and end matched

ts inch thickness; square edge, 13^, 2 inch, and

special faces. Standard measurement

if inch thickness all faces, count % inch allowance

for matching.

% inch thickness all faces, count 3^ inch allowance

for matching.

3^ inch thickness all faces, count 3^ inch allowance

for matching.

inch thickness square edge all faces, count face count. Standard counts of oak flooring

Nominal Actual Counted

Inches Inches Inches Hby 2% H by 2% 1 by 3 Hby2 it by 2 1 by 2%

H by iy2 MbylH lby 2H

Vsby2 Hby2 1 by 2H

Vsbyiy2 &bylH 1 by 2 Hby2 if by 2 1 by 2Y2 HbylH H by tH A by 2

1 by 2 A by 2 Face count. AbylH AbylH Face count. 411.27 Pine Flooring.

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, sizes and grades for

soft pine flooring, March 23, 1927. The sizes and grades for soft pine flooring are

similar to those of the Southeastern Forest Products

Association and the Southern Pine Association.

(See below.)

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, sizes and grades for

soft pine factory flooring, March 23, 1927. The sizes and grades for soft pine factory flooring are similar to those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine Association. (See below.)

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 59,

60, and 73. California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grades for California white

pine and sugar pine flooring, May 1, 1926. See table of sizes and grading rules of this associ- ation in 411.1. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), sizes and

grades for kiln-dried and air-dried North Carolina

pine flooring, January 1, 1927. Standard sizes identical with American Lumber

Standards. In addition thereto the association has

the following " super standards." Thicknesses in inches: 3^, t!> 1j^> and

Widths in inches: Wz, ^4, and 53^. Grades. B and better, No. 1 common, and No. 2 common. The grades of flooring are based upon a piece 4 inches wide by 12 feet long, or a piece having

4 square feet, surface measure; on this basis, larger or smaller pieces will admit a proportionate number

of defects. 162
LUMBEK FOE. BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.27

Mismatch, due to variation in manufacture, or change in moisture content not to exceed ^ inch

shall be permissible in B and better flooring. Variations in width not to exceed ^ inch will be

permissible in B and better flooring, and not to exceed 3^ inch in No. 1 and No. 2 common flooring. Pieces of flooring with ^ inch or more of tongue

will be admitted in any grade. Pieces of flooring having not less than ^ inch of tongue will be admitted in No. 2 common. B and better flat flooring will admit two or combination of two of any of the following defects or

their equivalent: Small surface checks; four pin worm holes; slight torn grain, three pin knots, two

small knots, one standard knot, three small pitch

pockets, two medium pitch pockets, one standard

pitch pocket, three small pitch streaks, two medium

pitch streaks, one standard pitch streak, 15 per cent

firm red heart, 5 per cent stain. Xo. 1 common and better grades of flooring, wane

on the reverse side, equivalent to one-third the width and one-sixth the length of the piece, is admissible provided the wane does not extend into the tongue or groove; it may, however, extend into the groove or for one-half the thickness of the tongue

for a length of 10 inches, provided the maximum

width and length decrease in proportion to the

increase in depth. No. 1 common flat flooring will admit the follow- ing defects or their equivalent: Surface checks;

limited number of pin worm holes, well scattered; loosened or heavy torn grain or other machine

defects that will lay without waste; sound knots

not over one-half the cross section of the piece in the rough; three pith knots; pitch pockets; pitch;

pith, not exceeding 6 inches in length; shake that does not go through; short split, equal in length to width of piece; firm red heart; stain. Pieces otherwise as good as B and better flooring

may have one defect, such as a knot hole, that can

be cut out by wasting not to exceed 2 inches of their length, provided both pieces are 32 inches or over

in length after cutting out such defects. No. 2 common flooring will admit all pieces that

will not grade as good as No. 1 common flooring

which can be used for cheap floors without a waste

of more than one-fourth the length of any one piece.

Lengths of flooring are from 6 to 16 feet in multiples of 1 foot, not to exceed a total of 10 per cent of

6, 7, 8, and 9 foot lengths.

Special grading provisions.

The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot

lengths, shall be permissible in No. 1 common and

better grades of flooring: 3-inch widths 33^-inch crook.

4-inch widths 3-inch crook. 6-inch widths 23^-inch crook. Lengths longer or shorter than 16 feet may have

proportionate amounts of crook. Factory flooring.

Lengths same as above.

Grade same as No. 2 common (except as to crooks)

Unless otherwise specified, factory flooring shall be worked tongued and grooved.

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 48

to 58. Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, rules

for the grading of northern white and Norway pine

flooring, April 15, 1925.

Size. The location and size of tongue and groove, bead,

and other workings shall conform to the patterns of the American Lumber Standards or as published

by the Northern Pine Manufacturers Association. Grades. D, No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and No. 3 common. D flooring.—D flooring shall be graded according

to the rule for D finish. In the knotty type the knots must be smaller and fewer in number than in No. 1 common flooring. Medium stain covering

the entire piece is allowed, or tight local shake, season checks, and defective machine work, or any

other defects admissible in D select finish that will not cause waste in the use of the piece; except

defects requiring one cut, with not to exceed 4 inches

of waste, are allowed in high-line pieces 12 feet long

and longer. No. 1 common dressed and matched flooring.—This should be simply sound No. 1 common and of the

character, when worked, described under the title of No. 1 common boards and strips. (See 402.41 and

402.42.) No. 2 common dressed and matched flooring.—This

should be simply No. 2 common, and of the character, when worked, described under the title of No. 2 common strips. (See 402.41.) No. 3 common dressed and matched flooring

—No. 3 common dressed and matched may contain coarse

knots, an occasional knot hole, splits, wane, wormholes, streaks of red rot, and a great deal of shake,

but not a serious combination of these defects. Special grading provisions.—The face of the piece

must be smoothly dressed and be free from wane, ex- cept in drop siding where wane equivalent to admissible torn grain will be allowed. The reverse side of pieces of flooring must be of such a nature as to not

cause waste in No. 1 common and better grades,

except as specified in D grade, and wane not exceed- ing one-third the width and one-sixth the length

of the piece may be allowed. In D and No. 1 common the tongue or lap may be

broken out over a length of 6 inches. In any grade

the tongue or covered edge may be tq inch scant in width. Tongue or covered edge down to t§ inch wide may be admitted in No. 2 common. Wane

may exceed not over one-half the thickness of the tongue or covered edge, and completely through the lower lip of the groove for a distance of one-fourth

the length of the piece. The upper lip of the groove 163
411.27 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

or upper lap must be full width and without wane

in No. 1 common and better grades.

Defects, such as loose knots or knot holes on the

thin or covered edge of siding, or the lap of ship-lap,

which will be covered when laid, should not be

given the same consideration as defects elsewhere. Small crook will be allowed in all grades. Six-inch flooring and all other matched patterns

shall be worked SIS or S2S and CM.

Southeastern Forest Products Association, sizes and grades for southern pine flooring, September 1, 1925.

Identical with those of the Southern Pine Association, with the following statements relating to short length end-matched flooring. Short length end-matched flooring.

Standard finished thicknesses.— ff, and ly^

inches. Special finished thicknesses.—fl inch. Standard face widths.—13^, 2%, and 334 inches. Special face widths.—2 and 23^ inches. Standard lengths.—12 inches to 7 feet 6 inches in multiples of 1 inch or fraction thereof. Standard grades. A, B, C, D, No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and

No. 3 common. A end-matched flooring must be practically free from defects on the face side and well manufactured.

B end-matched flooring will admit one of the fol- lowing defects in lengths up to and including 7 feet 6 inches: Small surface checks; 2 pin wormholes; slight torn grain; pin knot; small pitch pocket; small pitch

streak. C end-matched flooring will admit two or a combination of two of any of the following defects or

their equivalent in lengths up to and including 7 feet 6 inches: Surface checks; 6 pin wormholes; medium

torn grain; pin knots; small pitch pockets; small

pitch streaks; 5 per cent stain; 10 per cent firm red

heart. D end-matched flooring will admit any one of the

following defects or their equivalent in lengths up to and including 7 feet 6 inches: Surface checks; limited number of pin wormholes; heavy torn giain or other machine defects that will lay without waste; sound knots, not to exceed 1 inch in diameter; 3 pin

knots; 1 standard pitch pocket; 3 small pitch pockets; 10 per cent pitch; shake that does not go through;

15 per cent firm red heart or stain. No. 1 common end-matched flooring is the combined grades of C and D, and will admit all pieces that will not grade B, and are better than No. 2 common.

No. 2 common end-matched flooiing must lay a

serviceable floor without cutting, and will admit any

number of the following defects or their equivalent:

Sound knots, or knots not necessarily sound, but so

fixed by growth or position that they will retain

their place in the piece, the average diameter of any

one knot not to exceed one-half the cross section of the piece in the rough; checks; pin wormholes; loos- ened or heavy torn grain or other machine defects; pitch pockets; pitch; shakes; firm red heart; stain.

No. 3 common end-matched flooring will admit

all pieces which will not grade as good as No. 2 com- mon end-matched flooring and may contain, in addition, the following defects: Knots not necessarily

sound; wormholes; rough skips in dressing; slight wane; deep torn grain; splits; shakes; red heart; or other equivalent defects. Special grading provisions.

D and better end-matched flooring will admit wane on the reverse side equivalent to one-third the width and one-sixth the length of the piece, provided

the wane does not extend into the tongue or groove. Southeastern Forest Products Association, sizes and grades for southern pine factory flooring, September 1, 1925. The sizes of pine factory flooring conform to the

table of sizes for factory flooring, heavy roofing,

decking, and sheet piling of the American Lumber

Standards, 411.0, yard lumber.

Grades. No. 1 common.

Lengths.

Standard lengths are 10 to 24 feet, inclusive, in multiples of 2 feet. Special provisions.

The amount of crook permissible in heavy pat- terned material will be the same as permitted in dimension of the same grade, width, and length. Pieces of D and M with ^ inch or more of tongue

and ship-lap with inch or more of lap, will be

admitted in No. 1 common. Pieces of D and M

having not less than J/s-mch tongue, and ship-lap

having not less than ^-inch lap, will be admitted

in No. 2 common.

In No. 1 common, wane on the reverse side, equivalent to one-third the width and one-sixth the length

of the piece is admissible, provided the wane does

not extend into the tongue or groove in dressed and

matched stock or for one-half the thickness of the lap

in ship-lapped stock. It may, however, extend into the groove or through the lap, or for one-half the

thickness of the tongue, for a length of 10 inches,

provided the maximum width and length decrease in proportion to the increase in depth.

Standard workings.

The standard workings for heavy flooring shall be as follows: For 2 and 23^ inch material, the tongue should be % inch thick and % inch wide. For 3-inch and thicker material, the tongue should be 24 inch thick and % inch wide. The groove in heavy matching should be fg- inch wider than the

thickness of the tongue and ^ inch deeper than

the width of the tongue. (See figs. 59, 60, and 73.) Tongue and groove shall be located one-fourth

the thickness of the rough material from the bottom

of the piece. (See figs. 59, 60, and 73.) In 2 inches and thicker material grooved for

splines, the groove should be the same width and

depth as is provided for in matched material of the same thickness. (See figs. 9 and 10.) 164
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE

The lap in heavy ship-lap shall be 3^ inch wide,

occupying one-half the finished thickness of the

piece. (See fig. 137.) No. 1 common factory flooring, decking, and heavy

ship-lap.—Must be suitable for use without waste, and will admit the following defects, or their equivalent: Any number of sound knots, the average diameter of any one knot not to exceed approximately one-half of the cross section of the piece, in the rough, at any point throughout the length; pith

knots which will not cause a leakage of grain; sur- face checks; a limited number of pin wormholes;

loosened or heavy torn grain, or other machine

defects that will lay without waste, and will not

cause a leakage of grain; pitch pockets; pitch; pith, one-sixth the length of the piece; shakes that do

not go through; firm red heart; stain; wane 34 inch deep on the edge, 3^ inch wide, and one-sixth the

length of the piece. Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 59, 60, and 73. Southern Pine Association, sizes and grades for southern pine flooring, March 23, 1927. The grades of flooring are based upon a piece 4 inches wide by 12 feet long, or a piece having 4 square feet, surface measure; on this basis, larger or smaller pieces will admit a proportionate number of defects. Grades are designated as A, B, C, D, No. 1 common, and No. 2 common, flat grain and vertical

grain. Thicknesses and widths.

Size, board measure

Dressed dimensions at commercially dry shipping weight

Thickness Width Thickness Face width Over-all width

Inches

1

Inches

2

34

56

Inches i

H

1A

1A

Inches m2%VA

Inches m2Vs

The thicknesses apply to all widths and the widths to all thicknesses, except for over-all widths,

as follows: In tongued and grooved flooring

Ye, and t\ inch thick, board measure, the tongue

shall be f\ mcn wide, and the over-all widths jfe inch less than shown above.

Lengths.

Standard lengths are 4 to 20 feet, inclusive, and

the following percentages of short lengths may be

included in all miscellaneous or mixed-length ship- ments : A and B 5 per cent 8 and/or 9 foot. C, D, and No. 1 com- mon 5 per cent 6 and/or 7 foot. 5 per cent 8 and/or 9 foot.

411.27

No. 2 common 5 per cent 4 and/or 5 foot. 5 per cent 6 and/or 7 foot. 5 per cent 8 and/or 9 foot. No. 3 common Not to exceed 20 per cent 4 and 6 foot lengths.

Special grading provisions.

The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot

lengths, shall be permissible in No. 1 common and

better grades of flooring:

3-inch widths 3H-inch crook.

4-inch widths 3-inch crook. 6-inch widths 23^-inch crook. Lengths longer or shorter than 16 feet may have

proportionate amounts of crook. Mismatch, due to variation in manufacture, or change in moisture content, not to exceed ^ inch

shall be permissible in C and better flooring. Variations in width not to exceed ^ inch will be

permissible in B flooring, and not to exceed y§ inch

in C and D flooring.

Standard knots shall not exceed 134 inches in diameter in 3-inch flooring. Pieces of flooring with fs inch or more of tongue will be admitted in any grade. Pieces of flooring having not less than mcn

of tongue will be admitted in No. 2 common.

In D and better grades of flooring, wane on the

reverse side, equivalent to one-third the width and

one-sixth the length of the piece, is admissible, pro- vided the wane does not extend into the tongue or groove; it may, however, extend into the groove or

for one-half the thickness of the tongue for a length

of 10 inches, provided the maximum width and length

decrease in proportion to the increase in depth.

Southern pine flooring shall be classified as to

grain, as vertical (edge) grain and flat (slash) grain.

Material shall be considered vertical grain when the

rings (so-called grains) form an angle of 45° or more

with the surface of the piece. When the angle be- comes less than 45° at any point, the material

shall be classed as flat (slash) grain . Standard Workings.

The standard working of flooring, 1, 134, and 13^

inches thick, 4 inches and under in width, shall be

S2S, standard matched (SM) and scratched or hol- lowed back, with tongue or groove located inch

from bottom of piece. Center matched flooring (S2S and CM) shall be

required to come up to grade on one side only, and

the defects admissible on the reverse side of stand* ard matched flooring shall be allowed.

Grades. A flat grain flooring must be practically free from

defects on the face side and well manufactured. I B flat grain flooring will admit two or combination of two of any of the following defects or their equivalent: Small surface checks; four pin wormholes; slight torn grain; three pin knots; two small knots; one standard knot; three small pitch

pockets; two medium pitch pockets; one standard

pitch pocket; three small pitch streaks; two me- 165
411.27 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

dium pitch streaks ; one standard pitch streak; 15 per

cent firm red heart; 5 per cent stain. C flat grain flooring will admit two or combination of two of any of the following defects or their equivalent: Surface checks; 12 pin wormholes; me- dium torn grain, or other machine defects that will lay without waste; six pin knots; four small knots; two standard knots; six small pitch pockets; four medium pitch pockets; two standard pitch pockets;

two standard pitch streaks or their equivalent?

slight shake that does not go through; 25 per cent

firm red heart; 15 per cent stain. D flat grain flooring will admit the following defects or their equivalent: Surface checks; limited number of pin wormholes, well scattered; loosened

or heavy torn grain, or other machine defects that

will lay without waste; sound knots, not over 3^ the

cross section of the piece in the rough; three pith knots; pitch pockets; pitch; pith, not exceeding 6 inches in length; shake that does not go through;

short split, equal in length to width of piece; firm red heart; stain. Pieces otherwise as good as B flooring may have

one defect, such as knot hole, that can be cut out by wasting not to exceed 2 inches of their length,

provided both pieces are 32 inches or over in length

after cutting out such defects. No. 1 common flooring is the combined grades of C and D flooring, and will admit all pieces that will not grade B, and are better than No. 2 common.

No. 2 common flooring will admit all pieces that

will not grade as good as D flooring, which can be

used for cheap floors without a waste of more than

34 the length of any one piece. Note.—All pieces that can not be used as No. 2 common flooring, but are suitable for use as cheap sheathing or lathing, without a waste

of more than one-fourth the length of any one piece will be graded

as No. 3 common sheathing. Vertical grain flooring shall be graded under the same rules as flat grain, except as to the angle of the grain. Heart face flooring shall be free from sapwood on the face side. Southern Pine Association, sizes and grades for southern pine factory flooring, March 23, 1927. The sizes and grades for southern pine factory

flooring of this association are the same as those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association. (See

above.)

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 59, 60, and 73. Southern Pine Association, Gulf coast classifi- cation of pitch pine flooring, 1923. Thicknesses and widths (in inches).

1 by 3, Sy2 , 4, 43^, 5, 6, 7. m by 3, SV2 , 4, 4^, 5, 6, 7. 1}4 by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. 1H by 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. Lengths.

Ten feet and up; 5 per cent 8 and 9 feet allowed.

Grades. Heart rift, sap rift, crown or french flooring, prime,

Genoa prime, merchantable, square edge.

Heart rift.—Must be all heart, except that 1-inch

of sap on one corner, measured across the corner, will be permitted; must show rift grain of an angle of not more than 45° from the vertical the entire length,

and be free from unsound knots, loose knots, pith

knots, knot holes,through splits, shakes, wane, rot, pin wormholes, grubworm holes, pitch pockets

exceeding 3^8 inch in width, pith on face and knots

exceeding 1 inch in diameter; provided that 80 per

cent shall be free from knots. Pitch permissible,

if not in excess of one-fourth of the area of the face. Firm red heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per

cent of the area of the face. Sap rift. —Must be kiln dried and grade the same

as heart rift, but may be part or all sap and will permit sap stain on 20 per cent of the pieces, provided no piece shall show sap stain on more than 15 per

cent of its face. Crown or French flooring. —Must be bright, one

heart face, except 3^2 inch sap, measured across the

face of the piece, will be permitted on the heart side on not over 20 per cent of the pieces; must be free from unsound knots, loose knots, pith knots, knot

holes, through splits, through shakes, pitch pockets

exceeding 3^ inch in width, wane, pin wormholes,

grubworm holes, rot, and pith. Firm red heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Not to have more than one knot 1 inch on

the 3, 33^, 4, and 43^ inch; or one knot 134 inch on

the 5, 6, and 7 inch, to each 6 feet or fraction thereof; provided that 90 per cent shall be free of knots. Pitch permissible if not in excess of 25 per cent of the

area of the face. Prime.—Must be one heart face, except 3^ inch

sap, measured across the face of the piece, will be

permitted on the heart side on not over 20 per cent

of the pieces; must be free from unsound knots, loose knots, pith knots, knotholes, through splits, through

shakes, pitch pockets exceeding 34 inch in width, wane, pin wormholes, grubworm holes, rot, and

pith. Firm red heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Not to have more than one knot 1 inch on the 3, 33^, 4, and 4>^

inch; or one knot 134 inch on the 5, 6, and 7 inch, to each 6 feet or fraction thereof; provided that 80

per cent shall be free of knots. Genoa prime.—Must be one heart face, except 3^

inch sap, measured across the face of the piece, permissible on one corner of the heart face; must be

free from pith knots, unsound knots, loose knots,

knot holes, pin wormholes, grubworm holes, wane,

rot, through splits, and through shakes. Firm red

heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Merchantable.—Must show two-thirds heart on

the face and show some heart on the opposite side; must be free from unsound knots, loose knots, grub- worm holes, knot holes, rot, through splits, and

through shakes. Firm red heart permissible, if not

in excess of 15 per cent of the area of the face. Twenty per cent of the pieces will permit wane 1 inch wide measured across the face of the wane, onefourth the length of the piece on one corner, or the

equivalent on two or more corners. 166
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USB 411.29

Square edge.—Must be free from unsound knots,

loose knots, knot holes, grubworm holes, rot, and

splits and shakes, the length of which exceeds the width of the piece. Twenty-five per cent of the

pieces will permit wane 1 inch wide measured across the face of the wane, one-third of the length of the

piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more

corners. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for Pondosa pine and Idaho white pine flooring,

July 1, 1925.

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 76 and 77. 411.28 Spruce Flooring.

Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, rules

for the grading of spruce flooring, April 15, 1925.

Sizes. The location and size of tongue and groove, bead,

and other workings shall conform to the patterns of the American Lumber Standards or as published by

the Northern Pine Manufacturers Association. Grades.

Identical with those for pine. (See 411.27.) West Coast Lumbermen's Association, standard

sizes and grading rules for spruce flooring, July 1, 1926. The sizes for standard thicknesses and standard

widths for spruce flooring are the same as those for Douglas fir. (See 411.23.)

Grade "B and better." B and better flooring.—Shall be well manufactured.

Will admit slight torn grain. With the above, will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: One sound and tight pin knot; three very small

(2-inch) pitch pockets, none through. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for spruce flooring, July 1, 1925.

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 76 and 77. 411.29 Miscellaneous Flooring.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

flooring, April, 1927. The sizes of flooring are as shown in this association's table of sizes for yard lumber, 411.0. The grades of flooring are based upon a piece 4

inches wide by 12 feet long, or a piece having 4 square feet surface measurement; on this basis

larger or smaller pieces will admit a proportionate

number of defects. Grades. Clear heart (Redwood Association grade), and

A and B (American Standard redwood grades)

Lengths.

Standard lengths shall be 4 to 20 feet, inclusive,

in multiples of 1 foot up to and including 9 feet; and in multiples of 2 feet in 10 to 20 feet; admitting

not to exceed 15 per cent of 4 to 9 foot lengths.

Special provisions.

Small crook shall be permissible in clear and A

grades and medium crook in B grade.

Pieces of flooring with tongue not more than

5^ inch scant of standard width will be admitted in any grade. In B grade the tongue may be broken

out over a length of 6 inches. Standard workings.

Flooring shall be worked to the patterns published

by the California Redwood Association. Flooring shall be graded according to the rules for the respective grades of finish, except that any

amount of sapwood will be allowed. In B grade pieces 10 feet and longer, containing

defects that can be removed in two cuts with waste

not to exceed 10 per cent of the length, will be

allowed, provided that not more than 20 per cent

of any one bundle shall be of said cutting type.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

factory flooring, April, 1927. The sizes of factory flooring are as shown in the

table of sizes for factory flooring, heavy roofing,

decking and sheet piling, American Lumber Standards, yard lumber, 411.0. The grades of factory flooring, heavy roofing, and

decking are as follows: Grades. No. 1 common and No. 2 common.

Lengths.

Standard lengths shall be the same as specified for dimension and heavy joist. Special provisions.

Factory flooring, etc., may be worked to standard

sizes either green or commercially dry.

The amount of crook and cup permissible in factory flooring, etc., shall be the same as allowed in No. 1 and No. 2 common boards. Standard workings.

Pieces of D and M with ^ inch or more of tongue

and ship-lap with % inch or more of lap will be

admitted in No. 1 common. Pieces of D and M

having not less than 3^-inch tongue and ship-lap

having not less than inch lap, will be admitted in No. 2 common.

No. 1 common factory flooring, etc., will admit

any of the defects or their equivalent allowed in No. 1 common dimension, except wane on the

reverse side equivalent to one-third the width and

one-sixth the length of the piece, may be permitted

provided it does not extend into the tongue and

groove in dressed and matched stock or for one-half the thickness of the lap in ship-lapped stock on the

face side. No. 2 common factory flooring, etc., will admit

any of the defects or their equivalent allowed in No. 2 common dimension.

52688°—27 12 167
411.29 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Fig. 48.Standard

spline for 2, 2%, and

8 inch factory flooring

1

1 T'SIN T 4*

Fig. 49.

l}/2-inch T. and G. factory flooring

lop?

-H- -r

8

Fig. 50.—ff flooring standard match (scratch back)

1 MS

32

33 i

7* L3_^

8 3 a

Fig. 51.

3-inch T. and G. factory flooring Fig. 52.

2%-inch factory flooring grooved for

splines

Fig. 53.2-inch T. and G. factory flooring Fig. 54.

2}£-inch T. and G. factory flooring

All North Carolina Pine Association

168
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.29

n *h -M01 will' 3Z

NiFig. 55.—5/4 flooring

{standard match, scratch back)

Fig. 56.

5/4 flooring

(center match)

North Carolina Pine Association

-^"overallSg'FACE

Fig. 59.Standard sizes of hemlock heavy flooring,

2}/2-inch flooring

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

18

i

3i

lo/ S

Fig. 61.

1^4, by 3 inch kiln-dried flooring, green, 2%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

IS"

Fig. 57.—13/16 flooring

(center match)

11' 16

i.

NlFig. 58.—18/16 floor- ing (standard match,

scratch back)

North Carolina Pine Association

5V/OVERMXFig. 60.

Standard sizes of hemlock heavy flooring, 3 by 6 flooring

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

<. .... — syV- * i

_}

[

\ %a

\

:io/ ; Fig. 62.

1 by 4 in°h kiln-dried flooring, green, 3%-

inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

169
411.29 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

21/

V.*4

Fig. 63.

t}/2 by 8 inch kiln-dried flooring, green, 2%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau k 3

A/4''

'%z(f %z

Fig. 65.— % 4 inch kiln-dried flooring, green, 8%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

= 3H" r

'at

Fig. 67.

1}4 by 4 inch kiln-dried flooring, green, 3%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau E

*4l

Fig. 69.

1^2 by 6 inch kiln-dried flooring, green, 5%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

i "1: %«.

1 -32 no/ 1 Fig. 64.

1 by 3 inch kiln-dried flooring, green, 2%-

inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

K — n

%a

/a 2 Fig. 66.

1% by 6 inch kiln-dried flooring, green, 5%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

Ih I : %a

Fig. 68.—Jf 6?/ 5 inch kiln-dried flooring, green, 5%-

inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau T

Fig. 70.—Inch floor S2S to inch and CM with

reduction in nominal widths of % inch

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association

Fig. 71.

2 by 6 flooring

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association

Fig. 72.1 by 8 inch iupelo flooring, also furnished

in 1}4 and 3}4, inch widths

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association 170
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.3

Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, grading

rules and sizes for beech and birch flooring, August

25, 1926. Identical with this association's grading rules and sizes for maple flooring. See 411.25 with the

following special grades:

Red clear beech and red clear birch manufactured

from all red face stock, especially selected for color. The color is a rich warm tint peculiar to no other wood.

ft

Fig. 73.

Standard sizes of heavy flooring; 2 by 6

flooring

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

MS

-3r3i

J

If

3*

Fig. 74.1 by 4 inch flooring West Coast Lumbermen's Association

f 3t

Tf

i4A

Fig. 75.

1)4, by 4 inch flooring West Coast Lumbermen's Association

J'X6'S2SS CM = M'K5i 5

<4

twtj

«1 (Special) i'x& Flooring (D&M) mi ^

Fig. 76.

1 by 6 inch flooring

Western Pine Manufacturers Association >£ —

F/oonnj

Fig. 77.

4-inch flooring

Western Pine Manufacturers Association

Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, rules for the grading of tamarack flooring, April 15, 1927.

Sizes. The location and size of tongue and groove, bead,

and other workings shall conform to the patterns

of the American Lumber Standards or as published

by the Northern Pine Manufacturers Association.

Grades.

Identical with those for pine. (See 411.27.) Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

standard grades and classifications for tupelo floor- ing, June 15, 1925. Thicknesses and widths. Thickness, if-inch hollow back; widths, 13^, 234,

and 3K inches face. Lengths.

Eight to twenty feet admitting 15 per cent of

8, 9, and 10 foot lengths, but not to exceed 5 per

cent of 8 and 9 foot lengths. Odd lengths are not standard above 10 feet. May also be specified 4

to 7 feet. Shall be graded from the finished side, B and

better, and C. Grades. B and better, and C, graded from the finished side. B and better shall admit sound sap without limit, but must be otherwise free from defects. C shall comprise stock not up to grade B, admitting unsound defects, and imperfections in manufacture which may be removed in two cuts with waste not exceeding 10 per cent of the length of the piece.

The question of color shall not be considered in standard grades of flooring.

B and better flooring may be furnished end

matched 2 feet and longer in odd or even foot and

half-foot lengths; the proportion of lengths, 2 to

33^2 feet, shall be what the stock will produce up

to 15 per cent. End-matched flooring may be fur- nished selected for color. Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 70,

71, and 72. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for larch flooring, July 1, 1925.

Patterns. Flooring patterns are illustrated in Figures 76 and 77. 411.3 CEILING LUMBER.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. For American Lumber Standard, yard and industrial sizes of lumber, including ceiling. See 411.0. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, standard grades of

soft pine ceiling, March 23, 1927. 171
411.3 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Similar to those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine

Association given on page 179.

Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures 89 to 93. California Redwood Association, standard speci- fications for eastern grades of California redwood

ceiling, April, 1927. The grades of ceiling are the same as for redwood

flooring, 411.29.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grades for California white

pine, sugar pine, white fir, Douglas fir, and incense cedar ceiling, May 1, 1926. See table of sizes and grading rules of this asso- ciation 411.1. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grades

for cypress ceiling, January, 1927. Widths.

234, 434, and 534 inches face as specified,

measured % inch wider than the face. Lengths. 4 to 20 feet. Grades. A, B, C, and D, identical with the grades for cypress flooring 411.22. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), inspec- tion rules for ceiling, January 1, 1927.

Lengths.

Lengths 6 to 16 feet in multiples of 1 foot not to exceed 5 per cent of 6 and 7 foot lengths. Grade. Same as flooring. (See 411.27.)

Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures, 78

to 80. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grading rules for hemlock

ceiling, February 1, 1927.

Thicknesses.

ts, re, Tt, and H inch. Widths and lengths same as for flooring. (See

411.24.) Special grading provisions for ceiling same as for

flooring. (See 411.24. ) Grades. D and better, No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and

No. 3 common, same as for flooring except for D and

better and No. 1 common grades, which are as

follows: D and better grade ceiling.—Should be free from

defects on face side and be properly manufactured.

No. 1 common grade ceiling.—Will admit the fol- lowing defects: Slight torn grain; small knots, red or

black, that will finish on face side; back not below

No. 1 common grade. Should be well manufactured.

Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures 93 and

101.

Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, rules

for the grading of northern white and Norway pine, spruce and tamarack, April 15, 1925. Ceiling shall be graded under the same rules as dressed and matched flooring, 411.27.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Douglas fir kiln dried ceiling, Schedule M, 1925. Defects based on piece 1 by 4 inches, 12 feet. Rule to apply proportionately on narrower and

wider stock. Grade. No. 2 clear and better, flat grain, kiln-dried, 3, 4, and 6 inch. Shall be well manufactured, will admit of slight

roughness in dressing. One of the following is also permitted with the foregoing defect. Three pitch

pockets and/or pitch blisters, each not over 2 inches

in length if not extending through the thickness of the piece, one sound and tight knot z/i inch or less in diameter, or equivalent defects. Edge grain may

be included at shipper's option. Bright sap no

defect. Pacifc Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Douglas fir green ceiling, Schedule M, 1925. Identical with this association's grading rules for Douglas fir green siding. (See 411.1.) m

Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures 81 to

88.Southeastern Forest Products Association, specifications for southern pine ceiling, September 1, 1925.

Grades. A, B, No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and No. 3 common. Based upon a piece 4 inches wide by

12 feet long, larger or smaller pieces proportionately.

Grade A same as grade A flat grain flooring, 411.27. Grade B similar to grade B flat grain flooring, 411.27. Grade No. 1 common same as grade D flat grain

flooring, 411.27. No. 2 common ceiling same as No. 2 common

flooring, 411.27. No. 3 common ceiling will admit all pieces that can not be used as No. 2 common ceiling, but are

suitable for use as cheap sheathing or crating

material, without a waste of more than 34 the

length of any one piece.

Special grading provisions. Pieces of ceiling with tongue not more than

inch scant of standard width will be admitted in any grade. Pieces of ceiling having not less than rg-inch

tongue or lap will be admitted in No. 2 common.

In No. 1 common and better grades of ceiling, wane on the reverse side, equivalent to 3^ the width

and Y§ the length of the piece, is admissible, pro- vided the wane does not extend into the tongue or groove; it may, however, extend into the groove or

for Yi the thickness of the tongue for a length of 172
LXJMBEK FOE BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411

Fig. 78.

% ceiling (finish ^)

North Carolina Pine Association

3£

» n Vis yg

Fig. 79.

y§ ceiling (finish £f ) North Carolina Pine Association

Fig. 80.—^ ceiling North Carolina Pine Association

it

IS/

•

H

i

Fig. 81.

1 by 4 inch kiln-dried double V. ceiling, green 3%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

173
411.3 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Fig. 82.—^ by 4 inch kiln-dried double beaded ceiling, green 3%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association

Fig. 83.

% by 4 inch kiln-dried double V. ceiling, green 3%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association

Fig. 84.1 by 4 inch kiln-dried double beaded ceiling, green 3%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau 5Va

2 %5- 2. 5/l£ 4

ft

V"/C4

Fig. 85.

% by 6 inch kiln-dried double V. ceiling, green 5%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau 174
CUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411

T

Fig. 86.

Y% by 6 inch kiln-dried double beaded ceiling, green 5%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

j%U 2, *A£ U 2, &Ae- *

!

• ii i

' %a

V* C

1

5/i6|

Fig. 87.—.7 62/ 6> inc/i, kiln-dried double V. ceiling, green 5%-inch face

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

Fig. 88.

1 by 6 inch kiln-dried double beaded ceiling, green

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau -inch face

Fig. 89.

-j^-inch ceiling ship-lapped

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association 175
.3 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Fig. 91.

^-inch ceiling

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

5=

4t

i #«sr

or -f

3*'

L

V5p

Fig. 92.

^-inch ceiling

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

Fig. 93.j^-inch ceiling

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

Fig. 94.

y£ by 4 inch V. and C. V. ceiling West Coast Lumbermen's Association 176
LUMBER TOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USB 411

x

•7 u 3je8

7T~

3+"-

7ar-

<i3

Fig. 95.

% by 4 inch V. and C. V. ceiling

1 hop 4

EE

J

a

/ «

21

/6

_*

3 ^J\© ' <n 3 7*|~T

•loo

Fig. 96.— 62/ 4 inc/i J5. and C. B. ceiling

.3%.

-3^ -

_i

T

Fig. 97.

% 4 inch B. and C. B. ceiling

3*

J3L 3f.

>4

^ ~2

I

Fig. 98.—^ 6y 4 inch B. and C. B. ceiling

All West Coast Lumbermen's Association 177
411.3 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Fig. 99.—^ by 4 inch B. and C. B. 2S ceiling West Coast Lumbermen's Association

jqa !—

J/6-

3*'

f*fc

T

/ /3

,11 / s

—

25

Fig. 100—^ 6y 4 incfc 7. and C. V. 2S ceiling West Coast Lumbermen's Association

Fig. 101.

1 by 4 inch V. and C. V. ceiling Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association West Coast Lumbermen's Association

2?

X6"S2S One Side Double Beaded Ce/hay

J...

vS/bfe" Double Beaded Ceiling AA

Fig. 102.

1 by 6 inch double beaded ceiling Western Pine Manufacturers Association Fig. 103.

1 by 6 inch double V. ceiling Western Pine Manufacturers Association 178
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USB 411.41

10 inches, provided the maximum width and length

decrease in proportion to the increase in depth.

The bead on all ceiling shall be depressed ^

inch below the surface of the piece. Southeastern Forest Products Association, sizes and grades for short length end-matched southern

pine ceiling, September 1, 1925.

Special finished thicknesses.

re, it, and H inch.

All other sizes and grades identical with this association's specifications for short length end-matched

southern pine flooring. (See 411.27.)

Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures 89 to 93. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grades and classification for cypress ceiling, June

15, 1925.

Thicknesses. W, iki and H inch. Width.

Shall be specified widths, 3, 4, 5, and 6 inches

wide.

Length. 8 and 20 inches (except in D grade), admitting

15 per cent of 8, 9, and 10 foot lengths, and not

to exceed 5 per cent of lengths under 10 feet. Odd

lengths are not standard above 10 feet. May also be specified 4 to 7 feet. Shall be graded from the finished side, or if both

sides are finished, it shall be graded from the better

side, A, B, C, and D.

A, B, C, and D grades are the same as for flooring.

(See 411.22.)

Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures 82 and

83.Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

standard grades and classifications for tupelo ceiling, June 15, 1925. Identical with those of this association for floor- ing (411.29) with the added requirement that ceiling shall be graded from the better side. Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures 82 and

83.Southern Pine Association, standard grades of southern pine ceiling, March 23, 1927. Identical with those of the Southeastern Forest Products

Association.

Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures 89 to 93. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, sizes and

grading rules for Douglas fir, hemlock, and Sitka spruce ceiling, July 1, 1927. Standard thicknesses. Nominal ^, *4 %, 1 inch. Finished ^, ^, H inch.

Standard widths. Nominal 3, 4, 6 inches. Finished face 2%, S}4, 5^ inches. Lengths.

Multiples of 1 foot. Grades. Grades, flat-grain and/or vertical grain, B and

better (for Douglas fir, hemlock, and Sitka spruce),

C (for Douglas fir and hemlock), and D (for Douglas

fir and hemlock).

Identical with grades B, C, and D for Douglas

fir flooring, No. 411.23, with the following addition

to the B and better grade. Will admit wane (on the reverse side) in addition to other permissible

defects, \i width, length, not into tongue.

Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures 94 to

101.Western Pine Manufacturers Association, rules for grading Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, larch and fir, white fir, cedar, and spruce ceiling, July 1, 1925. Thickness. ff dressed from 1 inch. (Also given as Y% to AO

Widths. Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, white fir, cedar,

and spruce

23^ face, dressed from 3-inch. V/i face, dressed from 4-inch. 5}4 face, dressed from 6-inch. 7}4 face, dressed from 8-inch. 9J4 face, dressed from 10-inch. Larch and fir

334 face, dressed from 4-inch. 5M face, dressed from 6-inch. 7M face, dressed from 8-inch. Thickness. ^to^ inch. Grades. Species grading rules 400.21 for cedar, 400.23 for

fir, 400.25 for larch, 400.26 for pine, and 400.28 for spruce.

Patterns. Ceiling patterns are illustrated in Figures 102 and

103. 411.4 PARTITIONS, MOLDINGS, FINISH,

AND BASEBOARDS. (See also 423.)

411.41 Partitions.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 411.0, yard lumber, American Lumber Standards for the grades and sizes of partition.

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for

soft pine partition, March 23, 1927. The grades and lengths of soft pine partition are

similar to those of the Southern Pine Association

for ceiling, 411.3. 179
411.41 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

End matching.

All end-matched partition are manufactured to American Lumber Standard sizes; grades are similar to those of the Southern Pine Association given

below.

Patterns. Patterns for partition are illustrated in Figure 104. California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

partition, April, 1927. The sizes of partition are as shown on this association's table of sizes for yard lumber, 411.0. The grades of partition are the same as redwood

flooring, 411.29.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grades for California white

pine, sugar pine, white fir, Douglas fir, and incense cedar partition, May 1, 1926. See table of sizes and grading rules of this association 411.1. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for cypress partition, January 1, 1927. Cypress partition. Partition shall be inspected the same as flooring

and ceiling, except that the inspection must be made

from the poor face. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), grading

rules for pine partition, January 1, 1927. Bark strip partition.

This grade shall consist of partition made from B

and better bark strips as described under 402.41,

90 per cent of each lot inspected to show not less than seven-sixteenths of wood on both edges from

end to end of piece, while admitting not over 10 per

cent showing less than seven-sixteenths of wood on

edges; provided grading size is 75 per cent clear of bark or wane; to be otherwise equal to the grade of

P> and better lumber.

Partition. Lengths.—Same as in ceiling, 411.3. Grades.—Same as in flooring, 411.27. Partition shall be graded according to the rules

for flooring 411.27, but the reverse side shall not be more than one grade lower than the face side. Patterns. Partitions patterns are illustrated in Figure 105. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, sizes and grading rules for hemlock

partition, February 1, 1927. Thickness. % inch. Width (in inches).

Nominal board measure

Face width

Overall width

4 3M

5& 3^

6 5^

Lengths.

Same as for flooring, 411.24. Special grading provisions.

Same as for flooring, 411.24. Grades. D and better, No. 1 common, No . 2 common, No.

3 common. Same as for flooring, except D and

better which is as follows: D and better grade.—Partition in D and better should be graded according to ceiling rules and

provide for stock worked two sides same pattern and

graded from poor side of piece. D and better will allow small sound knots well scattered that will

finish, slight torn grain not over r§- inch deep or over 3^ inch wide or over l}/£ inch long. Must be

free of wane, and must be well manufactured.

Patterns. Partition patterns are illustrated in Figure 104. Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, rules

for the grading of northern white and Norway pine, spruce, and tamarack, April 15, 1925. Partition shall be graded under the same rules as dressed and matched flooring, 411.27, but the grade

shall be determined from its poor side. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading

rules for yellow pine partition, September 1, 1925. Grades and lengths. Similar to those of the Southern Pine Association,

given below.

Patterns. Partition patterns are illustrated in Figure 104. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for cypress partition, June 15, 1925.

Shall be same widths, lengths, and thickness as

flooring and ceiling, but shall be graded from the

poorer side, A, B, C, and D, under flooring (see 411.29) and ceiling (see 411.3) rules. Southern Pine Association, grading rules for southern pine partition, March 23, 1927.

Grades. A, B, No. 1 common, No. 2 common, and No. 3 common.

Lengths.

Standard lengths and percentages of short lengths

shall be the same as in ceiling, 411.3. Partition shall be graded according to ceiling

rules, and must meet the requirements of the specified grades on the face side only, but the reverse

side shall not be more than one grade lower, and

shall not cause waste in No. 1 common and better

grades.

End matching.

All end-matched partition manufactured to American Lumber Standard sizes, as ' provided in the Southern Pine Association rules, will be graded on

Southern Pine Association standard rules, except No. 2 common which will lay a serviceable wall without cutting.

180
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411

Fig. 104.

%-inch partition

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association <*JL"

i^-q Ir I XL- T

1

T-16 - fa

toft

6S!s:

-leo 5"

Fig. 105.

Partition

North Carolina Pine Association QV-

/3'1 3V3L

/3

/a

I

1 <— -> / f A

1

/5 *

Fig. 106.—i 6?/ 4 incfc 7. and C. V. 2S partition West Coast Lumbermen's Association

Iff®

3Z V

02

partition West Coast Lumbermen's Association 181
411.41 STANDA EDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

All end-matched partition will be bundled to the

nearest foot, the shortest bundle to be 2 feet, and

trimmed in multiples of 1 foot or a fraction thereof,

and with the following regulation in respect to

length: Feet. A (minimum average) 9 B and better (minimum average) 8 B (minimum average) 7

All commons (average) 5

Patterns. Partition patterns are illustrated in Figure 104. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for Douglas fir, west coast hemlock and Sitka spruce partition, July 1, 1926.

Partition (K. D.). To be graded by same rules as govern ceiling (411.3), but from poorer side. Thicknesses. Nominal (inch) 1 Finished (inch) %

Widths. Nominal (inches) 4 6 Finished face (inches) 3J4 5^

Lengths.

Multiples of 1 foot. Patterns. Partition patterns are illustrated in Figures 106 and 107. 411.42 Moldings.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 411.0, yard lumber, American Lumber Standards for the grades and sizes of yard lumber. The

patterns for moldings referred to in 411.0, yard

lumber, and generally known as the 7000 series, are shown in Figures 108 to 135. AMERICAN STANDARD MOLDINGS The outline drawings shown herein are not all drawn to scale. They are for design of the faces

only. The correct sizes are shown in figures below

the serial numbers in the designs. Both the name

and serial number, as hereinafter shown, should be

specified in all orders for American standard moldings.

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for moldings, March 23, 1927. Grading rules for moldings, molded casing and

base, window and door jambs are similar to those

of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and

the Southern Pine Association given below. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, wood moldings,

March, 1925. This association has adopted the American Lumber Standards 7000 series of moldings, illustrated in Figures 108 to 135. California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

moldings, April 1927,

CASING AND BASE, WINDOW AND DOOR FRAME STOCK, JAMBS, ETC. Casing and base shall be worked to the American

standard sizes and patterns, illustrated in Figures 108 to 135. Window and door frame stock, jambs, etc., will be dressed, rabbetted, and plowed as ordered,

excepting that the thickness or width shall not

exceed that prescribed by the American standards.

Grades. Clear heart (Redwood Association grade), and

A and B (American Standard Redwood grades)

Lengths.

Standard lengths of casing and base shall be 3 to 20 feet, inclusive, in multiples of 6 inches up to and

including 5 feet 6 inches; in multiples of 1 foot up

to and including 9 feet; and in multiples of 2 feet in 10-foot and longer, admitting 10 per cent of 3 to

7-foot lengths.

Lengths of frame stock and jambs shall be covered by special contract. Casing, base, etc., will be graded according to the

rules for the respective grades of finish, 411.43. MOLDINGS AND LATTICE Moldings shall be worked to the American stand- ard sizes and patterns illustrated in Figures 108 to

135. Grade. A and better (see rules governing finish 411.43.) Lengths.

Standard lengths of moldings shall be 6 foot and

longer in multiples of 1 foot up to and including 9 feet and in multiples of 2 feet in 10 to 20 foot

lengths, admitting not more than 15 per cent of 6 to 9 foot lengths.

Moldings shall be well manufactured, smoothly

dressed, and free fiom defects, except occasional pin knots and any amount of bright sound sapwood will be allowed. BATTENS

Battens will be furnished in A and better grade

equivalent in quality to those described for finish (411.43), and in sizes and patterns conforming to those published by this association, or by members

thereof, or to special order. Clear heart grade in above items shall be by special contract.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for moldings, May 1, 1926.

Patterns. Moldings shall conform to the American Lumber

Standards, illustrated in Figures 108 to 135. Grade. Moldings shall be manufactured from stock of generally high quality and shall be equivalent in grade to C select and better, except as herein provided. Defects similar to those allowed in C select

will be permitted, due consideration being given

to the number and size of the defects in proportion

182
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.42

to the size of the molding. The grade is determined

from the face of the piece, portions showing when in place being the face. Pieces 12 feet long or longer requiring one waste

cut not less than 4 feet from one end, and not to ex- ceed 3 inches in length, will be permitted if one of the pieces thus obtained is equal to B and better

grade. Not more than 15 per cent of this type is allowed in a shipment.

Standard lengths. Four feet and longer in multiples of 1 foot. Random-length shipments shall consist of not more than 20 per cent under 10 feet in length, as

follows:

Percent 4 and 5 feet 2 6 and 7 feet 6 8 and 9 feet 12 When less than the full quota of the shorter lengths are included, proportionately more of the next longer lengths may be shipped. The balance

of random-length shipments shall consist of 10 feet and longer lengths, reasonably proportioned. Each

length shall be bundled separately.

When moldings iequiring 3 inches wide or wider

stock are ordered to be made from any specified

grade of lumber, it shall be permissible to ship the

full product after milling.

Hardwood Interior Trim Manufacturers Association, rules and regulations for hardwood interior trim and molding, May 26, 1926. RULES AND REGULATIONS |FOR GRADE "A" INTERIOR TRIM AND MOLDING

Grading Grading.

Grading from face side. Defects allowed. Those covered bm member moldings, or covered when the stock is installed; also defects on the

reverse side that do not impair its use.

1. Natural—(a) Knots.—Maximum size 3^ inch

greatest diameter, tightly encased and smoothly

dressed, not over two in any one piece, one knot to every 6 linear feet, or its equivalent, maximum

allowance 5 per cent of total shipment board foot

basis. Burls that do not contain knots or unsound

centers shall not be considered a defect.

(6) Sap.—Bright sap allowed. Sap gumwood

(plain and quartered), black gumwood, tupelo,

poplai, basswood, and buckeye may contain sound

discolored sap without limit. On red gum 5 per cent

of quantity may contain sap, but not more than 25

per cent of any one piece.

(c) Stain.—Not to cover more than 25 per cent

of surface measure of any one piece and not more

than 5 per cent of total shipment, board-foot basis.

(d) Streaks.—Slight streaks in oak and chestnut permitted in not over 10 per cent of shipment, boardfoot basis.

(e) Wormholes.—Not accompanied by stain, not

larger than ^ inch in diameter, not over three in any one piece, maximum allowance 5 per cent of total shipment, board-foot basis.

2. Working.—Slight defects in working, which

can be eliminated at negligible cost, such as rough

spots in sanded stock which can be hand smoothed.

3. Seasoning—(a) End splits.—34 inch in length

for each linear foot per piece, or its equivalent.

(b) Surface checks.— inch maximum width, 1 inch maximum length, one check to each foot surface measure, or equivalent per piece; maximum allow- ance 5 per cent of total shipment, board foot basis.

(c) Warp.—If stock will lay flat or straight, with

ordinary nailing.

Manufacturing

Designs.

1. Standard.—Conform to the American Lumber

Standards, and known as the 7000 series molding,

illustrated in Figures 108 to 135.

2. Special.—As per full-size detail drawing (inside of line to govern). As per sample. As per template (stock must fit flush, not tight at time of machining).

Sizes.

1. Standard.—Conform to the American Lumber

Standards, and known as the 7000 series molding,

illustrated in Figures 108 to 135.

2. Special.—As specified. Variation in size. inch tolerance. Width.

Conform to the American Lumber Standards, and

known as the 7000 series molding, illustrated in Figures 108 to 135. Length.

1. Random.—4 to 16 foot subject to variation of

less than 6 inches, over or under, counted on 6 inch

breaks, measurement obtained by average, and bundled accordingly. Shipments may contain not more

than 20 per cent of lengths under 8 feet and 5 per

cent may consist of lengths under 6 feet.

2. Specified.—Stock shall be usable for purpose

intended without waste. Lengths up to 4 feet 6

inches, inclusive, count on even half-foot breaks. Example.—3 feet 3 inches count as 3 feet 6 inches;

3 feet 6 inches count as 3 feet 6 inches. Lengths 4

feet 7 inches to 7 feet 6 inches, inclusive, counted 6

inches over the next even half foot. Example.—

feet 9 inches count as 6 feet 6 inches; 6 feet count as 6 ft 6 inches. Lengths 7 feet 7 inches and longer

counted 12 inches over the next even half-foot. Example.—8 feet 3 inches count as 9 feet 6 inches; 9 feet 6 inches count as 10 feet 6 inches. Dryness.

Kiln dried to moisture content, not to exceed 10 per cent when shipped from the mill. Torn grain. ^ inch maximum depth permitted on machine

run stock in not over 10 per cent of length, in the

aggregate, in any one piece.

Machine sanding. . Maximum allowance ^ inch below machine size for sanding one face, when specified.

52688°—27 13 183
411.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for moldings, January, 1927. Cypress battens. Battens shall be flat or O. G.

Sizes, 1 by 3 inches S4S to if by 2^ inches and

resawed; 1 by 2% to 3 inches S2S and resawed. Battens will admit all the defects allowed on the

face side of No. 1 common, but none that will seriously impair the strength of the piece or prevent

its use for the purpose intended. Hardwood molding and trim. The National Hardwood Lumber Association has

adopted the American standard sizes for molding

illustrated in Figures 108 to 135. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), grading

rules for moldings, January 1, 1927. Moldings.

Lengths.—Lengths 6 to 16 feet, in multiples of

1 foot. Grade.—B and better. Moldings are manufactured in one grade, unless by special contract. B and better molding shall be well manufactured

and ]/i of the pieces of any item may contain any

one of the following defects or its equivalent: Three

pin wormholes; slight defects in dressing; one pin knot; one small pitch pocket; pitch 1 inch wide by

6 inches long or its equivalent in pitch streaks; and

10 per cent of stain. Base and casing.

Lengths.—Lengths same as ceiling, 411.3. Base and casing shall be graded same as flooring, 411 .27, and ceiling, except the edges shall not be

of lower grade than the face, but the reverse side or back may be No. 2 common or better. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading

rules for moldings, September 1, 1925. Molded casing and base, window and door jambs.

Molded casing and base shall be worked to the American Lumber Standard sizes and patterns

illustrated in Figures 108 to 135. Window and door jambs will be dressed, rabbeted,

and plowed as ordered.

Grades.—A, B, and C. Casing, base, and jambs will admit the same

defects as are admissible in finish of the same grades

except wane.

Moldings.

Moldings shall be worked to the American Lumber

standard sizes and patterns illustrated in Figures 108 to 135. Lengths.—Standard lengths are 6 feet and longer,

and in shipments of mixed lengths, 5 per cent of 6 and/or 7 feet shall be admitted, even though the number of feet of each length be specifically stated. Grade.—B and better. B and better molding shall be well manufactured

and }/i of the pieces of any item may contain any

one of the following defects or its equivalent: Three

pin wormholes; slight defects in dressing; pin knot; one small pitch pocket; pitch 1 inch wide by 6 inches long or its equivalent in pitch streaks. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for cypress moldings, June 15, 1925. Moldings.

Sizes.—Standard.

Quality.—B and better. Battens. Battens, both flat and O. G., are not moldings.

Same are invariably used with common lumber and

shall, therefore, be graded No. 1 common and better, admitting all defects allowed in No. 1 common, but none that will prevent the use of each piece in full length for batten purposes, %-inch battens shall be 1-inch strips S2S to If by 2}4 inches, and re- sawed, or 1 by 2 z/i inches to 3 inches S2S and

resawed. Unless otherwise specified, % inch or

flat battens shall be S2S only and resawed. 0. G.

battens shall be made according to molding-book

patterns.

Southern Pine Association, grading rules for moldings, March 23, 1927. Grading rules for moldings, molded casing and

base, window and door jambs are the same as those

of the Southeastern Forest Products Association, above. West Coast lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for West Coast hemlock, Douglas fir, and

Sitka spruce molding, July 1, 1926. Molding stock. Shall consist of lumber suitable for ripping molding strips from 1 to 6 inches wide, 8 to 20 feet long. Will admit pitch pockets and splits, running length- wise of the piece, or other recognized defects. This

grade shall contain not less than 60 per cent of rippings, running 1 inch and wider, 8 feet and longer, 25 per cent of which should average 3 inches and

wider; 80 per cent to be 12 feet and longer.

Moldings. For sizes and patterns see various molding books

of association members for items desired. Lengths.—Moldings 4 to 20 feet, not exceeding 15 per cent 4 to 7 feet. Bundling.—Each length bundled separately.

Bright sap no defect.—Defects based on 12-foot

lengths. Light sap stain, 25 per cent of face permissible in outside moldings. Hit and miss permitted on back of crown, bed, and sprung cove patterns.

B and better K. D. moldings under 2}/% inches wide. Shall be well manufactured. Will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an

equivalent combination of defects : Slight torn grain

inch deep), 25 per cent of face; 1 pitch pocket, not to exceed 1% inches in length; 1 small sound

and intergrown knot; 1 small pitch streak. B and better K. D. moldings 2% inches and wider. Shall be well manufactured. Will admit one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Slight torn grain (^f 184
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411
411.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES
187
411.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.42

189
190
LUMBEK FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411

191
411.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

192
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USB 411.42
411.42 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

inch deep), 25 per cent of face; 1 pitch pocket, equal

in length to width of piece; 1 small sound and inter- grown knot; 1 small pitch streak.

Battens. 3-inch flat, shall be finished to ^ by 2^ inches

net; 2-inch O. G. shall be finished to M by 1M inches CASINGS & BACK BAND

LC 7345

7151 7346

7352

7152 7356

7153 7367

J

5

7154 7366

Fig. 135.

American standard moldings

net; 23^-inch O. G. shall be finished to % by 2^

inches net; 3-inch O. G. shall be finished to M by 23^

inches net. Fir battens shall be of good, sound stock. Will admit sound and tight knots 3^ width of piece; small

(4-inch) pitch pockets, several of which may be

through; deep torn grain; medium sap stain and

discoloration; firm heart stain. Unless specific instructions are given, surfacing will be S1S2E or S4S, at shipper's option.

Casing and base. To be graded by same rules as finish, 411.43. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for Pondosa pine and Idaho white pine

moldings, July 1, 1925. Standard moldings shall have the general quality

and appearance of C and better beveled siding and,

proportional to size, will admit the same defects, except that in the case of inside moldings only

slight stain is allowed when this defect appears on a

piece in an appreciable amount.

Defects that will not show when piece is laid shall not be given the same consideration as defects elsewhere. Defects requiring one cut not to exceed 4 inches

of waste, to eliminate a knot hole or other defect too serious to go in the grade, are allowed in high

line pieces 12 feet long and longer, the balance of such pieces after cutting to approximate B and

better beveled siding in quality; but not more than

20 per cent of the cutting type shall be permitted in any one item. Lengths shall be 8 feet and longer, in multiples of

1 foot, lengths to be bundled separately or at the

option of the shipper short lengths up to the allowed

percentage may be matched in with the longer stock to produce the given length.

Moldings may be ordered " standard grade," or in the case of moldings 3 inches wide or wider may be

ordered, separately or mixed, in any of the regular

lumber grades provided for by the rules of the Western Pine Manufacturers Association.

Sizes. Moldings are the 7000 series, the American

standard patterns illustrated in Figures 108 to 135. Other patterns shall be considered as specials.

White Pine Association of the Tonawandas,

grades of northern white pine lumber for moldings

1922. The following grades of white pine lumber, as* shown in 400.26 for this association, are suitable for moldings—No. 1 moldings; No. 2 moldings; stained

saps. Wholesale Sash and Door Association, design and

sizes of moldings, March, 1925. This association has adopted the American

Lumber Standards 7000 series of moldings, illus- trated in Figures 108 to 135. 411.43 Finish.

Amercian lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 411.0, yard lumber, American Lumber

Standards for the grades and sizes of finishing lumber. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for

finishing lumber, March 23, 1927. 194
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.43

The grading rules for finishing lumber are similar to those of the Southeastern Forest Products

Association and the Southern Pine Association

given below.

California Redwood Association, standard specifi- cations for eastern grade of California redwood

finishing lumber, April, 1927. The sizes of finishing lumber are as shown in

this association's table of sizes of yard lumber,

411.0. The grades of finish are as follows: The grades of finish are based on a piece 8 inches wide by 12 feet long, or a piece having 8 square feet, surface measure; on this basis larger or smaller

pieces will admit a proportionate number of defects. Grades. Clear heart (Redwood Association grade), and

A and B (American Standard Redwood grades)

Lengths.

Standard lengths shall be 8 to 20 feet, inclusive,

in multiples of 2 feet, admitting not to exceed 10 per cent of 8-foot lengths.

Special provisions.

Small crook shall be permissible in clear heart and

"A finish," and medium crook in "B finish." California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for California white and

sugar pine, white and red fir, Douglas fir, and incense cedar finish, May 1, 1926. CALIFORNIA WHITE AND SUGAR PINE

Finishing Lumber Lumber that is generally clear, but containing

defects limited both as to size and number, and

which is smoothly dressed and suitable for use as a whole for finishing purposes or other uses in which

large clear pieces are required, shall be graded as

finishing lumber. Grade descriptions are based on

stock 12 inches wide and 16 feet long.

Standard sizes. THICKNESS

Nominal (inches)

Dressed

(SIS or S2S)

Standard Extra

standard

tt —

Inchesn

i&

i&

m

m

Inches

l lfi m2H

2%

IXm~

2.m~— - 3.. 4

WIDTH

Nominal (inches) Dressed

(SIS or S4S)

4 Inchesm

m

VA nA

5

6

7

g9

10

12

1416 ag

18.. 20- 19A Standard lengths shall be 8 feet and up in multiples of 1 foot, but no shipment shall contain more

than 5 per cent of 8 and 9 foot lengths.

Standard grades No. 1 and No. 2 clear or B select and better. The grade of No. 1 and No. 2 clear or Bselect and

better shall comprise the better product of the log

and possess natural finishing qualities. Much of

this stock is free from defects, but typical pieces

generally contain one or two minor defects or blemishes which do not detract from its usefulness. Four to six inch pieces shall be practically free from

defects. Random width shipments shall consist of 95 per

cent or more 8 inches wide and wider. The poorest pieces, based on stock 12 inches wide and 16 feet long, admitted in a shipment may

contain two or combination of two of any of the

following defects: Three small surface checks,

slight crook, one sound and tight knot that does not

exceed 1 inch in diameter, two small sound and tight

knots, three sound and tight pin knots, small pitch

pocket, light pitch, light stain—5 per cent of area, patch slight torn grain, slight chipped grain.

C select. This grade is primarily based on the idea of fur- nishing a high class paint finish and its qualities are

necessarily of a nature fitting it for the tests that

will be demanded of it. The defects admissible are the same as those in No. 1 and No. 2 clear or B select and better, but

exist to a greater degree.

Medium stain covering % of the face, or a greater area of lighter stain, is admissible, when not in combination with other marked defects. Crook, based on 16-foot lengths, shall be permissible in both the grades of C select and D select in accordance with the following:

Inches

1 and 1}4 inches by 4 inches 2

1 and 1M inches by 5 and 6 inches 1^

1 and 1}4 inches by 7 to 10 inches 1}£

1 and inches by 11 and 12 inches 1

195
411.43 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

For 1^2 and 2 inch thicknesses, crooks }4 inch

less than above is permissible. Pieces longer or

shorter than 16 feet may have proportionate amounts of crook. Based on a piece 12 inches wide, J€ inch cup shall be permissible in C select and D select. Narrower

or wider pieces may have proportionate amounts

of cup. The above maximums not allowed when in seri- ous combination with other defects. The poorest piece in this grade, based on stock 12 inches wide and 16 feet long, would contain four or a combination of four of the defects listed under the grade of No. 1 and No. 2 clear or B select and better. D select. This grade of lumber belongs between the higher

finishing lumber and the common grades and par- takes somewhat of the nature of both. It is made

up largely of pieces that carry a finish appearance on but one side only, the back of the piece often carry- ing a mass of defects. Other pieces have the defects

of the higher grades of finish, but of a more serious nature from a quality standpoint; other pieces have

a high intrinsic value as compared to the next lower common grade, but not a high appearance as compared to the higher finish grades. Another type

often placed in this grade is a high line piece requiring a cut to eliminate a defect too serious to go into

finish work.

Medium stain over the entire face is admissible when not in combination with other serious defects. WHITE FIR, DOUGLAS FIR, AND INCENSE CEDAR

Finishing Lumber

Sizes. White fir, Douglas fir, and incense cedar finishing

shall be finished according to the sizes specified for pine finishing.

Standard Grades C select and better. C select and better shall consist of C select and

all the better products of the log. On the basis of 1 by 8-16, the poorest piece admitted in the grade may have five small knots well

scattered, or three larger knots if well located. In

the absence of knots, or with fewer knots, slightly torn or raised grain, fine season checks, small pitch

pockets, or other small defects common to these

species will be admitted.

Approximately 33J^ per cent of medium blue

stain, or a greater area of lighter stain, if not in combination with other marked defects will be allowed,

also a small percentage of split ends, the splits not

to exceed the width of the piece.

A serious combination of the above defects will not be allowed in any one piece.

D select. The grade of D includes all stock between C and

better and the higher common grades and will admit

quite serious defects if at the same time the piece

retains a good appearance. Fine seasoning checks over the entire face, or several larger seasoning

checks, will be admitted, also numerous small knots,

pitch pockets, medium pitch, raised grain, or other

defects common to fir provided they do not give a

coarse or common appearance to the piece. One

cut not exceeding 4 inches in length will be allowed

in high line pieces 12 feet and longer.

A serious combination of the above defects will not be allowed in any one piece.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for cypress, poplar, cottonwood, and gum

finish, January, 1927. Cypress finish (when specified). Widths.—Stock widths 4 inches and over, as

specified. Rough widths may be 3*4 inch scant of the width specified. Widths surfaced two edges

must be % inch less than the specified rough widths.

Lenghts.—8 feet and over. Inspection shall be made from the good face, the

reverse side of A, B, and C shall not be more than

one grade lower. A and B may be combined in one grade, as B and better. Finish shall be surfaced two sides to standard

surfaced thicknesses unless otherwise specified.

A finish. Pieces 4 and 5 inches wide must be clear and free from sapwood.

Defects and sapwood in the aggregate will be

admitted according to width as follows: 6 inches, one 24-inch sound defect or 1 inch of bright sapwood.

7 inches, one 24-inch sound defect or 2 inches of bright sapwood.

9 inches, one 24-inch sound defect and 1^ inches

of bright sapwood; or two 24-inch sound defects; or 3 inches of bright sapwood.

12 inches, one 2^-inch sound defect and 2 inches of bright sapwood; or one sound standard defect or its equivalent; or 4 inches of bright sapwood.

14 inches and wider will admit defects in proportion to the multiple of 7 to 12 inch widths. B finish. Pieces 4 to 11 inches wide, free from other defects, may be all bright sapwood; in pieces 12 inches and

over wide bright sapwood is no defect. Otherwise

defects and sapwood in the aggregate will be

admitted according to widths as follows: 4 inches, two 24-inch sound defects and 2 inches

of bright sapwood.

7 inches, two 24-inch sound defects and 3 inches

of bright sapwood.

9 inches, one sound standard defect or three 24- inch sound defects, and 4 inches of bright sapwood.

12 inches, one sound standard defect or four 24- inch sound defects well scattered. 14 inches and wider will admit sound defects in proportion to the multiple of 7 to 12 inch widths. C finish. This grade will admit pin wormholes, sound stain, 24-inch sound knots and other sound defects that do not prevent the use of each piece in its full width and length as a paint grade.

196
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.43

D finish. This grade will admit all the defects allowed in C finish, and, in addition, will admit slight shake

and other defects that will not prevent the use of each piece in its full width and length as a common

paint grade. The reverse side will admit defects that do not seriously impair the strength of the

piece.

Cypress panel (when specified). Widths.—8 inches and wider.

Lengths.—8 to 20 feet, admitting 15 per cent of odd lengths.

Inspection shall be made from the poor side, and

shall be the same as B and better finish. PANEL AND WIDE NO. 1 Poplar, cottonwood, and gum.

Panel and wide No. 1 are a combined grade and

must contain not less than 50 per cent panel. Widths.—18 inches and over.

Splits not exceeding 6 inches in length in one end

shall not be considered defects. Bright sapwood is no defect. Sound stain not exceeding 3 inches on each edge

in the aggregate shall not be considered a defect in poplar and cottonwood.

Sound stain shall not be considered a defect in gum.

Panel Lengths.—8 to 16 feet, admitting 30 per cent of 8 to 11 feet. Fifty per cent of the total quantity must be clear on both sides. The balance of the quantity will admit defects provided 90 per cent of the piece can

be used for panels in cuttings 4 feet or over long

by the full width of the piece. Wide No. 1 Lengths.—6 to 16 feet, admitting 30 per cent of 6 to 11 feet. Pieces 6 and 7 feet long must be clear. Pieces 8 feet and over long will admit defects provided 75 per cent of the piece can be used for panels in cuttings 4 feet or over long by the full width of the piece.

North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), grading

rules for pine finish, January 1, 1927. B and better finish.

1, 134, 13^, and 2 [inches thick up to and including 10 inches in widths in addition to the equivalent of

c :.e split in end which should not exceed in length the width of the piece, will admit any two of the

following or their equivalent of combined defects: Slight torn grain, 3 pin knots, 1 standard knot, 3 small pitch pockets, 1 standard pitch pocket,

1 standard pitch streak, 5 per cent of sap stain, wane

not to exceed 1 inch in width, 3^ inch in depth and

one-sixth the length of the piece; small surface checks; reverse side to grade C or better, except

1}4 inches and thicker may grade No. 2 common or

better.

11 inches and wider B finish will admit three of the above defects or their equivalent, but sap stain

shall not exceed 10 per cent. C finish. C finish will admit, in addition to one split in end

which should not exceed in length the width of the

piece, two or combination of two of any of the fol- lowing defects Or their equivalent: Surface checks; pin wormholes, 4 per surface foot; medium torn

grain; 6 pin knots, 4 small knots; 2 standard knots;

6 small pitch pockets; 4 medium pitch pockets;

2 standard pitch pockets; 2 standard pitch streaks;

pith, not exceeding 34 inch in width by 3 inches in length; slight shake, equal in length to width of piece; 25 per cent firm red heart; 25 per cent stain; wane 1 inch in width, 3^ inch in depth, and onethird the length of the piece.

Defective dressing or slight skips in dressing, that

will not prevent its use as finish without waste, will also be allowed. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for hemlock and tamarack

finishing lumber, February 1, 1927. Finishing lumber. The thickness and widths of finishing lumber

SIS or S2S and/or S1E or S2E conform to the sizes of finish of the American Lumber Standards, 411.0, yard lumber.

Lengths.

Standard lengths of finish shall be 8 to 20 feet, and

in shipments of mixed lengths, 20 per cent of 8-foot

in D and better shall be admitted.

The above percentage of short lengths is cus- tomary and in the interest of conservation, will be

included, as far as practical, in all shipments of mixed lengths.

Special provision.

The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot

lengths, shall be permissible in all grades of finish

Inches

1 and 134 inches by 3 inches 3

1 and V/i inches by 4 inches 23^

1 and 134 inches by 5 and 6 inches 2

1 and V/i inches by 7 and 8 inches \%

1 and 134 inches by 9 and 10 inches 134

1 and 134 inches by 11 and 12 inches 1 For 13^ and 2 inch thicknesses, crook 3^ inch less than above is permissible. Pieces longer or shorter than 16 feet may have proportionate amounts of crook. Grades D and better. This grade is especially adapted for interior finish where only the face or best side is expected to show

with some attention given to the back of the piece.

The face shall show no wane, but the back may

show such an amount of wane or other defects as will not interfere with the use of the piece for finishing purposes. No shake or season check shall be allowed on the

face side, but a very little tight shake and medium

checks may appear on the back of the piece.

197
411.43 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

This grade will admit on the face side several

tight pin knots not over % of an inch in diameter. In 4 and 6 inch pieces, 12 feet and longer, not more

than three knots are admissible, and proportionately more in wider pieces.

Ten and twelve inch pieces 12 feet and longer, will not admit more than three sound and tight knots, not to exceed % inch in diameter. Narrower and

shorter pieces will admit of fewer medium knots, but

not a combination of such knots and other defects. Pieces 12 feet and longer are admissible that will, with not more than 10 per cent of waste, produce

two clear cuts each 4 feet long or longer.

Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for northern pine, Norway pine, spruce and

tamarack finishing lumber, April 15, 1925. B select and better. B select and better shall consist of B select and all the better product of the stock and may be 4 inches

or wider, and suitable for natural finish. In this grade white sap is not considered a defect. Knots, shake, season checks, and a small amount

of stained sap are admissible. A 4 or 6 inch piece should have but very little shake. Wider pieces can have more shake, but it should be local and not scattered over the face of the

piece. Season checks equivalent to shake defects are

admissible.

Slightly stained sap is admissible when other

defects are not of a serious nature, the amount of stained sap depending upon the width of the piece.

C select. C select may be 4 inches or wider. The grade of C select shall possess finishing qualities and be suit- able for high-class paint finishes. The defects admissible are the same as those in B select, but exist to a

greater degree. Medium stain covering one-third the face of the piece will be allowed, if not in combination with other marked defects. D select D select may be 4 inches or wider, and embraces

all thicknesses manufactured in pine lumber. This grade of lumber belongs between the higher

finish lumber and the common grades and partakes

somewhat of the nature of both. It is made up

largely of pieces that carry a finish appearance on

but one side only, the back of the piece often carry- ing a mass of defects. Other pieces have the defects

of the higher grades of finish but of a more serious nature from a quality standpoint, other pieces have

a high intrinsic value as compared to the next

lower common grade, but not a high appearance as compared to the higher finish grades. Another

type often placed in this grade is a high line piece

requiring a cut to eliminate a defect too serious to go into finish work.

Medium stain covering entire face, or season checks equivalent to shake defects will be admitted

if not in combination with other marked defects. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for red cedar finishing lumber, August

1, 1925.

Defects based on 8 inches by 12 feet.

Nominal thickness (inches) Standard

finished thickness, SIS or S2S

Finished widths, 81E

and S2E

i_ InchesH

$

IK

Inches

3 to 7, % inch off. 8 to 12, y2 inch off. 13 and wider, 1 inch

off. IHm

2__Widths of surfaced stock 13 inches and wider with

edges rough, ^ inch less than nominal.

Lengths.

Multiples of 1 foot. American Lumber Standard thicknesses (see 411 .0) can be furnished on contract. No. 2 and better. Slight torn grain permitted. With the above,

will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Bright sap; two pin knots. One additional knot

permitted for each additional 2 inches increase in width. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading

rules for finishing lumber, September 1, 1925. The grades of finish are based on a piece 8 inches wide by 12 feet long, or a piece having 8 square feet, surface measure; on this basis, larger or smaller

pieces will admit a proportionate number of defects. Grades. A, B, and C. Lengths.

Standard lengths are 8 to 20 feet, inclusive, and

in shipments of mixed lengths, 5 per cent of 8-foot

in "C" and better grades shall be permissible.

The above percentage of short lengths is cus- tomary, and in the interest of conservation, will be

included, so far as practicable, in all shipments of mixed lengths.

Special provisions.

The following amount of crook, based on 16-foot

lengths, shall be permissible in'all grades of finish:

Inches

1 and 1}4: inches by 3 inches 3

1 and V/i inches by 4 inches 23^

1 and 13^ inches by 5 and 6 inches 2

1 and 134 inches by 7 and 8 inches 1%

1 and inches by 9 and 10 inches 1J^

1 and 134 inches by 11 and 12 inches 1 For \Y2 and 2 inch thicknesses, crook 3^ inch less than above is permissible. Pieces longer or shorter than 16 feet may have proportionate amounts of crook. Based on a piece 12 inches wide, 34-inch cup shall be permissible in all grades of finish. Narrower or wider pieces may have proportionate amounts of cup. In case both sides are desired, A, B, or C grade,

or free from all defects, special contract must be

made. Defective dressing or slight skips in dressing, on the reverse side of finish, are admissible. 198
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USB 411.43

"A" finish, up to and including 12 inches in width, must show one face practically clear of all defects except it may have such wane as would

dress off if surfaced four sides. "A" finish, 13 inches and wider, will admit two

small defects or their equivalent.

"B" finish will admit, in addition to one split in end which should not exceed in length the width of the piece, two or combination of two of any of the

following defects or their equivalent: Small sur- face checks; slight torn grain; 3 pin knots; 2 small

knots; 1 standard knot; 3 small pitch pockets; 2 medium pitch pockets; 1 standard pitch pocket;

2 small pitch streaks; 1 standard pitch streak; 5 per cent stain; or firm red heart; wane 1 inch in width, yi mch in depth, and y§ the length of the

piece.

"C" finish will admit, in addition to one split in end which should not exceed in length the width of the piece, two or combinations of two of any of the following defects or their equivalent: Surface

checks; pin wormholes, 4 per surface foot; medium

torn grain; 6 pin knots; 4 small knots; 2 stand- ard knots; 6 small pitch pockets; 4 medium pitch

pockets; 2 standard pitch pockets; 2 standard pitch

streaks; pith, not exceeding *4 inch in width by 3

inches in length; slight shake, equal in length to width of piece; 25 per cent firm red heart; 25 per

cent stain ; wane 1 inch in width, y% inch in depth,

and ^ the length of the piece.

Defective dressing or slight skips in dressing, that

will not prevent its use as finish without waste,

will also be allowed. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for cypress finish, June 15, 1925. Clear heart finish (special grade) . Thicknesses.—1 to 4 inches. Widths.—Shall be specified widths, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 inches and wider, and 24 inches and wider, and may be furnished in assorted widths, 4 to 12 inches, admitting 20 per cent of 7, 9, and

11 inch widths, and may also be furnished in random

widths 13 inches and wider.

Lengths.—8 to 20 feet. Shall be all heart and the face side shall be free from defects. Grade A.

Thicknesses.—1 to 4 inches. Widths.—Shall be specified widths, 4 5, 6, 8, 10,

12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 inches and wider and 24 inches and wider, and may be furnished in assorted widths, 4 to 12 inches, admitting 20 per cent of 7, 9, and

11 inch widths, and may also be furnished in random

widths 13 inches and wider. Lengths.—8 to 20 feet. Pieces 12 inches and narrower shall be practically

free from defects, on the face side, and sap shall be

limited as follows:

1 inch on pieces under 8 inches wide.

2 inches on pieces 8 to 9 inches wide.

3 inches on pieces 10 to 11 inches wide. 4 inches on pieces 12 inches wide.

Pieces wider than 12 inches will admit any amount

of bright sap.

Grade B.

Thicknesses.—1 to 4 inches. Widths.—Shall be specified widths, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches wide. May also be furnished in assorted widths 4 to 12 inches, admitting 20 per cent

of 7, 9, and 11 inch widths, and may also be fur- nished in random widths, 13 inches and wider.

Lengths.—8 to 20 feet. Pieces 4 to 6 inches wide will admit one or two

small sound knots. Pieces wider than 6 inches will admit small sound

knots in proportion as the width increases. Grade C. Thicknesses.—1 to 4 inches. Widths.—Shall be specified widths, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches. May be furnished in assorted widths, 4 to 12 inches, admitting 20 per cent, 7, 9, and 11 inch widths.

Lengths.—8 to 20 feet. This grade will consist to a considerable extent of droppings from the B grade, and, while admitting

stained sap, a few pin wormholes well scattered and

coarser and more numerous defects than B, is in- tended for use full length and width on paint jobs.

Grade D.

Thicknesses.—1, 1^£, 13^, and 2 inches. Widths—ShaU be specified widths, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches. May also be furnished in assorted widths, 4 to 12 inches, admitting 20 per cent 7, 9, and 11 inch widths.

Lengths.—8 to 20 feet. This is intended as a cheaper paint finish, and

the defects shall be so restricted in number and

character as to produce a practically sound face. Will not admit open shake nor loose or unsound

knots, nor will it admit wane exceeding one-half of the thickness of the piece at any point, and that on

one edge only. No wane on face side. The reverse

side may have coarse defects, and need not be of a

finishing type.

Southern Pine Association, grading rules for finishing lumber, March 23, 1927. The grading rules for finishing lumber of this association are the same as those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association, above. West Coast lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for Douglas fir, West Coast hemlock, Sitka

spruce, and western red cedar finish, July 1, 1926. DOUGLAS FIE AND WEST COAST HEMLOCK

Finish, K. D.

Defects based on 8 inches by 12 feet. THICKNESSES

Nominal (inches) Standard

yard SIS

or S2S

Standard

industrial SIS or S2S

1 _. Inches

If \n% ofE

Inches m- - iy2 22Y2 to 4

52688°—27 14 199
411.43 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

WIDTHS WIDTHS

Nominal (inches) S1E or S2E Nominal (inches) S1E or S2E

InchesVsoft V2 ott Hon

1 off

2 to 3 Inches HoQ

y2 oil Hon

1 Of!

4 to 7.. 4 to 7..

8 to 12 8 to 12 Over 12

Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. B and better grade—F. G. and/or V. G. finish. Shall be well manufactured. Will admit slight torn grain; slight cup; splits on end not longer than

width of piece, in 5 per cent of pieces. With the above, will admit the following defect, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three very small (2-inch) pitch pockets, none

through.

C grade—F. G. and/or V. G. finish. Will admit medium torn grain; light sap stain, 25 per cent of face; slight cup; small seasoning

checks; split on end not longer than width of piece,

jn 5 per cent of pieces. With any one of the above,

will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Two sound and tight small knots or equivalent of sound and tight pin knots; 4 small (4-inch) pitch

pockets, 2 of which may be through, or equivalent

of slightly larger pockets; occasional slight skips on

edges and back; small pitch streak. Will admit

cut-out of 114 inch for a defect 4 feet or more from

either end in pieces 12 feet or longer, if piece is otherwise as good as B grade.

D grade—F. G. and/or V. G. finish. Will admit the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Four 1-inch sound and tight knots; short splits; deep cup; numerous small pitch pockets (several of which may be through), or equivalent medium to

large pitch pockets; heart stain; medium sap stain; 4 heavy skips, each not over 12 inches long, based on 12-foot length; torn grain; pin wormholes;

seasoning checks; cut-out of 3 inches for a defect 4 feet or more from either end in pieces 12 feet and

longer. SITKA SPRUCE

Finish K. D. Defects based on 12 feet. THICKNESSES

Nominal (inches) Standard

yard SIS

or S2S

Standard

industrial SIS or S2S

1 Inches

2532 1^®%on

Inches H

1M

iy2 2 iH

2V2 to 4

Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. B and better finish. Defects based on 4 to 6 inches by 12 feet. Will admit the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Slight torn

grain; one sound and tight pin knot; one 2-inch

pitch pocket, not through.

B and better finish. Defects based on 8 to 10 inches by 12 feet. Will admit slight torn grain; slight cup; split on end not

longer than width of piece, in 5 per cent of pieces.

With the above, will admit one of the following

defects, or an equivalent defect, or an equivalent

combination of defects: Two sound and tight pin

knots; two 3-inch pitch pockets, none through. One

additional pin knot or pitch pocket allowed for each

2-inch increase in width. C finish. Defects based on 8 inches by 12 feet. Will admit

medium torn grain; light sap stain; 25 per cent of face; slight cup; small seasoning checks; split on

end not longer than width of piece, in 5 per cent

of pieces. With any. of the above, will admit one

of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three 1-inch sound and tight knots, or equivalent of pin knots;

4 small (4-inch) pitch pockets, 2 of which may be

through, or equivalent of slightly larger pockets;

occasional slight skips on edges and back. Cut-out

of 1^2 inches for a defect 4 feet or more from either end in pieces 12 feet or longer, if piece is otherwise

as good as B and better. WESTERN RED CEDAR

Finish, K. D.

Defects based on 8 inches by 12 feet. THICKNESSES

Nominal (inches) Standard

yard

SIS or S2S

Standard

industrial SIS or S2S

1_ Inches Inches

if16 IH 1A \y2 1A

2 iVs iH

iy2 to 4 V* off.

200
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USB 411.5

WIDTHS

Nominal (inches) S1E or S2E

Inch

4 to 7 8 to 12 HoS.

1 ofi. Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. B and better. Will admit slight torn grain; 1-inch bright sap. With the above, will admit the following defect, an

equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Two sound and tight small knots. One

additional knot or J^-inch sap allowed for each additional 2 inches increase in width. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, white fir cedar, and spruce finish lumber, July 1, 1925. The following are the standard manufactured

sizes of finish: Thick common, finish, and tank plank S4S.

V/i to \y% by % scant of full width,

to \

z/% by % scant of full width. 2 to 1% by % scant of full width.

Thick common and finish, D and M or S2S and C. M.

V4 by 4 to iy8 by Sy face. V/2 by 6 to 1% by 534 face. 2 by 4 to 1% by 3M face. RULES FOR GRADING PONDOSA PINE AND IDAHO WHITE

PINE FINISH LUMBER B select and better. B select and better shall consist of B select and

all the better product of the stock and may be 4 inches or wider and embraces all thicknesses manufactured in pine lumber. Knots, light stain, and light traces of pitch or small season checks are admissible. A 4 or 6 inch piece should show but very slight traces of pitch or season check. Wider pieces can have more pitch or season checks, but it should be

local and not scattered over the face of the piece.

The fact that the defects admissible in the grade

B and better must be of a nature that will not allow them to interfere with the high quality or appearance

of this grade, tends to make of this a stock almost

without defect. C select. C select may be 4 inches or wider and embraces

ail thicknesses manufactured in pine lumber.

This grade is primarily based on the idea of fur- nishing a high class outside paint finish and its qualities are necessarily of a nature fitting it for the

tests that will be demanded of it. The defects admissible are the same as those in B

select but exist to a greater degree, yet in no single

piece are found numerous and serious defects. Medium stain covering one-third of the face or a

greater area of lighter stain is admissible when not in combination with other marked defects.

D select. D select may be 4 inches or wider and embraces

all thicknesses manufactured in pine lumber.

This grade of lumber belongs between the higher

finishing lumber and the common grades and par- takes somewhat of the nature of both. It is made

up largely of pieces that carry a finish appearance on but one side only, the back of the piece often carry- ing a mass of defects. Other pieces have the defects

of the higher grades of finish, but of a more serious nature from a quality standpoint; other pieces have

a high intrinsic value as compared to the next lower common grade, but not a high appearance as compared to the higher finish grades. Another type

often placed in this grade is a high-line piece requiring a cut to eliminate a knot hole or other defect too

serious to go into finish work.

Medium stain over the entire face is admissible

in otherwise high-line pieces. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for larch and fir finish lumber, July 1, 1925. The following are the standard manufactured

sizes of finish: Finish SIS and S2S.

1 to ff. ly to i^.

W to i^.

Finish widths S1E or S2E.

4 and 6 inch, %-inch scant of full width.

8, 10, and 12 inch, ^-inch scant of full width. Larch and fir finish are graded by the rules for larch and fir lumber, 400.0. White Pine Association of the Tonawandas,

grades of northern white pine lumber for finish, 1922. The following grades of white pine lumber, as shown in 400.26 for this association, are suitable for finishing lumber—fine common, stained saps, No. 1 shelving and dressing, No. 1 barn. 411.44 Baseboards.

(See finish No. 411.43.) 411.5 SHIP-LAP.

American lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1927. (See 411.0, yard lumber, for grades and sizes of ship-lap.)

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, sizes and grades for

ship-lap, March 23, 1927. The grades of heavy ship-lap are similar to the

grades of the Southern Pine Association for pine

flooring, 411.27. The grading rules for ship-lap are similar to those

of the Southeastern Forest Products Association for common boards, 402.42.

Patterns. Heavy ship-lap patterns are illustrated in Figures 136 and 137. California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

ship-lap, April, 1927. 201
411.5 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

The sizes of ship-lap are as shown in this associa- ! tion's table of sizes for yard lumber, 411.0. The grades of ship-lap are the same as for common

boaids, 402.42.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for ship-lap, May 1, 1926. THICKNESSES

Nominal (inches)

Dressed

Standard Extra

standard H

Inches

ft m

Inches

1 H

2 WIDTHS

4 VA VA

5A

1 AX 6

810

12Note.—In 2-inch thickness the lap shall be A inch and the face width A inch less than shown. Standard lengths shall be 8 feet and up in multiples of 2 feet. STANDARD GRADES

No. 1 common.

This grade is of a character that fits it for cornice,

fine barn boards, and all uses where the best quality

and appearance of common lumber are required. No. 1 common boards include all sound, tight

knotted stock, free from very large knots with the

size of the knot the determining factor of the grade, as follows: Sound and intergrown knots which do not exceed

13^ inches in diameter in 4 and 6 inch widths, 2

inches in 8 and 10 inch, 2)4: inches in 12-inch, and

not over 3 inches in wider widths. Knots of approximately maximum size shall be restricted in number

and placement to conform to the general appearance

of the grade, seldom more than two such knots

being allowed in any one piece except when such

occurrence does not seriously detract from the

general appearance of the grade.

Black and encased knots, provided they be sound

and immovably fixed in position, which do not exceed

one-half the diameter of sound and intergrown knots permitted up to a maximum diameter of inches. Some of the defects permitted in this grade when

not in serious combination are surface checks,

slight crook, slight cup, small pitch pockets, light

pitch, pin wormholes well scattered, light stain, medium torn grain, and slight skip. No. 2 common.

No. 2 boards are subject to the same general in- spection as No. 1, except that coarser and larger knots or their equivalent form the basis of inspection, as follows: Sound and tight knots which do not exceed 2 inches in diameter in 4-inch, and 2}4, inches in 6-inch widths, 3 inches in 8 and 10 inch, 33^ inches in

12-inch, and not over 4 inches in wider widths, and

an occasional smaller knot that is not firmly set. Knots of approximately maximum size shall be

restricted in number and placement to conform to the general appearance of the grade, seldom more

than two such knots being allowed in any one piece

except when such occurrence does not seriously detract from the general appearance of the grade.

Spike or branch knots which are sound and do not weaken the piece at any point more than the knots

heretofore specified.

Some of the defects admitted to this grade are season checks, heart pith, pitch pockets, occasional wormholes, medium crook, medium cup, medium

pitch, torn grain and slight skips, but no serious combination of defects is permissible in any one

piece. Medium stain covering the entire face is admissible in high-line pieces. No. 3 common. The general appearance and character of this grade is coarse, admitting loose or unsound knots,

large branch knots, an occasional knot hole, considerable heart shake, check, pitch, or pitch pockets,

any amount of heavy blue stain in a high-line

piece, firm red rot to a certain extent, or large

wormholes. Another type often placed in this grade are pieces showing a No. 2 common face, with the backs having several skips in dressing, the combined length of which is often from 4 to 8 feet, or the back may have been split by the planer

roller, up to 6 or 8 feet in length. Other defects which will not materially affect the usefulness of the

piece for this grade are also found. A serious combination of the above defects is not

admissible in any one piece. No. 4 common. The defects common to this grade are much the same as those found in No. 3, but exist to a greater

degree.

The most common serious defects are knot holes, either red rot or its equivalent in heavy massed

pitch or serious check. Other types are extremely

coarse knotted, waney, having excessive heart

shake, badly split or badly checked pieces. No. 5 common.

No. 5 common is the lowest recognized grade and

admits of all defects known in lumber, provided the

piece is strong enough to hold together when carefully handled. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.). grading

rules for ship-lap, January 1, 1927. The grading rules for ship-lap are the same as the grading rules of this association for common boards,

402.42. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for ship-lap, February,

1927. The sizes for ship-lap are the same as for D and

M, 411.6. The special provision for ship-lap is the same as

for flooring, 411.24. 202
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.5

Fig. 136.

8, 10, and 12 inch hemlock ship-lap (standard)

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

< S$ * 7f • 3z£ OVER ALU >g

; S" • 7 ' FAC£ >i

Fig. 137.

Standard sizes of heavy ship-lap; 2 by 6 inch ship-lap

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association

6"- 5" Race - 5'Vover ALL

t : Fig. 138.—0, S, ^0, and i# inch ship-lap, green

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau

203
411.5 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Vf"

8

X

TT

7+

JL.J

Fig. 139.—i 6y 5 inch ship-lap furnished 7%-inch face; 1 by 10 inch ship-lap furnished 9}/g-inch face; 1 by 12 inch ship-lap furnished 11Y% inch face

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association

\7s

1

Fig. 140.2 by 6 inch ship-lap

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association s£ rg H

31$

Fig. 141.

1-inch ship-lap

West Coast Lumbermen's Association T

5^

Ui8" Shiphp

7" -

|

e'Sh/php

i / *

Fig. 142.8-inch ship-lap

Western Pine Manufacturers Association 204
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.6

The grades for ship-lap are the same as for com- mon boards, 402.42.

Patterns. Ship-lap patterns are illustrated in Figure 136.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for ship-lap, Schedule M, 1925.

Patterns. Ship-lap patterns are illustrated in Figure 138. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for ship-lap, August 1, 1925.

Nominal thicknesses (inches) Finished

thicknesses SIS and S2S Rabbet Finished

face widths

Inch Inch Inch

1 ff H % off.

Lengths.—Multiples of 2 feet. Ship-lap shall be graded by the same rules as govern boards, 402 .42. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grades and classification for cypress ship-lap, June

15, 1925. Thickness.—1 inch. Width.—Shall be specified widths, 3, 4, 5, and

6 inches wide.

Length.—8 to 20 feet (except in "D" grade) ad- mitting 15 per cent of 8, 9, and 10 foot lengths, and

not to exceed 5 per cent of lengths under 10 feet. Odd lengths are not standard above 10 feet. May

also be specified 4 to 7 feet. Shall be graded from the finished side, or if both

sides are finished, it shall be graded from the better

side, "A," "B," "C," and "D."

A, B, C, and D grades are the same as for flooring.

(See 411.22.)

Patterns. Ship-lap patterns are illustrated in Figures 139 and 140. Southeastern Forest Products Association, sizes and grades for ship-lap, September 1, 1925. The grades of heavy ship-lap are the same as the

grades of this association for pine flooring, 411.27. The grading rules for ship-lap are the same as the grading rules of this association for common boards,

402.42.

Patterns. Heavy ship-lap patterns are illustrated in Figures 136 and 137. Southern Pine Association, sizes and grades for

ship-lap, March 23, 1927. The grades of heavy ship-lap are the same as the

grades of this association for pine flooring, 411.27. The grading rules for ship-lap are the same as the grading rules for common boards 402.42.

Patterns. Heavy ship-lap patterns are illustrated in Figures 136 and 137.

West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for Douglas fir and West Coast] hemlock and

western red cedar ship-lap, July 1, 1926.

Sizes.

Finished

thick- nesses SIS and S2S Nominal thicknesses (inches) Rabbet

Finished

face width

Inch Inch Inch 1— ff Ko2.

iy2 (See Standard pattern.)

Lengths.—Multiples of 2 feet. Grades. The grades are the same as the grades of this association for boards, 402.42.

Patterns. Ship-lap patterns are illustrated in Figure 141. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for larch and fir ship-lap, July 1, 1925. Standard sizes.—

4-inch to ff by 3-inch face, J^-inch lap. 6-inch to ff by 5-inch face, 3^-inch lap. 8-inch to ff by 7-inch face, J^-inch lap. 10-inch to ff by 9-inch face, 3^-inch lap. 12-inch to ff by 11-inch face, 3^-inch lap. Western Pine Manufacturers Association grading

rules for Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, white fir, cedar and spruce ship-lap, July 1, 1925.

1 by 8 to ff by 7 inch face, % inch lap.

1 by 10 to ff by 9 inch face, }4 inch lap.

1 by 12 to ff by 11 inch face, % inch lap. Patterns. Ship-lap patterns are illustrated in Figure 142. 411.6 DRESSED AND MATCHED.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 411.0, yard lumber, for grade standards and

yard and industrial size standards. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for soft pine dressed and matched lumber, March 23, 1927. The grading rules for dressed and matched are

similar to those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine Association

for common boards, 402.42.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grade of California redwood,

dressed and matched, April, 1927. The size of dressed and matched are as shown in

this association's table of sizes foi yard lumber,

411.0. The grades of dressed and matched are the same

as common boards, 402.42.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, standard grading rules for dressed and

matched lumber, May 1, 1926.

205
411.6 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

THICKNESS

Nominal (inches)

Finished

Standard Extra

standard «-

InchesH

H

1Am

Inches

1 H

IVs l*A w<m- - —

2 WIDTH

Nominal (inches) Face width

Over-all width

3 InchesVA

&A$A

Inches2H

3H

m

UJ4

4.. . 6

8

10

12

Note.—In 2-inch thicknesses the tongue shall be % inch and the

face width ys inch less than indicated. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), grading

rules for dressed and matched lumber, January 1, 1927. The grading rules for D and M are the same as the grading rules of this association for common

boards, No. 402.42. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers Association, grading rules for dressed and

matched hemlock and tamarack, February 1, 1927.

Thicknesses. Thicknesses of 1, 134, and \}A\ inch dressed and

matched and 1-inch ship-lap shall conform to those

specified for finishing lumber.

(Dressed and matched and ship-lap in extra standard thicknesses are considered special.)

Special provision.

The special provision for dressed and matched

lumber is the same as for flooring, 411.24. Widths. Widths of common boards, dressed and matched

and worked ship-lap, shall be as follows:

Nominal width, board measure (inches) D and M

face width

Ship-lap

face width D and M

and ship-lap

over-all width

Inches Inches Inches

4 3K 3M

5 VA 4^ 4M

6 5A

8 7A 7Vs 1Yi

10.... - m 12 UA nys W4

Grades. Grades for D and M are the same as for common

boards, 402.42. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for dressed and matched red cedar lumber, August 1, 1925.

Nominal thicknesses (inches) Finished

thicknesses SIS andS2S

Finished

face widths

1 Inch Inch m

Lengths.—Multiples of 2 feet. D and M shall be graded by the same rules as govern boards, 402.42. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading rules for southern pine dressed and matched

lumber, September 1, 1926. The grading rules for dressed and matched are the same as the rules of this association for common

boards, 402.42. Southern Pine Association, grading rules for southern pine dressed and matched lumber, March

23, 1927. The grading rules for dressed and matched are the same as the rules for common boards, 402.42. West Coast lumbermen's Association, grading

and dressing rules for dressed and matched lumber,

Douglas fir, West Coast hemlock, and western red

cedar, July 1, 1926. D and M to be graded by same rules as govern

boards, 402.42.

Nominal thicknesses (inches) Finishedthicknesses SIS and S2S

Finished

face widths

1 Inch (See^tandi

Inch HoS.

iy2 - -rd pattern.)

Lengths. —Multiples of 2 feet. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, rules

for the grdaing of Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine,

white fir, cedar, and spruce dressed and matched

lumber, July 1, 1925. Standard sizes. Thick common and finish, D and M or S2S and

CM.

V4 by 4 to iys by 334 face. \y2 by 6 to \yz by 534 face. 2 by 4 to 1% by 334 face. Standard sizes (larch and fir) . Thick D and M or S2S and CM.

134 by 3 inches to 1^ by 2}A\ face. 134 by 4 inches to 1^ by 334 face. V/i by 6 inches to 1^ by 534 face. 13^ by 3 inches to 1^ by 234 face. 13^ by 4 inches to 1^ by 334 face. 13^ by 6 inches to 1^ by 534 face. 411.7 ROOFING.

American lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 411.0, yard lumber, for grade standards, and

yard and industrial size standards. 206
LUMBEK FOE BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.7

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for

soft pine roofing, March 23, 1927. The sizes of heavy roofing conform to the table

of sizes for factory flooring, heavy roofing, decking,

and sheet piling of the American Lumber Standards,

411.0. The grades of grooved roofing are the same as those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine Association for strips

and common boards, 402.41 and 402.42.

Patterns. Roofing patterns are illustrated in Figure 143. California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

grooved roofing, April, 1927. The grades of grooved roofing are the same as common boards, 402.42.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

heavy roofing, April, 1927. The sizes of heavy roofing are as shown in the

table of sizes for factory flooring, heavy roofing,

decking, and sheet piling, American Lumber Standards, yard lumber, 411.0. The grades of heavy roofing are the same as for factory flooring, 411.29. North Carolina Pine Association, grading rules for

roofing, January 1, 1927. The grading rules for roofing are the same as the grading rules of this association for common boards,

402.42. RULES GOVERNING THE WORKING AND GRADING OF NORTH

CAROLINA PINE ALR-DRLED ROOFERS The following rules have been adopted to cover

the inspection of air-dried roofers, which shall be

inspected and graded as to its full length unless so marked by shipper as to indicate distinctly that a

portion of a board has been omitted from measure- ment to allow for defects. Air-dried roofers, A grade. Air-dried roofers, embracing all widths, viz, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches may show reasonably sound

knots, which includes pith, encased or spike knots,

which do not seriously affect strength of same.

Stain no objection. Reverse side may be one grade

lower. Air-dried roofers, B grade.

This grade shall consist of boards below A grade

which can be used with a waste not exceeding 25 per

cent of any one piece. Air-dried roofers, C grade.

This grade shall consist of boards below B grade

which can be used with a waste not exceeding 50 per

cent of any one piece.

Ship-lap.

ff by 5^, 7Vs, 9V8 , and 11^ inches. Stock

orders xf-inch thick or any other special working

becomes a special contract.

Dressings.

D2S and M ff inch by 534, 7M, and 11^

inches. Beading optional.

D2S and D4S ff by b%, 7}/2 , 9^, and 11^ inches. % roofers will be furnished if desired. Special

contract.

It is understood in roofer grade that the basis of inspection be the better side of the board, irrespec- tive of beading.

Where log-run lumber is furnished due consider- ation may be given to shipment as regards the better grade found in same.

Southeastern Forest Products Association, specifi- cations for southern pine yard lumber, including

rules for roofers, September 1, 1925. The grading rules for roofing are the same as the grading rules of this association for common boards, No. 402.42. STANDARD ROOFERS S4S, S2S&CM, S2S&CME&CB1 OR 2S, AND/OR SHIP-LAPPED Standard sizes. Dressed four sides, ff-inch thick by 5^, 73^, 93^,

and 113^ inches wide. Dressed and matched, ff- inch thick by 534, 734, 934, and 1134 inches face widths, with tongue 34 -inch wide. Ship-lapped ff- inch thick by 53^, 7%, 9%, and 11% inches face widths, with lap ^-inch wide.

Grades. No.2 common and No. 3 common.

Lengths.

Standard lengths are 4 to 20 feet, inclusive, and

the following percentages of short lengths may be

included in all miscellaneous or mixed-length ship- ments : No. 2 common 5 per cent 4 and/or 5 foot. 5 per cent 6 and/or 7 foot. 5 per cent 8 and/or 9 foot. No. 3 common Not to exceed 20 per cent 4 and 6 foot lengths.

Special provisions. Pieces of D and M roofers having not less than

i^-inch tongue and ship-lapped roofers having not

less than 3^-inch lap will be admitted in No. 2 com- mon. Pieces with j^-inch lap will be admitted in No. 3 common ship-lapped roofers. No. 2 common standard roofers will admit the

following defects or their equivalent: Knots not

necessarily sound, the average diameter of any one

knot not to exceed approximately 3 inches in 6-inch widths, 33^ inches in 8-inch widths, 4 inches in 10- inch widths, and 43^ inches in 12-inch widths; through checks, not to exceed one-half the length of the piece; wormholes; deep torn grain, or equivalent

machine defects; pitch pockets; pitch; pith; through

shakes not to exceed one-fourth the length of the

piece; streak of advanced decay not to exceed 3^ inch wide by one-fourth length of the piece, or its equivalent in unsound red heart; stain; wane on the re- verse side, three-fourths the thickness on the edge

in S4S, or not extending into the tongue or for more

than one-half the thickness of the top lip on the groove in D and M, or for more than one-half the

thickness of the lap in ship-lap on the face side; or other defects that will not cause waste to exceed one-fourth the length of any one piece.

207
411.7 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 3 common standard roofers will admit all pieces that can not be used as No. 2 common stand- ard roofers, but are suitable for use as cheap sheathing or lathing, without waste of more than one- fourth the length of any one piece. GEORGIA-FLORIDA THREE-QUARTER INCH ROOFERS, S4S S2S&CM, S2S&CME&CB1 OR 2S, AND/OR SHIP-LAPPED

Sizes. Dressed four sides, % inch thick by 5}4, 73^, 93^,

and 113^ inches wide. Dressed and matched, %

inch thick by 534, 734, 934, and 1134 inch face

necessarily sound, the average diameter of any one

knot not to exceed one-half the cross section of the

piece in the rough; wormholes; deep torn grain or equivalent machine defects; through checks or shakes; splits; streak of advanced decay not to exceed 3^ inch wide by one-fourth the length

of the piece, or its equivalent in unsound red heart;

stain; wane on the reverse side, three-fourths the

thickness on the edge in S4S, or not extending into the tongue or for more than one-half the thickness

of the top hp on the groove in D and M, or for more

than one-half the thickness of the lap in ship-lap

us

Fig. 143.

Standard groove for grooved roofing

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau

Southeastern Forest Products Association Southern Pine Association 8B 'A

1

Fig. 144.1 by 10 inch grooved roofing shall be worked 9}/2-inch face; 1 by 12 inch grooved

roofing shall beworked 1 1%-inch face

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association

Fig. 145.10-inch grooved roofing

Western Pine Manufacturers Association widths, with tongue 34 inch wide. Ship-lapped,

% inch thick by 5%, 7%, 93/g, and 113^ inch face widths, with lap % inch wide.

Grades. No. 2 and No. 3. Lengths.

Standard lengths and percentages of short lengths

shall be the same as for standard roofers. Special provisions. Scantness of tongue or lap, permissible in No. 2 and No. 3 Georgia-Florida inch roofers, shall be

the same as in No. 2 and No. 3 common standard,

roofers. No. 2 Georgia-Florida 24-inch roofers will admit

the following defects or their equivalent: Knots not

on the face side; or other defects that will not cause waste to exceed one-eighth the length of any one

piece. No. 3 Georgia-Florida 24-inch roofers will admit

all pieces that can not be used as No. 2 GeorgiaFlorida ;4-inch roofers, but are suitable for use as cheap sheathing or lathing, without a waste of more than one-fourth the length of any one piece. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading rules for southern pine roofing, September 1, 1925. Grades and sizes conform to the tables of sizes for factory flooring, heavy roofing, decking, and

sheet piling of the American Lumber Standards, No. 411.0. 208
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 411.9

The sizes of grooved roofing conform to the sizes of this association for common boards, No. 402.42.

Patterns. Roofing patterns are illustrated in Figure 143. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association' grading rules for roofing, September 1, 1925.

Patterns. Roofing patterns are illustrated in Figure 144. Southern Pine Association, grading rules for southern pine roofing, March 23, 1927. The sizes of heavy roofing conform to the table of

sizes for factory flooring, heavy roofing, decking, and

sheet piling of the American Lumber Standards,

411.0. The grades of grooved roofing conform to the

grades of this association for No. 1 and No. 2 com- mon boards and strips 402.42 and 402.41.

Patterns. Roofing patterns are illustrated in Figure 143. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, white fir, cedar, and spruce grooved roofing, July 1, 1925. Standard sizes. Same as boards S4S, 402 .42. Patterns. Roofing patterns are illustrated in Figure 145. 411.8 SHELVING.

Pacific lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Sitka spruce shelving, Schedule M,1925.

Sitka spruce shelving, rough. No. 3 clear or better, flat and/or edge grain must

be sound lumber, well manufactured. Will allow

occasional variations in sawing and light-colored sap

one-fourth the width; in addition, will allow pitch

pockets, each not over 4 inches long, or 1-inch knots,

provided one edge of board is clear. Four defects, pitch pockets and/or knots allowed for each 12

linear feet. Based on 1 by 8, 12 feet long.

White Pine Association of the Tonawandas,

grades of northern white pine lumber for shelving, 1922. The following grades of white pine lumber, as shown in 400.26 for this association, are suitable for shelving: No.l shelving and dressing; No. 2 dressing; No. 1 shelving; and No. 2 shelving and No. 1 box. 411.9 MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING LUMBER.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 411.0, yard lumber, for grade standards and

yard and industrial size standards. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for miscellaneous building lumber, January?

1927.

Kiln-dried lumber. Kiln-dried lumber shall be inspected as follows: Season checks and warp shall not be considered

defects unless otherwise specified.

Step plank.

Grades.—Firsts and seconds, and common.]

Widths.—11 to 15 inches. Thicknesses.—1^, 13^> and 2 inches. Lengths.—10 to 16 feet. Firsts and seconds. Firsts and seconds must be clear one face and one

edge. The reverse side must be sound, except that one good edge as defined in 400.30 definitions shall be admitted. Firsts and seconds may have a split not exceeding 12 inches in length or its equivalent.

Common.

Common must work 66% per cent in cuttings 4 feet or over long by the full width of the piece.

Each cutting must have one face and one edge

clear; the reverse side and edge must be sound,

except that one good edge, as defined in 400.30

definitions shall be admitted.

North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.) grading

rules for miscellaneous building lumber, January 1, 1927. Stepping.

Lengths.—Same as ceiling, No. 411.3. Grades.—Same as finish excepting the worked

edge shall not be of lower grade than the face, but

the reverse side or back may be No. 2 common or

better.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules for miscellaneous building lumber, Schedule M,

1925. Douglas fir green stepping. No. 2 clear and better edge grain, in widths 8 to 14 inches. Ten inches and wider must show edge

grain for at least two-thirds of the face width. Defects based on piece 10 inches wide and 12 feet long. Shall be well manufactured. Will allow light- colored sap one-eighth the width, slight roughness

in dressing, 5 pitch pockets each not over 2 inches

in length or their equivalent of larger pockets.

With one of the foregoing defects may have 1 to 3

knots that do not show more than Vy^ inches on

riser edge of the face side. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for miscellaneous building lumber,

red cedar, August 1, 1925. Porch decking. Defects based on 1 by 4 inches by 12 feet.

Nominalsthicknesses (inches)

l._

Finished

thicknesses Finishedface widths

Inchesm

Inches

$4.

Lengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. Porch decking shall be graded in the same manner

as finish. 209
411.9 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

West Coast lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for Douglas fir, Sitka spruce, and west

coast hemlock, July 1, 1926.

Clear grades.

Stepping.—V. G. K. D.—Defects based on 10

inches by 12 feet.

Nominal thicknesses (inches) Finished

thicknesses Finished widths

IX

Inches1A1%Inchesmim

Wider

widths

1 inch ofl

MLengths.—Multiples of 1 foot. B and better V. G. stepping.—Angle of grain to be

not more than 45° from vertical for three-fourths of face from wearing edge. Shall be well manufactured, and will admit slight torn grain. With the above will admit the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Five very small (2-inch) pitch pockets or equivalent of slightly larger pockets, none through; defects that do not show more than 13^ inches on face of

riser edge.

"C" V. G. stepping.—Angle of grain to be not more than 45° from vertical for half of face from

wearing edge. Will admit medium torn grain; small seasoning checks, not through; light sap stain, 25 per cent of face. With any one of the above,

will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Eight small (4-inch) pitch pockets, or equivalent of slightly larger pockets; 1 small pitch streak; 4 small sound and tight knots; two 1-inch knots. Will also admit defects that do not show more than inches on face side of riser edge; cut-out of V/% inches for a

defect 4 feet or more from either end in pieces 12

feet and longer if piece is otherwise as good as B

grade. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for western red cedar, July 1, 1926. Porch decking.

Finished sizes.—See Flooring, K. D., 411.23. B and better. Will admit the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Slight torn grain; one sound and tight pin knot.

C. Will admit the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Medium torn grain; light sap stain, 15 per cent of face; 2 sound and tight small knots. 412. STRUCTURAL TIMBERS AND

BRIDGES.

412.0 GENERAL ITEMS.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926.

STRUCTURAL MATERIAL

Basic Provisions for the Selection and Inspection of Softwood Dimension and Timbers Where Working Stresses are Required

The following basic provisions are to be used as bases for the prepaiation by the manufacturers of grading rules for structural material to be sub- mitted by the Central Committee on Lumber

Standards for consideration as American lumber

standards at the next general conference. GRADES AND CLASSIFICATIONS Grades: (a) Dense select, (b) select, and (c) common.

Uses: (a) Joist and plank.—Joists, rafters, scaffold plank, factory flooring, etc.; (6) beams and stringers.—Beams, girders, stringers, etc.; and (c) posts and timbers.—Posts, caps, sills, timbers, etc. GENERAL PROVISIONS

All grades shall contain only sound wood, unless decay is specifically permitted.

The measurement of a knot shall be made on the

section of the knot appearing on the surface under

consideration. In post and timber grades, and on the wide faces

of joist and plank, the measure of a knot shall be on the mean or average diameter. On the narrow faces of joist and plank and beams

and stringers, the size of a knot shall be taken as its width between fines parallel to the edges of the

timber. On the wide or vertical faces of beams and stringers, the smallest diameter of a knot shall be taken

as its size. Knots on the edges of wide faces of beams and

stringers are limited to the same size as on the adjacent narrow faces. Knots on narrow faces and edges of wide faces of

joist and plank and beams and stringers may

increase proportionately from the size allowed in the middle third to twice that size at the ends of the

piece.

The size of knots on the wide faces of joist and

plank and beams and stringers may increase proportionately from the size allowed at the edge to that allowed at the center line. Cluster knots and knots in groups are not per- mitted. Knot holes and holes from other causes than knots

shall be limited as provided for knots. Shake shall be measured on the ends of a piece

and its size shall be taken as its width between lines parallel to the wide faces of the piece. Checks and

splits shall be limited as provided for shakes. No

checks or combinations of checks with shakes which would reduce the strength to a greater extent than the allowable shake shall be permitted.

No combination of wane and knots is permitted

which would ireduce the strength more than the maximum allowable knot. No pieces of exceptionally light weight shall be

permitted in any grade, except that very light pieces otherwise of select grade may be accepted in the common grade.

210
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

No heartwood lequirements are provided in these grades. Heartwood requirements when

ordered should be specified in terms of heartwood

required on the girth or on each face, side or edge.

Girth shall be measured at the point where the

greatest amount of sapwood occurs. Methods of measurement of Douglas fir and

southern pine for rate of growth and density are given for use with the dense select and select grades.

Wane is permitted in all grades, but square edges

may be specified when appearance or use requires. SELECTION FOR RATE OF GROWTH

DOUGLAS FIR OR SOUTHERN PINE

Douglas fir 01 southern pine selected for close grain shall average on either one end or the other not less than 6 nor more than 20 annual rings per

inch, measured over a 3-inch portion of a radial

line representative of the average growth on the

cross section located as described below. When

such radial line is not representative, it shall be

shifted sufficiently to present a fair average, but the

distance from the pith of the 3-inch portion of the

line shall not be changed. In case of disagreement two radial lines shall be chosen, and the number of rings shall be the average of these lines. LOCATION OF RADIAL LINE

Douglas fir. —In side cut pieces the line shall be at a right angle to the annual rings and the center of the 3-inch portion of the line shall be at the center

of the end of the piece. In boxed heart pieces the

line shall run from the pith to the corner farthest from the pith. When the least dimension is 6 inches

or less, the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a

distance of 1 inch from the pith. When the least dimension is more than 6 inches, the 3-inch portion

of the line shall begin at a distance from the pith

equal to 2 inches less than one-half the least dimension of the piece. If a 3-inch portion of the radial

line can not be obtained the measurement shall be

made over as much of the 3-inch portion as is available. Southern pine.—In boxed heart pieces the rate of growth shall be counted over the third, fourth, and

fifth inches from the pith along the radial line. In

cases where timbers do not contain the pith, and it is impossible to locate it with any degree of accuracy,

the same inspection shall be made over 3 inches on an approximate radial line beginning at the edge

nearest the pith in timbers over 3 inches in thickness and on the second inch nearest to the pith in timbers

3 inches or less in thickness. In material containing the pith, but not a 5-inch radial line, which is less than 2 inches by 8 inches in section or less than 8

inches in width that does not show over 16 square

inches on the cross section, the inspection shall apply

to the second inch from the pith. In larger material that does not show a 5-inch radial line, the inspection shall apply to the 3 inches farthest from the

pith.

SELECTION FOR DENSITY DOUGLAS FIR OR SOUTHERN PINE

Douglas fir or southern pine selected for density

shall average on either one end or the other not less than six annual rings per inch and, in addition, onethird or more, summer wood, over the same portion

of a radial line as provided for selection for rate of growth. Coarse-grained material excluded by this rule shall be accepted as dense if averaging one-half or more summer wood. The contrast in color be- tween summer wood and spring wood shall be sharp

and the summer wood shall be dark in color, except

in pieces having considerable above the minimum

requirement for summer wood. In case of disagreement two radial lines shall be chosen and the summer

wood and number of rings shall be the average of these lines. JOIST AND PLANK

JOISTS, RAFTERS, SCAFFOLD PLANK, FACTORY FLOORING, ETC. Nominal thicknesses: 2 to 4 inches. Nominal widths: 4 inches and wider. Standard thicknesses, SIS or S2S: % inch off. Extra standard thickness, 2 inches, SIS or S2S:

\i inch off. Standard widths, 4 to 7 inches, S1E or S2E:

^8 inch off; 8 inches and wider, S1E or S2E: 3^ inch

off.Standard lengths: Multiples of 2 feet. Knots on wide faces

Dense select and Common

Width of face in inches On or near edge middle

third of length

Center

line of

face

On or near edge middle

third of length

Center

line of

face

Inches Inches Inches Inches

4 U 1H 1 1U

6 -

8

lm

2

2Vs 2 2V2 3M

10 m ZK 2H

12 2Vs 4 3

14. 2H 4^ 3K 5%

16 2H Ws 6

Knots on narrow faces of boxed heart pieces, middle

third of length

Thickness of piece in inches

Size of knot

Dense

select and

select Common

2

Inches

Vs

1IH

Inches

Vs IX

1%

3 - 4

211
412.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Sum of diameters of knots, center half of length on any

face, not to exceed

Dense select and select One and one-half times width of face. Common Two times width of face. Shakes and checks

Dense select and select Common

Green J€ width of end yu width of end

Seasoned % width of end 4/o width of end

Angle of grain, c&nter half of length Dense select and select 1 in 12

Dense select and select Y% thickness and/or

width

Wane

-idth

Common

1 in 10

Common

}4: thickness and/or

Douglas fir or southern pine of select grade to be

selected for rate of growth. Douglas fir or southern

pine of dense select grade to be selected for density. Beams and Stringers BEAMS, GIRDERS, STRINGERS, ETC. Nominal thicknesses: 5 inches and thicker. Nominal widths: 8 inches and wider. Standard lengths: Multiples of 2 feet. SIS, S1E, S2S, or S4S: % inch off each way.

Knots

Width of face in inches

Dense select and

select Common

Narrow

face and

edge of wide face middle

third of length

Center

line of wide face

Narrow

face and

edge of wide face middle

third of length

Center

line of wide face

5 - —

Inchesm

2

2*A

Inches Inches

2m3Ks mw%

w%

Inches

6 m2

33^

m,

2Vs VA

44*A 5%

VA

8.

10

12

14

16

1820 m 22 4 24... 6M Sum of diameters of knots, center half of length on any

face, not to exceed

Dense select and select Width of face Common

Yy^ times width of face Shakes and checks

Dense select and select Common

Green 34 width of end x% width of end

Seasoned }/$ width of end f- width of end

Angle of grain, center half of length Dense select and select 1 in 15 Common

1 in 10 Wane

Dense select and select Common

% thickness and/or width 34 thickness and/or width

Douglas fir or southern pine of select grade to be

selected for rate of growth. Douglas fir or southern

pine of dense select grade to be selected for density.

Posts and Timbers POSTS, CAPS, SILLS, TIMBERS, ETC. Nominal sizes: 6 by 6 inches and longer.

Standard lengths: Multiples of two feet. SIS, S1E, S2S, or S4S: V2 inch off each way.

Knots

Size of knots Width of face in inches Dense

select and

select Common

6 Inches

2

Inches2%

3H

4

810 2y2 12 3 4^

$A

VAVA

SA

VA

14 VA

16

1820

22 4

24 4^ &A Sum of diameters of all knots within any 6 inches

of length not to exceed twice size of maximum knot

allowable; nor to be two of maximum allowable knots in same 6 inches of length on any one face. Shakes and checks

Dense select and select Common

Green ^ width of end }A\ width of end

Seasoned 3^ width of end to width of end

Angle of grain

Dense select and select 1 in 10 Common

1 in 8 Wane

Dense select and select thickness and/or width Common

}A\ thickness and/or width

Douglas fir or southern pine of select grade to be

selected for rate of growth. Douglas fir or southern

pine of dense select grade to be selected for density.

American Association of State Highway Officials, specifications for structural timber, lumber, and

piling, December, 1926.

SPECIES OF WOODS

The common and botanical names of the species

of woods recognized in these specifications are defined as follows: 212
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

Botanical name Thuja occidentalis. Chamaecyparis lawsoniana. Thuja plicata. Castanea dentata. Taxodium distichum. Pseudotsuga taxifolia (coast type).

Pseudotsuga taxifolia (intermountain type)

Nyssa sylvatica.

Tsuga heterophylla.

Larix occidentalis.

Common name Cedar, northern white. Cedar, Port Orford. Cedar, western red. Chestnut.

Cypress, southern.

Fir, Douglas.

Fir, red. Gum, black. Hemlock, West Coast. Larch, western. Oak, red, includes red oak.Quercus borealis and

Quercus borealis maxima.

Black oak. Quercus velutina. Southern red oak. Quercus rubra. Water oak. Quercus nigra.

Willow oak. Quercus phellos. Scarlet oak. Quercus coccinea. Pin oak. Quercus palustris.

Shumard red oak. Quercus shumardii.

Swamp red oak. Quercus rubra pagodaefolia. Blackjack oak. Quercus marilandica. Laurel oak. Quercus laurifolia. Texan red oak. Quercus texana. Oak, white, includes

White oak. Quercus alba. Chestnut oak. Quercus montana.

Post oak. Quercus stellata. Bur oak. Quercus macrocarpa. Overcup oak. Quercus lyrata.

Swamp chestnut oak. Quercus prinus.

Swamp white oak. Quercus bicolor. Live oak. Quercus virginiana.

Chinquapin oak. Quercus muehlenbergii.

Pine, Idaho white. Pinus monticola.

Pine, lodgepole. Pinus contorta.

Pine, northern white. Pinus strobus.

Pine, Norway. Pinus resinosa. Pine, Pondosa. Pinus ponderosa.

Pine, southern yellow, includes

Loblolly pine. Pinus taeda. Longleaf pine. Pinus palustris.

Pitch pine. Pinus rigida.

Pond pine. Pinus serotina. Shortleaf pine. Pinus echinata. Slash pine. Pinus caribaea.

Pine, sugar. Pinus lambertiana.

Redwood. Sequoia sempervirens.

Spruce, eastern, includes

Black spruce. Picea mariana.

Red spruce. Picea rubra. White spruce. Picea glauca.

Spruce, Engelmann, includes

Engelmann spruce. Picea engelmanni.

Blue spruce. Picea parryana.

Spruce, Sitka. Picea sitchensis. Tamarack. Larix laricina.

LIMITATION OF USE Timbers of the following species shall not be used

in exposed structures without preservative treat- ment: The red oaks, black gum, and shortleaf,

lobolly, and pond pine.

LUMBER AND STRUCTURAL TIMBER

Heart Requirements All timber to be used without preservative treat- ment shall show not less than the following amounts

of heartwood:

Stringers, floor beams, and flooring; 80 per cent

of heart on any girth.

Caps, sills, and posts; 75 per cent of heart on

each of the four sides measured across the side. Bracing, struts, rails, etc. ; 80 per cent of heart on

both sides measured across the side. For timber which is to be pressure treated with

creosote oil there shall be no heartwood requirement

and the amount of sapwood shall not be limited.

Grading of Lumber and Timber Yard lumber and structural timber shall be graded

in accordance with grading rules, adopted by the

regional associations of lumber manufacturers,

which conform to the basic provisions of American

Lumber Standards, above. Lumber ordered in multiple lengths shall be

graded after having been cut to length.

Basic Grades of Lumber and Timber The grades recognized by this specification are as

follows: Yard lumber. Grade D select.—Allows any number of defects or blemishes which do not detract from a firish appearance, especially when painted. No. 1 common.—Sound and tight knotted stock. Size of defects and blemishes limited. May be

considered water-tight lumber. No. 2 common.—Allows large and coarse defects. May be considered grain-tight ] umber.

Structural timbers. Dense select (Douglas fir and southern yellow

pine only), select, and common. The structural grades are further divided, on the

basis of use, size and defects, into the following subgrades: Joist and plank, beam and stringer, and

post and timber.

Basic Grading of Structural Timber This association's specifications for structural material including

1. Grades and classification,

2. General provisions,

3. Selection for rate of growth,

4. Selection for density,

5. Sizes and grades of joist and plank,8 6. Sizes and grades of beams and stringers,

7. Sizes and grades of posts and timbers, are identical with the American Lumber Standards

above, except as noted for widths of joist and plank.

a The standard widths of joist and plank are 4 to 7 inches, SlE or S2E, % inch off in American Lumber Standards. This association

specifies widths of 2 to 7 inches for joist and plank. 213
412.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Hewn and Round Timbers Hewn timbers used in place of sawed timbers

shall conform in all respects to the grading rules for structural timber

Round timbers used in place of sawed timbers

shall be of a quality equal to that hereinafter specified for timber piles. The effective size of a round

timber shall be considered the same as that of a

square timber having sectional dimensions equal to those of the inscribed square of the round timber at the critical section. Hewn and round timbers shall not be used except

when specified or approved by the engineer. TIMBER PILES

General Timber piles which will be below water level at

all times, may be of any species of wood which

will satisfactorily withstand driving. In untreated piling for use in exposed work, the diameter of the heartwood shall be not less than

3^ of the required diameter of the pile.

Quality All wood piling shall be cut from sound and solid

trees, preferably during the winter season. They

shall contain no unsound knots. Sound knots will be permitted, provided the diameter of the knot

does not exceed 4 inches or % of the diameter of the stick at the point where it occurs. Any defect or combination of defects which will impair the

strength of the pile more than the maximum allow- able knot shall not be permitted. The butts shall be sawed square and the tips shall be sawed square

or tapered to a point not less than 4 inches in dia- meter as directed by the engineer. Unless otherwise specified, all piles shall be peeled

by removing all of the rough bark and at least 80

per cent of the inner bark. No strip of inner bark

remaining on the stick shall be over ^ inch wide

or over 8 inches long, and there shall be at least 1 inch of clean wood surface between any two such

strips. Not less than 80 per cent of the surface on any circumference shall be clean wood.

Piles shall be cut above the ground swell and shall taper from butt to tip. A line drawn from the

center of the tip to the center of the butt shall not

fall outside of the center of the pile at any point more than 1 per cent of the length of the pile. In

short bends, the distance from the center of the pile to a line stretched from the center of the pile above

the bend to the center of the pile below the bend

shall not exceed 4 per cent of the length of the bend

or 2}/2 inches. All knots shall be trimmed close to the body of the pile. Dimensions Round piles shall have a minimum diameter at the

tip, measured under the bark, as follows:

Length of pile Tip diameter, inches Less than 40 feet 8 40 to 60 feet 7 Over 60 feet 6

The minimum diameter of piles at a section 4 feet from the butt, measured under the bark, shall be

as follows:

Length of pile

Diameter

Douglas

fir, southern

yellow

pine, and

southern

cypress

All other

species

20 feet and under..

Inches

1112

12

13

Inche.31112

13

14

20 to 30 feet 30 to 40 feet Over 40 feet The diameter of the piles at the butt shall not

exceed 20 inches. Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on

the plans.

American Association of State Highway Officials, specifications for timber structures, December, 1926. TIMBER STRUCTURES

Materials. Lumber and timber.—Lumber and timber shall conform to the requirements of structural timber,

lumber and piling, above. For the various structural purposes the following grades shall be used with the corresponding unit stresses specified in 400.12, table

of unit stresses for structural grades of timber.

(a) Truss members, floor beams, stringers, and

flooring shall be dense select structural or select structural, as specified. Flooring, if untreated shall be thoroughly air seasoned or kiln dried.

(6) Caps, posts, sills and mud sills, and nailing

strips shall be select structural, or common structural, as specified.

(c) Guard timbers and retaining pieces; sash, cross and longitudinal bracing; and girts shall be common structural.

(d) Bulkheads shall be common structural or No. 1 common, as specified.

(e) Rails, rail posts, and truss housing shall be

grade D select or No. 1 common, as specified. Rails and rail posts, if untreated, shall be thoroughly air seasoned or kiln dried.

(/) Scupper blocks and cross bridging shall be No.

1 common.

(g) Inside sheathing for truss housing shall be

No. 1 or No. 2 common, as specified.

(h) For temporary structures which are for use

only during erection, members specified above to be

of the dense select and select structural grades may

be of the common structural grade. Members specified above to be of the common structural grade may

be of No. 1 common.

Note.—The complete specification contains paragraphs on storage

of material, workmanship, handling of material, methods of construction, and other details in connection with timber structures. American Railway Engineering Association, stand- ard specifications for structural grades of lumber and

timber, adopted, 1927. 214
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

A. STRUCTURAL GRADES OF LUMBER AND TIMBER AND THE METHOD OF THEIR DERIVATION

1. Purpose.—The purpose of structural grades is to offer means for selecting structural material for strength, and for uniformity in strength, in order

that appropriate working stresses may be assigned

for its use.

2. Factors of strength.—The most important

factors which influence the strength of structural material are the size, number, and location of defects, and the extent of exposure to moisture during use. These factors must all be considered in design or grading if the maximum utilization is to be obtained

from the material used.

3. Structural grades and strength.—Structural grades control defects by limiting their size and

location in accordance with their effect upon

strength. Working stresses for each species are recommended by the Forest Products Laboratory,

United States Forest Service, and take into consider- ation the allowable defects, the moisture content as determined by conditions of use, and, in the case of southern yellow pine and Douglas fir, rate of growth

and percentage of summer wood.

4. Moisture.—Moisture affects the strength of structural timbers both directly and indirectly.

The direct effect of loss of moisture is the stiffening

and strengthening of the wood fibers. This increase

in strength, however, is accompanied by checking,

splitting, warping, and twisting; as a consequence, some of the strength due to drying is lost. Timbers

are also subject, during use, to varying conditions

of moisture, from the dry location of a heated

building, to the continually wet condition of some

pier and dock timbers. All of these conditions are taken into account in recommending working

stresses under different conditions of use.

5. Size effects.—In dimension material, 4 inches and less in thickness, the development of defects during seasoning does not offset the increase in strength from drying as much as in larger sizes, and

in these sizes used in dry locations, higher working

stresses in extreme fiber in bending can be recom- mended than in .pieces of larger size having proportionately equivalent defects.

6. Defects.—The principal defects which must be

limited in structural grades are knots, shakes and

checks, and angle of grain.

7. Influence of knots.—The influence of a knot is determined by its location in a beam and the area

of its projection on the cross section of the piece, the method of measurement being such as to give the best approximation of this influence. Knots in posts and heavy beams, which are likely to show

only on one face or to run diagonally through the

piece, reduce the strength in practically direct pro- portion to their size as measured. In dimension

sizes, such as joist, in which the knot is likely to run directly through the piece, the strength is measured by the square of the effective depth,

assuming the knot in its worst position, near the edge of the piece, and the reduction in strength due

to the knot is approximately twice the ratio of the

size of the knot to the width of the face. In similar material used flat, as plank, the influence of a knot

is directly proportional to the size, as on the top and

bottom edges of beams.

8. Location of knots, joist, and plank.—Knot

limitations on edges of wide faces of dimension sizes, for use as joist, are more severe than would be

required for use flat, as plank, the sizes applying

along the center lines of the wide faces as joist being those which could theoretically apply at any

point across the width if used only as plank. It has been found, however, that under practically all conditions of use, knots along the edges of planks

are more objectionable than knots along the center

lines and this is recognized in some commercial

yard grades of plank in a stricter limitation of knots

along the edges of the Y\dde faces than along the

center lines. The same knot limitations are

applied, therefore, to material to be used either as

joist or plank, and the same working stresses are assigned for use either on edge or flat. 9. increase in size of knots.—In both joist and

beams, knots reduce strength most along the top

and bottom edges through the center portion. The

sizes of knots permitted in various portions of a

joist or beam are limited in accordance with the

stresses, and they are allowed to increase toward

the ends and toward the center lines of the vertical

faces, no knot, however, being permitted of more

than double the size allowed at the point of maximum stress. 1Q. Small and large knots.—There is greater

proportional distortion of grain around a large knot

than around a smaller one, and shrinkage in sea- soning causes greater internal stresses, so knot sizes are increased proportionately to width of faces only up to 6-inch top and bottom faces of beams,

12-inch vertical faces of beams and 12-inch faces of posts. Beyond these widths of face, increase is proportional to the square root of the ratio of the wider faces to these widths. The distribution and

aggregate diameter of knots is limited, as well as the maximum size of the single knot. The aggregate

diameter of all knots in the center half of the length on any face of a beam or stringer shall be limited, in

direct proportion to an aggregate diameter of twice the width of the face in a grade having 50 per cent

of the strength of clear wood. In joist and plank,

in dry locations, the aggregate diameter of knots in the center half of the length of any face may be

greater by one-half the width of the face than the

aggregate diameter permitted in beams and stringers. In posts and columns, the aggregate diameter

of all knots in any 6 inches of length, in any grade,

shall not exceed twice the size of the maximum knot

allowable.

11. Knots in joist and plank.—In joist and plank, the mean or average diameter of a knot is taken

as its size. In such thin and relatively wide material, whether used on edge or flat, this is a safe measure of the influence of knots on strength, and

has the commercial advantage of being directly

52688°—27- 215
412.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

applicable to yard grades of lumber. This method

of measurement will exclude damaging spike knots,

and can be applied to them as well as to round or oval knots.

12. Knots in beams.—On the top or bottom of a beam, the influence of knots is measured largely by

the surface fibers cut. The projection of the knot on a line at a right angle to the edge is, therefore, used. On the vertical face of a beam, the depth to which a knot penetrates is of great importance,

while the influence of the number of surface fibers cut, and the amount of grain distortion, is consid- erably less important than on the horizontal faces. The smallest diameter of the knot is, therefore, used.

13. Spike knots.—One of the best examples

illustrating the reason for the smallest diameter

being taken on the vertical face is the splitting of a boxed-heart timber into two pieces. The long

spike knots which might be opened up in this way

would be no more injurious to the strength of the two pieces than they would as a single knot in a

boxed-heart piece, and the two pieces so cut would

be less subject to seasoning checks than a boxedheart piece.

14. Knots in columns.—In columns there are two

factors—area of cross section occupied by a knot,

which would probably be measured best by the small diameter of the knot, and the influence of bending

stresses when the column begins to fail, probably

measured best by the projection of the knot. In

short columns, the area of the cross section is of primary importance; as the column gets longer, the factor of bending strength increases in importance until the condition of the Euler formula is reached, when stiffness, on which knots have practically no influence, becomes the ruling factor. The average diameter, therefore, is used as that which applies best to the average condition.

15. Knots and holes.—In grades for structural

uses, no distinction is made between intergrown

knots and encased knots or knot holes, observation

at the Forest Products Laboratory in recent tests having shown that intergrown knots reduce strength

fully as much as encased knots or knot holes.

16. Shakes and checks.—Shakes reduce the area

of a beam acting in resistance to shear, and the

limitations placed on shakes are based on this reduction. Checks are limited on the same basis as shakes, and no combination of shakes and checks is permitted which would reduce strength to a greater extent than would the allowable size of either separately.

17. Shakes and checks in dense select and select

joist and plank shall not exceed when green 34 the width of end nor when seasoned 3^ the width of end. Shakes and checks in common joist pnd plank

shall not exceed when green ^ the width of end nor when seasoned 4 /9 the width of end. Shakes and checks in dense select and select beams and stringers shall not exceed when green

the width of end nor when seasoned }/i the width of end.

Shakes and checks in common beams and stringers shall not exceed when green ^ the width of end

nor when seasoned 4 /a the width of end. Shakes and checks in dense select and select posts

and timbers shall not exceed when green the width

of end nor when seasoned y2 the width of end. Shakes and checks in common posts and timbers

shall not exceed when green 3^ the width of end nor when seasoned ^ the width of end.

18. Slope of grain.—Slope of grain, resulting

either from diagonal sawing or from spiral or twisted

grain in the log, is limited in accordance with the recommendation of the Forest Products Laboratory,

based on the results of detailed study of the effect of cross and spiral grain upon strength, and the weakening of material by checks which invariably

develop and, without exception, follow the grain.

There is not much reduction in strength from cross grain until an angle of grain of 1 in 40 is reached. From that slope in a beam an angle of grain of 1 in 20 reduces the strength about y%; 1 in 15, about 3^;

1 in 11, about Y% \ and 1 in 8, about 3^- In a post or column an angle of grain of 1 in 15 reduces the

strength about 3^; 1 in 11, about \i\ 1 in 8, about

%) and 1 in 6, about Y2 . 19. Wane and knots.—Wane is limited by such

consideration as bearing area, nailing edge, appearance, etc., rather than by effect on strength. The

percentage reduction in strength resulting from wane

toward the center of a beam is about double the percentage reduction in cross-sectional area. Xo

combination of wane and knots is permitted which

would reduce the strength more than the maximum

allowable knot. The occurrence of maximum wane

and maximum knot in the same cross section at the

center of a beam would be so rare, however, and

the effect of allowable maximum wane is so small a percentage of the effect of maximum allowable

knot, that the additional reduction in strength

beyond the effect of the knot would be slight and

it is usually unnecessary to give attention to combination of wane and knot.

20. Pitch pockets.—Pitch pockets are ordinarily not defects in a structural grade. A large number,

however, indicates a general lack of bond, and such a piece should be carefully inspected for shakes.

21. Heartwood and sapwood.—Heartwood and sap- wood have been found by the Forest Products

Laboratory to be of equal strength, and no requirement of heartwood need be made when strength alone is the governing factor. Heart requirement,

when durability of untreated material under ex- posure is a factor, as in bridges, trestles, docks and

piers, or in damp buildings, or buildings in which

conditions of high humidity prevail, may be specified

in any grade, according to exposure and use. When

preservative treatment is to be applied, there should be no restriction as to sapwood, as sapwood is easier to treat than heartwood and a large amount is to be

preferred.

22. Density and strength.—The density of the wood substance of all species is practically the same. The dry weight is, therefore, a measure of the 216
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

amount of wood substance present; and on the amount of wood substance present depends the

strength of the clear wood. No pieces of exceptionally light weight are permitted in the select grades,

but light weight pieces otherwise of select grade may

be accepted in the common grades.

23. Density and summer wood.—In southern pine

and Douglas fir, the proportion of summer wood, the dark portion of the annual ring, furnishes a practical means of estimating density. Selection of these

species for density, to the extent that dense material

is commercially available, assures material of the

highest character from the standpoint of strength,

and uniformity in strength, in the clear wood.

24. Rate of growth and strength.—Selection of these

species for rate of growth is not as great an assurance

of increased strength as selection for percentage of summer wood, but for many purposes selection for rate of growth will assure material of suitable type. Close grain, that is, not less than six nor more than

twenty annual rings per inch, is required in the

select structural grades of these species.

25. Contrast between summer wood and spring

wood.—In acceptance for density the contrast in color between summer wood and spring wood should be distinct. Absence of contrast occasionally occurs

in bands of growth rings which appear on the whole

darker in color than the adjacent material. The summer wood merges into the spring wood abnor- mally with a gradual change of color, leaving

practically no material which has the normal appear- ance of spring wood. Such material has been called by a number of names, including proud wood, red wood, and compression wood. It has a decided end

shrinkage, is weak in tension, and even a small part

of a cross section of this character is undesirable in high-class structural timbers.

26. Minimum requirements, maximum defects.—

Structural grades specify minimum requirements

and maximum defects, all of which may be present

at one time. When a particular piece which is being

inspected, therefore, is slightly below the provisions

of the grade in some respects but is of average

densit}7 or above, the relative effect on the properties affected should be given consideration.

27. Reinspection.—In inspection for density, reasonable variation of opinion between inspectors should be recognized. A fair provision for reinspection of a particular lot of timbers for density would

be that for every three timbers accepted as having

one-third or more summer wood, one of the remaining timbers be accepted if having between 30 and

33^ per cent summer wood.

28. Yard grades and cutting grades.—A large per- centage of material in standard yard grades of Dimension and Timbers will meet the additional requirements of structural grades for joist and plank,

and posts and timbers, and material to meet these requirements can easily be selected from local stocks

Select from select common and merchantable grades,

t and common from No. 1 common grade. Beams

and stringers vary materially in size and are not

stocked extensively. These are essentially special- order grades.

29. Joist and plank, beams and stringers.—As

previously noted the provisions of the joist and

plank grades are such that material graded by them

may be used on edge, as joist or rafters, or flat, as

scaffold plank or factory flooring. Joist and plank

grades apply to material not thicker than 4 inches. Material thicker than 4 inches for use in bending

should be graded by beam and stringer grades.

30. Timbers used as beams and stringers.—Material to be used for such purposes as caps, bridge ties, etc., where strength in bending is a factor, should be

specified in beam and stringer grades although of shape more commonly considered as of timber grades,

as the method of measuring knots in post and timber

grades makes it impracticable to assign bending

stresses to them. Caps and bridge ties are often square or have horizontal faces wider than the

vertical faces, in contrast to beams and stringers in which the narrow faces are horizontal faces and the wide faces are vertical, and this should be noted in applying the knot provisions of the beam and stringer

grade to such material.

Introduction to Structural Rules 31. The following rules for structural grades con- form to the basic provisions for the selection and

inspection of softwood dimension and timbers where

working stresses are required accepted at the General Lumber Conference, Washington, D. C,

May 1, 1925, as the basis for the preparation of grading rules for structural material.

32. They are complete rules, covering all conditions necessary for consideration in structural grading, and are divided into sections from which

combinations are made covering specific purposes and conditions.

33. These specifications may be used for mill

orders, selection from or appraisal of stock on hand

in either manufacturers', middleman's, or users' stock.

34. The rules cover the following grades and use

classifications: Grades. Dense select Douglas fir and southern pine. Select Douglas fir and southern pine. Select Other softwood species.

Common All softwood species. Uses.

Joist and plank Joist, rafters, bracing,

scaffold plank, factory

flooring, etc. Beams and stringers Beams, girders, stringers,

bridge ties, caps, etc. Posts and timbers Posts, sills, caps, timbers,

etc. Optional provisions.

Wane Where permissible.

Square edges Where required or desired. Heartwood requirements. For durability of untreated timbers. Sapwood permissibility. For material to be treated.

217
412.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Sizes of joist and plank (joist, rafters, scaffold plank,

factory flooring, etc.). Nominal thickness 2 to 4 inches. Nominal widths 4 inches and wider. Standard thickness SIS or S2S, % inch off. 2 to 7 inches, S1E or S2E, % inches off. 8 inches and wider, S1E or S2E, U inch off. Standard widths

Sizes of bea?ns and stringers (beams, girders, stringers,

etc.). Nominal thickness 5 inches and thicker. Nominal widths 8 inches and wider.

Sizes of posts and timbers (posts, caps, sills, timbers,

etc.). Nominal sizes 6 by 6 inches and larger.

B. SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL JOIST, PLANS, BEAMS, STRINGERS, AND POSTS

Timber Size Requirements IA. Joist and plank, surfaced.—Structural joist and plank shall be when surfaced SIS or S2S not

thinner than the nominal dimension less ^ inch and

when surfaced S1E or S2E not narrower than the nominal width less % inch for sizes 2 to 7 inches,

inclusive, and less }/2 inch for sizes 8 inches and

wider. IB. Beams, stringers, posts, timbers, surfaced.—

Structural beams, stringers, posts and timbers shall be when surfaced SIS, S1E, S2S, S4S not smaller than the nominal size less inch for sizes 7 inches and narrower and less Y2 inch for sizes 8 inches and

over. IC. Joist and plank, rough.—Rough structural

joist and plank shall be not thinner than the nominal dimension less ^ inch and not narrower than

the nominal width less }/i inch for sizes 2 to 7 inches,

inclusive, and less % inch for sizes 8 inches and

wider. ID. Beams and stringers, posts and timbers, rough.—

Rough structural beams and stringers, posts and timbers shall not be smaller than the nominal size less }4 inch for sizes 7 inches and less, and less ^ inch

for sizes 8 inches and over.

Grade Requirements

2. Sound wood.—This material shall contain only- sound wood.

GENERAL

3. (a) Weight.—No pieces of exceptionally light

weight shall be permitted, except that lightweight

pieces otherwise of select grade may be accepted in common grade.

(b) Shake, check, and split.—Shake shall be

measured on the ends of a piece, and its size shall be

taken as the shortest distance between lines inclos- ing the shake and parallel to the wide faces of the

piece. Checks and splits shall be limited as pro- vided for shakes. No checks or combinations of

4 American Lumber Standards, 412.0, standard widths are 4 to

7 inches; SlE or S2E, % inch off.

checks with shakes which would reduce the strength

to a greater extent than the allowable shake shall be

permitted.

(c) Wane and knots.—Where wane is permitted

there shall be no combination of wane and knots

which would reduce the strength more than the maximum allowable knot.

(d) Cluster knots.—Cluster knots and knots in groups are not permitted.

(e) Holes.—Knot holes and holes from other

causes than knots shall be permitted as provided

for knots.

(f) Knot measurement.—The size of a knot shall be measured on the section of the knot appearing on the surface under consideration.

(g) Mean diameter.—When the mean or average

diameter of a knot is specified, the size shall be

taken as the average of the maximum and minimum

diameters.

(h) Spike knots.—Knot sizes specified shall be

applied to spike knots as well as to round knots.

(i) Spike knot mean diameter.—The mean or average diameter of a spike knot shall be taken as the average of its length and its maximum width. KNOTS

Joist and plank.

4. (a) Wide faces. —On the wide faces of joist and

plank, the measurement of a knot shall be made on

the mean or average diameter.

(b) Narrow faces.—On the narrow faces of joist

and plank, the size of a knot shall be taken as its width between lines parallel to the edges of the

piece.

(c) Increase to ends.—The size of knots on the narrow faces and edges of wide faces of joist and

plank may increase proportionately from the size allowed in the middle third to twice that size at the ends of the pieces.

(d) Increase to center.—The size of knots on the wide faces of joist and plank may increase proportionately from the size allowed at the edge to

that allowed at the center line. Beams and stringers.

5. (a) Narrow faces.—On the narrow or hori- zontal faces of beams and stringers the size of a

knot shall be taken as its width between lines parallel to the edges of the timber.

(b) Wide faces.—On the wide or vertical faces of beams and stringers the smallest diameter of a knot

shall be taken as its size.

(c) Edges.—Knots on the edges of wide or vertical

faces of beams and stringers are limited to the same

size as on the adjacent narrow or horizontal faces, except that the size is measured on the least diameter of the knot instead of on its width between

lines parallel to the edges of the timber.

(d) Increase to ends.—The size of knots on the narrow or horizontal faces and edges of wide or

vertical faces of beams and stringers may increase proportionately from the size allowed in the middle

third to twice that size at the ends of the piece.

218
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

(e) Increase to center.—The size of knots on the wide or vertical faces of beams and stringers may

increase proportionately from the size allowed at the edge to that avowed at the center line. Posts and timbers.

6. Mean diameter.—In posts and timbers, the measurement of a knot shall be made on the mean

or average diameter.

7. Maximum size of knots in dense select end select joist and plank

[(a) Knots on wide faces]

Width of face, in inches

Size of knot On or near edge middle

third of length

Center

line of face

4 InchesM

1m

m2V2

Inches

22Vs 3K

4m

6

810

12

1416

[(b) Knots on narrow faces of boxed-heart pieces]

Thickness of piece, in inches

2

34

Size of knot, middle

third of length

Inches

(c) The sum of the diameters of all knots within

the center half of the length of a joist or plank on any face shall not exceed one and one-half times the width of the face on which they occur.

8. Maximum size of knots in common joist and plank

[(a) Knots on wide faces]

Width of face, in inches

Size of knot On or near

edge middle

third of length

Center

line of face

4 Inches

1VA

22V2 33Mm

Inches1%2V2 ZVs ±X

5Vs

5A5 6

6

8

1012

14. 16

8. Maximum size of knots in common joist and

plank—Continued

[(b) Knots on narrow faces of boxed-heart pieces]

(c) The sum of the diameters of all knots within the center half of the length of a joist or plank on any face shall not exceed two times the width of face on which they occur.

9. (a) Maximum size of knots in dense select and

select beams and stringers

Width of face, in inches

Size of knot Narrow

or hori- zontal

face middle

third of length

Center

line of wide or

vertical

face g

5 ______

Inchesm

m22Vs 2X2V8

Inches

1/4

2

2V2. 3m

4

68

10

1214 _ 1618

20. 22

24

(6) The sum of the diameters of all knots within the center half of the length of a beam or stringer on any face shall not exceed the width of the face on

which they occur.

10. (a) Maximum size of knots in common beams

and

Width of face, in inches Narrow

face or horizontal face, middle

third of length

Center

line of wide face or verti- cal face

5 Inches

2 Inches2

6 2%

2M

3H3^

3^

8

10 4

12 5V8 VA

en

14

16 m 1820..

22 _ _ 24...

Size of knots

219
412.0 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

(6) The sum of the diameters of a!J knots within

the center half of the length of a beam or stringer on any face shall not exceed one and one-half times the width of the face on which they occur.

11. (a) Maximum size of knots in dense select and

select posts and timbers

Width of face, in inches

1012

14161820

22

24

Size of knots

Inches1H

22V2 33M

4Hi

(b) The sum of the diameters of all knots in any 6 inches of length of a post or timber shall not exceed

twice the size of the maximum knot allowable.

12. (a) Maximum size of knots in common posts and

timbers

Width of face, in inches

6..

8..

10. 12

1416

18. 20

22.

24.

Size of knots

Inches

4&A

5H

5Y2

(b) The sum of diameters of all knots in any 6 inches of length of post or timber shall not exceed

twice the size of the maximum knot allowable.

IS. Maximum shake and checks in dense select and

select joist and plank

Size of shake or check

Green Seasoned

2 Inchesy2 X

1

Inches%

1IX

34

14' Maximum shake and checks in common joist and

plank

Width of end in inches

Size of shake or check

Green Seasoned

2 InchesX

1Hva

Inches

Vs IXm

34

15. Maximum shake and checks in dense select and

select beams and stringers

Size of shake or check Width of end in inches Green Seasoned

6 _ InchesM2

Inches

2 8 2V9 VA

4 10 2V2 12 3

14

4 m

hX

6

16

18 4H

20 5 ex

22 5H

6 7X

24 8

16. Maximum shake and checks in and stringers common beams

Width of end in inches

Size of shake or check

Green Seasoned

5 Inches

2 Inches2H

2H

VAm

5X

6Va 7

6 . 2Vs m4 8

10

12

14 5H

1618 m8

8 20 mm105^

22 SX

24 _ m

17. Maximum shake and checks in dense select and

select posts and timbers

Width of end in inches

Size of shake or check

Green Seasoned

5 Inches

2 Inches2Y2

6 2% 3 m4 8 4

10 5

12

-

- 4M

7H

8

6

1416 8 18 9 20 10 22 - m

11 24 12

18. Maximum shake and checks in common posts and

timbers

Width of end in inches

Size of shake or check

Green Seasoned

6 Inches34

5

InchesZV2 4%

6m

8H

W2 mi

1213^

8 . _ - -

10

12 - - — 6

789

10

1112

14 - 161820

2224

220
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

SLOPE OF GRAIN

19A. Dense select and select joist and plank.

The slope of grain in the center half of length shall not exceed 1 in 12. 19B. Common joist and plank.

The slope of grain in the center half of length

shall not exceed 1 in 10. 19C. Dense select and select beams and stringers.

The slope of grain in the center half of length

shall not exceed 1 in 15. 19D. Common beams and stringers.

The slope of grain in the center half of length

shall not exceed 1 in 10. 19E. Dense select and select posts and timbers. The slope of grain shall not exceed 1 in 10. 19F. Common posts and timbers. The slope of grain shall not exceed 1 in 8. WANE AND SQUARE EDGES

Wane, dense select, and select grade. 20A. Wane one-eighth.—Wane is permitted, not

exceeding one-eighth the width of any face. Wane, common gra,de. 20B. Wane one-fourth.—Wane is permitted, not

exceeding one-fourth the width of any face. Square edges. 20C. Square.—All edges must be square. HEARTWOOD AND SAPWOOD

Durability untreated. Heartwood requirements shall be specified as required from the following:

Heartwood provisions. 21 A. Joist and plank.—Joist and plank shall have not less than 85 per cent of heart on the two

faces, as measured across the faces anywhere in the

length of the piece. 22B. Beams and stringers.—Beams and stringers

shall have not less than 85 per cent heart on each of the four faces measured across the faces anywhere

in the length of the piece. 22C. Timbers 85 per cent.—These timbers shall have not less than 85 per cent heart on each of the four faces, measured across the face anywhere

in the length of the piece.

22D. Timbers one face all heart, others 85 per cent.—

These timbers shall have all heart on one narrow

face; the other narrow face and the two sides shall have not less than 85 per cent of heart, measured

across the face or sides anywhere in the length of the piece.

22E, Timbers one face all heart, others 75 per cent.—

These timbers shall have all heart on one narrow face; the other narrow face and the two sides shall have

not less than 75 per cent of heart, measured across the face or sides anywhere in the length of the piece. For treatment. Provision for sapwood for timber to be treated is covered by the following:

Sapwood provisions.

22. Sapwood not restricted.—There is no restriction as to sapwood for this material. RATE OP GROWTH AND DENSITY

Select.—Southern pine or Douglas fir of select grade is to be selected for close grain. Dense select.—Southern pine or Douglas fir of dense select grade is to be selected for density. Close grain.

23. Close grain.—Douglas fir or southern pine

shall be of close grain, averaging on either one end or the other not less than 6 nor more than 20

annual rings per inch measured over a 3-inch portion

of a radial line located as described below and

representative of the average growth on the cross

section. Pieces averaging from five to six annual

rings per inch shall be accepted as the equivalent of close grain if having one-third or more summer wood.

Density.

24. Dense.—Douglas fir or southern pine shall be

dense, averaging on either one end or the other not

less than six annual rings per inch and, in addition, one-third or more summer wood measured over a

3-inch portion of a radial line located as described below and representative of the average growth on

the cross section. The contrast in color between summer wood and spring wood shall be distinct. Coarse-grained material excluded by this rule shall be accepted as dense if averaging one-half or more summer wood.

Close grain or density. 25. Radial line not representative.—When the

radial line specified is not representative, it shall be

shifted sufficiently to present a fair average, but the

distance from the pith to the beginning of the 3-inch portion of the line in boxed heart pieces shall not be

changed.

26. Close grain on two radial lines.—In case of disagreement in the measurement of close grain, two radial lines shall be chosen and the number of rings shall be the average determined on these lines. 27. Density on two radial lines.—In case of dis- agreement in the measurement of density, two

radial lines shall be chosen and the number of rings

and summer wood shall be the average determined

on these lines. Location of radial line in Douglas fir. 28. (a) Side-cut pieces.—In side-cut pieces of Douglas fir the radial line shall be at a right angle

to the annual rings and the center of the 3-inch portion of the line shall be at the center of the end of the piece.

(5) Boxed-heart pieces.—In boxed-heart pieces, the

line shall run from the pith to the corner farthest from the pith. When the least dimension is 6 inches

or less, the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a

distance of one inch from the pith. When the least dimension is more than 6 inches, the 3-inch portion

of the line shall begin at a distance from the pith

equal to 2 inches less than one-half the least dimension of the piece.

221
412.0 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

(c) If a 3-inch portion of the radial line can not be

obtained, the measurement shall be made over as much of the 3-inch portion as is available. Location of radial line in southern -pine. 29. (a) Boxed-heart pieces.—In boxed-heart pieces

of southern pine, the measurement shall be made

over the third, fourth, and fifth inches from the

pith along the radial line.

(b) Pith not present.—In cases where timbers do

not contain the pith, and it is impossible to locate

it with any degree of accuracy, the inspection shall be made over 3 inches on an approximate radial line beginning at the edge nearest the pith in timbers over 3 inches in thickness and on the second inch

nearest to the pith in timbers 3 inches or less in thickness.

(c) Pith present but less than 5-inch radial line.—

In material containing the pith but not a 5-inch

radial line, which is less than 2 by 8 inches in section or less than 8 inches in width, that does not show

over 16 square inches on the cross section, the inspec- tion shall apply to the second inch from the pith. In larger material that does not show a 5-inch radial

line, the inspection shall apply to the 3 inches farthest from the pith.

C. STRUCTURAL GRADES AND REFERENCE CODE

Specifications are divided into sections with general numbers for reference. Where alternate specifications are listed, each has a capital letter added to the general number. For any material, appropriate choice must be made of such paragraphs.

Where several paragraphs occur under the general number and each is designated by a small

letter, all such paragraphs must be used in making

a complete specification. In cases where only a small number of sizes are ordered it is permissible to shorten the tables of maximum defects by copying sizes of defects cor- responding only with the sizes being ordered. Three complete specifications are shown to illus- trate the application of the code. Following is a complete list of numbered specifications, brief description of material and appropriate code numbers of sections required to write a complete specification for this material.

Index to numbers of specifications Beams and Stringers

Grades

Dense select: Douglas fir or southern

pine

Select: Douglas fir or southern

pine Any other softwood..

Common: Any softwood

Additional requirements

For use untreated

For durability heartwood required One

face

100 per

cent; other

three

faces 85 per

cent

All

faces 85 per

cent

One

face

100 per

cent; other

three

faces 75 per

cent

Square edge

No heartwood

or sapwood

required

Square

edge Wane

per- mitted

For treating

Sapwood not

restricted

Square

edge Wane

per- mitted

JOIST AND PLANK

Dense select: Douglas fir or southern

pine - 21 22 23 24 25

Select: Douglas fir or southern

pine -. 26 27 28 29 30 Any other softwood 31 32 33 34 35 Common: Any softwood. 36 37 38 39 40 POSTS AND TIMBERS

Dense select: Douglas fir or southern

pine 61 41 65 42 43 44 45

Select: Douglas fir or southern

pine 62 46 66 47 48 49 50 Any other softwood 63 51 67 52 53 54 55 Common: Any softwood. 64 56 68 57 58 59 60

* 222
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

D. CODED SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL GRADES

Dense select—Beams and stringers. No. 1. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or southern pine, dense select, S5 per cent heartwood, square

edges

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+6 + c+d+

e+f+g + h +i), 5 (a + b + c+d + e), 9 (a+6), 15, 19C, 20C, 21B, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a + 6 + c) Douglas

fir or 29 (a + 6 + c) southern pine. No. 2. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or southern pine, dense select, no heartwood or sapwood

requirement, square edges:

15 (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + 6 +c + d +

e+f+9 + h + i), 5 (a + b + c + d+e), 9 (a + 6), 15, 19C,

20C, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a + b +c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+

b + c) southern pine. No. 3. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or southern pine, dense select, no heartwood or sapwood

requirement, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+

e+f+g+h+ i), 5 (a + b + c+d + e), 9 (a + b), 15, 19C, 20A, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a+b +c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b + c) southern pine. No. 4. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or southern pine, dense select, sapwood wanted for treatment, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c+d+

e+f+g + h + i), 5 (a + b+c+d+ e), 9 (a + b), 15, 19C,

20C, 22, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir or 29

(a + b + c) southern pine. No. 5. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or south- ern pine, dense select, sapwood wanted for treatment, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + b +c+d+

e+f+g+h+ i), 5 (a + b + c + d + e), 9 (a+b), 15, 19C, 20A, 22, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a + b + c) Dougals fir or 29 (a+b+c) southern pine.

Select beams and stringers. No. 6. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or south- ern pine, select 85 per cent heartwood, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d +

e+f+g+h+i), 5 (a + b + c + d + e), 9 (a+b), 15, 19C,

20C, 21B, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a+b + c), Douglas fir or 29

(a + b + c) southern pine. No. 7. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or south- ern pine, select, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d+

e+f+g+h+i), 5 (a + b +c + d + e), 9 (a+b), 15, 19C,

20C, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a+b +c) Douglas fir or 29 (a +

b + c) southern pine. No. 8. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or southern

pine, select, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c+d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b + c+d+e), 9 (a+b), 15, 19C,

20A, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a+b+c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b + c) southern pine. No. 9. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or southern pine, select, sapwood wanted for treatment, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b + c+d +e), 9 (a+b), 15, 19C,

20C, 22, 23, 25, 26, 28, (a+b+c) Douglas fir or 29

(a + b+c) southern pine. No. 10. Beams and stringers, Douglas fir or southern pine, select, sap wood wanted for treatment wane permitted: IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b+c+d+e

+f+9+h+i), 5 (a+b + c +d + e), 9 (a+b), 15, 19C

20A, 22, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a+b + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b+c) southern pine. No. 11. Beams and stringers, select, 85 per cent heartwood, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c+d + e +f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b+c+d+e), 9 (a+6), 15, 19C,

20C, 21B. No. 12. Beams and stringers, select, no heartwood

or sapwood requirement, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b+c + d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b+c+d+e), 9 (a+b), 15, 19C, 20C. No. 13. Beams and stringers, select, no heart- wood or sapwood requirement, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or 1 D (rough), 2, 3 (a+b +c + d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b +c+d+e), 9 (a+b), 15, 19C,

20A.No. 14. Beams and stringers, select, sapwood

wanted for treatment, square edges:

IB (surface) or ID (rough), 2, 3, (a+b +c+d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b + c + d+e), 9 (a+6), 15,

19(7, 20C, 22. No. 15. Beams and stringers, select, sapwood

wanted for treatment, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b+c+d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b +c+d+e), 9 (a+b), 15, 19C,

20A, 22. Common beams and stringers. No. 16. Beams and stringers, common, 85 per

cent heartwood, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b + c + d+e), 10 (a+6), 16, 19D,

20C, 21B. No. 17. Beams and stringers, common, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, square edges: IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + 6 +c+d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b + c+d+e), 10 (a+6), 16, 19D, 20C. No. 18. Beams and stringers, common, no heart- wood or sapwood requirement, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+e

+f+g+ h +i), 5 (a + b +c + d+e), 10 (a+6), 16, 19D, 20B. No. 19. Beams and stringers, common, sapwood

wanted for treatment, square edges: IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+6+c+d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b + c+d+e), 10 (a+6), 16, 19D, 20C, 22. No. 20. Beams and stringers, common, sapwood

wanted for treatment, wane, permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+e

+f+g+h+i), 5 (a+b+c+d +e), 10 (a + 6), 16, 19D,

20B, 22. 223
412.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Dense select joist and plank. No. 21. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, dense select, 85 per cent heartwood, square

edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a+b +c + d + e +f+g+ h +i), 4 (a+b +c + d), 7 (a + b +c), 13, 19A,

20C, 21 A, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a+b + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a + b + c) southern pine. No. 22. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, dense select, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d +

e+f+g + h + i), 4 (a+b +c+d), 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20(7, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir or 29

(a + b + c) southern pine. No. 23. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, dense select, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, wane permitted:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d +

e+f+g + h + i), 4 (a+b +c+d), 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20A, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a + b +c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b + c) southern pine. No. 24. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, dense select, sapwood wanted for treatment, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b +c + d +

e+f+g + h+i), 4 (a + b + c + d), 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20C, 22, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir or 29

(a + b + c) southern pine. No. 25. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, dense select, sapwood wanted for treatment, wane permitted:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a+b +c+d +

e+f+g + h +i), 4 (a + b + c + d), 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20A, 22, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a + b +c) Douglas fir or 29 (a + b + c) southern pine.

Select joist and plank. No. 26. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, select, 85 per cent heartwood, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c +d+e +

f+g + h + i), 4 (a + b +c + d), 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20C, 21A, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a + b +c) Douglas fir or 29

(a + b +c) southern pine. No. 27. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, select, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c +d+e +

f+g+h+ i), 4 (a + b + c + d), 7 (a + b +c), 13, 19A,

20C, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a+b + c) Douglas fir or 29

(a + b + c) southern pine. No. 28. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, select, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, wane permitted:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+e +

f+g + h+i), 4 (a + b +c+d), 7 (a + b +c), 13, 19A,

20A, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b + c) southern pine. No. 29. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, select, sapwood wanted for treatment, square

edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+

f+g + h + i), 4 (a + b + c + d), 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20C, 22, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir or 29

(a + b +c) southern pine. No. 30. Joist and plank, Douglas fir or southern

pine, select, sapwood wanted for treatment, wane

permitted:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d +

e+f+g + h +i), 4 (a + b + c + d), 7 (a + b +c), 13, 19A, 20A, 22, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir, or 29 (a + b + c) southern pine. No. 31. Joist and plank, select, 85 per cent heart- wood, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough)," 2, 3 (a + b + c + d +

e+f+g + h + i), 4 (a + b + c + d), 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20C, 21A. No. 32. Joist and plank, select, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d +

e+f+g+h + i), 4 (a+b + c+d), 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20C.No. 33. Joists and plank, select, no heartwood

or sapwood requirement, wane permitted:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d+

e+f+g+h +i), 4 (a+b +c + d), 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20A.No. 34. Joist and plank, select, sapwood wanted

for treatment, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d +

e+f+g + h + i), 4 (a + b + c + d)) 7 (a + b + c), 13, 19A,

20C, 22. No. 35. Joist and plank, select, sapwood wanted

for treatment, wane permitted:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d +

e+f+g+h+i), 4 (a + b + c+d), 7 (a+b + c), 13, 19A,

20A, 22. Common joist and plank. No. 36. Joist and plank, common, 85 per cent heartwood, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d +

e+f+g + h + i), 4 (a + b + c + d), 8 (a+b + c), 14, 19B,

20C, 21A. No. 37. Joist and plank, common, no heartwood

or sapwood requirement, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c + d+

e+f+g +h +i), 4 (a + b + c + d), 8 (a+b +c), 14, 19B,

20C.No. 38. Joist and plank, common, no heartwood

or sapwood requirement, wane permitted:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a+b +c + d+

e+f+g + h+i), 4 (a + b + c + d), 8 (a+b +c), 14, 19B,

20B.No. 39. Joist and plank, common, sapwood wanted for treatment, square edges:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a + b +c + d +

e+f+g+h+i), 4 (a + b + c +d), 8 (a+b + c), 14, 195,

20C, 22. No. 40. Joist and plank, common, sapwood

wanted for treatment, wane permitted:

1A (surfaced) or 1C (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c + d+

e+f+g+h+i), 4 (a+b+c+d), 8 (a+b+c), 14, 19B,

20B, 22. 224
LTJMBEK FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

Dense select posts and timbers. No. 41. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern

pine, dense select, 85 per cent heartwood, square

edges:

IS (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b +c+d+

e+f+g+h +i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20C, 21C,

24, 25, 27, 28 (a + b + c), Douglas fir or 29 (a + b + c) southern pine. No. 42. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or south

era pine, dense select, no heartwood or sapwood

requirement, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b+c+d+

e+f+g+h + i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20C, 24, 25,

27, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a + b + c) southern pine. No. 43. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern pine, dense select, no heartwood or sapwood

requirement, wane permitted:

IS (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b +c+d +

e+f+g + h +i), 6, 11 (a + b), 17, 19E, 2QA, 24, 25,

27, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a + b + c) southern

pine. No. 44. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern pine, dense select, sapwood wanted for treat- ment, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b +c+d+

e+f+g + h+i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20C, 22, 24,

25, 27, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b + c) southern pine. No. 45. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern pine, dense select, sapwood wanted for treat- ment, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+

e+f+g + h + i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20A, 22, 24,

25, 27, 28 (a + b + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a + b +c) southern pine.

Select posts and timbers. No. 46. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern pine, select, 85 per cent heartwood, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d +

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19B, 20C, 21C, 23, 25,26, 28(a+6 + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a +b+c) southern pine. No. 47. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern pine, select, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b +c+d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20C, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a+b + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b + c) southern

pine. No. 48. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern pine, select, no heartwood or sapwood requirement, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d +

e+f+g + h +i), 6, 11 (a + b), 17, 19E, 20A, 23, 25,

26, 28 (a+b +c) Douglas fir or 29 (a + b + c) southern

pine. No. 49. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or south- ern pine, select, sapwood wanted for treatment, square edges;

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c + d+

e+f+g + h +i), Q, 11 (a + b), 17, 19E, 20C, 22, 23,

25, 26, 28 (a+b + c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b+c) southern pine. No. 50. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern pine, select, sapwood wanted for treatment, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b +c+d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20A, 22, 23,

25, 26, 28 (a+b+c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b +c) southern pine. No. 51. Posts and timbers, select, 85 per cent heartwood, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 ( a +b + c+d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20C, 21C. No. 52. Posts and timbers, select, no heartwood

or sapwood requirement, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 ( a +b + c +d+

e+f+g + h + i), 6, 11 (a + b), 17, 19E, 20C. No. 53. Posts and timbers, select, no heartwood

or sapwood requirement, wane permitted: * IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 ( a + b +c +d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 2QA. No. 54. Posts and timbers, select, sapwood

wanted for treatment, square edges:

•IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a +b + c+d+

e+f+g + h + i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20C, 22. No. 55. Posts and timbers, select, sapwood

wanted for treatment, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced), or ID (rough), 2, 3 ( a + b + c+d+

e+f+g+h+ i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20A, 22. Common posts and timbers. No. 56. Posts and timbers, common, 85 per cent heartwood, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a +d+c + d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 12 (a+b), 18, 19F, 20C, 21C. No. 57. Posts and timbers, common, no heartwood

or sapwood requirement, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + b +c+d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 12 (a+b), 18, 19F, 20(7. No. 58. Posts and timbers, common, no, heartwood

or sapwood requirement, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b+c + d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 12 (a+b), 18, 19F, 20B. No. 59. Posts and timbers, common, sapwood

wanted for treatment, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 12 (a+b), 18, 19F, 20C, 22. No. 60. Posts and timbers, common, sapwood

wanted for treatment, wane permitted:

IB (surfaced), or ID (rough) 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 12 (a+b), 18,19F, 20B, 22. Special posts and timbers. No. 61. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern pine, dense select, one narrow face all heartwood

other narrow face and sides 85 per cent heartwood,

square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+

e+f+g+h+i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20C, 21D, 24,

25, 27, 28 (a+b +c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b+c)

southern pine.

225
412.0 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 62. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or southern

pine, select, one narrow face all heartwood, other narrow face and sides 85 per cent heartwood, square

edges

IB (surfaced), or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+

e+f+g+h+ i), 6, 11 (a + 6) 17, \9E, 20C, 21D, 23,

25, 26, 28 (a + 6+c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+6 + c) southern pine. No. 63. Posts and timbers, select, one narrow

face all heartwood, other narrow face and sides 85

per cent heartwood, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b+c+d+

e+f+g + h + i), 6, 11 (a + b), 17, 19E, 20C, 21D.

No. 64. Posts and timbers, common, one narrow

face all heartwood, other narrow face and sides 85 per cent heartwood, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c+d+

e+f+g+h+ i), 6, 12 (a + 6), 18, 19F, 20C, 21D. No. 65. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or south- ern pine, dense select, one narrow face all heartwood,

other narrow face and sides 75 per cent heartwood,

square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b + c+d+

e+f+g+h+ i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20C, 21E, 24, 25, 27, 28 (a + b + c), Douglas fir, or 29 (a+b +c) southern pine. No. 66. Posts and timbers, Douglas fir or south- ern pine, select, one narrow face all heartwood,

other narrow face and sides 75 per cent heartwood,

square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a+b+c+d +

e+f+g+ h + i), 6, 11 (a+b), 17, 19E, 20C, 21E, 23, 25, 26, 28 (a+b+c) Douglas fir or 29 (a+b+c)

southern pine. No. 67. Posts and timbers, select, one narrow

face all heartwood, other narrow face and sides 75 per cent heartwood, square edges:

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 (a + b + c+d+

e+f+g + h + i), 6, 11 (a + b), 17, 19E, 20C, 21E. No. 68. Posts and timbers, common, one narrow

face all heartwood, other narrow face and sides 75 per cent heartwood, square edges

IB (surfaced) or ID (rough), 2, 3 ( a +b+c+d+

e+f+g + h +i), 6, 12 (a+b), 18, 19F, 20C, 21E. EXAMPLES OP APPLICATION OF CODE

Three complete specifications are shown to illus trate the application of the code. EXAMPLE NO. 1 SPECIFICATION NO. 1 Dense Select Beams and Stringers (Southern Pine) with Square Edges and Heartwood Requirement for Use Untreated, Rough SPECIFICATION REFERENCE NO. 1 IN SUBDIVISION

D ON CODED SPECIFICATIONS

Size requirements. ID. Rough structural beams and stringers shall not be smaller than the nominal size less 34 inch for

sizes 7 inches and less, and less % inch for sizes 8

inches and over. Grade requirements.

2. This material shall contain only sound wood.

General.

3. (a) No pieces of exceptionally light weight shall be permitted except that light-weight pieces other- wise of select grade may be accepted in common

grade.

(b) Shake shall be measured on the ends of a

piece, and its size shall be taken as the shortest distance between lines inclosing the shake and parallel to the wide faces of the pieces. Checks and splits shall be limited as provided for shakes. No checks

or combinations of checks with shakes which would

reduce the strength to a greater extent than the al- lowable shake shall be permitted.

(c) Where wane is permitted there shall be no

combination of wane and knots which would reduce

the strength more than the maximum allowable

knot.

(d) Cluster knots and knots in groups are not

permitted.

(e) Knot holes and holes from other causes than

knots shall be permitted as provided for knots.

(/) The size of a knot shall be measured on the

section of the knot appearing on the surface under

consideration.

(g) When the mean or average diameter of a knot

is specified, the size shall be taken as the average of the maximum and minimum diameters.

(h) Knot sizes specified shall be applied to spike knots as well as to round knots.

(i) The mean or average diameter of a spike knot

shall be taken as the average of its length and its maximum width. Knots—Beams and stringers.

5. (a) On the narrow or horizontal faces of beams

and stringers the size of a knot shall be taken as its width between lines parallel to the edges of the

timber.

(b) On the wide or vertical faces of beams and

stringers the smallest diameter of a knot shall be

taken as its size.

(c) Knots on the edges of wide or vertical faces

of beams and stringers are limited to the same size as on the adjacent narrow or horizontal faces, except

that the size is measured on the least diameter of the

knot instead of on its width between lines parallel to the edges of the timber.

(d) The size of knots on the narrow or horizontal

faces and edges of wide or vertical faces of beams

and stringers may increase proportionately from the

size allowed in the middle third to twice that size at the ends of the piece.

(e) The size of knots on the wide or vertical faces

of beams and stringers may increase proportionately

from the size allowed at the edge to that allowed at the center line.

226
LITMBEE EOE BUILDING AND FACTOEY USE 412.0

9. (c) Maximum knots in dense select and select beams and stringers

Width of face in inches

Size of knot

Narrow

or hori- zontal

face, middle

third of length

Center

line of wide or

vertical

face

Inches

VA. Inches

S IH

22H

2H

2H

22V*

3

SVs 3K

4

10 - to14- H

IS20 . - - -

(6) The sum of the diameters of all knots within the center half of the length of a beam or stringer on any face shall not exceed the width of the face on which they occur. Shake and checks.

15. Maximum shake and checks in dense select and

select beams and stringers

Width of end in inches

Size of skake or check

Green Seasoned

€ Inches

2

Inches

2

8 2%r<

10 2H

12 3 14 3H

4 6 16 __ 18

20 5 6Vs 7H

8

22

24. 6

19C. The slope of grain in center half of length

shall not exceed 1 in 15. 20C. All edges must be square. 21B. Beams and stringers shall have not less than

85 per cent heart on each of the four faces measured

across the faces anywhere in the length of the piece.

24. Southern pine shall be dense, averaging on

either one end or the other not less than six annual

rings per inch and, in addition, one-third or more summer wood measured over a 3-inch portion of a

radial line located as described below and representative of the average growth on the cross section. The contrast in color between summer wood and

spring wood shall be distinct. Coarse-grained

material excluded by this rule shall be accepted as dense if averaging one-half or more summer wood.

25. When the radial line specified is not representative, it shall be shifted sufficiently to present a

fair average, but the distance from the pith to the beginning of the 3-inch portion of the line in boxedheart pieces shall not be changed.

27. In case of disagreement, two radial lines shall be chosen, and the number of rings and summer

wood shall be the average determined on these lines. 29. (a) In boxed-heart pieces of southern pine, the measurement shall be made over the third, fourth,

and fifth inches from the pith along the radial line.

(6) In cases where the timbers do not contain the

pith, and it is impossible to locate it with any degree

of accuracy, the inspection shall be made over

3 inches on an approximate radial line beginning at the edge nearest the pith in timbers over 3 inches in thickness and on the second inch nearest to the pith

in timbers 3 inches or less in thickness.

(c) In material containing the pith but not a

5-inch radial fine, which is less than 2 by 8 inches in section or less than 8 inches in width, that does not show over 16 square inches on the cross section, the

inspection shall apply to the second inch from the

pith. In larger material that does not show a

5-inch radial line, the inspection shall apply to the

3 inches farthest from the pith.

EXAMPLE NO. 2. SPECIFICATION NO. 50

Select Posts and Timbers (Douglas Fir) with Wane Permitted and Sapwood Wanted for Treatment, Surfaced Four Sides Size requirements. IB. Structural posts and timbers shall be when

surfaced SIS, SlE, S2S, S4S, not smaller than the nominal size less z/% inch for sizes 7 inches and less, and less 3^2 inch for sizes 8 inches and over. Grade requirements.

2. This material shall contain only sound wood.

General.

3. (a) No pieces of exceptionally light weight shall be permitted, except that light-weight pieces other- wise of select grade may be accepted in common

grade.

(6) Shake shall be measured on the ends of a

piece, and its size shall be taken as the shortest distance between lines inclosing the shake and

parallel to the wide faces of the piece. Checks and

splits shall be limited as provided for shakes. No

checks or combination of checks with shakes which

would reduce the strength to a greater extent than

the allowable shake shall be permitted.

(c) Where wane is permitted there shall be no

combination of wane and knots which would reduce

the strength more than the maximum allowable

knot.

(d) Cluster knots and knots in groups are not

permitted.

(e) Knot holes and holes from other causes than

knots shall be permitted as provided for knots.

(/) The size of a knot shall be measured on the

section of the knot appearing on the surface under

consideration.

(g) When the mean or average diameter of a knot

is specified, the size shall be taken as the average

of the maximum and minimum diameters.

(h) Knot sizes specified shall be applied to spike knots as well as to round knots. 227
412.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

(i) The mean or average diameter of a spike knot

shall be taken as the average of its length and its maximum width.

Knots.

6. In posts and timbers, the measurement of a knot shall be made on the mean or average diameter.

11. (a) Maximum knots in dense select and select posts and timbers

Width of face, in inches Size of knot

1012

14. 16

13. 20.

22,

(6) The sum of the diameters of all knots in any 6 inches of length of a post or timber shall not exceed

twice the size of the maximum knot allowable. Shake and checks.

17. Maximum shake and checks in dense select and

select posts and timbers

Width of end, in inches

Size of shake or check

Green Seasoned

5 . Inches

2 InchesVA

6... 3 8

4

4 10 5 12 4?4 sy2 6

14 7

16 8

18 m 9 20 8 10 22 11 24.. 12

19E. The slope of the grain shall not exceed 1 in 10. 20A. Wane is permitted, not exceeding one-eighth the width of any face.

22. There is no restriction as to sapwood for this material.

23. Douglas fir shall be of close grain, averaging on either one end or the other not less than 6 nor more than 20 annual rings per inch measured over

a 3-inch portion of a radial line located as described below and representative of the average growth on

the cross section. Pieces averaging from 5 to 6 annual rings per inch shall be accepted as the equivalent of close grain if having one-third or more summer wood.

25. When the radial line specified is not representative, it shall be shifted sufficiently to present

a fair average, but the distance from the pith to the beginning of the 3-inch portion of the line in boxedheart pieces shall not be changed.

26. In case of disagreement, two radial lines shall be chosen, and the number of rings shall be the average determined on these lines. 28. (a) In side-cut pieces of Douglas fir, the radial

line shall be at a right angle to the annual rings and

the center of the 3-inch portion of the line shall be

at the center of the end of the piece.

(6) In boxed-heart pieces the line shall run from

the pith to the corner farthest from the pith. When

the least dimension is 6 inches or less, the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance of 1 inch

from the pith. When the least dimension is more

than 6 inches the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance from the pith equal to 2 inches

less than one-half the least dimension of the piece.

(c) If a 3-inch portion of a radial line can not be

obtained, the measurement shall be made over as much of the 3-inch portion as is available. EXAMPLE NO 3. SPECIFICATION NO. 38 Common Joist and Plank with Wane Permissibility and No Heart- wood or Sapwood Requirement, Surfaced SIS, S1E Size requirements. 1A. Structural joist and plank shall be, when

surfaced SIS or S2S, not thinner than the nominal

dimension less ^ inch and when surfaced S1E or S2E not narrower than the nominal width less ^

inch for sizes 2 to 7 inches, inclusive, and less inch for sizes 8 inches and wider. Grade requirements.

2. This material shall contain only sound wood.

General.

3. (a) No pieces of exceptionally light weight

shall be permitted, except that lightweight pieces

otherwise of select grade may be accepted in com- mon grade.

(6) Shake shall be measured on the ends of a

piece, and its size shall be taken as the shortest distance between lines inclosing the shake and

parallel to the wide faces of the piece. Checks and

splits shall be limited as provided for shakes. No

checks or combination of checks with shakes which

would reduce the strength to a greater extent than

the allowable shake shall be permitted.

(c) Where wane is permitted there shall be no

combination of wane and knots which would reduce

the strength more than the maximum allowable

knot.

(d) Cluster knots and knots in groups are not per- mitted.

(c) Knot holes and holes from other causes than

knots shall be permitted as provided for knots.

(/) The size of a knot shall be measured on the

section of a knot appearing on the surface under consideration.

(g) When the mean or average diameter of a knot

is specified, the size shall be taken as the average of the maximum and minimum diameters.

(h) Knot sizes specified shall be applied to spike knots as well as to round knots.

all

228
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

(i) The mean or average diameter of a spike knot

shall be taken as the average of its length and its maximum width.

Knots.

4. (a) On the wide faces of joist and plank, the measurement of a knot shall be made on the mean

or average diameter.

(b) On the narrow faces of joist and plank, the

size of a knot shall be taken as its width between

lines parallel to the edges of the piece.

(c) The size of knots on the narrow faces and

edges of wide faces of joist and plank may increase proportionately from the size allowed in the middle

third to twice that size at the ends of the pieces.

id) The size of knots on the wide faces of joist and plank may increase proportionately from the

size allowed at the edge to that allowed at the center

line.

8. (a) Maximum knots in common joist and plant

knots on wide faces

Size of knot

Width of face, in inches On or near

edge, middle

third of length

Center

line of

face

4.... Inches

11H

22M

3m

Inches2j| VA±A

5Vs 5A

6

6

8

1012

14

16..

(6) Knots on narrow faces of boxed-heart pieces

Thickness of piece, in inches

Size of knot, middle

third of length

2

InchesA

IH

\A

3

4.

(c) The sum of diameters of all knots within the

center half of the length of a joist or plank on any

face shall not exceed two times the width of face on

which they occur. Shake and checks.

14. Maximum shake and checks in common joist and

plank

Width of end, inches

Size of shake or check

Green Seasoned

2 Inches%

1Am

InchesA

1Hm

34

19B. Common joist and plank.—The slope of the

grain in the center half of the length shall not exceed

1 in 10. 20B. Wane, common grade.—Wane is permitted, not exceeding one-fourth the width of any face. American Society for Testing Materials, proposed

standard specifications for structural wood joist, planks, beams, stringers, and posts, serial D245,

1927. These specifications are the same as the specifi- cations of the American Railway Engineering Association, above, for structural grades of lumber and

timber under the following headings:

A. Structural grades of lumber and timber and

the method of their derivation.

B. Specification requirements for structural wood

joist, plank, beams, stringers, and posts. C. Structural grades and reference code. D. Coded specifications for structural grades.

Southern Pine Association, standard specifica- tions for grade of dense longleaf and shortleaf southern yellow pine structural timbers, joist and

plank, and utility timbers, March 23, 1927. Southern yellow pine.

This term includes the species of yellow pine

growing in the Southern States from Virginia to Texas, that is, the pines hitherto known as longleaf

pine (Pinus palustris), shortleaf pine (Pinus echi- nata), loblolly pine (Pinus taeda), Cuban pine

(Pinus heterophylla) , and pond pine (Pinus serotina)

Under this heading two classes of timber are designated: A, dense southern yellow pine, and

B, sound southern yellow pine.

The rules for dense and sound grades are reprinted

from American Society for Testing Materials specification D10-15,5 1915. General timber specifications.

Southern yellow pine timbers are graded in accord- ance with the several rules herein described. The

defects enumerated and admitted in the various grades are described as follows: Definitions for knots, wane, and shakes conform to American Lumber Standards, 400.20.

Sizes.—All rough timbers, except No. 1 common,

must be full size when green. One-quarter inch

shall be allowed for each side surfaced. Lengths.—Standard lengths are multiples of 2

feet, 8 to 20 feet, inclusive; extra lengths are multiples of 2 feet, 22 feet, and longer. When lineal average is specified, standard of lengths shall be

multiples of 1 foot. Heart timbers. All timber specifications, except "merchantable,"

"dense heart," and "select structural timbers,"

specifying heart requirements, shall be considered

as a special contract, and shall specify whether the heart requirements refer to surface or girth measure- ments in each piece.

5 American Society for Testing Materials specification D10-15, has been superseded by tentative specification serial D245-27, 1927, referred to above. 229
412.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Grades of timbers. Southern yellow pine timbers are graded and

classified according to intended use into timbers

for structural use and for utility purposes. The

grades of structural timbers and structural joists

and plank are based on the provisions provided in American Lumber Standards as bases for the preparation of grading rules for structural material.

Structural timbers. Knot measurement.—Knot measurement for struc- tural timbers, joists, and plank conform to the American Lumber Standards, above.

Select structural material. Select structural timbers shall conform to the defi- nition of dense southern pine as adopted by the American Society for Testing Materials August 21, 1915, referred to above.

Shall contain only sound wood and be well manufactured, and shall be free from end shakes and

checks exceeding one-sixth the width of end and

diagonal grain with slope greater than 1 inch in 20

inches. Unless otherwise specified, select structural material shall show 85 per cent of heart, girth measurement, measured anywhere in the length of the piece.

Any greater or lesser requirement as to heart shall be

expressed in terms of per cent of girth measurement. May contain sound knots, provided that the size of any one knot in the center half of the length of the piece shall not exceed the following, measured

on the face in which it appears:

1-inch on 6-inch face.

1-inch on 8-inch face, lj^-inch on 10-inch face. 13^2-inch on 12-inch face.

2-inch on 14-inch face. 2-inch on 16-inch face. 2^-inch on 18-inch face. Knots on narrow faces located outside the center

half of the lengths of a timber may increase proportionately from the size allowed in the center half to twice that size at the ends of the piece.

The aggregate diameter of all knots within the

center half of the length of any face shall not exceed

the width of that face. Dense heart. Dense heart timber shall conform to the definition

of dense southern pine as adopted by the American

Society for Testing Materials August 21, 1915, refer- red to above.

Shall be well manufactured; free from end shakes and checks exceeding one-fourth the width of end; and diagonal grain with slope greater than 1 inch in 15 inches

All sizes under 9 inches shall show some heart the

entire length on one side; sizes 9 inches and over

shall show some heart the entire length on two opposite sides. Wane not exceeding one-eighth of the dimension

of the face and one-fourth of the length of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more

corners on not to exceed 10 per cent of the pieces, shall be admitted.

May contain sound knots, provided that the 6ize of any one knot in the center half of the length of piece shall not exceed the following, measured on the

face in which it appears. Timber with unequal sides: 13^-inch on 6-inch face. 1%-inch on 8-inch face. 2-inch on 10-inch face. 2-inch on 12-inch face 23^-inch on 14-inch face. 23^-inch on 16-inch face. 3-inch on 18-inch face. Square timbers: 1^-inch in 6 by 6 inch.

2-inch in 8 by 8 inch. 23^-inch in 10 by 10 inch.

3-inch in 12 by 12 inch. 3-inch in 14 by 14 inch. 3H-inch in 16 by 16 inch. 33^-inch in 18 by 18 inch. In timbers with unequal sides the sum of the smallest diameters of the knots in the center half of the

length of any face shall not exceed the width of the

face. Knots on narrow faces located outside the

center half of the length of a timber may increase proportionately from the size allowed in the center

half to twice that size at the ends of the piece. In square timbers the sum of the diameters of the knots on all sides within any 6 inches of length shall not exceed twice the maximum size knot allowable, nor shall there be two maximum-size allowable knots

in the same 6 inches of length of any face. Structural square edge and sound. Structural square edge and sound timbers shall conform to the definiton of dense southern pine as adopted by the American Society for Testing Materials August 21, 1915, referred to above.

Shall contain only sound wood and be well manufactured; shall be free from end shakes and checks

exceeding one-third the width of end and diagonal

grain with slope greater than 1 inch in 12 inches. Wane not exceeding one-eighth of the dimension

of the face" and one-quarter of the length of the

piece on corner, or the equivalent on two or more

corners on not to exceed 10 per cent of the pieces, shall be admitted.

May contain sound knots, provided that the size of any one knot in the center half of the length of the piece shall not exceed the following, measured

on the face in which it appears: Timber with unequal sides: 234-inch on 6-inch face. 2^-inch on 8-inch face. 3-inch on 10-inch face. 334-inch on 12-inch face. 33^-inch on 14-inch face. 3^-inch on 16-inch face. 4-inch on 18-inch face. Square timbers:

2

1/£ -inch in 6 by 6 inch.

3-inch in 8 by 8 inch.

4-inch in 10 by 10 inch. 230
LUMBER FOK BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.0

43^-ineh in 12 by 12 inch.

5-inch in 14 by 14 inch. 53^-inch in 16 byl6 inch.

6-inch in 18 by 18 inch. In timbers with unequal sides the sum of the

smallest diameters of knots in the center half of the

length of any face shall not exceed one and onehalf times the width of the face. Knots within 1 inch of the edge of wide faces in the center half of the length shall not exceed in size the knots per- mitted on the adjacent narrow face. Knots on nar- row faces located outside the center half of the

length of a timber may increase proportionately

from the size allowed in the center half to twice

that size at the ends of the piece. In square timbers the sum of the diameters of knots on all sides within any 6 inches of length shall not exceed twice the maximum size knot allowable, nor shall there be two maximum size allowable knots in same 6 inches of length of any face. Structural joists and plank. Structural joists and plank shall embrace the

following nominal size: 2 to 5 inches in thickness and from 4 to 16 inches in width. The thicknesses and widths of joists and plank

S1S1E or S4S shall be in accordance with the follow- ing table:

Thickness Widths

Board measure

(inches)

Dressed

dimensions,

green or commercially dry

Board measure

(inches)

Dressed dimensions, green or commercially dry

2 to 5 inches

Inches

lA inch ofl. 4 Inches&A

IVi &A

iiH

13H

15M

68

1012

14

16 Dense heart. Dense heart joists and plank shall conform to the

definition of dense southern pine as adopted by the American Society for Testing Materials, August

21, 1915, referred to above.

Shall be well manufactured; free from end shakes and checks exceeding one-fourth the width of end; and diagonal grain with slope greater than 1 inch in 12 inches.

All sizes under 9 inches shall show some heart the

entire length on one side; sizes 9 inches and over

shall show some heart the entire length on two

opposite sides. Wane not exceeding one-eighth of the dimension

of the face and one-fourth of the length of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more

corners, or not to exceed 10 per cent of the pieces,

shall be admitted.

May contain sound knots, provided that the size of any one knot in the center half of the length of the piece shall not exceed the following, measured on

the face in which it appears

3^-inch on 2-inch face. %-inch on 3-inch face.

1-inch on 4-inch face. 13^-inch on 6-inch face. 13^-inch on 8-inch face. 1^-inch on 10-inch face.

2-inch on 12-inch face. 234-inch on 14-ineh face. 23^-inch on 16-inch face. The sum of the smallest diameters of knots in the center half of the length of any face shall not

exceed one and one-half times the width of the face. Knots on narrow faces located outside the center

half of the length of the piece may increase proportionately from the size allowed in the center half to twice that size at the ends of the piece. Structural square edge and sound.

Structural square edge and sound joists and plank

shall conform to the definition of dense southern

pine as adopted by the American Society for Test- ing Materials August 21, 1915, referred to above.

Shall contain only sound wood and be well manufactured; shall be free from end shakes and checks exceeding one-third the width of end, and diagonal

grain with slope greater than 1 inch in 10 inches. Wane not exceeding one-eighth of the dimension

of the face and one-fourth of the length of the piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more

corners on not to exceed 10 per cent of the pieces, shall be admitted.

May contain sound knots, provided that the size of any one knot in the center half of the length of the piece shall not exceed the following, measured

on the face in which it appears: %-inch on 2-inch face.

1-inch on 3-inch face. 134-inch on 4-inch face. 13^-inch on 6-inch face.

2-inch on 8-inch face. 2J^-inch on 10-inch face.

3-inch on 12-inch face. 334-inch on 14-inch face. 33^-inch on 16-inch face. The sum of the smallest diameters of knots in the center half of the length of any face shall not

exceed two times the width of the face. Knots on

the narrow faces located outside the center half of the length of the piece may increase proportionately from the size allowed in the center half to twice that size at the ends of the piece.

IT. S. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Public Roads, specification for timber structures, revised May 14, 1924.

Description.

Timber structures shall be built where shown on

the plans or directed by the engineer and shall be

constructed in accordance with the plans and specifications. This item shall include only such timber

as is a part of the completed work. All timber for erection purposes, as false work, forms, bracing,

sheeting, etc., shall be furnished by the contractor

at his own expense. 52688°—27 16 231
412.0 STANDABBS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Quality.

All timber shall be sound and sawed standard

size, straight, out of wind, and shall be free from

defects, such as decay; wormholes; injurious shakes; checks and crooked, cross or spiral grain; large,

loose, or unsound knots; knots in groups; large pitch

pockets; or other defects that might impair its strength and durability. Wane may show on only one corner of a piece. Wane shall not exceed onehalf the length of the piece nor measure more than

1 inch across the face of the wane. Not more than

10 per cent of the pieces of one size may show any

wane.

Size. Rough timbers when sawed to standard size, shall mean that they shall not be over % inch scant from actual size specified. For instance, a 12 by

12 inch timber shall measure not less than 11% by

11% inches. Dressed.—Standard dressing means that not more

than \i inch shall be allowed for dressing, each

surface. For instance, a 12 by 12 inch timber shall, after dressing four sides, not measure less than 113^ by 11 3^ inches. Dense timber. Dense timber shall be used for truss members,

floor beams, stringers, caps, and flooring.

(a) Dense timber of longleaf pine, shortleaf pine,

and Cuban pine shall show at one end or the other an average of at least six annual rings per inch and

at least one-third summer wood, all measured over

the third, fourth, and fifth inches on a radial line from the pith. Wide-ringed material excluded by

this rule shall be acceptable, provided the amount

of summer wood as above measured shall be at

least one-half. The contrast in color between sum- mer wood and spring wood shall be sharp and the summer wood shall be dark in color except in pieces

having more than one-half summer wood.

In cases where timbers do not contain pith, and

it is impossible to locate it with any degree of accuracy, same inspection shall be made over 3 inches in an approximate radial line beginning at the edge nearest the pith in timbers over 3 inches

in thickness and in the second inch of the piece nearest to the pith in timbers 3 inches or less in thickness. In dimension material containing the pith but not a 5-inch radial line, which is less than 2 by 8, which

is in section, or less than 8 inches in width, that does not show over 16 square inches on the cross

section, the inspection shall apply to the second

inch, from the pith. In larger material that does not show a 5-inch radial line the inspection shall apply to the 3 inches farthest from the pith.

(6) Dense timber of coast region Douglas fir shall be strong timber of medium rate of growth

and show on one end or the other an average of at

least six annual rings per inch and at least onethird summer wood measured over 3 inches on a

line located as hereinafter described. Wide-ringed

material, excluded by this rule, shall be acceptable,

provided the amount of summer wood as above

measured shall be at least one-half. Material in which the proportions of summer wood is not clearly discernible shall not be used. Any timber whose least dimension is less than

5 inches shall not show the pith on the inspection end; pieces whose least dimension is 5 inches or more may contain the pith.

When the least dimension is 5 inches or more,

the pith being present, the line over which the rate

of growth and percentage of summer wood measure- ments shall be made, shall run from the pith to the corner farthest from the pith. The 3-inch line shall begin at a distance from the pith equal to 2

inches less than one-half the least dimension of the

piece. For all pieces not having the pith present the

center of the 3-inch line shall be at the center of the end of the piece and the direction of the 3-inch

line shall be at right angles to the annual rings.

If a radial line of 3 inches can not be obtained, the measurement shall be made over the entire

radial line that is available.

(c) Timber of other species.—Other species of timber for truss members, floor beams, caps, and

flooring shall be strictly first quality.

Sound timber. Timber for columns, sills, wheel guards, bulkhead

sheeting, bracing, and timber for other purposes,

unless otherwise specified, shall fulfill the foregoing

requirements except the density rules given above. Heart requirement.

All untreated timber shall show at least 85 per

cent heartwood on any girth. Untreated timber. For designs based on a fiber stress in bending

of 1,500 to 1,600 pounds per square inch, one of the following species of timber shall be used: 6 Douglas fir from Pacific coast region (Pseudotsuga taxifolia)

Longleaf pine (Pinus palustris).

Cuban pine (Pinus heterophylla)

White oak (Quercus alba). Spanish oak from lowland (Quercus pagodaefolia)

Tanbark oak (Quercus densiflora). Treated timber. For designs based on a fiber stress in bending of 1,500 to 1,600 pounds per square inch, one of the

following species of timber shall be used: 1 Douglas fir from Pacific coast region (Pseudotsuga taxifolia). Longleaf pine (Pinus palustris).

Cuban pine (Pinus heterophylla). Shortleaf pine (Pinus echinata).

White oak (Quercus alba). Spanish oak from lowland (Quercus pagodaefolia)

Tanbark oak (Quercus densiflora).

Timber treated by a pressure method to retain 8 to 12 pounds of oil per cubic foot and so treated

fl See table for unit stresses for use with these specifications under

400.12. 232
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.1

that all sapwood is entirely impregnated with creo- sote oil shall fulfill the requirements for untreated timber except that there shall be no heart wood

requirement. Note.—The complete specification describes the construction, preservative treatment, and painting of timber structures. Table

of working stresses appended to this specification is included under No. 400.12. 412.1 TIMBERS.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 412.0, structural material, for the basic provision for the selection and inspection of softwood

dimension and timbers where working stresses are

required.

American Association of State Highway Officials, specifications for timber cribbing, December, 1926.

Material. Timber.—Timber used for cribbing shall con- form to the requirements of structural timber,

lumber and piling, 412.0 and unless otherwise

specified shall be 1 common dimension.

Logs.—Logs used for cribbing shall conform in quality to the requirements specified for timber

piles in structural timber, lumber and piling, No.

412.0. Preparation.

When timber or logs are to be treated, all framing shall be completed before treatment and all surfaces cleaned of dirt and grease. All timber and log framing shall be done in a workmanlike manner and true to line and angle.

Dimensions.

Timber.—When cribs are constructed of sawed

timber no timber shall be less than 8 inches in least dimension. The face timber in the base tier shall be not less than 10 inches in least dimension.

Logs.—When cribs are constructed of logs, no

face log shall have a diameter at the small end of

less than 10 inches and tie logs shall be not less than

8 inches in diameter at the small end. The face

log in the base tier shall be not less than 12 inches

in diameter at the small end.

All logs for cribbing shall be selected with as small an amount of taper as possible from the logs

available. The length of logs used shall be some- what dependent upon the taper. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for timber, January, 1927. Bridge and dock timbers. Bridge and dock timbers in any hardwood shall grade substantially the same as freight car stock,

with allowance for additional and coarser defects, according to size and purpose intended. Sound square edge. Sound square-edge plank and timbers shall be sawn to specified sizes and shall be free from unsound

defects that seriously impair the strength or prevent

the use of the piece for purposes of strength in its full width and length.

Firm, tight heart-center boxed or showing on the

surface, wormholes, an occasional grub hole, an

occasional knot hole not extending through the

piece, and slight wane on one or two corners, as

defined in " good edge," in general instructions (400.30) will be admitted. Season checks are no

defect. Common timbers. Common timbers for building and other purposes

will admit wane on one or two corners as defined in "good edge," in general instructions (400.30), or its equivalent on one face; boxed heart or firm

tight heart showing on one face; slight shake not

over }4> the length of the piece; pin, shot, and spot

wormholes, knots, split, and other defects that do

not impair the strength or prevent the use of the

piece for purposes of strength in its full size and

length. Season checks are no defect. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for hemlock and tamarack

timbers, February 1, 1927. RULES FOR GRADI5TG TIMBERS No. 1 common.

4 by 4 and 4 by 6 should be made of sound timber

containing reasonably sound knots that will not weaken the piece for its general use where 4 by 4 are

required. Wane on one or two corners extending

over one or two faces % inch for 3^ the length of pieces or its equivalent on four corners. 6 by 6 or 6 by 8 should be cut from sound stock. Reasonable sound knots red or black, round or horn

shape, wane on one or two corners extending over

face one inch for % the length of piece or its equivalent on all four corners. Season checks that will not weaken piece for the purpose where timber of

this size is used, admissible.

8 by 8 and larger should be cut from sound stock sound large round or horn-shaped knots well scattered, shell shake that does not weaken piece for the length on surface. Shake of a loose character should be considered by the inspector and limited to the location of the defect. Wane on all corners extending over face 2 inches for }/$ length of piece

or its equivalent full length of piece. No. 2 common.

4 by 4 and 4 by 6 sound timbers with unsound

defects, such as large unsound knots, round or hornshaped, wane on two corners extending over face

13^2 inches for 3^ length of piece or its equivalent on

all four corners, shell shake that does not weaken

piece admissible in No. 2 common 4 by 4. Mine and dock structural timber grade. 10 by 10 or larger timbers used in mines or dock

building should be of a useful grade and all manner

of defects admissible, such as wane, knots, whether

sound or unsound, shake of a serious character extending through piece on one end for 3^ length

of piece. All defects to be considered by inspectors with regard to the utility of the piece and

strength required for mining and dock purposes. Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for northern white and Norway pine, spruce, tamarack, April 15, 1925. 233
412.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 1 timbers. No. 1 timbers must be of a good, sound character,

but will admit of defects that do not impair the

strength of the piece.

On basis of 2 by 4, wane on edge is admissible, 3^ inch deep, for half the length, or a proportionate

amount for a shorter distance or on both edges.

I In any case one side and two edges should allow a

1 good nailing surface, it being understood, however,

that the wane shall in no case extend over 3^ the

side of the piece.

A few wormholes admissible. Stain is not considered a defect. Timbers and 3-inch plank admit proportionately

greater defects. No. 2 timbers. No. 2 will admit of large, coarse knots not necessarily sound, considerable wane, also shake, wormholes, streaks of red rot, slightly crooked pieces or other defects which weaken or impair the pieces to such an extent as to render them unfit for No. 1 grade. No. 8 timbers. No. 3 will admit a great deal of rot and all the

imperfections allowed in No. 1 and No. 2, but in a much more pronounced form, and any amount of tamarack.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Douglas fir timbers, Schedule M, 1925. Douglas fir mining timber. This grade shall consist of lumber free from rot, serious shakes, or splits. Will allow variations in sawing, sap stain, solid heart stain extending over

not more than 3^j of piece, large knots, a few small

scattered wormholes, and wane 3 inches on one

corner or its equivalent on two or more corners. Timber for remanufacturing purposes. This grade is intended to furnish timbers for remanufacturing purposes, and will admit pieces

whose strength value as a whole might be impaired

by some localized major defect. They will be furnished in square sizes and/or not

to exceed 4 inches out of square 10 by 10 inches to 24 by 24 inches and/or 24 by 28 inches progressing

by odd and/or even inches. No lengths shorter than 10 feet to be shipped, except an occasional 6% and/or 8 feet may be included. Will allow variations in sawing, a reasonable amount of slightly stained heart, slight amount of

fine, closed heart or wind shake if appearing on one

side only of the piece; straight shake or split in one end up to 3^ the length or equivalent in both ends. Pitch pockets, one pitch streak Y§ the width and

}/i the length of the piece or equivalent of smaller

ones. Tight closed pitch seams, any number of tight knots varying according to the size of the

piece and to a maximum of 3^ the width or thickness. Wane on two or more corners equivalent to 2 inches in 10 by 10 inches to 13 by 17 inches, 4 inches in 14 by 14 inches to 17 by 21 inches, 6 inches in 18 by 18 inches to 21 by 25 inches, 8 inches

in 22 by 22 inches to 24 by 28 inches. If wane on

'

one corner, only % the amount is allowed. Bright

or discolored sap, discoloration through exposure

to the elements and seasoning checks shall not be

considered defects. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for red cedar timber, August 1, 1925.

6 by 6 inches and larger, SIS, SlE, S2S, S4S, Y2 inch off each way. Common.

Shall be well manufactured.

Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing

and any number of the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Knots; splits; rotten streaks; rotten sap; wormholes, any number; wane 3 inches on one, or equivalent on two or more corners in a 10 by 10; larger or smaller sizes in proportion.

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for cypress timbers, June 15, 1925. No. 1 timbers. Shall be practically all heart, free from damaging

knots, shake, and splits. Slight peck shall not be considered a defect. Southern Pine Association, standard specification

for grades of long leaf and short leaf southern

yellow pine utility timbers, March, 1927. Merchantable timbers. May be specified dense.

All merchantable timbers shall be well manufactured and shall be free from defects, such as injurious

ring or round shakes and through shakes that extend

to the surface, unsound and loose knots, and knots

in groups that will materially impair the strength.

Seasoning checks and sap stain shall not be considered defects. Sizes under 9 inches on the largest dimension shall show two-thirds or more heart surface on one of the wide faces; sizes 9 inches and over on the largest

dimension shall show two-thirds or more heart on

both of the wide faces. When sticks are square, the face showing the most heart shall govern the

inspection on sizes under 9 inches and the two faces showing the most heart shall govern the inspection

when 9 inches and over. Heart showing the full length, even if not two-thirds of the area as above,

shall meet the requirements of this quality.

Wane not exceeding one-eighth of the dimension of the face and one-quarter of the length of the piece on

one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners on not to exceed 10 per cent of the pieces, shall be

admitted.

Square edge and sound timbers. May be specified dense. Unless otherwise specified, this grade will admit

any amount of sapwood.

Square edge and sound timbers shall be well manufactured and shall be free from defects, such as injur- ious ring or round shakes and through shakes that extend to the surface, unsound and loose knots, and

knots in groups that will materially impair the

strength. Seasoning checks and sap stain shall not be considered defects. 234
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 412.1

Wane not exceeding one-eighth of the dimension

of the face and one-fourth of the length of the

piece on one corner, or the equivalent on two or more corners on not to exceed 10 per cent of the

pieces, shall be admitted. No. 1 common timbers. Unless otherwise specified, this grade will admit

any amount of sapwood.

Common timbers, rough, 6 by 6 and larger, may be

yi inch scant in either or both of its dimensions,

shall be well manufactured, and may have 13^-inch wane on one corner one-third the length of the piece, or its equivalent on two or more corners, the wane

measured on its face. Timbers 10 by 10 in size may have 2-inch wane

as above; the larger sizes may have wane as above

in proportion to sizes. Common timbers may contain sound knots and

pith knots, provided that the diameter of any one

knot shall not exceed the following in size: 2-inch in 6 by 6 inch. 2^-inch in 6 by 8 to 8 by 10 inch.

3-inch in 10 by 10 to 10 by 12 inch. 33^-inch in 12 by 12 to 12 by 14 inch.

4-inch in 14 by 14 to 14 by 16 inch. 43^-inch in 16 by 16 to 16 by 18 inch. In sizes not mentioned, the diameter of knots

admissible will increase or decrease in proportion to the size of the timbers on same basis as above

specified. In determining the size of knots, mean or average

diameter shall be taken, or the equivalent of the above in grouped knots at any one point. Will admit shakes extending one-sixth the length

of the piece, round or ring shakes, unsound knots 13^

inches or less in diameter, a limited number of pin

wormholes well scattered, sap stain, and seasoning

checks. Unless otherwise specified, this grade will admit any amount of sap stain. Southern Pine Association, the Gulf Coast classi- fication of pitch pine, March 15, 1923. Merchantable sawn lumber.

Lengths.—16 feet and up; 2 per cent 14 and 15

feet allowed. Must show some heart on all four sides and be

free from unsound knots, loose knots, knot holes, grub wormholes, and rot. Firm red heart permissible, if not in excess of 15 per cent of the area

of the face on which it appears. Must be free from

shakes extending to the surface, but will permit wane as specified below and natural or growth

defects except as herein excluded. Wane that a

5^-inch hook will catch is not to be considered as wane. The sapwood on this quality is not limited

or restricted otherwise than that each of the four

faces of each piece shall show some heart. Sap

stain is no defect. Eleven inches and under. Will permit lj^-inch wane in widest place not to exceed }/$ the length of stick on one corner, or if on more than one corner, 3^ the length in the aggregate.

From 12 to 14 inches. Will permit 23^-inch wane in widest place not to exceed 3^ the length of stick on one corner, or if on more than one corner, % the length in the

aggregate.

Fifteen inches and up. Will permit 3K inches of wane in widest place not to exceed }/i the length of stick on one corner, or

if on more than one corner, }/$ the length in the

aggregate. West Coast lumbermen's Association, gradingrules

for Douglas fir and western red cedar, July 1, 1926. 6 by 6 inches and larger SIS, SlE, S2S, or S4S,

H inch off each way. Lengths, multiples of 2 feet. Structural timbers. Must be sound stock, well manufactured and close grained, as defined herein; angle of grain, not more

than 1 in 10 inches. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing and any number of the following

defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound, intergrown, or encased knots

or spike knots, measured as defined herein, approximately : 13^-inch on a 6-inch face. 13^-inch on an 8-inch face.

2-inch on a 10-inch face. 23^-inch on a 12-inch face. 2M-inch on a 14-inch face.

3-inch on a 16-inch face. Not over 33^-inch on wider faces. Shake on end of piece not more than T\ width of

piece, green; nor 3^5 > seasoned; seasoning checks; pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length; medium

sap stain; wane, 3^8 width of face. The size of a knot shall be taken as the average of the maximum and minimum dimensions. The size of a spike knot shall be taken as the average of the

length and maximum width. Cluster knots or knots in groups are not permitted. In this grade no distinction is made between intergrown and

encased knots. The width of a shake on the end of a piece shall be taken as the distance between lines parallel to the wide faces of the piece. No checks, or combinations

of checks with shakes, which would reduce the

strength to a greater extent than the allowable shake shall be permitted. Close grain shall mean an average on either one end or the other of a piece of not less than 6 nor more than 20 annual rings per inch, measured over

3 inches on a line located as follows: In boxed heart pieces, the line shall run from the

pith to the corner farthest from the pith. When

the least dimension is 6 inches or less, the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance of

1 inch from the pith. When the least dimension is more than 6 inches and not over 10 inches, the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance of 2 inches from the pith. When the least dimension is more than 10 inches, the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance of 3 inches from the pith. In side cut pieces, the line on which the measure- ment shall be made shall run at a right angle to the annual rings and the center of the 3-inch portion of the line shall be at the center of the end of the 235
412.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

piece. When the rings are very irregular, it may be

necessary to shift the line somewhat around the

piece to get a fair average for inspection, but the

distance from the pith to the beginning of the 3-inch

line in boxed heart pieces must not be changed.

Pieces averaging from 5 to 6 annual rings per inch

shall be accepted as the equivalent of close grain if having one-third or more summer wood.

Selected common timbers. Must be well manufactured. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing and any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and tight

knots, if not in clusters, approximately l^-inch

on a 6-inch face, 13^-inch on an 8-inch face, 2-inch on a 10-inch face, 3^-inch on a 12-inch face, 2

z/iinch on a 14-inch face, 3-inch on a 16-inch face, not

over 33^-inch on wider faces; pitch pockets, not

over 6 inches in length; medium sap stain, limited; seasoning checks; wane, 1 inch wide, }/q length on

one corner or equivalent, based on 10 by 10. No. 1 common timbers. Must be well manufactured. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing and any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and tight

knots, approximately 2-inch on a 6-inch face, 234- inch on an 8-inch face, 2^-inch on a 10-inch face, 3-inch on a 12-inch face, 33^-inch on a 14- inch face,

4-inch on a 16-inch face, not over 43^-inch on

wider faces; spike knots; pitch pockets; pitch

streaks; seasoning checks; medium sap stain, 25 per

cent of any face; firm heart stain, slight streak 34

length; wane 2-inch wide on one corner or equivalent, based on 10 by 10. No. 2 common timbers. May be Douglas fir or west coast hemlock or white fir. Will admit any number of the following

defects, equivalent defects or equivalent combinations of defects: Large, loose or decayed knots;

spike knots; shake or decay that does not impair

its utility for temporary work; wormholes; pitch

pockets; pitch streaks; sap stain; heart stain; wane,

3-inch wide on one corner or equivalent, based on

10 by 10. Mining.

Must be free from serious rot, shake, or splits. Will admit 15 per cent west coast hemlock. Will admit variation in sawing, and the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Large, loose knots; pitch pockets; sap stain; pitch; firm heart stain; a few well-scattered wormholes; wane 3 inches wide on one corner or equivalent. Stringers, girders, beams, etc.

Nominal thicknesses

(inches) Nominal

widths Lengths

5 and thicker

Inches

8 and wider. Multiples of 2 feet.

SIS, S1E, S2S, or S4S, Y2 inch off each way.

Structural stringers.

Must be sound stock, well manufactured, and

close grained as defined herein. Angle of grain in center half of length, not more than 1 inch in 15

inches. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing, and any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound, intergrown, or encased knots or spike knots measured as defined herein, approximately:

Width of face (inches)

Size of knot on

narrow face and edges of wide face

Sizejof knot on center line of wide face

5 Inches

1 Inches

6 1 8 IX

VA2%

2

l/i maximum.

2

1012

14 and wider . 3 maximum.

Pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length; seasoning checks; shake on end of piece not more than %

width of narrow face, green; nor }A] seasoned; wane not mere than }/% width of narrow face; bright

and/or medium stained sap not to exceed 34 the

thickness and 34 the width at widest point.

The diameter of a knot on the narrow or horizontal face shall be taken as the width of the knot

between lines parallel to the edges of the timber. On the wide or vertical face the smallest dimension

of a knot shall be taken. Knots on the edges of a wide face are limited to the same size as on the adjacent narrow face, but the size may increase pro- portionately from the edge to the size allowed at the center line. Knots toward the end of a piece are not so serious

as in the middle half of the piece, and an occasional knot 3^ inch larger than the size specified may be

permitted, if not more than 34 the length of the

piece from the end. Cluster knots or knots in groups

are not permitted. In this grade no distinction is made between intergrown and encased knots. The width of a shake on the end of a piece shall be taken as the distance between lines parallel to the wide face of the piece. No checks, or combinations

of checks with shakes, which would reduce the

strength to a greater extent than the allowable shake

shall be permitted. Close grain shall mean an aver- age on either one end or the other of a piece of not

less than 6 nor more than 20 annual rings per

inch, measured over 3 inches on a line located as

follows: In boxed heart pieces, the line shall run, from the pith to the corner farthest from the pith.

When the least dimension is 6 inches or less, the

3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance

of 1 inch from the pith. When the least dimension

is more than 6 inches and not over 10 inches, the

3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance

of 2 inches from the pith. When the least dimension is more than 10 inches, the 3-inch portion of the

line shall begin at a distance of 3 inches from the

pith. In side-cut pieces, the line on which the measure- ment shall be made shall run at a right angle to the 236
LTJMBEK FOE, BUILDING AND FACTORY USB 413.0

annual rings and the center of the 3-inch portion of the line shall be at the center of the end of the piece.

When the rings are very irregular, it may be

necessary to shift the line somewhat around the

piece to get a fair average for inspection, but the

distance from the pith to the beginning of the 3-inch

line must not be changed.

Selected common stringers.

Must be sound stock, well manufactured. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing, and any

number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and

tight knots or spike knots, if not in clusters, approximately : 134-inch on a 6-inch face. 1^-inch on an 8-inch face. 2-inch on a 10-inch face. 2*4-inch on a 12-inch face. Not over 23^-inch on wider faces. Seasoning checks; pitch pockets not over 6 inches

in length; medium sap stain, limited; wane, 1 inch

wide, % length, based on a 10-inch face. No. 1 common stringers.

Must be sound stock, well manufactured. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing, and any

number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and.

tight knots or spike knots, approximately:

13^-inch on a 6-inch face. 2-inch on an 8-inch face. 23^-inch on a 10-inch face.

3-inch on a 12-inch face. 33^-inch on a 14-inch face. Not over 4-inch on wider faces. Seasoning checks; pin wormholes, limited; pitch

pockets; pitch streaks; medium sap stain, 25 per

cent of any face; firm heart stain, 10 per cent of any

face; wane, 2 inches wide on one corner, or equivalent based on a 10-inch face. Western red cedar. Timbers, 6 by 6 inches and larger, SIS, S1E, S2S,

S4S, y?, inch off each way. Common dimension shall be well manufactured.

Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing and

any number of the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Knots; splits; rotten streaks; rotten sap; wormholes,

any number; wane, 3 inches on one, or equivalent on two or more corners, in a 10 by 10; larger or

smaller sizes in proportion. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for timbers, July 1, 1925. The grading rules for timbers are the same as

this association's grading rules for dimensions.

(See 402.43.) Larch and fir. Timbers S1S1E or S4S

4 by 4 to 3^ by 3^g. 4 by 6 to ZY% by

6 by 6 to 5V8 by 5^.

6 by 8 to 5y8 by 7^.

8 by 8 to 73^ by 7^.

412.2 BRIDGES.

(See No. 412.0.) 413. SHOP OR FACTORY LUMBER.

413.0 GENERAL ITEMS.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. SOFTWOOD FACTORY AND SHOP LUMBER

General Provisions The grade of factory lumber shall be determined

by the percentage of the area of each board or plank available in cuttings of specified or given

minimum sizes and qualities.

The grade of softwood factory boards or plank,

or shop lumber, shall be determined from the poor

face, although the quality of both sides of each cut- ting must be considered. When lumber is crooked, bowed, cupped, or twisted the cuttings must be so laid out as to be

fiat and straight along the edges.

Board measurement shall be used in measuring

factory lumber. When measured with a board rule, pieces measuring to the even half foot shall be

alternate!}7 counted as of the next higher and the next lower surface foot; fractions below the half foot shall be dropped, and fractions above the half foot shall be counted as of the next higher foot. To

determine the board foot contents of material

thicker than 1 inch, the surface measure should be

multiplied by the nominal thickness in inches and

fractions of an inch. The board measurement of dressed factory lumber of standard and extra-standard size shall be

based upon the corresponding standard dimensions

of rough green lumber.

SIZES DRESSED THICKNESSES

The following thicknesses of factory lumber shall be considered standard. All other thicknesses

shall be considered special.

Size, board measure in inches

Finished thicknesses, SIS or S2S, at commercially dry ship- ping weight and

moisture content

Standard Extra- standard

1 Inches

2532

•L 32 mHi

Inches

ft 1M

iy2 22}i 2ys 2V2 2Vs

26/8

36/8 3

4 Note.—It is to be understood that any association, which publishes and administers rules for factory lumber under the American Lumber Standards, will not be required to furnish 1-inch factory number in both the standard and extra-standard thicknesses. 237
413.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

WIDTHS

Standard widths shall be 5 inches and over; factory lumber is usually shipped in random widths,

though specified widths may be shipped. Five- inch widths must be full size in the rough dry condition. LENGTHS

Standard lengths shall be 6 feet and over in multiples of 1 foot.

Factory Plank In determining the percentage of door cuttings, consideration must be given to the fact that planks

are to be ripped full length before crosscutting, in such manner as will yield the highest grade and

largest percentage of door cuttings, except in such

cases where planks will yield a higher value by

first being crosscut for rails. In instances where

stock is crosscut for rails and some of the stock so obtained contains stiles or muntins or top rails, which can be obtained by ripping this crosscut

stock, the door cuttings so obtained may be figured

in when determining percentages.

Basic grade classifications for softwood factory plank

Nos. 1 and 2 clear factory- Lumber, practically clear in wide sizes, to contain not less than 85 per cent of No. 1 door

cuttings, not including pieces with over two muntins, or muntins only.

FACTORY PLANK

Factory lumber

graded with ref- erence to its use

for doors, sash, and other cuttings.

FACTORY CLEARS Upper grades of factory plank,

containing a high percentage

of best -quality

cuttings.

SHOP Lower grades of factory plank

yielding smaller percentages in smaller and

lower quality

cuttings.

No. 3 clear factory—Lumber

containing not less than 70 per cent of No. 1 door cuttings, not including pieces with over two muntins, or muntins only. No. 1 shop—Lumber of high

quality factory grade containing not less than 50 per

cent of No. 1 door cuttings, allowing, if necessary, one No. 2 stile in any piece, but no pieces with over two mintins, or muntins only. No. 2 shop.—Lumber contain- ing not less than 25 per cent

of No. 1 door cuttings, or 40 per cent No. 2 door cuttings,

or per cent of mixed door

cuttings. No. 3 shop—Lumber of a shop

type below the grade of No. 2 shop and better than box

lumber. QUALITY OF CUTTINGS

In determining the grades of factory plank two

grades of cuttings shall be recognized. These shall be known as No. 1 and No. 2 cuttings and shall conform to the following rules: No. 1 cuttings shall be free from defects on both

sides. No restrictions shall be made upon bright

sapwood.

No. 2 cuttings shall admit any one of the following

defects:

Light blue stain on one side, not larger in extent than one-half the

area of the side. Medium brown kiln or heart stain covering half the surface on

one face, or a greater area of lighter stain, or a proportionate amount

on two sides. A small, sound and tight knot which does not exceed five-eights of an inch in diameter.

A small pitch pocket not over one- eighth of an inch wide nor over

2 inches long in west coast woods and not over one-eighth of an inch wide nor over 1 inch long in western pine and California pine. One or more small season checks whose combined length does not

exceed 8 inches. Light pitch or small pitch streaks that do not form a pronounced

defect. Slightly torn grain on one side. SIZES OF CUTTINGS

Stiles shall be 5 and 6 inches wide by 6 feet 8 inches

to 7 feet 6 inches long. They may be either No. 1 or No. 2 in quality.

Bottom rails shall be 9 and 10 inches wide by 2

feet 4 inches to 3 feet long. They may be either No.

1 or No. 2 in quality.

Muntins shall be 5 and 6 inches wide by 3 feet 6

inches to 4 feet long. They may be either No. 1 or No. 2 in quality.

Top rails shall be 5 and 6 inches wide by 2 feet 4

inches to 3 feet long. They must be of No. 1 cut- ting quality, but shall be considered as No. 2 cuttings.

Sash cuttings shall be 2^ and 33^ inches in width

by 28 inches and over in length. In computing the area of cuttings in each piece of factory plank the sizes listed below shall be used. After each cutting size is shown the exact surface area in square feet. For convenience in computing,

the figures shown on the right, representing the area

to the nearest one-fourth square foot, shall be used. STILES

Size of cutting in board or plank

5 inches by 6 feet 8 inches

5 inches by 6 feet 10 inches

5 inches by 7 feet 5 inches by 7 feet 2 inches

5 inches by 7 feet 4 inches

5 inches by 7 feet 6 inches

6 inches by 6 feet 8 inches.

6 inches by 6 feet 10 inches

6 inches by 7 feet

6 inches by 7 feet 2 inches

6 inches by 7 feet 4 inches

6 inches by 7 feet 6 inchesBOTTOM RAILS

9 inches by 2 feet 4 inches

9 inches by 2 feet 6 inches

9 inches by 2 feet 8 inches

9 inches by 2 feet 10 inches

9 inches by 3 feet 10 inches by 2 feet 4 inches

10 inches by 2 feet 6 inches

10 inches by 2 feet 8 inches

10 inches by 2 feet 10 inches

10 inches by 3 feet MUNTINS

5 inches by 3 feet 6 inche

5 inches by 3 feet 8 inches

5 inches by 3 feet 10 inches

5 inches by 4 feet. 6 inches by 3 feet 6 inches

6 inches by 3 feet 8 inches

6 inches by 3 feet 10 inches inches by 4 feet

Actual

area in square

feet

Nominal

area to be used

in appli- cation of grading

rules 2.78

2. 85

2. 92 2.99 3.06

3. 13 1

3. 33

3. 42 3.50

| m 3.58

3. 67

3. 75 } *K

22H

2H

2H

1.46 I

1.53 i

1.60 J 1.67 !) 1.75 J

1.83 ! 1.92 »

2.0 / 238
LUMBER FOE BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.0

TOP RAILS

Size of cutting in board or plank

Actual

area in square

feet

5 inches by 2 feet 4 inches.

5 inches by 2 feet 6 inches.

5 inches by 2 feet 8 inches.

5 inches by 2 feet 10 inches

5 inches by 3 feet 6 inches by 2 feet 4 inches.

6 inches by 2 feet 6 inches.

6 inches by 2 feet 8 inches.

6 inches by 2 feet 10 inches

6 inches by 3 feet

0. 97 1.04

1. 11

1. 18 1.25 L 17

1. 25

1. 33 1.42

1. 50

Nominal

area to be used

in appli- cation of grading

rules

-

1 2

Shop Lumber Basic grade classifications for softwood shop lumber

SHOP LUMBEE

Shop lumber

graded for cut- tings of mini- mum and lar- ger sizes with

reference to its use for general cut-up purposes.

FOR SHOP LUMBER 1 EN'CH IN THICKNESS 1 Select Lumber to contain not

less than 70 per cent of

(a) and/or (b) cuttings. Shop Lumber to contain not

less than 50 per cent of

(a) and/or (6) cuttings.

FOR SHOP LUMBER OF ALL THICKNESSES 2 No. 1 shop—Lumber to contain Dot less than 60 per cent of (a) and/or

(6) cuttings. No. 2 shop—Lumber to contain not less than 40 per cent of (o) and/or

(6) cuttings. Note—The Central Committee on Lumber Standards, on June

16, 1927, unanimously approved the following modification and

enlargement of the basic grade classification for softwood shop

lumber: FOR SHOP LUMBER OF ALL

THICKNESSES 2

SHOP LUMBER

Shop lumber

graded for cuttings of minimum and

larger sizes, or< for permissible defects, with reference

to its use for general cut-up

purposes.

FOR SHOP LUMBER

1 INCH IN THICK- NESS 1Select Lumber to contain not less than 70 per

cent of (a) and/or

(6) cuttings.

Shop Lumber to contain not less than 50 per

cent of (a) and/or

(b) cuttings.

Tank and boat stock—Lumber admitting sound defects that do not impair the

usefulness of each piece for the use intended.

Firsts and seconds—Lumber

of C select or better Quality on the reverse side, suitable

for remanufacture into products requiring both

faces of good quality. Selects—Lumber of C select or better quality on the face

side, suitable for remanufacture into products re- quiring one face of good

quality. No. 1 shop—Lumber to contain not less than 60 per

cent of (a) and/or (b) cuttings. No. 2 shop—Lumber to contain not less than 40 per

cent of (a) and/or (5) cuttings. Box—Lumber below the

grade of No. 2 shop, to contain not less than 66% per

cent sound cuttings not less than 3 inches wide and 18 inches long.

1 For northern, western, and California pine, and west coast woods.

2 For cypress, redwood, and North Carolina pine. In determining the grades of either shop or cut- up lumber two grades and sizes of cuttings shall be

recognized and shall conform to the following rules: SIZES OF CUTTINGS

(a) Cuttings shall be 93^ inches wide or wider

by 18 inches long or longer.

(o) Cuttings shall be 5 inches wide or wider by

3 feet long or longer.

QUALITY OF CUTTINGS

Cuttings less than 3 feet long shall be free from

all defects on both sides. No restriction need be

made upon bright sapwood.

(a) Cuttings 3 feet long or longer and (6) cuttings

shall have a C select or better face in all softwoods

except Douglas fir, Sitka spruce, and west coast hemlock, where the face of the cuttings shall be

equal to B or better finish. American Railway Engineering Association, revi- sion of manual, bulletin 293, January, 1927. Wooden Bridges and Trestles. The general provisions, sizes, grade classifica- tions, quality and size of cuttings for softwood fac- tory lumber, and the grade classifications and size and quality cuttings for softwood shop lumber are

identical with the American Lumber Standards, No. 413.0, the finished thickness for 1-inch boards

is extra standard or ff inches. California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

shop lumber, April, 1927. The sizes of shop lumber are the same as the

American Lumber Standard sizes 413.0, softwood

factory, and shop lumber. The finished thickness

for 1-inch boards is extra standard, or |4.

The grades of shop lumber are as follows: Grades. Nos. 1 and 2 clear V. G. pattern lumber; Nos. 1 and

2 clear F. G. pattern lumber; and Xo. 1 shop. Nos. 1 and 2 clear V. G. pattern lumber shah be

soft selected stock, with vertical grain for 70 per

cent or more of its face and not less than 12 rings

of annual growth per inch, and strictly clear and

free from hard streaks or other defects that will render it unfit for selected pattern lumber for the

full length of the piece. Nos. 1 and 2 clear F. G. pattern lumber shall be

of the same quality as Nos. 1 and 2 clear V. G. pattern

lumber, but will allow any amount of flat grain stock and rings of annual growth. No. 1 shop shall contain not less than 60 per cent

of cuttings 5 inches and wider by 3 feet and longer.

Any such cutting will admit bright, sound sapwood

and, in addition, any one of the following defects: Small surface check; sound tight bird's-eye; slight

roughness in dressing; sound and tight pin knot;

light stain, 5 per cent of area. Federal Specifications Eoard, proposed revision to supersede softwood parts of F. S. B. No. 24, master

specification for lumber, softwood, yard and factory, 1927. (See 411.0.) Western Pine Manufacturers Association," rules for the grading of Pondosa pine, Idaho white pine, larch and fir, white fir, cedar, and spruce, July 1," 1925. Standard sizes. Shop and factory

1 S2S to 25/32. S2S to 2%.

134 S2S to 1 5/32. 23^ S2S to 2%.

\y2 S2S to 1 13/32. 3 S2S to 2%.

2 S2S to 1 26/32. 4 S2S to 3M239
413.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

413.1 TANK STOCK.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0 for softwood factory and shop lumber.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

tank stock, April, 1927. Grades of tank stock are based on a piece 8 inches wide by 12 inches long, or a piece having 8 square

feet surface measure; on this basis larger or smaller

pieces will admit a proportionate number of defects. Grades. Clear heart (Redwood Association grade) and A

(American Standard Redwood grade).

Lengths.

Standard lengths shall be the same as for finish, 411.43. Clear heart tank stock shall be well manufactured

and free from all sapwood. It will admit sound,

tight bird's-eye, sound and tight pin or small knots which show on one face only and any other defects on the edges which will dress off in working.

A tank stock will admit such defects as are not admitted in clear heart and which do not render it unfit for the purpose intended. It will admit sap- wood on one edge, not extending to the face of the

piece; sound tight bird's-eye; sound and tight pin

or small knots; light stain; small crook.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for tank stock, May 1, 1926. Tank stock shall be graded with the view of sup- plying stock that can be used for the construction of water tanks. Each piece shall be comparatively straight and

practically free from wane.

All defects natural to common lumber are admissible in this grade provided they do not destroy the

usefulness of the piece for tank purposes.

Particular care should be exercised in selecting the

stock so that there may be no defects on the edges

that would lead to leakage in preparation of the grooves or in smoothing for close fitting. A sound-edge knot shall not be considered a defect provided it does not extend through more than half the thickness.

Note.—Tank stock should be of the sizes carried in thick common

lumber. When tank stock of a particular appearance is wanted,

it can be ordered selected from No. 1, No. 2, or No. 3 common grades; otherwise it will be selected without regard to appearance. National Hardwood lumber Association, grading

rules for tank stock, January, 1927. Tank {when specified). Widths.—5 inches and over. Lengths.—8 feet and over. Sound defects that do not damage the piece for tank purposes will be admitted.

Pieces 5 inches wide must be free from sapwood.

Pieces 6 inches and over wide may have 1 inch of sound sapwood in the aggregate not exceeding half the thickness of the piece.

Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for tank stock, April 15, 1925. Tank stock shall be of dimension sizes, square- edged, practically free from wane and shake, and

may have any number of sound, water-tight knots White sap is no defect. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for tank stock, June 15, 1925. Tank and boat stock. Thickness.—1, 1}£, V/2 , 2, 2}4, 3, and 4 inches. Width.—Shall be random widths, 5 inches and

over wide.

Length.—8 feet and longer. Shall be graded from the poorer side. Shall be

free from sap. Sound knots that do not impair the

usefulness of the piece for tank or boat purposes

will be admitted. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for tank stock, July 1, 1926. Tank stock, rough green. Defects based on 2 by 6 inches by 12 feet. Tank stock, F. G. and/or V. G. Surfaced 34 inch less in thickness than nominal. Surfaced 3^2 inch less in width than nominal. Must

be well manufactured to full sizes ordered. Edges

must not contain defects that will prevent a watertight joint when worked. Two-inch stock, practically no sap admitted; 3-inch and thicker, 6-inch and

wider, bright sap 25 per cent of face, not to exceed

3/i inch on edges. Will admit one of the following

defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Two small (4-inch) pitch pockets,

neither through; 2 small sound and tight knots,

neither through; 1 additional pitch pocket or knot

for each 2 additional inches in width. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading

rules for tank stock, July 1, 1925. Tank stock shall be graded with the view of supplying a stock that can be used entirely for the

construction of water tanks. Each piece shall be practically straight and

practically free from wane.

All defects natural to common lumber are admissible in this grade provided they do not destroy the

usefulness of the piece for tank purposes.

Particular care should be exercised in selecting the stock so that there may be no defects on the

edges that would lead to leakage in preparation of the groove or in smoothing for close fitting. A sound edge knot shall not be considered a

defect provided it does not extend through more

than half the thickness.

Note.—Tank stock should be of the sizes carried in thick common

lumber. When tank stock of a particular appearance is wanted,

it can be ordered selected from No. 1, No. 2, or No. 3 common grades; otherwise it will be graded without regard to appearance. 240
LUMBER FOE BUILDING AND FACTORY USE

413.2 CAR STOCK.

413.20 General Items.

American Railway Association, Mechanical Division, specifications for lumber, 1910. Description of various woods used by railroad companies for car and locomotive lumber. Ash To cover white, black, blue, green, and red ash. Basswood To cover linden, linn, lind, or lime tree. Beech To cover red and white beech

Birch To cover red, white, yellow,

and black birch. Buckeye To cover wood from horse- chestnut tree. Butternut To cover wood from tree of that name, also known as white walnut. Cherry To cover sweet, sour, red, black, and wild cherry.

Chestnut To cover wood from tree of that name. Cottonwood To cover wood from tree of that name. (Do not confuse with popple or poplar.) Cypress To cover red, gulf, yellow,

and east coast cypress, also known as bald cypress. Elm, soft To cover white, water, gray,

red, or slippery and

winged elm. Elm, rock To cover rock or cork elm. Douglas fir To cover yellow, red, western Washington, Oregon,

Puget Sound fir or pine,

northwest and west coast

fir. Gum To cover red gum, sweet gum, or satin walnut. Hemlock To cover southern and east- ern hemlock; that is, hemlock from all States east of and including Minnesota. Western hemlock To cover hemlock from

Pacific coast. Hickory To cover shellbark, kingnut,

mockernut, pignut, black,

shagbark, and butternut. Western larch To cover the species of larch

or tamarack from the Rocky Mountain and Pacific coast regions.

Maple, soft To cover soft and white

maple.

Maple, hard To cover hard, red, rock,

and sugar maple.

White oak To cover white, burr, or mossy cup, rock, post

or iron, overcup, swamp

post, live chestnut or tan

bark, yellow or chinquapin, and basket or cow oak.

413.20

Red oak To cover red, pin, black, water, willow, Spanish,

scarlet, turkey, black

jack or barn, and shingle

or laurel oak. Pecan To cover wood from tree of that name.

Southern yellow pine__ To cover longleaf and shortleaf yellow pine grown in the southern States. White pine To cover wood from tree of that name grown in Maine, Michigan, Wisconsin, Minnesota, and

Canada.

Norway pine To cover Norway or red

pine grown in Michigan,

Minnesota, Wisconsin,

and Canada.

Idaho white pine To cover variety of white

pine grown in western Montana, northern Idaho,

and eastern Washington. Western pine To cover timber known as white pine grown in Ari- zona, California, New

Mexico, Colorado, Oregon, and Washington;

sometimes known as west- ern yellow or ponderosa

pine, or California white

pine or western white

pine.

Poplar To cover wood from the

tulip tree, otherwise known as whitewood, yellow poplar and canary wood.

Redwood To cover wood from tree of that name.

Spruce To cover eastern spruce; that is, the spruce timber

coming from points east

of and including Minnesota and Canada, covering white, red, and black

spruce. Western spruce To cover the spruce timber

from the Pacific coast. Sycamore To cover wood from tree of that name, otherwise known as buttonwood.

Tamarack To cover tamarack or east- ern tamarack, grown in States east of and includ- ing Minnesota.

Tupelo To cover tupelo gum and

bay poplar.

Walnut To cover black walnut (for white walnut, see butternut). In 1916 the following schedule of lumber, indicat- ing the kind and grade that should be used in each

part, was adopted.

241
413.20 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Schedule of lumber Schedule of lumber—Continued

Detail part

Battens, door..

,

Bolsters, truck.

Bolsters, body-. Beams, bumper

Beams, needle,

Belt rail

Braces.ICard—

ber. Boards for solid coke racks. Boards, deck,

for stock cars. Carline Decking or

flooring.

Door header... Door, grain

Door, side. Draft timbers. Dust guards...

Fascia.

Framing, car... Frame for box

car side door. Lining: Refrigerator ana box car without

siding. Refrigerator and box car with siding. Lagging

Plank:

Side End.

Spring

Platform.. Truss

Roofing:

Single board and outside double

board.

Double board

inside. R u n n n g

boards. Ridge pole Rack, slats for coke.

Kind of lumber

/White pine

\ Yellow pine... Oak

....do

....do

....do \Longleaf pine. (Oak

(Yellow pine...

White pine.

f Cypress

Yellow pine. Cypress Yellow fir... Oak

Basswood... White pine. Cypress.

Fir Poplar (Oak

{Fir [Yellow pine. /Oak

\Yellow pine. Yellow pine- Fir Cypress Yellow pine.

Fir Cypress White pine.. Yellow pine. fOak

\ Yellow pine- Oak .—do. .—do

White pine Norway pineEastern spruce- Yellow pine.. . Fir Cypress— White pine Norway pine... Eastern spruce- Yellow pine

Fir Cypress /Yellow pine

\ White pine /Oak

(Yellow pine /Oak

\Yellow pine

Grade (M. C. B. specifications)

Yellow pine

Oak....

Poplar.

/Oak

\ Yellow pine... — /Oak

(Yellow pine /Oak

\ Yellow pine Yellow pine and oak

(open cars)

Yellow pine (box cars). Yellow fir Yellow pine Oak

Yellow fir May be made of any

kind of wood suffi- ciently sound to pre- vent leakage of grain. Only 10 per cent in any shipment to be

less than 6 inches wide.

No. 1 common.

Car timber. Do. Do.

Do. Do. No. 1, common heart, new. No. 1, common heart,

repairs. Car timber. No. 1, common.

C. and better. Car timber. Car timber. No.l, common heart. Car timber. No. 1, common heart. All heart and heart face, car timber. Heart face and No. 1 common.

Edge grain No. 1, common heart. Car timber.

B. and better, new. No. 1, common, repairs. C. and better. Car timbers. B. and better, new.

C. and better, new. No. 1, common, repairs. C. and better. No. 2, clear and better,

fiat grain. No. 2. Car timber. No. 2 clear and better,

. edge and flat grain. Car timber. No. 1 common heart. /B. and better. (No. 1, common.

No. 2, clear and better,

fiat grain. C. and better. No. 1, common.

No. 3, clear. Car lining. No. 1, common.

No. 1, common heart. Car timber. No. 1, common heart. Car timber. Do.

Do.

No. 1 common.

B. and better. No. 2, clear and better,

fiat grain. C . and better No. 3 common.

No. 1 common.

No. 3, clear. Car lining. No. 1, common.

B. and better. Car timber. No. 1, common heart. Car timber.

Detail part Kind of lumber Grade

' -vi . \^ . r> . >j*Ht j uG8& innsj

Siding

[Yellow pine

liir..

/B. and better. (No. 1, common.

No. 2, clear and better,

flat grain. C and better.

Sills: Center

IntermediateSide

Cypress.

(Poplar.

1 Yellow pine..

No. 2.

Heart face. No. 2, clear and better, edge grain. Car timber. No. 1. Car timber.

Center filling. bailing Deck..

Stakes

|Fir /Oak

Steps, brake

(Yellow pine Oak...

413.21 Fir Car Stock.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation, No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0. American Railway Association, Mechanical Division, specifications for lumber, 1910. CLASSIFICATION AND GRADING RULES FOR DOUGLAS FIR CAR AND LOCOMOTIVE MATERIAL

1. The term "Douglas fir" will cover the timber

known likewise as yellow, red, western, Washington,

Oregon, or Puget Sound fir or pine, norwest and

west coast fir. 2. Douglas fir lumber shall be graded and classi- fied according to the following rules and specifi- cations as to quality, and dressed stock shall con- form to the subjoined table of standard sizes, except

where otherwise expressly stipulated between binT er and seller.

3. Recognized defects in Douglas fir are knots,

knot holes, splits, checks, wane, rot, rotten streaks, wormholes, dog or picaroon holes, pitch seams,

shake, pitch pockets, chipped grain, torn grain, loose grain, solid pitch, stained heart, sap stain and

imperfect manufacture.

Knots.

4. Knots shall be classified as pin, small, standard

and large, as to size; round and spike as to form, and

tight, loose and rotten, as to quality.

5. A pin knot is tight and not over 3^ inch in diameter.

6. A small knot is tight and not over % inch in diameter.

7. A standard knot is tight and not over 13^

inches in diameter.

8. A large knot is tight and any size over 13^

inches in diameter.

9. A round knot is oval or circular in form.

10. A spike knot is one sawn in a lengthwise

direction. The mean or average diameter of knots shall be

considered in applying and construing these rules.

11. A tight knot or sound knot is one solid across

its face, is as hard as the wood it is in, and is so

fixed by growth or position that it will retain its place in the piece.

242
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.21

12. A loose knot is one not held firmly in place by

growth of position.

13. A rotten knot is one not as hard as the wood

it is in. Pitch.

14. Pitch pockets are openings between the grain

of the wood, containing more or less pitch and

surrounded by sound grain wood; they shall be

classified as small, standard, and large pitch pockets.

15. A small pitch pocket is one not over }/§ of an

inch wide.

16. A standard pitch pocket is one not over % of an inch wide, or 3 inches in length.

17. A large pitch pocket is one over % of an inch wide or over 3 inches in length.

18. A pitch shake or seam is a clearly defined opening between the grain of the wood and may be

either filled with granulated pitch or not, but in either case is considered a defect in any of the grades

hereinafter described.

19. A pitch streak is a well-defined accumulation

of pitch at one point in the piece, and when not

sufficient to develop a well-defined streak, or where

fiber between grains is not saturated with pitch it shall not be considered a defect.

20. A small pitch streak shall be equivalent to not over one-twelfth the width and one-sixth the

length of the piece it is in. 21. A standard pitch streak shall be eqivalent to not over one-sixth the width and one-third of the

length of the piece it is in. Wane.

22. Wane is bark, or the lack of wood, from any

cause on edge.

Sap.

23. Bright sap shall not be considered a defect in any of the grades provided for and described in these rules, except where stipulated.

24. Sap stain shall not be considered a defect, except as provided herein.

25. Discoloration of the heart of the wood, or stained heart, must not be confounded with rot or rotten streaks. The presence of rot is indicated by

decided softness of the wood where it is discolored

or by small white spots resembling pin wormholes.

Miscellaneous.

26. Defects in rough stock caused by improper

manufacture and drying will reduce grade, unless they can be removed in dressing such stock to standard sizes. 27. All stock, except car sills and framing, shall be inspected on the face side to determine the grade.

Stock surfaced one side, the dressed surface shall be

considered the face side. Stock rough or dressed two sides, the best side shall be considered the face, but the reverse side of all such stock shall not be more than one grade lower.

28. Chipped grain consists in a part of the sur- face being chipped or broken out in small particles

below the line of the cut, and as usually found, should not be classed as torn grain and shall be

considered a defect only when it unfits the piece for use intended.

29. Torn grain consists of a part of the wood

being torn out in dressing. It occurs around knots

and curly places, and is of four distinct characters—slight, medium, heavy, and deep.

30. Slight torn grain shall not exceed of an

inch in depth; medium ^ of an inch, and heavy %

of an inch. Any torn grain heavier than y% of an

inch shall be termed deep.

31. Loosened grain consists in a point of one grain

being torn loose from the next grain. It occurs on

the heart side of the piece and is a serious defect, especially in flooring. 32. The grade of all regular stock shall be deter- mined by the number, character, and position of the

defects visible in any piece. The enumerated

defects herein described admissible in any grade

are intended to be descriptive of the coarsest piece

such grades may contain, but the average quality

of the grade shall be midway between the highest

and the lowest pieces allowed in the grade.

33. Lumber and timber sawed for specific purposes must be inspected with a view to its adaptability for the use intended.

34. All dressed stock shall be measured strip count, viz, full size of rough material necessarily

used in its manufacture.

35. Equivalent means equal, and in construing

and applying these rules, the defects allowed,

whether specified or not, are understood to be

equivalent in damaging effect to those mentioned

applying to stock under consideration.

36. Lumber must be accepted on grade in the form in which it was shipped. Any subsequent

change in manufacture or millwork will prohibit an

inspection for the adjustment of claims, except with

the consent of all parties interested.

37. The foregoing general observation shall apply

to and govern the application of the following rules. The rules referred to under sections 38, 39, and

40 govern 4 or 6 inch strips and are intended to cover strips used for car siding, car roofing, and

car lining.

The term "edge grain" is here used as synony- mous with vertical grain, rift-sawn, or quarter-sawed.

The term "flat grain"is synonymous with slash grain

or plain sawed.

No. 2 clear and better edge grain.

38. Material of this grade shall be well manufactured, with angle of grain not less than 45°. This stock shall be kiln dried and practically free from all defects, but will admit of bright sap on the

face; not exceeding three small close pitch pockets not over 2 inches long, one pin knot, slight roughness in dressing, but not a serious combination of these defects. No. 2 clear and better flat grain.

39. Material of this grade shall be well manufactured. The stock shall be kiln dried and practically

free from all defects, but will admit of bright sap on

the face; not exceeding three small close pitch

pockets not over 2 inches long, one pin knot, slight

roughness in dressing, but not a serious combination of these defects, 243
413.21 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 3 clear. 40. Material of this grade shall be sound common

lumber and will admit of roughness in dressing,

bright sap, and also may contain 5 pin, 3 small and 1 standard knot, and 5 pitch pockets in any continu- ous 5 feet of length of the piece; or any combination

of tight knots or pitch pockets equivalent to those mentioned above. This grade particularly refers to stock used for inside lining of freight cars. Standard car decking or flooring. 41. Material of this grade shall be well manufactured from sound, live timber and shall be free from

splits, shakes, rot, bark or waney edges, and un- sound knots, or pitch pockets, pitch seams, or large knots which would weaken the piece for the use intended. This grade will admit of sound knots not to exceed one-third width of the piece, provided

they are not in clusters, and sap. Common car sills and framing.

42. Material of this grade shall be well manufactured from sound, live timber, sawed full size to

sizes ordered and free from rot, unsound knots, cross

giain, bark or waney edges or shakes, but will admit

of sap and any number of sound knots, provided

they are not in clusters, and do not exceed one-third width of piece; pitch pockets or pitch seams that would not weaken the piece for the purpose intended.

43. Sizes up to 6 inches in width shall measure

full when green, and not more than 3^-inch scant when dry or part dry. Sizes 6 to 12 inches in width

shall measure full when green and not more than

34-inch scant when dry or part dry. Sizes 12 to 16 inches in width shall measure full when green and not more than ^-inch scant when dry or part

dry. Unless otherwise specified, 34 inch shall be

allowed for each side which is to be dressed. In

pieces 3 by 6 inches and under when ordered in lengths exceeding 30 feet, sound knots shall not

exceed one-fourth the width of the face through which

they project, and the grain shall not cross suffi- ciently to impair the strength.

44. Standard lengths: Car siding.—8, 9, 10, and 12 feet or multiples.

Car roofing.—5 feet or multiples.

Car lining.—8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 feet or multiples.

Car decking.—9 and 10 feet or multiples.

All orders shall be shipped in standard lengths, unless otherwise specified, but no lengths of either car siding, lining, or roofing shall be shipped, except

in the lengths specified or multiples thereof. Those

who do not desire stock shipped in multiple lengths should so specify. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for fir stock, July 1, 1926. RAILWAY AND CAR MATERIAL Car sills, ridge poles, purlins, plates, gondola sides, framing, carlines, fascias, running boards, slats, etc., for car construction.

Sizes and lengths as ordered. Surfaced, faces nar- rower than 8 inches, z/% inch off; faces 8 inches and

wider, 3^2 inch off. Running boards ordered 818

shall be graded from the rough face. Selected common. Must be sound stock, well manufactured. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing, and any

number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and

tight knots or spike knots, if not in clusters, approximately : 134-inch on 4 to 6 inch faces. 13^-inch on an 8-inch face. lM-inch on a 10-inch face. 2-inch on a 12-inch face. Not over 23^ inch on wider faces. Seasoning checks; pitch pockets not over 6 inches

in length; heavy torn grain; medium sap stain. No. 1 common. Must be sound stock, well manufactured. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing, and

any number of the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and tight knots or spike knots, if not in

clusters, approximately:

124-inch on 4 to 6 inch faces.

2-inch on an 8-inch face. 23^-inch on a 10-inch face.

3-inch on a 12-inch face. Not over 33^-inch on wider faces. Loose knots 3^ the maximum diameter of allowable tight knots; seasoning checks; short splits, equal in length to width of piece; pin wormholes,

limited; pitch pockets; pitch streaks; torn grain;

medium sap stain; firm heart stain, 10 per cent of any face; wane, 34 thickness, 34 width, 3^ length

of piece. Structural grade.

Must be sound stock, well manufactured, and

close grained as defined herein; angle of grain, not more than 1 inch in 12 inches. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing, and any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound, intergrown, or encased knots or spike knots, measured as defined

herein approxrmately

Width of face (inches)

Sizes of knots: (a) on narrowfaces; (b) on

edges of wide

faces

Sizes of knots on center lines of wide faces

2 Inches

y.y8 1iu

2

l 2H

Inches

3 —- 1iH

22y2 2%

3Zli

\ 4

4

568...

10

12

14

16 -

1 Maximum.

Shake on end of piece not more than 34 width of narrow face, green; nor 3^ seasoned; seasoning

244
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.21

checks; pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length; torn grain; medium sap stain; wane, 3^8 thickness, 3^ width, y& length of piece.

The size of a knot shall be taken as the average

of the maximum and minimum dimensions. The

size of a spike knot shall be taken as the average of the length and maximum width. The sizes of knots on wide faces may increase proportionately

from the edges to the sizes allowed at the center

line. Cluster knots or knots in groups are not per- mitted. In this grade no distinction is made

between intergrown and encased knots. The width of a shake on the end of a piece shall be taken as the distance between lines parallel to the wide faces of the piece. No checks, or combinations of checks with shakes, which would

reduce the strength to a greater extent than the

allowable shake, shall be permitted.

Close grain shall mean an average on either one end or the other of a piece of not less than 6 nor more than 20 annual rings per inch, measured over

3 inches on a line located as follows: In boxed heart pieces, the line shall run from the

pith to the corner farthest from the pith. When the

least dimension is 6 inches or less, the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance of 1 inch

from the pith. When the least dimension is more

than 6 inches and not over 10 inches, the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance of 2 inches from the pith. When the least dimension is more

than 10 inches the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance of 3 inches from the pith. In side cut pieces, the line on which the measure- ment shall be made shall run at a right angle to the annual rings and the center of the 3-inch portion of the line shall be at the center of the end of the piece.

When the rings are very irregular, it may be necessary to shift the line somewhat around the piece

to get a fair average for inspection, but the dis- tance from the pith to the beginning of the 3-inch

line in boxed heart pieces must not be changed.

Pieces averaging from 5 to 6 annual rings per

inch shall be accepted as the equivalent of close grain if having one-third or more summer wood.

CAP. DOOR AUD COEIJEE POSTS B and better. Two faces clear.—Must be sound stock, well manufactured. Will admit on two adjacent faces occasional slight variation in sawing; seasoning

checks; torn grain; small pitch pockets. On the

other two faces will admit, in addition to above

defects, sound and tight medium knots; spike knots

not exceeding 13^ inches in least dimension; pitch

pockets not over 6 inches in length.

C and better. One face clear.—Face to be clear must be specified.

Must be sound stock, well manufactured. Will admit on specified face occasional slight variation

in sawing; seasoning checks; torn grain; small pitch

pockets; medium sap stain. Other faces will admit, in addition to above defects, sound and tight

medium knots; spike knots not exceeding 1^ inches

in least dimension; pitch pockets not over 6 inches

in length.

D and better. Must be sound stock, well manufactured. Will admit occasional slight variation in sawing, and any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Sound and

tight 1-inch knots; spike knots not exceeding 1 inch

in least dimension; seasoning checks; pitch pockets

not over 6 inches in length; torn grain; medium sap

stain. Material required kiln dried or air dried must be

so specified. Car siding.

Bundling.—4 inches, 4 pieces; 6 inches, 4 pieces to

| the bundle. Defects based on 9-foot lengths.

Lengths as specified.

B and better car siding.

VG or FG.—If specified VG, angle of grain 30°,

or more, from horizontal. Must be well manufactured and will admit slight torn grain; crook,

Y2 inch in 9-foot lengths, 13^ inches in 18-foot

lengths. With the above will admit one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an

equivalent combination of defects: Three small seasoning checks, none through; 3 small pitch

pockets, none through; pockets extending from face

into edges, causing leakage, not permitted. If specified S2S, small skips on back permitted,

totaling not more than 20 per cent of area. C car siding.

VG or FG.—-If specified VG, angle of grain 30°, or more, from horizontal. Will admit medium torn

grain; slight skips; crook, 3^ inch in 9-foot lengths,

13^2 inches in 18-foot lengths; heart stain or medium

sap stain, 25 per cent of face. With the above,

will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Small seasoning checks, none through; 3 sound and

intergrown pin knots; 5 small pitch pockets, none

through; pockets extending from face into edges,

causing leakage, not permitted. If specified S2S,

small skips on back permitted, totaling not more

than 20 per cent of area. D car siding.

FG and/or VG.—Will admit any number of the

following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent

combinations of defects: Torn grain; small skips on

face; heavy skips on back; crook, % inch in 8-foot lengths, 2 inches in 18-foot lengths; heart stain or medium sap stain; seasoning checks; pin wormholes;

sound and intergrown or encased medium knots; numerous small pitch pockets, several of which may

be through, or equivalent of medium to large pitch

pockets; pitch streaks; wane on reverse side, onethird width and one-sixth length of piece. Car lining.

Bundling.—4 inches, 6 pieces; 6 inches, 4 pieces to the bundle. Defects based on 12-foot lengths.

Lengths as specified.

245
413.21 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

B and better car lining.

FG and/or VG.—Will admit medium torn grain;

crook, }/2 inch in 8-foot lengths, inches in 20-foot

lengths. With the above, will admit one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three small seasoning

checks, none through; 3 small pitch pockets, none

through. If specified S2S, small skips on back

permitted, totaling not more than 20 per cent of area. C car lining.

FG andjor VG.—Will admit medium torn grain;

slight skips; crook, 3^2 mch in 8-foot lengths, inches in 20-foot lengths; heart stain or medium sap

stain, 25 per cent of face. With - the above, will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent

defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Small seasoning checks; three sound and inter- grown small knots, or equivalent of pin knots; 5 small to medium pitch pockets. If specified S2S, small skips on back permitted, totaling not more

than 20 per cent of area.

Selected common car lining. Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Torn grain; small skips; crook, 3^ inch in 8-foot lengths, 1^ inches in 20-foot lengths; heart

stain; medium sap stain, 25 per cent of face;, sea- soning checks; pin woraiholes; sound and inter- grown medium knots; pitch pockets, not over

6 inches in length, none through. If specified S2S,

skips on back permitted, totaling not more than

40 per cent of area. No. 1 common car lining.

Must be well manufactured and suitable for use without unreasonable waste. Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Deep torn

grain; skips; heart stain or sap stain; seasoning

checks; splits not longer than width of piece, or equivalent of end checks; pin wormholes; sound and

intergrown knots; encased medium knots; large

pitch pockets; pitch streaks; slight edge defects due to machining; wane, 3^ inch on edge 1 inch on face, }4 length. If specified S2S, skips on back

permitted, totaling not more than 60 per cent of area. Insulation. Douglas fir and/or west coast hemlock. Will admit torn grain; heart stain or medium sap stain; seasoning checks; sound knots; pitch pockets. SIS

or S2S as specified. Car roofing.

Bundling.—4 inches, 6 pieces; 6 inches, 4 pieces

to the bundle. Defects based on 5-foot lengths.

Lengths as specified.

B and better car roofing.

FG andj or VG.—Will admit medium torn grain; heart stain or medium sap stain, 25 per cent of face. With the above, will admit one of the following

defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Two small seasoning checks, not through; 2 small pitch pockets, not through;

pockets extending from face into edges, causing

leakage, not permitted. If specified S2S, small skips on back permitted, totaling not more than 20 per

cent of area. C car roofing.

FG and/or VG.—Will admit medium torn grain;

slight skips; heart stain or medium sap stain, 25 per

cent of face. With the above, will admit one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Small seasoning

checks, none through; 2 sound and intergrown small

knots; 4 small pitch pockets, none through; pockets

extending from face into edges, causing leakage, not

permitted. If specified S2S, small skips on back

permitted, totaling not more than 20 per cent of area.

Selected common car roofing. Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Torn grain; small skips; heart stain; me- dium sap stain, 25 per cent of face; seasoning checks; pin wormholes; sound and intergrown

medium knots; small pitch pockets, several of which may be through, or equivalent of larger pockets. If specified S2S, skips on back permitted,

totaling not more than 40 per cent of area. No. 1 common car roofing.

Must be well manufactured and suitable for use without unreasonable waste. This grade is intended

to supply a cheap longitudinal roofing. Will admit

any number of the following defects, equivalent

defects, or equivalent combination of defects: Deep

torn grain; skips; heart stain or sap stain: seasoning checks; splits not longer than width of piece, or equivalent end checks; pin wormholes; sound

and intergrown knots; encased medium knots; medium knot holes; large pitch pockets; pitch

streaks; slight edge defects due to machining; wane,

3^ inch on edge, 1 inch on face, Y§ length of piece.

If specified S2S, skips on back permitted, totaling not more than 60 per cent of area. Car decking. Defects based on 9-foot lengths. Lengths as

specified.

B and better car decking.

VG or FG.—If specified VG, angle of grain 30°, or more, from horizontal. Will admit medium torn

grain. With the above, will admit one of the fol- lowing defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three small seasoning

checks, none through; 3 sound and intergrown small

knots; 3 small pitch pockets, none through; 1 medi- um pitch pocket, not through. On back of piece

will admit, in addition to above defects, 2 encased

small knots, not through. If specified S2S, small

skips on back permitted, totaling not more than 20

per cent of area. C car decking.

FG and/or VG.—Will admit heavy torn grain;

slight skips; heart stain or medium sap stain, 25 per 246
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.22

cent of face. With the above, will admit one of the

following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Small seasoning checks, none through; 4 sound and intergrown small knots; 5 small pitch pockets, or equivalent of larger pockets, none through. On back of piece will admit, in addition to above defects, 3 encased small knots, none through. If specified S2S, small skips on back

permitted, totaling not more than 20 per cent of area.

Selected common car decking. Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Heavy torn grain; small skips; heart

stain; sap stain, 25 per cent of face; seasoning

checks; sound and intergrown medium knots;

pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length, none

through. One back of piece will admit in addition

to above defects, 3 encased medium knots, none

through. If specified S2S, skips on back permitted,

totaling not more than 40 per cent of area. No. 1 common car decking. Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: Deep torn grain; skips; heart stain or sap

stain; seasoning checks; sound and intergrown

knots, }/i width of piece; encased knots, 3^ width

of piece; small to large pitch pockets, none through.

If specified S2S, skips on back permitted, totaling not more than 40 per cent of area. Horizontal car sheathing. Defects based on 4 to 6 inch widths by 18-foot

lengths. Lengths as specified.

A horizontal sheathing.

VG or FG.—li specified VG, angle of grain 30°

or more, from horizontal. Will admit slight torn

grain; crook, 3^ inch in 18-foot lengths; 4 very

small pitch pockets.

B horizontal sheathing.

VG or FG.—If specified VG, angle of grain 30°

or more, from horizontal. Will admit slight torn

grain; crook, Y2 inch in 18-foot lengths. With the above, will admit any two of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects: 3 small seasoning checks, none through;

3 sound and intergrown small knots; 3 small

pitch pockets, none through; pockets extending

from face into edges, causing leakage, not permitted;

pitch streak, inch wide by 12 inches long.

On back of piece will admit, in addition to above

defects, 2 encased small knots, not through. If specified S2S small skips on back permitted, totaling not more than 20 per cent of area. C horizontal sheathing.

FG and/or VG.—Will admit heavy torn grain;

slight skips; crook, 3^ inch in 10-foot lengths; heart stain or medium sap stain, 25 per cent of face. With the above, will admit any two of the following

defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects; small seasoning checks, none

through; 4 sound and intergrown small knots; 4 small pitch pockets, or equivalent of larger pockets,

none through; pockets extending from face into

edges, causing leakage, not permitted. On back of piece will admit, in addition to above defects, 3 encased small knots, none through. If specified

S2S, small skips on back permitted, totaling not more than 20 per cent of area.

Selected common horizontal sheathing. Will admit any number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations

of defects; heavy torn grain; small skips; heart

stain; sap stain, 25 per cent of face; seasoning

checks; sound and intergrown small knots; encased

small knots, none through; small pitch pockets, none through. If specified S2S, skips on back per- mitted, totaling not more than 20 per cent of area. Special provisions. Close grain shall mean an average on either one end or the other of a piece of not less than 6 nor more than 20 annual rings per inch, measured over

3 inches on a line located as follows: In boxed-heart pieces, the line shall run from the

pith to the corner farthest from the pith. When the

least dimension is 6 inches or less, the 3-inch portion

of the line shall begin at a distance of 1 inch from

the pith. When the least dimension is more than

6 inches and not over 10 inches, the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a distance of 2 inches from the

pith. When the least dimension is more than 10

inches the 3-inch portion of the line shall begin at a

distance of 3 inches from the pith. In side cut pieces, the line on which the measure- ment shall be made shall run at a right angle to the annual rings and the center of the 3-inch portion of the line shall be at the center of the end of the piece.

When the rings are very irregular, it may be

necessary to shift the line somewhat around the

piece to get a fair average for inspection, but the

distance from the pith to the beginning of the 3-inch

line in boxed heart pieces must not be changed.

Pieces averaging from 5 to 6 annual rings per inch

shall be accepted as the equivalent of close grain if having ^ or more summer wood.

The requirements for density are identical with

the rules of American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, for American

Lumber Standards, No. 412.0, selection for density. Heart timbers, car-construction lumber, or other

special material may carry specifications limiting the sapwood; that is, all heart, 95 per cent heart, 90

per cent heart, 85 per cent heart, etc., but when so ordered, specifications must be in terms of heartwood

required on the girth, or on each face, side or edge.

Girth shall be measured at the point where the

greatest amount of sapwood occurs. Square edged.

This designation, when used, shall mean that each

piece shall be entirely free from wane. 413.22 Mahogany Car Stock.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 52688°—27 17 247
413.23 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

413.23 Oak Car Stock.

American Railway Association, Mechanical Division, specifications for lumber, 1910.

Classification and grading rules for locomotive,

freight, and passenger car oak. General instruction. Those who are not familiar with the anatomy of the oak tree should, when reading over these rules, take into consideration that the rule describes the

poorest piece that goes into the grade and that a

large percentage is above the grade described.

Definition of oak for construction purposes. The term construction oak means all such products of oak in which the strength and durability of the timber is the controlling element in its selection and use. The following is a list of products which

are recommended for consideration as construction oak:

Construction oak. (A)' ) Cover maintenance of way material.

(C) 0» Sills, end, and truck

Cover maintenance of way material.

Locomotive timbers

timbers.

(E) Car timbers: Car framing, including upper

framing, car sills, end, and truck timbeis,

car decking, inside lining.

m

(G)

(fl) (/) (J) (K)

(L) Standard defects. Definition of defect.—Fault, blemish, mark of imperfection that will materially injure the strength. Measurements which refer to the diameter of knots or holes shall be considered as referring to the mean or average diameter.

(A) Knots. Sound knot.—A sound knot is one which is solid across its face, and which is as hard as the wood

surrounding it; it may be any color and contain

checks. Loose knot.—A loose knot is one not firmly held in place by growth or position. Pith knot.—A pith knot is a sound knot with a

pith hole not more than inch in diameter in the

center. Rotten knot.—A rotten knot is one that is not sound and not as hard as the wood surrounding it. Pin knot.—A pin knot is a sound knot not over % inch in diameter. Standard knot.—A standard knot is a knot not

over 2 inches in diameter. Large knot.—A large knot is a sound knot more

than 2 inches in diameter. Round knot.—A round knot is one which is oval or

circular in form.

Spike knot.—A spike knot is one sawn in length- wise direction. The mean or average width shall be considered in measuring this knot. Bird peck.—Bruises apparently caused by bird pecks during the growth process of the timber. Considered no defect. (B) Worm defects. Pin wormholes.—Pin wormholes are very small

holes caused by minute insects or worms. These

holes usually are not over inch in diameter, or

smaller, and the wood surrounding them is sound

and does not show any evidences of the wormhole

having any effect on the wood other than the

opening.

Spot worm defects (also known as flag worm

defects).—Spot worm defects are caused, like pin

wormholes, by minute insects or worms working on

the timber during its growth. The size of the hole

is about the same as pin wormholes, but the sur- rounding wood shows a colored spot as evidence of the defect. This spot is usually sound and does not

affect the strength of the piece.

Grub wormholes.—Grub wormholes are usually

from about y% to inch in width and vary in length

from about y$ inch to 1 inch, and are caused by

grub worms working in the wood.

Wooden rafting pinholes.—The defect sometimes

appears on river timber winch has been rafted and

holes bored in the solid wood for tying the timber,

and a solid plug or pin driven in the hole filling it completely. These defects must be treated and

considered the same as knot defects. Ordinary

metal rafting pin or chain dog hole is considered no

defect.

(C) Sap.

Definition of sap.—The alburnum of a tree

the exterior part of the wood next to the bark; sap- wood not considered a defect. Sound heart.—The term sound heart is used in these rules whenever heart of piece is split or opened

and shows on outside of piece and its condition is sound and solid, not decayed. Openings between

annual rings are checks not considered a defect. (D) Wane. Wane is bark or lack of wood from any cause on

edges of timber.

(E) Shakes.

Definition of shakes.—Shakes are splits or checks

in timber which usually cause a separation of the wood between the annual rings.

Ring shakes.—Ring shakes are openings between

the annual rings usually showing only on the end cf the timber. Through shakes.—Through shakes are shakes which extend between two faces of the timber.

Checks.—A small crack in the wood due to seasoning; not considered a defect.

(F) Grain. Crooked or cross grain.—Crooked or cross grain occurs where the grain crosses the piece within a

section of 24 inches in running length of the piece.

This is only considered a defect in certain smaller

sizes of dimension for specific purposes. 248
LUMBEE FOE BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.23

(C) Rot. Any form of decay which may be detected as giving the timber a doty or rotten texture is a rot

defect, including what is commonly known as dry

rot. Water stain, or what are sometimes called scalded or burned spots, usually caused by timber

lying in the water under certain conditions before it

is sawed, and burned spots where the timber is improperly piled green, not considered defects, as they do not affect the strength of the piece.

Standard names for construction oak. Standard names for construction oak timbers;

white oak and red oak.—Unless specially mentioned

these terms include the following:

White oak White oak. Burr or mossy cup oak. Rock oak. Post or iron oak. Overcup.

Swamp post oak. Live oak. Chestnut or tanbark

oak.Basket or cow oak. Yellow or chinquapin

oak.

Red oak Red oak. Pin oak. Black oak. Water oak. Willow oak. Spanish oak.

Scarlet oak. Turkey oak. Black jack or barn oak. Shingle or laurel oak.

Term.—Mixed oak means any kind of oak. Standard specifications for structural oak timbers. General requirements.—Except as noted, all structural timbers shall be white oak, to be sound timber

and sawed specified sizes; free from ring shakes,

crooked grain, rotten knots, large knots in groups,

rot, dote, and wane in amounts greater than allowed

in these specifications.

Boxed hearts.—Boxed hearts are permitted in pieces 5 by 5 square and larger. The center of the

heart shall be boxed as near the center of the piece

as practical, and not to exceed 30 per cent of the

pieces can have the center of the heart nearer than

13^ inches from any face; 20 per cent may show one

heart face, corner or edge, not to exceed 75 per cent

of the length of the piece.

(A) Wane.

Explanation.—The term "20 per cent of number

of pieces or amount shipped" refers to each item

and size of each car shipped.

(a) Pieces 5 by 5 to 8 by 8 square may show 1 inch wane, side measurement on any two corners

or edges, and this wane not to exceed more than 25

per cent of the length of the piece singly, or 50 per

cent in aggregate. In the absence of wane on all corners excepting one, the one corner may contain wane 50 per cent of the length of the piece as above

described; not to exceed 20 per cent of number of pieces may have this defect.

(6) Pieces over 8 by 8, including 12 by 12 square, may show 1}4 inches wane, side measurement, edge

of any two corners or edges, and this wane not to exceed more than 33}^ per cent of the length of the

piece singly, or 66% per cent in aggregate. In the absence of wane on all corners excepting one, the

one corner may contain wane 66% per cent of the

length of the piece as above described; not to ex- ceed 20 per cent of number of pieces may have this defect.

(c) Pieces over 12 by 12 square may show \%

inches, side measurement, any two corners or edges,

and this wane not to extend more than 40 per cent

of the length of the piece singly, or 80 per cent in aggregate. In the absence of wane on all corners excepting one, the one corner may contain wane 80

per cent of the length of the piece as above described; not to exceed 20 per cent of number of pieces may

have this defect.

(d) In event that pieces have two faces as wide

as above described and two faces narrower, the pro- portion of the amount of wane is admissible.

(e) Pieces 1 to 5 inches thick, not exceeding 8

inches wide, are governed by defect specifications

above mentioned, with the exception that they shall not contain wane, and not to exceed 20 per cent of pieces 2 inches and thicker may show sound heart on one face; pieces under 2 inches thick must be free

of heart. Pieces 8 inches and wider may contain wane as per paragraphs (6) and (d).

(/) Rough sizes of structural timber shall not vary more than 34 inch scant of specified size. Dressed

sizes may be }4 inch scant after dressing.

(B) Locomotive timber oak. Passenger car dimension

oak. Refrigerator car dimension oak. Thickness cut to order, widths cut to order, lengths

cut to order. Unless otherwise noted, must be cut from white oak. This stock, wherever practical, should be cut outside the heart and must be free of heart shake in pieces under 6 by 6 square. No at- tempt should be made to box the heart in pieces smaller than 5 by 7, unless heart is very small and

tight. When heart is well boxed it must be firm and

tight, and the center of the heart must not be nearer than 2 inches from any face. Must be sawed full to sizes with square edges, and cut from sound timber and free from wormholes, with the exception of a few small pin wormholes well scattered, and an

occasional spot worm. None of these defects, however, to affect the serviceability of the piece for the purpose intended. Must be free from split, rot or

dote, large, loose, rotten or unsound knots, or, in other words, free of all defects affecting the strength

and durability of the piece. Sound standard knots

well scattered not considered a defect.

(C) Freight car timber. Freight car dimensions, including all cars other than refrigerator and passenger cars. Sizes cut to

order. Unless otherwise ordered, must be sawed

from good merchantable white or red oak timber. This stock must be free of rot, shakes, and splits, large, loose, rotten or unsound knots, any of which

will materially impair the strength and durability

of the piece for the purpose intended. This stock

is intended to work full size and length without waste for side posts, braces and end sills, end plates,

drafting timbers, crossties, etc., used in the construction of ordinary freight or stock cars. On pieces

249
413.23 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

3 by 4 inches or equivalent girth measurement and

larger (nothing under 2 inches thick), heart check

showing on one corner, admitted on 20 per cent of the pieces in each car shipment. Well-boxed,

sound hearts admitted in this material in pieces 5 by 6 and larger.

On pieces 3 by 4 to 6 by 6, inclusive, or equivalent

girth measurement and larger (nothing under 2 inches thick), in absence of heart defects, wane on

one corner, ^ inch side measurement, admitted on not to exceed 20 per cent of the number of pieces

in each car shipment.

Pieces over 6 by 6 square may contain 1 inch wane, side measurement, on one corner, with other

conditions same as 3 by 4 to 6 by 6 sizes. National Hardwood lumber Association, grading

rules for oak car stock, January, 1927. SELECT CAR STOCK

For passenger and refrigerator cars and locomotive work.

Select car stock shall be sawn to specified sizes and lengths, and unless otherwise specified must be

white oak. This stock, wherever practical, should be cut outside the heart and must be free from

shake in pieces under 6 by 6 inches. No attempt

should be made to box the heart in smaller than 5 by

7 inches unless the heart is very small and tight.

When the heart is boxed it must be firm and tight

and not nearer than 2 inches to any face. This

stock must be sawn full to sizes, with square edges, cut from sound timber and free from wormholes

with the exception of a few pin wormholes well scattered and an occasional spot wormhole. None

of these defects, however, shall be sufficient to

affect the serviceability of the piece for the purpose

intended. This stock must be free from splits, rot, large, loose, or unsound knots, and all defects that

seriously impair the strength and durability of the

piece. Sound standard knots, well scattered, will be admitted.

FREIGHT CAR STOCK

Freight car stock must be sawn to specified sizes and lengths from either white oak, or red oak, for use as side posts, braces, end sills, end plates,

drafting timbers, etc., used in the construction of

all cars other than passenger and refrigerator cars. This stock must be free from rot, shake, splits, and large, loose, or unsound knots, any of which

seriously impair the strength or prevent the use of the piece for the purpose intended. Sound standard

knots or their equivalent in other defects and

scattered pin or spot wormholes will be admitted.

Pieces 5 by 6 inches and larger will admit firm,

tight heart well boxed.

Pieces 3 by 4 inches and 2 by 5 inches, and larger,

will admit heart check on one corner or side on 20

per cent of the pieces in any shipment.

Pieces 3 by 4 inches and 2 by 5 inches, to 6 by

6 inches, free from heart defects, will admit wane

z/i inch wide, on one corner, on 20 per cent of the

pieces in any shipment.

Pieces over 6 by 6 inches, free from heart defects,

will admit wane 1 inch wide on one corner, on 20 per cent of the pieces in any shipment.

413.24 Pine Car Stock.

American lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0 for softwood factory and shop lumber. American Railway Association, Mechanical Division, specifications for lumber, 1910.

Classification, grading, and dressing rules for northern pine car material, including white and

Norway pine and eastern spruce.

1. Norway pine to cover Norway or red pine

grown in Michigan, Minnesota, Wisconsin, and

Canada.

White pine to cover wood from tree of that name

grown in Maine, Michigan, Wisconsin, Minnesota,

and Canada.

Spruce to cover eastern spruce; that is, the spruce . timber coming from points east of and including

Minnesota and Canada, covering white, red, and

black spruce.

2. Northern pine lumber shall be graded and

classified according to the following rules and specifications as to quality, and dressed stock shall con- form to the subjoined table of standard sizes, except

where otherwise expressly stipulated between buyer

and seller.

3. Recognized defects in northern pine are knots,

knot holes, splits, shake, wane, wormholes, pitch

pockets, torn grain, loosened grain, sap, sap stain, checks, and rot. Knots.

4. Knots shall be classified as pin, small and

large or coarse, as to size, and round or spike as to form, and as sound, loose, encased, pith, and rotten, as to quality.

5. A pin knot is sound and shall not exceed }/2 inch in diameter.

6. A small knot is larger than a pin knot and

shall not exceed V/^ inches in diameter.

7. A large or coarse knot is one of any size over

inches in diameter.

8. A round knot is oval or circular in form.

9. A spike knot is one sawn in a lengthwise

direction. The mean or average diameter of knots shall be

considered in applying and construing these rules. 10. A sound knot is one solid across its face; is as hard as the wood it is in and is so fixed by growth

or position that it will retain its place in the piece.

11. A loose knot is not firmly set, but still retains

its place in the piece.

12. A pith knot is a sound knot with a pith hole not more than 3^ inch in diameter.

13. An encased knot is one surrounded wholly by

bark or pitch.

14. A rotten knot is one not as hard as the wood
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.24

Pitch.

15. Pitch pockets are openings between the grain

of the wood containing more or less pitch or bark,

and shall be classified as small, standard, and large

pitch pockets.

16. A small pitch pocket is one not over 3^ of an inch wide.

17. A standard pitch pocket is one not over %

of an inch wide, or 3 inches in length.

18. A large pitch pocket is one over % of an

inch wide or over 3 inches in length.

19. A pitch pocket showing open on both sides

of the piece 3-1* of an inch or more in width shall be

considered the same as a knot hole. Wane.

20. Wane is bark, or the lack of wood, from any

cause, on edge.

Sap.

21. White or bright sap shall not be considered a defect in any of the grades provided for and

described in these rules, except where stipulated. Miscellaneous.

22. Defects in rough stock caused by improper

manufacture and drying will reduce grade, unless they can be removed in dressing such stock to standard sizes. 23. All lumber for uses described in these rules

shall be inspected on the face side to determine

the grade, and the face side is the side showing the

best quality or appearance.

24. Chipped grain consists in a part of the surface being chipped or broken out in small particles

below the line of the cut, and as usually found

should not be classed as torn grain, and shall not

be considered a defect.

25. Torn grain consists in a part of the wood

being torn out in the dressing. It occurs around

knots and curly places, and is of four distinct characters; slight, medium, heavy, and deep.

Slight torn grain shall not exceed ^ of an inch

in depth, medium ^ of an inch, and heavy 3^ of an inch. Any torn grain heavier than 3^8 °f an

inch shall be termed deep.

26. The grade of all regular stock shall be deter- mined by the number, character, and position of the defects visible in any piece. The enumerated

defects herein described admissible in any grade are intended to be descriptive of the coarsest pieces such grades may contain, but the average quality

of the grade shall be midway between the highest

and lowest pieces allowed in the grade.

27. Lumber and timber sawed for specific purposes must be inspected with a view to its adaptability for the use intended.

28. All dressed stock shall be measured strip count, viz, full size of rough material necessarily used in its manufacture.

29. Lumber must be accepted on grade in the form in which it was shipped. Any subsequent

change in manufacture or millwork will prohibit an

inspection for the adjustment of claims, except with

the consent of all parties interested.

30. The foregoing general observations shall apply

to and govern the application of the following rules: The rules referred to under sections 31, 32, 33, 34, and 35 govern 4 or 6 inch strips, and are intended

to cover strips used for car siding, car lining, and

car roofing.

B and better white pine.

31. Material of this grade shall be practically

clear and free of all defects, except will admit of not exceeding four pin knots and bright sap not

to exceed 25 per cent of the face of the piece.

C and better Norway pine.

32. Bright sap is no defect in this grade and

stained sap will be admitted to the extent of not

exceeding one-fifth the surface of the face of the

piece, if not in combination with other defects. This grade shall be free from shake, rot, and splits, but will admit of not exceeding four pin knots. No. 1 common white pine, Norway pine, and eastern spruce.

33. This grade admits of small sound knots, but

shall be free from large or coarse knots, knot holes, should have practically no shake, wane, or rot, but

will admit of bright sap to any extent. No. 2 common white pine, Norway pine, and eastern spruce.

34. This grade is similar to No. 1, described above,

except that it will admit of spike knots, bright or stained sap, slight shake, slight wane on reverse

side, but not a serious combination of any of these

defects. No. 3 common white pine, Norway pine, and eastern spruce.

35. This grade, in addition to the defects mentioned in No. 2, described above, will also admit

of large or coarse knots, more shake, sap, wane on

reverse side that does not affect the tongue or groove, and torn or loosened grain, checks, pin wormholes,

and splits, but no loose knots or knot holes nor a

serious combination of the defects named.

No. 1 common Norway pine car decking or flooring. 36. This grade will admit of sound knots, any

amount of sap, and shall be free from shake, wane,

rot, and large or coarse spike knots.

37. Standard lengths.—

Car siding—8, 9, 10, and 12 feet or multiples.

Car roofing—5 feet or multiples.

Car lining—8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 feet or multiples.

Car decking—9 and 10 feet or multiples.

All orders shall be shipped in standard lengths, unless otherwise specified, but no lengths of either car siding, lining, or roofing shall be shipped except

in the lengths specified or multiples thereof. Those

who do not desire stock shipped in multiple lengths should so specify. American Railway Association, Mechanical Division, specifications for lumber, 1910.

Classification, grading, and dressing rules for southern yellow pine car material. 251
413.24 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

1. Southern yellow pine to cover longleaf and

shortleaf yellow pine grown in the Southern States.

2. Southern yellow pine lumber shall be graded

and classified according to the following rules and

specifications as to quality, and dressed stock shall conform to the subjoined table of standard sizes, except where otherwise expressly stipulated between

buyer and seller.

3. Recognized defects in southern yellow pine are

knots, knot holes, splits (either from seasoning, ring

hearts, or rough handling), shake, wane, red heart,

pith, rot, rotten streaks, dote, wormholes, pitch

streaks, pitch pockets, torn grain, loosened grain,

seasoning or kiln checks and sap, sap stains, and

imperfect manufacture.

Knots.

4. Knots shall be classified as pin, standard and

large, as to size; and round and spike as to form; and as sound, loose, encased, pith, and rotten, as to quality.

5. A pin knot is sound and not over 3^ inch in diameter.

6. A standard knot is sound and not over 13^

inches in diameter.

7. A large knot is one any size over 1}4 inches

in diameter.

8. A round knot is oval or circular in form.

9. A spike knot is one sawn in a lengthwise

direction. The mean or average diameter of knots shall be

considered in applying and construing these rules. 10. A sound knot is one solid across its face, is as hard as the wood it is in, and is so fixed by growth

or position that it will retain its place in the piece.

11. A loose knot is one not held firmly in place

by growth or position.

12. A pith knot is a sound knot with a pith hole not more than \i inch in diameter.

13. An encased knot is one surrounded wholly or

in part by bark or pitch. Where the encasement is less than }/% of an inch in width on both sides, not

exceeding one-half the circumference of the knot, it shall be considered a sound knot. (See sees. 10 and 17.)

14. A rotten knot is one not as hard as the wood it is in. Pitch.

15. Pitch pockets are openings between the grain

of the wood containing more or less pitch or bark,

and shall be classified as small, standard, and large

pitch pockets.

16. A small pitch pocket is one not over }/% of an

inch wide. A standard pitch pocket is one not

over % of an inch wide or 3 inches in length.

A large pitch pocket is one over % of an inch wide

or over 3 inches in length. *

17. A pitch pocket showing open on both sides of the piece 3^8 of an inch or more in width shall be

considered the same as a knot hole.

18. A pitch streak is a well-defined accumulation

of pitch at one point in the piece, and when not

sufficient to develop a well-defined streak, or where

fiber between grains is not saturated with pitch, it shall not be considered a defect.

19. A small pitch streak shall be equivalent to not over Y2 the width and % the length of the piece

it is in. A standard pitch streak shall be equivalent to not

over % the width and y& of the length of the piece it

is in. Wane.

20. Wane is bark, or the lack of wood, from any

cause, on the edge.

Sap.

21. Bright sap shall not be considered a defect in any of the grades provided for and described in these rules, except where stipulated. Shake.

22. Shakes are splits or checks in timbers which

usually cause a separation of the wood between

annual rings.

Through shake.—A shake which extends between

two faces of a timber. Ring shake.—An opening between the annual

rings. Miscellaneous.

23. Defects in rough stock caused by improper

manufacture and drying will reduce grade, unless they can be removed in dressing such stock to standard sizes. 24. All stock except car sills and framing shall be

inspected on the face side to determine the grade.

Stock surfaced one side, the dressed surface shall be considered the face side. Stock rough or dressed two sides, the best side shall be considered the face, but the reverse side of all such stock shall not be more than one grade lower.

25. Pieces of siding, lining, or roofing with of an inch or more of tongue will be admitted in any

grade, provided it does not run more than }4 the

length of the piece.

26. In all grades lower than B and better, wane on

the reverse side, not exceeding 3l$ the width and }/q the length of any piece is admissible, provided the wane does not extend into the tongue, or over onehalf the thickness below the groove.

27. Chipped grain consists in a part of the sur- face being chipped or broken out in small particles

below the line of the cut, and as usually found shall not be classed as torn grain and shall not be considered a defect.

28. Torn grain consists in a part of the wood

being torn out in dressing. It occurs around knots and curly places, and is of four distinct characters

slight, medium, heavy, and deep.

Slightly torn grain shall not exceed of an inch

in depth; medium, ts of an inch; heavy 3^8 of an

inch; any torn grain heavier than % of an inch shall be termed deep.

29. Loosened grain consists in a point of one

grain being torn loose from the next grain. It occurs on the heart side of the piece and is a serious

defect, especially in flooring.

252
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USB 413.24

SO. Rot, dote, and red heart.—Any form of decay

which may be evident either as a dark red discoloration not found in the sound wood, or the presence

of white or red rotten spots, shall be considered as a defect. Firm red heart shall not be considered a defect in any of the grades of common lumber.

31. The grade of all regular stock shall be deter- mined by the number, character, and position of the defects visible in any piece. The enumerated

defects herein described admissible in any grade

are intended to be descriptive of the coarsest pieces

such grades may contain, but the average quality of the grade shall be midway between the highest and

lowest pieces allowed in the grade.

32. Lumber and timber sawed for specific purposes must be inspected with a view to its adaptability for the use intended.

33. All dressed stock shall be measured strip count, viz, full size of rough material necessarily

used in its manufacture.

34. Equivalent means equal, and in construing and

applying these rules, the defects, whether specified or not, are understood to be equivalent in damaging

effect to those mentioned applying to stock under

consideration.

35. Lumber must be accepted on grade in the form in which it was shipped. Any subsequent

change in manufacture or millwork will prohibit an

inspection for the adjustment of claims, except

with the consent of all parties interested.

36. The foregoing general observations shall apply to and govern the application of the follow- ing rules:

37. B and better car siding, lining and roofing, car siding for double-sheathed cars, lining for cabin and refrigerator cars, lining for box cars with outer

steel posts, and roofing such as old-style Winslow

roof, will admit any two of the following, or their equivalent of combined defects: Sap stain not to exceed 5 per cent; firm red heart not to exceed 15 per cent of the face; three pin knots; one standard

knot; 3 small pitch pockets; 1 standard pitch

pocket; 1 standard pitch streak; slight torn grain, or small kiln or season checks. Where no other

defects are contained, six small pin wormholes will be admitted.

38. Select car siding will admit of one standard

pitch streak, one standard pitch pocket, or their equivalent; and, in addition, will admit of not

exceeding 5 pin knots and 2 standard knots, or

their equivalent; 10 per cent sap stain; firm red

heart; slight shake; heavy torn grain; defects in manufacture or seasoning checks. Pieces otherwise

good enough for B, but containing a limited number of pin wormholes shall be graded select. This

grade is intended to be accumulated from running

B and better stock, and will consist of all the droppings which do not contain defects in excess

of those mentioned in this paragraph.

39. Select car lining and roofing will admit of 1 standard pitch streak; 1 standard pitch pocket, or

their equivalent, and, in addition, sound knots not

over one-half the width of the piece in the rough;

10 per cent sap stain; firm red heart; slight shakes; heavy torn grain; defects in manufacture, or sea- soning checks. Pieces otherwise good enough for B, but containing a limited number of pin wormholes

shall be graded select. This grade is intended to be

accumulated from running B and better stock, and

will consist of all the droppings which do not contain defects in excess of those mentioned in this paragraph.

40. No. 1 common car lining and roofing will admit of the following defects or their equivalent:

Sound knots, not over one-half of cross section of the piece at any point throughout its length or width; three pin knots or their equivalent; wane

3^ inch deep on edge not exceeding \y2 inches wide

and one-half the length of the piece; torn grain;

pitch pockets, pitch, sap stains; seasoning checks;

slight shakes; firm red heart and a limited number of pin or small wormholes well scattered. This grade

is intended to be worked from fencing stock, either

kiln or air dried.

41. No. 2 common car siding, lining and roofing

will admit the following defects or their equivalent: Knots not necessarily sound, the mean or average

diameter of any one knot shall not be more than onehalf the cross section if located on the edge and shall not be more than two-thirds of the cross section if located away from the edge; one split one-fourth the length of the piece; wormholes; rotten streaks one- fourth the length of the piece, or the equivalent of unsound red heart; shake or wane, but must not cut

to waste. Pieces of siding, lining or roofing with

one-eighth of an inch or more of tongue will be

admitted in this grade, provided it does not run more than one-third the length of the piece.

42. Standard patterns. (Insert B/P reference,

showing net sizes after working.)

Note.—For material furnished in accordance with sections 43 to

47, the following density rale may be applied where so specified by

the purchaser:

(a) Dense southern yellow pine shall show on either end an aver- age of at least 6 annual rings per inch and at least one-third summer

wood, or else the greater number of the rings shall show at least one-third summer wood, all as measured over the third, fourth, and

fifth inches on a radial line from the pith. Wide-ringed material ex- cluded by this rule will be acceptable, provided that the amount of summer wood as above measured shall be at least one-half. The contrast in color between summer wood and spring wood

shall be sharp, and the summer wood shall be dark in color, except

in pieces having considerably above the minimum requirement for summer wood.

(h) Sound southern yellow pine shall include pieces of southern

pine without any ring or summer-wood requirement. 43. All-heart car decking or flooring will admit

sound knots not over }>£ of the cross section of the

piece at any point throughout its length, provided

they are not in groups; pitch pockets; firm red

heart; shake and seasoning checks which do not go through the piece; loose or heavy torn grain, or other machine defects, which will lay without waste

or will not cause a leakage in cars when loaded with

grain. Must be strictly all heart on both sides and both edges.

44. Heart face car decking or flooring will admit

of sound knots not over % the cross section of the

piece at any point throughout its length; provided

253
413.24 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

they are not in groups; pitch pockets; firm red

heart; shake and seasoning checks which do not go through the piece; loosened or heavy torn grain, or other machine defects, which will lay without waste

or will not cause a leakage in cars when loaded with

grain. Will admit of any amount of sap provided

all of the face side of the piece is strictly all heart.

45. No. 1 common car decking or flooring will admit of sound knots not over }/% the cross section

of the piece at any point throughout its length,

provided they are not in groups; pitch pockets; sap stain; firm red heart; shake and seasoning checks which do not go through the piece; a limited number of pin wormholes; loosened or heavy torn

grain, or other machine defects, which lay without

waste, or will not cause a leakage in cars when loaded

with grain.

46. Standard lengths.

Car siding.—8, 9, 10, and 12 feet or multiples.

Car lining.—8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 feet or multiples.

Car roofing.—5 feet or multiples.

Car decking or flooring.—9 and 10 feet and

multiples.

All orders shall be shipped in standard lengths, unless otherwise specified, but no lengths of either car siding, lining, or roofing shall be shipped, except

in the lengths specified or multiples thereof. Those

who do not desire stock shipped in multiple lengths should so specify. Car sills and framing.

47. No. 1 common heart car sills and framing will admit of sound knots, provided they are not in groups, the mean or average diameter of which shall not exceed 2 inches; pitch; pitch pockets; slight shake; seasoning checks, or other defects which will not impair its strength more than the defects aforementioned. Must be sawed from sound

timber, free from doty or rotten red heart and true

to measurements, or at least the measurements at no point on the sill shall be less than the size required.

Measurement of the girth at any point throughout

the length of the piece must show at least 75 per cent heartwood.

Cubical contents shall not be used as basis for obtaining percentage of heartwood under this rule. 48. No. 1 common car sills and framing will admit

of sound knots, provided they are not in groups, the mean or average diameter of which shall not exceed

2 inches; pitch; pitch pockets; slight shake; season- ing checks; sap; sap stain; or other defects which

will not impair its strength more than the defects aforementioned. Must be sawed true to measure- ments and from sound timber free from doty or rotten red heart; must be square cornered, except

that 1 inch of wane on one corner or 3^ inch of wane on two corners is admissible.

49. Sizes up to 6 inches in width shall measure full when green, and not more than Y% inch scant when

dry or part dry. Sizes 6 to 12 inches in width shall measure full when green and not more than 34 inch

scant when dry or part dry. Sizes 12 to 16 inches

in width shall measure full when green and not more

than ^ inch scant when dry or part dry. Unless

otherwise specified, 34 inch shall be allowed for each

side which is to be dressed. In pieces 3 by 6 inches and under when ordered in lengths exceeding 30

feet, sound knots shall not exceed 34 the width of the face through which they project, and the grain

shall not cross sufficiently to impair the strength.

Southern Pine Association, specifications for southern yellow pine car material, July 1, 1919. Yellow pine.

B and better car siding, lining and roofing will admit any two of the following, or their equivalent

of combined defects: Sap stain not to exceed 5 per

cent; firm red heart not to exceed 15 per cent of the

face; 3 pin knots, 1 standard knot, 3 small pitch

pockets, 1 standard pitch pocket, 1 standard pitch

streak, slight torn grain, small kiln or season checks. Where no other defects are contained, 6 small pin

wormholes will be admitted. No. 1 common car siding will admit of the follow- ing defects or their equivalent: Sound knots, not

over 3^ of cross section of the piece at any point

throughout its width; 3 pith knots or their equivalent; wane 3^ mch deep, 34 inch wide and 10 inches

long; torn grain, pitch pockets, pitch streaks, sap

stain, seasoning checks, slight shakes, firm red heart and a limited number of small wormholes well scattered. This grade is intended to be worked from

fencing stock, either kiln or air dried. No. 1 common car lining and roofing will admit of the following defects or their equivalent: Sound

knots not over 3^ the cross section of the piece at any

point throughout its length; torn grain, pitch pockets, sap stain, seasoning checks, firm red heart and a

limited number of pin or small wormholes well scattered. This grade is intended to be worked from

fencing stock, either kiln or air dried. No. 2 common car siding, lining and roofing will admit coarse and unsound knots, knot holes, grub

wormholes, rotten streaks and other defects that will not prevent its use for a cheap lining by wasting

not more than 25 per cent of the length of any one

piece.

Standard patterns: (Insert B/P reference, showing net sizes after working.)

All-heart car decking or flooring will admit sound

knots not over of the cross section of the piece, in the rough, at any point throughout its length, pro- vided they are not in groups; pitch pockets, firm red

heart, shake and seasoning checks which do not go through the piece, loose or heavy torn grain, or other

defects, which will lay without waste or will not

cause a leakage in cars when loaded with grain.

Must be strictly all heart on both sides and both

edges.

This grade can only be secured in small quantities, on short notice. Heart-face car decking or flooring will admit of sound knots not over 3^ the cross section of the piece, in the rough, at any point throughout its length,

provided they are not in groups; pitch pockets, firm red heart, shake and seasoning checks which do not 254
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.29

go through the piece, loosened or heavy torn grain, or other defects, which will lay without waste, or

will not cause a leakage in cars when loaded with

grain. Will admit of any amount of sap provided

the face side of the piece is strictly all heart. This grade can only be secured in small quantities, on short notice. No. 1 common car decking or flooring will admit

of sound knots not over 3^ the cross section of the

piece, in the rough, at any point throughout its length, provided they are not in groups; pitch pockets, sap stain, firm red heart, shake, and seasoning checks which do not go through the piece, a limited number of pin wormholes, loosened or heavy torn

grain, or other defects, which will lay without waste, or

will not cause a leakage in cars when loaded with grain. Car sills and framing. No. 1 common heart car sills and framing will admit of sound knots, provided they are not in groups

the mean or average diameter of which shall not exceed 3^ the cross section of the piece in the rough;

pitch, pitch pockets, slight shake, seasoning checks

or other defects which will not impair its strength more than the defects aforementioned. Must be sawed from sound timber, free from dote or rotten red heart, and true to measurements, or at least the measurements at no point on the sill shall be less than the size required.

Measurement of the girth at any point throughout the length of the piece must show at least 75 per

cent heartwood.

Cubical contents shall not be used as basis for obtaining percentage of heartwood under this rule. This grade can only be secured in small quantities, on short notice. No. 1 common car sills and framing will admit of sound knots, provided they are not in groups, the mean or average diameter of which shall not exceed

3^3 the cross section of the piece in the rough; pitch,

pitch pockets, slight shake, seasoning checks, sap, sap stain, or other defects which will not impair

its strength more than the defects aforementioned.

Must be sawed true to measurements and from

sound timber free from dote or rotten red heart; must

be square cornered, except that 1 inch of wane on one

corner or 3^ inch of wane on two corners is admissible.

Sizes up to 6 inches in width shall measure full when green, and not more than 3^8 inch scant when

dry or part dry. Sizes 6 to 12 inches in width shall measure full when green and not more than yi inch

scant when dry or part dry. Sizes 12 to 16 inches in width shall measure full when green and not more

than z/% inch scant when dry or part dry. Unless

otherwise specified, 34 inch shall be allowed f or each

side which is to be dressed. In pieces 3 by 6 inches and under, when ordered in lengths exceeding 30

feet, sound knots shall not exceed 34 the width of the face through which they project, and the grains

shall not cross sufficiently to impair the strength.

Standard lengths. Car siding.—8, 9, 10, and 12 feet or multiples.

Car lining —8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 feet or multiples.

Car roofing.—5 feet or multiples. Car decking or flooring.—9 and 10 feet or

multiples.

All orders shall be shipped in standard lengths

unless otherwise specified, but no lengths of either car siding, lining, or roofing shall be shipped, except

in the lengths specified or multiples thereof. When

stock is not desired in multiple lengths, order should so specify.

413.25 Spruce Car Stock.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 413.26 Hemlock Car Stock.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0 for softwood factory and shop lumber. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for West Coast hemlock car stock, July 1, 1926. Car siding.

The grades of car siding are the same as the

grades of this association for fir car stock siding, 413.21. Car lining.

The grades of car lining are the same as the grades

of this association for fir car stock lining, 413.21. Car roofing.

The grades of car roofing are the same as the grades of this association for fir car stock roofing, 413.21. 413.29 Miscellaneous Car Stock lumber.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0 for softwood factory and shop lumber. American Railway Association, Mechanical Division, specifications for lumber, 1910.

Classification and grading rules for cypress car

material.

r. Cypress to cover red, gulf, yellow, and East Coast cypress, also known as bald cypress.

2. Cypress lumber shall be graded and classified according to the following rules and specifications as to quality, and dressed stock shall conform to the subjoined table of standard sizes, except where

otherwise expressly stipulated between buyer and

seller.

3. Recognized defects in cypress are knots, knot

holes, sap, v/ormholes, shake, season checks, splits, and wane.

Knots.

4. Knots shall be classified as standard and small, as to size, and sound or rotten, as to quality.

5. A standard knot is sound and not to exceed

iy£ inches in diameter.

6. A small knot is one not exceeding % inch in diameter.

7. A sound knot is one solid across its face, is as hard as the wood it is in. 255
413.29 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

8. A rotten knot is one not as hard as the wood it is in. Sap.

9. Stained sap or bright sap shall not be consid- ered a defect in the material specified in these rules. Season checks.

10. Ordinary season checks are such as occur in lumber properly covered on yard or season checks

of equal size in kiln-dried lumber. Wane.

11. Y/ane is bark or lack of wood from any cause on edge. Miscellaneous.

12. The grade of all regular stock shall be deter- mined by the number, character, and position of the defects visible in any piece. The enumerated

defects herein described admissible in any grade are intended to be descriptive of the coarsest pieces

such grade may contain, but the average quality of the grade shall be better than the coarsest pieces allowed in the grade.

13. Lumber sawed for specific purposes must be

inspected with a view to its adaptability for the

use intended.

14. All dressed stock shall be measured strip count, viz, full size of rough material necessarily

used in its manufacture.

15. Lumber must be accepted on grade in the form in which it was shipped. Any subsequent

change in manufacture or millwork will prohibit an

inspection for the adjustment of claims, except with

the consent of all parties interested.

16. The foregoing general observations shall apply to and govern the application of the following

rule. The rule referred to in the following section

is intended to govern 4 or 6 inch strips and to cover

strips used for car siding, car roofing, and car lining. Car roofing and siding.

C and better grade.—This grade will admit sound

knots, stained sap, pin wormholes, very slight shake,

and other defects, but none that will prevent the

use of each piece in its full width and length for car roofing and car siding; may be random or specified

lengths and may be worked to pattern specified and

graded from pattern side or S2S and CM and graded

from the better side. Car lining. Shall be specified widths and 8 to 20 feet in length. Will admit tight knots, stained sap, pin wormholes,

slight shake, and other defects, but none that will prevent the use of each piece in its full width and

length for car-lining purposes. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for miscellaneous car stock lumber, January,

1927. Cypress car lining.

Car lining shall be specified widths and 8 to 20

feet in length, and will admit tight knots, stained sapwood, pin wormholes, slight shake, and other

defects, but none that will prevent the use of each

piece in its full width and length for car-lining purposes. Cypress car roofing and car siding. Car roofing and car siding shall be specified widths

and lengths, or random lengths 4 feet and longer,

and shall be graded from the pattern face or, when

S2S and CM, from the good face. C and better will admit sound knots, sound dis- colored sapwood, pin wormholes, very slight shake,

and other defects, but none that will prevent the

use of each piece in its full width and length for car

roofing and car siding.

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for miscellaneous car stock lumber, June 15, 1925. Car roofing and siding.

C and better grade.—This grade will admit sound

knots, stained sap, pin wormholes, very slight shake,

and other defects, but none that will prevent the use

of each piece in its full width and length for car roof- ing and car siding; may be random or specified

lengths and may be worked to pattern specified and

graded from pattern side or S2S and CM and graded

from the better side. Car lining. Shall be specified widths and 8 to 20 feet in length. Will admit tight knots, stained sap, pin wormholes, slight shake, and other defects, but none that

will prevent the use of each piece in its full width and

length for car lining purposes. 413.3 AIRPLANE STOCK.

413.31 Softwood Airplane Stock.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 1G, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0 for softwood factory and shop lumber.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for softwood airplane stock, Schedule M, 1925. Port Orford cedar sawn airplane material. Must be sound lumber, well manufactured and

practically clear four sides. Will allow bright sap

and/or, a few small, well scattered, tight bark seams, each not to exceed 13^ inches in length. In place

of bark seams will admit a couple of burls or sound

knots not exceeding 34 inch in diameter. Defects,

with exception of sap, to be so placed in wing beam

stock as to appear in the webb. Deviation of grain, either spiral or diagonal, from a line parallel with

edges not to exceed 1 inch in 20 inches. Material must have 6 or more annual growth

rings per inch, or an average of not less than 18

rings to 3 inches, measured across the grain over the

coarsest growth. Measurements shall be as follows: Thickness in fractions of 34 inch, widths in frac- tions of 3^ inch, and lengths in fraction of 3"£ foot. Port Orford cedar airplane cants unedged.

Must be well manufactured. Logs shall be

blocked out parallel to the bark to insure straight- ness of grain. Deviation of grain must not exceed

1 inch in 20 inches, either spiral or diagonal. Cants 256
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.4

less than 3 inches thick must have not less than 6 annual growth rings per inch, measured over the

coarsest part. Cants 3 inches and over in thick- ness shall have not less than 18 annual growth

rings to 3 inches, measured over the coarsest part

across the grain. Each cant to contain as much

material as possible as described in the preceding

paragraph for sawn airplane material. Widths shall be measured in multiples of 1 inch, measurements to be taken inside the bark. If, at time of shipment sap has stained, measurements

for width shall be taken inside the sap. The width

used as a basis for computing the board contents

shall be the mean or average width taken at a point

at or about half the length of the cant where the narrow and wide face shall be measured, the average

of such two measurements shall constitute the

width. Lengths shall be in multiples of 1 foot. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for softwood airplane stock, July 1, 1926.

Air-plane stock.—Subject to contract. 413.32 Hardwood Airplane Stock.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 413.4 SHIP STOCK.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0 for softwood factory and shop lumber.

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, sizes and grades for

soft pine decking, March 23, 1927. The sizes of decking conform to the table of sizes for factory flooring, heavy flooring, decking, and

sheet piling of the American Lumber Standards,

411.0, yard lumber. The grades are the same as those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine Association for pine flooring, 411.27.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

decking, April, 1927. The sizes of decking are as shown in the table of

sizes for factory flooring, heavy roofing, decking,

and sheet piling, American Lumber Standards for yard lumber, 411.0. The grades of decking are the same as factory

flooring, 411.29.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for ship stock, Schedule M, 1925. Douglas fir ship plank.

Including out-board planking, garboard, wales,

clamps, rails, and lumber for similar purposes, shall be firm grain free from large knots or other defects, impairing its use for the purposes intended. Will allow small, tight, hard knots when not on face corners or calking seam. Bright sap on face side edges not exceeding one-fourth the width or thickness. Small pitch pockets and/or pitch blisters not

extending through the thickness of the piece. Said

defects to be considered in connection with size of

piece and its quality otherwise. Occasional vari- ations in sawing allowed. Douglas fir decking.

Rules for Douglas fir decking are the same as the

rules of this association for Port Orford cedar,

413.4. Port Orford cedar ship decking.

Must be uniformly sawn and must be free from

knots on face side and upper half of calking edges. Will allow one small narrow bark seam not to ex- ceed 3 inches in length for each 12 linear feet, bright sap whether green or seasoned on face side corner not exceeding one-fourth the width and one-half the

thickness. On underside and lower half of calking

edges will allow small knots 1 inch or less in diameter

and/or small bark seams or bird's-eye burls. Defects

in all cases to be considered in connection with size of piece. Flat sizes shall show edge grain on broad

face. Port Orford cedar No. t boat boards or planks. Boat boards or plaiJii shall be of sound lumber,

well manufactured, occasional variations in sawing

permitted. Must be free from heart centers, rot and dote; otherwise shall be as follows: Width,

6 inches and wider in multiples of 1 inch. Length,

12 to 32 feet. Anything over 32 feet at mill's option

or special contract. Standard thickness.—1, 13^) and 2 inches. Measurements.—Lengths shall be measured in multiples of 1 foot. Standard defects allowed as follows: A knot or burl not over z/i inch in diameter, showing on two

sides. A knot or burl not over 1 inch in diameter,

showing on one side only. Two 3^-mch knots or

burls not exceeding in extent or damage one 1-inch knot. A small bark seam, if not 3 inches in length not extending through the piece. Straight split not

exceeding in length the width of the piece.

Bright sap shall not be considered a defect. Slight wane that will cut out in shaping the plank

shall not be considered a defect. Defects permitted in standard lengths.—Widths 6 to 8 inches, inclusive, will admit 1 standard defect; 9 to 12 inches wide, inclusive, will admit 2 standard

defects; 13 to 15 inches, inclusive, will admit 3 standard defects; 16 inches and wider will admit

4 standard defects. Based on length of 22 feet. Defects permitted and enumerated are intended to mean the admission of such defect in the finished board or plank.

Port Orford cedar No. 2 boat boards or plank. Will permit any board regardless of defects, if 70 per cent of the board will make, permitting stand- ard defects in finished board, a boat board, it being

understood that the boat board extends the full length of the piece. Port Orford cedar No. 1 unedged or tapering boat boards. Widths.—8 inches and wider to average at least 12 inches wide. Lengths, 12 to 40 feet to average

20 feet. Standard thickness, 1, 1^£, 1}4> and 2

inches. 257
413.4 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Measurements.—Lengths shall be multiples of 1 foot: Widths in multiple's of 1 inch. Tapering lumber will be measured for width at a point one-third the length from the narrow end. Unedged lumber

will be measured on the narrow face inside the bark

or wane at the middle of the length.

Standard defects permitted as follows: (1) A knot

or burl not over z/i inch in diameter, showing on two sides. (2) A knot or burl not over 1 inch in diameter showing on one side only. (3) Two small knots or burls not exceeding in extent or damage

one 1-inch knot. (4) A small bark seam if not extending through the thickness of the piece. (5) A straight split not exceeding 12 inches in length.

Bright sap or wane shall not be considered defects. Dejects allowed in standard lengths.—8 to 12 inches

wide, inclusive, may have 2 standard defects: 13 to 15 inches wide, inclusive, may have 3 standard

defects; 15 inches and wider may have 4 standard

defects. Defects enumerated and permitted are intended to mean the admission of such defects in the finished board or plank. Port Orford cedar No. 2 unedged or tapering boat boards. Any board permissible regardless of defects if 70

per cent of the board will make, permitting standard

defects in the finished board, a boat board; it being

understood that the boat board extends the full length of the piece.

Widths, 8 inches and wider. Lengths, 12 to 40

feet. Standard thickness, 1, 1}4> and 2 inches. Measurements.—Lengths shall be measured in multiples of 1 foot. Widths in multiples of 1 inch. Tapering lumber will be measured for width at a point

one-third the length from the narrow end. Unedged

lumber will be measured on the narrow face inside the bark or wane at the middle of the length. Split

ends over 12 inches will be deducted from the length

of the piece at the time of shipment.

Southeastern Forest Products Association, sizes and grades for southern pine decking, September

1, 1925. The sizes of pine decking conform to the table of

sizes for factory flooring, heavy flooring, decking,

and sheet piling of the American Lumber Standards,

411.0, yard lumber. The grades are the same as the grades of this association for pine flooring, 411.27. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for ship stock, June 15, 1925. The grades of boat stock are the same as the grades

of this association for tank stock, No. 413.1. Southern Pine Association, sizes and grades for southern pine decking, March 23, 1927. The sizes of decking conform to the table of sizes for factory flooring, heavy flooring, decking, and

sheet piling of the American Lumber Standards,

411.0, yard lumber. The grades are the same as the grades of this association for pine flooring, No. 411.27. Southern Pine Association, the Gulf coast classi- fication of pitch pine, grading rules for ship stock,

March 15, 1923.

Decking.

Sizes.—

2 by 3, 4, 5. 3 by 3, 4, 5. 4 by 4, 5. Lengths.—18 feet and up.

First quality.

Must be all heart, free from centers, knots, knot

holes, splits, shakes, wane, red heart, rot, pitch

pockets, and wormholes, except as follows: On

best face and half of depth of edges adjoining best

face, will permit sound knots not exceeding 3^ inch

in diameter, provided not located on corners. Sap

3^ inch in width permitted on one corner of the face and both corners of the back. On back and half of depth of edges adjoining back, will permit sound

knots and pith knots not exceeding 1^£ inches in diameter, also pitch pockets.

Second quality.

Must be heart face, free from centers, knots, knot

holes, rot, splits, shakes, wane, red heart, pitch

pockets over inch wide, and wormholes, except as

follows: Sound knots permitted on face if not over

1 inch in diameter; sound knots and pith knots on

edges and back may be 2 inches in diameter. Pitch

pockets no defect on edges or back. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for ship stock, July 1, 1926. Ship decking.

Rules for ship decking are the same as the rules of the Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau for Port

Orford Cedar Ship Decking, No. 413.4. Ship plank, rough.—Out-board planking, gar- boards, wales, clamps, rails, and lumber for similar purposes shall be free from large or rotten knots. Must be well manufactured. Will admit small sound and tight knots when not on face side corners

of calking seam; bright sap on face side corners not

exceeding x/i width or thickness; small (4-inch)

pitch pockets not extending through the piece. Defects to be considered in connection with size and length of piece and its quality otherwise. 413.5 STOCK FOR HANDLES, FURNITURE,

AND VEHICLES.

413.51 Handle Stock.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

413.52 Veneer and Plywood.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0 for softwood factory and shop lumber. American Society for Testing Materials, tentative

specifications for canned food boxes, wire-bound

construction 7 D45-17T, 1917. Manufacture. Boxes shall be well manufactured from sound

(free from decay or dote), well-seasoned veneer and

" The complete specification includes methods of assembly and

o ther data pertaining to the construction of wire-bound boxes. 258
LUMBER FOE BUILDING AND FACTORY USB 413.52

cleat lumber. Kiln drying by excessively high

temperatures or low humidities or below 6 per

cent moisture shall be avoided. Veneer shall be

free from knot holes, loose or rotten knots greater

than 1 inch in diameter. Cleats shall be free from

knots and from excessive cross grain. No knots

will be permitted which will interfere with proper

nailing or stapling . Each side, top, and end shall be of a single piece of veneer; the bottoms shall consist of not more than two pieces, no piece less than 4 inches in width.

Cleats.—Each end shall be cleated with four

cleats not less than by f§ inch, or any other size cleats that have equally large cross section. One

end of each cleat shall be provided with a tenon 34 inch thick and |f inch long and the other end with

the corresponding mortise. Cleats may be made of any of the following species of wood:

Red gum. Oak.

Black gum. Sycamore.

Maple. Ash.

Birch. Hickory.

Beech. Hackberry.

Tupelo. Yellow pine.

Elm.

American Veneer and Plywood Industry. Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 59, Rotary-Cut

Lumber Stock for Wire-Bound Boxes, effective November 1, 1926. In accordance with the unanimous action on

September 23, 1926, of a general conference of producers and consumers of rotary-cut lumber stock

for wire-bound boxes, the Department of Commerce,

through the Bureau of Standards, recommends the establishment of the following simplified list of dimensions for air and kiln dried stock produced

from gum and pine and other soft woods:

Table 1 Lengths inches. _ 32, 36, 40, 48, 54, 60. Widths do____ 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16. Thicknesses do }4, t&> Z2, Table 2 Thicknesses 8 inches. _ This recommendation is to be, effective from November 1, 1926, subject to regular semiannual revision by a similar conference or the standing committee

of the industry.

National Hardwood lumber Association, rules for the measurement and grading of rotary cut veneer, January, 1927. ROTARY CUT COTTONWOOD, CYPRESS, GUM, POPLAR, SYCA- MORE, TUPELO (OR BAY POPLAR), AND YELLOW PINE Stock shall be of uniform and standard machine

gauge thickness. Stock of all grades and kinds

must be cut solid and dried so that it will not mold

8 The volume of consumption of ys and inch thickness rotary- cut lumber stock being problematical at this time, both of the thick- nesses are included in this recommendation until future surveys

indicate their complete elimination or retention as standards.

or damage in transit, and be sufficiently flat to

straighten under the press without splitting. Surface dimensions shall always be given: First, the thickness; second, the width across the grain;

and third, the length with the grain.

All specifications for special stock, not covered by these rules, shall be a matter of special contract between the buyer and the seller. Measurement.

All log run and sheet stock of random widths

shall be measured by taping, and all dimension

stock in all grades shall be computed on the basis of the sizes given and without allowance for trimming.

Cutting.

The word "cutting" as used in these rules means

a portion of a sheet of veneer obtained by cross- cutting or ripping, or both. The term "clear face cutting" as used in these rules means a portion of the sheet of the veneer to be face grade and to be

obtained by crosscutting or ripping, or both. Dimension stock. All dimension stock, in any thickness, in any kind

of wood, shall be machine cut to the length specified, and if allowance is desired for trimming,

buyer's specifications should be for length required,

including trimming, and stock is to be billed and

measured at actual length cut and all dimension

sizes may be a trifle full as to width. Unless other- wise specifically stated, all stock for dimension

sizes is to be cut to the sizes specified in one piece

stock, and, in addition, to include what part pieces the logs produce, provided the amount of part pieces does not exceed the percentages of part pieces as pre- scribed in these rules under the captions "cross banding" and "core, or center stock." Part pieces are to be of sufficient width to make allowance for jointing and part pieces are to be as wide as possible. All dimension stock must be cut so that it will square to the dimension specified.

STANDARD GRADES The standard grades of commercial rotary-cut veneer shall be as follows: Faces. Sound backs. Reject backs. Drawer bottoms.

Cross banding.

Core, or center stock. Selected, or unselected log run.

Selected, or unselected sheet stock. Faces. Stock of any thickness, in any kind of wood,

unselected for color and shall be free from all defects except slight splits that will close in laying. Selected or figured face stock of any thickness to be

the same grade as face stock, except that it shall be

selected as to color or figure

Sound backs. Stock of any thickness, in any kind of wood,

unselected for color, and shall admit sound knots,

splits that will close in laying, pin wormholes and

sound discolorations. Stock to be smoothly cut.

259
413.52 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Stock of any thickness, in any kind of wood, unselected for color, and shall admit knots, wormholes,

discolorations, grub or knot holes not over 1 inch in diameter, rough or loose cutting, open splits or checks not to exceed 3^2 inch in width and 25 per cent of the length of the piece. Drawer bottoms. Stock of any thickness in any kind of wood to be

unselected for color. To be free from splits, but may

permit small tight knots, sap stains, and slight dis- colorations; otherwise to be face grade.

Cross-banding.

Stock of j^-inch or less in thickness, in any kind of wood, to be unselected for color, free from open

defects, but shall admit pin wormholes, sound dis- colorations and splits that will close in laying (splits to be not more than 15 per cent of the length of the

piece) ; not less than 50 per cent of each size shall be

free from knots and splits. All stock not exceeding 40 inches in length shall contain not to exceed the following percentages of part pieces: All stock up to and including 30-inch widths, 15

per cent in two and three pieces. All stock 31 to 44 inch widths, inclusive, 25 per

cent in two and three pieces. All stock 45 to 59 inch widths, inclusive, 35 per

cent in two and three pieces. All stock 60 to 73 inch widths, inclusive, 50 per

cent in two, three, and four pieces. All stock 74 to 86 inch widths, inclusive, 65 per cent in two, three, and four pieces.

(On piece stock 3^ inch must be allowed on each

piece for jointing.) Core, or center stock. Stock of xVinch or thicker, in any kind of wood,

to be unselected for color, to be free from open

defects, but shall admit pin wormholes, sound dis- colorations, splits that will close in laying and other sound defects (splits to be no more than 15 per cent

of the length of the piece)

All stock not exceeding 40 inches in length shall contain not to exceed the following percentages of part pieces

All stock up to and including 30-inch widths, 25

per cent in two and three pieces. All stock 31 to 44 inch widths, inclusive, 35 per

cent in two and three pieces. All stock 45 to 59 inch widths, inclusive, 40 per

cent in two and three pieces. All stock 60 to 73 inch widths, inclusive, 55 per

cent in two, three, and four pieces. All stock 74 to 86 inch widths, inclusive, 70 per

cent in two, three, and four pieces.

(On piece stock ^ inch must be allowed on each

piece for jointing.)

Log run. Log-run stock must grade no less than 30 per cent

clear face cutting, in one or more cuttings, the full length or full width of the sheet, and no less than 50

per cent cutting in one or more cuttings, in core stock grade the full length or full width of the sheet;

no cutting to be considered that is less than 6 inches

in width. In all thicknesses up to and including ^ inch, the stock shall be 6 inches and up wide, not less than

50 per cent 18 inches and up wide; to be 36 inches and up long and at least 50 per cent 60 inches and

longer. In all thicknesses of ^ inch and thicker, the stock

shall be 6 inches and up wide, not less than 50 per

cent 16 inches and up wide; to be 36 inches and up

long and at least 50 per cent 60 inches and longer. Selected log run shall be of the same specifications

except that it shall be selected for color. Sheet stock. Stock of any thickness must grade at least 50 per

cent clear face cutting, in one or more cuttings,

with not over 35 per cent core stock cutting, in one or more cuttings, all cuttings to be full length

of full width of the sheet, no cutting to be considered that is less than 6 inches wide. In all thicknesses up to and including inch

the stock shall be 7 inches and up wide, to be 36

inches and up long, with at least 75 per cent 62

inches and longer, and at least 60 per cent 74 inches and longer. In all thicknesses of ^ to 3^ inch, inclusive, stock

shall be 6 inches and up wide, at least 75 per cent

11 inches and wider; to be 36 inches and up long, at least 80 per cent 60 inches and longer, and must

have at least 75 per cent of the total 82 inches and

longer, with at least 60 per cent of the total 86

inches and longer. In all stock thicker than % inch, the stock shall be 6 inches and up wide, at least 75 per cent 11 inches and wider; to be 36 inches and up long, at

least 80 per cent 60 inches and longer, and must

have not less than 75 per cent of the total 74 inches and longer. Selected sheet stock shall be of the same specifications, except that it shall be selected for color or

figure. When crating is specified in sheet grade, the veneer

shall be crated one length to the crate and random

widths. ROTARY-CUT RED OAK, WHITE OAK, AND CHESTNUT

Bright sap which shows the same character and

grain figure as heartwood shall not be regarded as a defect. Faces. Stock of any thickness shall be free from all defects except slight splits that will close in laying, and

except slight mineral streaks. Sound backs. Stock of any thickness, unselected for color, and

shall admit sound knots, splits that will close in

laying, pin wormholes and sound discolorations. Stock to be smoothly cut. Reject backs. Stock of any thickness, unselected for color, and

shall admit knots, wormholes, discolorations, grub

or knot holes not over 1 inch in diameter, rough or 260
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.52

loose cutting, open splits or checks not to exceed

3^ inch in width and 25 per cent of the length of the piece. Sheet stock. Stock of under ^ inch in thickness must grade at

least 50 per cent clear face cuttings, in one or more

cuttings, the full length of the sheet. Stock of ^2 iQch and thicker when 82 inches and

longer must grade at least 50 per cent clear face

cuttings, in one or more cuttings, not less than 82

inches long.

Stock of Y2 inch and thicker when under 82 inches

in length must grade at least 50 per cent clear face

cuttings, in one or more cuttings, either the full length or full width of the sheet. In all thicknesses no cutting is to be considered that is less than 6 inches wide. In all thicknesses up to and including XV inch the

stock shall be 6 inches and up wide, at least 90 per cent 8 inches and up wide, and at least 60 per cent

11 inches and up wide; to be 36 inches and up long,

with at least 75 per cent 62 inches and longer, and

at least 60 per cent 74 inches and longer. In all thicknesses of inch and thicker the stock

shall be 6 inches and up wide, in all lengths 82 inches and longer; stock under 82 inches long to be 6 inches and up wide, with at least 75 per cent 9 inches and

up wide, the entire shipment to be at least 60 per

cent 11 inches and wider; to be 36 inches and up

long, at least 75 per cent of the total 82 inches and

up long, with at least 60 per cent of the total 86

inches and up long.

Where crating is specified on sheet stock grade, the veneer shall be crated one length to the crate and in random widths. ROTARY-CUT ASH, BASSWOOD, BEECH, BIRCH, ELM, AND

MAPLE

No. 1 grade (faces). Sheets of any thickness will admit sap, splits that close, and slight discolorations, otherwise must

be clear. Select No. 1. Sheets of any tkickness, graded the same as the No. 1 grade except that it shall be selected as to

color. No. 2 grade (sound backs, cross banding center stock, and drawer bottoms). Sheets of any thickness shall admit sound knots, firm doze, splits that close, pin wormholes, discolor- ations smoothly cut. No. 3 grade (reject backs and box stock). Sheets of any thickness shall admit knots, worm

holes, discoloration, grub or knot holes, not over 1 inch in diameter, rough or loose cutting, open splits and checks, not to exceed 3^ inch in width and 25

per cent of length of piece. Selected sheet stock. Each sheet must be clear face, unselected for

color random widths, 534 to 38 inches wide; 42

inches long and longer. In all thicknesses up to and including TV inch the sheet shall be 9 to 38

inches wide; to be 42 inches and longer with 75 per

cent 62 inches and longer. In all thicknesses of &

to 3^ inch, inclusive, the sheets shall be 534 to 38

inches wide, 50 per cent 11 inches and wider; to be

42 inches and up long, 75 per cent to be 82 inches and longer. No. 1 sheet stock. Unselected for color and random widths, 534 to 38 inches wide; 42 inches long and longer. In all thicknesses up to and including inch, the sheets

shall be 9 to 38 inches wide; to be 42 inches long and

longer, with 75 per cent 62 inches and longer. Each

sheet to grade 75 per cent clear face cutting and each

cutting to be either full length or full width of the

sheet. No cutting considered less than 9 inches wide. In all thicknesses of ^ to ^ inch, inclusive, the sheet shall be 534 "to 38 inches wide, 50 per cent

11 inches and wider; to be 42 inches and up long, 75 per cent to be 82 inches and longer. Each sheet

to grade 75 per cent clear face cutting, and each cut- ting to be either full length or full width of the

sheet. No cutting considered less than 534 inches

wide. No. 2 sheet stock. No. 2 sheet stock shall consist of stock of any

thickness unselected for color and random widths

and lengths 6 to 38 inches wide, 42 inches and up

long, 75 per cent to be 12 inches and up wide, 50 per

cent to be 82 inches and up long. Each sheet to contain at least 50 per cent of No. 1 face cuttings, no cutting to be figured less than 6 inches wide or under 42 inches long. Balance of the sheet shall be

suitable for No. 2 and No. 3 grades. RULES FOR THE MEASUREMENT AND GRADING OF SAWN AND SLICED VENEER Measurement. Tape measure shall be the standard measurement

in all thicknesses, and the width shall be taped midway of the flitch. In computing the feet in a flitch the actual length

of the flitch shall be used. To obtain the number of square feet the flitch contains, multiply the width in

feet and inches as shown by the tape by the length

of the flitch in feet and 34 feet. In determining the width of the bevel flitch, the average width of the sheets shall be the width of the

flitch. In computing cuttings, the flitch shall be taken as a unit. Cutting.

The term " clear" and the term " cutting," as used in these rules, means a piece of veneer free from

defects, excepting as may be otherwise specified

under the captions of the respective woods and

grades. Cuttings may be obtained by crosscutting,

by ripping, or by both crosscutting and ripping.

QUARTERED WHITE AND RED OAK

Grades Selected. Standard. Common.

All flitches must show 90 per cent of figure in the

aggregate.

261
413.52 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Selected, x§- inch and thinner. Thickness.—rg- inch and thinner. Widths.—(a) 6 inches to 9% inches, inclusive, not to exceed 10 per cent of total feetage under 7

inches; (6) 10 inches to 11^ inches, inclusive;

(c) 12 inches and up.

Lengths.—8 feet and longer. Fifteen per cent of bright sap wood in the aggregate admitted in this grade. Veneer must be smoothly manufactured and

uniform in thickness. Flitches 6 to 9

z/i inches wide, 8 to 9 feet long,

inclusive, must produce at least one cutting 56

inches long; 10 to 11 feet long, inclusive, must pro- duce at least one cutting 56 inches long, and one

cutting 36 inches long; 12 feet and longer must pro- duce two cuttings 56 inches long or longer, excepting

that at least 25 per cent of the 16-foot flitches must

produce three cuttings, 56 inches long or longer.

Each cutting must be at least 95 per cent of the width of the heart wood.

All flitches of 10 inches and wider to be graded

under the above rules for flitches 6 inches to 9%

inches wide, excepting that each cutting must be at

least 90 per cent of the width of the heartwood.

Standard, yg inch and thinner. Thicknesses.—y& inch and thinner. Widths.—(a) 6 to 9% inches, inclusive, not to exceed 40 per cent of total feetage under 8 inches;

(6) 10 to 11^4 inches, inclusive; (c) 12 inches and up.

Lengths.—6 feet and longer.

Bright sapwood is not a defect. Veneer must be smoothly manufactured and

uniform in thickness.

Slight mineral streaks or other slight discolor- ations are not to be considered a defect in this grade.

All flitches must produce at least 80 per cent

cuttings; no cutting to be considered which is less than 6 inches wide and 24 inches long.

Common, r§- inch and thinner. Thicknesses.—r§- inch and thinner. Widths.—5 inches and wider.

Lengths.—4 feet and longer.

Sapwood is not a defect. Mineral streaks or other discolorations are not

to be considered a defect in this grade.

AH flitches must produce at least 60 per cent

cuttings; no cutting to be considered which is less than 5 inches wide and 18 inches long.

Standard, ^2 inch and thicker. Thicknesses.—^2 inch and thicker. Widths.—(a) 5 to 9% inches, inclusive, 50 per

cent must be 7 to 8 feet, and 14 to 16 feet long;

(b) 10 to 11% inches, inclusive, random lengths;

(c) 12 inches and up, random lengths.

Lengths.—7 feet and longer.

Bright sapwood is not a defect. Veneer must be smoothly manufactured and

uniform in thickness.

Slight mineral streaks or other slight discolor- ations are not to be considered a defect in this grade.

Flitches 5 to 6^ inches wide, 7 to 8 feet long,

must be clear; 9 to 11 feet long must produce at

least one cutting 7 feet long; 12 to 13 feet long must

produce at least one cutting 7 feet long, and one

cutting 3 feet long; 90 per cent of the 14 and 16 foot lengths must produce at least two cuttings 7 feet long. The remaining 10 per cent of these lengths

must produce at least one cutting 7 feet long. These

cuttings to be by the width of the flitch. Flitches 7 to 9% inches wide, 7 to 11 feet long,

must produce one cutting 7 feet long or longer; 12

to 13 feet long, must produce at least one cutting

7 feet long, and one cutting 3 feet long; 90 per cent

of the 14 to 16 foot lengths must produce at least two cuttings 7 feet long, the remaining 10 per cent

of these lengths must produce at least one cutting

7 feet long. No cutting to be considered which is less than 6 inches wide.

Flitches 10 inches and wider, 7 feet long and

longer, must produce at least 75 per cent of cuttings

3 feet long or longer by the width of the flitch. Common, ^2 inch and thicker. Thicknesses.—TV inch and thicker. Widths.—5 inches and wider.

Lengths.—4 feet and longer.

Sapwood is not a defect. Mineral streaks or other discolorations are not to be considered a defect in this grade.

All flitches must produce at least 60 per cent

cuttings; no cutting to be considered which is less than 4 inches wide and 24 inches long. PLAIN WHITE AND RED OAK

Grades Standard. Common.

Standard, y& inch and thinner. Thicknesses.—t& inch and thinner. Widths.—(a) 6 to 9% inches, inclusive; (6) 10

inches and up. Lengths.—7 feet and longer.

Bright sapwood is not a defect. Veneer must be smoothly manufactured and uni- form in thickness.

Slight streaks, slight mineral stains, or other

slight discolorations, and burls which do not contain knots or unsound centers, are not to be considered

defects in this grade.

All flitches must produce at least 80 per cent cuttings; no cutting to be considered which is less than

6 inches wide and 24 inches long.

Common, ys inch and thinner. Thicknesses.—^ inch and thinner. Widths.—5 inches and wider.

Lengths.—4 feet and longer.

Sapwood is not a defect. Streaks, mineral stains, or other discolorations,

widely scattered small sound knots, not exceeding

~}/s inch in diameter, and burls which do not contain

knots or unsound centers, are not to be considered

defects in this grade.

All flitches must produce at least 60 per cent cuttings; no cutting to be considered which is less than

5 inches wide and 18 inches long.

262
LUMBER TOE BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.52

Standard, yj inch and thicker. Thicknesses.—^ inch and thicker. Widths.—(a) 53^ to 9% inches, inclusive, 50 per

cent must be 7 to 8 feet and 14 to 16 feet; (6) 10 to 11% inches, random lengths; (c) 12 inches and up, random lengths.

Lengths.—7 feet and longer.

Bright sapwood is not a defect. Veneer must be smoothly manufactured and uni- form in thickness.

Slight streaks, slight mineral stains, or other

slight discolorations, widely scattered small sound

knots, not exceeding y% inch in diameter, and burls which do not contain knots or unsound centers, are not to be considered defects in this grade.

Flitches 53^ to 6M inches wide, 7 to 8 feet long

must be clear; 9 to 11 feet long must produce at

least one cutting 7 feet long; 12 to 13 feet long must

produce at least one cutting 7 feet long and one cut- ting 3 feet long; 90 per cent of the 14 and 16 foot lengths must produce at least two cuttings 7 feet long, the remaining 10 per cent of these lengths must

produce at least one cutting 7 feet long. These

cuttings to be by the width of the flitch. Flitches 7 to 9M inches wide, 7 to 11 feet long, must

produce one cutting 7 feet long or longer; 12 to 13

feet long must produce at least one cutting 7 feet long, and one cutting 3 feet long; 90 per cent of the

14 to 16 foot lengths must produce at least two

cuttings 7 feet long, the remaining 10 per cent of these lengths must produce at least one cutting 7

feet long. No cutting to be considered which is less than 6 inches wide.

Flitches 10 inches and wider, 7 feet long and longer

must produce at least 75 per cent of cuttings 3 feet long or longer by the width of the flitch. Common, ^2 inch and thicker. Thicknesses.—^ mcn and thicker. Widths.—5 inches and wider.

Lengths.—4 feet and longer.

Sapwood is not a defect. Streaks, mineral stains, or other discolorations,

widely scattered small sound knots, not exceeding

Y% inch in diameter, and burls which do not contain knots or unsound centers, are not to be considered defects in this grade.

All flitches must produce at least 60 per cent

clear cuttings; no cutting to be considered which

is less than 4 inches wide and 24 inches long. RULES FOR TEE GRADING AND MEASUREMENT OF SAWN

RED GUM VENEER Measurement.

Identical with the rules of this association for the measurement and grading of sawn and sliced veneer. (See 413.52.)

Cutting. Identical with the rules of this association for the measurement and grading of sawn and sliced veneer. (See 413.52.) Grades. Standard. Common.

QUARTERED RED GUM, FIGURED

Standard, ^2 inch and thicker. Thicknesses.—yj inch and thicker. Widths.—(a) 5 to 9

%/i inches, inclusive, 50 per

cent must be 7 to 8 feet, and 14 to 16 feet long;

(6) 10 to 11^ inches, inclusive, random lengths;

(c) 12 inches and up, random lengths.

Lengths.—7 feet and longer.

Each flitch shall be especially selected for markings and color tones. Ten per cent of bright sap wood is not a defect. Veneer must be smoothly manufactured and

uniform in thickness. Otherwise standard grade of quartered red gum

figured veneer to be graded under the rules applying to standard grade of quartered sawn oak veneer

inch thicker. Common, inch and thicker. Thicknesses.—^ mcn an<3 thicker. Widths.—5 inches and wider.

Lengths.—4 feet and longer.

Each flitch shall be especially selected for markings and color tones. Twenty per cent bright sapwood is not a defect. All flitches must produce at least 60 per cent cuttings; no cutting to be considered which is less than 4 inches wide and 24 inches long.

QUARTERED RED GUM, UNFIGURED

Rules for grades of standard and common as

specified for quartered red gum figured shall apply,

except that it is not required that stock shall be

especially selected for markings and color tones. RULES FOR THE GRADING AND MEASUREMENT OF SAWN

AND SLICED PIANO RIM STOCK Tape measure to govern for the full width and

length of each sheet; measurement to include up

to 1 inch in excess of width ordered. There is no limit to sapwood or heartwood in

this grade.

Sixty per cent of the quantity of each order shall be practically free of defects excepting that one

6-inch split, pin wormholes, or equivalent defects may be admitted in each sheet. Each sheet to be

of such quality as to permit of smooth laying.

Forty per cent of the quantity of each order may

contain sound or discolored wood, wormholes,

unsound knots, if not located on the edge, heart

cracks 34 inch by 24 inches or equivalent defects. Each sheet to be used for center stock. PLYWOOD

Specifications for faces of panels and tops, grade A. Figured and plain woods, matched for uniform

figure and color. Excessive discoloration, face depressions, sap, knots, and wormholes eliminated. Smooth finished. (See Notes 2 and 3.) Grade 1. Random figure or grain, matched for color only.

Tight joints, sap, slight discoloration and sound pin knots not considered defects. Patches properly

made permissible. Sanded or scraped. (See Notes

2 and 3.) 52688°—27 18 263
413.52 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Grade 2. Not matched for color or grain. Slightly open

joints, sap with discoloration, burls, sound knots,

and patches permissible. Sanded or scraped. Note 1. —Any specifications for face and back veneer other than

these rules shall be a matter of special contract between buyer and

seller. Note 2.—In some instances it is desirable to include sap to produce

best effect in matching in walnut, figured gum, and other woods on

the faces; therefore, the matter of eliminating sap is considered

optional. Note 3.—Slight mineral streaks are not considered a defect in plain and quartered oak. Grade 8. Any kind or kinds of wood. Doze, stain, pithy

knots, discolorations, burls, loose cutting, ard open

joints permissible. Not sanded. Tape not removed.

Specification! for Backs of Panels and Tops Good backs. Specifications same as for grade 1 faces. Sound backs. Specifications same as for grade 2 faces. Reject backs. Any kind or kinds of wood. Supplied on panels

with one good face unless another grade is specified.

May contain doze, stain, unsound knots, wormholes,

checks, loose or rough cutting, splits, and open

joints. Not sanded. Tape not removed.

SPECIFICATIONS FOR LUMBER CORES Grade A. Made from any suitable core wood. Mixed woods

in the same core not permitted. Sound knots,

patching, and minor defects permissible. All joints

machined and tightly glued. All exposed edges

must be sound. Grade 1. Any suitable wood. Mixed wood not permitted

in the same core. Slightly open joints permitted.

Grade 2. Any kind or kinds of wood permitted, and may

be mixed in the same core. Must be reasonably

sound, but doze, stain, small open knots, or pin

wormholes and checks are permitted.

Note.—Any specifications for lumber cores other than these rules

shall be a matter of special contract between buyer and seller. 413.53 Other Furniture Stock.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber

Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0 for softwood factory and shop lumber.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for other furniture stock, January, 1927. FURNITURE DIMENSION STOCK

Squares and Flat Stock Stock shall be straight, flat, and square edged.

Sap a defect in red gum, cherry, mahogany, and

unsteamed walnut unless otherwise specified.

Lengths.

Must be of full length and should be 3^ to 2 inches longer than specified. All pieces must be

free from end checks the full lengths specified. Pieces may be in multiple lengths. Thickness. Flat stock will admit 10 per cent not more than

1/16 inch scant in thickness in 1}4 inches and thinner, and not more than 3^8 inch scant in l

1^ inches and thicker. Squares will admit 10 per cent not

not more than 1/16 inch scant in one or both

dimensions in sizes 134 inches or smaller and not more than y% inch scant in one or both dimensions

in sizes V/2 inches or larger. General instructions as to miscut lumber shall apply. Widths.

Flat stock will admit not exceeding 10 per cent not more than 1/16 inch scant in widths 3 inches and narrower and 3^8 inch scant in widths over 3

inches. Note.—Six per cent of the shipment may consist of pieces having

defects on the edge or end, or both, which must be measured off to make the grade or a smaller size. Furniture Squares Clear. Clear four sides and two ends.

Selects. Clear three corners and two adjacent faces, the remaining corner and two faces to be clear 3^

length, the other half will permit sound defects and wane not exceeding 34 the thickness of the pieces.

Common.

Admit pin and spot wormholes, sound bird pecks, small sound knots not exceeding 3^ inch in dia- meter and other sound defects which do not exceed

in extent or damage the defects described, except

that knots will not be admitted on the corners.

Furniture Flat Stock Clear. Clear four sides and two ends.

Select. Clear two edges and two ends and to have one

clear face, wane not exceeding }/± thickness of the

piece admitted on the reverse side of 25 per cent of the pieces.

Common.

Admits pin and spot wormholes, sound bird pecks, small sound knots not exceeding 3^ inch in diameter and other sound defects which do not exceed

in extent or damage the defects described, except

that knots will not be admitted on the corners.

Note.—Dimension stock for purposes not defined in these rules, shall be subject to contract between buyer and seller; where inspection is necessary, inspector must be furnished with a copy of the

specifications and contract. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for other furniture stock, July 1, 1926. Piano posts, b and better. Subject to contract. Piano posts, sounding-board stock. Subject to contract. 264
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.54

413.54 Wagon and Vehicle Stock. (See also 400.3 and 426.)

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July I, 1926. See 413. for softwood factory and shop lumber. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for wagon and vehicle stock, March 23, 1927. The grading rules for wagon and vehicle stock

are the same as those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine Association given below. National Association of Farm Equipment Manufacturers, grading rules for wagon and vehicle stock, 1921. WAGON STOCK

Standard dimensions. The following dimensions are the sizes adopted by

this association for rough materials in the green

state (unless otherwise specified) and are those in common demand by our members.

The star (*) prefixing any size indicates that that

size is more in demand than the unmarked sizes. Axles, hickory (6 feet long)

Inches Inches Inches 2% by 3% 3% by 4M *4K by 5^

*3 by 4 *4 by 5 *5 by 6 *3H by 43^ 4 by 5}4

^

by 6^

*3^ by 4^ 4M by 5M 6 by 7 Grading and inspection rules No. 1, or wagonmakers'

grade.

Adopted jointly by this association and the National Hardwood Lumber Association. Grade.—Live, tough, black or shellbark hickory, cut 6 feet in length, to include all the clear and perfect stock. Defects as follows admissible:

Stain.—Penetrating not more than ^ inch, and

which has not developed into a rotting condition. Knots.—Four sound pin knots not exceeding 34

inch in diameter, or two sound knots % inch in diameter near the center line longitudinally on top

or side and not over 12 inches of center or more than

6 inches of ends. Knots (except pin knots) not to be closer than 12 inches apart

Splits.—On either end, extending not more than

6 inches in axle or 3 inches on both ends. Season checks.—Not more than ^ inch deep and

not more than 12 inches long. Hearts or heart rings.—None.

Shakes.—That will plane out with i^-inch cut. Wormholes and grub holes.—Not more than two

pin wormholes not nearer than 6 inches to each

other. Not more than two grub holes that will penetrate more than 6 inches at either end of the piece.

Bird pecks.—Bird pecks allowed if sound, or if unsound, part is not to exceed ^ inch in diameter

and not over }/i inch in depth. Wane.—Axles with wane will be measured exclud- ing the wane.

Sap.—Bright sap considered no defect.

Grain.—Grain can cross 3 inches in entire length

of axle. Defects removable.—If defects not admitted can

be cut out so as to reduce axle to a smaller size used

and ordered by the buyer, it shall be so inspected.

Hewn axles shall be measured to square to the

size they are ordered. Defects at ends of axles that will admit of piece

working 5 feet 6 inches long will be admitted.

Maple axles (size same as hickory; No. 1, or wagonmakers1 grade).

(These rules have not been adopted either by the wagon manufacturers or mills, but are suggested as being fair and equitable to both.)

To be cut from live, tough, hard maple (no bird's- eye or curly maple admitted), cut 6 and 12 foot

lengths, to include all the clear and perfect stock. Defects as follows admissible:

Stain.—Penetrating not more than inch and

which has not developed into a rotting condition. Knots.—Four sound pin knots not exceeding 34

inch in diameter, or two sound knots % inch in diameter, near the center line longitudinally on top

or side and not over 12 inches of center or more than

6 inches of ends. Knots (except pin knots) not to be closer than 12 inches apart.

Splits.—Splits on either end, extending not more

than 6 inches in the axle or 3 inches on both ends. Season checks.—Not more than 3^ inch deep and

not more than 12 inches long. Hearts or heart rings.—None.

Shakes.—That will plane out with Y% inch cut. Wormholes and grub holes.—Not more than two pin

wormholes not nearer than 6 inches to each other. Not more than two grub holes that will penetrate more than 6 inches at either end of the piece.

Bird pecks.—Bird pecks allowed if sound, or if unsound, part is not to exceed 3^ inch in diameter

and not over 34 inch in depth. Wane.—Axles with wane will be measured excluding the wane.

Sap.—Bright sap considered no defect. Grain.—Grain can cross 3 inches in entire length

of axle. Curls.—None.

Twelve-foot lengths to be inspected as two 6-foot lengths.

Defects removable.—If defects not admitted can

be cut so as to reduce axle to smaller size used and

ordered by the buyer, it shall be so inspected.

Bolsters, hickory or oak (length 4 feet 1 inch and 4 feet 6 inches or multiples).

Inches Inches Inches 3 by 4 3M by 4^ 3M by bV2 3 by 43^ 3M by 5 4 by 5

3 by 5 3V2 by 43^ 4 by 6 3 by 7 3% by ±%

Grading and inspection rules (No. 1, or wagonmakers'

grade. Grade.—To be cut from good, tough, straightgrained oak or hickory (when oak is specified it will be understood as being white or red oak) suitable 265
413.54 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

for wagon material. To be clear and perfect stocky

excepting the following defects, which will be admissible:

Stain.—Penetrating not more than f§ inch and

which shows no signs of rot. Knots.—One sound knot not over 3^ inch in diameter, not more than 12 inches from the center

of the piece, or three sound pin knots not exceeding

3^ inch in diameter located in same manner.

Splits.—None.

Season checks.—Not more than 3^ inch deep nor more than 12 inches long. Heart rings.—None.

Shakes.—If they can be planed out with 3^-inch

cut.Wormholes.—Not more than 6 pin wormholes

in a bolster, these holes not to be in cluster of more

than three holes 6 inches apart. Bird pecks.—Allowed if sound. Wane.—Will be measured excluding the wane.

Sap.—Bright sap accepted.

Grain.—Grain can cross 2 inches in length of bolster as maximum.

Defects removable.—If defects not admitted can be cut so as to reduce bolster to a smaller size used and ordered by the buyer, it shall be so inspected.

Sandboards, hickory or oak (length 4 feet 1 inch and

4 feet 6 inches or multiples).

Inches Inches Inches 2M by 3^ m by 3M 3^ by 4^

3 by3H * 33^ by 4 * 4 by 5

* 3 by 4 Grading and inspection rules (No. 1, or wagonmakers'

grade)

(Same as bolsters.) Reaches, hickory or oak. *ouY 1 8 and 10 feet long. 2 by 43^ inches J & 2M by 43^ inches 1 * 23^ by 43^ inches. __|l0, 12, and 14 feet long.

23^2 by 5 inches J Grading and inspection rules (No. 1, or wagonmakers1

Grade.—To be cut from good, tough, straightgrained oak or hickory (when oak is specified it will be understood as being white or red oak)

suitable for wagon material. To be clear and perfect stock, free from knots, splits, hearts, grub

holes, heart rings, shakes, bird pecks, or wane.

Bright sap accepted. The following defects will be admitted:

Stain.—Penetrating not more than ys inch and

which shows no signs of rot. Season checks.—Not over 34 inch deep or 12

inches long.

Wormholes.—Not more than six pin wormholes

in a reach, these holes not to be in clusters of more

than three holes 6 inches apart. Wane.—Stock with wane will be measured ex- cluding the wane.

Poles, ash or oak. For drop poles

* 2Y2 by 4 by 4 by 4, 12 feet. 23^ by 43^ by 4H by 4^, 12 feet. For stiff poles

V/2 by 23^ by 23^ by 5, 12 feet. 2M by 2M by 2% by 5, 12 feet. 3 by 3 by 3 by 5, 12 feet. 3K by 3M by 3M by 5, 12 feet. Grading and inspection rules (No. 1, or wagonmakers*

grade)

Grade.—To be cut from good, tough, straightgrained oak or ash (when oak is specified it will be

understood as being white or red oak) suitable for wagon material. To be clear and perfect stock free from knots, splits, hearts, grub holes, heart rings,

shakes, or bird pecks. Bright sap accepted. The

following defects will be admitted:

Stain.—Penetrating not more than inch and

which shows no signs of rot. Season checks.—Not over 34 inch deep or 12 inches

long.

Wormholes.—Not more than six pin wormholes

in a pole, these holes not to be clusters of more than

three holes 6 inches apart. Wane.—Stock with wane will be measured, excluding the wane.

Eveners, hickory. 2 by 4 inches I 4 feet 2 inches long> 2 by 43^ inches J 234 by 43^ inches.-. I .

, 2Y2 by 5 inches } 4 feet 6 inches lon^

Grading and inspection rules (No. 1, or wagonmakers*

grade)

Grade.—To be cut from good, tough, straightgrained hickory suitable for wagon material. To be

clear and perfect stock, free from knots, splits, hearts, grub holes, heart rings, shakes, wormholes,

or wane. The following defects are admissible:

Stain.—Penetrating not more than ^ inch and

which shows no signs of rot. Season checks.—Not over 34 inch deep or 12

inches long.

Wormholes.—None.

Bright sap.—No objection.

Bird pecks.—Sound bird pecks admitted.

Hickory, turned singletrees (oval diameters) . At center At ends Lengths

Light, 2 by 23^ inches. V/2 by l

5/i inches 34 and 36 inches long. Medium, 2M by 2M 1% by 1% inches Do.

inches. Heavy, 2%, by 3 inches 1% by 2 inches 36 inches long. Hickory, turned neckyokes (diameters)

At center At ends Lengths

Light, 2

l/i inches. ... \Yz inches. _ 40 and 44 inches long.

40, 44, and 48 inches

long. 44 and 48 inches long. Medium, 2% inches.

Heavy, 3 inches

1J4 inches

2 inches

266
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.54

No adopted rules for grading singletrees and

neckyokes, but stock must be absolutely clear and

made from young, tough hickory.

Sawed fellies, oak {26 -pieces to set). The sizes given are for green fellies cut full. Sizes most common

Inches Inches Inches 1% by V/2 2M by 2% 2% by 3 *2 by 2% 3^by2M 3^ by 3 2Y2 by 2^ 2}4 by 3 ±y2 by 3

Circles 2 feet 11 inches and 3 feet 6—3 feet 2 inches and 3 feet 10—3 feet 6 inches and 4 feet 2. Grading and inspection rules (No. 1, or wagonmakers'

grade)

Grade.—Sound white or red oak, free from knots and all other defects, except that -rVinch stain will be allowed if said stain shows no sign of rot. Must

be manufactured so that grain will run straight

through center of each piece. Cut full sizes and

proper circles. Bent rims (8 pieces to set). The sizes given are for green rims.

Sizes most common

Inches Inches Inches 1% by 1% 3 by 2 4^ by 2y

2 by 2 3M by 2y 5 by 2 2y2 by 2 4 by 2 5^ by 2M

Circles 3 feet 2 inches and 3 feet 10—3 feet 6

inches—4 feet 2—3 feet 10 inches and 4 feet 6. Grade {wagon manufacturers' grade).

(To replace what was formerly XXX.)

These rules agreed upon jointly by the Wagon

and Rim Manufacturers, November 21, 1906.

Materials.—Oak (any desirable species).

Quality.—Clear and straight grained, but not

excluding reasonably straight, the grain not to

cross the rim in a less distance than 24 inches; to be sound, free from bark, wane, checks (except checks on tread side), shakes, splits, knots, and

wormholes, but admitting not more than three

small, sound knots, not more than y inch in diameter on tread side, also small wormholes not closer than 6 inches apart. Not over 15 per cent of any

shipment of rims shall be with knots or wormholes.

as above specified.

Workmanship.—Planed on top and bottom sides; no skips, tears, or imperfect planing. Bending to be on the true circle of the diameter specified. To

be free from flats or humps,- kinks, breaks, or buckles and no straight or drop ends. Hubs {oak or black birch). Sizes most common

Inches Inches Inches iy2 by Sy 9 by 10 10 by 11 8 by Sy 9 by 11 10 by 12 Sy by 9 93^ by 11 103^ by 12 Sy by 10 Wagon box boards. Material.—Basswood, bay poplar (tupelo) , cotton- wood, gum, poplar, and magnolia.

Widths.—Wide, 13 to 17 inches; narrow, 9 to

12 inches. Lengths.—11 to 16 feet. Thickness.—Must be 1 inch thick when shipping

dry.

Defects.—Bright or sound discolored sap or a few

scattered pin wormholes may be admitted; 11-foot lengths will admit 3-inch splits in one end, or their equivalent in one or both ends; 12, 13, 15, and 16

foot lengths will admit of a 12-inch split in one end or

its equivalent in one or both ends; 14-foot lengths

will admit 6-inch splits in one end or their equivalent in both ends; otherwise each piece in 11 to 13

foot lengths may contain defects that do not pre- vent the piece from cutting one side; or in each

piece 14 to 16 feet long; one side and one end; sides to work 10 feet 6 inches long, ends to work 3 feet 6 inches long by the full width of the piece. Each

side and end may contain one sound standard

defect, or its equivalent, showing on one side. Note.—Five per cent in feet of a shipment that can be reduced in measurement by cutting the end or edge of both to a size ordered must be accepted and measured as box boards; separate tally to be

kept of such boards, showing reduction in measurement. Inspectors

are cautioned that "wooly" Cottonwood and lumber so warped and

checked that it can not be used for box boards must be excluded from

this grade. Box bottom lumber.—Yellow pine.

13-16 D&M 3M face 12 feet long.

13-16 D&M 5y face 12 feet long, square one

(Put up in sets 38 and 42 inches in width.)

Some factories purchase standard dressed and

matched flat-grained flooring for this purpose, of the same dimensions.

Grading and inspection rules (No. 1, or wagonmakers' grade). Material.—Yellow or Norway pine or Oregon

fir. Must be well manufactured, full size, clear, except no more than three small sound knots not

exceeding y inch in diameter. No splits. WHITE OAK WAGOU SPOKES (Wagonmakers' Grades) Second-growth grade. Material.—Spokes of this grade are to be made

from first-quality timber, practically clear and

straight grained, of heavyweight and very dense growth that will indicate the very greatest strength. Checks.—Small, fine, season checks not to exceed

2 inches in length and not running into the shoulder admitted.

Splits.—None admitted.

Cross grain.—Grain which does not run at a

greater angle at any one point than 1 inch in 24 inches admitted.

Curly spokes are considered cross-grained and

not admitted.

Knots.—Spokes having knots will not be admitted, but spokes showing a small sound spot having

the appearance of a knot but which is only a sur- face blemish will be admitted.

Sap.—Half sap that is bright and sound admitted.

Bastard.—Not more than half bastard will be

admitted.

267
413.54 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Other defects.—Evident defects not above enumerated not admitted.

A grade. Material.—Spokes of this grade are to be made

from live timber of dense growth, good weight,

practically clear and straight grained.

Checks.—Small, fine, season checks not to exceed

2 inches in length and not running into the shoulder admitted.

Splits.—None admitted.

Cross grain.—Grain which does not run at a

greater angle at any one point than 1 inch in 20

inches will be admitted. Spokes reduced from the second growth grade by reason of cross grain will be admitted in this grade when the grain does not

cross at a greater angle than 1 inch in 18 inches. Curly spokes not admitted.

Knots.—Knots will not be admitted, but spokes

showing a small sound spot having the appearance

of a knot but which is only a surface blemish will be admitted.

Sap.—Half sap that is bright and sound admitted,

but when of the second growth grade or very dense growth reduced by reason of having too much

bright sap will be admitted to the extent of twothirds bright sap. Bastard.—Not more than half bastard will be

admitted.

Dips.—Spokes having dips not more than one in a spoke and located anywhere except at shoulder

or tenon admitted, provided such dip is not more

than 34 inch in depth and less than 4 inches in length. Other defects.—Evident defects not above enumerated not admitted.

B grade. Material.—Spokes of this grade are to be made

from timber of a weight and growth that will indi- cate fairly good strength. Checks.—Small, fine, season checks not to exceed

2 inches in length and not running into the shoulder admitted.

Splits.—None admitted.

Cross grain.—Grain which does not run at a

greater angle at any one point than 1 inch in 16

inches admitted.

Spokes reduced from the second-growth grade

because of excessive cross grain, but in which the

grain does not run at a greater angle at any one

point than 1 inch in 14 inches admitted.

Spokes reduced from the A grade for cross grain

will be admitted to this grade if grain does not run at a greater angle than 1 inch in 15 inches. Knots.—Knots will not be admitted, but spokes

showing a small sound spot having the appearance

of a knot but which is only a surface blemish will be admitted.

Spokes reduced from the second growth and A

grades having one sound knot not over 34 inch in diameter showing only on one side and not within

5 inches of either end of the spoke admitted here. Sap.—Half sap that is bright and sound will be

admitted.

Bright all-sap spokes of second growth admitted.

Spokes of A grade having three-fourths sap

admitted.

Bastard.—Not more than half bastard will be

admitted.

Spokes of second-growth grade will be admitted

in this grade where full bastard. Spokes of A grade will be admitted in this grade

where three-fourths bastard. Dips.—Will be admitted in this grade where not more than one in a spoke and located anywhere

except at shoulder or tenon, provided such dip is not more than 34 inch in depth and less than 4

inches in length.

Wormholes.—Black and pin wormholes in either second growth of A grades of timber will be ad- mitted here to the extent of not more than three

in any spoke, but these must not be bunched.

Powder post wormholes not admitted.

Other defects.—Evident defects not above enu- merated not admitted.

Grading rules for No. 2 wagon stock. Defects which will be removed in working the

piece for the purpose intended shall not be considered. Sound stain, sound bird pecks, season checks well inside the edges of the piece, scattered pin wormholes, spot wormholes in clusters so located that they do not impair the strength of the piece,

and 3^2 inch of wane on one corner that will not work off will be admitted in the No. 2 grade unless otherwise specified. Heart, heart rings, and heart shakes will not be admitted.

Any defects described in these rules combined or located in such a manner as seriously to impair

the utility of the piece for the purpose intended

shall not be admitted.

Any defects not admitted that can be cut out

so as to reduce the piece to a smaller size used and ordered by the buyer shall be so inspected. No. 2 axles. No. 2 axles will admit z/i and 134 inch sound

knots not less than 12 inches apart near the center

lines longitudinally on top or side and not over 12

inches from center or more than 6 inches from the end; season checks 1 inch deep and 24 inches long;

grain crossing in not less than the length of the

piece; 1 inch of wane; two grub holes showing on

one or two sides; end splits not exceeding 8 inches

in length on one end or its equivalent on both ends;

or other defects equivalent to the above. Hewn axles shall be measured to square to the

size they are ordered. Defects at ends of axles that

will admit working 5 feet 6 inches to be accepted. No. 2 bolsters, sand boards, and brake beams. Grading rules as specified for No. 2 axles to apply, except that no splits are admissible. No. 2 poles and reaches. No. 2 poles and reaches will admit ^-inch sound

knots that do not show through the piece and are

so located that they will not materially impair the

strength of the piece; two grub holes showing on bottom or sides; splits 6 inches long in one end

268
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.54

or the equivalent in both ends; grain crossing in not less than one-third of the piece; a vertical or

lateral bend diverging not more than 1 inch from

a straight line the length of the piece; or other defects equivalent to the above. No. 2 eveners, singletrees, and neck yokes. No. 2 eveners, singletrees, and neck yokes will admit two 3^-inch sound knots not to be less than

6 inches from the center of the piece or their equivalent in other defects. No. 2 sawed fellies. No. 2 sawed fellies will admit two 3^-inch sound

knots or their equivalent; two ^-inch sound knots

or their equivalent well inside the edges of the piece on the tread side; grain diverging 2 inches from the

center line of the piece in three-fouiths its length.

National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading

rules for wagon and vehicle stock, January, 1927.

Vehicle lumber. Scattered pin wormholes, spot wormholes with not more than three holes in a cluster and clusters not

less than 12 inches apart, sound bird pecks, sound

yi-inch knots, sound stain and streaks, or their equivalent, shall not be considered defects in firsts and seconds and in the cuttings in the common

grades.

No specified percentage of firsts is required in

firsts and seconds.

Firsts.—Standard.

Seconds.—Standard, with the following exceptions: Widths, 4 inches and over. Pieces 4 inches wide must be clear. No. 1 common.—Standard, with the following

exceptions: No cutting shall be considered which

is less than 3 inches wide by 3 feet long. Pieces 3 to 7 inches wide, 6 to 11 feet long, must

work 66% per cent clear in not over two cuttings; 12

to 16 feet long, in not over three cuttings. Pieces 8 inches and over wide, 6 feet long, must

work 66% per cent clear in not over two cuttings. No. 2 common.—Standard. Wagon stock, box boards. Poplar, cottonwood, gum, tupelo, magnolia, and

basswood. Widths.—Wide box boards, 13 to 17 inches; narrow box boards, 9 to 12 inches. Lengths.—11 to 16 feet. Thickness.—1 inch when shipping dry.

The 11 to 13 foot lengths must contain one cutting

(side) 10 feet 6 inches long by the full width of the

piece.

The 14 to 16 foot lengths must contain one cutting

(side) 10 feet 6 inches long by the full width of the

piece, and one cutting (end) 3 feet 6 inches long by

the full width of the piece.

Each cutting will admit one sound standard defect or its equivalent, showing on one face, and sound

stain and a few scattered pin wormholes.

The portion of each board not included in the cuttings may contain any defects and may be thin,

except that split defects shall be limited as follows:

The 11-foot lengths may have 3-inch splits in one end or their equivalent in both ends. The 12, 13, 15, and 16 foot lengths may have 12- inch splits in one end or their equivalent in both ends. The 14-foot lengths may have 6-inch splits in one end or their equivalent in both ends, which shall not be considered defects. Note.—Five per cent of a shipment may consist of boards having

defects on the edge or end, or beth, which must be measured off in order to make the grade. A tally must be made showing the number of such pieces and the reduction in measurement. "Woolly" cottonwood and lumber so warped and checked that

it can not be used for box boards shall not be admitted. Axles, bolsters, sand boards, poles, reaches, eveners,

singletrees, brake beams, neck yokes and sawn fellies. Grades, No. 1 and No. 2. Sizes and lengths specified.

Bright sapwood is no defect. Pieces containing defects not admitted may be

measured for a smaller size used and ordered if such

cut in measure will eliminate the defects. Hewn pieces and pieces oversize and overlength

shall be inspected and measured as if squared down

to the sizes and lengths specified. Defects combined or located in such a manner as

to seriously impair the use and durability of the

piece for the purpose intended shall not be admitted. Heart center and shake will not be admitted. No. 1 must be good, tough, straight-grain material

suitable for wagon work. Sound stain inch deep

shall not be considered a defect. No. 2 will admit sound stain, sound bird pecks, season checks well inside the edges of the piece, scattered pin wormholes, spot wormholes in clusters not less than 6 inches apart and not more than five holes to a cluster, and }/% inch of wane on one corner that will not work off. Otherwise No. 1 and No. 2 shall be inspected as

follows:

Axles. Hickory, unless otherwise specified.

Length, 6 feet. Defects at the ends that will be

removed in working the piece 5 feet 6 inches long

will be admitted. No. 1. No. 1 shall include all the clear and perfect stock and will admit defects as follows: Knots.—Four sound 34-inch knots or two sound

24-inch knots near the center lines of the piece on

top or side not more than 12 inches from the center

or 6 inches from the ends of the piece; %-inoh knots must be not less than 12 inches apart.

Splits.—Six inches long in one end or their equivalent in both ends. Season checks.—One-half inch deep and 12 inches

long.

Wormholes and grub holes.—Two pin wormholes

not less than 6 inches apart. Two grub holes penetrating 6 inches at either end of the piece.

Bird pecks.—If sound; if unsound must not ex- ceed }/2 inch in diameter and 34 inch in depth. Wane.—Must be measured off. Cross grain.—Diverging 3 inches in the full length

of the piece.

269
413.54 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 2. No. 2 will admit 94-inch sound knots; 134-inch sound knots not less than 12 inches apart, or their equivalent in smaller defects; season checks 1 inch deep and 24 inches long; end splits not exceeding 8 inches in length; cross grain diverging not more

than 1 inch in 12 inches; 1 inch of wane; two grub

holes showing on one or two sides; or other defects equivalent to the above.

Bolsters and sand boards. Oak and hickory, unless otherwise specified. No. 1. No. 1 will admit defects as follows: Knots.—One sound 3^-inch knot or three sound

3^-inch knots, not more than 12 inches from the

center of the piece. Season checks.—One-half inch deep and 12 inches

long. Wormholes.—Not more than six wormholes, not more than three holes in a cluster, and clusters not less than 6 inches apart.

Sound bird pecks. Cross grain.—Diverging 2 inches in the length of the piece. No. 2. No. 2 will admit 24-inch sound knots; l^-inch

sound knots not less than 12 inches apart, or their equivalent in smaller defects; season checks 1 inch deep and 24 inches long; 1 inch of wane; two grub

holes showing on one or two sides; or other defects equivalent to the above.

Reaches and poles. Reaches shall be oak or hickory unless otherwise

specified. Poles shall be oak or ash unless otherwise specified. No. i

No. 1 must be straight and free from all defects, except season checks J4 inch deep and 12 inches

long; 6 wormholes with not more than 3 holes in a

cluster and clusters not less than 6 inches apart;

grain crossing in the length of the piece

No. 2. No. 2 will admit 24-inch sound knots that do not show through the piece; two grub holes showing on bottom or sides; splits 6 inches long in one end or the equivalent in both ends; grain crossing in not

less than one-third the length of the piece; a vertical or lateral bend diverging not more than 1 inch from

a straight line the length of the piece, or other

defects equivalent to the above.

Eveners, singletrees, brake beams, and neck yokes.

Hickory, unless otherwise specified. No. 1. No. 1 shall be free from all defects except season checks 34 inch deep and 12 inches long and sound

bird pecks. No. 2. No. 2 will admit two 3^-inch sound knots not less than 6 inches from the center of the piece, or their equivalent in other defects

Sawn jellies. Oak, unless otherwise specified. No. 1. No. 1 must be cut full size to pattern and must be

free from all defects. Grain must run straight

through the center of the piece. No. 2. No. 2 will admit two 3^-inch sound knots or their equivalent; two 24-inch sound knots or their equivalent, well inside the edges of the piece on the tread

side; grain diverging 2 inches from the center line of the piece in three-fourths its length.

Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading

rules for wagon and vehicle stock, September 1, 1925. Wagon bottoms. Wagon bottoms, unless otherwise ordered, shall be made in sets of 38 and 42 inch face width, and

from stock 4 inches or over in width, board measure. The standard thickness shall be f-f inch. Grades. A and B. Wagon bottoms. Unless otherwise ordered, shall be graded under

the rules for A and B flat flooring.

Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for wagon and vehicle stock, June 15, 1925. Wagon-box boards, twpelo. The grading rules for tupelo wagon-box boards

are the same as the rules of the National Association

of Farm Equipment Manufacturers. B and better. Thicknesses.—1 to 2 inches. Widths—Shall be specified, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 12

inches, and may be furnished in assorted widths 4 to

12 inches, admitting 20 per cent of 7, 9, and 11 inch

widths. May also be furnished in random widths

13 inches and wider.

Lengths.—8 to 20 feet. Shall be graded from the better side. Slightly discolored sap is no defect. Pieces 4 and 5 inches wide shall be free from

defects. Pieces 6 to 8 inches wide may have one standard

knot or an equivalent defect. Pieces 10 inches wide may have one standard knot

and one other equivalent defect. Pieces 12 inches wide may have two standard

knots and one other equivalent defect. Pieces wider than 12 inches will admit additional

defects in proportion as width increases. C. Thicknesses.—1 to 2 inches. Widths.—Shall be specified, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 12

inches, and may be furnished in assorted widths 4 to 12 inches, admitting 20 per cent 7, 9, and 11 inch

widths.

Lengths.—6 to 20 feet. Shall be graded from the better side. Sound dis- colored sap is no defect. Standard knots, pin worm- 270
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.8

holes, and other defects will be admitted, but none

that will prevent the use of each piece in its full length and width as a paint grade.

Southern Pine Association, grading rules for wagon and vehicle stock, March 23, 1927. The grading rules for wagon and vehicle stock are the same as those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association, above. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for wagon and vehicle stock, July 1, 1926. Wagon bottoms, K. D.

Finished sizes, ff and 1^- inches by 38 and 42

inches. To be graded on same rules as "B and

better," F. G., or "B" V. G. flooring.

413.6 PATTERN LUMBER.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

pattern lumber, April, 1927. The sizes of pattern lumber are the same as the American Lumber Standard sizes 413.0, softwood

factory and shop lumber. The finished thickness

for 1-inch boards is extra standard, or ff

The grades of pattern lumber are the same as shop lumber, 413.0. White Pine Association of the Tonawandas,

grades of northern white-pine lumber for pattern

stock, 1922. The following grade of white-pine lumber, as shown in 400.26 for this association, are suitable

for pattern stock: Uppers, No. 1 cuts, No. 1 shelving and dressing.

413.7 COOPERAGE STOCK. (See 421.)

413.8 DOOR, WINDOW, AND MILLWORK

LUMBER.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16, American Lumber Standards, revised July 1, 1926. General provisions, sizes and grade, quality and

size of cuttings of factory plank and grade, quality

and size of cuttings of shop lumber, are as shown

in No. 413.0, softwood factory and shop lumber.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for factory lumber, revised May 1, 1926. The 'special provisions, standard dressed sizes, grades of cuttings for factory lumber, factory plank,

and shop lumber conform to American Lumber,

Standards, No. 413.0. This association furnishes the 1-inch factory lumber in extra standard thickness. National Hardwood Lumber Association, grading rules for cypress door, window, and millwork

lumber, January, 1927. No. 1 shop.

Widths, 4 inches and over. Lengths, 6 feet and over, admitting 10 per cent

of 6 and 7 feet. Pieces 4 inches wide, 8 feet and over long, must

work 66% per cent clear in cuttings 4 feet and over

long by the full width of the piece.

Pieces 5 inches and over wide, 8 feet and over

long, 1 inch and less in thickness, must work 66%

per cent clear in cuttings 2 inches and over wide

by the full length of the piece; or cuttings not less than 5 inches wide by 3 feet long or 9J^ inches wide

by 18 inches long. Pieces 5 inches and over wide, 8 feet and over

long, 1}4: inches and thicker, must work 66% per

cent clear in cutting 2 inches and over wide by the

full length of the piece; or cuttings not less than 5^

inches wide by 3 feet long or 9 inches wide by 28

inches long. No. 2 shop.

Widths, 4 inches and over. Lengths, 6 feet and over. Pieces 4 inches wide must work 50 per cent clear in cuttings 4 feet or over long by the full width of the piece. Pieces 5 inches and over wide must work 50 per

cent clear in the same size cuttings described in No. 1 shop.

North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), grading

rules for factory lumber, January 1, 1927. Shop lumber. No. 1 shop shall consist of boards 6 inches and

over wide, 8 feet and over long, average 8 inches

wide, not less than 60 per cent of each board to cut

or rip, or both, clear pieces at least 3 inches by 4

feet or 6 inches by 3 feet. No. 2 shop, same as No. 1 shop, except the per- centage of cuttings and rippings shall be 40 per

cent or better. Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, grading rules for northern white and Norway pine, spruce, and tamarack factory lumber, April 15, 1925. Rules for grades of factory plank, shop common,

inch shop common, short box, door cuttings con- form to American Lumber Standards, 413.0.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for factory lumber, Schedule M, 1925. Grading rules for Douglas fir door stock in door

lengths rough kiln dried, Port Orford cedar factory

lumber, Port Orford cedar factory select and better, Port Orford cedar No. 1 shop common, Port Orford cedar No. 2 shop common, 1-inch factory select, and 1-inch shop common conform to American

Lumber Standards 413.0.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for factory lumber, Schedule M, 1925. WESTERN RED CEDAR Rough green clear panel flitches. Must be sound lumber well manufactured; occasional variations in sawing allowed; edges to be

square. Will allow light-colored sap not exceeding

one-fourth of the face and edge. No face shall be

considered edge grain unless the angle of grain is within 45° from the vertical the full width of that

face. Edge-grain pieces thinner than 10 inches must be edge grain on the wide face. Pieces 10 by

10 inches and thicker and wider shall be considered 271
413.8 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

edge grain provided one face or both edges are edge

grain. Defects based on 3 inches thick by 10 inches wide, 63^ feet long. One face and corresponding

one-half of both edges shall be free of defects; reverse side and corresponding one-half of both

edges may contain up to two 24-inch knots or the

equivalent thereof. No. 2 clear and better. Under 3 inches thick, based on 6-inch widths 12

feet long. Graded from the face side, which is the

best side. Must be well manufactured, and have

practically square edges. Will allow occasional

variations in sawing. Bright sap and color no

defect. In addition, will admit small knots 3^ inch in diameter on face side and corresponding

half of edges and up to % inch on reverse face and

corresponding half of edges if not in clusters. Machining defects, such as dogholes and nigger

punches, small closed bark seams, and bark burls, on reverse face and corresponding half of edges.

Wane and such other defects which will work out

in dressing to standard sizes admitted. Two

defects as specified for respective faces allowed to each 12 linear feet. No. 2 clear and better, 3 inches thick and up to but not including 5 inches thick. Based on 6-inch widths 12 feet long. Graded

from face side, which is the best side. Must be

well manufactured and have practically square

edges. Will allow occasional variations in sawing;

bright sap and color no defect. In addition, will admit small knots 3^ inch in diameter on face side and corresponding half of edges, and up to 13^

inches on reverse face and corresponding half of edges if not in clusters. Machining defects, such

as dogholes and nigger punches, small closed bark seams not over 6 inches in length, and bark burls, on reverse face and corresponding half of edges.

Wane and such other defects which will work out

in dressing to standard sizes admitted. Three

defects as specified for respective faces allowed to each 12 linear feet. No. 2 clear and better, 5 inches and thicker. Based on 6-inch widths 12 feet long graded from

the face side which is the best side. Must be well manufactured and have practically square edges. Will allow occasional variations in sawing. Bright sap and color no defect. In addition, will admit

small knots % inch in diameter on face side and cor- responding half of edges and up to 2 inches, according to size of piece on reverse face and corresponding

half of edges if not in clusters. Machining defects, such as dogholes and nigger punches, small closed bark seams not exceeding 6 inches long, and bark

burls, on reverse face and corresponding half of edges. Wane and other defects which will work

out in dressing to standard sizes admitted. Three

defects as specified for respective faces allowed to each 12 linear feet. It is, however, provided that any piece 3 inches and thicker, 10 inches and wider, 12 feet or longer may contain one large defect showing on one or two surfaces, if so placed that

by cutting out, the shortest cutting will be at least 3 feet long, with a combined loss not exceeding

5 per cent provided the balance of the piece is practically free of all other defects. Gang saw flitch. Based on 6 by 12 inches. Rule to apply proportionately on narrower and/or wider widths and so indicated at time order is placed. Must be suitable

for remanufacturing into clear cuttings, such as panel stock and other finishing lumber. To be

graded from best face which will permit a small amount of wane and one large defect or four small

ones, such as knots, knot holes, or bark seams. Reverse face should not be below grade of common

except for the one large defect, which may extend through the piece. Half of edge corresponding with

the best face should be practically clear, allowing

only minor defects such as small j^-inch knots or small bark seams. The one large defect permitted on face may also appear on the edge of flitch. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for cypress factory lumber, June 15, 1925.

First and second. Thickness.—1, 134, 2, 23^, 3, and 4 inch. Width.—Shall be random widths, 4 inches and

over wide, admitting not more than 5 per cent under

6 inches. Will not be furnished in specified widths.

Length.—8 feet and longer, admitting not more

than 15 per cent shorter than 12 feet, and not more

than 5 per cent shorter than 10 feet. Shall be graded from the poorer side. Pieces 4 to 8 inches may have 3^ inch of bright sap on each edge or its equivalent on one or both

edges; otherwise they must be clear. Pieces 8 to 10 inches may have 1 inch of bright sap on each edge or its equivalent on one or both edges; other- wise they must be clear. Pieces 10 inches and under 12 inches may have

13^ inches of bright sap on each edge or its equi- valent on one or both edges, and may have one medium knot or its equivalent.

Pieces 12 inches wide may have 2 inches of bright sap on each edge or its equivalent on one or both

edges, and may have one medium knot, or in lieu of sap, may have two medium knots or their equivalent.

Pieces voider than 12 inches may admit of defects

as specified above in proportion as width increases. Pieces 10 inches and wider may admit of one end

split, which shall not exceed in length the width of the piece. Pieces 12 inches and less in width, free from other

defects, may have bright sap across one face at one

end, but this sap shall not exceed in length one-tenth

of the length of the piece. In pieces 13 inches and wider bright sap is not a

defect.

Selects. This grade shall be random widths, and will not be

furnished in specified widths, and shall be graded

from the better side, but the reverse side shall not be lower than No. 1 common or No. 1 shop.

272
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 413.8

This grade may be 4 inches and wider, but will not be furnished wider than 12 inches, admitting

not over 10 per cent under 6 inches; shall be 1 to 4

inches thick. Length.—8 feet and over, admitting not over 30

per cent under 12 feet, nor more than 10 per cent under 10 feet. Pieces 10 inches and under in width shall admit

two medium knots or their equivalent and an additional medium knot or its equivalent of every 2 inches in width over 10 inches. Pieces free from

other defects, 10 inches and over in width, to admit

pin wormholes on one edge one-tenth the width of the piece. Bright sap is not a defect in this grade.

Slight wane on pieces 10 inches and over in width

is allowed on one edge not over 3 feet in length.

When no other defect appears, slight amount of stained sap may be allowed. Pieces 10 inches and

wider may admit of one end split which shall not exceed in length the width of the piece. No. 1 shop.

Thickness.—1, 1%, \y2 , 2, 23^, 3, and 4 inch. Width.—4 inches and over. Length.—6 feet and over, not exceeding 5 per

cent under 8 feet. In this grade 1 inch shall cut for shop use 60 per

cent or better of the following clear cuttings or rippings or both: 5 inches wide or wider, by 3 inches long or longer; and 9}4 inches wide or wider, by 18

inches long or longer; and strips 2 inches wide, or wider, ripped the entire length of the piece from

pieces 8 feet to 12 feet long, and strips 2 inches wide or wider, 12 feet long or longer, ripped from

pieces 14 feet long or longer. In this grade 134

inches and thicker shall cut for shop use 60 per cent

or better of the following clear cuttings or rippings, or both: 534 inches wide or wider by 3 feet long or

longer; 9 inches wide or wider by 2 feet 4 inches long or longer; and strips 2 inches wide or wider,

ripped the entire length of the piece from pieces 8

feet to 12 feet long, and strips 2 inches wide or wider, 12 feet long or longer, ripped from pieces 14 feet long

or longer, provided that pieces under 5 inches wide

in 4/4 inch stock and under 534 wide in 5/4 inch and

thicker stock shall cut full width of the piece. In

the above cuttings bright sap shall be admitted. No. 2 shop.

Thickness.—1, 134, IH> 2, 23^, 3, and 4 inch. Width.—4 inches and over. Length.—6 feet and over, not exceeding 5 per

cent under 8 feet. This grade shall cut for shop use 40 to 60 per

cent of the same size cuttings or rippings, or both,

as the corresponding thicknesses in No. 1 shop. In the above cuttings stained sap shall be admitted. Box.

Thickness.—1 to 2 inches. Width.—Shall be random widths, 3 inches and

wider.

Length.—6 to 20 feet. Each piece shall contain 66%j per cent or more

of sound cuttings, no single cutting to contain less

than 72 square inches. No piece of cutting can be

shorter than 2 feet nor narrower than 3 inches. Sound cuttings will admit all the defects allowed

in No. 1 common. The waste material may be

thin or absolutely worthless. Panel stock. Thickness. 3^-, and ^ inch. Width.—Shall be random widths, 8 inches and wider.

Length.—6 to 20 feet, admitting not over 15 per

cent of 6 to 10 feet and not to exceed 5 per cent under 10 feet. Odd lengths admitted.

Shall be graded from the poorer side, B and

better, except that bright sap will not be considered a defect. Window and door frame stock, jambs, etc. Window and door frame stock, rabbeted or plowed, shall be graded from the worked side, B and

better and C and better. Short lumber. Short lumber is defined as lumber shorter than

minimum standard length and, except as to lengths,

shall be graded according to the rules governing

standard grades. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, standard

grading and dressing rules for factory lumber, July

1, 1926. The sizes and grades of factory and shop lumber

and the sizes of cuttings for door and window stock conform to American Lumber Standards No. 413.0. The following grading rules apply to cut door

stock. Cut door stock, kiln dried. Cut to lengths and widths.

Nominal thicknesses (inches)

IK.

lVs2...

Finished

thicknesses, S2S

Inches

ift

Lengths Widths

Stiles Bottom rails6 feet 8 inches to 7 feet 6 inches.

5 to 8 inches.

7 to 10 inches.

5 to 6 inches. Do. Top rails - do

Muntins, ... 3 feet 6 inches to 4 feet.

Five-inch widths rough must be full 4J^ inches wide when dry. Bright sap no defect in any grade.

Allowance must be made for defects on face and

edges that will stick, tenon, or sand out. Door

stock must show on two sides; therefore, the grade

must be determined from the poorer face.

Stiles. No. 1 stiles.—Will admit slight torn grain inch

deep. With the above will admit one of the following: One 3-inch pitch pocket located 35 inches or

less from end of stile, not through thickness or into edge; one 4-inch pitch pocket located 24 inches or less from end of stile, not through thickness or into edge.

273
413.8 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 2 stiles.—Will admit slight torn grain ^ inch

deep. With the above will admit one of the follow- ing or equivalent combinations of defects: Two

4-inch pitch pockets, not through thickness or into edge; two sound and tight knots, not over % inch

in diameter; light stain, not over 50 per cent of surface of one side of piece; one or more season checks with a combined length of not over 8 inches; small streak of light pitch. No. 3 stiles. —Will admit slight torn grain. With

the above will admit one of the following: Stain; small amount of pin wormholes on one side; sound

and tight knots not over 13^ inches in diameter;

pitch pockets not over 8 inches in length; light pitch. Bottom rails and lock rails (over 6 inches wide)

No. 1 rails.—Will admit slight torn grain inch deep; one 3-inch pitch pocket, not through thick- ness or into edge. No. 2 rails.—Will admit slight torn grain inch

deep. With the above will admit one of the follow- ing defects or equivalent combination of defects: Two 4-inch pitch pockets, not through thickness or

into edge; two sound and tight knots, not over h/% inch in diameter; light stain, not over 50 per cent of surface of one side of piece; one or more season

checks, with a combined length of not over 8 inches; small streak of light pitch. No. 3 rails.—Graded by same rules as govern No.

3 stiles. Top rails, narrow lock rails, and muntins. No. 1.—Will admit slight torn grain inch deep. No. 2.—Will admit slight torn grain inch deep.

With the above, will admit one of the following:

One 4-inch pitch pocket, not through thickness or

into edge; one sound and tight knot, not over Y% inch in diameter; light stain, not over 50 per cent

of surface of one side of piece; one or more season

checks, with a combined length of not over 8 inches; small streak of light pitch. No. 3.—Graded by same rules as govern No. 3

stiles, but defects must be proportionate. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, grading rules for factory lumber, July 1, 1925. Rules for measurement of factory plank and for grading Pondosa pine and Idaho white pine factory

and shop lumber conform to American Lumber

Standards, 413.0. White Pine Association of the Tonawandas,

grades of northern white pine lumber for door,

window, and millwork, 1922. The following grades of white pine lumber, as shown in 400.26 for this association, are suitable

for door, window, and millwork lumber: No. 1 cuts, No. 2 cuts, No. 3 cuts, and No. 2 dressing.

413.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHOP AND FACTORY LUMBEE.

American Lumber Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 16 for American Lumber

Standards, revised July 1, 1926. See 413.0, softwood factory and shop lumber.

California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, grading rules for miscellaneous shop

and factory lumber, May 1, 1926. Incense cedar pencil stock. Pencil stock shall contain 50 per cent or more of clear squares, 8 inches or multiples of 8 inches in length, and equal to the thickness of the piece in width. National Cigar Box Manufacturers' Association,

grading rules for miscellaneous shop and factory

lumber, in effect October 24, 1923. The following recommendations were adpoted for the standardization of cigar box lumber, imitation and veneered cedar, made from sawed bay poplar

lumber:

Imitation cedar, No. 1 grade.

Tops must be inch thick. Ends or thick stock, must be ^ inch thick. Standard lengths shall be 3 feet and up. No shipment of No. 1 stock shall contain more

than 15 per cent of 3-foot lengths.

All 3 and 4 foot lengths shall be clear. Five and six foot lengths will permit one sound

knot not over 1 inch in diameter, or a split not over

4 inches long. Seven and eight foot lengths may contain two

sound knots not over 1 inch in diameter and a split not over 4 inches long. Veneered cedar, No. 1 grade.

Three and four foot lengths must be free of blisters. Five and six foot lengths may contain two 1J^- inch blisters. Seven and eight foot lengths may contain not

over three 1^2-inch blisters, or two 2-inch blisters. Five to eight foot lengths will permit of an occasional loose edge on the veneer when it does not extend back over 3^ inch, and not over one-third the length of the board.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for miscellaneous shop and factory lumber, Schedule M, 1925. Douglas fir green -pipe stock. Flat grain.—Will allow sound and tight knots or

small pitch pockets which do not go through the

thickness of the piece, bright sap on the inside of the stave not extending more than halfway through

the piece. Edges must be practically clear and contain no defects that will prevent a water-tight joint

when worked. Edge grain may be included at

shipper's option. Port Orford cedar battery board stock. No. 2 clear and better.—One inch and/or thicker,

widths as specified, lengths 3 feet or longer, fiat and/or edge grain, to contain not less than 90 per

cent strictly clear full width cuttings, 6 inches and

longer based on widths as specified. Cross, spiral, burly, and/or interlocking grain, wormholes, cat's- paws, bark seams, bird's-eyes, bark burls, knots,

splits, wane, shake, and rot are considered defects. Allowing one of the above defects based on a board

274
LUMBER FOR BUILDING AND FACTORY USE 414.3

1 inch thick, 6 inches wide, 6Hs feet long. Seasoned

sap no defect. Battery board No. 1 shop.—Allowing 75 per cent

or more of the above cuttings for No. 2 clear and

better. Battery board No. 2 shop.—Allowing 60 per cent

or more of the above cuttings for No. 2 clear and

better. Battery board No. 3 shop.—Allowing 40 per cent

or more of the above cuttings for No. 2 clear and

better. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for miscellaneous shop and factory

lumber, June 15, 1925. Washing machine tub stock. This stock shall grade B and better on the poorer

face, shall be full specified thickness in the rough,

and, when ordered in specified widths, shall be full width. In consideration of the difficulty in grading this stock, it should be borne in mind that detail inspec- tion on each and every piece is impractical, but it is contemplated that this stock shall be selected with a view to its suitability for its intended use. West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for miscellaneous shop and factory lumber,

July 1, 1926. Windmill stock. 4 by 4 inches SlSlE or S4S, % inch off; 5 by 5 inches and 6 by 6 inches S1S1E or S4S, 3^ inch off, each way. To be graded by same rule as structural timbers, No. 412.1. Pipe stave stock rough green. Defects based on 2 by 6 inches \>y 12 feet. Pipe stave stock, F. G. and/or V. G. Bright sap, not more than half the thickness from

the inside of the piece. Edges must not contain

defects that will prevent a water-tight joint when

worked. Will admit the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects

Sound and tight knots, none through the piece; small (4-inch) pitch pockets, none through the piece.

Grading rules for Douglas fir, west coast hemlock,

and Sitka spruce ladder stock. Ladder stock. Defects based on 4 inches by 12 feet. Must be well manufactured and free from spiral or diagonal grain with a slope of more than 1 inch

in a length of 15 inches, except that 15 per cent of any shipment may have a slope of grain of not more

than 1 inch in a length of 12 inches, and free from

curly spots or any other defects rendering it unfit

for ladder stock. Will admit the following or equivalent defects: Bright sap, 25 per cent of face, and three very small (2-inch) pitch pockets.

Pole stock, rough green. Defects based on 7-inch widths by 10-foot lengths.

Must be well manufactured and free from spiral or diagonal grain with a slope of more than 1 inch

in 12 inches, and free from curly spots or any other

defects rendering it unfit for the above uses. Will admit the following or equivalent defects: Bright

sap, 25 per cent, and four very small (2-inch) pitch

pockets in the piece.

414. RAW COEK, RATTAN, AND HEED.

(See also 425.)

414.1 CORK.

Federal Specifications Board, United States Gov- ernment Master Specification No. 338 for ground

cork for insulating purposes, October 3, 1925.

/. General specifications.

There are no general specifications applicable to

this specification.

77. Grade. Ground cork shall be furnished in one grade only. 777. Material and workmanship.

The cork shall be of good quality, granulated to

specifications, and baked to a dark brown color. IV. General requirements.

The general requirements shall be as stated in Section V.

V. Detail requirements.

Ground cork shall be ground so that all passes through a K-inch screen and be caught on a No.

8 screen. It shall weigh not less than 5% pounds

or more than 63^ pounds per cubic foot. VI. Methods of inspection and tests. Samples shall be selected by the inspector from

each lot and tested to insure that the material sub- mitted complies with all requirements of this specification. VII. Packing and marking.

All ground cork shall be delivered in burlap bags

containing 35 pounds.

Each bag shall be marked with the name of the

material and the gross and net weight.

Each delivery shall be tagged with the name of the material, the quantity, the name of the contractor, and the purchase order number.

VIII. Notes. Ground cork is intended to be used for insulating purposes. 414.2 RATTAN.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

414.3 REED.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

275
420-429 MANUFACTURES OF WOOD (Except Furniture)

421. COOPERAGE, BARRELS, BOXES, AND

SHOOKS.

421.0 GENERAL ITEMS.

American Railway Association, Freight Container

Bureau, circular No. 14, woods used for making barrels and casks, April 30, 1924. Material for and Manufacture of Outside Container. Grouping of woods.—The principal woods used for the construction of shipping containers are classed

for the purpose of this specification into four groups

as follows: Group 1 Alpine fir. Lodgepole pine.

Aspen.

Balsam fir. Basswood.

Buckeye.

Butternut. Cedar. Chestnut. Cottonwood

Cucumber.

Cypress.

Jack pine.

Douglas fir. Hemlock.

Larch.

Black ash. Black gum.

Maple (soft or silver) Pumpkin ash. Red gum.

Magnolia.

Noble fir. Norway pine.

Redwood.

Spruce.

Sugar pine. Western yellow pine.

White fir. White pine.

Willow.

Yellow poplar.

Group 2 Southern yellow pine.

North Carolina pine.

Group 3 Sap gum.

Sycamore.

Tupelo.

White elm.

Group 4 Hickory.

Oak.

Rock elm. White ash.

Beech.

Birch. Hackberry.

Maple (hard). Federal Government, standard apple barrel, August 3, 1912. (Public No. 252, H. R. 21480.)

The standard barrel for apples shall have the fol- lowing dimensions when measured without disten- tion of its parts: Length of stave, 283^ inches; diameter of head, 173<s inches; distance between

heads, 26 inches; circumference of bulge, 64 inches outside measurement, representing as nearly as possible 7,056 cubic inches: Provided, That steel barrels containing the interior dimensions provided for

in this section shall be construed as a compliance

therewith.

Federal Government, standard barrel for fruits, vegetables, and other dry commodities, March 4, 1915. (38 Stat., ch. 158, p. 1186, 63d Cong.)

The capacities of the standard barrel for fruits, vegetables, and other dry commodities,1 other than

cranberries, and its subdivisions, are as follows:

Size Cubic

inches Bushels 1 Quarts >

Barrel.. 7, 056 5,292

3, 528 2.352

3. 281

2. 461 1.641 1.094

105miMA

35 % barrel. . . Yi barrel

li barrel

1 Struck measure. The capacities of the standard cranberry barrel and its subdivisions are as follows:

Size Cubic

inches Bushels 1 Quarts i

Cranberry barrel 5, 826

4, 369. 5 2,913 1,942

2. 709 2.032 L 355

.903

86-U

65*4r 43H my

%A cranberry barrel.

Yi cranberry barrel

yi cranberry barrel

i Struck measure. The following standard dimensions and tolerances have been promulgated by the Director of the National Bureau of Standards and approved by the

Secretary of Commerce.

The standard dimensions of a barrel for fruits, vegetables, and other diy commodities other than

cranberries, and of a barrel for cranberries, with

which the actual measured dimensions are to be

compared, are as follows:

Dimensions

Barrel for

fruits, vegetables, and other dry commodities

other than cranberries

Barrel for cranberries

Diameter of head.

Inchesim

WA

26

6428^

Inchesim

25J4 58^

28J4

Effective diameter of head... Distance between heads

Circumference of bulge, outside measure- ment

Length of stave In the case of all subdivisions of the barrel for

fruits, vegetables, and other dry commodities

other than cranberries, and all subdivisions of the

barrel for cranberries, the following dimensions

are hereby standardized for the purpose of the appli- cation of tolerances, and the actual measured dimensions are to be compared with these:

i Lime is not included within the purview of the law or of these

rules and regulations, since a more recent act (Public, No. 228, 64th

Cong., approved Aug. 23, 1916) has established standard barrels especially for lime upon a weight basis. 276
MANUFACTURES OF WOOD 421.0

Subdivisions of barrel for fruits, vegetables, and other dry commodities other than cranberries

Dimensions % barrel Yi barrel Y barrel

Effective diameter of head

Inches15M 58H

Inches

l33/8 2oy2 51H

Inches

1845^

Distance between heads

Circumference of bulge, outside measurement

Subdivisions of barrel for cranberries

Dimensions % barrel Yi barrel Y barrel

Effective diameter of head

InchesUVs

2353H

Inches12%

2047

Inches

1117H 41M

Distance between heads

Circumference of bulge, outside

For the purpose of the application of tolerances, barrels for fruits, vegetables, and other dry commodities other than cranberries, are divided into two classes, as follows: Class 1 shall include (a) all barrels no dimension

of which is in error by more than the following

amounts, and (b) all barrels one or more of the dimensions of which are in error by more than the

following amounts, and which in addition have no

dimension in error in the opposite direction:

Error, inches

Effective diameter of head M

Distance between heads H

Circumference of bulge, outside measurement \Yi Class 2 shall include all barrels at least one dimension of which is in error by more than the amounts

given above, but which in addition have at least one dimension in error in the opposite direction. (This class includes all barrels mentioned in sec. 1 of the law in the proviso reading: "

Provided, That

any barrel of a different form having a capacity of seven thousand and fifty-six cubic inches shall be a standard barrel. ") The tolerances to be allowed in excess or in defi- ciency on the dimensions of all barrels of class 1 shall be as follows:

Tolerance, inches Diameter of head Y

Effective diameter of head _ Y

Distance between heads Y

Circumference of bulge, outside measurement VA

Length of stave %

The tolerance to be allowed in excess or in defi- ciency on all barrels of class 2 shall be 13^ inches

(1.5 inches).

The tolerances to be allowed in excess or in defi- ciency on the dimensions of all barrels for cranberries shall be as follows:

Tolerance, inches Diameter of head Y

Effective diameter of head \i Distance between heads Y

Circumference of bulge, outside measurement 1%

Length of stave Yi. The tolerances to be allowed in excess or in defi- ciency on all subdivisions of the standard barrel for

fruits, vegetables, and other dry commodities other

than cranberries, and on all subdivisions of the standard barrel for cranberries, shall be the values given in the following table:

Tolerance

Size of subdivision For fruits, vegetables, and other dry commodities

For cranberries

Inches Inches M barrel. 1% (1. 375) m (i. 25) Yi barrel . . . m a. 25) m (i. 125) Y barrel - .'. . M (1. 125) 1 (1. 00) Federal Government, standard lime barrel, August

23, 1916. (Public, No. 228, 64th Cong.)

The act to standardize lime barrels, established a large and a small barrel of lime, the large barrel containing 280 pounds and the small barrel 180

pounds, net weight.

The following standard tolerances have been pro- mulgated by the Director of the National Bureau

of Standards and' approved by the Secretary of Commerce.

When lime is packed in barrels, the tolerance to be allowed on the large barrel or the small barrel of lime shall be 5 pounds in excess or in deficiency on any individual barrel: Provided, however, That the average error on 10 barrels of the same nominal

weight and packed by the same manufacturer shall

in no case be greater than 2 pounds in excess or in

deficiency. In case all the barrels available are not weighed, those which are weighed shall be se- lected at random.

When lime is packed in containers of less capacity than the standard small barrel, the tolerance to be allowed in excess or in deficiency on individual containers of various weights, shall be the values given in the column headed "Tolerance on individ- ual package," of the following table, provided, however, that the average error on 10 containers of the same nominal weight and packed by the same manufacturer shall in no case be greater than the values given in the column headed " Tolerance on average

weight," of the following table. In case all the

containers available are not weighed, those which

are weighed shall be selected at random:

Weight of package

Tolerance on indi- vidual package

Tolerance on aver- age weight Not greater than 50 pounds ... Poundsm

2

3

4

Pounds%

%

IX

IY2

More than 50 pounds and not greater than 100 pounds . More than 100 pounds and not greater than 150 pounds . . . More than 150 pounds and less than 180 pounds

When lime in bulk is sold, charged for, or pur- ported to be delivered as a definite number of large

or small barrels, the tolerance to be allowed in excess

or in deficiency on such amounts of lime shall be 15 pounds per 1,800 pounds (10 small barrels), or 25 pounds per 2,800 pounds (10 large barrels). 277
421.1 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

421.1 TIGHT STAVES.

Associated Cooperage Industries of America,

grade rules and specifications covering tight barrel staves and heading, November 9, 1926. White oak bucked bourbon barrel staves. Shall be manufactured of white oak and species of white oak that will be suitable for the purpose to be

equalized 34, 35, or 353^ inches long, as agreed; to

be, when thoroughly kiln-dried, y% inch thick; and

to average in width when close-jointed, free of sap, not exceeding 21 staves to the barrel; and to be free of seed or wormholes of any kind, cat faces or checks,

and crooks inside or outside. (A twist, not varying

to exceed % inch from a straight line shall be allowed.) Crooks with hollow to back of stave, not ex- ceeding 3^ inch in variation to 12 inches in length,

shall be allowed. Reverse crooks not admitted.

Sound streaks that do not go through stave will be admitted, provided they are on inside of stave and over

6 inches from ends. (See notes 1, 2, 4, and 5 below.)

Bucked alcohol and whisky barrel-staves. Same specifications as bucked bourbon staves, except length is to be 34 inches, and thickness z/i inch after being thoroughly kiln-dried. (See notes

1, 2, 4, and 5 below.)

Sawed spirit, bourbon and rye whisky-barrel staves. Shall be manufactured of white oak and species

of white oak that will be suitable for the purpose, sawed with the grain from straight grain bolts, and

equalized 34, 35, or 36 inches long, as agreed; to be

evenly sawed and of uniform thickness throughout,

and when thoroughly kiln-dried to be full or

1 inch thick, respectively, when planed on inside or

outside, and full xf , xf, and 1^- inches thick, respectively, when not planed. To average in width

when close-jointed, free of sap, not exceeding 21

staves to the barrel, and to be free of seed or wormholes of any kind, cat faces, or checks. Sound streaks that do not go through staves will be admitted,

provided they are on inside of stave and over 6 inches from ends. The grain of the stave must be

such that a straight line drawn at right angles across the thickness at the ends of a stave must pass through not less than three lines of grain at any one

place. (See notes 1, 2, 4, and 5 below.)

Bucked or sawed half whisky and alcohol staves. Same specifications as sawed spirit, bourbon, and

rye whisky-barrel staves, length 26 to 30 inches, as agreed; thickness xl or ZA inch, as agreed; and to average in width when close-jointed and free of sap not less than 19 staves to a half barrel. (See notes

1, 2, 4, and 5 below.)

Sawed wine-barrel staves. Shall be manufactured of white oak and species of white oak that will be suitable for the purpose, sawed

with the grain from straight-grain bolts, and equalized, 34 inches long, and to be when kiln-dried and

planed on both sides, inch thick, and when planed on one side to be % inch scant thick; to average in width when close-jointed, not exceeding 21 staves to the barrel. Slight defects not showing through on

both sides admissible. (See notes 1,2,4, and 5 below.)

White and red oak oil-barrel or tierce staves. Shall be equalized, 34, 35, or 36 inches long, as

agreed, and to be, when thoroughly dry, % inch

thick, evenly sawed, and of uniform thickness throughout; to average in width when close-jointed,

including sound sap, not exceeding 22 staves to the standard barrel. To be free from seed holes, cat

faces which show through on both sides, wind

shakes, and rotten sap.

It will be permissible to furnish kiln-dried and

jointed staves of the above dimensions in bundles

not to exceed 24 staves to a bundle, provided said bundles contain at least 10 per cent wide staves

for bung staves averaging not less than 4 inches. (See notes below.)

Turpentine-barrel staves. Shall be equalized, 34 inches long, and to be when

thoroughly kiln-dried and planed, not less than

inch thick, evenly sawed, and of uniform thickness throughout; to average in width, when close jointed,

including sound sap, not exceeding 22 staves to the standard barrel. To be free from seed holes, cat

faces, rotten sap, wood want, or proof. (See notes

1, 4, and 5; also note 2 as to length only.)

Cuban tierce staves. Shall be equalized 35 inches long, and when thor- oughly dry, to measure 1 inch thick; otherwise to grade same as %-inch oil or tierce; to average in width, when close jointed, including sap, not exceeding 22 staves to a barrel. (See notes below.)

Pork staves. Shall be made~of white oak, red oak, or ash, as agreed. Shall be equalized, 30 inches long, and when

thoroughly dry, to measure Y% inch thick, evenly

sawed, and of uniform thickness throughout; to average in width, when close jointed, including sound

sap, not exceeding 19 staves to the barrel. To be free from seed holes, cat faces, wind shakes, and rotten

sap. Slight defects not showing through on both

sides of staves admissible. Pumpkin ash not per- mitted. (See notes below.)

Gum staves. Gum staves shall be the same specifications as

oil-barrel staves, 34 to 36 inches in length, as agreed,

and manufactured of gum timber; tupelo gum not permitted unless otherwise agreed upon.

Half-barrel gum staves. Half-barrel gum staves shall be the same specifi- cations as the whole-barrel gum stave, either ^or^t

inch, as agreed, and 30 inches and under in length,

as agreed. * All gum staves 30 inches and under shall be sawed ^ or ^8 inch, as agreed; otherwise specifications same as whole-barrel gum staves. Mill-run white oak staves. Mill-run white oak staves shall consist of the run

of the saw, and grade oil staves and/or better. No. 2 tight-barrel staves. Any tight-barrel stave that is not suitable for a

No. 1 grade and that will bend without breaking is to be considered as No. 2 grade.

278
MANUFACTUEES OF WOOD 421.2

Notes referred to above. Note 1.—All staves must be evenly equalized, so as to be square on the ends. Note 2.—Variations in staves. All staves must not be less than

the standard measurement herein stated, but if J^-inch shorter or longer, or ^y-inch over or under specifications in thickness on one

edge, will not affect the grade. Note 3.—Wormholes: Sound wormholes in sawed oil tierce or pork stave, not exceeding two in a straight line across the width of the

staves within 12 inches of the center, not more than five wormholes

in any one stave, and 10 per cent of the number of staves in carload

will be admitted. Note 4.—All staves must have a proper circle; no fiat staves will be accepted. A twist not varying to exceed % inch from straight line shall be allowed. Note 5—When not otherwise agreed the following average widths

shall apply as a basis of purchase and settlement: All staves over 30 inches in length, 4H inches; all staves (including cut-offs) 26 to 30 inches in length, 4H inches; under 26 inches and over 18 inches, 4 inches; 18 inches and under, 3}<i inches. Note 6.—Unless otherwise specified by the buyer, all oil-barrel staves averaging 18 to 81 inches shall be jointed with a %-inch bilge, and for each stave in excess of 18 staves the bilge shall be reduced & of an inch. Note 6a.—Unless otherwise specified, kiln-dried and jointed staves

shall measure to the set at the bilge as follows: Inches

34 inches and larger. 81 28 to 30 inches, inclusive 68 Note 7—That no regularly sawn or cut-off stave 30 inches in length

or over when jointed shall be under 2\i inches or more than 6 inches

in width, and no regularly sawn or cut-off stave under 30 inches in length when jointed shall be, under 2 inches or more than Wi inches

in width; when exceeding these widths % of an inch shall be allowed

for splitting. On all cut-off staves a variation of 1 inch over the length ordered should be permissible. Note 7a.—Ivlill-run cut-off staves shall mean staves less than 34 inches in length which have been made from longer staves tiiat were

strictly mill run, and there shall be no sorting either before or after the stock is cut down. These short staves as well as the 34-inch shall grade oil grade or better. Note 8.—A close listed whisky stave, measuring at the bilge inch sap proof on outside of stave and K inch of wood want on heart edge outside, is permissible. A close fist on oil staves shall be permitted to show one-third the

thickness of stave or wood want on the outside, measuring at the bilge. (Note that this does not prevent parties contracting for staves on

basis of any other width if they prefer. These specifications are to apply where there is no specific agreement.) California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

silo staves, April, 1927.

Silo staves will be dressed to the same standard

thicknesses as finish and in widths and lengths as or- dered, except as specifically provided for in contract. Grades. Clear heart (Redwood Association grade) and A

(American Standard redwood grade).

Silo stave material shall be graded according to the rules for tank stock, 413.1.

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Douglas fir staves, Schedule M, 1925. A

r o. 1 staves. No. 1 staves 1 by 3 inches by 4 feet. Sawn full size clear. If seasoned will allow }/g of an inch

scant in width and thickness. Bright sap no defect. No. 2 staves. No. 2 staves 1 by 3 inches by 4 feet. Will allow

variations in size of 3^ of an inch in thickness and

>8 of an inch in width. Two sound, hard knots not

over % of an inch in diameter allowed. Slightly discolored sap no defect.

West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

and dressing rules for Douglas fir silo staves, July 1, 1926.

Silo staves. Defects based on 2 by 6 inches by 12 feet.

Finished

seasoned

thick- nesses

(inches)

Finished

green

thick- nesses

(inches)

Finished seasoned face widths (inches) Finished green face widths (inches)

1% 1% (514 outside„ 5% outside. \5J^ inside 5)4 inside. " B and better" silo. Must be water-tight full length of piece. Bright sap no defect. Will admit slight torn grain. With

the above will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Three sound and tight small knots;

3 small dark-colored knots, none through; 2 small

(4-inch) pitch pockets or equivalent of slightly

larger pockets, none through thickness; small sea- soning checks; 1 seasoning check x§--inch wide,

24-inch deep, 12 inches long. Warp or crook not

admitted.

"Selected common" silo. Must be water-tight full length of piece. Bright sap no defect. Will admit any number of the fol- lowing defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent

combinations of defects : Medium sound and inter- grown knots; pitch pockets not exceeding 6 inches

in length, none through thickness; medium sap

stain, 25 per cent of face. Warp or crook not

admitted.

421.2 SLACK STAVES.

American Railway Association, Freight Container

Bureau, circular No. 14, slack staves, April 30, 1924. Material for staves. The material for staves used in these containers must be good, sound lumber thoroughly seasoned

so that it does not contain more than 12 per cent moisture based on the weight of the wood after over-drying to a constant weight, free from defects that materially lessen the strength of part, or inter- fere with proper nailing or constuction, or expose

contents to damage. Decayed wood, slanting

shakes, cross-grained material the grain of which

runs out in less than two-thirds the length of stave, unsound knots, or knots greater than one-sixteenth the width of stave are considered as bad defects and must be eliminated. The staves must be manufactured according to the following requirements

Class Minimum thickness

Bilge Groups

I and II Groups

III and IV A

Inches

6 to 2

5 to 2

Tff V2

Inches

6 to 2

5 to m

5tol^

5 to 114

Inches %

U

Vs

V* B^=== C

52688°—27 19 279
421.2 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

The maximum, minimum, and approximate

averge width of staves must be as follows:

Class Approxi- mate

average Maxi- mum

Mini- mum

A

InchesW*

4

444^

Inches

5H

6

Inches2H2%

2%2%

3

B

CD

E

Associated Cooperage Industries of America,

standard specifications and grading rules for slack

barrel staves, May 4, 1926. Elm and gum staves 283^ inches and longer shall be cut five staves to 1% inches in thickness. Cottonwood and basswood staves 283^ inches and

longer shall be cut five staves to ljf inches in thickness. Elm, gum, cottonwood, and basswood staves 24

inches and shorter shall be cut six staves to 2 inches

in thickness. Hardwood staves, oak, beech, and maple 283^

inches and longer shall be cut six staves to 23^ inches

in thickness. Hardwood staves, oak, beech, and maple, 24

inches and shorter, shall be cut six staves to 2 inches

in thickness. White ash staves shall be cut five staves to 23^8 inches in thickness. No. 1 staves, except ash, shall be of uniform thickness, well equalized, circled and jointed, free from

knots, slanting shakes, wormholes or dozy wood,

except that moderate stain, slight roughness, flat staves less than 4 inches in width across the bilge, cross grained which will not break or splinter in tressing or slight warpage shall not be considered

defects. Meal-barrel staves shall be free of slanting shakes over 13^ inches long, knot holes, and unsound knots

(but sound knot not over ^ inch in diameter shall be allowed), and shall consist of good, sound, workable staves. Moderate stain, mildew, or discolor- ation no defect. Mill-run staves shall consist of the run of the knife, well equalized, made from regular run of stave logs, and shall contain 40 per cent or more of No. 1 staves. All dead culls out. No. 2 staves shall, unless otherwise specified,

contain the meal-barre] grade and be free from dead

culls. Mildew and stain no defect. Standard bilge on staves, unless otherwise specified, shall be as follows: 18 to 22 inches in length,

both inclusive, 3^-inch bilge; 23 to 283^ inches in length, both inclusive, ^8-inch bilge; 30 inches in length, ^£-inch bilge; 32 and 34 inches in length, 5^-inch bilge. Standard quarter shall be as follows: On staves 18

to 22 inches in length, 4}4 to 5 inches, both inclusive; staves 23 or 24 inches, 6 or 63^ inches; on staves 27

to 29 inches both inclusive, 8 inches; 30 inches, 83^

inches; 32 and 34 inches, 9 inches. No. 1 staves longer than 24 inches shall not be less than 2 inches nor exceed 53^ inches in width measuring across the bilge. No. 2 staves of same lengths

may be from 2 to 6 inches in width.

All barrel staves 283^ inches and longer to average

in measurement, after being jointed, 4 inches per

stave, or 4,000 inches per thousand staves. Half-barrel staves, 23, 2S}4, or 24 inches, 3H

inches to the stave, or 175 inches to the bundle of 50

staves. Keg staves to measure 160 inches to the bundle of 50 staves except that 18-inch staves for use in the manufacture of apple barrelettes or half barrels to average 33^ inches to the stave and to be packed 175

inches to the bundle.

All staves shall be thoroughly air dried before

jointing and shall be measured across the center of the bilge. Unless otherwise specified, it will be pre- sumed that staves are to be air dried. No. 1 white ash staves shall be of uniform thickness, smoothly cut, free from knots, slanting shakes,

dozy timber, wormholes, stains or mold of any kind

which make the stave unfit for use in the manufacture of No. 1 butter tubs, and to average not less than 75 per cent white. No. 2 ash staves: Same specifications as No. 2 gum and elm. (Except as to bilge. See next paragraph.)

All ash staves shall be jointed with ^s-inch bilge unless otherwise specified. Mill-run apple barrel staves, unless otherwise

specified, shall be cut six staves to 2 inches in thick- ness and shall consist of the run of the mill from the

regular run of stave logs. An average of not less than 60 per cent of the staves in each bundle to be

bright on the outside. At least 40 per cent of all staves to be No. 1. Mold on No. 1 staves no defect. All mill-run apple-barrel staves, unless otherwise

specified, shall be jointed with H-inch bilge. Cement barrel and all other staves not specifi- cally mentioned should be sold according to the

local custom or by special agreement. Same will apply as well to bilge of such staves. Dead cull staves are staves containing knot holes

of over 1 inch in diameter; staves with large, course knots near the quarter or within 1 inch of either end

preventing staves from being tressed in barrels or properly crozed; staves cross-grained near the quarter to such an extent as will result in stave breaking when being tressed in barrel; staves under

34 inch in thickness; staves with bad slanting shakes exceeding 6 inches in length or with rot that

seriously impairs strength.

The term "gum mixed timber staves" shall be

understood to include sycamore, elm, hackberry,

maple, sweet gum, red gum, and birch, but not to include cypress, oak, ash, tupelo gum, cottonwood,

pine, black gum, beech, or box elder. 421.3 HEADINGS AMD HOOPS.

American Railway Association, Freight Container

Bureau, circular No. 14, slack barrels and slack casks, April 30, 1924. Material for heading.

The material for heading must be of good, sound

lumber thoroughly seasoned so that it does not con- 280
MANUFACTURES OF WOOD 421.3

tain more than 12 per cent moisture content based on the weight of the wood after oven drying to a

constant weight, free from defects that materially

lessen the strength of part or interfere with proper

nailing or construction or expose contents to damage.

Unsound knots or knots greater than one-third the width of cant, decayed wood and cross-grained

lumber, the grain of which runs out in less than half the length of piece, are considered as bad defects and must be eliminated. The number of cants per head must be not more

than five for class E and four for all other classes; no cant less than 3 inches wide must be used. The material must be finished so that the outside

surface of head will be sufficiently smooth to permit

of legible marking.

The heads must be properly circled; a variation

of not more than 1 per cent between the largest and

smallest diameter is allowable. They must be fur- nished with a 90° bevel 34 inch wide on the face

side of head, except as provided herein for contaniers with outer and inner head liners. The beveled faces forming the 90° bevel must form a triangle with a

line perpendicular to face of head. The heads must be not less than the following

thicknesses:

Class Minimum thickness

Groups

I and II Groups

III and IV A

InchAlVl

Yt. ft%

Inch B i

CD

E

Material for hoops.

The material for hoops must conform to the fol- lowing:

Wooden ("patent") hoops.—Hoops must be made

of elm or other timber of similar efficiency. The

material must be made from good, sound timber,

free from all defects that lessen strength of part or

interfere with proper construction. Knots, decayed

wood, and cross-grained material, the grain of which

runs out in less than three feet, are considered as bad

defects and must be elimated. Oval bark hoops—The oval bark hoops must be

made from oak or hickory saplings, preferably those

cut down during the winter months The saplings must not be so large that the resultant hoops cut therefrom will be too large or difficult to apply to

container. The hoops, at time of applying, must

not be rotten or full of wormholes.

Wooden ("patent") hoops.—Thickness one edge ^ inch, other edge ^ inch, width \% inches when

finished and properly seasoned in accordance with

modern manufacturing methods. These dimensions apply for classes A, B, C, D, and E. The ends of "patent" wooden hoops must be fas- tened together with at least three nails, staples, or tacks clinched at least 34 inch on the inside.

Oval bark hoops.—The fiat shaved part of oval bark hoops (so-called shaved hoops) must be not less

in width than iy% inches. The locks of such hoops

must be made in accordance with best cooperage

practice, and, in addition, the locks must be secured by not less than three nails driven through hoop and

staves and clinched not less than 34 inch on the

inside. Associated Cooperage Industries of America,

grading rules for slack barrels, May 4, 1926. Coiled elm hoops.

Standard dimensions of coiled elm hoops, 5 feet 6 inches and longer to be, when finished and sea- soned, ^ by ^ by l^s inches. Dimensions of keg hoops 5 feet and shorter may

be by by 134 inches, or standard dimension,

as provided above. No. 1 hoops shall be of good, sound timber, up

to specifications, well finished and free from broken

and other defective hoops in the coil in excess of 3

per cent on hoops over 5 feet in length, 5 per cent on

5-foot hoops, and 8 per cent on hoops less than 5

feet long which are unfit for use on a barrel, and to be dry when shipped. Slack barrel heading. No. 1 basswood, cottonwood, or tupelo gum heading shall be manufactured from good, sound timber, thoroughly kiln-dried, turned true to size, and

shall be }4 inch in thickness after being dressed on

one side, and free from all defects making it unfit for use in No. 1 barrels. Stain or discoloration on

under side no defect. To be jointed straight unless otherwise specified. No. 1 hard wood, gum and gum mi,xed timber

heading shall be of the same specifications as in para- graph above, excepting that the thickness after being dressed shall be yq inch. Mill-run heading shall consist of the run of the saw from the regular run of heading bolts or logs, without any previous culling to select out the better grade, well manufactured, of standard thickness and

kiln dried. All dead culls out, and to contain not

less than 50 per cent No. 1 pieces or cants. Pine heading, all sizes up to and including 163^

inches in diameter, shall be inch in thickness

after being dressed on one side: larger sizes shall be }4 inch in thickness after being dressed on one

side. Specifications otherwise to be the same as provided for other species except as to thickness. No. 2 heading shall be manufactured from heading blanks culled in the process of manufacturing

No. 1 heading and shall be workable and free from

dead culls. All heading to be well bundled, 15 sets to the

bundle, sizes 143^ to 19% inches, inclusive; two

wires to the bundle, sizes under 193^8 inches; three

wires to the bundle, sizes 193^8 and over. (See

specifications following covering bundling of pine

heading.) Number of pieces to the head not to exceed the following: No. 1 and M. R. grades, above 133^ inches and

to 173^8 inches, inclusive, three and four pieces, at least 50 per cent to be three pieces, or less. 281
421.3 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

No. 1 and M. R. grades, 18 to 193^ inches, inclusive, three, four, and five piece, at least 50 per cent

to be four piece, or less. Heading that contains knot holes of over 1 inch

diameter, bad slanting shakes, rotten timber, or other defects that make it unworkable shall be

considered as dead culls. All stock not specifically mentioned, staves, hoops, or heading, should be bought and sold on

specifications agreed upon between the buyer and

seller. All heading, including pine heading, to be turned with a 90° bevel and \i inch wide on the face side

of head unless otherwise specified.

Pine heading, up to and including 123^ inches, 25 sets to bundle, 2 wires. Pine heading, over 12^ inches, to but not includ- ing 173^8 inches, 20 sets to bundle, 3 wires. Pine heading, 173^8 inches and over, including 20

inches, 15 sets to bundle, 3 wires. Pine heading, over 20 inches, 12 sets to bundle,

3 wires. Associated Cooperage Industries of America,

grading rules for tight barrel staves and heading,

November 9, 1926. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, TIGHT BARREL HEADING

(CIRCLED) Bourbon-barrel heading.

Shall be made of white oak and species of white

oak, free of sap, that will be suitable for the purpose.

All heading shall be sawed with the grain from

straight-grained timber, properly seasoned, thor- oughly kiln-dried, properly jointed, doweled and

flagged, and to be 1 inch thick when finished. Heading shall be planed on face side and uni- formly circled to the required size not to exceed 20J4 inches in diameter. Where heading is to be

recircled by the purchaser the allowance of wood

want on the bevel to make the required size, to be

agreed by the buyer and seller. Sound streaks that do not go through heading will be admitted provided

they are on inside of head and not less than 1 inch

from bevel. Heading to be composed of not exceeding five pieces, and no piece of the heading shall be under 3 inches in width.

J/g-inch whisky or bourbon barrel heading.

Same specifications as 1-inch bourbon-barrel heading, except that it shall be % inch in thickness when finished. Spirit-barrel heading.

Same specifications as bourbon-barrel heading, ex- cept that it shall be z/i inch in thickness when finished. Wine-barrel heading.

Same specifications as bourbon-barrel heading,

except that it shall be j% or 34 inch in thickness,

as agreed. Slight defects not showing through on

both sides are permissible.

Holf-barrel spirit heading.

Same specifications as whole spirit-barrel heading,

except that it shall be not less than xf inch in thick- ness and not exceeding 173^ inches in diameter.

Half-barrel wine heading.

Same specifications as whole wine-barrel heading,

except that it shall be not less than j| inch in thickness and not exceeding 17^ inches in diameter.

White oak oil barrel heading.

Shall be made of white oak timber and its species. Shall be evenly sawed, practically with the grain,

and of uniform thickness, properly seasoned,

thoroughly kiln-dried, properly jointed, doweled

and flagged, and to be % inch thick when finished. Heading shall be planed on face side and uni- formly circled to the required size not to exceed

20 yi inches in diameter unless otherwise agreed.

Properly plugged wormholes, cat faces which do not show through on both sides, discolored sound sap

will be permitted. No rotten sap permitted.

Not over 15 properly plugged wormholes in any

one 'head to be permitted, and not more than 5 per

cent of the carload to be of such stock. No plugged

wormholes in the top bevel of the head to be permissible. Heading to be composed of not exceeding five pieces, except 5 per cent of six-piece heading allowed. Red oak oil-barrel heading.

Same specifications as white oak oil-barrel heading, except that it shall be made of red oak timber

and its speci.es. Pork-barrel heading.

Shall be made of white oak, red oak, or ash timber

and of the same specifications as the oil-barrel heading, except that it shall be % inch in thickness, not

exceeding 173^2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise

agreed

Ash tierce heading.

Same specifications as oil-barrel heading, except

that it shall be manufactured of ash timber, pumpkin ash not permitted.

Turpentine-barrel heading.

Shall be made of white oak timber and its species

of white ash timber. Same specifications as oil- barrel heading except as follows: Two wormholes

properly plugged in each piece of heading and one

cat face which does not go through, in each head,

shall be permitted. No discolored sap permitted.

White oak heading shall be 24 inch to 1 inch in thickness. White ash heading shall be xf inch to

1 inch thickness and shall not exceed 20^4 inches in diameter. Gum barrel heading

Same specifications as oil-barrel heading, except

that it shall be manufactured from gum timber and

shall not exceed 21 inches in diameter. Gum half-barrel heading.

Same specifications as gum barrel heading, except

that it shall be not less than % inch in thickness and

not exceeding 173^2 inches in diameter. Keg heading. Shall be of same specifications as to grades governing the- different classes of whole barrel heading

and shall not be less than % inch in thickness, and

diameter as agreed upon by buyer and seller. 282
MANUFACTURES OF V,

TOOD 421.3

No. 2 tight barrel heading.

All tight barrel heads that are not suitable for No. 1 grade shall be classed as No. 2 grade, and all knots and knot holes to be permissible in No. 2 grade heading.

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, TIGHT BARREL HEADING

(SQUARE)

(Adopted by Tight Heading Group, June 17, 1820) Spirit heading, square. Fifteen-sixteenth inch in thickness, 22 to 24 inches

in length, 11-inch average. If no length is specified, 22 inches shall be considered standard length. For

specifications as to grades, see bourbon-barrel heading (circled). (See note.) Half-barrel spirit heading, square. Thirteen-sixteenth inch thickness, 19 inches in length, 9 inch average. For specifications as to grades see bourbon-barrel heading (circled). (See

note.) Oak oil and tierce heading, square. Seven-eighth inch thickness, 22 to 24 inches in length, 11-inch average. If no length is specified, 22 inches shall be considered standard length. For

specifications as to grades see white oak oil-barrel heading (circled). (See note.) Pork-barrel heading, square. Three-fourth inch thickness, 19 inches in length, 9-inch average. For specifications as to grades see pork-barrel heading (circled). (See note.) Ash tierce heading, square. Fifteen-sixteenth inch thickness, 22 to 24 inches

in length, 11-inch average. If no length is specified, 22 inches shall be considered standard length. For

specifications as to grades see ash tierce heading

(circled). (See note.) Gum barrel heading, square. Shall be cut plump Y% inch in thickness when green

to finish up full % inch thickness when dry and

planed, 22 to 24 inches in length, 11-inch average.

If no length is specified, 22 inches shall be consid- ered standard length. For specifications as to grades see gum barrel heading (circled) . (See note.) Gum half-barrel heading, square. Shall be cut plump Y% inch in thickness when

green to finish up M inch thickness when dry and

planed, 19 inches in length, 9-inch average. For

specifications as to grades see gum half barrel heading (circled). (See note.) Note.—No piece under 3 inches in width permissible. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR MEASURING FLAG

Twenty-four-inch butt flag shall measure 27

inches in circumference at the center, tied reason- ably tight and well cured or seasoned. BEER STAVE AND HEADING SPECIFICATIONS

A. Beer staves must be made from sound white

oak timber free from short crooks and seed holes. Two sound wormholes in a piece may be allowed,

but 90 per cent of each lot must be free from such

defects. B. Grain: They must be straight grain, or nearly

so, and will be classed as culls if the grain has an

angle of over 45°. C. Checks: They must be free from heart checks,

of such a nature as to make them unfit for the pur- pose for which they were intended. D. Streaks: Staves may have black or red streaks on the inside, if they do not show through at any

point between chimes, nor more than inch deep

at end; on outside if they do not show through at any point between chimes, nor more than 3^ inch deep at end.

E. Minimum width of 1-1 barrel staves is to be

V/2 inches; ^ barrel and ^/i barrel staves, 3 inches; Y§ and 3^8 staves, 2% inches. Measurement taken on back of staves at bilge, including ^ inch of sap.

F. Each shipment is to be inspected by buyer,

piece by piece, and the rejects, if any, laid aside for shipper's disposal. G. Specifications: All staves are sold on listed basis, and the average width is to be arrived at by

measuring 4 per cent of the prime staves taken at random from several parts of each carload, such aver- age to be arrived at by measuring with a steel tape

the over-all width of 50 or 100 staves at a time laid side by side. In case any of said staves have excess wane edges or surplus sap, deductions are to be made

accordingly from such over-all measurement. Ship- ments must be accepted as prime when the per- centage of rejects does not exceed 2 per cent. H. The following dimensions are for green stock and constitute a standard stave, and a variation of

of an inch in thickness is allowed. Dimensions

Size

H

H- - M

y*

i-i Ale bbls. Ale hhds

Length

Inches 1VA

1820H

25Al 313440

Thickness at— End Bilge

InchesIK

1

5A

i%

Inches

Average width

Length

of shoul- der

Inches Inches 3M

4 3 4^

4H 4 4H 4

Beer heading.—Workmanship: Sawed, chipped,

flat bucked. Specifications as to quality and grain, to be same as in staves, except as otherwise herein

specified; streaks shall be allowed on one side only

if same does not pass through over one-third of the

thickness of the piece at the ends of same.

Size Length

of piece Width

per heading

Thickness

^ heading. . Inchesmi

1316H

18H

Inchesm/2 13

1618H

InchesmmM

M heading

Yt heading.

1-1 heading.

283
421.3 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Minimum width.—Shall be 3 inches full thickness,

clear of sap; average pieces per set shall not exceed 5 pieces for 3^, 6 pieces for 34, 7 pieces for 3^2 and

1-1.Memoranda.—Clauses F and G: These specifica- tions to apply to heading also, and measurement and

width on prime pieces only, and said measure- ment shall include M inch sap on each piece. Provisional memoranda.—Wane edges: Wane is to be included in the measurement of width of two-thirds of the total quantity where such wane

measures %-inch thick on y%, 34, and 3^ pieces, and

1 inch on 1-1 pieces. One sound knot, not exceeding 1 inch in diameter showing only on one side and

not within 1 inch of finished joint or bead will be

admitted in prime heading, but not on more than

5 per cent of the quantity.

421.4 SHOCKS. (See also 421.3.)

National Association of Wooden Box Manufacturers, grading rules for white pine, cottonwood,

gum, poplar and basswood, boxes and box shooks,

August 15, 1905. WHITE PINE BOXES

For Northwest Territory Clear grade.

This grade is to have top, sides, and ends practically clear of all defects, except white sap, an

occasional sound red knot, no larger than a dime. Bottoms may have small to medium red knots and some blue sap. Grade No. 1. Tops, sides, and ends shall contain no rot, black

knots, wane, or wormholes, but may contain small

to medium sized tight red knots. Bottoms may

contain small to medium sized black knots, blue

sap, stain, and some small wormholes, but no defect that will weaken the piece.

Grade No. 2. Top, sides, and ends may contain the following

defects, but not enough to weaken the piece: Large

and small tight red knots, small black knots, a

limited amount of red streak, shake; blue sap stain in small percentages will be allowed by this grade.

Small wormholes will be allowed, but not numerous

enough to make the box appear unsightly. Bottoms may be colored, but must be strong. Grade No. 3. This grade will admit of coarse knots, blue sap

shake, red streaks, and a few wormholes, but must

be strong for carrying heavy goods.

Grade No. £. Lumber in this grade may contain the following

defects: Red streaks, soft rot, but soft rot shall not

prevail in the complete box to a greater extent than

15 per cent. Coarse knots, wormholes, wane, and

shake will be admissible in this grade. A large

amount of blue stain shall not be considered a

defect. Grade No. 5 {large cheated boxes). This grade will admit of coarse knots, blue sap, shake, soft rot, wormholes, waney, and narrow

strips; in fact, anything that will hold nails and in suitable for carrying light, bulky goods. Not

matched.

Grade No. 6. This grade of box may contain many defects, such as soft rot, loose knots, wormholes, shakes; almost any defect will be admissible in this grade. WHITE PINE STANDARD CANNED GOODS BOXES

(Two and Three Pound) Grade No. 1. Style No. 1. Standard thickness, % to % inch. One piece side and end of standard thickness. This grade of boxes must be tight knotted and of good appearance and well manufactured.

Grade No. 2. Style No. 1. Standard thickntss, % to % inch. This box can be made one-piece ends and twopiece sides. Will admit of red or black knots, a

limited amount of red streaks, sap, and wormholes. Bottoms may be coarse, but not enough to weaken

the box. Grade No. 3. Style No. 5. Standard thickness, to ^ inch. This box, style No. 5, inside cleats, may contain many defects, such as soft rot, loose knots, and

wormholes, but must be strong enough to carry the

contents. WHITE PINE LEAF TOBACCO CASES Grade No. 1. Style No. 5. Sound red or black knots; will admit of some

shake, blue sap, red streaks, wormholes. Tops and

bottoms of three equal pieces, sides and ends of four pieces, no piece less than 4 inches wide. Grade No. 2. Style No. 5. This grade will admit coarse knots, and some

loose knots if not too large, soft rot, shake, and

wormholes, but must be strong enough to hold nails and carry the required weight of contents. All parts of four or more pieces, no piece less than

23^ inches wide, and defects must not materially

weaken the pieces.

BASSWOOD GRADING BUIES

Clear grade.

Lumber in this grade of boxes must be practically

free from knots, and must be good color, running

largely to white basswood. This grade can contain,

however, 15 to 20 per cent of red color, but must not

contain black or brown.

Grade No. 1. Lumber in this grade of boxes must be good,

sound material of mixed colors, light and brown,

and should contain at least 50 per cent of reason- ably light colored basswood. Small sound knots

will be allowed in this grade, and some stain. Grade No. 2. Lumber in this grade of boxes shall be resaonably

strong, but shall not be graded as to colors. Brown

basswood can prevail in this grade; small knots and

shake can prevail, but not in sufficient quantities

284
MANUFACTURES OF WOOD 421.4

to materially weaken pieces. Some stain will be

allowed in this grade.

Grade No. 8. Lumber in this grade of boxes shall not be graded

as to color. Black knots and stain will be allowed

in this grade.

COTTONWOOD, POPLAR, AND GUM

Clear grade.

This grade is to have top, sides, and ends practically clear of all defects except white sap. The bot- tom may contain small, sound knots, a small amount

of stained sap, and a few small wormholes.

Grade No. 1. This grade is to have top, sides, and ends free from rot, shake, wane, or wormholes, but small sound knots are permissible. The bottoms may

contain stain, small wormholes, and sound knots,

but no defects that will materially weaken the piece.

Grade No. 2. This grade is to have top, sides, and ends in which

sound knots, a limited amount of stain, rot, shake,

or wormholes are permissible, but not enough to

materially weaken the piece. The bottom may be

coarser, but must be strong. Grade No. 3. This grade will admit of coarse knots, small knot

holes, splits, shake, rot, wane, stain, wormholes,

and sound narrow strips, but must be strong for carrying heavy goods.

Grade No. 4- This grade may contain many defects, such as coarse knots, knot holes, rot, wane, shake, splits, wormholes, black stain, and narrow strips; anything that will hold nails and be suitable for carry- ing light, bulky goods.

COTTONWOOD, POPLAR, AND GUM STANDARD CANNED

GOODS BOXES

(Two and Three Pound) Grade No. 1. This grade is to have one-piece sides and ends. Boxes must be tight knotted and of good appearance and well manufactured. Standard thicknesses i\

and inch. Grade No. 2. This box can be made with one-piece ends and

two-piece sides, or vice versa. Sound knots, stain, and some splits, shake, rot, and wormholes will be

permitted, but not enough to materially weaken the

box. Standard thicknesses and ^ inch. Grade No. 3. This grade may contain many defects, such as

rot, coarse knots, small knot holes and wormholes,

black stain, shake and splits, and is intended to be

made style 5, inside cleats % by % inch. Standard thicknesses, 3^ and 3€ inch. Western Pine Manufacturers Association, Box

Bureau, rules for grading western pine box shooks

and crating, May, 1925. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

It is not intended that these rules shall apply

without exception to every kind of box or crate

made, for western pine shooks are made for every purpose and of a grade that will suit each individual buyer's requirements.

The rules are, however, an expression of the pre- vailing custom for grading the principal kinds of shooks manufactured in the inland empire, and as such represent the low line of each grade.

The grades are based on Pondosa pine, but shall apply to all inland empire woods for the present.

All stock shall be dried to a moisture content not

to exceed 25 per cent. Every precaution shall be exercised in cutting,

ripping, and resawing, where resawing is called for, to produce rectangular shooks accurately cut to

length, width, and thickness; but occasional pieces are admissible if variation from exact size is not more than 3^8 inch in width, ys inch in pieces ^ inch and over thick, and inch in thinner pieces.

Recognized defects are the same, in so far as

applicable, as those specified in the lumber grading

rules issued by the Western Pine Manufacturers

Association. Cleats shall be free from any defects that weaken

them.

Shook edges may be rough, as in rough lumber if produced therefrom, and roughness does not constitute a defect. Knots on ends or side edges that interfere with

nailing are not admissible in any grade.

A knot shall be no larger than }4 the width of the

piece, and width shall be understood to be maximum

measurement across the piece regardless of the posi- tion or shape of knot. In shooks of larger size than given for the grade, knots may be more numerous but none larger in

size than the maximum width stated. Cross-grained lumber is not admissible in any nar- row shooks; neither are spike or branch knots that

are more than 3 inches long, in any shooks. Reasonable effort shall be made not to include

in fresh fruit packages any shooks that contain

serious pitch defects. As far as possible, shooks shall always be cut to exact specifications and grade. However, occasional

off-grade pieces are practically unavoidable, and to cover these a variation from the rules of 5 per cent

or less is provided.

Interpretation of the rules and decision on grade

is vested in the Box Bureau, Western Pine Manufacturers Association and its representatives. REINSPECTION In case of a claim on grade, tally, or manufacture,

upon the part of the buyer, reinspection is available upon request to the association. The same stipulations and charges as are pro- vided for lumber and are printed in the lumber

grading rules shall also apply to claims on box shooks and crating. In part, these are that the complainant buyer

shall hold disputed material intact for not exceeding 60 days after filing complaint, and shall file complaint with seller within 10 days after receipt

of shipment; otherwise material may be presumed

to be accepted as invoiced. 285
421.4 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

A shipment shall be considered as of the grade

invoiced if upon official reinspection 95 per cent

thereof or more is found to be of grade invoiced, the material below said grade to be accepted as of its actual grade if usable. Unless otherwise agreed upon the cost of rein- spection shall be borne by the customer in the event

that the amount below grade is found to be 5 per

cent or less of the total amount of the item complained of. If more than 5 per cent, the expense

shall be borne by the shipper. Gross feetage shall be used as the basis for deter- mining percentage below grade.

BOX AND CRATE SPECIFICATIONS Detailed cutting specifications for the principal

types of containers manufactured can be found in "Box and Crate Specifications," published and dis- tributed by the Box Bureau.

Grades.

Select.—This grade includes macaroni, dried

fruit, and other boxes requiring a neat, tight package, and may contain any two of the following

defects in a piece 153^ by 9^4 inch surface measure, and proportionately more or less defects in larger or smaller pieces: A.—Two 13^-inch round, tight red knots, or two

24-inch tight black knots or equivalent in combination. Checked red knots that are not opened up

are admissable. More small knots having same

relative value are admissible. B.—Heart pith 3^2 inch in width by one-half the

length of piece stapled when necessary in one piece

stock, but then only an occasional piece admissible.

C.—Slight traces of pitch or three small, dry pitch

pockets, providing defect does not lessen high quality or appearance of piece. D.—Light blue or red stain in sides, tops, and bot- toms, but not to exceed 10 per cent in any ship- ment. Ends must be bright.

Powder boxes come in this grade and are graded

as above with this difference: Light stain is admissible up to 25 per cent in any one shipment, and a

piece may contain one round, tight red knot 2}4

inches in diameter if otherwise practically clear and knot is at least 3 inches from any nailing edge.

Lumber for this grade must be surfaced clean on

both sides before resawing. Loose knots, branch knots, knot holes, wane, heart

shake, season checks extending through piece, rot, and wormholes are not admissible. Standard.—This is the usual grade manufactured

and is supplied when grade is not specified.

The high line of the grade, which includes shooks

having slightly more pronounced defects than will admit them in select, includes glass-bottle containers, candy boxes, soap boxes, milk boxes, and cas- ket cases. The low line includes all fresh-fruit packages, such

as apple, pear, prune, peach boxes, and berry crates, also cannery cases, and may contain any three of the

following defects, excepting A, in which case, 23^ to

V/2 inch knots should be about the only defect in a

piece 19^4 by 10^ inch surface measure, and proportionately more or less defects in larger or smaller

pieces. A.—One 33^-inch or two 23^-inch round or oblong

sound, tight red knots when placed at least 3 inches from any nailing edge, and with practically no other

defect in piece; or one 2-inch and one 13^-inch black knot if well set; or two 1-inch loose knots or knot

holes, provided same are no closer than 2 inches from

any nailing edge.

B.—Heart pith, stapled where necessary in one

piece stock.

C.—Massed pitch over less than one-fourth sur- face area, or three or four dry pitch pockets, or equivalent in combination.

D.—Light to medium blue or red stain over entire surface of tops and bottoms, and an occasional side and end, not to exceed 20 per cent in any one

shipment.

E.—Firm white-pitted red stain, not to exceed 10 per cent in any shipment.

F.—Slight season checks and heart shake permissible. Merchantable.—This grade covers meat boxes,

vegetable crates, machinery crates, and similar containers, and, in addition to defects mentioned in standard grade, may contain the following, but all pieces must be serviceable and strong. Slight wane

where it does not weaken nailing edge; light to heavy blue or red stain up to 35 per cent in any ship- ment; more pronounced heart shake and season

checks; and a few small wormholes.

421.5 BOXES, BARRELS, CASKS, AND

HOGSHEADS. (See also 402., 421.,

and 492.)

American Society for Testing Materials, tentative

specifications for canned-food boxes, wire-bound construction, D45-17T, 1917. Boxes shall be well manufactured from sound

(free from decay or dote), well-seasoned veneer and

cleat lumber. Kiln-drying by excessively high temperatures or low humidities or below 6 per cent moisture shall be avoided. Veneer shall be free from knot holes, loose or rotten knots greater than

1 inch in diameter. Cleats shall be free from knots and from excessive cross grain. No knots will be

permitted which will interfere with proper nailing or stapling. Each side, top, and end shall be of a

single piece of veneer; the bottoms shall consist of not more than two pieces, no piece less than 4

inches in width. Boxes for two dozen No. 23^, two dozen No. 3, and two dozen extra-size No. 3 cans shall be constructed as follows: Each end shall be cleated with four cleats not

less than ff by inch, or any other size cleats that have equally large cross section. One end of each cleat shall be provided with a tenon 34 inch

thick and xi inch long and the other end with the corresponding mortise. Cleats may be made of any

of the following species of wood:

286
MANUFACTUEES OF WOOD 422.

Red gum. Oak.

Black gum. Sycamore.

Maple. Ash.

Birch. Hickory.

Beech. Hackberry.

Tupelo. Yellow pine.

Elm.

The sides, top, bottom, and ends shall be of }/%-

inch gum veneer. The box shall be bound with

four equally spaced No. 16 gauge 0.0625-inch diameter, basic annealed wires. End wires shall be

attached to cleats with No. 16 gauge by l^-inch

bright, soft Bessemer staples driven through the veneer into the center of the width of the cleats. Six staples shall be driven into each top and bot- tom cleat and four into each side cleat. Interior wires shall be attached to the veneer by No. 18 gauge, bright, soft Bessemer staples driven through

and clinched, six staples connecting each wire to top and bottom and four to each side. The ends shall be attached to each side cleat by

four No. 18 gauge by ff-inch staples equally spaced,

driven into the center of the cleat and at an angle

of 45° to 60° with the grain of the end; or by four

nails inch by 15 gauge by 3^-inch head, driven

into the center of the cleat and equally spaced. Boxes for two dozen No. 1, four dozen No. 1, and two dozen No. 2 cans shall be constructed as

follows: These boxes shall be the same as those for No. 3 cans, except that wires shall be stapled to the

tops and bottoms with four staples to each wire and

to the sides with three staples to each wire. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

271, U. S. Government master specification for vegetable crates, January 22, 1925. Crates for potatoes. Crates shall be made from a good, sound grade of box lumber, free from knot holes and loose or decayed knots. No knot shall be on nailing edges.

Shall have inside dimensions as follows: 12 inches

high, 15 inches wide, 31 inches long, and shall contain about 120 pounds net weight of potatoes.

Ends and center partition shall be octagonal, 12

inches high by 15 inches wide, planed on both

sides, and not less than % mcn when finished. Ends

shall be one or two pieces. If two pieces are

used, shall have two corrugated metal fasteners at

least 1 inch long and Y% inch wide; center partition

shall be one, two, or three pieces. If two pieces, two

corrugated metal fasteners shall be used, and if three pieces, four corrugated metal fasteners shall be used. Tops and bottoms each shall have two slats 43^

inches wide, or one 4 inches and one 5 inches wide,

shall be resawed and not less than inch in thickness. Remaining sides shall have eight slats not less than 2% inches wide and not less than ^ inch in thickness.

All nailing edges shall be well nailed with six- penny standard cement-coated nails, not less than

2 inches in length. Slats 4 inches wide or more shall have not less than three nails at each nailing edge and

two at center. No slats shall have less than two

nails at each nailing edge and one at center. Each

end and center shall be well strapped with ^-inch

flat iron, ends overlapping.

National Association of Wooden Box Manufacturers, specifications for boxes, 1921.

(In a publication entitled "Wooden Box and Crate Construction" are set forth the association's tentative general specifications for nail and lock-corner

boxes," specific specifications for nailed and locked- corner boxes and general specifications for 4-one and

similar boxes. These specifications are similar to those of the American Society for Testing Materials,

designated as D44-20T, 1920, D68-22T, 1922,

D118-21T, 1921. They cover both the dimensional

requirements for the boxes and the mechanical and

strength properties of the wood. See 402.42.)

422. BASKETS.

National Conference on Weights and Measures,

specifications and tolerances for berry baskets or boxes, 1916. The following specifications and tolerances were adopted by the Eleventh Annual Conference on the Weights and Measures of the United States, 1916,

and recommended by the National Bureau of Standards for adoption by the several States:

Specifications.

Baskets or boxes for berries or small fruits, of a capacity of 1 dry quart or less, shall be of one of the

following sizes: 1 quart, 1 pint, or H pint, dry

measure.

Tolerances. The tolerances to be allowed in excess or defi- ciency, on baskets or boxes for berries or small fruits, constructed of wood, shall not be greater than the

following values:

Capacity of basket

Tolerance

In excess In deficiency

1 quart

Cubic inches

32

1

Cubic inches

1.5 1.0

. 5

1 pint /l 2 pint The tolerances to be allowed in excess or defi- ciency on baskets or boxes for berries or small

fruits, constructed of pasteboard or fiber, shall not be greater than the following values:

Capacity of basket

Tolerance In excess 1 In deficiency

1 quart

Cubic inches 1 Cubic inch

2. ! 1.0

1. 1 .5 .t\

1 pint ------- Y2 pint Federal Government, standards for Climax bas- kets for grapes and other fruits and vegetables,

August 31, 1916 (39 U. S. Stat. L., p. 673). The standard baskets for grapes and other fruits and vegetables are the 2-quart basket, the 4-quart

basket, and the 1 2-quart basket, respectively.

287
422. STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

The standard 2-quart Climax basket shall be of the following dimensions: Length of bottom piece,

9}4 inches; width of bottom piece, S}4 inches; thick- ness of bottom piece, z/% inch; height of basket, 3^8 inches, outside measurement; top of basket,

length 11 inches and width 5 inches, outside measurement. Basket to have a cover 5 by 11 inches, when

a cover is used. The standard 4-quart Climax basket shall be of the following dimensions: Length of bottom piece, 12 inches; width of bottom piece, 4^ inches; thick- ness of bottom piece, ^-inch; height of basket,

4f| inches, outside measurement; top of basket,

length 14 inches, width 634 inches, outside measure- ment. Basket to have cover 634 inches by 14

inches, when cover is used. The standard 1 2-quart Climax basket shall be of the following dimensions: Length of bottom piece, 16 inches; width of bottom piece, 63^ inches; thick- ness of bottom piece, ye inch; height of basket,

7t§- inches, outside measurement; top of basket,

length 19 inches, width 9 inches, outside measurement. Basket to have cover 9 by 19 inches, when

cover is used. That the standard basket or other container

for small fruits, berries, and vegetables shall be of the following capacities, namely, dry one-half pint,

dry pint, dry quart, or multiples of the dry quart.

(a) The dry half pint shall contain 16j^ cubic

inches.

(6) The dry pint shall contain 33^ cubic inches.

(c) The dry quart shall contain 67^ cubic inches. The following tolerances in holding capacity and

dimensions have been authorized under the rules and regulations of the Secretary of Agriculture:

Standard capacity

1 busheL Al bushel

12 quarts

1 peck___

lA peck._

2 quarts.

1 quart „

1 pint... Hpint..

Tolerances and variations

Excess Deficiency

Cubic inches Cubic inches

50 30

30 18

23 15

16 10

105 3M

3 2

2

1

Dimensions

Length of bottom piece of 2-quart, 4-quart, or 12-quart Climax basket Width of bottom piece of 2-quart, 4-quart, or 12-quart Climax basket Thickness of bottom piece of 2-quart, 4-quart, or 12-quart Climax basket Height of 2-quart, 4-quart, or 12-quart Climax

basket, outside measurement

Length of cover of 2-quart, 4-quart, or 12-quart Climax basket Width of cover of 2-quart, 4-quart, or 12-quart Climax basket Combined length and width of top of 2-quart Climax basket, outside measurement Combined length and width of top of 4-quart Climax basket, outside measurement Combined length and width of top of 12-quart Climax basket, outside measurement

Tolerances and

variations

Excess

Inch

Defi- ciency Inch

423. MILLWORK.

423.0 GENERAL ITEMS.

General Conference of Northeastern Millwork

Interests, at Department of Commerce, division of simplified practice, April, 1925. At a general conference of Northeastern Mill- work Interests held under the auspices of the division

of simplified practice at the Department of Commerce, Washington, D. C, on April 29, 1925, the

following recommendations were adopted as the ones

best calculated to meet the varying needs of the dif- ferent localities in the Northeast. RECOMMENDATIONS

That for the purpose of establishing the size of opening 4 inches in width and 6 inches in height over the glass measurement of two light windows

be adopted as standard for all stock types of win- dows. That for all standard windows the over-all sizes of component parts be as follows:

Inches Stiles and top rails 234 Meeting rails 1%

Bottom rails 3%

Muntins and bars %

Rabbets 34 Parting beads 3^ That for the present no recommendations be made

on details of sticking.

That the finished thicknesses of standard windows and sash be 1%, 1%, and \

z/i inches. That in standard casement and cellar sash the same widths of stiles, rails, muntins, bars, and rabbets be used as in standard window sash. That for standard transoms and rim sash 2*4

inches over-all size of styles and rails be adopted;

also ^-inch muntins and 34_mch rabbets. That for stock panel doors

Widths to be 1 foot 6 inches, 2 feet, 2 feet 4 inches, 2 feet 6 inches, 2 feet 8 inches, and 3 feet. Heights to be 6 feet, 6 feet 6 inches, 6 feet 8 inches,

and 7 feet. Finished thicknesses to be 13^, 1^8, and 1%

inches. That for stock sash doors, common designs

Widths to be 2 feet, 2 feet 4 inches, 2 feet 6 inches, 2 feet 8 inches, and 3 feet. Heights to be 6 feet 6 inches, 6 feet 8 inches, and

7 feet. Finished thicknesses to be 1% and l

z/i inches. That for stock French doors

Widths to be 1 foot 6 inches, 2 feet, 2 feet 4 inches, 2 feet 6 inches, 2 feet 8 inches, and 3 feet. Heights to be 6 feet 6 inches, 6 feet 8 inches, and

7 feet. Finished thicknesses to be 1^5 and 1% inches. That for sash doors, front door design

Widths to be 2 feet 6 inches, 2 feet 8 inches, and

3 feet. Heights to be 6 feet 6 inches, 6 feet 8 inches, and

7 feet. 288
MANUFACTURES OF T/OOD 423.5

Finished thicknesses to be 1% and 1% inches. That for garage doors

Widths to be 4 feet each in pairs; 2 feet 8 inches each in sets of three. Heights to be 7 feet 6 inches and 8 feet. Thickness to be 1% inches. That because of the special nature of the work no

stock sizes be recommended for storm doors or cup- board doors. That for the present no recommendations be made

on stock sizes of blinds or shutters. • Southern Sash, Door and Millwork Manufacturers'

Association, millwork catalogue cf sash, doors,

blinds, and general millwork, 1919. (Catalogue of sizes of sash, doors, blinds, and general millwork supplied by the member companies.

The association has adopted grading rules similar to those of the Wholesale Sash and Door Association.)

Wholesale Sash and Door Association, standard

lists of open sash, glazed sash, panel doors, and

outside blinds, 1926.

(Lists of standard designs and sizes of sashes and

doors supplied by the member companies. There

are also included the following grading rules for doors, windows, and blinds:) Doors. No. 1 quality.—Material in No. 1 doors must be

clear, except defects not more serious in nature than a tight, sound knot, 34 inch in diameter. No piece

•to contain more than one such defect, and no door more than a total of five such defects. In addition,

stiles may contain one small pitch streak on one side. White sap, light brown water stain, and light red

kiln burn not considered defects. Workmanship must be good.

Door with white pine stiles and rails and lami- nated panels are, unless otherwise specified, to have

No. 1 quality stiles and rails. Panels to be threeply, good two sides and may contain two or three

piece faces if joints are well made.

No. 2 quality.—Material in No. 2 doors may contain pitch streaks, fine season checks, pitch pockets

if silvered, light-blue sap showing on not to exceed 25 per cent of the area of any piece, and defects not more serious in nature than a tight, sound knot,

% inch in diameter. No piece to contain more than two such defects, and no door to contain more than eight such defects on each side. Plugs admitted, but regarded as defects. Slight defects in workmanship admitted. No. 3 quality.—Material for No. 3 doors may contain all blue sap, small wormholes, season checks,

pitch streaks, pitch pockets, fine shake, and defects not more serious in nature than a tight knot \

z/i

inches in diameter. No piece to contain more than

4 such defects and no door to contain more than 20

such defects on each side. Plugs admitted, but regarded as defects. Slight defects in workmanship admitted. No. 4- quality.—Material for No. 4 doors may

contain an unlimited number of coarse defects except rot, but each piece must be sound.

Defects in workmanship admitted.

Windows.

Check rail windows may contain one knot 34 inch

in diameter in each piece cf a window. White sap may be admitted. Workmanship must be good.

Plain rail windows and sash may contain blue sap and small knots.

Blinds. No. 1 outside blinds for paint must be made of sound lumber, and may contain small, sound pin

knots, water stain, and white sap. Slight imperfections in workmanship also admitted. No. 2 outside blinds must be made of sound stock which may contain sound knots up to 3^ inch in diameter and any amount of either white or blue

sap. Slight imperfections in workmanship admitted.

Wood admissible. Wood other than Michigan, Wisconsin, and Minnesota or western pine may be admitted in doors,

blinds, and windows.

423.1 DOORS. (See 413.8.)

423.2 SASH. (See 413.8.)

423.3 SLAT BLINDS. (See 413.8.)

423.4 SLATS. (See 413.8.)

423.5 PICKETS AND PALINGS.

Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, grading rules for soft pine pickets, March 23, 1927. The grading rules for pickets are the same as those of the Southeastern Forest Products Association and the Southern Pine Association given below.

California Redwood Association, standard specifications for eastern grades of California redwood

pickets, porch rail, and other millwork items, April, 1927.

Pickets, porch rail, and other millwork items will be furnished in A and better grade equivalent in quality to those described for finish, and in sizes and patterns conforming to those published by this association, or by members thereof, or to special order. Clear heart grade in above items shall be by

special contract. National Hardwood Lumber Association, rules for the measurement and inspection of cypress pickets,

January, 1927.

Sizes.

1 by 1 inch, ±34 by 134 inches, 1}4 by 13^ inches,

1 by 3 inches, S4S to if inch, 1^ inches, 1^- inches,

and % by 2^ inches, respectively, and headed.

Grades. No. 1 and No. 2. No. 1.—Must be straight and may have bright

sapwood and one 3^-inch sound knot or its equivalent. No. 2.—Will admit sound defects that do not

seriously impair the strength, or two J^-inch un- sound knots or their equivalent showing on one face

only, and slight shake in pieces free from other

defects. 289
423.5 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, grading rules

for Douglas fir pickets, Schedule M, 1925.

Pickets, 1 by 3 inches, 4 feet; 4 feet 6 inches, 5

feet. Will allow variations in size 3^8 inch in thick- ness and 3^8 inch in width. Pitch pockets and two

sound, hard knots not over 1 inch in diameter

allowed. Slightly discolored sap no defect. Southeastern Forest Products Association, grading

rules for southern pine pickets, September 1, 1925. Square pickets.

Square pickets, from l^-inch stock, shall be worked to 1^ by l^s inches, 3 and 4 feet loDg, dressed on four sides and pointed; 134-inch stock

shall be worked to 1^ by l^g- inches, 3 and 4 feet long, dressed on four sides and pointed.

Flat -pickets. Flat pickets from 1 by 3 stock shall be worked to M by 2\i inches, 3 and 4 feet long, dressed on four

sides and headed. Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association,

grading rules for cypress pickets, June 15, 1925. Grades. No. 1 and No. 2. 1 by 1 inch shall be headed and S4S to H by £f inch. 1H by 1M shall be headed and S4S to by

inches. 13^ by 13^ inches shall be headed and S4S to

1 1^ by 1^ inches.

1 by 3 inches shall be headed and S4S to % by

23^2 inches. No. 1.—Shall be well manufactured, bright sap no defect, and may contain one small sound knot. No. 2.—Shall admit stained sap, sound knots, pin

wormholes, slight shake, and pickets thrown out of the No. 1 grade because of poor manufacture.

Southern Pine Association, grading rules for southern pine pickets, March 23, 1927. Grading rules for pickets are the same as for Southeastern Forest Products Association, above. West Coast lumbermen's Association, standard

grading and dressing rules for Douglas fir pickets,

July 1, 1926.

Pickets, green or A. D.

134 -inch square S4S to l^ by 1^ inches. 13^-inch square S4S to 1 ^ by 1y& inches.

1 by 3 flat S4S to M by 2M inches. Square pickets will admit minor defects, such as

slight torn grain or occasional pin knot, or two

small pitch pockets. Flat pickets will admit slight torn grain, and two small pitch pockets, or two

small sound and tight knots. 423.9 MISCELLANEOUS MXLLWORK.

Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers' Association,

grading rules for red cedar porch columns and

newels, August 1, 1925.

Specifications are the same as those of the West

Coast Lumbermen's Association, below.

West Coast Lumbermen's Association, grading

and dressing rules for porch columns and newels,

July 1, 1926. WESTERN BED CEDAR

Porch columns and newels. Defects based on 8-foot lengths. Bright sap, no

defect. No. 1 columns to grade 80 per cent clear, the balance of 20 per cent to admit the following

defect, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of defects: Four small sound and tight knots on the smooth part of the turned shaft or on

the square. Boring to be at the option of the manufacturer. If bored, shall be as follows: The

5 by 5 inch and 6 by 6 inch shall be bored through

with not less than 1%-inch bit; the 4 by 4 inch to be bored through the square ends. The colonial columns shall be bored through with not less than

a 2-inch bit. DOUGLAS FIR Turned porch columns. Green or A.D.

Defects based on 8-foot lengths. Bright sap, no

defect. No. 1 columns to grade 80 per cent clear, and balance of 20 per cent to admit one of the

following defects, equivalent defects, or an equivalent combination of defects: Four small sound and

tight knots on the smooth part of the turned shaft

or on the square; four small pitch pockets. Boring

to be at the option of the manufacturer. If bored,

shall be as follows: The 5 by 5 inch and 6 by 6

inch shall be bored through with not less than* 1^-inch bit; the 4 by 4 inch to be bored through

the square ends; the colonial columns shall be bored

through with not less than a 2-inch bit. 424. TANKS. (See 413.1.)

425. MANUFACTURES OF CORK.

425.1 STOPPERS (Cork).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

425.2 CORK BOARD OR COMPRESSED

CORK.

Federal Specifications Board, specification No.

337, U. S. Government master specification for compressed cork (cork board), October 1, 1925. Grade. Compressed cork shall be furnished in but one

grade. Material and workmanship.

The material shall consist of pure granulated

cork, compressed into board form, baked and held to- gether by the natural cork gum as a binder.

Detail requirements.

Compressed cork shall not disintegrate or show an

expansion in excess of 2 per cent in any of its linear dimensions after being subjected to the boiling test. The weight per cubic foot shall be not less than 8 pounds nor more than 12 pounds.

The cork shall be furnished in blocks 36 by 12

inches, in thickness of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 inches, as

specified.

290
MANUFACTUBES OF WOOD 427.

The boards shall be true to form and dimensions. A tolerance of rs mch under the specified thickness

will be permitted.

Method of inspection and tests. Representative samples shall be selected by the

inspector from each lot of the same thickness, carefully checked as to dimensions, and submerged in boiling water at atmospheric pressure for three

hours. Immediately upon removal from the boil- ing water the samples shall again be measured.

Packing and marking.

Each delivery shall be marked with the name of the material, the name of the contractor, and the purchase order number.

Notes. Compressed cork shall be purchased on the basis

of surface measurements, the unit price based on 1 square foot of a given thickness. The material covered by this specification is intended to be used for insulating purposes. Federal Specifications Board, specification No.

338, U. S. Government master specification, for ground cork for insulating purposes. (See 414.1.) 425.3 LIFE PRESERVERS, BELTS, AND

BUOY RINGS (Cork).

Federal Government, Steamboat Inspection Service, Department of Commerce.

(Among the general rules prescribed by the Board

of Supervising Inspectors for ocean and coastwise

service are requirements relating to the safety fea- tures of life boats, life rafts, life preservers, and life buoys. Lists are issued of such life-saving equipment as has been officially approved for use on

vessels.) 426. VEHICLES. (See also 400.3 and

413.54)

Society of Automotive Engineers, standards for wood spokes for motor truck and passenger auto- mobile wheels, current 1927. (These are dimensional standards for wood

spokes conforming to those of the Automotive

Wood Wheel Manufacturers Association.)

427. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. (See also

401.3, 402.1, and 429.7.)

American Railway Association, Signal Section,

specification No. 5716 for capping and grooved

trunking for the protection of rubber insulated

wires, 1916.

Finish.

It shall be surfaced four sides unless otherwise

specified. Sides of groove may be sawed, but bot- tom shall be knife cut. Dimensions.

(a) When surfaced four sides, it shall conform to dimensions in accordance with drawings; a varia- tion of 3^-inch either way will be allowed in outside dimensions.

(b) The dimensions for the groove, as shown on

the drawing, shall be adhered to as a minimum, and

an increase in size of 3^-inch will be allowed as a maximum.

(c) It shall be shipped in lengths from 8 to 20

feet, but no shipment shall contain less than 30 per

cent of 16-foot lengths nor more than 5 per cent

less than 10 feet long. Odd lengths will be per- mitted. General quality.

(a) Lumber shall be practically all heart.

(b) Knot holes will not be allowed.

(c) Shake, except as provided for elsewhere in

this specification, will not be allowed.

(d) Wane will not be allowed.

(e) Any defects shall not be sufficient to impair

the strength or prevent the use of any piece for the purpose intended in its full length and width.

(/) More than one split will not be allowed in any

piece of trunking, and this shall not exceed in length the width of the piece. No split will be allowed in capping.

White or Norway pine.

(a) Sound tight knots not larger than 3^ inch, well scattered in any piece, will be allowed in capping.

(b) Sound tight knots not larger than V/% inches, well scattered in any piece, will be allowed in trunking.

Longleaf yellow pine or fir. (a) Sound tight knots not larger than }4 inch, well scattered in any piece, will be allowed in capping.

(6) Sound tight knots not larger than 13^ inches,

well scattered in any piece, will be allowed in trunking.

(c) Small pitch pockets not over 4 inches in length will be allowed.

Cedar.

(a) Lumber to be " select common and better"

cedar, sound, and water-tight.

(b) Sound tight knots not larger than 1 inch, well scattered in any piece, will be allowed in capping.

(c) Sound tight knots not larger than 2 inches, well scattered in* any piece, will be allowed in trunking.

(d) Knots shall be tightly interwoven with the

fiber of the surrounding wood.

Cypress.

(a) Lumber shall be what is usually known as black or red cypress, and must, in all cases, be cut within 200 miles of salt water and at an elevation under 150 feet above sea level.

(b) It shall be free of splits, coarse peck, and shall be water-tight. A very slight amount of surface peck, season checks, and pin wormholes in the sides or bottom of the trunking will be allowed, provided

such defects do not extend through from the outer

surface into the groove. None of these defects

will be allowed in capping.

291
427. STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

(c) Sound tight knots not larger than % inch

will be allowed in capping or trunking. Sound

tight knots not larger than 2 inches, well scattered

in any piece, will be allowed in 3 by 4 inch trunking.

Sound tight knots not larger than 3 inches, well scattered in any piece, will be allowed in trunking

larger than 3 by 4 inches.

(d) A slight amount of shell shake that will not damage the nailing surface or cause a split will be

allowed in trunking. Shell shake will not be

allowed in capping.

(e) Capping 13^ inches thick or less shall be all heart. Capping thicker than inches may have

1 inch sap in sides and y% inch in face.

(/) Trunking 3 by 4 inches and larger in the rough may have 1 inch sap on the corners of the bottom measured diagonally. Trunking smaller than 3 by 4 inches may have 3^2 inch sap on the

corners of the bottom measured diagonally.

American Railway Association, Signal Section,

Specification No. 1323 for hard fiber for use in railroad-track joints, switch rods, etc., for trackcircuit insulation, 1923. Samples for tests. Three samples shall be selected at random by

the purchaser or his representative from each lot or part thereof of 25 sheets of the same specified thickness or 500 fabricated pieces of the same specified thickness. Test pieces of the required size shall be sawed from each sample selected and shall be free from burs. If any of the samples fail to meet the requirements of any of the specified tests, the tests shall be repeated on two additional samples selected at random from different pieces of the same lot. Failure of one or both of these samples

to meet the requirements of the tests will be suffi- cient cause for rejection of the lot. Electrical test. Using a voltmeter connected in series with pinpoint electrodes, the points of the latter being

spaced not to exceed }4 inch apart, and firmly

pressed against the common face of the fiber, after the surface skin has been scraped from contact sur- face of fiber, there shall be no deflection of volt- meter needle with application of 220 volts. Specific gravity.

Fiber shall have a specific gravity of not less than 1.3. Compression test. (a) A standard testing machine shall be used

and the load applied through a metal tup 3^ by 3^ inch with corners rounded to 1/64 inch radius,

arranged in such manner as to insure an equal

bearing of the test sample over the entire surface

of tup. A test piece 1 by 1 inch by the thickness

shall be placed undar an initial load of 100 pounds

and the zero reading taken. A load of 5,000

pounds shall then be applied. The depth of depression shall be measured by the mean reading of two suitable measuring and indicating appliances

mounted on the upper crushing head of machine,

the samples being supported on the lower crush- ing head, and shall not exceed the following:

Specified Mean de- thickness pression

Inch Inch H 0.024

.030 % .038 .052

(6) Bushing shall not be subject to compression

test. Absorption test. A test piece 1 by 1 inch by the thickness shall be

weighed and placed in water at room temperature.

It shall be removed from the water at the expiration

of six hours, the excess moisture wiped off, and the

test piece weighed immediately. The increase in weight shall not exceed 0.67 gram.

Allowable variation in sizes.

(a) Sheets and fabricated parts, except as noted

below, shall be within the following tolerances of thickness:

Specified thickness (inch) Maximum

thickness Minimumthickness

Vs (0.125).. __ Inch

0. 135 .197

.270 .395

Inch

0. 113 .170

.230

.355 A (0.187) X (0.250) Vs (0.375)

(6) Head pieces and base pieces for use in insulated

rail joints, each bar of which has three bearing

surfaces, shall be within the following tolerances of thickness

Specified thickness (inch) Maximum

thickness Minimum

thickness

Y% (0.125) Inch

0. 133 .195

Inch

0. 123 A (0.187) .185

(c) Bushings of ferrules shall not vary either way

more than 0.0075 inch on inside diameter nor more

than 0.0075 inch on outside diameter, allowing maximum variation in thickness of wall of 0.015 inch. Maximum variation in length of bushings or ferrules

shall be inch.

(d) End posts shall not, in contour, exceed the contour of the proper rail section at any point, but may

come within the rail section contour by not more

than inch. At the option of the purchaser, the

height of head may be decreased by 3^ inch to meet worn rail conditions. Workmanship.

Edges shall be generally free from burs, fins, splits, and other defects. Waterproofing.

An approved waterproofing substance shall be applied to the material after it has been accepted by

the inspector.

292
MANUFACTURES OF WOOD 427.

American Railway Association, Signal Section,

specification No. 6418 for impregnated fiber conduit

for the protection of insulated wires and cables, 1918.

Material. The conduits shall be made of finely divided wood

pulp or fiber, thoroughly saturated with bituminous

insulating compound.

Properties.

(a) The inner surface of the conduit shall be free from dents or obstructions and from flaky areas

or any considerable excess of the impregnating

compound.

(b) The bore shall be straight and shall not vary

in cross section more than 3^8 inch from a true circle and shall be uniform in dimension as gauged by

the ability to pass a mandrel 36 inches in length of yi inch less in diameter than the normal size of the

conduit.

(c) Pieces up to 15 per cent of the shipment may

be less than 5 feet, but shall be not less than 3 feet

in length.

(d) The conduit shall have an inside diameter of 13^, 2, iy2 , 3, 33^, or 4 inches, as specified.

Joints, fittings, and bends.

(a) Joints shall be of the socket type with the

mortise on one end and the tenon on the other end

of all conduits, fittings, and bends. The mortise and

tenons of the joints shall be slightly tapered not less than % mcn l° Qg and machine turned to a close fit. (b) Fittings and bends shall be made of the same

material as the conduit and shall possess the same

mechanical strength and insulating quality.

(c) Bends shall be 45°, 90°, and S shape, and

shall conform to the following dimensions:

45° and 90° S bends Diameter (inches) Length Radius Onset Radius

Feet Inches Inches Inches

1. 5 12-18-24-36 20 36 1V2 —- - 5 12-18-24-36 20 36

2 5 12-18-24-36 20 36 2V2 5 18-24-36 20 36

3 5 18-24-36 20 36 VA 5 18-24-36 20 36

4 - 5 18-24-36 20 36

(d) Conduit for bootlegs shall be 2 inches inside diameter, with a 12-inch radius, 90° bend at one end

of a 5-foot section.

Tests.

(b) Manufacturer shall provide, at point of production, apparatus and labor for making the re- quired tests under supervision of the purchaser.

(d) Tests shall be made as required on requisite

sheet.

(e) Ten complete tests, enumerated below, shall be made from conduit selected at random from each

carload lot; and two complete tests, enumerated

below, shall be made from conduit selected at random from less than carload lots.

1. Acid.

2. Heat.

3. Insulation.

4. Deflection.

5. Crushing.

6. Moisture absorption.

Description of tests. (a) Acid test.—Six samples of conduit shall not be injuriously affected by being immersed for 18 hours in 10 per cent solutions at 70° F. (21.1° C.) of sodium carbonate, nitric acid, hydrochloric acid, and sulphuric acid. The conduit shall be free from

all substances which might injuriously affect rubber- covered wire or lead-sheath cable.

(b) Heat test.—Wall of the conduit shall be compact; a 6-inch sample shall not disintegrate, separate

into layers, or collapse after lying on its side in water for 13^ hours at a temperature of 212° F.

(c) Insulation test. —Wall of the conduit after being immersed in pure water at 70° F. for 48 hours

shall not puncture when alternating current of 20,000 volts is applied, by mercury contacts, to each

side of the wall at opposite points.

(d) Deflection test.—Conduit at 70° F. resting on

supports 26 inches apart shall not exceed the deflec- tion and shall not break under load indicated in the

following table, when the load is centrally suspended

between the supports.

(e) Crushing test.—A 6-inch length of conduit at

70° F. shall not be crushed when placed between

two flat surfaces under pressure of weight shown in the following table:

Inside diameter (inches) Thickness of wall

Deflec- tion Breaking

weight Crushing

weight

Inches Inches Pounds Pounds

1 ._ A 150 575 \y2 A % 200 575

2 A A 300 506 2^ A A 450 500

3 A, A 550 347 3H v± V% 800 317

4 A. A 900 310

(/) Moisture absorption test.—Six inches of conduit

shall be thoroughly dried at a temperature of 110° F.

for 4 hours, then weighed, and after immersion for 48 hours in pure water at 70° F. shall show less than 4 per cent increase in weight.

American Railway Association, Telegraph and

Telephone Division, specification for creosoted wood conduit, 1920.

Material. The conduit shall be made of sound yellow pine,

Norway pine, or black gum. Each section of conduit shall be free from loose, rotten, or hollow

knots, knot or wormholes, rot or rotten streaks. No section of conduit shall contain splits (either from seasoning, ring hearts, rough handling, or inci- dent to preservative treatment) which increase the

over-all dimensions of the conduit beyond the specification limits or which extend through the wall and run back beyond the mortise and tenon ends. Wane edge shall not be considered an objection,

provided a flat surface of at least 3 inches remains,

and provided further that the thickness of shell is not

less than y% inch. No conduit shall contain plugged

knot holes. Dimensions.

(a) Unless otherwise specified, no section of conduit in any shipment shall be less than 2 feet in 293
427. STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

length, not more than 2 per cent of the conduit

shall be between 2 and 3 feet in length, and not more

than 15 per cent shall be between 3 and 6 feet in length. The remainder of the conduit shall be between 6 and 8 feet in length.

(6) All conduit shall be of uniform section and

shall not vary more than t$ of an inch from 43^

inches square outside. A straightedge laid length- wise on the concave side of a length of conduit 8

feet long shall not show an off-set greater than 3^

inch. The allowable bow in short lengths shall be pro- portionate to the limits specified for 8-foot lengths.

No length of conduit shall be twisted, bent in more

than one direction, or bent in one direction on edge.

(c) The wall of each length of conduit shall be

not less than ^g-inch thick at its thinnest part.

(d) Each length of conduit shall be provided

with a tenon at one end and a mortise at the other

end, as hereinafter specified. All tenons and all mortises shall be of uniform size throughout. Each

tenon shall be at least 1^8 and not more than 134

inches in length and not less than ^ inch thick. Each mortise shall be at least 134 and not more

than 1% inches in length. The outside diameter

of each tenon shall be not more than 3^ inches. The mortise shall be of a diameter to admit a tenon

not greater than 3ji inches outside diameter. The

tenon shall be a snug fit in the mortise, but not

so tight as to cause the conduit to split on being

driven together.

Creosoting process. All conduit shall be impregnated with dead oil of coal tar or coal-tar creosote, in accordance with

specification for creosoting timber (to be issued

later). The average impregnation of each cylinder load shall be not less than 15 pounds per cubic foot

of wood.

The oil used in creosoting the conduit shall con- form to specification for dead oil of coal tar or coal- tar creosote. The oil shall be tested in accordance

with specification for the analysis of dead oil of coal tar or coal-tar creosote. (Specifications mentioned, to be issued later.) American Railway Association, Telegraph and

Telephone Division, specification for creosoted wood

plank for use in underground construction, 1920.

Material.

All plank shall be made of yellow-pine timber, and

shall be free from dry rot or decay of any kind; wane extending through the thickness of the plank;

loose, rotten, or hollow knots; wormholes; through

shakes over 6 inches in length; and round shakes. Sapwood is not considered objectionable.

Dimensions.

(a) Unless otherwise specified, plank shall be

either 1 or 13^ inches thick, and either 43^, 9, or 13

inches wide.

(o) All plank shall be of uniform section, with

ends sawed square. The plank shall be not over 34 inch scant in thickness or in width from the size specified. No plank shall be less than 10 feet in

length, and 50 per cent of the planks shall be not

less than 16 feet in length.

Creosoting.

All plank shall be impregnated v/ith dead oil of coal tar or coal-tar creosote, in accordance with

specification for creosoting timber. The average impregnation for each cylinder load shall be not less than 15 pounds per cubic foot of wood, unless other- wise specified.

American Railway Association, Telegraph and

Telephone Division, specification for impregnated

fiber conduit for the protection of wires and cables, 1920.

Properties.

(a) The inner surface of the conduit shall be free from dents or obstructions and from flaky areas or any considerable excess of the impregnating compound.

(6) The bore shall be straight and shall not vary

in cross section more than Y% mch from a true

circle.

(c) Pieces up to 15 per cent of the shipment may

be less than 5 feet but not less than 3 feet in length.

Joints, fittings, and bends.

(a) Mortise and tenon of the socket joints shall be a close fit and not less than % inch long and

slightly tapered.

(6) Sleeve and ends of sleeve type joints shall be turned to a close fit. (c) Fittings and bends shall be made throughout

of the same material as is used in the conduit and

shall possess the same mechanical strength and

insulating qualities.

(d) Bends shall be made 90° and shall conform

to the following dimensions:

Inside diameter (inches) Length Radius m— Feet

55

5

555

Inches 18-24-36

18-24-36 24-363636

36

22Yi

3m—4 -

Tests.

(a) The material shall not be affected by acids or

alkalies which may be present in the ground and

shall itself be free from all substances which might

injuriously affect rubber-covered wire or lead-sheath

cable.

(b) Walls shall be compact and shall not disinte- grate when heated to a temperature of 212° F.

(c) The bore shall be uniform, as gauged by the

ability to pass a mandrel 36 inches in length of 34

inch less diameter than the normal size of the

conduit.

(d) The wall of the conduit after being immersed

in pure water at 70° F. for 48 hours shall not puncture when alternating current at a pressure of 20,000

volts is applied by mercury contacts to each side of the wall at adjacent points.

294
MANUFACTURES OF WOOD 428.2

(e) Sample of conduit at 70° F. resting on supports 26 inches apart shall not exceed the deflection and

shall not break under the load as shown in table, paragraph (/), when the load is centrally suspended

between the supports.

(/) A 6-inch sample of conduit at 70° F. shall not be crushed when placed between two flat surfaces under the pressure of a weight shown in the follow- ing table:

Inside diameter

(inches) Thickness of wall

Deflection Breaking

weight Crushingweight

Inch Inch Pounds Pounds

1H2 M % 200 475 % 300 506

3 M *A 450 500 K U 550 347 3M- M % 800 317

4 H % 900 310

(g) A 6-inch sample of conduit shall be thor- oughly dried at a temperature of 110° F. for 4 hours, then weighed, and after immersion for 48 hours in pure water at 70° F. shall show less than 4 per cent

increase in weight due to absorption of water.

(h) Tests may be made at point of production or on samples submitted and may also be made at destination.

(i) Contractor shall give purchaser sufficient notice of time when material will be ready for test- ing and cooperate to set a time convenient to the purchaser for inspection.

(j) Contractor shall provide at point of production apparatus and labor for making the required

tests under supervision of the purchaser.

428. HANDLES, OARS, AND PADDLES.

428.1 HANDLES FOR AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENTS.

Ash Handle Association, rules for the grading f ash handles, April 27, 1927. (These rules were ap- proved as the recommended practice of the industry

at a general conference called by the division of simplified practice on August 19, 1927.) FORK, HOE, RAKE, AND SHOVEL HANDLES XX Grade.

Color.—White, light red, mixed white, and light

red. Dark red brown at tool end, extending not more than 10 inches from end.

Weight.—Heavy.

Texture.—Tough.

Growth.—Not less than 5 and not more than 17

rings of annual growth per inch of radius. Grain.—Straight, allow slight cross at one end

only, crossing at pitch of 1 to 8 inches, cross not to extend more than 7 inches from end. Grain may

cross in entire length of handle.

Blemishes.—One allowed for each 24 inches of length or fraction thereof, but blemishes must be 12

inches or more apart.

(a) Butterfly marks that do not materially affect appearance.

(6) Pin twig marks.

(c) Cat faces that do not materially affect appearance.

(d) Mineral streaks, sound, not over 1 inch in length.

(e) Barky ends that will chuck off.

(/) Flat handles that can be worked.

X grade.

Color.—White, red, mixed white and red, slightly black and brown. Calico ash, if not too variegated.

Weight.—Medium.

Texture.—Medium.

Growth.—Not less than 3 and not more than 21

rings of annual growth per inch of radius. Grain.—Allow cross, if not less than a pitch of

1 to 12 inches. Allow one cross end only, at a

pitch of 1 to 6 inches, extending not more than 12

inches from end.

Blemishes.—Two allowed for each 18 inches of length or fraction thereof, but blemishes must be

6 inches or more apart.

(a) Butterfly marks if not too large and too black.

(b) Knurls, not more than two to a handle, not more than ^ inch deep, at least 3 inches long.

(c) Cat faces, not more than 1 inch in its longest diameter.

(d) Curly stock, not more than one handle in four.

(e) Barky ends that will chuck off.

(/) Flat handles that can be worked.

(g) Mineral streaks, sound, that do not affect service.

(h) Knots, two not over 3^ inch each if sound

and not too dark and if located at ends.

(i) Pin twig marks.

No. 1 grade. Texture.—Serviceable for this grade. Grain.—Allow cross, if not less than a pitch of

1 to 6 inches. Allow cross on knob end at a pitch

of 1 to 3 inches, extending not more than 6 inches from end.

Blemishes.—The following are allowed:

(a) Butterfly marks.

(6) Knurls that do not affect service for this grade.

(c) Cat faces.

(d) Curly stock.

(e) Barky ends that will chuck off.

(J) Flat handles that can be worked.

(g) Mineral streaks, sound.

(A) Knots that do not affect the service for this grade.

428.2 HANDLES FOR TOOLS.

Hickory Handle Association, grades for hickory

tool handles, 1927. (These rules were approved as the recommended practice of the industry at a

general conference called by the division of simplified practice on August 19, 1927.)

Material. To be made from all commercial species of hickory.

Classification. Handles to be classified according to following: GENERAL RULES Strength as shown by the growth, weight, resil- iency of the handles. 52688°—27 20 295
428.2 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Defects, blemishes, imperfections, with relation to

serviceability. Color and general appearance of the wood.

Note.—Weight and resiliency are to be determined by the in- spector's knowledge of the weight and required density of the wood.

Rings of annual growth will not be counted unless question arises regarding grade, when decision will be based on annual rings. GRADES

Handles 24 Inches and longer Grades. AA.—Handles having not over 17 rings of annual

growth per inch- of radius, heavy weight, thrifty

growth, all white, free from all defects. AW and AR.—Handles having not over 22 rings

of annual growth per inch of radius, good weight,

live growth, free from all defects. Handles of this grade will be supplied in all white wood, the grade

symbol being AW; or in red, white, or mixed red and white, for which the symbol will be AR.

BW and BR.—Handles having not over 27 rings

of annual growth per inch of radius, good weight,

live growth. Permitting such handles as have slight /iron streaks not exceeding four in number running

Ithe entire length of the handle or the equivalent in shorter lengths. To be free from defects except in the first third of the length from the grasp end, or

in the eye where is permitted one sound or tight

knot or bird peck not over inch in diameter or two such knots or bird pecks where combined

diameters do not exceed inch in diameter or

slight deflection of grain. Handles of this grade

will be supplied in white wood, the grade symbol

being BW; or in red, white, or mixed red and white,

for which the symbol will be BR.

C.—Serviceable handles, which due to defects are not permitted in the higher grades. Hammer and Eatchet Handles Grades. SAW and SAR.—Handles having not over 17

rings of annual growth per inch of radius, heavy

weight, thrifty growth, free from all defects. Handles of this grade will be supplied in all white

wood, the grade symbol being SAW; or in red, white,

or mixed red and white, for which the symbol will be SAR.

SBW and SBR.—Handles of medium weight, live growth, permitting two slight iron streaks the entire length, or their equivalent in shorter streaks. Free from all defects. Handles of this grade will be supplied in all white wood, the grade symbol being

SBW; or in red, white, or mixed red and white, for which the symbol will be SBR.

C.—Handles of fair weight, live growth, allowing

light iron streaks or slight discoloration from sap. To be free from defects except in the first third of the length from the grasp end, or in the eye where

is permitted one sound or tight knot or bird peck

not over y& inch in diameter or two such knots or bird pecks where combined diameters do not exceed

•j^- inch in diameter or slight deflection of grain.

White, mixed red and white, and red wood.

Hickory Handle Association, grading rules for hickory railway handles, 1923. Physical requirements. General quality. —All handles shall be of thor- oughly seasoned wood (not over 12 per cent moisture) free from any defects that may impair their

serviceability, such as decay, diagonal grain with

slant greater than 1 in 50, excessive dip grain; wormholes; hollow, large, loose, or numerous knots; shakes or splits; bird pecks in handles 42 inches or

less in length; and large or numerous bird pecks in handles more than 42 inches long.

Strength.—No handle shall have more than 20 or 25

rings of annual growth per inch of radius (see plans

of handles for required rate of growth and weight

of each design) nor a specific gravity of less than

0.60. Design.

All handles shall be in accordance with the designs

and dimensions on the plans which accompany and

form a part of the buyer's specification. Manufacture.

All handles shall be smooth and waxed, unless otherwise specified on the plan for a given handle.

Inspection.

Place.—Handles shall be inspected at suitable and convenient places mutually satisfactory to both

parties at interest. Inspectors representing the purchaser shall have

free entry at all times while work on the contract

of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works which concern the manufacture of the handles ordered. The manufacturer

shall afford the inspector, free of cost, all reasonable

facilities to satisfy him that the handles are being

furnished in accordance with these specifications. Manner.—Inspectors will make a reasonably close examination of each handle. Handles will be

accepted or rejected for strength on the basis of the

buyer's inspector's knowledge of the appearance and weight of wood of the required density; rings

of annual growth will not be counted, nor handles weighed by scale unless inspectors' decisions are questioned. Exactness of shape and size will be

determined by accurate measurements of handles taken haphazardly. Each handle will be judged

independently, without regard for the grading of others in the same lot. Knots.—In handles 42 inches or less in length a

large knot is one of any size elsewhere than in the

first third of the length from the grasp end, or one where more than one-quarter the minimum dia- meter of the handle where it occurs. Numerous

knots are any number equaling a large knot in damaging effect. In handles more than 42 inches long a large knot

is one more than one-sixth the minimum diameter

of the handle where it occurs. Numerous knots

are any number exceeding three 3^-inch knots in damaging effect. Bird pecks.—A large bird peck is one more than

one-quarter the minimum diameter of the handle where it occurs. Numerous bird pecks are any

number exceeding a large bird peck in damaging

effect. Dip grain.—Dip grain is an abrupt deflection of vvood fibers, and will be permitted only in the sec- 296
MANUFACTURES OF WOOD 429.9

tions where knots are allowed, provided the deflected

fibers do not extend farther from the surface than

one-eighth the minimum diameter of the handle

where the grain is deflected.

Size. —All handles will be considered in accord- ance with the dimensions required if lenghts are Within one sixty-fourth of those specified and all other dimensions are within j^-inch of those specified. 428.3 OAKS AND PADDLES.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 429. OTHER MANUFACTURES OF WOOD.

429.1 WOODENWARE (Dishes and Kitchen

Utensils).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 429.2 TOOLS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 429.3 POLE BRACKETS AND STEPS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 429.4 LADDERS.

American Mining Congress, sponsor under American Engineering Standards Committee procedure

for ladders and stairs for mines (A. E. S. C. No. M12).

(Standards not yet formulated.)

American Society of Safety Engineers, Engineering Division, National Safety Council, sponsor under American Engineering Standards Committee

procedure for safety code for ladders (A. E. S. C. No. A 14-1923).

(This code contains rules governing the safe construction and use of ladders of various types, in- cluding fixed, portable extension, fire, step, trolley, sectional and trestle.) 429.5 ROLLERS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 429.6 STAKES.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 429.7 WOODEN INSULATORS AND INSULATOR PINS.

American Electric Railway Engineering Association, recommended specification for overhead line material, serial No. D102-21, 1921. Wood insulator pins and brackets. General.—Pins and brackets shall be well formed

with smooth surfaces, true to size, having threads smooth, uniform, and square with axis of pin. Character.—Wood for insulator pins and brackets

shall be live, close, and straight grained, thor- oughly seasoned yellow or black locust, clear and

free from any defects which would impair the

strength or life. Small knots not over }/g inch dia- meter or small season checks will be allowed on

shoulder and on lower half of shank of not over 5 per cent of order; sapwood will be allowed on the

shoulder provided it does not extend to the shank.

Feeder pin.—Feeder insulator pin shall be 9 inches long over all, having a thread section ff

inch diameter at top and 2^ inches long; a shoul- der between 1^ and 2 inches in diameter, 43^ inches below top of pin; and a shank 4J/£ inches long, 1%

inches diameter at shoulder, and 1^ inches diameter at base. Bracket pins.—Bracket pin shall have total length of inches, with a body 6% inches long, 2 inches wide, ^ ^ch thick at base, and 2^ inches

thick at head, having two nail holes at right angles

to pole edge and on center line. The pole edge

shall make angle of approximately 20° with pin

axis. Taper shall change from rectangle of body

to cylinder of thread in a length of 2% inches. Thread shall be 2 inches long and ff inch diameter at top, and grain of wood shall be suffi- ciently nearly parallel to axis to extend from either lower edge to at least the bottom thread on opposite side of pin.

National Electrical Manufacturers' Association,

Supply Division, standards for wood strain insulators, current, 1927. (This association has developed standard dimensions and insulation requirements for wood strain insulators used in overhead line construction.)

429.8 WHEELS. (See 413.54.)

429.9 WOOD PRODUCTS NOT ELSEWHERE

CLASSIFIED.

American Society for Testing Materials, standard

specifications for turpentine, D13-24, 1924.

Properties and tests. Turpentine shall be pure and conform to the fol- lowing requirements:

Appearance.—The turpentine shall be clear and

free from suspended matter and water.

Color.—The color shall be "standard" or better. Odor.—The odor shall be characteristic of the

variety of turpentine specified and, if desired, shall conform to the odor of the sample agreed upon.

Other properties.—Other properties shall be as

follows: Maximum Minimum

Specific gravity, 15.5°/15.5° C.

Refractive index at 20° C. : Gum spirits ..

0.875

1. 478

1.478

2.0

0. 862

1. 468 Wood turpentine L465

Residue after polymerization with 38 N

H2SO4: Gum spirits- Volume per cent.. Refractive index at 20° C 1.500 Wood turpentine

Volume per cent.. 2.5

1.48

15090

initial boiling point at 760 mm pres- sure c__

Distilling below 170° C. at 760 mm pres- 160

297
429.9 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

The complete specifications include the following

paragraphs in connection with sampling and testing:

Detection and removal of separated water. Sampling.

Laboratory examination.

American Society for Testing Materials, standard

methods of sampling and testing turpentine, D233-

26, 1926. This specification includes the following para- graphs in connection with the method of sampling

and testing turpentine:

Detection and removal of separated water. Sampling.

Laboratory examination.

American Society for Testing Materials, tentative

specifications for destructively distilled wood tur- pentine, D236-26T, 1926. These specifications apply only to destructively

distilled wood turpentine obtained in the destructive

distillation of resinous wood.

Properties and tests. The destructively distilled wood turpentine shall be pure and conform to the following requirements:

It shall be clear and free from suspended matter and water. The color shall be "standard" or better. The odor shall be characteristic of destructively

distilled wood turpentine and, if desired, shall con- form to the odor of the sample agreed upon. Other properties shall be as follows:

Specific gravity, 15.5°/15.5° C

Refractive index at 20° C

Residue after polymerization with 38 N

H2SO4: Volume per cent-. Refractive index at 20° C

Initial boiling point at 760 mm pres- sure - 0-

Distillation below 170° C. at 760 mm pres- sure.. per cent..

Distilling below 180° C. at 760 mm pres- sure per cent..

Maximum Minimum

0. 875 1.483

2.0

157

0. 860

1.4G3

1.480

60

Methods of test. The sampling and methods of testing shall be conducted in accordance with the standard methods

of sampling and testing turpentine (serial designation, D233, referred to above). Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

7b, U. S. Government master specification for turpentine (gum spirits of turpentine and steam

distilled wood turpentine), revised August 7, 1926. Gum spirits of turpentine, commonly known as gum spirits, or spirits of turpentine. This is the product distilled from the oleoresin exuding from

living pine trees. Steam-distilled wood turpentine which is distilled with steam from the oleoresin within the wood.

Gum spirits of turpentine or steam-distilled wood

turpentine, as specified in contract, shall be pure and shall conform to the following requirements:

Appearance.—Shall be clear and free from sus- pended matter and water.

Color.—Shall be "standard" or better.

Odor.—Shall be mild, aromatic, and characteristic

of the type of turpentine specified. If desired, shall conform to the odor of the sample agreed upon. Maiimum Minimum

Specific gravity, 15.5°/15.5° C

Residue after polymerization with 38 N

H2SO4: Volume per cent..

0. 875 1.478

2.0

0.860

1.466

Refractive index at 20° C 1.500

150

90

(This residue shall be viscous and its color straw or darker.)

Initial boiling point at 760 mm pres- sure C-.

Distilling below 170° C. at 760 mm pres- 160

Methods of inspection, tests, and basis of purchase.

(The complete specification includes methods of inspection, tests, and basis of purchase. The specification does not cover what is known as destructively distilled wood turpentine.)

U. S. Government Naval Stores Act, standards

for spirits of turpentine, approved March 3, 1923. The regulations for the enforcement of the naval

stores act, effective March 1, 1924, established the

following standards for spirits of turpentine: Standards for spirits of turpentine. Until other standards for spirits of turpentine are

established by the Secretary, the following standards are in effect:

(a) Gum spirits of turpentine.—The spirits of turpentine made from gum (oleoresin) from a

living tree.

(6) Steam-distilled wood turpentine.—Wood tur- pentine distilled with steam from the oleoresin within or extracted from the wood.

(c) Destructively distilled wood turpentine.—Wood

turpentine obtained in the destructive distillation of the wood.

In addition to the regulation given above, other

regulations are provided for the enforcement of the

act.U. S. Government Naval Stores Act, standards

for grading and classfrying rosin, approved March

3, 1923. The regulations for the enforcement of the naval

stores act, effective March 1, 1924, established the

following standards for grading and classification of

rosin. Standards for grading and classification of rosin. Unless and until other standards for rosin are

established by the Secretary, the standards for rosin are the rosin types prepared and recommended by

the Secretary prior to March 3, 1923, and the various grades of such standards, from highest to lowest,

shall be designated, unless and until changed, by

the following letters, respectively, X, WW, WG, N,

M, K, I, H, G, F, E, D, and B, together with the

designation "gum rosin" or "wood rosin" as the

case may be. (The "types" for color proposed from colored

glass by the Department of Agriculture were made

to duplicate the average type sample of rosin long

used in the industry.)

298
MANUFACTURES OF WOOD 429.9

In addition to the regulation given above, other reg- ulations are provided for the enforcement of the act. West Coast lumbermen's Association, grading

rules for Douglas fir well tubing and corn cribbing,

July 1, 1926. Well tubing.

D&M or A. D.—Defects based on 6 inches by 12

feet. Worked to diameter ordered. "C and better" F. G. and/or V. G.—Shall be watertight full length of piece. Will admit medium torn

grain; medium sap stain, 25 per cent of face. With

the above, will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination

of defects; three small sound and intergrown knots;

four small (4-inch) pitch pockets, none through;

small number of pin wormholes. Corn cribbing. Green or A. D. defects based on 1 by 6 inches by

12 feet.

Finished thicknesses

(inch) Finished widths

(inch) Lengths H

Inch HoS Multiples of 2 feet. "C and better" corn cribbing F. G. and/or V. G.—

Shall be well manufactured, and will admit medium

torn grain; small seasoning checks. With the above

will admit one of the following defects, an equivalent defect, or an equivalent combination of de- which fects: Four small (4-inch) pitch pockets, two of may be through; three sound and tight small

knots.

"Selected common" corn cribbing.—Will admit any

number of the following defects, equivalent defects, or equivalent combinations of defects : Medium torn

grain; sound and intergrown 1-inch knots located away from edge; pitch pockets not over 6 inches in length; medium sap stain, 25 per cent of face.

299
430-439 FURNITURE OF WOOD

431 HOUSEHOLD FURNITURE.

(Except Chairs.)

431.1 BEDROOM FURNITURE.

431.11 Beds.

American Furniture Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 2, beds, springs, and mattresses, November 25, 1922. In accordance with the unanimous action of the

joint conference of representatives of manufacturers, distributers, and users, the United States Department of Commerce, through the Bureau

of Standards, recommends that recognized types

and sizes of beds, springs, and mattresses be reduced

to those shown in the following tables

Table 1.Wood beds Type Description Size Length Width

Straight foot. Do _ Wood side

rails. ...do.

Full...

Single.

Minimum

length of

side rails, Ft. in. 6 21

6 2

1

Between rails Ft. in. 4 6

3 3

Bow foot Do „

...do

...do

Full...

Single.

From

head to foot panels

6 4123

6 4123

43 63

Straight foot. DoMetal side

rails. ...do

Full...

Single.

Inside

length between

cross angles

6 2

6 2

Outside

to outside of

side rails Ft. in. 4 5%

3 2M

Inside to inside of

side rails Ft. in. 4 2H

2 nx

Eow foot Do —do

__.do FulLSingle.

Inside opening, head to foot 6 5 3 6 53

4 5U

3 2M

4 214

2 11%

1 Where necessary to use blocks to hold bed rail hook pics, blocks must not extend over iHs-inch inside rails.

2 Crossbars or braces where necessary in bow ends shall be set even

with, or below, the top of slat bearer. It is preferred these crossbars be eliminated if possible.

3 All bow-foot beds are to be made with radius not exceeding 7 inches. Table 2.

Iron, steel, or brass beds Type Description Size Length Width

Straight foot. Do

Do

Do

Metal side

rails, —do

—do

—do

Full4' 0"--

J3' 3"-

Utwin.)

3' 0"__

Inside

length between

cross angles

Ft. in. 6 2

6 2 } 6 2

6 2

Outside

to outside of

side rails Ft. in. 4 5%

3 11M

3 2%

2 11H

Inside to inside of

side rails Ft. in. 4 2%

3 m

2 u%

2 &%

Bow foot Do

...do —do

Full...

Single.

Inside opening, head to foot 6 5i

6 51

4 5U

3 2M

4 2%

2 11M

i All bow-foot beds are to be made with radius not exceeding 7 inches.

Table 3.

Springs

Width

Class Type Size Length

Top Bottom

Spiral or coil wire. With V T 1 b i-i inptal li-lC L Chi bases.

fFulL„

4' 0"._

{3' 3"..

(twin.)

[3' 0"._

Ft. in. 6 1 6 1 }a , 6 1Ft in 4 4 3 10 3 1 2 10

Ft in 4 i%

3 10%

3 1%

2 io%

Metal frameWith link,

slat, cable, or wovenwire fabric.

(Full...

4' 0"__ h' 3"..

(twin.) W o"._

6 1 6 1 }' 1 6 1

Length

of end

rail 4 4*A

3 10^

3 1%

2 10%

Width of hangers

4 4%

3 10%

3 1%

2 10% Note.—It is recommended that springs for bow-foot beds be pro- vided with a 7-inch radius corner at the foot end to conform to similar radius in bow-foot beds. Mattresses.

It is recommended that mattresses be made to conform to spring dimensions given above. 431.12 Bureaus and Chiffoniers.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

431.13 Cots.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

240, U. S. Government specification for folding can- vas cot, November 5, 1924. Type.

1. Folding canvas cots shall be of but one type. Material and workmanship, etc. 2. Folding canvas cots shall be of first-class material and workmanship.

General requirements.

3. The length of cot, when opened, shall be 6 feet 6 inches; height, 17 inches; width, 27 inches. Detail requirements.

(a) Woodwork.—All woodwork shall be of rock

elm, beech, or hard maple, thoroughly air dried and

finished smoothly. Frame shall consist of side rails, end sticks, and three sets of legs; two rails on each

side, 134 by 1}4 by 38 inches, including 3^-inch tenon at one end. The holes in rails for riveting

steel L's shall be % inch from end, omitting tenon, and for the T's shall be l^- inches from end, and

shall be yi inch in size. End of rails fastened to

T's shall be rounded on one side to avoid friction in folding. Each rail shall be bored for one cross

rivet at ends to prevent spreading. This rivet at the tenon end shall be placed V/i inches from the

end, not counting the tenon or projection for the end stick, and the cross rivet in the other end shall be 13^8 inches from the end. Two end sticks 1 by

Vyi by 31 inches, with two holes Y% inch diameter

and % inch deep for reception of rail tenon. Center

of holes 2% inches from end of sticks. End sticks

shall be gouged out on inside tenon hole on one 30G
FURNITURE OF "WOOD 431.13

end to adjust same on cot more easily. In order

to prevent loss of end sticks in transit, attached to each end stick shall be a staple 1 by % inch points,

15-gauge wire, at a distance of 8 inches from the end of the end stick which is gouged out. All

rails and end sticks shall be rounded on outer side

like sample. Three sets of legs, each set to consist

of one long piece and two short pieces, the latter called upper and lower halves, all legs to be 1^ by

134 inches thick. The long leg shall be 29^g inches

in length with two holes f§ inch in diameter bored

at the upper end, placed diagonally V/% inches apart, the first 3^ inch from the end, also one end hole perpendicularly to these two 14^ inches from the same end. The upper half leg shall be 1334 inches

long, with a bevel of about 40° with two 3^-inch holes bored at the upper end, diagonally placed 1% inches

apart, the first to be 3*12 inch from the end to center

of hole, and at the beveled end two j^-inch holes on one side 13^ inches apart, the first 1% inches from the end. The lower half of leg shall be 14^g

inches long, with the same bevel at one end and

three 3^-inch holes bored 13^ inches apart on one side, the first 2 inches from the end. All long legs shall run the same way on the cot. All parts of legs rest- ing on the floor shall be rounded like sample. Upper

parts of end legs shall be gouged out like sample,

allowing them to fold without friction on tenons.

(6) Steelwork.—Shall be 14-gauge, hard-rolled open-hearth plate, baked maroon or electro galvanized. All holes for rivets shall be f$ inch diameter. Two steel B's, S-shaped, shall be used to join each

set of legs, rights and lefts, 11 inches long and 134

inches wide, with four %-inch flanges at each end

on opposite sides with sufficient angle to make close

joint. These flanges shall be pressed into the wood

after assembling. Each B shall have three holes in lower and two in upper end and 13^ inches from

center to center, beginning z/% inch from end, and

one hole midway between upper and lower curve. Eight L's, rights and lefts, 3^- by 2^ by 134 inches,

with 13^-mch flange, shall be used in joining end

sets of legs to rails, with three holes for rivets, two

placed diagonally in flange part and one 3^2 inch

from the other end. Four T's, rights and lefts, 434 by by 134 inches, with 34-inch flange, shall be

used to join center set of legs to rails with two

^-inch bolt holes in top of T's inch from either end and two j^-inch holes in upright part, bored

diagonally 13^ inches apart. All holes shall be

located and bored to exact measurements.

(c) Rivets.—All rivets shall be steel, ±§ inch di- ameter. Cross rivets in the rails shall be wagon box

head style, 1^ inches long, placed with heads on

rounded side of rail and secured in position with

3^-inch washer riveted down tight; 13^-inch rivets

shall be used in fastening T's and L's to legs, and

1^-inch for fastening end legs to rails; 1^-inch for fastening B's to upper and lower halves of legs and

IJ^-inch rivets shall be used for joining B's to long

legs and 1% by 34 inch roundhead stove bolts for fastening center legs to rails. (d) Dipping.—The frames, when completed, shall be dipped in a solution of 75 per cent dipping oil and 123^ per cent each of filler and drier.

0) Cover.—The cover shall be of No. 8 standard

commercial unbleached duck, 34 inches wide, in one

piece, about 86 inches long, capable of sustaining a

strain of not less than 190 pounds in the warp and

of 165 pounds in the filling to the inch, tested in the piece.

From each side of the cover, at center, a piece 7 inches wide by 7 inches deep, of an oval shape, shall be cut out to allow for folding; also from each of the four corners shall be cut a piece 7 inches deep

by 12 inches long; the edge thus exposed shall be turned over }4, inch all around and shall be bound

with strong webbing 1 inch wide, to match the duck. Each end of the cover shall be turned over 4 inches and hemmed with two rows of stitching, about Y% inch apart, edge turned in, leaving a space oi V/2

inches for end sticks to pass through.

(/) Thread.—Shall be No. 20, four-cord cotton, white Intrinsic brand or equal.

(g) Tacks.—The finished cover shall be fastened

to side rails with No. 12 double-pointed tacks, tinned, not less than 80 to a cover. In order that the cot may fold properly, the cover shall be tacked to the frame evenly, or if so specified by the purchaser the cover shall be as follows:

(h) Cover.—The cover shall be 18-ounce standard

khaki duck, 36 inches wide; shall contain not less than 44 threads of warp, nor have less than 30 threads

of filling to the inch, colored khaki. It shall be

capable of sustaining a strain of not less than 190 pounds in the warp and 165 pounds in the filling to the inch, tested in the piece, and weighing not less than 18 ounces to the linear yard. The cover shall be of one piece, about 86 inches long. From each

side of the cover at the center an oval piece about

7 inches wide by 8 inches deep shall be cut out to allow for folding; also from the four corners shall be cut a piece 73^ inches deep by 11 inches long, the raw edges thus exposed to be turned over and

bound with strong khaki drab webbing % inch wide. Ends of cover shall be turned over 33^ inches and

hemmed with two rows of stitching, 3^ inch apart, edge turned in, leaving a space of 23^ inches for end sticks, and sides of cover turned over 43^ inches and hemmed with two rows of stitching to be backstitched to prevent seams from ripping.

(i) Thread.—Thread shall be of good quality No.

20, four-cord cotton, silk finish, khaki fast color. 0) Straps.—Cot, when folded, shall be bound

together by means of two strong khaki web straps

z/i inch wide and 26 inches long. One end of strap

shall be fitted with a %-inch release buckle. The

buckle shall be brass electro galvanized or bronze

finished. The buckle shall be secured with a strap

by a double coppered steel round-head rivet. The

end of the strap that is fastened with a buckle

shall be tucked under and riveted so that no raw

edge will be exposed. The other end shall be finished with a %-inch die-struck metal tip, which shall extend to a depth of not less than ts inch along the

selvages of web and extend from the selvages and

from the end of the web toward the center of the

fabric for a distance of not less than ^ inch. The

metal tips shall be brass electro galvanized or bronze 301
431.13 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

finish. The straps shall be fastened to the end leg of the cot by a 3^-inch bifurcated steel rivet or staple.

(k) Handle.—The handle shall be made of duck

of the same material as the cover, of one piece 11 inches long and 4 inches wide, folded to make four

thicknesses 1 inch wide, turned in at ends and single stitched on each side. Handle shall be attached to the cot by a M-inch No. 10 round-head blue screw, with washer, in such manner as to distribute weight

equally on either side.

(I) Weight.—Cot in finished state shall not ex- ceed 21 Hi pounds in weight when made of rock elm

or 22^ pounds when made of maple or beech.

(m) Instructions. —Printed instructions for folding

shall be printed on cloth and sewed on the under

side and near one end of the cover of each cot. 431.14 Wardrobes.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

431.2 NURSERY FURNITURE.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

43L3 BATHROOM FURNITURE,

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

431.4 DINING-ROOM FURNITURE.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

431.5 KITCHEN FURNITURE.

431.51 Kitchen Tables.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

431.52 Refrigerators.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

274, U. S. Government, master specification, for

refrigerators, March 28, 1925. This specification covers three types of refrig- erators—type A, wood exterior; type B, vitreous porcelain exterior; type C, white-enamel exterior,

each being built in six sizes, as follows:

Size Width Depth Height Ice capacity

1 Inches48

362QV2 8568

Inches

24

2120%

18

33

33

Inches

66

52

54

53

75

75

Pounds

250

100

7565 600

400

23

4

5

6

General requirements.

1. Tolerances permitted in dimensions of 1 inch,

plus or minus, will be allowed for sizes 1 to 4, inclusive, and 2 inches plus or minus for sizes 5 and 6.

2. Ice compartment.—All ice- compartment linings,

including sides and inner face of doors, ceiling, and

floor, shall not be lighter than No. 22 U. S. standard gauge (0.0312-inch) galvanized steel or iron. All

linings shall be soldered together with even surfaces around all joints. All shall receive one heavy coat

of red-lead paint on unexposed surface before being

put in place.

3. Ice racks.—Ice compartments shall be equipped

with easily removable strong, galvanized-steel ice racks, hot galvanized after fabrication.

4. Ice capacity.—Tolerance in ice capacity shall not be more than 5 per cent less than that given in table. Ice capacity shall be figured as follows. Assume a standard-size cake of manufactured ice as 11 by 22 inches cross section. Multiply the one

dimension of this cake which approaches nearest the height or width of the ice door by the other dimension of the ice door less 1 inch for clearance; multiply this product by the depth of the ice chamber from the inside face of the ice door, less

1 inch for clearance, and divide by 1,728 to obtain

the cubic-foot capacity; multiply this result by 57

to obtain the rated ice capacity in pounds. Cubical

contents of ice chamber shall be approximately onethird of cubical capacity of the interior of entire

refrigerator. The dimensions of the ice chamber and

clear ice-door opening of refrigerators shall be of

size to allow economical cutting of standard ice cake.

5. Framing.—Framing material shall be of No. 1 shop spruce free from large or loose knots, sap, shakes, or other imperfections, thoroughly seasoned and kiln-dried. All framing shall be substantial and

properly joined together. The framing for bottom

of ice chambers shall be specially designed to sustain such shocks as may be encountered from depositing

ice. Sizes 5 and 6 shall be built sectional. All framing shall be done in such a manner that, when

joined together, it will be accurately fitted and

rigid. Ail sections shall be assembled with wroughtsteel lag screws, galvanized, and brass screws.

6. Insulation.—Sizes 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall be in- sulated on all sides, top, and bottom, including

doors, with sheet-insulating material not less than

l}/2 inches thick; sizes 5 and 6, with not less than

2 inches thick. The insulating material shall have

a thermal conductivity not greater than 0.35 B. t. u. per hour, square foot, and temperature gradient of

1° F. per inch thickness. Insulating material shall be properly sealed in with two thicknesses of waterproof paper on all sides of the insulating material.

7. Arrangement of doors.—The ice compartments

of sizes 1, 2, and 6 shall be in the upper right-hand

part of refrigerator and enter through a door in the

front. The small food compartment underneath

shall have one door; large food compartment to the

left shall have two doors. Sizes 3 and 4 shall have

ice compartment at upper part, with one door in

front; food compartment underneath shall have one

door. Size 5 shall have ice door in upper center, with food compartment underneath, two small doors to the right, and one full length door to the

left of center section. Alternate arrangements with

ice chamber on left will be approved. All doors

shall be double or triple rabbeted overlapping,

thoroughly fitted to assure tight compartments.

All doors shall be paneled. The stiles and rails of

all doors shall have neat moldings worked in the

solid.

8. Hardware.—All hardware shall be of the best commercial quality, extra strong, sanitary design,

hard brass, and heavily nickel plated. Handles

shall be of the lever wedging type and shall function without the use of springs. When specified handles shall be designed to include lugs for the 302
FUBNITTJBE OF WOOD 431.52

use of padlocks and for attaching padlock chains. Hasps separate from the handles will be permitted.

All hasps shall be so attached to the refrigerator that they can not be removed when the doors are

closed except by the use of a metal cutting tool. Sizes 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall be fitted with casters of noncorrodible metal with lignum-vitse wheels. Refrigerators for use on board ships shall be provided

with fittings as called for by the purchaser, in lieu of casters.

9. Drain and trap.—The drain pipe from the ice compartment shall be of light, seamless, genuine

wrought iron, heavily galvanized on interior and

exterior. It shall be readily removable for cleaning

and shall be arranged with water-tight joints to the

ice chamber and water-tight connection through

the insulation in the bottom of the refrigerators.

The drain pipe shall be fitted with an efficient deep

seal, cast brass, or aluminum trap of an approved

design readily accessible for cleaning.

Detail requirements (type A, wood exterior).

(a) Exterior.—Type A refrigerators shall be of wood exterior, either paneled or tongued and

grooved construction. When paneled, refrigerators

shall have the front, sides, and doors paneled; the

stiles and rails of doors and all panel work shall have neat moldings worked in the solid; the tops

shall be plain, no paneling. When tongued and

grooved, sizes 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall have exterior of tongued and grooved boards V'd and center V'd

not less than ^ inch thick, with finished face of 3 inches or less. Sizes 5 and 6 shall have tongued

and grooved boards V'd and center V'd not less than

% inch thick and finished face of 4 inches or less. All tops shall be plain and all doors shall be paneled. The tongued and grooved boards shall be

glued up in sections of size required. All joints in tops shall be doweled together. All case work and

doors shall be mortised and tenoned or doweled

together. All joints or parts requiring glue shall be well fitted. The stock for case work shall be

warmed before gluing together.

All mortises, tenons dowels, dowel holes, and all joints shall be thoroughly glued. The glue must be

of a high-grade hide glue, sweet and free from any

deleterious substances. After the glue is thoroughly

dry all sections and rear surfaces of doors and bot- tom shall be given one heavy coat of lead and oil paint, allowing it to dry before handling. Sections

shall be nailed to ends, front, and back. The front,

sides, and top of refrigerators 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall be

of No. 1 oak or ash, and the tops of 5 and 6 shall be of No. 2 clear spruce or Douglas fir, not less than

z/i inch thick with finished face of 4 inches or less. All of the above lumber shall be clear on face side

free from knots, sap, shakes, or other imperfections.

All shall be of uniform grain, thoroughly kiln dried; brash stock shall be eliminated. The sides, front and top of refrigerators, except tops of 5 and 6, after being assembled shall be surfaced and sand- papered off to a smooth surface, before finish is applied.

c (b) Interior sheathing.—All walls, ceiling, floor, and the inner face of all doors, of the interior of

refrigerators 1, 2, 3, 4, and the walls, ceiling, floor, and the inner face of doors in ice chambers 5 and 6

shall be sheathed with tongued and grooved boards

of No. 2 clear spruce or fir flooring, not less than %

inch thick and not more than 4-inch face, free from

sap, knots, or shakes. All shall be given one coat of lead and oil paint on both surfaces; all joints shall be painted when put in place.

(c) Metal lining of food compartment.—Refrigerators 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall have food compartment

lining, including inner face of doors of not lighter

than No. 20 United States standard gauge (0.0375-

inch) steel or iron. Compartment linings shall be

made up in one piece, with rounded and welded

corners and edges. Linings shall be coated with vit- reous porcelain. The ground coat shall thoroughly

cover both sides of all metal. The porcelain shall be

fused on at a temperature of about 1,800° F., snow

white, glossy, free from all discoloration or imperfections, and shall show no signs of edges where

metal is joined together.

(d) Supports and shelving.—Shelf supports shall be of hard brass, nickel plated, or of steel, tinned, of proper weight and strength, and shall be securely fastened in place. Sizes 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall be fitted with an approved number of wire shelves not lighter

than No. 12 B and S gauge (0.08-inch) steel wire,

1 inch square mesh, electrically welded to frame of Vs-inch round steel, tinned and heavily retinned

after fabrication, or approved shelving equal in construction and strength.

(e) Outside sheathing for backs and bottoms.—The

sheathing for backs and bottoms, sizes 1 to 6, inclusive, and the tops of 5 and 6 shall be of No. 1 common

spruce or Douglas fir, not less than % inch thick and not more than 4-inch face, tongued and

grooved, given one heavy coat of lead and oil paint on inside surface before being put in place.

(J) Food compartment lining.—The food compartment linings in sizes 5 and 6 shall be of No. 1 clear spruce or Douglas fir not less than % inch

thick, not wider than 3 inches on face, tongued and

grooved. Each corner shall have a tongued member forming a cove or convex corner. All exposed

surfaces shall be thoroughly sandpapered. All

shall be painted on back before being put in place. All joints shall be well glued. When glue is thor- oughly dry, all shall be surfaced off and sand- papered smooth. Provision shall be made for expansion of interior exposed surfaces.

(g) Floor pan.—Food compartment floor in

refrigerators 5 and 6 shall have No. 22 U. S. stand- ard gauge (0.0312-inch) galvanized sheet steel floor pans, which shall extend up 3 inches on sides and rear, on front up to door sills, all corners rounded and soldered. The underneath surface

of floor pan shall be painted with one heavy coat of red lead paint.

(A) Guards, sizes 5 and 6.—Ice chambers shall be

equipped with easily removable guards on sides, rear, and the inner face of doors. Frames shall be

of ys inch round steel bars with horizontal bar in center of frame. The guards shall be of ^ inch

303
431.52 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

round steel rods, arranged vertically and spaced

inch on centers. All steel in guards shall be galvanized and electrically welded to frame and cross bars and heavily regalvanized or tinned after fabrication. Ail guards shall be held in place on galvanized or tinned steel hook brackets.

(i) Shelving, sizes 5 and 6.—The bars and slats for shelving shall be of No. 1 clear birch, oak, or hard maple, worked to shape, with all corners

slightly rounded, rigidly and neatly constructed and thoroughly oiled. AH shelving shall be removable. Shelf supports shall be of a standard make,

secured in place in an approved manner.

(j) Meat racks, sizes 5 and 6.—Full-length food compartment in size 5 and the upper left food compartment in size 6 shall be fitted with 4 meat racks, 2 in back and 1 on each side, 30 hooks, of which 15

are for beef and 15 small piece hooks. The rails for meat racks shall be constructed of flat bar steel V% by inches, or equivalent. Brackets securing

rails in place shall be of strength sufficient to with- stand the greatest possible load, and securely riveted to rails. All hooks shall be of wrought iron and shall be shaped to drop over edge of rails, adjustable and easily removable for cleaning. The

rails, brackets, and hooks after being worked to shape shall be heavily coated with pure tin. All meat racks shall be secured to walls with brass or

steel screws sherardized.

(k) Painting and finishing.—The exterior sur- faces of backs and bottoms of refrigerators 1 to 6, and the tops of 5 and 6, shall be painted with two

coats of lead and oil paint of an approved color. The sheathing and metal linings of ice compart- ments shall be painted as called for in Section I, 1 (6), 1 (e), 1 (/), 1 (g), 2 (6), 2 (/), 3 (a), 3 (6), 3 (d), and 3 (e). Stain all exposed surfaces with a penetrating oil stain producing a dark oak finish, or of color as directed, all surfaces shall be of a uniform

color. After the stain has thoroughly dried in, all surfaces shall be rubbed off before any varnish is applied. Fill all surfaces with best-quality silex pigment paste filler, of exterior case work, except

backs, bottoms, and tops of 5 and 6, of an approved

and uniform color as directed. Rub all surplus

filler from the surface before it is allowed to dry.

Apply two coats of approved water and heat-proof spar varnish, sandpaper between coats. All varnish

shall be put on in even coats, leaving no light edges.

It shall be applied at a temperature of not less than

70° F. Full time shall be allowed for the different coats to dry before applying the next coat. The

walls and inside faces of doors in food compartments

of refrigerators 5 and 6 shall be given two coats

shellac; cut 3 pounds of "U. S. S. A. standard TN"

gum to the gallon of denatured alcohol. First coat when thoroughly dry shall be sandpapered to a smooth surface before applying second coat. Doors

shall remain open until the shellac is thoroughly dry.

431.6 LIBRARY FURNITURE.

431.61 Bookcases.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

432. LAWN AND PORCH FURNITURE.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 433. CAMP FURNITURE.

(No nationally recognized specifications available) . 434. HOSPITAL FURNITURE.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 435. OFFICE FURNITURE.

435.1 BOOKCASES. (See 431.61.)

435.2 CHAIRS AND STOOLS.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

409, U. S. Government master specification for

office chairs, May 22, 1925. This specification includes the following items: Rotary armchair, leg armchair, rotary chair without arms, leg chair without arms, rotary chair, judge's rotary chair, rotary stool with back, and

rotary chair (typewriter chair)

I. General specification.

There are no general specifications applicable to

this specification.

Types.

These chairs are designed for general office purposes and shall include rotary armchair No. 1-C,

leg armchair No. 2-C, rotary chair without arms

No. 3-C, leg chair without arms No. 4-C, rotary

chair No. 5-C, judge's rotary chair No. 6-C, rotary

stool with back No. 7-C, rotary stool without back

No. 8-C, and rotary chair No. 1026. These chairs are to have wood slat backs and wood saddle-type

seats, except No. 6-C, which is to have leather upholstered seat and back. Alternates for No. 1-C and

No. 2-C may have perforated leather seats properly

reinforced. Material and workmanship.

All workmanship shall be of the best quality

known to the trade. The wood material used in the

chairs shall be quartered white oak or mahogany, as may be called for, or of selected birch wood properly

finished to match mahogany.

General requirements.

Construction.—Framing shall be in strict accord- ance with the department drawings. Seats of chairs

shall be built up of strips not less than 4 inches nor more than 9 inches wide, and shall have at least two

hardwood dowels in each joint or an interlocking construction the entire length of each joint. This

interlocking construction may be multiple tongue

and groove construction or driven dovetail. Upholstery.—Chair seats of No. 6-C "shall be

upholstered on 4-inch red stripe webbing; springs

shall be japanned tempered steel, using as many

as can be placed, thoroughly tied down and together

with soft-finished hemp twine; understuffing shall be approved moss, thoroughly quilted and covered with closewoven and heavy burlap; no tow or

excelsior or whalebone will be allowed; shaping shall 304
FURNITURE OF WOOD 435.3

be long curled hair of ample quantity and thickness covered with heavy muslin. Leather shall be in accordance with United States Government master

specification for upholstery leather, Federal Specifi- cations Board specification No. 183. The leather

shall be secured in place with approved gimp and

approved head nails to match; underside of seat

shall be covered with black cotton cloth; back shall be upholstered, both front and back, with long

curled hair, covered both sides with muslin under

the leather. Samples of all materials for upholstering shall be submitted with bid. Detail requirements.

Hardware.—Casters Sxiail be of the grip neck

socket type, roller or ball bearing. Vulcanized red

fiber or felt composition wheel of not less than the

following dimensions: 1% inches in diameter, %

inch face, and with brass bushing of not less than

21 gauge. Axle to be cold-rolled steel not less than

Y6 inch in diameter. Horn shall be brass or steel, bronze finish, not less than 16-gauge metal. All leg chairs shall be fitted with domes.

Revolving chairs shall have four-way spiders of the following description, except No. 1026, which

may have two-way spider: Double spiral springs, tension and adjustable from front, arms at right

angles, screw adjustment for height, device for maintaining height and for attaching base to seat. Finish.—Woodwork shall be thoroughly

smoothed; plugs over concealed screws shall have

raised and rounded surfaces, and all parts whatsoever shall be finished. Finish of exposed parts shall consist of stain and filler thoroughly cleaned,

leaving no dark spots due to rough work or imperfect cleaning; one coat of shellac and three coats of varnish of approved brand, each well brushed out

(no gum runs will be permitted) and allowed to dry

hard. The first two coats shall be sandpapered

smooth and the last shall be rubbed to semidead

gloss with pumice and oil and cleaned off with water.

Finish of unexposed parts shall be satin, one coat

shellac and one coat varnish. All pumice shall be removed.

Color.—Final colors shall match the standard

colors adopted by the General Supply Committee,

Washington, D. C. Method of inspection.

The chairs may be inspected at the factory by a

representative of the Government at any time

during the process of manufacture, the purpose of

this factory inspection being to determine compli- ance with the terms of the specifications and drawings, as to workmanship, materials, details of construction, hardware, and finish. Final inspection

will be made at point of delivery.

Packing a?id marking.

Packing.—All chairs when shipped from factory

shall be so crated, packed, or wrapped as to insure

delivery at destination in first-class condition, either

for domestic or foreign delivery, in accordance with

the best commercial practice.

Marking.—Each chair shall be suitably marked

in stencil with ink on the under side of seat, with

the designating number, name of manufacturer, and

date of manufacture. Letters and numbers shall be

z/i inch in height.

435.3 DESKS AND TABLES.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

358a, U. S. Government master specification for wood desks, April 25, 1927. This specification covers the following types of desks: Flat-top single desks; flat-top double desks;

roll-top desks; typewriter desks, flat top, drop at

right or left side, drop at center; and with typewriter

compartment in either right or left pedestal. General specifications.

There are no general specifications applicable to

this specification.

Types and sizes. Desks shall be of the sanitary type, with log bases; the distance from floor to bottom of pedestal shall be not less than 9 inches. Sizes of the various desks are as follows, these sizes being the approximate commercial desk dimensions, and a variation

of 1 inch will be permitted, except in height, which

shall be 30^ inches from floor to top of writing bed.

If variation is more than 1 inch, bidders must state exact sizes and such variations will be considered

in connection with price. A. Flat-top single desks, 42 inches long, 32 inches wide.

B. Flat-top single desks, 55 inches long, 34 inches wide.

C. Flat-top single desks, 60 inches long, 34 inches

wide. D. Flat top single desks, 66 inches long, 36 inches wide. E. Flat top double desks, 60 inches long, 48 inches wide.

F. Flat-top double desks, 66 inches long, 54 inches wide. G. Roll-top desks not over 44J^ inches to top of deck. H. Roll-top desks, 60 inches long, 34 inches wide.

I. Roll-top desks, 66 inches long, 34 inches wide.

J. Typewriter desks, flat top, drop at either right or left side as ordered, 44 inches long, 32 inches wide. K. Typewriter desks, flat top, drop at center, 57 inches long, 32 inches wide.

L. Typewriter desks, flat top, with typewriter compartment in either right or left pedestal, as ordered, three drawers in other pedestal, 55 inches long, 34

inches wide; also 60 inches long, 34 inches wide. Material and vjorkmanship.

All workmanship shall be of the best quality

known to the trade. Oak shall be strictly white

oak, all finished surfaces to show quartered grain,

and veneers to be selected for uniformity of color and

flake and to be perfectly matched for figure and color

in any one desk. Mahogany to be well figured and

perfectly matched for figure and color in any one

desk. Birch shall be of selected grade of a kind to match mahogany, when finished, as closely as

possible. All hardware shall be the best of the kind

specified in detail requirements.

305
435.3 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

General requirements.

Design.—Shall be plain, lines generally straight,

legs tapering, few or no moldings, plain panels.

Drawer fronts may be raised panels; edges of beds

and decks shall be square, corners and arrises slightly

eased, and the general effect solid, substantial, and

dignified. Construction.—Generally to be veneered, 3 and 5

ply, all veneers hardwood, finish veneers to be not

less than inch when laid, framing preferably by

mortise and long tenon.

Detail requirements.

Legs.—Legs shall have built-up core or shall be

mitered and shall show figured stock on exterior sides. Single desks shall have legs 2 inches square; double

desks shall have legs 23^ inches square. All legs

shall be fitted with brass foot socket about 1%

inches high, of sheet metal not lighter than 16 gauge, with joint brazed, or of cast metal, the exterior of metal foot to be flush with woodwork of leg above,

and foot of the leg to be finished with a sliding

caster, either as a part of the ferrule or separately

screwed on (16 gauge equals approximately 0.0613

inch)

Panels.—Panels shall be 5 ply on exterior; interior panels may be 3 or 5 ply, all hardwood, set in deep

rabbet all around. Bottom panels in pedestals to be sheet iron, with rust-resisting finish on both sides, securely held in place with the cleat above and

below, the nails which hold the bottom cleat to be

driven also through the edge of the sheet metal,

or framed panels, 3 ply.

Tops, beds, and decks.—Shall be 5-ply construction, with core of white pine, chestnut, or basswood,

built up of strips not more than 4 inches wide with

band of finish material. Tops of single desks shall be 1^ inches thick and tops of double desks 1}4

inches thick; decks shall be 1% inches thick.

Slides.—Shall be of the same construction as tops

and decks, except that edge on side of slides may

be omitted. Drawers.—Shall have side dovetailed to front and

back, back same width and height as front; drawer

bottoms 3-ply hardwood, paneled in all around. Drawers shall have full but not excessive clearance

to avoid sticking from swelling. Drawer runs,

stops, and guide rails shall be hardwood, and pre- ference will be given to runs housed into legs and

of sufficient width to reach inside of side panels and

to be glued to panels entire length of runs. Stops

shall be screwed and glued in place. Drawer side, runs, and guides shall be perfectly smooth, and the

sides shall be finished with a nonvolatile lubricating

compound. Drawer partitions to be manufacturers'

standard.

Pedestal partition rails.—Shall be not less than %

inch by 1J4 inches and mortised into posts not less than 1 inch. Curtains.—Of roll-top desks shall be laid on 10- ounce duck with 6-inch wide reinforced strip of same at center and ends. Edge of curtain rail to show quartered face.

Sweep arms.—Shall have at least 1%-inch face, and the face shall be veneered. Typewriter beds.—Shall be rigid, give clearance over the desk bed for all standard machines, shall balance properly, and have separate slide to carry machine except when machine goes into pedestal.

Fittings.—Lower drawer in right side of all fiat and roll top desks, except typewriter desks, shall be

double height, trimmed double, and be fitted with

vertical filing device with follower block. Double

desks shall have both sides so fitted. Roll-top desks

shall have pigeonhole case fitted with document

boxes, drawers, and a private compartment with

door to lock. Hardware.—Drawer pulls of wood will be preferred and shall be glued on before finish is applied

to drawer front and secured with two screws from

the back, countersunk flush. Drawer locks shall be brass-case cabinet locks, two flat keys each. Curtain locks shall have pin tumblers, escutcheon,

and corrugated flat keys, shall lock into sweep arms,

not into bed, automatically when closed, locking all drawers except center drawer at the same time. Center drawer to have separate lock and in flat-top desks shall automatically lock all drawers on the

sides. Drawer-locking devices shall be so built as

to permit a drawer left open to be closed after roll or master drawer is locked. All hardware shall be

heavy brass or bronze, brush finished and lacquered.

Finish.—On exposed parts, the finish shall consist of stain and filler thoroughly cleaned, leaving no

dark spots due to rough work or imperfect cleaning, one coat of shellac, and three coats of varnish of approved brand and allowed to dry hard; the first two coats shall be sandpapered smooth and the last coat shall be rubbed to semidead gloss with pumice

and oil and cleaned off with water. Finish of unexposed parts may be stain, one coat shellac and one coat varnish.

Color.—Colors shall match the standard colors adopted by the General Supply Committee, Washington, D. C. Method of inspection.

The desks may be inspected at the factory, by a

representative of the Government at any time during the process of manufacture, the purpose of this inspection being to determine compliance with the terms of the specification as to workmanship,

material, detail of construction, hardware, and

finish. Final inspection shall be made at point of

delivery.

Packing and marking of shipments.

Packing.—All desks when shipped from factory

shall be so crated, packed, or wrapped as to insure

delivery at destination in first-class condition,

either for domestic or foreign delivery, in accordance

with the best commercial practice.

Marking.—Each desk shall be suitably marked,

with a small brass plate or by stencil, in an incon- spicuous location, showing the designating number

of the desk and the name of the manufacturer. 306
FUKXITUEE OF WOOD 435.5

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

47S, U. S. Government master specification for tables and stands, wood, April 25, 1927. General Specifications.

There are no general specifications applicable to

this specification.

Types, grades, and sizes. Tables shall be of the types and grades required

for general office use of a style to harmonize with

office desks.

Sizes shall be the usual stock commercial sizes as produced by various manufacturers, the height

to be 303^ inches in all sizes, except typewriter

stands, which shall be approximately 26 inches high. Material and workmanship.

All workmanship shall be of the best in every

respect. Oak shall be white oak, all finished sur- faces to show quartered grain, and veneers to be

selected for uniformity of color and flake, and be

perfectly matched for figure and color in any one

table. Mahogany to be well figured and perfectly matched for figure and color in any one

table. Birch shall be of selected grade of a kind

to match mahogany when finished. General requirements.

Design shall be plain, with lines generally straight,

legs tapering. Drawer fronts may be flush with

rails or with slightly raised panels.

Construction shall be substantial, of a type to produce a rigid table, rails to be joined to legs preferably by mortise and tenon or dovetail and

strongly braced at all four corners. Joints shall be

true and perfect. Glued joints shall be glued

throughout and held under pressure until thor- oughly set. In knockdown construction cross brac- ing at corners shall be securely screwed to rails and

fastened to leg with lag screw or bolt with nut let into the table leg. Detail requirements.

Tops. —Shall be 5-ply construction with core of white pine, chestnut or basswood, built up of strips not more than 4 inches wide with band of finish material. Finish veneers to be approximately

inch thick when laid. Legs.—Shall have built-up core or shall be mitered, and shall show figured stock on all four

sides. All legs shall be fitted with brass foot soc- kets and metal sliding casters. Dravjers. —Shall have sides dovetailed to front and back, bottoms to be 3 ply, outer ply to be

hardwood paneled in all around. Sides and backs

shall be hardwood. Clearance of drawers shall be

sufficient to avoid sticking due to swelling. Runs,

stops, and guide rails shall be hardwood, glued and

screwed in place. Pulls may be of wood, or brass, brush finish, securely fastened to drawer fronts. Finish.—On exposed parts the finish shall consist of stain and filler, thoroughly cleaned, leaving no dark spots due to rough work or imperfect

cleaning, one coat of shellac, and three coats of

varnish, the final coat to be rubbed to semidead

gloss. Finish of unexposed parts may be stain, one

coat of shellac and one coat of varnish. Color of finish shall match any standard color adopted by the Government.

Method of inspection.

The tables may be inspected at the factory by a

representative of the Government at any time during the process of manufacture. Final inspection

will be made at point of delivery.

Packing and marking of shipments.

Packing.—Tables when shipped from factory

shall be so crated, packed, or wrapped as to insure

delivery in first-class condition. Packages shall be

clearly marked. When intended for foreign deliv- ery packing shall be in accordance with rules of the Department of Commerce.

Marking.—Each table shall be suitably marked,

with a small brass plate, or by stencil in an incon- spicuous location, showing the stock number and

the name of manufacturer.

Note. This specification applies to tables of stock commercial design, for general office purposes, but does not apply to tables intended for some special purpose, such as for laboratory, testing, mechanical,

or post-offices uses. 435.4 DOCUMENT BOXES.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

435.5 FILING CASES AND CABINETS.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

359a, U. S. Government master specification for furniture, office sectional, cabinets and trays, wood,

revised April 25, 1927. The specification includes small sections; upright

sections; trays and cabinets, card filing. General specifications.

There are no general specifications applicable to

this specification.

Types.

Wood sectional office furniture, including small

sections, upright sections, trays and cabinets, card

filing. Material and workmanship.

All workmanship shall be the best known to the

trade; all material shall be the best of the kind

specified.

(a) Lumber shall be brignt and harmonious in

color, thoroughly air-seasoned, properly kiln-dried,

and free from knots, shakes, sap, discol orations, or other defects. Quartered white oak shall be strictly

white oak; no part of any piece shall have the medullary ray at a greater angle than 40° to the quartered face; and all pieces in any one article shall be well matched in color, figure, and grain. All exterior surfaces on articles specified as quartered

oak shall show strictly white oak, edges of stiles on

face of case shall be veneered, and legs of sanitary bases shall be built up with interlocking joint to show quartered face on four sides. 307
435.5 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

(6) Poplar, ash, beech, or birch shall be used for

all interior framing.

General requirements.

All sectional devices shall intermember with and

match in size, exter ior appearance, and design the standard sections adopted by the General Supply

Committee, Washington, D. C. Gauges of all sheet metal shall be quoted. The

U. S. standard gauge shall be followed in all cases. Detail requirements.

Small sections and horizontal sections shall be of the following outside dimensions: 163^ and 33

inches wide by 17 and 25 inches deep, these sections to advance in height in multiples of 6^ inches. Construction.—(a) Framing shall be by mortise

and tenon or dovetail, as may be most suitable. Mortise shall be as deep as possible, tenons full depth, and not less than one-third the thickness of the material.

(h) Dovetail shall extend full width of the joint

and shall be finished flush and show no openings.

(c) Joints shall be true and perfect, well glued | throughout, and held under pressure until glue has

set. Best Irish glue shall be used and shall not be ' used after reheating has affected its strength.

(d) All moldings shall be worked on solid wood;

no moldings except glass beads shall be nailed on.

(e) All detachable ends of upright sections shall be paneled. Panels shall be }4 inch thick, built up 5 ply.

(J) All base sections shall have glue blocks at angle of rail and leg, to run full width of rail and

of ample thickness, shall be of hardwood, and well

glued.

(g) Exteriors and partitions shall be secured to the frames by dado or dovetail construction, well glued and nailed.

(h) Backs shall be 3^ inch thick, 3 ply; exterior

shall be beech, birch, or red gum, except when

finished backs are ordered, when exterior ply shall match the wood insides of section; finish veneer

shall be not less than £§ inch thick when laid. Ends

shall be rabbeted to back, and back shall be securely

glued and nailed to ends and interior frames with

cement-coated nails.

(i) All partitions shall be solid; face edge shall be lipped to match the rest of the unit; partitions

and rails to finish flush on front of section.

(J) Tops.—Top panel of top section shall be 5 ply; core shall be of chestnut glued up in narrow

widths, cross veneered on both sides with hardwood;

finish veneers shall be not less than ^ inch thick when laid.

(k) Top and bottom frames for horizontal sec- tions shall be made of oak, poplar, birch, or red gum with front edge lipped to match the rest of cabinet. The frames shall have at least three rails for full-width sections, grooved to accept 3-ply

panels ^ inch, inclosing top and bottom of section. Top and bottom frames shall be dovetailed to ends

of end stiles, and rails shall be dadoed to ends.

(I) Panels at ends of horizontal sections shall be

3-ply, is inch thick. Finish veneers shall be not

less than ^ inch thick when laid. Panels shall be

set in plow not less than % inch deep.

(m) All shelves and partitions shall be lipped with

material to match unit.

(n) Drawers.—Sides and backs shall be cherry,

beech, birch, maple, sycamore, or steel. When

made of wood, shall be dovetailed front and back. Bottoms of large drawers shall be 3 ply, % inch

thick, and where no guide rod is used, shall be set in plow Y% inch deep on all sides. Where guide

rods are used, bottom in two pieces shall be set in plow on front and sides and securely nailed to back. In small drawers, thickness of bottoms shall be

proportioned to the size of the drawer, wooden

drawers to show an opening of not more than

y$ inch in bottom.

All filing drawers and trays shall be fitted with

follower blocks, which will hold papers or cards in proper position, and move backward or forward

easily. All card index, document file, and check file drawers shall be fitted with bale extension to prevent

drawer from being pulled out without lifting. All drawer fronts to project }/& inch, with corners rounded with J/g-inch radius. Drawer fronts for upright sections for cabinets and letter and cap-size drawers for horizontal sec- tions shall be 3 ply or 5 ply. Finish veneers shall be not less than ^ inch thick when laid. Where extension slides are used, sides shall be

fastened to drawer fronts with driven dovetail run- ning full width of side. Where steel sides are used,

steel shall be bent at front to form angle inch long,

which shall be bedded to edge of drawer front and

sides, securely screwed to same. Drawer suspensions.—All vertical file drawers,

such as letter, legal, and bill size, and similar drawers

with subdivisions, space permitting, shall be fitted with steel side-arm suspension slides. Where the width of the cabinet will not permit the use of side- arm slides, bottom steel extension slides shall be

used, of the type known as progressive drawer

slides. The steel used for the side slide arms,

for the housing in which the slides operate, and

for the runner attached to the drawer shall be rust resistant and not lighter than No. 16 gauge. The slides shall travel easily and smoothly

with the drawer and the mechanism shall be

sufficiently strong to sustain the weight of the drawer when loaded to capacity. All slide

rollers shall have at least M inch bearing surface and be accurately lathe turned from drawn screw

stock; no stamped or formed rollers will be per- mitted. Slides with traveling rollers or fixed rollers with ball bearings are preferred, but other methods

will be considered. Special note will be made of the method of assembling the rollers and roller housings or retainers to the slide arm. Preference

will be given solid or tubular riveting over electric spot-welding for the assembling of these parts. Vertical file drawers more than 16 inches in width

and 10 inches in height shall be fitted with two

pairs of extension slides (16 gauge =approximately

0.0613 inch).

308
FURNITURE OF WOOD 435.5

All drawer sides and runs shall be hardwood or

steel; when made of wood, runs shall be screwed

and glued in place.

Upright sections.—Outside dimensions, 52^g inches high by 25 inches deep by such width as may be

required. These sections shall be so constructed

that detachable leg bases 4% inches may be at- tached, bringing the total height to 57 inches. End frames and frames between drawers may be

without panels. Finished detachable ends shall be

paneled. Rails between drawers either mortised or dovetailed into sides of section. Legs shall be de- tachable to allow sections to be stacked one upon

another, and when so stacked to have interlocking device of approved design. Bookcase sections.—With disappearing glass-panel

door, outside dimensions shall be 33 inches wide by

13 inches deep by 12%, 14%, 16%, or 18% inches

high. Inside dimensions shall be 31 inches wide

by 10^ inches deep by 93^, 11}^, 14, or 16 inches

high. Bookcase sections without doors shall have same outside dimensions and inside dimensions,

except that the inside heights shall be 11, 13, 15, or 17 inches and the depth 12 inches. Front rails shall be the same material as unit. Construction of doors shall be mortise and tenon. Glass shall be set in rabbet secured by beads

securely nailed to frame.

All doors, except sliding doors, to close in rabbet formed by molding % inch by 3^ inch, securely

glued on ends inside the section, the doors to run on

metal track and shall be fitted with equalizing

attachment or other approved nonbinding device. Sliding doors shall have concealed sheaves at bottom

of doors. Glass shall be free from defects and shall be AA, double thick.

(q) Miscellaneous cabinets and trays shall be of dovetail construction, with rubber feet, cloth disk, or cloth-covered bottoms; back of cabinets shall be

finished same as front and sides. Finish.—Preparation: All surfaces shall be

smooth, and those to be varnished, except unexposed

surfaces, shall be made perfectly smooth by scrap- ing and sandpapering. Any article which shows

dark spots due to filler sticking to surfaces not

properly smoothed shall be rejected. The use of putty is prohibited except in nail holes. Stain and filler shall not cloud the grain and shall leave the flake in quartered oak as clear as possible. Shellac shall be white shellac cut in ethyl alcohol. Varnish shall be approved brand of standard manufacture. Samples of varnish shall be submitted.

Standard finish: Hardwood exteriors shall be

stained, thoroughly filled to an even color, the filler thoroughly cleaned up, allowed to set, given one

coat of shellac, sandpapered smooth, and three

coats of varnish, each allowed to dry hard, and shall be sandpapered smooth before the next coat is applied; the last coat shall be rubbed with pumice

and oil to a semidead gloss. No gum runs shall be

allowed.

Interiors of all articles, including drawers and

pigeonholes, except surfaces to be lubricated, shall have one coat of shellac and one coat of varnish.

The front edges of shelves and division pieces under

% inch thick shall match the exterior in color and

receive the same finish as exterior. Drawer sides and runs shall be lubricated with paraffin oil. Panels

shall be stained and filled before setting. Interior

of doors shall be rubbed, same as exterior, after last coat. Unexposed parts: Tops, bottoms, backs, and all unexposed parts, except drawer sides and runs, which can be reached after assembling, shall have

one coat of shellac and one coat of varnish.

Interior of bookcase sections shall be stained and

shall receive one coat of shellac and one coat of varnish.

Sides, backs, and bottoms of drawers when made

of metal shall be finished with baked enamel,

guaranteed against rust. Hardware.—Pulls, label holders, rod fronts, etc., shall be solid cast bronze, brush finish. The mixture

of metals for this bronze shall consist of 88 per cent

copper, 10 per cent tin, and 2 per cent zinc. Color.—Colors shall match the standard colors adopted by the General Supply Committee, Washington, D. C. Method of inspection and tests. Samples.—Bidders are required to furnish a sample of one cap-size horizontal section, one letter-size upright section, one horizontal section for 3 by 5 inch cards, one horizontal legal-blank section, one

half-height section for 5 by 8 inch cards, one small

cap-size section, and one truck base, one sanitary

base, one top section, one bookcase section, one of each style tray, one two-drawer cabinet for 3 by 5 inch cards, two drawers wide by one drawer high,

and one 6-drawer cabinet for 3 by 5 inch cards, three drawers high by two drawers wide. Samples to receive consideration shall be in strict compliance with this specification and represent

exactly what the bidder proposes to furnish in the event of his receiving an award.

The articles may be inspected at the factory, by a

representative of the Government, at any time during process of manufacture, the purpose of this factory inspection being to determine compliance

with the terms of this specification, as to workmanship, material, details of construction, hardware,

and finish. Final inspection will be made at point

of delivery.

Packing and marking of shipments.

Packing.—All furniture when shipped from fac- tory shall be so crated, packed, or wrapped as to insure delivery at destination in first-class condition,

either for domestic or foreign delivery, in accordance

with the best commercial practice.

Marking.—Each article shall be clearly marked in an inconspicuous place with the stock number, the name of the manufacturer, and date of manufacture.

Note. The technical terms herein employed shall be in- terpreted in accordance with the highest and best known standards of actual commercial practices in the art of high-grade furniture construction and

design.

309
435.6 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

435.6 WASTE-PAPER BASKETS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

435.9 OTHER OFFICE FURNITURE.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

359a, U. S. Government master specification for small sections; upright sections; trays and cabinets,

card, filing, revised April 25, 1927. This specification includes trays and miscellaneous

cabinets. (See 435.5.) Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

360, U. S. Government master specification for

rulers, December 24, 1925. General specifications.

There are no general specifications applicable to

this specification.

Type, grade, and sizes. Rulers shall be 12, 15, 18, and 24 inches in length

only and of one grade, and made of one kind of wood.

Material and workmanship.

The material shall be selected maple, natural

finish, with two coats of varnish. General requirements.

There are no general requirements applicable to

this specification. Detail requirements. Rulers furnished under this specification shall be

of the lengths specified in Section II, at least inches but not more than V/2 inches wide, and at

least 3^ of an inch thick. They shall be scaled in black in inches and sixteenths of an inch on the

edge, which shall be beveled. A brass edge, at least

^ inch in width shall be inserted in the beveled edge and securely fastened in place.

Method of inspection and test. No details specified.

Packing and marking. Rulers purchased under this specification shall be

packed and marked as required by the purchaser.

436. STORE FURNITURE AND FIXTURES.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

437. CHURCH, SCHOOL, AND THEATER

FURNITURE.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

438. CHAIRS.

438.1 DINING CHAIRS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

438.2 OFFICE CHAIRS. (See 435.2.)

438.3 FOLDING CHAIRS AND CAMP

STOOLS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

438.4 WHEEL CHAIRS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

439. OTHER FURNITURE.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

439.1 BAMBOO, RATTAN, AND REED FURNITURE (Except Chairs).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

439.2 SCREENS.

(No nationally recognized s pecifications available.

310
470-479 PAPER (Except Printed Matter)

470. GENERAL ITEMS RELATING TO

PAPER.

470.1 DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATION OF PAPER.

American Paper Industry, classification and

definitions of paper. (An elaborate classification with definitions has

been prepared by a committee of the industry,

representing the American Paper and Pulp Association, the National Research Council, and the National Bureau of Standards. In this section

of the present publication use has been made of

this classification in an abbreviated form.) National Association of Waste Material Dealers, standard classification for waste paper, current

1927.

(Classification of the waste paper from printing

establishments, manufacturers of paper products,

and similar sources.) 470.2 SIZES OF PAPER.

American Paper Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 22, for paper, July 1, 1924. In accordance with the action of a general conference of representatives of manufacturers, dis- tributers, and users of paper, which met at the National Bureau of Standards on June 19, 1923, the Department of Commerce recommends that

the sizes of paper and their doubles, listed below,

shall be recognized standards; and, further, that

all paper substance weights shall be stated in terms of the basic 25 by 40 inch size. This recom- mendation became effective July 1, 1924, and is subject to regular annual review by the industry

with such yearly revision as may be shown to be

desirable by experience and the investigations of the standing committee of the industry.

Stock sizes, general printing and publishing: 26 by 29 inches, 29 by 52 inches. 25 by 38 inches, 38 by 50 inches. 32 by 44 inches, 44 by 64 inches. 35 by 453^ inches. Stock sizes, book publishers:

30^ by 41 inches, 41 by 61 inches. Forms and letterheads: 17 by 22 inches, 22 by 34 inches. 17 by 28 inches, 28 by 34 inches. 19 by 24 inches, 24 by 38 inches. 470.3 TESTS OF PAPER.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

394, United States Government general specifica- tion for paper, April 1, 1926.

/. General requirements.

1. The United States Government master specifications for the various kinds of paper represent

the lowest quality of paper that will be accepted.

All specifications definitely state the minimum or maximum limits as to stock, strength, folding

endurance, ash, and other qualities which will be

accepted. Contractors must adjust their materials and processes so as to insure the delivery of finished paper which will fully comply with the requirement

of the specifications.

2. All the paper in the several classes must be of the specified weight, exclusive of cases, wrappers,

twine, and cores.

3. A variation above or below the ordered ream

weight of more than 5 per cent wi1 ! not be allowed.

Roll paper will be paid for at the net weight unless more than 2.5 per cent over the ordered ream

weight, in which case the weight in excess of 2.5 per

cent will be deducted. Flat paper will be paid for at the ordered ream weight unless more than 2.5 per cent under weight, in which case payment will be made for net weight. Payment will not be made

for cases, wrappers, or other packing materials.

4. "Mill count."—Five hundred perfect sheets to the ream must be accurate on all grades of paper.

Verification of "ream count" will be made by the

receiving office, and deliveries may be rejected for incorrect count. Shortage will be deducted in case the delivery is accepted.

5. If latent defects should be discovered after paper has been accepted, it shall be rejected and

the contractor required to replace it. 6. Tub-sized with animal glue.—The term "tubsized with animal glue" as used in the specifications

shall be construed to mean that the paper has been

tub-sized with animal glue and that it contains not

less than 1.5 per cent of animal glue and has good 1 writing, ruling, and erasive qualities.

7. Air-dried.—The term " air-dried" as used in the specifications shall be construed to mean that

the paper, after passing through the sizing tub,

shall be dried without contact with internally

heated driers and not under applied tension. This

definition includes the processes commonly known

as air, loft, or pole dried.

II. General packing requirements.

1. All paper, unless ordered in rolls or otherwise

specified, shall be packed in tight cases. The cases

shall be made from dry lumber not less than % inch

thick.

2. All coated book, writing, map, bond, parchment and ledger paper shall be ream-trimmed

square on four sides. All other flat paper shall be

cut square on four sides. All flat paper shall be put

up flat in cases, approximately 600 pounds to the

case of even reams, and, unless otherwise provided,

each ream shall be "slipped" with projecting colored paper marker. Where the specifications require that the paper be securely banded full width, the 52688°—27 21 311
470.3 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATION

width of band shall be full length of ream and go around the narrow way.

3. All roll paper shall be wound tight, at even tension, and shall contain the least possible number of

splices. All necessary splices shall be neatly made

and flagged at both ends of the roll with projecting

colored markers. Roll paper shall be carefully

wrapped, with ends well protected, and delivered in good condition. The diameter of the rolls shall be

specified in the order. Roll paper intended for ocean shipment shall be packed in tight cases and

if wound on paper cores the cores shall be protected

at both ends with wooden or other suitable material.

77/. Method of inspection and tests.

1. Sampling of delivery for testing.—Not less than

three rolls, cases, or bundles of a delivery shall be sampled for testing. Should delivery consist of more

than 30 units, not less than 10 per cent shall be

sampled, except when a delivery consists of more

than 100 units, in which event at least 10 units shall be sampled. The samples taken from each unit of a delivery shall be collated so that the test samples

which shall consist of not less than 10 sheets, shall be representative of each unit sampled.

2. Testing instruments.—The testing instruments

designated in these specifications are simply those upon which the results used in preparing the paper

specifications were obtained. The fact that these instruments are designated is not to be construed as indicating superiority over other instruments for the

several tests. All instruments employed for testing

and all gauges and measuring devices shall be kept

in accurate working condition at all times. Infor- mation shall be furnished upon request as to the approved type of standard testing instruments used

for determining thickness, bursting strength, and

folding endurance.

3. Atmospheric testing conditions.—All physical

tests shall be made under uniform temperature and

relative humidity conditions of 70 to 75° F. temperature and 50 per cent relative humidity. Samples

should be exposed, suspended from wires in the room

at least 4 hours (perferably 12 hours) before testing.

4. Fiber analysis.—(a) Apparatus: Any com- pound microscope equipped with lenses to give

magnifications of approximately 50 diameters or more, and preferably fitted with a mechanical stage.

(b) Preparation of sample: A piece about 5 mm

square shall be cut from each of 10 sheets of the

delivery sample being tested. These pieces shall be

placed in a 50 or 100 cc beaker or Erlenmeyer flask with approximately 20 cc of 2 per cent solution of potassium hydroxide, then boiled and washed

thoroughly with water. This sample shall then be

rolled into a ball and worked between the fingers to loosen the fibers. This can best be done by rolling

between the index finger and thumb. The ball of paper shall then be placed in a test tube approximately 15 by 125 mm. Fill tube about three-fourths

full with water and shake thoroughly until fibers are completely separated. After shaking, transfer about 5 cc of the thoroughly mixed pulp to another

test tube and fill tube about three-fourths full with

S IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

water and shake well. As small a sample as can be

conveniently handled shall be removed with needles

or fine forceps, placed on a glass slide and water removed by means of hard filter or blotting paper.

(c) Stains for identification and determination of

fiber content: Full details relative to the various

stains for use in fiber analysis will be found in Paper

Testing Methods, issued by the Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry, and in text- books dealing with paper technology.

(1) Herzberg stain: For distinguishing rag, chemical wood (coniferous and deciduous), ground

wood, and manila or jute.

(2) Lofton-Merritt stain: For distinguishing unbleached sulphite and unbleached sulphate pulp.

(3) C. G. Bright's stain: For distinguishing bleached and unbleached pulps.

(d) Method: The slide shall be prepared by re- moving several samples of pulp from test tube, as described under preparation of sample, and stained

, in accordance with details of the respective methods

outlined under stains. The prepared slide shall be

examined by means of the microscope, the slide being moved systematically so that the whole slide

is covered. The percentage fiber determination shall be made only by thoroughly trained analysts familiar with the fiber analysis of paper. The determination

of the percentage of pulp shall be made by a recog- nized standard method and at least 300 fibers counted. Report the determined percentage of each kind of fiber on the basis of 100 per cent fiber.

5. Ash.—Use 2 g sample of the paper; burn in porcelain, nickel, or alundum crucible; cool, weigh,

and calculate percentage of ash.

6. Weight per ream.—Samples for weight may be

cut to any convenient size, accurately measured and

the exact size recorded. Standard types of paper- weighing scales accurately calibrated which indicate the equivalent weight in pounds of a 500-sheet ream

shall be used.

7. Bursting strength.—The bursting strength shall be determined with a machine by which the paper

is firmly clamped against a rubber diaphragm

through which the pressure is applied to a circular area of approximately 1 square inch. The pressure

required to burst the paper is registered on an

accurate Bourdon tube-type gauge, the readings of which are designated as points. The bursting

strength will be ascertained by taking the average

of not less than 20 tests.

8. Thickness.—The thickness of paper shall be

determined by use of a standard type of paper micrometer having a foot 0.5 to 0.6 inch in diameter. Thickness shall be measured at several places on

each of 10 sheets of the sample and the average of

all measurements recorded as average thickness.

9. Folding endurance.—Folding endurance of paper shall be determined on any instrument by

which a strip of paper 15 mm in width is clasped

horizontally on edge and is folded backward and

forward upon itself under a tension applied by a movable spring clamp at each end and under a

tension that varies from 1,000 g wdien the paper is under the maximum tension to approximately 730

312
PAPER 470.3

g when under the minimum tension. Average fold- ing endurance shall be determined by at least 10

tests (each on a different sheet of the paper being

tested) in each direction.

10. Animal glue sizing.—Qualitative test: Place

5 g of the paper to be tested in a 100 cc beaker

with approximately 25 cc of distilled water and heat

to boiling. Pour off liquid into test tube and cool. Add 3 to 5 drops of tannic acid (2 per cent solution)

to the liquid in the test tube. If a cloudiness of solution or a precipitate is obtained, which upon

heating forms a horny mass which adheres to the

sides of the test tube, or solution does not become

clear, the presence of glue or of casein is indicated. Should the presence of starch render the results uncertain, boil 3^ g of the paper with 10 cc of water.

Cool, filter, and add half as much ammonium

molybdate solution (dissolve 3 g ammonium molybdate in 250 cc distilled water and add slowly, with

stirring, 25 cc 1.2 sp. gr. nitric acid). A white

voluminous precipitate indicates the presence of glue

or casein. Quantitative determination: Treat an accurately

weighed 3 to 5 g sample of paper by the Kjeldhal

method to determine the amount of nitrogen present. The percentage of nitrogen obtained multiplied by

5.8 will give the percentage of glue in the paper.

11. Starch sizing.—Qualitative test: Place a few

drops of a pale yellow dilute solution of iodine in potassium iodide on the sample of paper. The

development of a blue color indicates the presence

of starch.

12. Other methods of test.—Other methods of test

for papers for special uses are given in the respective

specifications.

Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper

Industry, official paper testing methods, 1926. SAMPLING PAPER FOR TESTING

I. Test sample.

The test sample, unless otherwise specified, shall consist of sheets at least 11 by 11 inches in size, and

having a total area of not less than 1,500 square

inches. The sample sheets shall be kept fiat, free from wrinkles and folds, and protected from exposure to liquids, direct sunlight, and other harmful

influences.

II. Methods of sampling.

Not less than 10 per cent of the total number of units (rolls, cases, frames, or bundles, etc.), composing a lot of paper shall be sampled if the lot consists

of not more than 100 units. If the lot consists of more than 100 units, not less than 5 per cent of the

total number of units shall be sampled. The sample

sheets shall be so selected from the different units that they will be representative of the entire lot of paper. The samples shall be taken as follows:

1. From rolls.—The sample sheets shall be taken

from the first unharmed layer of each roll. 2. From cases, frames, and bundles.—The sample

sheet shall be taken from the top and center of each

case, frame, or bundle sampled.

The sample sheets shall be so cut that their edges

are exactly parallel with the machine and cross direction of the paper.

III. Resampling. In case of necessity for resampling a lot of paper, the samples shall be taken as described above,

except that the paper sheets shall be taken from dif- ferent units than those previously sampled. If the

identity of the original units is lost, and the paper

is not in rolls, cases, frames, or bundles, the whole

lot shall be so sampled that all the different components of it will be represented by the test sample. DETERMINING FIBER COMPOSITION OF PAPER

I. Apparatus.

A microscope capable of giving not less than 100

diameters magnification is necessary for determination of fiber composition. It should be of the com- pound type and have a mechanical stage.

II. Specimen.

1. Composition.—The specimen for test shall consist of pieces having a total area of not less than 6 square centimeters (1 square inch) cut from differ- ent portions of the test sample, so as to be representative of it. 2. Preparation for examination.—Place the speci- men in a small beaker and completely cover it with a

0.5 per cent caustic soda or caustic potash solution, heat to boiling, transfer the contents of the beaker to a small 200-mesh metal sieve and wash thoroughly

with water. Roll the moist pieces of paper into a

ball and work between the fingers to loosen the fibers. Transfer to a test tube and shake until the fibers are completely separated. Pour a portion of the mixture into a second test tube and dilute to a fiber concentration of about 0.1 per cent. Transfer the fibers to a microscope slide by means of a dropper consist- ing of a glass tube 20 cm (6 inches) long and 6 mm

Q/i inch) internal diameter, fitted at one end with

a rubber bulb. Thoroughly mix the fibers and

water, quickly insert the dropper into the mixture

5 cm (2 inches) below the surface, expel two bubbles

of air from the dropper, then fill the tube to a dis- tance of about 13 mm (3^ inch). Transfer the contents of the dropper to the slide, making four drops,

completely emptying it. 1 Repeat this procedure

until the slide is uniformly covered with drops of the

mixture, then place the slide in an air bath until dry.

Add stain as specified in Section III, 2, to the dried

fibers and press down on them a second slide or large cover glass. Remove excess moisture from the edges of the slides with absorbent paper. One slide shall be sufficient for ordinary determinations. In

case of dispute not less than 3 slides shall be examined. III. Method.

1. Methods of observation.—A. Official: The pre- pared slide shall be examined microscopically, observations being made at various points in a

straight line, twice lengthwise and four times cross1 Microscopic paper fiber analysis, G. K. Spence and J. M. Krauss,

Paper, 20, No. 11, p. 11, May 23, 1917. 313
470.3 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIO]

wise of the slide, each line of the observations start- ing at a different point. A magnification of not less than 100 diameters shall be used. A magnification

of 100 diameters is desirable as with lower magnification it is difficult to observe the characteristic structure and shape of the fibers, both of which aid materially, in addition to the color developed by the

stain, in identifying the fibers. The number of each

kind of fiber present in at least 25 different fields and

a total of not less than 200 fibers shall be counted,

using the diameter of the field as observed through

"the microscope as the unit of measurement. The

amount of each kind of fiber present shall be computed as a percentage of the total fiber composition.

B. Tentative: 2 To avoid the undesirable per- sonal equation involved in estimating the relative

sizes of the fibers, the following method of counting

is recommended for trial with the view of future adoption as the official method if found satisfactory.

A round microscope cover glass at whose center is a very small black spot (point) or the intersection at

right angles of fine lines or cross hairs, shall be

placed on the diaphragm of the eyepiece. The

slide shall then be moved across the field of view,

and each fiber, or part of a fiber, which passes

directly under the spot shall be counted. If the

fibers are long, some may pass under the spot more

than once during the count, but they shall be

counted each time, regardless of the number of times they pass under the spot.

2. Stains.—For all purposes except as specified

below, either the Herzberg or the Sutermeister

stain shall be used. These shall be prepared and

used as follows: Herzberg: 3 Prepare the following solutions: (A) An aqueous solution of C. P. zinc chloride saturated at 70° F. (B) 0.25 g of C. P. iodine and

5.25 g C. P. potassium iodide dissolved in 12.5 cc of

distilled water. Mix 25 cc of solution (A) measured at 70° F. with

solution (B). Pour into a narrow cylinder and

allow to stand until clear. Decant the supernatant

liquid into an amber colored, glass-stoppered bottle and add a small piece of iodine to the solution. Thoroughly moisten the fibers with this solution and remove the excess with blotting paper. The

solution should be tested with known fibers and

readjusted if necessary by addition of either zinc chloride or iodine. The following colors are de- veloped by this stain: Red—linen, cotton, bleached manila hemp.

Blue—chemically prepared fibers low in lignocellulose, from wood, straw, and esparto. Yellow—fibers high in lignocellulose, such as ground wood, jute, and unbleached manila hemp.

Sutermeister: 4 Prepare the following solutions: Solution (A) —1.3 g iodine and 1.8 g potassium

iodide dissolved in 100 cc of water; solution (B)

a clear, practically saturated solution of calcium

chloride.

2 Suggested by H. T. Case;]Sears, Roebuck & Co.

3 Papier Pruning, Wilhelm Herzberg.

* Chemistry of Pulp and Paper Making, E. Sutermeister, p. 390.

S IN WOOD-USING INDTJSTBIES

In using this stain, apply solution (A) after moistening the fibers with water, allow to remain

about one minute, remove the excess by blotting,

and then add solution (B). The colors developed by the Sutermeister stain

are, in general:

Red or brownish red—cotton, linen, hemp, ramie. Dark blue—bleached soda pulps from deciduous

woods.

Bluish or reddish violet—bleached sulphite fibers and thoroughly cooked unbleached sulphite fibers. Greenish—jute, manila hemp and the more ligni- fied fibers in unbleached sulphite.

Yellow—ground wood.

Lofton-Merritt: 5 This stain shall be used for

differentiating between unbleached sulphate (kraft) and unbleached sulphite fibers. It shall be prepared

as follows: (A) Malachite green, 2 g; water, 100 cc. (B) Basic fuchsine, 1 g; water, 100 cc. These shall be mixed in the proportion of one part

(A) to two parts (B). As dyes from different sources

vary, it is necessary to test them by staining known

fibers. Unbleached sulphate fibers are stained blue

or blue-green and unbleached sulphite fibers purple

or lavender. If any purple fibers appear in unbleached sulphate fibers, this indicates there is too much fuchsine present and more malachite green

solution must be added. The opposite is indicated

if some unbleached sulphite fibers develop a green

or blue color. The Lofton-Merritt stain shall be used as follows: Add the compound stain to the fibers and allow to remain two minutes. Remove excess stain by

means of a hard filter paper and add a few drops of

0.1 per cent hydrochloric acid. After about 30

seconds remove the excess acid. Next add a few

drops of distilled water and remove the excess. Bright stain: 6 This stain shall be used for differ- entiating between bleached and unbleached fibers. The solutions required are: (A) 2.7 g ferric chloride (FeCl3 6H2 O) per 100 cc distilled water. (B) 3.29 g potassium ferricyanide (K2 Fe (CN) 6 ) per 100 cc

distilled water. (C) 3 g of crude (not treated with

sodium carbonate) substantive red dye per 500 cc

of distilled water. The dye used shall be Dupont

Purpurine 4 B concentrated, or its equivalent.

These solutions must all be made with cold water.

Filter solutions (A) and (B) and keep in separate

stock bottles at a temperature not exceeding 20° C. Make solution (C) fresh each day it is used. For

staining use tall narrow beakers, suspending the microscope slides in the beakers from clamps. Mix

10 cc each of solutions (A) and (B) in one beaker

and add an equivalent amount of solution (C) to another beaker. Set the beakers in a water bath, the temperature of which must be maintained constantly within ± 1° of 20° C. Place a thermometer

in the stains. When their temperature is 20° C,

dip the slide containing the dry fibers in distilled

8 Method for Differentiating and Estimating Unbleached Sulphite and Sulphate Pulps in Paper, R. E. Lofton and M. F. Merritt, Technologic Paper No. 189, IT. S. Bureau of Standards.

6 Microscopy of Paper Fiber, C. G. Bright, Paper, 20, No. 25, p. 11, Aug. 29, 1917. As modified by the author. 314
PAPEE 470.3

water to moisten it uniformly (so that no air bubbles

will be formed when it is stained), then place the

slide in stain (A-B) and allow it to remain 20 minutes.

Wash by dipping in distilled water six times, then renew the water and repeat the washing process. Dry the contents of the slide and repeat the processes of moistening, staining, washing, and drying,

using the (C) stain. It is desirable to fix the top

glass on the fibers with a drop of balsam. The

colors developed by the Bright stain are: Red—bleached fibers or fibers practically free from lignocellulose.

Blue—unbleached fibers or fibers containing

lignocellulose. IV. Report. The proportion of the various fibers found shall be reported in terms of percentages of the total

fiber composition, to the nearest 5 per cent. The

following nomenclature, which covers the fibers commonly dealt with, shall be used in reporting

results: Chemical wood fiber; chemical deciduous

wood fiber; chemical coniferous wood fiber; groundwood fiber; manila fiber; jute fiber; rag fiber; linen

fiber; cotton fiber; esparto fiber; straw fiber. CONDITIONING PAPER FOR TESTING

/. Relative humidity and temperature.

Whenever required in the test method, the paper sample shall be conditioned and tested in an at- mosphere maintained at 65 per cent relative humidity and 21° C. (70° F.) temperature. A tolerance

of plus or minus 2 per cent in relative humidity

(63-67 per cent) and of plus 5° C. (9° F.) in temperature is permissible.

77. Conditioning.

Each specimen of the paper sample, after preparation for application of the test as specified in the

test method, shall be so suspended that the conditioning atmosphere will have free access to all surfaces. Means shall be provided for so circulating the air of the conditioning and testing chamber that

its humidity and temperature will be uniformly

maintained. The conditioning time shall be suffi- cient for the moisture content of the specimen to

attain equilibrium with the conditioning atmosphere, this to be determined by conditioning to

constant weight, weighing at intervals of not less than y% hour. Note.—A conditioning period of two hours is usually sufficient

for papers of ordinary weight and composition. Some papers, however, such as boards and certain specialties made water resistant, may require much longer periods. 777. Determination of humidity and temperature.

The relative humidity of the conditioning atmosphere shall be determined by means of either (1) a

sling psychrometer, or (2) a stationary type of psychrometer having the air circulated over the thermometer bulbs mechanically. In both cases the circulation of air around the thermometer bulbs must be at the rate of not less than 3 meters (10

feet) per second. When the sling type is used, care must be taken to make the readings as quickly as

possible after bringing it to rest.

The thermometers used for determining humidity

and temperature must be accurately calibrated by

comparison with certified standard thermometers

and any corrections found necessary applied to the

readings.

Note.—It is recommended that thermometers approaching as

closely as possible to the following specifications be used: Range

0° C. (32° F.) to 50° C. (122° F.); graduations, 0.2°. DETERMINING BURSTING STRENGTH OF PAPER

J. Apparatus.

The testing instrument shall consist of: (1) A

circular aperture 31.5 mm (1.24 inches) in diameter

in a plane surface, the aperture registering exactly

with a similar aperture in a second plane surface. One aperture shall communicate with a hydraulic

chamber and the other shall be movable along the

axis passing through the centers of the two apertures.

(2) Means of firmly clamping the two plane surfaces

together. The clamping pressure and the extent

of the contacting plane surfaces shall be such that

there shall occur no slipping or creeping during the

test of a specimen clamped between the plane surfaces and no injury to the specimen so clamped. (3) A

rubber diaphragm- firmly secured to the inner side of the aperture in the hydraulic chamber so as to close

it off and expand through it when hydraulic pressure

is applied. (4) Means of applying hydraulic pres- sure through a noncompressible fluid to the rubber

diaphragm. (5) Means of accurately and contin- uously registering the pressure maintained in the

hydraulic chamber, the bourdon tube pressure gauge

being preferred.

II. Specimen.

Specimens for test shall be so selected from a sample secured by the official sampling method as

to be representative of the sample.

III. Method. The specimen shall be firmly clamped in posi- tion and pressure applied within the hydraulic chamber at a uniform rate such that the noncompressible

fluid shall be displaced against the rubber diaphragm

and through the aperture at a rate of 75 cc per minute 7 until the paper bursts. The gauge used must

be such that the bursting strength of the paper

tested will not be greater than three-fourths of its capacity nor less than one-fourth of its capacity.

The gauge reading shall be recorded to the nearest

2 per cent of the total reading. At least 10 bursts

shall be made, each of a different specimen of the sample and an equal number from each side of the

specimen. Bursting strength tests shall be made

on specimens conditioned according to the official method for conditioning, and in the atmospheric

conditions therein specified. IV. Calibration. The gauge shall be calibrated at intervals of not more than 30 days. The calibration shall be per- formed as follows: The gauge shall be removed and

calibrated in a horizontal position with a dead-weight

7 This rate is equivalent to turning the hand wheel of the ordinary type of bursting strength paper tester at a rate of 120 r. p. m. 315
470.3 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

gauge tester of the piston type. A record shall be

kept of any deviations from the indicated readings

and corresponding corrections made in test results secured with the gauge. The gauge shall be replaced

and the pressure chamber refilled with sufficient glycerin to leave the rubber diaphragm, when placed

in position, slightly depressed, taking care to elim- inate all air bubbles. The rubber diaphragm shall be renewed at least every 30 days. V. Report. The report shall include the average, the mini- mum, and maximum test results. The readings of the gauges shall be reported to the nearest 2 per cent

of the total reading and shall be expressed as "points." DETERMINING TENSILE BREAKING STRENGTH OF PAPER

I. Apparatus.

The instrument shall consist of (1) two clamps

whose centers shall be in the same plane parallel

with the direction of motion of the stressing clamp

and so aligned that they will hold the test specimens

wholly in one plane, (2) a pendulum so attached to one clamp as to accurately balance the load applied

to the test specimen, (3) a device attached to the pendulum to indicate on a graduated scale the breaking load of the test specimen, (4) a scale gradu- ated in weight units (preferably metric) which may

be read to an accuracy of not less than 0.2 per cent

of the total reading, and (5) a means of moving the

stressing clamp at a uniform rate. The machine

shall preferably be power driven.

II. Specimens.

Specimens for test shall be cut accurately in each

principal direction of the paper, not less than 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) nor more than 25.4 mm (1 inch)

wide and not less than 140 mm (5.5 inches) in length. The edges of the specimens must be

clean cut and parallel to the opposite edges. The

specimens must be accurately cut to the predetermined width. They shall be so selected from the sample secured by the official sampling method as to be representative of the sample.

HI. Method. The ratio of the clearance distance between jaws

to the width of the specimen shall be not less than

5:1, nor more than 12:1. The test specimen shall be firmly clamped squarely in the jaws of the clamps

and the stressing jaw then operated at a speed of 30.5 cm (12 inches) per minute until the specimen

breaks. The breaking load shall be recorded to the

nearest 2 per cent of the total indicated reading.

The tester shall be of such capacity that the tensile strength of the paper tested will be not greater than

90 per cent, nor less than 10 per cent of the capacity

of the tester. Not less than 10 strips cut in each

principal direction of the paper shall be tested. All the readings obtained when the paper breaks at or

in the jaws shall be rejected. Tensile strength

tests shall be made on paper conditioned according

to the official method, and in the atmospheric

conditions therein specified.

IV. Calibration. The machine shall be accurately leveled in both of the principal directions. The stressing clamp shall be displaced or removed and accurate weights

corresponding to various divisions of the scale markings shall be suspended from the pendulum

actuating clamp. The weights shall be held at the

start and released slowly so that the pendulum is actuated at a rate similar to that specified above and

other conditions must simulate the paper testing conditions as closely as possible. A record shall be

made of deviations from the scale readings and

corresponding corrections shall be made in the test

results. The machine shall be calibrated at

intervals of not more than 30 days.

V. Report. The result shall be reported in kilograms per 15 mm width to the nearest 2 per cent of the total reading. The average, maximum, and minimum

tensile strength for both of the principal directions

of the paper shall be reported. The report shall include the width of the specimen in millimeters. QUANTITATIVE DETERMINATION OF PARAFFIN IN PAR- AFFINED PAPER

I. Apparatus.

A suitable extraction apparatus, such as the Soxhlet or the Underwriter's, is required for this deter- mination.

II. Specimen.

The test specimen shall consist of not less than 1 gram of paper obtained by cutting strips approximately }/2 inch wide from the sample in such a way

as to be representative of it. ///. Method. Weigh the air-dry paper to an accuracy of 1 centi- gram. Fold the strips into numerous crosswise folds, and place them in the siphon cup of the extractor. Extract with carbon tetrachloride (CCI4) at least

five times, and more if found necessary. Remove the paper and determine its air-dry weight. The dif- ference between the original weight of the paper and Its weight after extraction shall be regarded as the amount of paraffin present. IV. Report. The paraffin content shall be expressed as a per- centage of the air-dry paper to the nearest 1 per

cent. QUANTITATIVE DETERMINATION OF ACTIVE SULPHUR

IN PAPER

I. Apparatus.

The special apparatus required for this determination consists of a 500 cc round-bottom distillation flask having a neck about 5 cm (2 inches) long and

2.5 cm (1 inch) in diameter, and a tube 10 cm (4 inches) long so connected to the mouth of the flask that all gases generated in the flask will pass through

a filter paper clamped between the mouth of the

flask and the end of the tube, and then out through

the tube. The balance used for weighing shall be sensitive to 1 mg.

316
PAPER 470.3

II. Specimen.

The specimen shall consist of 0.25 g of air-dry paper either ground or thoroughly disintegrated by

shaking in water.

III. Reagents.

Small pieces of C. P. stick zinc, free from sulphur

and arsenic, activated as follows: Cover the zinc with a C. P. copper sulphate solution in the proportion of 10 cc of copper sulphate solution, containing

0.002 g copper to 1 g of zinc. After allowing to stand a few minutes for deposition of the copper, wash the

zinc with distilled water until free from zinc sulphate.

The zinc can be reactivated several times. Concentrated C. P. hydrochloric or phosphoric

acid, free from sulphur and arsenic. C. P. lead acetate, 10 per cent solution. C. P. sodium thiosulphate, 0.001 per cent solution. Sulphur-free surgical absorbent cotton prepared

by boiling in a dilute solution of sodium hydroxide

and washing thoroughly with distilled water. IV. Method.

Transfer the weighted specimen to the distillation flask with 20 cc of distilled water and add approximately 2 g activated zinc cut in small pieces, and 10

cc of concentrated hydrochloric or phosphoric acid. Insert in the neck of the flask a loose wad of surgical absorbent cotton about 4 cm (13^ inches) long.

Clamp between the mouth of the flask and the tube a hardened filter paper (such as Schleicher and

Schulls' No. 575) which has been freshly moistened

with a 10 per cent solution of lead acetate. Place another wad of absorbent cotton in the tube above

the filter paper. Prepare flasks under duplicate

conditions containing in place of the paper under

test, pure, sulphur-free cotton and measured amounts

of sodium thiosulphate solution. Set all the flasks in a steam bath for one hour, frequently agitating the

contents. Remove the filter papers and allow them

to air-dry. The per cent of sulphur present is found

by comparing the depth of the color developed by

the sulphur from the specimen with that developed

by the known amounts of sulphur evolved from the

thiosulphate solutions. As 0.000001 g sulphur will give a distinct stain, care must be taken to protect the paper under test from contamination. It must be protected from

atmospheric fumes and should not be handled with

the bare hands.

V. Report. The amount of sulphur shall be reported as a per- centage of the air-dry paper. Note—In respect to the tarnishing effect of sulphur, a paper

containing not more than 0.0008 per cent of sulphur is required for wrapping silverware. VI. Reference. Chemistry of Pulp and Paper Making, Edwin

Sutermeister, page 422. DETERMINATION OF AMOUNT OF COATING OF MINERAL

COATED PAPER

/. Apparatus.

No special apparatus is required for this deter- mination.

II. Specimen.

The specimen for test shall consist of a piece of the sample cut 5 by 13 cm (2 by 5 inches).

TIL Method. Obtain the air-dry weight of the specimen. Place

the specimen in a flat bottom tray and pour over it a warm 5 per cent solution of hydrochloric acid. After a few moments pour off the excess acid and

add a warm 5 per cent solution of ammonia, moving

the paper around so that the solution comes in contact with all parts of it. After this treatment

has continued for a few minutes, place the paper on

a pane of glass and brush off the coating with a

camel's-hair brush, taking care not to dislodge any

of the paper fiber. After the coating is entirely

removed, stand the glass pane at a slight angle and

wash the paper by means of a wash bottle, holding

the paper on the glass by one corner. Dry the specimen and obtain the air-dry weight. The

difference between this weight and the original

weight of the specimen is the amount of coating

material present. Not less than two determinations shall be made, and the average of these computed.

TV. Report.

The amount of mineral coating shall be reported

(1) as a percentage of the decoated air-dry paper and

(2) as pounds per 500 sheets of the decoated air-dry paper, 25 by 40 inches in size. The weight of the decoated air-dry paper on this same weight basis

shall also be included in the report. V. Reference. Suggested by Edwin Sutermeister. QUANTITATIVE DETERMINATION OF RESIN IN PAPER

/. Apparatus.

A suitable extraction apparatus such as the

Soxhlet or the Underwriter's is especially required

for this determination. In addition, if glue or other nitrogenous sizing agents are present, two 300 cc separatory funnels are necessary. The balance used shall be sensitive to 1 mg.

77. Specimen*

The test specimen shall consist of not less than

5 grams of paper obtained by cutting strips approximately }4 mch wide from the sample in such a way

as to be representative of it. It is recommended

that the specimens be shredded or ground.

III. Method. Obtain the air-dry weight of the specimen. If the paper is not shredded or ground, fold the strips into numerous crosswise folds and place them in the siphon cup of the extractor. Extract with acidulated alcohol (95 per cent, alcohol; 90 per cent,

glacial acetic acid; 0.5 per cent water, 9.5 per cent by volume), siphoning at least twelve times or as many more as may be necessary until the solvent siphons over colorless. If nitrogenous sizing agents

are present, they must be separated from the resin as follows, this not being necessary in absence of such materials: Wash the alcoholic extract of rosin, 317
470.3 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

which may contain foreign material, into a beaker

and evaporate to a few cc on a steam bath. Cool, take up in about 25 cc of ether, transfer to a 300 cc separatory funnel containing about 150 cc of distilled water to which has been added a small quantity of sodium chloride to prevent emulsification,

shake thoroughly, and allow to separate. Draw off the water into a second separatory funnel and repeat the treatment with a fresh 25 cc portion of ether. Combine the ether extracts which contain the resin and any other ether-soluble material, and wash

twice or until the ether layer is perfectly clear and

the line between the ether and the water is sharp

and distinct, with 100 cc portions of distilled water to remove salts and foreign matter. Should any glue,

which may be extracted from the paper, interfere by emulsifying with the ether, it may be readily

removed by adding a strong solution of sodium

chloride to the combined ether extracts. Shake

thoroughly and draw off the aqueous solution,

repeating if necessary before dashing with distilled water. Transfer the alcoholic or the ether extract

to a weighed evaporating dish, evaporate to dryness, dry the residue exactly 1 hour at 100° C,

and weigh to an accuracy of 0.1 mg. Not less than two determinations shall be made, and the average of the results computed. The percentage

results of duplicate determinations of resin should

agree within 0.2. IV. Report.

The resin content shall be expressed as a per- centage of the air-dry paper, to the nearest 0.1 per

cent. Reference: Quantitative Determination of Rosin

in Paper, C. F. Sammet, Ind. & Eng. Chem., Vol. V,

p. 732, Sept., 1913. DETERMINATION OF MACHINE DIRECTION OF PAPER

I. Terminology and definition. The two major directions of paper shall be termed:

Machine direction.—The direction of paper parallel to its forward movement on the paper machine.

Cross direction.—The direction of the paper at

right angles to the machine direction.

77. Specimens.

The test specimens shall be cut with sides parallel to the major directions of the original paper

sample sheets. The major directions of both the sample sheets and the test specimens shall be so marked that they can be respectively identified. For method 1, a piece approximately 50 mm (2 inches) square or a circular piece 2 inches in dia- meter, and for method 2, two strips approximately

12.5 mm (0.5 inch) wide and 152 mm (6. inches)

long, cut at right angles to each other, shall be used.

III. Methods. A positive result obtained by one of the follow- ing methods shall be regarded as a conclusive determination.

1. Float the specimen on water and note the

direction of the curl. The axis of the curl is parallel to the machine direction of the paper. Paper

which absorbs water readily should not be exposed

to the water for than a few seconds.

2. Hold the two strips by the ends in a hori- zontal position, one over the other, placing first one and then the other on top. The strip cut in the

cross direction will bend the more and fall away

from the one cut in the machine direction.

3. Burst the specimen, using the instrument

described in the official method for determination

of bursting strength. The chief line of rupture

will be at right angles to the machine direction of the paper. IV. Report. In reporting test results the terms "machine

direction" and "cross direction" shall be used. When the strength of paper in the two major

directions is reported, it shall be understood that

the line of bending or rupture of the paper was at

right angles to the major direction specified. V. Additional information. By the term "grain" as applied to paper is meant the machine direction of the paper. DETERMINATION OF REAM WEIGHT OF PAPER

7. Apparatus.

The balance used for weighing paper shall have

a sensitivity of not less than 0.25 per cent of the

load applied and shall be so graduated that readings of this degree of accuracy can be made. The

balance shall preferably be a specially constructed

sheet-weighing device indicating the equivalent

weight of a 500-sheet ream and a 480-sheet ream in pounds when a specimen consisting of one sheet of designated size is weighed. The balance must be

protected from air currents. The scale used for measuring the size of the speci- men shall be graduated not more than 0.05 inch

(1.27 mm).

For trimming the specimens to the desired size, a special paper cutter with an attachment for insur- ing parallelism of the opposite cut edges is recom- mended.

II. Calibration. The balance shall be calibrated at intervals of not more than 30 days, both with increasing and

decreasing load, by applying accurate weights. Care must be taken that before calibrating the

balance is properly leveled and gives zero reading

with no load. Method. The specimen for test shall consist whenever

possible of at least 10 sheets, 10 by 10 inches (254

mm) in size, of book or writing papers and equivalent amounts of other kinds of paper of greater or

less weight than these. The specimen shall be

conditioned by the official method, cut accurately

as to parallelism of opposite edges, its exact dimensions measured to the nearest 0.05 inch (1.27 mm),

and its weight then determined to the nearest 0.25 per cent of its total weight, the entire operation

being carried out in the official atmospheric conditions. When a balance is used which does not 318
PAPER 470.3

indicate the ream weight directly, the weight in grams cf a single sheet multiplied by 1.102 gives the

equivalent weight in pounds of a 500-sheet ream for sheets having the size of the sheet weighed. Duplicate determinations when calculated to ream

weight shall agree within 1 per cent of the ream

weight. IV. Report.

The report shall give the equivalent ream weight

in pounds for a ream consisting of 500 sheets, 25

inches (635 mm) by 40 inches (1,016 mm) in size, and also the equivalent weight for the basic weight

area commonly used by the paper industry for the

particular kind of paper. The weight shall be

reported to the nearest 1 per cent of the total ream

weight. V. Additional information. To convert the weight of a standard ream of 500

sheets, 25 by 40 inches in size, to the weight of a ream of 500 sheets of trade custom size, multiply

the former by one of the factors given below:

Kind of paper Trade custom

size Factor

Blotting

Inches

19 by 24

17 by 22 22H by 28H

22 bv 28

25 by 38

20 by 26

24 by 36 20 by 30

24 by 36

17 by 22

0.456

.374

.641 .616 .950

.520

.864 .600

.864

.374

Blue and brown print— _ Boards:

Bristol and tag Card Book

Cover News.. - -

V," rapping WritingDETERMINATION OF THE THICKNESS OF PAPER

I. Apparatus.

(a) A micrometer of the spring-actuated, dial type

shall be used. The plunger shall be capable of being

raised by the application of an upward pressure to

it. The plunger surface shall be circular in shape

and not less than 9.7 mm (0.38 inch) nor more

than 16 mm (0.63 inch) in diameter. The dial shall be graduated preferably in divisions indicating a

thickness of 0.0127 mm (0.0005 inch) and in no case

greater than 0.025 mm (0.001 inch). Graduations

indicating a thickness of 0.0254 mm (0.001 inch)

shall be at least 3 mm (0.12 inch) apart. Convenient means shall be provided for setting the pointer to

zero position.

(6) The surfaces of the plunger and anvil shall be

plane and parallel to within 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch).

(c) Under normal operating conditions the downward pressure of the plunger shall be not less than

709 g (25 ounces) and not more than 1418 g (50

ounces), at a reading of 3.81 mm (0.15 inch).

(d) Measurements made on standard steel thickness gauges shall be within the following tolerances

Intervals Permissible deviation of reading from actual thickness of standard

steel gauge

to 0.25 mm (0 to 0.01 inch inclusive) _ Over 0.25 mm to 1.02 mm (0.01 to 0.04 inch) Over 1.02 mm to 3.05 mm (0.04 to 0.12 inch

inclusive)

0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch).

0.0051 mm (0.0002 inch).

0.0102 mm (0.0004 inch).

II. Specimens.

The test specimens shall consist of original sample

sheets so selected as to be representative of the

entire sample.

III. Method. At least 10 thickness tests shall be made, each on

a different specimen except in the case of paper less than 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) in thickness when a

sufficient number of specimens shall be placed to- gether and tested so that a reading on the scale of not less than 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) is obtained. Thickness tests shall be made on specimens conditioned by the official method and in the atmospheric conditions therein specified. IV. Calibration.

(a) For testing for compliance with section 1(b), a hard steel ball, 4.77 mm (0.125 inch) in diameter,

shall be placed at different points on the anvil and

the thickness readings observed. It is recommended

that the ball be fixed in a flat piece of metal, part

of which acts as a handle.

(b) For testing for compliance with section 1 (c), the pressure must be measured by means of a suit- able balance device applied to the plunger. (Details of such device may be obtained from the National Bureau of Standards.) V. Report.

The average maximum and minimum thickness

shall be reported in parts of an inch to the nearest

0. 0025 mm (0.0001 inch). VI. Additional information. A Study of Commercial Dial Micrometers for Measuring the Thickness of Paper, P. L. Houston and D. R. Miller, Technologic Paper No. 226,

National Bureau of Standards. QUANTITATIVE DETERMINATION OF MOISTURE OF PAPER

1. Apparatus.

The special apparatus required for this determination is an air-tight container in which the specimen

is dried and weighed. For the minimum size speci- men designated, a weighing bottle approximately 65 mm (2.56 inches) in height and 45 mm (1.77 inches)

in diameter is suitable. For larger specimens proportionately larger containers should be used. The oven used to dry the paper shall be equipped

with means for ensuring adequate temperature control and air circulation and preferably equipped with means of drying the air entering the oven.

//. Specimen.

The specimen for test shall consist of not less than

2 g of paper obtained by cutting small strips from

different portions of the test sample in such a way

as to be representative of it. Note.—When the paper under test is not in moisture equilibrium with the surounding atmosphere, care must be taken to minimize the time of exposure of the test sample to the atmosphere as much

as possible, gain or loss of moisture being very rapid under this condition. III. Method. The specimen shall be placed in a weighed air-tight

container, the container closed and the weight of the 319
470.3 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

specimen obtained. The cover of the container shall be removed and the paper dried in the container in an oven having an adequate circulation of air at 100 to 105° C. (212 to 221° F.) for one hour. The

container shall then be closed in the oven, removed

to a desiccator, and cooled in the desiccator to room

temperature. The container and paper shall be

weighed and the entire process repeated until the weight is constant. All weighings shall be made to an accuracy of 1 mg. The percentage results of duplicate determinations of moisture shall agree within

0. 2. IV. Report.

The amount of moisture shall be reported as a per- centage, (1) of the original weight of the paper and

(2) of the bone-dry paper, to the nearest 0.1. QUANTITATIVE DETERMINATION OF ASH OF PAPER

J. Apparatus.

A crucible, such as platinum, alundum, or porcelain, which will not change in weight under the

ignition conditions used and with a tightly fitting

lid; a balance sensitive to 1 mg; and a desiccator, are necessary for this determination. An electric muffle furnace is recommended for burning the

paper.

//. Specimen.

The test specimen shall consist of not less than 1 g

of air-dry paper obtained by cutting small strips from

different portions of the sample in such a way as to be representative of it. III. Method. The specimen of paper shall be weighed in the

crucible and completely ignited. To avoid loss of small particles of the specimen care must be taken to heat it slowly and to protect the contents of the

crucible at all times from strong drafts. When the paper is completely burned, as indicated by absence

of black particles, the crucible shall be removed to

desiccator, covered and allowed to remain until its temperature has reached equilibrium with that of the surrounding atmosphere. The crucible and contents

shall then be weighed and the ignition and weighing

repeated until the weight is constant. All weighings

shall be made to an accuracy of 1 mg. The per- centage results of duplicate determinations of ash

shall agree within 0.2. IV. Report.

The amount of ash shall be reported as a percent- age of the air-dry paper to the nearest 0.1 per cent. DETERMINING THE TEARING STRENGTH OF PAPER

1. Apparatus.

The testing apparatus shall consist of a stationary

jaw, a movable jaw carried on a pendulum, a slitting

device, and a device for registering the tearing force. The pendulum shall preferably be in the shape of a

sector and carry on it a scale, the graduation of which shall indicate the tearing force, preferably

directly in grams, from to 100, laid off on the sector within approximately 50° of arc. A stop shall be

provided for holding the sector in its initial displaced

position and for releasing it quickly. With the pendulum in its initial position ready for a test, the two jaws shall be separated by an interval of about

3 mm (0.12 inch) and shall be in line so that the specimen clamped in them lies in a plane perpendicular to the plane of oscillation of the pendulum and

so that the tops of the jaws are in a horizontal line. The movable jaw shall be so placed on the sector that a line in the plane of the sector from the point

of suspension of the pendulum to a point where the top of the jaw is in contact with the specimen shall be about 10 cm (4 inches) long and shall make an

angle of about 30° with the plans of the specimen.

The slitting device shall be so arranged as to cut an

initial slit in the specimen halfway between the two

jaws and extending from the lower edge of the speci- men to a distance of about 4 mm (0.16 inch) above

the top .of the jaws.

77. Specimens.

Specimens for test shall be cut accurately in each

principal direction of the paper not less than 6.3 cm (2.5 inches) in length (the horizontal position

when placed in the jaws) and of such width that the paper shall extend exactly 4.3 cm (1.69 inches)

above the apex of the initial slit. The edges of the specimens must be clean-cut and the opposite edges

parallel. The specimens shall be so selected from a

sample secured by the official method as to be

representative of it. III. Method. Enough sheets shall be torn at one time so that

the readings on the scale shall be not less than 20 g and not more than 40 g. The test specimen shall be so placed in the jaws that it rests evenly on their bottom plates and so that the paper extends a dis- tance of not less than 2.5 cm (1 inch) into the

movable jaw. Readings obtained when the tear deviates more than 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) from the

line of the initial slit shall be rejected. The sector stop must be released sharply in operating the

instrument. The knife for making the initial slit shall be maintained sharp. Not less than five tearing tests shall be made in each principal direc- tion of the paper and the results shall be computed

in grams per single sheet of paper by multiplying the

readings of the instrument by 16 and dividing by

the number of sheets tested at one time. Tearingstrength tests shall be made on paper conditioned

by the official method and in the atmospheric

conditions therein specified. IV. Calibration. With the sector raised to its initial position and

resting against its stop the jaws shall be accurately

aligned, readjusting the stop if necessary. The

ball bearings shall be adjusted so as not to bind and

shall be well oiled. The instrument shall be leveled

so that the edge of the stop against which the sec- tor rests in its initial position lies vertically below

the point of suspension of the sector. A white

line is usually placed on the sector for convenience

in making this adjustment. With the sector freely

suspended and at rest this mark should be in line with the edge of the stop. Verify the position of the 320
PAPER 470.3

mark with a plumb line cutting the axis of suspension of the sector. After being leveled the instru- ment shall be operated several times with nothing

in the jaws (movable jaw closed) to find if it registers zero with no tearing load. If necessary the pointer

stop shall be adjusted until the zero reading is correctly registered. Place the pointer exactly on zero. Without again touching the pointer

operate the instrument three times, being very

careful each time not to jar the pointer in setting the sector against its stop. The pointer will be

pushed beyond zero for a distance which measures

the maximum pointer friction. This should be

equivalent to not more than 3 g (compare with dis- tance from zero to 3 on scale). If necessary to reduce this friction, clean pointer sleeve and groove

(washing with gasoline if necessary) and apply

fresh oil. Note.—The friction error allowed has been compensated for at its maximum value by the shifting of the pointer stop in adjusting the

zero reading. V. Report. The results shall be reported in grams to the nearest 1 g. The average, maximum, and minimum

tearing strength for both of the principal directions

of the paper shall be reported. The report shall include the number of sheets torn at one time. VI. Additional information. Tearing strength test for paper, A. Elmendorf,

Paper, Vol. 26, folio page 302, April 21, 1920. Tearing strength of paper, supplementary study of commercial instruments of determining, P. L. Houston,

Paper Trade Journal, Vol. 74, No. 10, page 43, March 9, 1922. QUALITATIVE DETERMINATION OF CASEIN IN PAPER A positive result obtained by the following method

shall be regarded as conclusive evidence of the

presence of casein in paper. Millon method.

Boil 0.5 g of paper several minutes with 10 cc of a 1 per cent solution of caustic soda. (Caustic soda

is required to dissolve casein that has been hardened

by formaldehyde or other agents.) Filter off the aqueous extract, cool to room temperature, add a

suitable indicator, such as phenolphthalein, and

exactly neutralize with nitric acid. Add several cc

of Millon's reagent prepared as follows: Dissolve 20 g of c. p. mercury in 40 g of concentrated c. p.

nitric acid and dilute the solution to 180 cc with distilled water. Upon heating the presence of casein

is indicated by the development of a red coloration. (This reaction is dependent on the presence of tyrosine which occurs in casein to the extent of approximately 5 per cent, but has been reported

only in rare instances as occurring in animal glue

and gelatine, and then only in doubtful traces.) QUALITATIVE DETERMINATION OF ROSIN IN PAPER A positive result obtained by both of the following

methods shall be regarded as conclusive evidence of the presence of rosin in paper.

I. Lieberman-Storch method. Place 1 g of paper cut in small pieces in a clean, dry test tube. Add 5 cc of c. p. acetic anyhdride and

boil down to about 1 cc. (The fumes of anhydride

are very irritating and should be burned as they

leave the test tube.) Pour the liquid residue into a clean, dry porcelain crucible and cool to room

temperature. If any waxy particles separate, they

should be filtered off. Add carefully, down the

side of the crucible, one drop of concentrated sul- phuric acid. A fugitive rose-violet coloration formed

when the acid meets the anhydride indicates rosin.

II. Raspail method. Place the paper on a glass or porcelain plate and

apply a drip of strong solution of sugar. After a

few moments remove the excess strong solution with filter paper. Add a drop of concentrated

sulphuric acid to the sugar on the paper. A rasp- berry-red coloration indicates the presence of rosin. QUALITATIVE DETERMINATION OF NITROGENOUS

PROTEINACEOUS MATERIALS IN PAPER A positive result obtained by the following method

shall be regarded as conclusive evidence of the

presence of nitrogenous (proteinaceous) materials,

such as glue and casein, in paper.

I. Ammonium molybdate method.

Boil 0.5 g of paper for several minutes with 10 cc

of a 1 per cent solution of caustic soda. (Caustic

soda is necessary, as the nitrogenous materials may

have been made insoluble in water by hardening treatment with formaldehyde or other agents.)

Filter off the aqueous extract and after cooling add

a suitable indicator, such as phenolphalein, then

exactly neutralize with hydrochloric acid. Prepare

Schmidt's reagent by dissolving 3 g of c. p. ammonium molybdate in 250 cc of distilled water and adding 25 cc of c. p. nitric acid of 1.2 specific gravity.

(This reagent is not permanent and should be made

freshly at frequent intervals.) Add one volume of the reagent to two volumes of the aqueous extract. A white precipitate shows the presence of nitrogen- ous materials derived from proteins.

II. Additional information. References, Carson, F. T., Detection of animal

size in surface sized papers, Paper Trade Journal,

April 10, 1924. Griffin, R. C, Technical methods

of analysis. Chem. Zeitung, vol. 36, p. 313 (1912);

Farber-Zeitung, vol. 24, p. 97 (1913); Schmidt.

Note—This test is very delicate. If no precipitate or only a

slight precipitate is obtained there can be no appreciable amount of proteinaceous materials present. QUANTITATIVE DETERMINATION OF PROTEINACEOUS NITROGEN IN PAPER

J. Apparatus.

A Kjeldahl digestion and distillation apparatus is required for this determination. A 500 cc Kjeldahl

flask is a suitable size. The balance used shall be

sensitive to 1 mg.

77. Specimen.

The specimen shall consist of from 3 to 5 g of air- dry paper obtained by cutting small strips from

321
470.3 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

different portions of the test sample, in such a way

as to be representative of it. The strips shall be

cut into pieces approximately 6 mm (0.25 inch) square.

III. Method. The Gunning method is used. Place the speci- men, weighted to an accuracy of 1 mg in theKjeldahl

flask and add 10 g of powder anhydrous sodium

sulphate, a small crystal of copper sulphate (about

0.2 g), and 25 cc of concentrated sulphuric acid. Heat the flask gently until frothing has ceased and

then digest with increasing temperature until oxidation is complete; that is, for a short time after the mixture becomes clear and colorless or nearly so. Cool and dilute with about 200 cc of distilled water. Add about 2 cc of liquid petrolatum to prevent

foaming and about 2 g of 30-mesh granulated zinc to prevent bumping during the distillation. Add a saturated solution of sodium hydroxide to the contents of the flask in such amount (usually 75 cc) that there is an excess of 5 cc of the saturated sodium hydroxide solution present. This solution must be poured carefully down the side of the flask so that it does not mix with the acid contents. The total volume of the solution should be about

400 cc. Immediately connect the flask to a con- denser having its delivery tube just beneath the sur- face of a known amount of AT/10 sulphuric acid diluted to 100 cc (30 cc of N/10 acid is usually

sufficient). Mix the contents of the Kjeldahl flask by shaking the flask, then heat it gradually and

distill the contents for about 45 minutes, taking

care to avoid spurting.

The total volume of the distillate should be about

200 cc. Titrate the contents of the receiver flask with N/10 alkali, using methyl red indicator. The

difference between the cc of N/10 alkali used and

the cc of iV/10 sulphuric acid added to the receiver

flask is the cc of N

/

10 acid equivalent to the nitrogen

present. This number multiplied by 0.014 is the

nitrogen found. The percentage results of dupli- cate determinations of nitrogen shall agree within

0.02. A blank determination shall be made on all reagents used and any nitrogen found subtracted. IV. Report.

The amount of nitrogen shall be expressed as a

percentage of the air-dry paper to the nearest 0.01 per cent. If it is desired to report the per cent of glue or of casein present, it shall be calculated by

multiplying the per cent of nitrogen found by 5.6 and 6.3, respectively. Note.—As these factors vary with different kinds and grades of material they should be determined whenever the nitrogenous

material is available, and whenever possible the nitrogen in the paper

before addition of the nitrogenous material should be determined and subtracted from the total nitrogen found. QUAIITATIVE DETERMINATION OF STARCH IN PAPER A positive result obtained by the following

method shall be regarded as conclusive evidence of the presence of starch in paper:

Boil 0.5 g of paper for several minutes with 10 cc

of water. Filter off the extract and cool it. Add

one drop of a 0.01 normal solution of iodine. A

blue coloration indicates starch. If only a faint

violet coloration is obtained, this should be disre- garded, as nonstarch constituents of paper sometimes give such reaction.

/. Apparatus.

A reflux condenser is necessary for this test. The

balance used for weighing shall be sensitive to 1 mg.

II. Specimen.

The specimen shall consist of not less than 5 g of air-dry paper obtained by cutting small strips from

different portions of the test sample in such a way

as to be representative of it. The strips shall be cut

into small pieces about 6 mm (0.25-inch) square.

III. Reagents.

Fehling's solution.—(a) 69.3 g of crystallized copper sulphate are dissolved in water and the solution diluted to 1,000 cc; (6) 346 g of Rochelle salt and

120 g of sodium hydroxide are dissolved in water and

the solution diluted to 1,000 cc. Allow to stand two days and filter. Solutions (a) and (6) are kept

separate and equal volumes of them mixed just before use. Indicator solutions.—A 10 per cent solution of potassium ferrocyanide and a 50 per cent solution

of acetic acid are used. IV. Method.

Place the weighed specimen of paper in a 500 cc

flask; add 200 cc of water and 5 cc of glacial acetic

acid. Connect the flask to a reflux condenser and

boil the contents vigorously for 13^ hours. Pour

the contents of the flask on the perforated plate of a Buchner funnel and wash the pulp on the plate with

50 cc of hot water using suction. Add 15 cc of 37

per cent hydrochloric acid to filtrate and boil it for 30 minutes, allowing the volume to decrease by

evaporating to about 200 cc. Neutralize the hot

solution by adding solid sodium carbonate until effervescence ceases. Cool to room temperature

and adjust to a measured volume by means of a

volumetric flask. Titrate this solution into a measured quantity of Fehling's solution diluted to 25 cc. After each addition of the titrating solution,

boil the reaction mixture for one minute. The end

point is determined on a spot plate by adding a drop of the mixture to a mixture of one drop each

of the ferrocyanide and acetic acid solutions, and is that point at which no immediate color is produced on the plate. The cc of Fehling's solution used

multiplied by 0.005 is the grams of starch equivalent

to the volume of the titrating sugar solution used. The results of duplicate determinations of starch

shall agree within 0.05 per cent of the total per- centage found. As the factor for converting cc of Fehling's solution to grams of starch varies with

different kinds and grades of starch, when the starch used in the paper is available, its exact factor should be determined by the following procedure:

Dry the starch at 100 to 105° C. (212 to 221° F.) for three hours. Weigh 0.05 g and boil with about

190 cc of a 4 per cent hydrochloric acid solution for 30 minutes. Neutralize with solid sodium carbonate,

cool, adjust to a definite volume and titrate a 322
PAPER 470.3

definite volume of Fehling's solution as described above.

V. Report. The amount of starch shall be reported as a

percentage of the air-dry paper to the nearest 0.01 per cent. VI. Additional information. Quantitative estimation of starch in paper, V. Voorhees and O. Kamm, Paper, Vol. 24, folio page

1091, August 27, 1919.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

December 9, 1926. Standard methods of inspection

and tests of paper used by the testing section

of the U. S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D. C. Sampling.

Not less than three rolls, cases, or bundles of a

delivery will be sampled for testing. If a delivery

consists of more than 30 units not less than 10 per

cent will be sampled, except when a delivery consists

of more than 100 units, in which event at least 10

units will be sampled.

Before rejection of any delivery one or, if necessary, two additional samples will be taken in the same manner, preferably from other units of the shipment, and tested. Testing instruments.

All testing instruments are of standard types, all gauges and measuring devices being tested at

regular intervals for accuracy. Information will be

furnished upon request as to the approved types of standard testing instruments used by the Govern- ment Printing Office upon which the requirements

of these specifications are based for determining

thickness, bursting strength, and folding endurance.

Atmospheric testing conditions. All physical tests are made under uniform temperature of 70 to 75° F. and 50 per cent relative humidity conditions. Samples are exposed in the

testing room, suspended from wires for 12 hours

previous to testing. Fiber analysis.

The following method is used in the determination

of stock: Apparatus.—The compound microscope used is equipped to give magnifications of 50 diameters or more, and is fitted with a mechanical stage. Preparation of sample.—Ten pieces, each about

5 mm square, are cut from 10 sheets of the delivery

sample. These pieces are placed in a 50 or 100 cc beaker or Erlenmeyer flask with approximately

20 cc of 2 per cent solution of potassium hydroxide, then boiled, and washed thoroughly with water. The sample is then rolled into a ball and worked

between the fingers to loosen the fibers. This is best done by rolling between the index finger and

thumb. The ball of paper is then placed in a test tube approximately 15 by 125 mm and the tube

filled about three-fourths full of water and shaken

thoroughly until the fibers are completely separated. After shaking, about 5 cc of the thoroughly mixed

pulp is transferred to another test tube, the tube

being filled to within about three-fourths with water and shaken well. As small a specimen as can be

conveniently handled is removed with needles or

fine forceps, placed on glass slide and the water removed by means of hard filter or blotting paper.

Stains for identification and determination of fiber content.—Full details relative to the various stains

for use in fiber analysis will be found in "Paper

Testing Methods," issued by the Techincal Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry, and in text- books dealing with paper technology.

Herzberg stain.—For distinguishing rag, chemical

wood (coniferous and deciduous) , ground wood, and

manila or jute fiber. Lofton-Merritt stain.—For distinguishing unbleached sulphite and unbleached sulphate fiber. C. G. Bright''s stain.—For distinguishing bleached and unbleached fiber. Method.—The slide is prepared by removing

several specimens of pulp from the test tube as described under preparation of sample and stained

in accordance with details of the respective methods

outlined under stains. The prepared slide is examined by means of the microscope, the slide being

moved systematically so that the whole slide is covered. The percentage fiber determination is made only by thoroughly trained analysts familiar with the fiber analysis of paper. The determination

of the percentage of pulp is made by the count method and at least 300 fibers counted. The

determined percentage of each kind of fiber is reported on the basis of 100 per cent fiber. Weight.

The weight is determined by cutting the samples

to convenient size, accurately measuring and recording the exact size. Standard types of paper- weighing scales are used, graduated in 34 pounds,

accurately calibrated, which indicate the equivalent

weight in pounds of 500 sheets. Approximately

20 to 40 sheets, 10 by 10 inches, of each delivery

sample are weighed.

Thickness. The thickness of paper is determined by use of an

approved standard type of paper micrometer

having a foot 0.5 inch in diameter. Thickness is measured at several places on each of 10 sheets of the sample and the average of all measurements

recorded as average thickness. Bursting strength. The bursting strength is determined with an

approved standard type of tester by which the paper

is firmly clamped against a rubber diaphragm

through which the pressure is applied to a circular area of approximately 1 square inch. The pressure required to burst the paper is registered on an

accurate gauge, the readings of which are designated

as points. The bursting strength is ascertained by

taking the average of not less than 20 tests. Before a delivery of paper is rejected not less than 40 tests are made.

323
470.3 STANDAKDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Folding endurance. Folding endurance is determined with an approved

standard type of folding tester, using a strip 15 mm

in width and a tension of 1,000 g. Folding endur- ance is ascertained by taking the average of not less than 10 tests in each direction. Before a delivery

of paper is rejected not less than 20 tests are made

in each direction. Ash.Ash is determined by using 2 g of the test sample

and burning in a porcelain or nickel crucible. The

ash after being cooled in desiccator is weighed and

percentage of ash calculated. Absorption.

The absorption of blotting paper is determined by

placing a 4 by 4 inch piece of the paper, with wire

side of sheet up, slightly dished to insure that the ink will remain in one pool, on top of a tumbler and

then 1 cc of the standard ink flowed on to the center

of the paper from a 1 cc pipette, delivering in 3 to 6 seconds, and held 3^ inch above the paper. The

formula for the standard ink is as follows: Grams

Tannic acid 23.

Gallic acid 7. 7 Ferrous sulphate 30.0 Dilute hydrochloric acid (U. S. P.) 25.0 Phenol 1.0 Soluble blue, S. & J. No. 478 2. 2 Water to make a volume of 1,000 cubic centimeters at 15.6° C. The average time, beginning when the ink starts to flow from the pipette, required for the complete

absorption of the ink is the absorption time of the

paper. For details, especially as to preparation of standard ink, see Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, 10, page 44 (1918). Animal glue sizing.

The following methods are used for qualitative

and quantitative determination of animal glue

sizing:

Qualitative test.—Animal glue sizing is determined

qualitatively by placing 5 g of the paper to be tested

in a 100 cc beaker with approximately 25 cc of distilled water and heating to boiling. The liquid is then poured off into a test tube, cooled, and 3 to 5 drops of tannic acid (2 per cent solution) added. If a cloudiness or a precipitate is obtained which upon

heating forms a horny mass that adheres to the sides

of the test tube, or the liquid does not become clear, the presence of glue or of casein is indicated.

Quantitative determination.—Animal glue sizing is determined quantitatively by treating 3 to 5 g of the sample of paper by the Kjeldahl method to de- termine the amount of nitrogen present. The per- centage of nitrogen multiplied by 5.6 will give the percentage of glue in the paper. 471. ABSORBENT PAPER.

471.1 BLOTTING PAPER.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

127a, United States Government master specification for 25 per cent rag blotting paper, white and

colored, revised August 8, 1925. Same as specification for white and colored blot, ting paper (F. S. B. No. 327) except for types and

detailed requirements, which are as follows:

I. Types.

This specification is for the purchase of 25 per

cent rag blotting paper, white, salmon, and buff, weighing 80 pounds per ream, 19 by 24 inches, 500

sheets; flat. IV. Detail requirements.

(Same as those of the Joint Committee on Printing, of the U. S. Congress.) Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

327, United States Government master specifica- tion for white and colored blotting paper, September*

16, 1925.

/. Types.

This specification is for the purchase of blotting paper, white, salmon, and buff, weighing 80 pounds

per ream, 19 by 24 inches, 500 sheets; flat. 77. Material and workmanship.

See Detail requirements.

III. General requirements.

Samples.—Ten sheets 8 by 10^ inches, to show

color and finish, shall be submitted with bid. IV. Detail requirements.

(Same as those of the Joint Committee on Printing, of the U. S. Congress.) V. Method of inspection and tests.

1, Absorption.—Same as method of the Joint Committee on Printing of the U. S. Congress.

(See 470.3.)

2. All tests shall be made in accordance with

United States Government general specification for paper (F. S. B. No. 394), in effect on date of proposal. See No. 470.3. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

128a, United States Government master specifica- tion for desk blotting paper, colored, revised August

8, 1925.

I. Type.

This specification is for the purchase of desk

blotting paper, moss green, blue, and buff, weighing

100 pounds per ream, 19 by 24 inches, 500 sheets;

flat. II. Material and workmanship.

See Detail requirements.

III. General requirements.

Samples.—Ten sheets 8 by 10J^ inches, to show

color and finish, must be submitted with bid. IV. Detail requirements.

(Same as those of the Joint Committee on Printing

of the U. S. Congress.) V. Method of inspection and tests. See General specifications, Section VIII, below. VI. Packing and marking.

li Packing.—Shall be in wrapped }/% ream bundles (250 sheets). 324
PAPER 472.0

2. Marking.—Each package shall be marked to show name, color, and quantity of material, specification or stock number, and name of contractor. VII. Additional information. No details specified. VIII. General specifications.

United States Government general specification for paper (F. S. B. No. 394) in effect on date of proposal,

shall form part of this specification. See No. 470.3. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for blotting paper, white and colored,

December 9, 1926, Stock: Free from ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 25 per cent. Weight: 19 by 24, 1,000 lbs— 160

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 15 Absorption (1 cc standard ink) : Not to exceed 80

seconds.

Finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard

sample.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 25 per cent rag blotting paper, white and colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 25 per cent rag; the remainder

free from ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 10 per cent. Weight: 19 by 24, 1,000 lbs.. 160

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 18 Absorption (1 cc standard ink) : Not to exceed 80

seconds.

Finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard

sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on

specification for desk blotting paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 25 per cent. Weight: 19 by 24, 1,000 lbs. Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 25

Finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard

sample, be well rolled, and sufficiently firm not to rub off readily.

471.2 FILTER PAPER.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

471.3 TOWELINGS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472. BOARDS.

472.0 GENERAL ITEMS.

Paperboard Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 44, box-board thicknesses, effective October 1, 1925. In accordance with the unanimous action on July

29, 1925, of the general conference of representatives

Printing,

colored,

200

of manufacturers, distributers, and users of box

board, the United States Department of Commerce,

through the National Bureau of Standards, recom- mends that a simplified list of thickness be established, as follows: Gauge list No. 1 —Nonbending boards

[Plain straw and plain chip boards, solid jute, dry finish; filled wood

pulp, filled news board, single news vat-lined chip, and single white vat-lined chip]

Mr* 1 fin iNO. o nn- Number of 25 by ish, high No. 2 fin- ish, low No. 4 fin- 40 inch sheets per sheetage ish, me- sheetage ish, extra 50-pound bundle and dium and smooth

rough i smooth i

772 cA Inch Inch Inch

35 0. 064 0. 060 0. 057 0. 051 40 .056 .053 .050 .045 45 .050 .047 .045 .040

50 .045 .042 .040 .036

55 .041 .038 .036 .033 60 .038 .035 .033 .030 65 .035 .032 .030 .028

70 .032 .030 .028 .025

75 .030 .028 .027 .024

80 .028 .026 .025 .023 85 .026 .024 .023 .022

90 .025 .023 .022 .020

95-.. .024 .022 .021 .019

100 .022 .020 .019 .018

110 .020 .019 .018 .017

120 .018 .017 .016 .015

i The term "sheetage" signifies the relation of the area of a given

caliper of box board to its weight. For example, when the board is run through many calendar rolls it acquires a high finish and has more body but less surface area or less "sheetage" per pound. Gauge list No. 2

[Bending boards, cracker shell board, plain shell board, colored one

side; colored box board, chip back; colored box board, chip center, news back; any combination board with solid news back; any

combination board with solid wood back; single manila lined chip; bleached manila lined, chip center, news back; bleached manila

lined chip; bleached manila lined, chip center, news back; double manila lined chip, and manila colored shell; colored suit box board, chip back; colored suit box board, chip center, news back; mist

colored suit box board, chip back; mist colored suit box bosrd, chip

center, news back; test jute; test chip board; jutelined chip board;

jute lined chip board, news back; imitation jute; filled jute (chip

center, solid jute bending)]

Number of 25 by

40 inch sheets per 50-pound bundle

No. 1 fin- ish, high

sheetage and

rough

No. 2 fin- ish, me- dium

No. 3 fin- ish, low

sheetage and

smooth

No. 4 fin- ish, extra smooth

40-. _ Inch

0. 050 Inch

0. 047 Inch

0.045 Inch

0.043

45 — .045 .043 .041 .038 50.- .040 .038 .036 .034

55 .037 .035 .033 .031 60 - .034 .032 .030 .028 65 .031 .030 .028 .026 70 .029 .028 .026 .024

75 .027 .026 .024 .023 80 .025 .024 .023 .021 85-- _ . .024 .023 .022 .020

90 .023 .022 .020 .019

95 .022 .020 .019 .018

100 .020 .019 .018 .017

105 .019 .018 .017 .016 110 .018 .017 .016 .015 120 .017 .016 .015 .014

325
472.0 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Gauge list No. 3

[Solid news and solid wood pulp board]

Number of 25 by

40 inch sheets per 50-pound bundle

No. 1 fin- ish, high

sheetage rough

No. 2 fin- ish, me- dium

No. 3 fin- ish, low

sheetage smooth

No. 4 fin- ish, extra smooth

Inch Inch Inch Inch

40 0. 063 0. 060 0. 055 0. 050 45 .056 .054 .050 .045 50 .050 .048 .044 .040

55 _ .046 .044 .040 .036

60. . .042 .040 .037 .033

65 .039 .037 .034 .031 70 .036 .034 .031 .029

75 — . 033 . 032 . 029 . 027

80 .031 .030 .027 .025

85 .029 .028 .026 .023 90 _ .028 .026 .024 .022

95 .026 .025 .023 .021 100 .025 .024 .022 .020

110 .022 .021 .020 .019

120 .021 .020 .019 .018 Gauge list No. 4

[Pasted chip board] Number of 25 by 40 inch

sheets per 50-pound bundle No 1 finish, medium No 2 finish, low sheetage and smooth

10.. Inch

0.212

. 142 .106

.085 .070 .060

Inch

0.200

. 133 .100

.080

.067 .057

1520. 25 _ 30...

35..

No. 3 finish, extra smooth

Inch

0. 180 .120

.090

.072

.060

.051 Gauge List No. 5

[Container board] Number of 25 by 40 inch

sheets per 50-pound bundle No. 3 finish Minimum

test Weight

1,000 square

feet Inch Pounds Pounds

15 0.120 300 480

18.. - .100 275 420

23. .080 200 340 29 - .060 175 260 Furnished in 3, 4, or 5 ply pasted and conforms

to railway and express requirement.

Gauge list No. 6 and ream weight table

[Patent coated: Solid manila back and solid manila board, news

back, news center manila back, chip back, blue or colored back] Weight per 500 sheets Caliper thickness of individual

sheets in inches

24 by 36 inches (864 square

inches)

28 by 44

inches(l,232 square

inches)

25 by 40 inches (1,000 square

inches) Pounds

154 Pounds

220 Pounds

178

168 240 194

182 260 210. 60

189 270 218. 75

195 278 225. 69 208 297 240. 70

0. 018 , 230 328 266. 20 245 350 283. 56

0. 022— 264 377 305. 55

0. 024 — - 288 412 333. 33

0. 026 312 445 361. 10

0. 028 336 480 388. 88

0. 030 360 513 416. 65

0. 032 384 544 444. 48

0. 034 — 408 578 472. 26 460 660 532. 40

Gauge list No. 7 and ream weight table

[Patent coated, two sides]

Caliper thickness of individual sheets

in inches

0.011

0.012

0. 013 0.014

0. 015

0. 016

0. 018

0. 020

0. 022

0. 024

0. 026

0. 028

0. 030

Weight per 500 sheets

24 by 36

inches (864 square

inches)

Pounds

159

174

188 196 202

216 239

255

275

300

325 350

375

25 by 40 inches (1,000 square

inches)

Pounds

184. 02

201.38

217. 59 226.85

233. 79 250

276. 62

295. 13 318.28

347. 22

375.44

404. 32 433.20

Gauge list No. 8 and ream weight table [Double manila wood pulp filled board]

Caliper thickness of individual

sheets in inches

0. 015

0. 016

0. 018

0. 020

0. 022

0. 024

0. 026

0. 028

0. 030

Weight per 500 sheets

24 by 36 inches (864 square

inches) Pounds

180 192 216

230

244

264 286

308

315

28 bv 44 inches (1,232 square

inches) Pounds

256

273 307

327 348

376

408

439 449

25 by 40 inches (1,000 square

inches) Pounds

207.8

221.6 249.2

265.4

282.5 305.2

331.2

356.3 364.4

Rules for figuring weight of odd sizes. Grades under gauge lists 6, 7, and 8. (1) Use gauge list covering the kind of material wanted. (2) In column 1 find the thickness wanted;

in the last column find its weight (per 1,000 square

inches). (3) Multiply this weight by the area of the odd size wanted. (4) Move decimal point to

left three places to obtain weight.

Example: Wanted double manila wood pulp filled board 25 by 20 inches (0.030 inch thick). (1) Use

gauge list No. 8. (2) Column 1, last line gives thickness 0.030; last column, last line gives weight

364.4 pounds (per 1,000 square inches) . (3) 364.4

(25X20 =500) = 182,200.0. (4) Moving decimal

point 3 places to left = 182.2 =weight in pounds of odd size desired. Paperboard Industries Association, paperboard

standards, revised January 20, 1927. DEFINITIONS

1. Basis of regular sizes.

(a) Patent coated or manila board: 24 by 36

inches, containing 864 square inches.

(b) All other grades of board: 25 by 40 inches,

containing 1,000 square inches. These regular sizes are used as bases for all computations.

326
PAPER 472.0

2. Standard package.

A standard package of patent coated or solid manila board is a ream of 500 sheets. These grades are sometimes packed, for convenience, in fractions or multiples of a ream, depending

upon the size of the sheet.

3. Bundle. A bundle is a package containing 50 pounds of box board. The weight of board in a "bundle'

does not vary.

4. Regular number.

The number or regular number corresponds to the number of standard-sized sheets (25 by 40) of box

board required to make a bundle of 50 pounds.

5. To determine count. To determine the count or number of odd-sized

sheets in a bundle proceed as follows:

(1) Knowing the kind, finish, and caliper of board

desired, ascertain from the proper gauge list the

regular number of such board.

(2) Divide the number of square inches in a bundle of such regular-sized board by the number of square inches in the odd-sized sheet which is desired,

and the result is the count or number of odd-sized

sheets in a bundle. Thus, a purchaser desiring to order plain chip

board in sheets 20 by 30 inches, No. 2 finish, and

0.060-inch caliper, refers to gauge list No. 1, which

shows that the regular number of this board is 35. The number of square inches in a bundle of such regular-sized board is 35,000. A sheet of 20 by 30 board

contains 600 square inches; 35,000 divided by 600

equals 58.3. It follows that a standard bundle will contain approximately 58 sheets of the odd size in question.

6. To determine number. Where the count or number of odd-sized sheets

in a bundle is known, and it is desired to ascertain the number of regular-sized sheets in a similar package, proceed as follows:

(1) Compute the number of square inches in the odd-sized sheet;

(2) Multiply the result by the count or number

of odd-sized sheets in a bundle;

(3) Divide by the number of square inches in the regular sized sheet; and

(4) The result is the number of regular-sized

sheets in a bundle. Thus

(a) An odd-sized sheet 20 by 30 inches contains 600 square inches.

(6) If there are 58 of such sheets to a bundle, 600 multiplied by 58 equals approximately 35,000,

which represents the total number of square inches

in the bundle.

(c) 35,00Q divided by 1,000 (the number of square

inches in a regular-sized sheet) equals 35, which represents the number of regular-sized sheets in a bundle.

7. Basis of go,uge lists. In gauge lists 1 to 5, inclusive, the numbers in the first column express the number of sheets of regular size contained in a bundle of 50 pounds.

Thus, on gauge list No. 1, No. 35 board means

board, 35 regular sheets of which will weigh 50 pounds. The figures in the remaining columns

(except the last two columns of list No. 5) represent

decimals of an inch, and express the thickness of the various numbers of board finished according

to the several methods indicated. Thus, on gauge list No. 1, one sheet of board No.

35, No. 1 finish, has a thickness of 0.064 inch. The

same board, No. 2 finish, has a thickness of 0.060

inch. In gauge lists Nos. 6, 7, and 8 the figures in the

first column represent decimals of an inch, and

express the thickness of the various types of board. The remaining columns represent the ream weight

in pounds of 500 sheets of the several sizes indicated. These gauge lists are used exclusively for patent

coated, solid manila, patent coated two sides, and

double manila wood pulp filled boards. These grades are usually furnished wrapped in ream or half-ream bundles. Gauge lists Nos. 1 to 8, inclusive, are the simplified thicknesses as given in Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 44, above.

TEST CONTAINER BOARD STANDARDS

1. General.

(a) All rolls to be wound tight and true.

(6) All breaks or splices are to be flagged.

(c) Rolls are to be furnished with or without cores, as agreed upon between buyer and seller.

(d) Minimum order.—Not less than 10 tons of a

grade and not less than 1 ton of a size. Less quantities in special sizes are subject to extra charges.

2. Trim of machine.

Specifications must come within a minimum of 5 per cent of the maximum trim of the machine.

3. Bursting strength test. (a) One sample, 12 inches square, shall be taken

from the second or third ply of each roll in the car.

(6) Six tests (three each way), shall be made on

each sample.

(c) All samples on which not more than one test

is below the minimum specified in the car, shall constitute satisfactory delivery.

4. Moisture. Moisture shall not exceed 10 per cent nor be less than 6 per cent.

5. Bending qualities. A board to be considered a "bender," must fold

flat under pressure of the fingers, twice each way

(forward and back) in the same crease, both with

and across the grain without breaking the surface

fibers.

6. Waterproofing.

A board to be considered "waterproof" must,

when folded into tray form and suspended, hold water for a period of three hours without showing

moisture on the opposite surface, except where sand

holes appear. 52688°—27 22 327
472.0 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

7. Caliper.

A variation of 0.001 inch (1 point) either way is allowable.

8. Samples for weight basis. Three samples from each roll in the car must be

taken to secure the average. (The average weight

of all samples taken from the car must not exceed

the weight basis.)

9. Weight basis—test boards. The average weight of rolls in a car shall not

exceed the maximum weight basis. However, a variation of 5 per cent in weight of individual rolls is permitted.

The weight bases are as follows: Maximum weight per 1,000 square feet

Caliper (inch) Jute Cylinder

kraft Fourdrinier kraft

0.016.. Pounds7078

95

120

Pounds

56

6380

100

Pounds

48

0.018

0.023 0.030...

10. Weight basis of nontest boards. Nontest boards are subject to the same general

basis of weight as applies on test boards. The

weight bases are as follows:

Caliper and description Maximum

weight per

1,000 square

feet

0.009 chip board Pounds

3462

38

34

25

0.016 chip board

0.009 strawboard

0.009 chestnut pulpboard

0.009 pine wood fiber board

All other matters are details between buyer and

seller to be agreed upon mutually at the time the

order is placed. Nothing in these specifications

shall be understood to prevent individual agree- ments between buyer and seller contrary to these

rules. 472.1 COMBINATION (Nonhomogeneous,

One Operation).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.11 Chip (Jute Lined, Manila Lined, News

Vat Lined).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.12 Manila Board (Clay Coated, Patent

Coated).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.13 News Board (Manila Lined, Patent

Coated).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.14 Pulp Board.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.15 Strawboard (Jute Lined, Manila

Lined, Vat Lined).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.2 PASTED (Two Operations).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.21 Pasted Chip.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.22 Sheet-lined Chip.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.23 Sheet-lined Straw.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.24 Wall Board.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.3 SOLID (Homogeneous, One Operation).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.31 Chip (Plain, Tack Board, Test).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.32 Cloth Board (Binders, Tar).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.33 Friction Board.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.34 Jute Board.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for jute tag board, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent manila and (or) jute pulp; the remainder coniferous chemical

wood pulp.

Weight: 22^ by 28^, l,000__lbs__ 200 240 280

Bursting strength : Average not less than pts__ 100 120 140

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

472.35 Leather Board.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.36 Pressboard.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for pressboard, colored, December 9, 1926. Bursting strength: Average not

less than pts__ 80 250

Thickness inch__ 0. 0140 0. 0300

Texture and surface: Must be close in texture, of uniform thickness, with hard and smooth surfaces

free from irregularities and blisters. Color: Deliveries must match in color the sample

furnished with order. 472.37 Pulp Board.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.38 Strawboard.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

328
PAPER

472.9 MISCELLANEOUS BOARDS.

472.91 Fish Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.92 Fuller Board.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.93 Fiber Board.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

472.94 Millboard.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

473. BUILDING PAPER.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

473.1 ASBESTOS PAPER.

(Mineral product.)

473.2 FELTS (Carpet Lining, Deadening,

Saturating).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

473.3 THERMAL INSULATING PAPER AND

FIBER.

American Railway Association, Mechanical Division, recommended specifications for insulation paper for refrigerator cars, 1917. Insulation paper shall be made of good quality

fibrous material, thoroughly saturated with an as- phaltum bitumen. It shall be furnished in either of two weights, known as 90-pound or 110-pound paper.

Physical properties and tests before exposure. Porosity test.—A test sample 1 foot square shall not show a leakage of more than 8 ounces of water when subjected for two hours to a water column of 55 inches at 60 to 80° F. Mullen test.—The strength of a test sample, as determined by the standard "Mullen" test, made

at a temperature of 70° F., and with load applied at the rate of 3 to 4 pounds per second, shall be as fol- lows: 90-pound paper, not less than 55 pounds;

110-pound paper, not less than 70 pounds.

Bending test.—Paper shall be so pliable, after being cooled in water at a temperature of 32 to 35° F., and while at this temperature, that it may be bent

flat upon itself without breaking. Ash.—The total amount, by combustion of a test sample, of inorganic matter or ash shall not be more

than 6 per cent of the original weight.

Physical properties and tests after exposure. Mullen test.—The strength of a test sample, as determined by the standard "Mullen" test, made

at a temperature of 70° F., shall not be affected more than 10 per cent of the original by exposure to a temperature of 150° F., or to air saturated with water vapor at room temperature for seven days.

Bending test.—After exposure to a temperature of 150° F., or to air saturated with water vapor at room temperature for seven days, paper shall be so

pliable at temperature of 32 to 35° F., and while

at this temperature, that it can be bent flat upon

itself without breaking.

Drying and absorption.—The original weight

shall not decrease more than 3 per cent by exposure |

474.12

to a temperature of 150° F., nor increase more than

10 per cent by exposure to air saturated with water vapor at room temperature for seven days.

Sampling.—The inspector shall examine and

weigh 5 per cent of the paper in each lot offered, and

select one sample from each lot of 200 rolls or frac- tion thereof. Not more than one sample shall be

taken from any one roll. Each sample shall have

the lot number stenciled on it. Permissible variations. Weight.—The average weight of the roll shall correspond within 1 per cent of the weight as indi- cated by test sample, or the respective weights per

1,000 square feet shall not be less than 85 or 104 pounds for the two weights of paper specified above.

Inspection and rejection.

Inspection.—(a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry, at all time while work on the contract of the purchaser is being per- formed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works

which concern the manufacture of the material

ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, free of charge, all reasonable facilities and nec- essary assistance to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with these specifications. Tests and inspection at the place of manufacture shall be made prior to shipment.

(&) The purchaser may make the tests to govern

the acceptance or rejection of the material in his own

laboratory or elsewhere. Such tests shall be made

at the expense of the purchaser.

Rejection.—(a) Material represented by samples

which fail to conform to the requirements of these

specifications will be rejected.

(&) Material which, subsequent to test and inspection at the factory or elsewhere and its acceptance,

shows defect or imperfections will be rejected and

shall be replaced by the manufacturer.

Rehearing.—Samples tested in accordance with

these specifications, which represent rejected material, shall be held for fourteen days from date of

test report. 473.4 SHEATHING (Waterproof, White

Fiber).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

474. CARDBOARD.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

474.1 BLANKS.

474.11 Nonpasted Blanks.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for railroad board, white and colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: Facing sheets free from ground-wood pulp.

Ply 4 8 14 Thickness inch__ 0.0180 0.0300 0.0480

Coating: Facing sheets must be coated. Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

474.12 Pasted Blanks.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

329
474.2 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

182 230 280 362

71 90 109 142

474.2 INDEX BRISTOLS.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for sulphite index, white and colored,

single-ply paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent bleached coniferous chemical

wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 5 per cent. Weight: 223^ by 28^,

1,000 lbs__ 182 230 280 362

Bursting strength: Average

not less than pts— 60 75 91 118 Writing and erasure: Must have good writing and

erasive qualities. Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample in finish and match in color the sample furnished with order. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag index, white and

colored, single-ply paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent for white and 3 per

cent for colored Weight: 223^ by 28^,

1,000 lbs- Bursting strength: Average

not less than pts_

Writing and erasure: Must have good writing and

erasive qualities. Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample in finish and match in color the sample furnished with order. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee

specification for 100 per cent rag

single-ply, tub-sized, air-dried paper,

1926. Stock: 100 per cent rag. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent. Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 223^ by 283^, 1,000. lbs__

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__

Thickness: Not less than 0.0090 inch, nor more

than 0.0100 inch. Writing and erasure: Must have good writing and

erasive qualities.

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

474.3 MILL BRISTOLS (Folders, Tags, etc.).

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for manila board, December 9, 1926. Weight: 22 by 28, 1,000 lbs__ 232 268 392

Bursting strength: Average not

less than pts__ 60 68 100

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for wood bristol board, colored, De- cember 9, 1926. Weight: 22^ by 283^, 1,000 lbs__ 200

on Printing,

white index,

December 9,

206

100

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts._ 50

Thickness: Average .0110 Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample in finish and match in color the sample furnished with order. Surface: Must be suitable for writing on with either ink or pencil. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for U. S. postal card bristol board,

December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 5 per cent. Weight: 223^ by 283^, 1,000 lbs— 188 208

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 48 50

Thickness: (188 pound) Not less than 0.0080 inch nor more than 0.0090 inch, (208 pound) not less than 0.0090 inch nor more than 0.0100 inch. Color, finish, and formation: The paper must be

firm, snappy, and free from curl and flimsiness,

and match in color the standard sample. It shall be as clean and free from dirt, specks, fuzz, and

discoloration as the standard sample; and without

water finish, crushed spots, or calendar marks.

It must be suitably sized, uniformly run, calendered, and finished on both sides with a smooth,

even, firm, surface suitable for writing on with

either ink or pencil and for printing.

Moisture content: Shall be approximately 5 per cent. 474.4 WEDDING BRISTOLS.

nationally recognized specifications avail160 200 240 280

64

must

80 96

conform to 112 the

(No

able.) 474.5 TAG BOARDS.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for high-finish sulphite manila tag

board, December 9, 1926. Stock : 100 per cent coniferous chemical wood pulp.

Weight: 24 by 36, 1,000

lbsBursting strength: Average

not less than pts__ Color and finish: Deliveries standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for wood manila tag board, December

9, 1926. Weight: 22^ by 28*6, 1,000 lbs„ 150 180

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts— 32 40

Thickness: Average inch— 0. 012

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for calendered tag board, manila and

colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent coniferous chemical wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent. Weight: 223^ by 28^, 1,000

(approximately) lbs— 150

330
PAPER

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 50

Thickness : Not less than 0.0068 inch, nor more than

0.0077 inch, except lot No. 225. Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample and must be firm, snappy, and

free from curl or flimsiness. The board must be

uniformly run, free from pinholes, have a smooth, even surface on both sides, and be suitable for use on tabulating machines. Board must be run to

thickness, weight may be waived.

475. COVER PAPER, NEWS PAPER, AND

PRINTING PAPER.

475.1 COATED COVER PAPER.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for coated cover paper, colored,

December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 35 per cent. Weight: 20 by 26, 1,000 lbs__ 100

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 22

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample in finish and match in color the sample furnished with order. 475.2 PASTED COVER PAPER.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 475.3 UNCOATED COVER PAPER.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for sulphite machine-finish cover paper, colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 12 per cent. Weight: 20 by 26, 1,000 lbs _ 100

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 35

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample in finish and match in color the sample furnished with order.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 25 per cent rag machine-finish cover paper, colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 25 per cent rag; the remainder free from ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 12 per cent. Weight: 20 by 26, 1,000 lbs__ 100

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 35 Color and finish: Deliveries must match in color and finish (smooth or antique) the sample fur- nished with order.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag antique cover paper, colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder free from ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 12 per cent. Weight: 20 by 26, 1,000 lbs.. 100

475.6

Bursting strength: Average not less than

_--pts__ 40

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample in finish and match in color the the sample furnished with order. 475.4 HANGING PAPER (News).

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 475.5 NEWSPRINT.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specifications for standard newsprint paper, December 9, 1926. Weight: 24 by 36, 1,000 lbs.. 64

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 10

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

475.6 COATED PRINTING PAPER.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for single-coated book paper, December

9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 30 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs__ 140

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 18 Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

Coating and surface: Shall be suitable for printing

half tones of 150-line screen on both sides of the

sheet and must not flake, pick, lift, or pulverize.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for double-coated book paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 35 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs__ 140 160 Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 18 20

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

Coating and surface: Shall be suitable for printing

half tones of 200-line screen on both sides of the

sheet and must not flake, pick, lift, or pulverize.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag double-coated book paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 35 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs__ 140 160 Folding endurance: Average, each direction, not less than double folds. _ 15 15 Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 22 25

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

Coating and surface: Shall be suitable for printing

half tones of 200-line screen on both sides of the

sheet, and must not flake, pick, lift, or pulverize.

331
475.7 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

475.7 UNCOATED PRINTING PAPER.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 475.71 Bible Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 475.72 Book Paper.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for machine-finish book paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 12 per cent.

Weight: 25 by 38, l.OOO.lbs.. 70 80 100 120 140 Bursting strength: Average

not less than pts_. 11 12 15 19 22 Thickness: Average -.inch.. 0.0025 0.0030 0.0033 0.0040 C. 0050 Color, finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample in finish, formation, and opacity and match in color the sample furnished with order. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for machine-finish book end paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 10 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs__ 160

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 35

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

XJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for antique book paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 15 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs__ 100

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 12

Color, finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for lightweight machine-finish book

paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 15 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs.. 60 Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 10 Thickness: Average inch.. 0. 0025

Color, finish, formation, and opacitj^: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag light weight machinefinish book paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 15 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs... 60

Bursting strength: Average not less than__

pts___ 10

Thickness: Average inch 0. 0025

Color, finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag machine-finish book

paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 12 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs__ 80 90

Bursting strength: Average not

less than pts._ 14 16 Thickness: Average inch.. 0. 0035 0. 0040

Color, finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for supercalendered book paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 15 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs.. 90 100

Bursting strength: Average not

less than pts_. 12 14 Thickness: Average inch.. 0. 0025 0. 0030

Color, finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag supercalendered

book paper, December 9, 1926. 'Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 12 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1000 lbs.. 80 90

Bursting strength : Average not less than pts_. 14 16 Thickness: Average inch.. 0. 0025 0. 0030

Color, finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for half-tone book paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash : Not to exceed 20 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs.. 140

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 16 Thickness: Average inch.. 0. 0040

Color and finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for machine-finish lithograph paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 12 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs... 160

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 20

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample and be suitable for wet or dry process lithograph printing on both

sides of the sheet. 332
PAPER 475.75

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag supercalendered

lithograph paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 3 per cent. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs__ 160

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 35

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample, and be suitable for wet or dry process lithograph printing on both

sides of the sheet. 475.73 Coating Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 475.74 Mimeograph Paper.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

130a, United States Government master specifica- tion for mimeograph paper, revised August 8, 1925. Type.

This specification is for the purchase of softfinish, wove impression paper weighing 50 pounds

per ream 25 by 38 inches, 500 sheets. This paper

is suitable for general duplicating work by mimeograph or other stencils. Material and workmanship.

See detail requirements, Section IV, below.

General requirements.

Samples.—50 sheets 8 by 103^ inches, to show

color and finish, shall be submitted with bid. Detail requirements.

1. Weight—25 by 40, 500; 52.6 pound basis

(25 by 38, 50).

2. Average bursting strength.—Shall be not less than 15 points.

3. Stock.—Shall be free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

4. Ash.—Shall not exceed 15 per cent.

5. Color, finish, and formation.—Deliveries must

conform to the accepted sample and be suitable for mimeographing.

6. Size—6 by 9, 8 by 103^, 8 by 13 inches, as

specified in proposal.

Method of inspection and tests. United States Government general specifications for paper (F. S. B. No. 394) in effect on date of proposal, shall form part of this specification. See No. 470.3. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

131a, United States Government master specifica- tion for 50 per cent rag mimeograph paper, revised August 8, 1925. Same as for mimeograph paper (F. S. B. No. 130a)

except for type and detail requirements, which are

as follows: Type.

This specification is for the purchase of 50 per

cent rag mimeograph paper, wove, white, weighing

50 pounds per ream 25 by 38 inches, 500 sheets;

flat. This paper is suitable for duplicating work by

mimeograph or other stencil, and sufficiently sized to be written on with ink. Detail requirements.

1. Weight—25 by 40, 500; 52.6 pounds basis (25 by 38, 50).

2. Average bursting strength.—Shall be not less than 16 points.

3. Stock.—Shall be not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder shall be free from unbleached or ground wood pulp.

4. Ash.—Shall not exceed 12 per cent.

5. Sizing.—Shall be sufficiently sized to be writ- ten on with ink.

6. Color, finish, and formation.—Deliveries must

conform to the accepted sample and be suitable for mimeographing.

7. Size—8 by 7, 8 by 10^, or 8 by 13 inches, as

specified in proposal.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for ground-wood mimeograph paper, December 9, 1926. Weight: 25 by 38, 1,000 lbs__ 76

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 14

Color, finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

Mimeograph quality: Deliveries must be equal to the standard sample.

IT. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for chemical wood mimeograph paper, white and colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 15 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 40 56

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 16 22

Color, finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample in finish, formation, and opacity, and match in color the sample furnished with order. Mimeograph quality: Deliveries must be equal to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 30 per cent rag mimeograph paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 30 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 12 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs.. 40 48

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 18 22

Sizing: Shall be sufficiently sized to be written on

with ink. Color, finish, formation, and opacity: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

Mimeograph quality: Must be suitable for mimeographing on both sides of the sheet, and equal

to the standard sample in this respect. 475.75 Music Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

333
475.76 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Sizes.

475.76 Offset Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

476. TISSUE PAPER.

476.0 GENERAL ITEMS.

American Paper Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 46, for tissue paper, March

31, 1926. In accordance with the unanimous action by the

general conference, held in Chicago, 111., October 8, 1925, of manufacturers, distributers, and consumers

of tissue paper, the United States Department of Commerce, through the National Bureau of Standards, recommends that the sizes, weights, and

counts of tissue paper be established as follows: Table 1.

No. 1 and No. 2 sheet tissue

Inches Sizes I 20 b^

30

bizes

j24 by 36 Weight on a 24 by 36, 480-sheet basis = 10 pounds-

(Equivalent on a 25 by 40, 500-sheet basis=12.1

pounds.)

Table 2.Tissue for shoes

Inches \SV2 by 15

11 by 20

12 by 24

13 by 26 Weight on a 24 by 36, 480-sheet basis = 10 pounds.

(Equivalent on a 25 by 40, 500-sheet basis = 12.1 pounds.)

Table 3.

Napkins

Inches Plain tissue 13 by 13

Full crepe 133^ by 133^ Semicrepe 13 by 13 Oversize 18 by 18 Weight on a 24 by 36, 480-sheet basis = 10 pounds.

(Equivalent on a 25 by 40, 500-sheet basis =12.1

pounds.)

Bulk flat napkins shall be packed in units of 1,000. Table 4.—Toilet paper

Inches Sheet toilet 5 by 7

Shall be packed in units of 500 and 1,000. Weight on a 24 by 36, 480-sheet basis = 10 pounds.

(Equivalent on a 25 by 40, 500-sheet basis =12.1

pounds.)

Inches \±Y2 by 5 Roll toilet 43^ by 4^

W/2 by 4^

In rolls of 1,000 and 2,000 sheets. Weight on a 24 by 36, 480-sheet basis = 10 pounds.

(Equivalent on a 25 by 40, 500-sheet basis=12.1

pounds.)

On unbanded toilet paper the label shall be

placed on the carton.

1. Size and count shall be placed on all shipping

containers of all of the above grades.

2. The label "Made in accordance with Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 46 of the

Department of Commerce/ ' is to be used on all of these standards. These recommendations are effective from March

31, 1926, subject to annual revision by the standing

committee of the industry.

476.1 COPYING TISSUE. (See 476.21,

476.2 INDUSTRIAL TISSUES.

476.21 Carbon Paper.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

425, United States Government master specification for lightweight black carbon paper for typewriter

use, August 7, 1926. Same as specification for standard-weight black carbon paper (F. S. B. No. 426) except for type and

detail requirements, which are as follows: Type.

This specification is for the purchase of black carbon paper, light weight, coated one side, for typewriter use; for use in making from 6 to 15 car- bon copies at a time.

Detail requirements.

Stock.—Shall be 100 per cent rag or manila hemp

or jute rope stock, or a mixture of these. Weight uncoated.—20 by 30 inches, 500; shall not

exceed 5 pounds.

Coating.—Shall be black carbon, and shall make

a permanent black record.

Serviceability.—Shall make not less than 10 clean,

clear, legible first carbons. Number of copies.—Shall make not less than 10

clean, clear, legible carbon copies at a time, using

elite type, a No. 16, 50 per cent rag bond first sheet and No. 7 manifold bond copy sheets, against a rubber platen; and not less than 15 similar carbon

copies at a time, using all No. 7 manifold bond paper,

against a brass platen.

Size.—9, by 7, 8 by 10^, 8 by 13, 14 by 17, and

16 by 21 inches, as specified in proposals, or as

specified in order, not exceeding 18 by 24 inches. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No. 426, United States Government master specification for standard-weight black carbon paper for typewriter

use, August 7, 1926. General specifications. All tests not herein specified shall be made in accordance with United States Government general

specification for paper, Federal Specifications Board

specification No. 394, in effect on date of proposal. See No. 470.3. Type.

This specification is for the purchase of black carbon paper, standard weight, coated one side, for typewriter use; for use in making 1 to 5 carbon

copies at a time. Materials and workmanship.

See detail requirements.

General requirements.

Samples.—One sealed package (25 sheets) of 8 by

103^ inch paper, to show general character shall be submitted with bid. 334
PAPER 476.4

Detail requirements.

1. Stock.—Shall be free from ground-wood pulp.

2. Weight uncoated.—20 by 30 inches; 500, shall not exceed 9 pounds.

3. Coating.—Shall be black carbon, and shall make a permanent black record.

4. Serviceability.—Shall make not less than 12

clean, clear, legible first carbons.

5. Number of copies. —Shall make not less than 5

clean, clear, legible carbon copies at a time, using

elite type, a No. 16, 50 per cent rag bond first sheet and No. 9 manifold bond copy sheets, against a rubber platen.

6. Size.—8 by 7, 8 by IQY2 , 8 by 13, 14 by 17, and

16 by 21 inches, as specified in proposals, or as

specified in order not exceeding 18 by 24 inches. Method of inspection and tests.

1. Weight uncoated.—Removal of the carbon

coating, for determination of weight of basic paper

used, shall be effected by means of the " Carson paper

extractor and friction cleanser." (Paper Trade

Journal, March 19, 1925. Copies of article may be

secured from the National Bureau of Standards,

Washington, D. C.) The paper shall be treated in the apparatus for a period of five minutes. After drying the weight of the decarbonized paper shall be determined in the usual way.

2. Serviceability.—Shall be determined on any

standard t}r pewriter having elite type, using a No.

16, 50 per cent rag bond first sheet and a No. 7 or a No. 9 manifold bond copy sheet, and the sample

to be tested by securely fastening a piece approximately 1 inch square of the sample with paper stickers to the back of the first sheet so that the coated

side of the sample will come in contact with the copy sheet in the usual way. After placing the paper in the typewriter, the first sheet shall be fas- tened securely with pins or in other suitable way to

the back of the carriage in such a manner that it remains stationary while the second sheet can be

moved with the platen as the platen rotates in spacing the lines. The same set of letters or phrases

shall then be written on the same portion of the sample fifteen times, line spacing the copy sheet for each writing. The record on the first line of the copy sheet shall be clear and distinct and shall show no tendency to rub or smut. The record on

the twelfth fine of the copy sheet shall be clear and

legible. Preference will be given to carbon papers from which copies show gradual loss of distinctness.

3. Number of copies.—Shall be determined on any

standard typewriter having elite type, against a rubber platen, using single space.

4. For other methods of inspection and tests, see Section I. Packing and marking.

1. Packing.—Shall be in paper folders, 100 sheets

to a folder, each folder containing a sheet of cardboard, 5 folders to a sealed package, unless other- wise specified in order.

2. Marking.—Each package shall be marked to show name, size, and quantity of material, specification or stock number, name of contractor, and

with the following notice:- For making 1 to 5 manifold copies, use the carbon paper covered by this

specification. For making 6 to 15 manifold copies, use lightweight carbon paper, United States Govern- ment master specification No. 425.

Notes. This paper is that heretofore generally known as 7-pound paper. 476.22 Cigarette Paper.

(No nationally recoginezd specifications available.) 476.23 Electrical Insulating Tissue Paper.

(See 492.) 476.24 Pattern Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 476.25 Stereotyping Paper.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for facing stereo tissue, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent rag. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent. Weight: 19 by 24, 1,000 lbs__ 9

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 7

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample and be satisfactory

for the making of stereotype matrices.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for white stereotype molding paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 10 per cent. Weight: 19 by 24, 1,000 lbs_. 120 Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 24 Molding quality: Shall be satisfactory for making

wet stereotype mats.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for red stereotype molding, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 10 per cent. Weight: 19 by 24, 1,000 lbs__ 80

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 14 Molding quality: Shall be satisfactory for making

wet stereotype mats. 476.3 SANITARY TISSUES.

476.31 Napkins.

(See 476.0.) 476.32 Toilet Paper.

(See 476.0.) 476.4 TISSUE WRAPPING PAPER.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 335
476.9 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

476.9 MISCELLANEOUS TISSUE PAPER.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for white tissue paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Weight: 21 by 32, 1,000 lbs__ 18 Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 5 Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

477. WRAPPING PAPER.

(See 476.4.) 477.0 GENERAL ITEMS.

American Paper Industry, Simplified Practice Recommendation No. 42, for paper grocers' bags

October 15, 1925. In accordance with the unanimous action on May 26, 1925, of the general conference of repre- sentatives of manufacturers, distributers, and users

of paper grocers' bags, the United States Department of Commerce, through the National Bureau

of Standards, recommends that capacities, colorse

qualities, and strengths of paper grocers' bags b, established as follows: RECOMMENDED STANDARDS FOR CAPACITY Table 1.

Self-opening grocers'

Size in pounds

Standard

capacity Mini- mum

capacity

Size in poundsStandard

capacity

H-~

Cubic

inches

16. 87 30.84

51. 66 83.78

119. 98

151. 98

191. 80

240. 40

Cubic

inches

16. 17

30. 18

51. 18 83.24

119. 10

151. 21

191. 07

240. 09

8

Cubic

inches

304. 01

350. 17

433. 28

545. 92

593. 60

700. 48

779. 97

y2 10

1 12 2 14 3 16 4 20

5 25 6

Mini- mum

capacity

Cubic

inches

304. 04

350. 01

433. 11

545. 19

593. 05

700. 29

779. 07 Table 2.

Square grocers' bags

Size in pounds

Standard

capacity Mini- mum

capacity

Size in poundsStandard

capacity Mini- mum

capacity X

Cubic

inches 16.41

30. 076

51. 80

83. 50

119. 23

151. 18

191. 61

240. 40

Cubic

inches

16. 21 30.03

51. 17 83.04

119. 08

151. 02

191. 02

240. 04

7

Cubic

inch es 277. 45

304. 76

350. 25

433. 81

545. 42

593. 47

700. 69

779. 23

Cubic

inches

277. 04

304. 02

350. 00

433. 01

545. 01 593.04

700. 05

779. 11

y2

i 10 2 12

3 14 4. __. 16

5 20 6... 25 Table 3.

Flat grocers' bags

Size in pounds

Standard

capacity Mini- mum

capacity

Size in pounds

Standard

capacity Mini- mum

capacity H~

Cubic

inches

16. 41

30. 076 51.80

83. 50

119. 23

151. 18

191. 61

240. 40

Cubic

inches 16.03 30.03

51. 18

83. 04

119. 01

151. 07

191. 02

240. 06

7 -

Cubic

inches

277. 45

304. 76

350. 52

433. 81

545. 42

593. 47

700. 59

779. 23

Cubic

inches

277. 04

304. 10

350. 00

433. 02

545. 01

593. 04

700. 07

779. 11

Vi 8

l... 10. 2 12 3 14 4 16 5 20.. 6 25.

These recommendations are to become effective October 15, 1925, subject to regular annual revision by the standing committee of the industry.

477.1 BOGUS WRAPPING PAPER.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

477.2 MANILA WRAPPING PAPER.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

132a, United States Government master specifi- cation for wood manila wrapping paper, revised August 8, 1925. Types.

This specification is for the purchase of wood

manila wrapping paper weighing 30, 40, 50, and 60 pounds per ream 24 by 36 inches, 500 sheets; flat or

in rolls as specified in proposals. Material and workmanship.

See Detail requirements.

General requirements.

Strength.—Must vary proportionately with the

weight.

Samples.—10 sheets 8 by 10^ inches, to show

color and finish, must be submitted with bid. Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing.

Method of inspection and tests. United States Government general specification

for paper (F. S. B. No. 394) in effect on date of proposal shall form part of this specification. (See No. 470.3.) Packing and marking.

Packing.—Shall be folded and wrapped bundles

(500-sheet reams) or in wrapped rolls, as ordered. Marking.—Each package shall be marked to show

name, size, and quantity of material, specification or stock number, and name of contractor. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

133a, United States Government master specifi- cation for rope manila wrapping paper, revised August 8, 1925. Same as specification for wood manila wrapping

paper (F. S. B. No. 132a) except for types and detail requirements which are as follows: Types.

This specification is for the purchase of rope manila wrapping paper weighing 60, 70, 80, and 140 pounds per ream 24 by 36 inches, 500 sheets; flat or in rolls as specified in proposals.

Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for wood manila paper, December 9, 1926. Weight: 24 by 36, l,000__lbs__ 60 80 100 120

Bursting strength: Average not

less than ___pts__ 12 16 20 24 336
PAPER 478.11

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing, specification for rope manila paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 75 per cent manila and (or) jute pulp; the remainder coniferous chemical

wood pulp.

Weight: 24 by 36, l,000_lbs__ 120 140 160 280

Bursting strength: Average

not less than pts__ 60 70 80 120

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for oiled manila tympan paper, December 9, 1926. Weight: 24 by 36, 1,000 (approximately) lbs__ 172

Bursting strength : Average not less than_ _pts_ _ 33

Oil: Must be evenly distributed and odorless, and

the paper must not be greasy to the touch.

Surface: Must be uniform, even, and free from lumps.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for plate-wiping paper for embossing

presses, December 9, 1926. Weight: 24 by 36, 1,000 lbs__ 100

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts 25

Surface: Deliveries must conform to the standard

sample, be smooth, free from lumps, and satis- factory for plate-wiping purposes. 477.3 NO. 1 KRAFT PAPER.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

177a, United States Government master specifica- tion for kraft wrapping paper, revised August 8, 1925. Same as specification for wood manila wrapping

paper (F. S. B. No. 132a. See 477.2) except for types and detail requirements, which are as follows: Types.

This specification is for the purchase of kraft wrapping paper weighing 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, and

80 pounds per ream, 24 by 36 inches, 500 sheets; flat or in rolls as specified in proposals.

Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for No. 1 kraft paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent sulphate pulp.

Weight: 24 by 36, 1,000 lbs__ 120 160

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 60 80

Folding endurance: Average, each

direction, not less than

double folds-. 1,200 2,000

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for back-lining paper for case-making

machines, December 9, 1926. Weight: 24 by 36, 1,000 lbs__ 180. Bursting strength: Average not less than — pts.. 20

477.4 NO. 2 KRAFT PAPER.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for No. 2 kraft paper, December 9, 1926.

Stock: 100 per cent sulphate pulp. Weight: 24 by 36, 1,000 lbs.. 60 80 100 120 140 160 Bursting strength: Average not less than pts.. 27 36 45 54 63 72 Folding endurance: Average, each direction, not less than

double folds.. 200 300 500 600 800 1,000 Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample. 477.5 SANITARY WRAPPING PAPER.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing, specification for white paraffin paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Weight: 24 by 38, 1,000 lbs__ 32 Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 5

Paraffin: Not less than 20 per cent nor more than

30 per cent and shall be uniformly applied.

477.6 SCREENINGS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

477.7 SULPHITE WRAPPING PAPER.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

178a, United States Governemnt master specifica- tion for sulphite manila wrapping paper, revised August 8, 1925. Same as specification for wood manila wrapping

paper (F. S. B. No. 132a, see 477.2) except for types and detail requirements, which are as follows: Types.

This specification is for the purchase of sulphite

manila wrapping paper weighing 50, 60, 70, and 80 pounds per ream 24 by 36 inches, 500 sheets; flat or in rolls as specified in proposals.

Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing, speci- fication for sulphite manila paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent coniferous chemical wood pulp.

Weight: 24 by 36, 1,000

lbs__ 100 120 140 160

Bursting strength: Average

not less than pts__ 40 48 56 64

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

477.8 WATERPROOF WRAPPING PAPER.

478. WRITING PAPER.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

478.1 COMMERCIAL WRITING PAPER.

478.11 Bond Writing Paper.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No. 319,

United States Government master specification for 100 per cent rag white bond paper, September 16, 1925. Types.

This specification is for the purchase of 100 per cent rag bond paper, white, glazed and unglazed,

337
478.11 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN Vv

r OOD-USING INDUSTRIES

substance Nos. 13, 16, 20, and 24; tub-sized and

air-dried; flat; suitable for most important corre- spondence and permanent records. Material and workmanship.

See Detail requirements below.

General requirements.

Strength.—Shall vary proportionately with the

weight, except as noted. Samples.—10 sheets 8 by 103^ inches, to show

color and finish, shall be submitted with bid. Detail requirements.

Stock.—100 per cent rag. Weight—25 by 40, 500; 34.7-pound basis (No.13)

42.8-pound basis (No. 16) ; 53.5-pound basis (No.20) ; 64.2-pound basis (No. 24). Average bursting strength.—Not less than 30 points

for No. 13; not less than 36 points for No. 16; not

less than 45 points for No. 20; not less than 54 points

for No. 24. Average folding endurance (each direction).—Not

less than 300 double folds for No. 13; not less than

500 double folds for Nos. 16, 20, and 24. Ash.—Not to exceed 2 per cent. Sizing.—Tub-sized with animal glue. Color, finish, and formation.—Deliveries shall con- form to the accepted sample in formation, and match

in color and finish the sample furnished with order. Watermark.—Only the seal of the United States, on a basis of four times on a sheet 16 by 21 inches, once in each quarter.

Size.—6 by 9, 8 by 1(% 8 by 13, and 16 by 21

inches, as specified in proposals.

Method of inspection and tests. For details of methods of inspection and tests, see United States Government general specification for paper (F. S. B. No. 394) which shall form part of this

specification. (See No. 470.3.) Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

320, United States Government master specification

for 50 per cent rag bond paper, white and colored,

September 16, 1925. Same as specification for 100 per cent rag white

bond paper (F. S. B. No. 319) except for types and

detail requirements which are as follows: Types.

This specification is for the purchase of 50 per cent rag bond paper, white, blue, buff, green, pink,

salmon, and yellow, glazed and unglazed, substance

Nos. 13, 16, 20, and 24; tub-sized and air-dried; flat. Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

328, United States Government master specification for sulphite bond paper, white and colored, September 16, 1925. Same as specification for 100 per cent rag white

bond paper (F. S. B. No. 319) except for types and

detail requirements, which are as follows:

Types.

This specification is for the purchase of sulphite

bond paper, white, blue, buff, green, pink, salmon,

and yellow, substance Nos. 16 and 20; flat. Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

329, United States Government master specification

for sulphite writing paper, white and colored,

September 16, 1925. Same as specification for 100 per cent rag white

bond paper (F. S. B. No. 319), except for types and

detail requirements, which are as follows: Types.

This specification is for the purchase of sulphite

writing paper, white, blue, buff, pink, green, salmon,

and yellow, substance Nos. 16 and 20; flat. Detail .requirements.

Stock.—Shall be 100 per cent bleached coniferous

sulphite pulp.

Weight.—25 by 40, 500; 42.8 pound basis (No. 16); 53.5 pound basis (No. 20). Average bursting strength. —Shall be not less than

16 points for No. 16, not less than 20 points for No. 20. Average folding endurance (each direction).—Shall be not less than 20 double folds. Ash.—Shall not exceed 5 per cent.

Color, finish, and formation.—Deliveries shall con- form to the accepted sample in finish and formation,

and match in color the sample furnished with order. Size.—8 by 10H, 8 by 13, or 17 by 22 inches, as

specified in proposals.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for sulphite bond paper, white and

colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent bleached coniferous chemical

wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 3 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 26 32 40 48

Folding endurance: Average, each

direction, not less than

double folds. _ 30 40 40 40

Bursting strength: Average not

less than pts__ 16 20 25 30

Color, finish and formation : Deliveries must conform

to the standard sample in finish and formation

and match in color the sample furnished with order.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 30 per cent rag bond paper, white

and colored, tub sized, air dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 30 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent for white and 3 per

cent for colored. Sizing: Tub sized. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 26 32 40 48

Folding endurance: Average, each

direction, not less than

double folds__ 30 50 50 50

Bursting strength: Average not

less than _ pts_. 19 24 30 36

338
PAPER 478.13

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample in finish and formation and match in color the sample furnished with

order. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag bond paper, white

and colored, tub sized, air dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent for white and 3 per

cent for colored. Sizing: Tub sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 26 32 40 48

Folding endurance : Average, each

direction, not less than

double folds__ 65 100 100 100

Bursting strength: Average, not

less than pts__ 22 28 35 42

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample in finish and formation and match in color the sample furnished with

order. Watermark : Only the seal of the United States on a

basis of four times on a sheet 16 by 21 inches, once

in each quarter. The copy of this design to be

supplied by the Public Printer.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 75 per cent rag white bond paper,

tub-sized, air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock fNot less than 75 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent. Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000

lbs__ 26 32 40 48

Folding endurance: Average

each direction, not less than double folds. _ 130 200 200 200

Bursting strength: Average

not less than pts__ 26 32 40 48

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

Watermark: Only the seal of the United States, on

a basis of four times on a sheet 16 by 21 inches, once in each quarter. The copy of this design to be supplied by the Public Printer.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 100 per cent rag white bond paper,

tub-sized, air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent rag. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent.

Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs_. 32 40 48

Folding endurance: Average, each

direction, not less than

double folds 900 900 900

Bursting strength: Average not

less than pts__ 40 50 60

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- from to the standard sample.

Watermark: Only the seal of the United States, on

a basis of four times on a sheet 16 by 21 inches, once in each quarter. The copy of this design to be supplied by the Public Printer.

TT. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for declaration bond paper, tub-sized,

air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent rag. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent. Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs.. 32 40

Folding endurance: Average, each direction, not less than double folds. _ 900 900

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 40 50

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

Watermark: Must conform with that of the stand- ard sample. Four localized watermarks must ap- pear in each 17 by 22 inch sheet. All sheets shall lay so that the watermark will read in the same

direction. The " dandy roll" used to effect the watermark shall be furnished by the contractor at

his expense and will immediately become the property of the United States, and must be deliv- ered to the Public Printer or his authorized agent

whenever demand is made therefor. The water- mark shall read as follows: U. S. A. U. S. A.

Declaration

of Intention U. S. A. U. S. A. 478.12 Flat Writing Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) 478.13 Ledger Paper.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

321, United States Government master specification for 100 per cent rag ledger paper, white, September

16, 1925. Types.

This specification is for the purchase of 100 per

cent rag ledger paper, white, substance Nos. 24, 28,

32, 36, 40, and 48; tub-sized and air-dried; flat. Material and, workmanship.

See Detail requirements.

General requirements.

Strength.—Shall vary proportionately with the

weight, except as noted. Samples.—10 sheets 8 by 103^ inches, to show

color and finish, shall be submitted with bid. Detail requirements. Similar to those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

322, United States Government master specification for 75 per cent rag ledger paper, white and colored, September 16, 1925. Same as specification for 100 per cent rag ledger paper (F. S. B. No. 321) except for detail requirements, which are as follows: Detail requirements. Similar to those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing.

339
478.13 STANDAEDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

330, United States Government master specification for 100 per cent rag heavy ledger paper, white,

September 16, 1925. Same as specification for 100 per cent rag ledger paper (F. S. B. No. 321) except for types and detail requirements, which are as follows: Types.

This specification is for the purchase of 100 per

cent rag heavy ledger paper, white, single-ply, substance No. 60; tub-sized and air-dried; not watermarked; flat. Detail requirements.

Stock.—Shall be 100 per cent rag. Weight—25 by 40, 500; 160.4 pound basis (No. 60). Average bursting strength.—Shall be not less than

100 points. Ash.—Shall not exceed 2 per cent. Sizing.—Shall be tub-sized with animal glue.

Writing and erasure.—Shall have good writing

and erasive qualities. Color, finish, and formation.—Deliveries shall conform to the accepted sample in finish and formation, and match in color the sample furnished with

order. Size—203^ by 30>2 or 21 by 32^ inches, as

specified in proposals.

Color, finish, and formation.—Deliveries shall con- form to the accepted sample in finish and formation, and match in color the sample furnished with

order. Watermark.—Not watermarked, or watermarked

Government seal or mill brand, as specified in proposals.

Size.—As specified in proposals.

Method of inspection and tests. For details of methods of inspection and test, see United States Government general specifica- tions for paper (F. S. B. No. 394) which shall form

part of this specification. See No. 470.3. Packing and marking.

Packing.—Each ream to be wrapped with manila paper and sealed. Marking.—Each package to be marked to show

name, size, and quantity of material, specification or stock number, and name of contractor.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for sulphite ledger paper, white and

colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent bleached coniferous chemical

wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 3 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 56 64 80 Folding endurance: Average, each di- rection, not less than., double folds. _ 30 30 30

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 35 40 50

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample in finish and formation and match in color the sample furnished with order.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag ledger paper, white

and colored, tub-sized, air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent for white and 3 per

cent for colored.

Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, —

1,000 lbs__ 48 56 64 72 80 88

Folding endurance : Average, each direction, not less than

double folds-. 100 100 100 100 100 100

Bursting strength: Average not less than. _pts_ _ 38 44 50 56 58 60 Writing and erasure: Must have good writing and

erasive qualities.

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample in finish and formation and match in color the sample furnished with

order. Watermark: Only the seal of the United States, on a basis of four times on a sheet 16 by 21 inches, once in each quarter, except substance Nos. 80 and 88. The copy of this design to be supplied

by the Public Printer.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 75 per cent rag ledger paper, white

and colored, tub-sized, air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 75 per cent rag; the remainder free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent for white and 3 per

cent for colored.

Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000

lbs.. 48 56 64 72 80 88

Folding endurance : Average, each direction, not less than

double folds 200 200 200 200 200 200

Bursting strength: Average not less than.pts. 42 49 56 63 65 67

Writing and erasure: Must have good writing and

erasive qualities.

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample in finish and formation and match in color the sample furnished with

order. Watermark: Only the seal of the United States, on a basis of four times on a sheet 16 by 21 inches, once in each quarter, except substance Nos.

80 and 88. The copy of this design to be supplied by the Public Printer. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 100 per cent rag white ledger paper

tub-sized, air-dried (for permanent records), December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent new white or cream rags. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent. 340
PAPER 478.22

Residual chemicals: Must not show presence of in- jurious chemicals.

Sizing: Tub-sized with high-grade animal glue. Starch not to be used. Rosin not to exceed 1.5 per cent.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs.. 48 56 64 72 80 88 Folding endurance: Average each di- rection, not less than.. double folds.. 800 800 800 800 800 800 Bursting strength: Average not less than pts„ 55 64 73 82 88 94 Writing and erasure: Must have good writing and

erasive qualities.

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

Watermark: Only the seal of the United States, on

a basis of four times on a sheet 16 by 21 inches, once in each quarter, except substances Nos. 80 and 88. The copy of this design to be supplied by

the Public Printer. 478.14 Linen Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

478.15 Papeterie Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

478.16 Parchment Deed Paper.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for parchment deed paper, tub-sized,

air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent rag. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent.

Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs_. 64

Folding endurance: Average, each direction, not less than double folds. _ 900

Bursting strength; Average not less than

pts_. 70

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

478.17 Railroad Writing Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

478.18 Wedding Writing Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

478.19 Miscellaneous Commercial Writing

Paper.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for sulphite writing paper, white and

colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent bleached coniferous chemical

wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 5 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 26 32 40 48

Folding endurance : Average, each

direction, not less than

double folds. _ 15 20 20 20

Bursting strength: Average not

less than pts__ 13 16 20 24

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must

conform to the standard sample in finish and for- mation, and match in color the sample furnished with order.

IT. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 100 per cent rag white writing

paper, tub sized, air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent rag. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent. Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs.. 56 Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 48

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

Watermark: Only the seal of the United States, on

a basis of four times on a sheet 16 by 21 inches, once in each quarter. The copy of this design to be supplied by the Public Printer. 478.2 DUPLICATING PAPER.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

478.21 French Folio Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

478.22 Manifold Paper (Includes Stencil

Paper).

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

323, United States Government master specification

for 100 per cent rag manifold paper, white and

colored, September 16, 1925. Types.

This specification is for the purchase of 100 per

cent rag manifold paper, white, blue, buff, green, pink, salmon, and yellow, unglazed; substance

Nos. 7 and 9; tub sized and air dried; flat. Material and workmanship.

See detail requirements, below.

General requirements.

Quality.—Shall be suitable for permanent records.

Strength.—Shall vary proportionately with the

weight.

Samples.—10 sheets 8 by 103^ inches, to show

color and finish, shall be submitted with bid. Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing.

Method of inspection and tests. For details of methods of inspection and test, see United States Government general specifications for paper (F. S. B. No. 394), which shall form part of

this specification. (See 470.3.) Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

331a, United States Government master specifi- cation for 50 per cent rag manifold paper, white and

colored, glazed, revised May 12, 1927. Same as specification for 100 per cent rag manifold paper (F. S. B. No. 323) except for types and

detail requirements, which are as follows: Types.

This specification is for the purchase of 50 per cent manifold paper, white, blue, buff, green, pink, sal- mon, and yellow; substance No. 8; glazed; fiat. Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing.

341
478.22 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

484a, United States Government master specifica- tion for 50 per cent rag manifold paper, white and

colored, unglazed, revised May 12, 1927. Same as specification for 50 per cent rag manifold paper, glazed (F. S. B. No. 331a) except for

finish, weight, and bursting strength, which are as

follows: Finish.—Deliveries shall match in finish the sample furnished with the order. Weight.—25 by 40, 500; 18.7-pound basis (17 by

22, 500; 7, No. 7 substance) 24.1-pound basis (17 by 22, 500; 9, No. 9 substance).

Average bursting strength.—Shall be not less than

11 points for No. 7; not less than 14 points for No. 9. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for sulphite manifold paper, white and

colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent bleached coniferous chemical

wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 3 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs.. 18

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 10

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample in finish and formation and match in color the sample furnished

with order. U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag manifold paper, white and colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent for white and 3 per

cent for colored.

Sizing: Shall be sufficiently sized to be written on

with ink. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 14 18 Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 11 14

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample in finish and formation and match in color the sample furnished with

order.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag white glazed manifold paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash: Not to exceed 3 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 16 Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 12

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 100 per cent rag manifold paper, white and colored, tub-sized, air-dried, December

9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent rag. Ash: Not to exceed 2 per cent for white and 3 per

cent for colored.

Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs.. 14 18

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts._ 14 18

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample in finish and formation and match in color the sample furnished with order. 478.23 Onionskin Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

478.3 INDUSTRIAL PAPER.

478.31 Chart and Map Paper.

Federal Specifications Eoard, Specification No.

129a, United States Government master specifica- tion for chart paper, revised August 8, 1925. Type.

This specification is for the purchase of first-class chart paper, white or cream white, lithograph

finish, weighing 48 pounds per ream, 17 by 22

inches, 500 sheets; carefully sized and of a quality

to withstand frequent handling. Material and workmanship.

See detail requirements.

General requirements.

Samples.—Ten sheets 28 by 32 inches, to show

color and finish, must be submitted with bid. Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing, except folding endurance, which

is 500 double folds. Method of inspection and tests. United States Government general specifications

for paper (F. S. B. No. 394) in effect on date of proposal, shall form part of this specification.

(See 470.3.) Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

324, United States Government master specification

for lithograph-finish map paper, September 16,1925.

Types.

This specification is for the purchase of lithographfinish map paper for color printing, substance Nos.

16 and 20; flat. General requirements.

Strength.—Shall vary proportionately with the

weight.

Samples.—Ten sheets 8 by 10^ inches, to show

color, finish, formation, and Cleanliness, shall be

submitted with bid. Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

325, United States Government master specification for 50 per cent rag lithograph-finish map paper, September 16, 1925. Same as specification for lithograph finish map

paper (F. S. B. No. 324) except for types and detail requirements, which are as follows: 342
PAPBE 478.33

Types.

This specification is for the purchase of 50 per

cent rag lithograph-finish map paper for color

printing, substance Nos. 20, 24, and 28, tub-sized and air-dried; flat. Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

326, United States Government master specification

for 75 per cent rag lithograph-finish map paper, September 16, 1925. Same as specification for lithograph-finish map

paper (T. S. B. No. 324) except for types and detail requirements, which are as follows: Types.

This specification is for the purchase of 75 per

cent rag lithograph-finish map paper for color

printing, substance Nos. 16, 20, 24, and 28, tubsized and air-dried; flat. Detail requirements.

Same as those of the U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing.

Method of inspection and tests. All tests shall be made in accordance with United

States Government general specifications for paper

(F. S. B. No. 394) in effect on date of proposal, which

shall form part of this specification. (See 470.3.) U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for lithograph-finish map paper, December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 3 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 32 40

Folding endurance: Average, each direction, not less than double folds. _ 30 30

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 20 25

Color, finish, formation, and cleanliness: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 50 per cent rag lithograph-finish

map paper, tub-sized, air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 50 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 3 per cent.

Sizing: Tub-sized. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 40 48 56

Folding endurance: Average, each

direction, not less than

double folds-. 60 60 60

Bursting strength: Average not less than pts__ 30 36 42

Color, finish, formation, and cleanliness: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 75 per cent rag lithograph-finish

map paper, tub-sized, air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: Not less than 75 per cent rag; the remainder

free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Ash : Not to exceed 3 per cent. Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue.

Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000

lbs__ 32 40 48 56

Folding endurance : Average,

each direction, not less than double folds. _ 125 150 150 150

Bursting strength: Average

not less than pts__ 28 35 42 49

Color, finish, formation, and cleanliness: Deliveries must conform to the standard sample.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for 100 per cent rag white chart paper, lithograph finish, tub-sized, air-dried, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent rag. Ash: Not to exceed 3 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs_- 96

Folding endurance: Average, each direction, not less than double folds. _ 2, 000

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 75

Thickness: Approximately 0.007 inch.

Sizing: Tub-sized with animal glue. Erasure : To be of a quality to withstand redrawing

in ink where erasures are made.

Color and finish: Deliveries must conform to the sample submitted with order, and be suitable for printing nautical charts from engraved copper,

stone, aluminum, and zinc plates.

Formation : Shall be close, even, and free from wet- end crush marks.

Sorting: Shall be closely sorted to insure absence of specks, size spots, lumps, or particles that may

injure the plates.

478.32 Drawing Paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

478.33 Safety Writing Paper.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for blue U S M O safety writing paper,

safety or sensitive design, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent bleached coniferous chemical

wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 5 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs__ 32

Folding endurance: Average, each direction, not less than double folds. _ 20

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 20

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample. The surface of the paper must contain a dye or other substance very

sensitive to the action of chemical reagents such

as are used for removing ink, and should clearly

show any attempt at mechanical erasure. The

dyed or impregnated fibers should form a pattern

only on the surface of the paper. The safety

properties of the paper must be equal to those of the standard sample.

Watermark: Must bear such design as the Public

Printer may prescribe. The device used to effect the watermark shall be furnished by the contractor 52688°—27 23 343
478.33 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

at his expense, and will immediately become the property of the United States, and must be deliv- ered to the Public Printer or his authorized agent

whenever demand is made therefor. This paper must also show such safety device as may be

prescribed by the Public Printer. These safety devices shall not be used in the manufacture of any paper but that ordered by the Government.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for USMO writing paper, white and

blue, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent bleached coniferous chemical

wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 5 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs_. 32

Folding endurance: Average, each direction, not less than double folds. _ 20 Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 20

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must

conform to standard sample in finish and formation, and match in color the sample furnished with order. Watermark: Must bear the letters USMO or such

design as the Public Printer may prescribe. The

device used to effect the watermark shall be

furnished by the contractor, at his expense, and

will immediately become the property of the United States, and must be delivered to the

Public Printer or his authorized agent whenever

demand is made therefor. This paper must also show such safety device as may be prescribed by

the Public Printer. These safety devices shall not be used in the manufacture of any paper but that ordered by the Government.

U. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for safety writing paper, colored, December 9, 1926. Stock: 100 per cent bleached coniferous chemical

wood pulp. Ash: Not to exceed 5 per cent. Weight: 17 by 22, 1,000 lbs.. 40

Bursting strength: Average not less than

pts__ 24

Color, finish, and formation: Deliveries must con- form to the standard sample in finish and formation, and match in color the sample furnished with order. Safety device: The surface of the paper must contain a dye or other substance very sensitive to the

action of chemical reagents such as are used for removing ink, and should clearly show any attempt

at mechanical erasure. The dyed or impregnated

fibers should form a pattern only on the surface of the paper. The safety properties of the paper must be equal to those of the standard sample.

Bidder must submit sample of safety design

which he proposes to furnish and deliveries must

conform to the accepted sample.

478.34 Sensitizing Paper.

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

179, United States Government master specification for No. 1 grade blue print paper (sensitized

and unsensitized), June 30, 1924. Types.

This specification is for the purchase of No. 1 grade blue print paper, sensitized and unsensitized,

thin, medium, and thick; sensitized, in 10 or 50 yard

rolls and weights as specified in proposals; unsensitized, rolls and weights as specified in proposals. See detail requirements.

Material and workmanship.

See Detail requirements.

General requirements.

Quality.—Must be suitable for permanent records which are subject to frequent handling.

Samples.—3-yard 36-inch roll of each weight, to show printing quality, must be submitted with bid. The name of the manufacturer must be stated in

bid. Detail requirements.

Weight: Basis 25 by 40, 500 Thin Med. Thick pounds. _ 45 65 75

Stock: Shall be 100 per cent rag. Folding endurance (each di- rection) : Shall be not less than. double folds. . 300 400 400

Wet tensile strength:

Machine direction, shall be not less than grams.. 500 700 700

Across machine direction, shall be not less than grams. _ 300 400 400

Coating and finish. —Unsensitized paper shall be

suitably sized and finished to take coating solution evenly. Sensitized paper shall be evenly and

satisfactorily coated. There must be no surface

disintegration or linting in the process of printing. Failure to comply with any of these provisions will be considered cause for rejection.

Width.—30, 36, and 42 inches, as specified in proposals.

Packing and marking.

Packing.—Each roll must be wound on a stiff core, be securely wrapped to protect it from light and

moisture, and be well packed for shipment.

Marking.—Each package must be marked to show grade, weight, width, quantity of material, and

speed of printing. Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

180, United States Government master specification

for No. 2 grade blue print paper (sensitized and unsensitized), June 30, 1924. Same as specification for No. 1 grade blue print paper (F. S. B. No. 179) except for detail require- ments for folding endurance which are as follows:

Detail requirements.

Weight: Basis 25 by 40, 500 Thin Med. Thick pounds 45 65 75 Folding endurance (each direction) : Shall be not less than

double folds __ 200 300 300

Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

181, United States Government master specification

344
PAPEE 479.2

for No. 3 grade blue print paper (sensitized and unsensitized), June 30, 1924. Same as specification for No. 1 grade blue print paper (F. S. B. No. 179) except for detail require- ments for weight, stock, and folding endurance which

are as follows:

Detail requirements. Med Thick Weight: Basis 25 by 40, 500_pounds__ 65 75

Stock: Shall be not less than 50 per

cent rag; remainder shall be free from unbleached or ground-wood

pulp.

Folding endurance (each direction)

ShaU not be less than_double folds. _ 100 100 Federal Specifications Board, Specification No.

182a, United States Government master specifica- tion for brown process paper (sensitized and un- | sensitized), revised September 25, 1926. General specification.

United States Government general specification for paper (F. S. B. No. 394) in effect on date of issuance of proposal, shall form part of this specification. (See 470.3.) Types.

This specification is for the purchase of brown

process paper, sensitized and unsensitized, thin and

medium; sensitized, in 10 or 50 yard rolls and

weights as specified in proposal; unsensitized, rolls and weights as specified in proposal.

Material. See Detail requirements.

General requirements.

Quality.—Shall be suitable for permanent records which are subjected to frequent handling.

Samples.—6-yard 36-inch roll of each weight, to show printing quality, shall be submitted with bid. The name of the manufacturer shall be stated in

bid. Detail requirements.

Weight: Basis 25 by 40, 500 Thin Med. pounds. _ 45 65 Thickness: shall not exceed

inch.. 0. 0035 0. 0045

Stock: Shall be 100 per cent rag. Folding endurance (each direction): Shall be not less than

double folds-. 300 400

Wet tensile strength

Machine direction: Shall be

not less than grams._ 600 800

Across machine direction

Shall not be less than

grams__ 400 500

Coating and finish.—Unsensitized paper shall be

suitabhT sized and finished to take coating solution evenly. Sensitized paper shall be evenly and satis- factorily coated and yield uniformly developed negative free from defects. There shall be no surface

disintegration or linting in the process of printing. Failure to comply with any of these provisions shall be considered cause for rejection.

Width.—30, 36, 42, and 54 inches, as specified in proposal.

Method of inspection and tests. Sensitized paper shall be exposed, developed, and

dried before testing.

Packing and marking.

Packing.—Unsensitized paper shall be wound on

a stiff core; sensitized paper shall be wound with or without core, as specified in order. All paper shall be securely wrapped to protect it from light and

moisture, and be well packed for shipment.

Marking.—Each package shall be marked to show grade, weight, width, quantity of material,

and speed of printing.

478.35 Tracing paper.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

479. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIFICATIONS

FOR PAPER.

479.1 TRANSFER PAPER.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

479.2 GUMMED PAPER.

TJ. S. Congress, Joint Committee on Printing,

specification for gummed paper, white and colored,

December 9, 1926. Stock: Free from unbleached or ground-wood pulp.

Weight (ungummed): 17 by 22, 1,000

lbs.. 40

Curl : Paper must lie fiat under normal conditions.

Color, finish, and adhesive quality : Deliveries must

conform to the standard sample in finish and

adhesive quality and match in color the sample

furnished with order.

345
480-489 BOOKS AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER

481. BOOKS AND PAMPHLETS. 483. LITHOGRAPHIC PRINTS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.) (No nationally recognized specifications available.)

482. MAPS, CHARTS, AND MUSIC. 484. BOOKLETS.

(See No. 478.31.) (No nationally recognized specifications available.)

346
490-499 MISCELLANEOUS PAPER PRODUCTS

491. CONTAINERS. (See also 402. 42 and

421.)

American Railway Association, freight Container Bureau, specifications for shipping containers, current 1927. (Information concerning construction details of wood and fiber containers is given in the following

circulars and bulletins:) Circular No. 1, porch rocking chairs; No. 3, wooden boxes for boots and shoes; No. 4, woodeD

boxes for eggs (in the shell) and inside packing; No.

6, solid fiber and plyboard boxes for boots and shoes; No. 7, crates for refrigerators; No. 8, wooden chairs; No. 9, cans for eggs (shelled and frozen) and outside

containers; No. 10, crates for furniture and lamps

(reed and fiber); No. 11, corrugated strawboard

boxes for boots and shoes; No. 12, crates for upholstered furniture; No. 14, slack barrels and slack casks and inside packing for pottery; No. 15, crates

for gas and electric domestic cook stoves (steel or

steel and cast-iron construction, not including

stoves constructed principally of cast-iron) and

parts thereof when separate crating is required; No.

17, crates for oil cook stoves (steel or steel and

cast-iron construction) and parts thereof when separate crating is required; No. 18, four basket crates (with tapered ends) for fresh fruits and vegetables; No. 19, six-basket crates for fresh fruits and vegetables; No. 20, crates for cast-iron household cook

stoves and ranges.

Bulletin No. 2, on wooden crates; No. 5, crates for parlor heaters (circulating type) ; No. 6, general in- formation on crating; No. 7, packing and crating oak

heaters; No. 8, crates for warm-air furnaces. Bureau of Explosives, specifications for shipping

containers, current 1927. (This bureau functions as an agency for cooperation between the Interstate Commerce Commission

and the American Railway Association so far as concerns the standardization of containers for explosives and other dangerous articles. Specifications of such containers are published by the bureau

in accordance with the regulations of the commission. Much information concerning construction

details of fiber and wood containers, intended for the transportation of dangerous articles by freight

and express and as baggage, is given in the follow- ing I. C. C. specifications:) No. 1, boxed carboys; No. 2, metal cans, glass or earthenware containers, wooden or metal pails or

kits, etc., and boxes for outside containers of same; No. 6, boxes (wooden, fiber, etc.); Nos. 9 and 10, wooden barrels and kegs (tight); No. 11, wooden

barrels and kegs (slack) ; Nos. 12, 12A, 14, 15, and

16, wooden boxes; No. 17, wooden boxes (lined); No. 18, metal cans and wooden boxes as outside containers for same; No. 19, wooden boxes; No. 21,

fiber drums; No. 22, wooden veneer drums; No. 24,

fiber cases; No. 29, mailing tubes; No. 31, jugs in tubs; No. 34, turned wooden drums; No. 35, wooden barrels with removable heads; No. 36, Wooden boxes with metal lining; No. 37, "peak

top" wooden boxes; No. 37A, "ridge top" wire- bound wooden boxes; No. 40, wooden boxes; No.

41, double-wall corrugated strawboard boxes; No.

108, lined, coated, or treated wooden-stave metal- hooped tanks for mounting on or to form part of a

car; No. 108A, metal jacketed, coated, wooden

stave metal hooped tanks for mounting on or to form part of a car. Consolidated (Freight) Classification Committee,

specifications for wood and fiber containers, current

1927. (Information concerning safety requirements for

barrels, casks, hogsheads, kegs, tierces; fiber board,

pulpboard or double-faced corrugated strawboard

and wood boxes and other containers, is given in "Consolidated Freight Classification" issued by this committee.)

National Paper Box Manufacturers' Association,

terminology for the set-up paper box industry.

(This association has adopted and promulgated

terminology of box construction, materials, machines, etc.; terminology of processes, and methods

of measuring boxes of various types.)

Paperboard Industries Association, corrugated

and solid fiber-board products, 1924.

(In the Handbook of the National Container

Association—superseded by the Paperboard Industries Association—descriptions and illustrations of various types of fiber containers in most general use

are given, together with freight container specifica- tions of the Consolidated Freight Classification; ex- press container specifications of the Official Express

Classification; shipping container specifications of the

Interstate Commerce Commission and parcel-post

regulations of the U. S. Post Office Department.)

United States Department of Commerce, Advisory

Board on Domestic Packing, recommended specifi- cations for containers, 1927. (Information concerning the construction of various types of wood and fiber containers is given

in a series of bulletins issued by the Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce, upon recom- mendation of the Advisory Board of the United

States Department of Commerce on Domestic

Packing, as follows:) No. 3, paper-wrapped packages for parcel-post

and express shipment; No. 10, fiber containers; No. 11, cleated plywood boxes; No. 12, wire-bound

boxes; No. 13, cooperage and steel barrels; No. 14, wooden boxes; No. 15, nailed wooden crates; No. 16, baling.

492. ELECTRICAL INSULATING PAPER.

National Electrical Manufacturers Association,

Supply Division, standard laminated phenolic con- densation plate, paper base material. (This standard covers allowable variations in the

thickness of laminated phenolic condensation plate

made of paper as a base material.)

493. PAPER PULLEYS.

(No nationally recognized specifications available.)

347
TECHNICAL SOCIETIES, TRADE ASSOCIATIONS, AND OTHER ORGANIZATIONS ISSUING STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN THE WOOD-USING INDUSTRIES

There are given below the names and addresses

of organizations, the standards and specifications

of which are reproduced herein either in full or in substance by means of abstracts and cross references. American Association of State Highway Officials, W. C. Markham, executive secretary, 638-639

Munsey Building, Washington, D. C. American Electric Railway Engineering Association,

J. W. Welsh, executive secretary, 292 Madison

Avenue, New York, N. Y. American Engineering Standards Committee, P. G. Agnew, secretary, 29 West Thirty-ninth Street, New York, N. Y. American Furniture Industry, National Bureau of Standards, division of simplified practice, Washington, D. C. American Hardwood Lumber Industry, Central Committee on Lumber Standards, Arthur T. Upson, executive secretary, Transportation Building, Washington, D. C. American Lumber Industry, National Bureau of Standards, division of simplified practice, Washington, D. C. American Mining Congress, J. F. Callbreath, secre- tary, Munsey Building, Washington, D. C. American Paper Industry, National Bureau of Standards, division of simplified practice, Washington, D. C. American Railway Association, Freight Container

Bureau, Edward Dahill, chief engineer, 30 Vesey

Street, New York, N. Y. American Railway Association, mechanical division, V. R. Hawthorne, secretary, 431 South Dearborn

Street, Chicago, 111. American Railway Association, signal section, H. S. Balliet, secretary, 30 Vesey Street, New York, N. Y. American Railway Association, telegraph and tele- phone section, W. A. Fairbanks, secretary, 30

Vesey Street, New York, N. Y. American Railway Engineering Association, E. H.

Fritch, secretary, 431 South Dearborn Street, Chicago, 111. American Society for Municipal Improvements,

C. W. S. Sammelman, secretary, 315 Commercial

Building, St. Louis, Mo.

- American Society of Safety Engineers, engineering

division, national safety council, W. H. Cameron,

managing director, 108 East Ohio Street, Chicago,

111. American Society for Testing Materials, C. L. Warwick, secretary, 1315 Spruce Street, -Phila- delphia, Pa. American Veneer and Plywood Industry, National Bureau of Standards, division of simplified practice, Washington, D. C.

American Wood-Preservers' Association, E. J. Stocking, secretary, 111 West Washington Street, Chicago, 111. Arkansas Soft Pine Bureau, B. Greaves, assistant

secretary, Boyle Building, Little Rock, Ark. Ash Handle Association, W. H. Bryant, secretary, Bryant Manufacturing Co., Wapakoneta, Ohio. Associated Cooperage Industries of America, C. G.

Hirt, secretary and manager, B-20 Railway Exchange Building, St. Louis, Mo.

Bureau of Explosives, Col. B. W. Dunn, chief in- spector, 30 Vesey Street, New York, N. Y.

California Redwood Association, R. F. Hammatt,

secretary-manager, 24 California Street, San

Francisco, Calif. California White and Sugar Pine Manufacturers

Association, C. Stowell Smith, secretary-manager,

600 Call Building, San Francisco, Calif. Central Committee on Lumber Standards, Arthur

T. Upson, executive secretary, Transportation

Building, Washington, D. C. Consolidated Classification Committee (freight), R. C. Fyfe, chairman, 516 West Jackson Boulevard, Chicago, 111. Federal Specifications Board, N. F. Harriman,

secretary, National Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C. Forest Products Laboratory, United States Forest

Service, C. P. Winslow, director, Madison, Wis. Hardwood Interior Trim Manufacturers Association, William R. Friedel, secretary, 63 South

Third Street, Memphis, Tenn. Hardwood Manufacturers Institute, J. H. Townsend, executive vice president, Bank of Commerce Building, Memphis, Tenn. Hickory Handle Association, Guy E. Basye, secre- tary-treasurer, care of W. E. Bruner & Sons, Heber Springs, Ark. Maple Flooring Manufacturing Association, E. C.

Singler, secretary, 332 South Michigan Avenue,

Chicago, 111. National Association of Farm Equipment Manufacturers, H. J. Sameit, secretary, 608 South

Dearborn Street, Chicago, 111. National Association of Railroad Tie Producers,

E. A. Morse, secretary, 1244 Syndicate Trust

Building, St. Louis, Mo.

National Association of Waste Material Dealers,

C. M. Haskins, secretary, Times Building, New

York, N. Y. National Association of Wooden Box Manufacturers, Paul L. Grady, secretary-treasurer, 844

Rush Street, Chicago, HI. National Cigar Box Manufacturers Association,

Hobart B. Hankins, secretary-treasurer, 236 Chestnut Street, Philadelphia, Pa. 348
TECHNICAL SOCIETIES, TEADE ASSOCIATIONS, ETC.

National Committee on Wood Utilization, Axel H. Oxholm, director, United States Department of Commerce Building, Washington, D. C. National Conference on Weights and Measures,

F. S. Holbrook, secretary, National Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association,

supply division, A. E. Waller, managing director,

420 Lexington Avenue, New York, N. Y. National Hardwood Lumber Association, Frank

F. Fish, secretary-treasurer, 2008 Straus Building,

Chicago, HI. National Lumber Manufacturers' Association, Wil- son Compton, secretary and manager, Transportation Building, Washington, D. C. National Paper Box Manufacturers Association,

Frank S. Records, executive secretary and treasurer, 802 Liberty Trust Building, Philadelphia, Pa. North Carolina Pine Association (Inc.), J. M.

Gibbs, secretary-treasurer, 1217 National Bank

of Commerce Building, Norfolk, Va. Northeastern Millwork Interests, National Bureau

of Standards, division of simplified practice,

Washington, D. C. Northern Hemlock and Hardwood Manufacturers

Association, O. T. Swan, secretary-manager,

Oshkosh, Wis. Northern Pine Manufacturers Association, W. A.

Ellinger, secretary, 1103 Lumber Exchange,

Minneapolis, Minn.

Northern White Cedar Association, N. E. Boucher,

secretary, 702 Lumber Exchange, Minneapolis,

Minn.

Northern White Cedar Shingle Manufacturers

Association, O. T. Swan, secretary, Oshkosh,

Wis. Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association of the United States, W. L. Claffey, secretary, 155 North

Clark Street, Chicago, 111. Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau, F. W. Alexander, secretary-manager, 5554 Stuart Building,

Seattle, Wash.

Paperboard Industries Association, G. R. Browder,

general manager, 608 South Dearborn Street, Chicago, HI. Paperboard Industry, National Bureau of Standards, division of simplified practice, Washington,

D. C. Red Cedar Lumber Manufacturers Association, J. R. Blunt, secretary-manager, 4449 Stuart Building, Seattle, Wash.

Society of Automotive Engineers, C. F. Clarkson,

secretary and general manager, 29 West Thirtyninth Street, New York, N. Y. Southeastern Forest Products Association, C. H.

Lee, auditor, Jacksonville, Fla. Southern Cypress Manufacturing Association, J. R.

Black, secretary manager, Barnett National Bank

Building, Jacksonville, Fla. Southern Pine Association, H. C. Berckes, secretary

and manager, New Orleans, La. Southern Sash, Door, and Millwork Manufacturers'

Association, C. B. Harman, secretary, 1621 Candler Building, Atlanta, Ga.

Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry, W. G. MacNaughton, secretary-treasurer, 18 East Forty-first Street, New York, N. Y. United States Congress, Joint Committee on Printing, Washington, D. C. United States Department of Agriculture, Bureau

of Public Roads, Washington, D. C. United States Department of Agriculture, Forest

Service, Washington, D. C. United States Department of Commerce, Advisory

Board on Domestic Packing, Washington, D. C. United States Department of Commerce, Building

Code Committee, Washington, D. C. United States Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards, division of building and

housing, Washington, D. C. United States Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards, division of simplified practice, Washington, D. C. United States Department of Commerce, Steamboat Inspection Service, Washington, D. C. Washington and Oregon Shingle Association, J. R.

Blunt, secretary-manager, 4449 White-HenryStuart Building, Seattle, Wash.

West Coast Lumber Trade Extension Bureau, C. J. Hogue, acting manager, 562 White-Henry-Stuart

Building, Seattle, Wash.

West Coast Lumbermen's Association, Robert B.

Allen, secretary, 562 White-Henry-Stuart Building, Seattle, Wash.

Western Pine Manufacturers Association, A. W.

Cooper, secretary-manager, 510 Yeon Building,

Portland, Oreg. Western Red Cedar Association, F. S. Fulweiler,

secretary, Peyton Building, Spokane, Wash.

White Pine Association of the Tonawandas, Henry

Adema, secretary, North Tonawanda, New York,

Wholesale Sash and Door Association, N. I. Godfrey, secretary, 28 Jackson Boulevard, Chicago, 111.

349